MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI

Ph. D Course Work Papers

Biotechnology
(with effect from the academic year 2017-18 onwards)

Exa m
hrs/
Course Name of the course Credit wee k

Advanced Research Methodology

CORE I 4 4

CORE II Advanced Molecular Biology 4 4

CORE III Advanced Bioinformatics 4 4

CORE IV Natural Products 4 4

Advances in Microbial 4 4
CORE-V
Biotechnology
CORE-VI Molecular Toxicology 4 4

CORE-VII Tissue Culture 4 4

Objectives of the Program

 To equip the scholars with a better understanding in specific area of research

 To enrich the researchers in proper usage of techniques in Biotechnology
 To enlighten the scholars to critically think and perform research and exercising them to
write high quality manuscripts and thesis

Page 1 of 16
Choice of Course Work

1. Candidates with PG qualification should obtain 16 credits as per UGC Regulations in the
following options:
4 Course works of 4 credits each for a total of 16 credits (or)
3 Course works of 4 credits each & 1 mini project of 4 credits for a total of 8 credits
2. Candidates with M.Phil. Qualification should earn 8 credits as per UGC regulations in the
following options
2 Course works of 4 credits each for a total of 8 credits (or)
1 Course work of 4 credits & 1 mini project of 4 credits for a total of 8 credits

Mini Project

As per University Norms

Page 2 of 16
 Advanced Research Methodology

L T P C
Preamble:
4 0 0 4
To equip the students with the updated methodologies, techniques and instruments.

Outcome:

To obtain a thorough knowledge regarding the reagent preparations, experimental

protocols and instruments.

Unit: I: Preparation of Solutions

Types of Solutions - Standard Solutions, Stock Solution, Satuarated Solution, Solution of

Acids, Expression of Concentration - Molarity (M), Molality (m), Preparation of one Molar (1M)
Solutions, Normality (N), Mass Percent % (w/w), Percentage by Volume or % (v/v),
Volume/Weight (V/W), Parts per Million (ppm), Parts per Billion (ppb), pH; Buffers and their
preparation. (14L)

Unit: II: Microscopy & Microtechnique

Microscopy - Principle, Working Mechanism and applications of Light, Phase Contrast,

Fluorescent, Darkfield, SEM, TEM and STEM. Preparation of Whole mount and sections,
staining, mounting and preparation of permanent slides; Cyto and Histochemical techniques.
(11L)

Unit: III: Quantitative & Molecular Techniques

Quantification of carbohydrate, protein, lipid, fatty acids and aminoacids (Proximate

composition), Estimation of hydrolytic and detoxication enzymes. Molecular Techniques -
Principle, mechanism and application of SDS, PAGE, AGE, PCR, RT-PCR; Basic principle and
applications of chromatography, UV spectrophotometer. (12L)

Unit: IV: Biostatistics

Parametric - Student T test, F Test, Z -Test, Correlation, Regression and Co-efficient,

ANOVA (One-way, Two-way), MANova, Ancova, Non-parametric - Chi-square, Wilcoxon
Signes Rank Test, Mann-Whitney Test, Kolmogorov-Snirnow Tests, SPSS, Sigma Plot and
MiniTab or Biological data analysis. (13L)

Unit: V: Manuscript, Thesis and Project Writing

Research Processing, Writing of Report, Research paper and Review Articles, Project,
Proof Correction - symbols, MS word review option and other tools; Palgiarism Checking,
Impact Factor, h index, citation index, Funding agencies - DST, DBT, CSIR, ICMR, ICAR,
Page 3 of 16
MoEF, MoEs. (10L)

(Total: 60L)

References:

1. Rodney F. Boyer, 2012. Biochemistry laboratory: Modern Theory & Techniques, Second
Edition, Prentice Hall.
2. Rajan Katoch, 2011. Analytical Techniques in Biochemistry & Molecular Biology,
Springer, New York.

Page 4 of 16
 Advanced Molecular Biology

L T P C
4 0 0 4
Objectives of the paper: The course is to teach the students the following areas: Isolation and
characterization of DNA, RNA and protein molecules.

Outcome of the paper: The students will be trained in the area of the characterization of DNA,
RNA and protein molecules. The knowledge will be helpful to understand and also solve the
molecular level problem in our local community.

Unit 1 (Biomolecules): Isolation of DNA, RNA molecules using Tri- reagent, preparation of
protein lysate using different buffer constitutions and the functions of the reagents in the buffers.
Purity check of DNA and RNA molecules. Quantification & storage of DNA, RNA and protein
molecules.

Unit 2 (PCR): Working concentration & storage of dNTPs & primers. Length of primers.
Designing primers for the given DNA fragment for analytical PCR. Designing primer for
amplification of DNA fragments for protein over expression purpose. Agarose gel
electrophoresis, Reason for the followings: 1. Smear in the PCR amplified product 2. More than
one band; 3. Primer dimer, 4. DNA in the well, 5. No band and band in the unexpected size, 6.
Primer degradation etc. storage of PCR products. Restriction analysis, cloning, and sequencing
of PCR products. Removal of template DNA by Dpn-1. Differences between Taq DNA
polymerase, Pfu DNA polymerases and the differences in their PCR products. Gradient PCR and
q-PCR

Unit 3 (Proteomics): SDS-PAGE, MALDI-TOF, MS-MS for identification of protein,

Immunoblot, primary antibodies, secondary antibodies, fluorescent dyes in different wave length,
Horse radish peroxidase and alkaline phosphatase conjugated secondary antibodies. Protein
markers and prestained markers.

Unit 4 (Sequencing): Types of DNA sequencing. Next Generation DNA sequencing. Whole
exon sequencing, Transcriptome analysis, comparison of cytochrome-c oxidase & 16S RNA
molecule and identification of organisms. Finding promoter, intron, exon, ORF, SNPs, mutations
and insertion and deletion in a given sequence.

Unit 5 (Manipulations of gene expression): Anti-sense technique, siRNA, micro RNA, pseudo
genes, TALEN nuclease and CRISPR Cas9. Difference between the above techniques.
References:

1. Molecular cell biology 7th edition by Harvey Lodish.

Page 5 of 16
2. Principles of gene manipulation and genomics 7th edition by S.B. Primrose.
3. Molecular biology of the cell 5th edition by Bruce Alberts.
4. From Genes to Genomes: Concepts and Applications of DNA Technology 3rd edition by
Jeremy W Dale and Malcolm von Schantz.

Page 6 of 16
 Advanced Bioinformatics

L T P C
4 0 0 4
Objectives of the paper: The course is to teach the students the genetic relationship with
organisms and the structural aspects of biomolecules.

Outcome of the paper: The students will be trained in the area of the molecular evolution and
molecular depth of drugs and their applications.

Unit 1 (Comparison of Biomolecules): Basic shell programming & python programming.

Different format of DNA, RNA, and protein molecules, Pairwise and multiple aligment tools,
BLAST tool and their applications. Identification of new species, SNPs and mutations.

Unit 2 (Genome): Human, mouse, Drosophila and Arabidopsis genome projects in NCBI, 1000
human genome project, Flybase, and TAIR.

Unit 3 (NGS analysis and Annotation): Next Generation sequencing, NGS data analysis,
Assembly: reference based denovo and related tools. Functional annotation and comparison.
Differential gene expression & transcriptome analysis

Unit 4 (RNA molecules): structure of RNA, prediction of coding and noncoding RNA & related
tools, types of noncoding RNA molecules. RNA editing, guide RNA, designing of siRNA,

Unit 5 (Molecular docking): Analysis of protein sequences, 3D structure of proteins, and

structure of ligand in pdb format. Binding efficiency, structure based function predication, uses
of different docking tools, Ramachandran plot. Computer aided drug designing (CADD).

References:

1. Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis 2nd edition by David W Mount.

2. A Primer of Genome Science 3rd edition by Greg Gibson and Spencer V. Muse.

3. Essential bioinformatics by Jin Xiong.

4. Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties 2nd edition by Thomas E. Creighton.

5. Molecular Biology of the Gene 7th edition by James D Watson.

Page 7 of 16
 Natural Products

L T P C
4 0 0 4
Objectives of the paper: The course is to teach the students the knowledge about natural
resources and methods of extraction of valuable products

Outcome of the paper: The students will be trained in the area of understanding & utilization of
natural products.

UNIT 1 Bioresources: Biomedical potential of marine and terrestrial natural products –

Isolation techniques, structural elucidation techniques and mode of action. Application in various
field of biology of Secondary Metabolites isolated from both marine and terrestrial natural
products

UNIT 2 Marine resources: Important products isolated from marine organisms and their uses –
Agarose, Agar, Alginates, Carrageenans, chitin, chitosons and glucosanins, marine flavourants,
Lectins, heparin and carotene. Single cell Protein. Packing and storage.

UNIT 3 Biofuel: Sources of biomass- Ethanol from biomass, Methane from biomass, Hydrogen
from biomass.

UNIT 4 Phytochemicals: carbohydrates and derived products - drugs containing glycosides,

tannins, lipids (fixed oils, fats and waxes), volatile oils and terpenoids, enzymes and proteins,
alkaloids. Biological testing of herbal drugs - Preliminary phytochemical screening for plant
products - Qualitative chemical tests - Chromatography (TLC and HPLC).

UNIT 5: Pharmaceutically important products from marine and terrestrial organisms

pharmaceutical surfactants, antimicrobial compounds, hormone like materials, vitamins,
immunomodulators, anticancer and cytotoxic compounds. NMR, FTIR, Single crystal
preparation, X-ray diffraction, 3D structure of compounds.

REFERENCES:

1. Marine natural products: chemical and biological perspectives Paul J. Scheuer Academic
Press, 392 pages

2. Bioactive Marine Natural Products Bhakuni, Dewan S., Rawat, D.S. 2005, XV, 400 p.

3. Marine natural products Hiromasa Kiyota, K. Fujiwara, T. Nagata, 2010 - 301 pages

4. Drugs from the Sea, Nobuhiro Fusetani, 2000 - 158 pages

5. Herbal plants and Drugs, Agnes Arber, 1999. Mangal Deep Publications.

Page 8 of 16
6. Contribution to Indian Ethnobotany by Editor S.K.Jain, 1991 Scientific Publishers.

7. New Natural products and Plants drugs with Pharmacological, Biological (or)

8. Therapeutical activity, H.Wagner and P.Wolff, 1979. Springer, New Delhi.

9. Ayurvedic drugs and their plant source, V.V.Sivarajan and Balachandran Indra, 1994. Oxford
IBH publishing Co.

Page 9 of 16
 Advances in Microbial Biotechnology

L T P C
4 0 0 4
Preamble:

To have an in depth insight into fermentation concepts, understanding the usage of

microbes as biocontrol agents, its usage in environment and industries.

Outcome:

To enrich the minds of students with microbes utility in different fields.

Unit 1

Brief history of Fermentation; Fermentation- General Concepts, Applications of Fermentation;

Range of fermentation process- Microbial biomass, enzymes, metabolites, recombinant products,
transformation process; Component parts of a fermentation process. Fundamentals of Microbial
Biotechnology Microbial life: Microbial Cell Cultivation Systems, Cycles of Matter/Microbial
Ecology (C, N, S, Fe, Cu, etc.) Methods in Microbial Biotechnology; Recombinant Gene
Expression in Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes Protein Engineering .

Unit 2

Types of fermentations- Aerobic and anaerobic fermentation, Submerged and solid state
fermentation; Factors affecting submerged and solid state fermentation; Aeration and agitation-
Effect of aeration and agitation on fermentation, Oxygen requirement and oxygen supply,
Oxygen transfer kinetics; Determination of KLa value; Effect of agitation and microbial biomass
on KLa value; Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids; Foam and antifoams, their effect on
oxygen transfer; Fermentation economics.

Unit 3

Microbes as Biocontrol Agents (Baculoviruses, entomopathogenic fungi, Bacillus thurinigiensis,

Bacillus sphaericus, Bacillus popilae, Microbe derived inhibitors Biology of nitrogen fixation,
preparation of different Types of inoculants (nitrogen fixers phosphate solubilizers, plant growth
promoting Rhizobacteria, PGPR), composting.

Unit 4

Introduction to the use of microbes in environmental Applications, Bioremediation,

bioaugemntation, Bioemulsifiers, biosurfactants, MEOR, Leaching of ores, Microbial Fuels
(Methane, Hydrogen), Functional Metagenomics , syntrophic biodegradation of hydrocarbon
contaminants.
Page 10 of 16
Unit 5

Microbial production of organic acids, solvents and beverages (Citric acid, acetic acid, ethanol,
acetone-butanol, beer, wine) therapeutic agents,(Streptomycin, cephalosporin, Anticancer agents
, Vaccines aSiderophores, Ergot alkaloids),enzymes, vitamins and amino acids(proteases,
amylases and lipases , B2 and B12, lysine, glutamic acid and tryptophan) and other microbial
products(Microbial polysaccharides: Xanthan and Dextran, Biosurfactants, Steroid
transformation, Polyhydroxyalkanoates: PHA and PHB).

References:

1. Stanbury, P. F., Whitaker and Hall, A. S. J., Principles of Fermentation Technology.

Butterworth-Heinemann.
2. Shuler, M.L. and Karg, I F., Bioprocess Engineering Basic Concepts, Prentice Hall.
3. Microbial Biotechnology by A. N. Glazer and H. Nikaido.
4. SubbaRao, N. S. (1999) Soil Microbiology Science Pub Inc.

Page 11 of 16
 Molecular Toxicology

L T P C
4 0 0 4
Preamble:

To introduce students about the chemicals and metabolic toxicity with the aim to
provide sufficient knowledge about the technologies involved in toxicity assessment.

Outcome:

To nurture the minds with the lethal dose informations which is mandatory for any
toxicological experiments.

UNIT I

Introduction to Toxicology: Various types of toxicity (Acute, subacute, subchronic and

chronic). Chemical interactions (Additive effect, potentiation, synergism and antagonism), Dose
response relationship (ED50, LD50 EC50, LC50.)

UNIT II

Routes of exposure, absorption, distribution, elimination. IN VITRO and IN VIVO

models in toxicological studies. Toxicity - Factors affecting toxicity. General concepts in
toxicology; Passage of a chemical through the body absorption, distribution, metabolism,
Excretion.

UNIT III

Role of Phase I metabolism in toxicity: Introduction, Cytochrome P450-mediated Phase I

metabolism; Flavin monooxygenase-mediated Phase I metabolism. Role of Phase II metabolism
in toxicity: Introduction, Glucuronide conjugation; sulphate conjugation; Glutathione
conjugation.

UNIT IV

Co-ordinated responses to toxicity: Introduction, Immediate responses to toxic insult,

coordination of the response to reactive chemicals, repair of cellular damage, regulation of
apoptosis and necrosis. Role of genetics in toxic response: introduction, mechanisms of genetic
control, tools for studying genetic responses to toxic insult.

UNIT V

Technologies for toxicity testing: Genomics-analysis of variation within the genome,

Reporter gene assays, Transgenics; Transcriptomics-Microarray analysis, real time quantitative
RT-PCR; Proteomics- 2D-gel electrophoresis, MALDI-TOF mass spectroscopy, protein chip
Page 12 of 16
analysis; Metabonomics; Bioinformatics.

References:

1. Subramanian, M.A., 2004. Toxicology Principles and Methods, MJP Publishers, Chennai.
2. Plant, N. (2003). Molecular Toxicology. Bios Scientific Publishers, New York.
3. Hodgson, E. and Smart, R.C. (2001). Introduction to Biochemical Toxicology.
John Wiley & Sons,Inc. New York.
3. Keohavong, P. and Grant, S.G. (2005). Molecular toxicology Protocols. Humana
Press, New York.
4. Josephy, P.D. and Mannervik, B. (2006). Molecular Toxicology. Oxford
University Press.

Page 13 of 16
 Tissue Culture

L T P C
4 0 0 4

Objectives

The goal of Cell Culture Techniques is for Scholars to identify and understanding the novel
research findings through the necessary practical skills for the isolation of both animals and
plant cells for in vitro studies, maintenance and manipulation of animal and plant cells in vitro
and in vivo, and application of molecular techniques to in vitro situations.

Learning Outcome

 Develop basic aseptic skills for vertebrate and invertebrate cell culture.
 Understand media constituents and media formulation strategies for cell culture.
 Develop proficiency in vertebrate primary cell culture and the maintenance of cell lines.
 Apply cell and molecular techniques to in vitro situations.
 To know the different methods and equipments employed in the scale-up of animal and
plant cell culture.

Unit I

Course Introduction - Animal models vertebrates and invertebrates Rabbit, Mouse,

Drosophilla, Zebrafish, Earthworm, Bacteria, Fungi. Media Formulations for Cell Culture,
Importance of Serum and Serum Free media, Preparation of primary cells from invertebrate,
Insect cell culture, overview.

Unit II

Techniques and methods in animal cell culture- Animal Cell Culture: Historical Background,
Importance and progress in Animal Cell Culture Technology, Biology of Animal Cells and
cultured cells, Types of cells, Cellular Interactions, Organo-typic culture and specialized cell
culture techniques, Maintaining the culture, Producing cell lines of a particular cell type,
Quantization of cells in cell culture, harvesting of cells, Cell viability determination,
characterization, differentiation and transformation cells, Culturing and Sub-Culturing of Animal

Page 14 of 16
Cells, Growth Parameters, Primary Cell Culture Principles and Procedures - Primary cell
culture: Keratinocytes; Adipocytes, Hepatocytes; Lymphocytes. Long term and short term
storage of cells and reviving cells from cryo-preservation. cell culture application in
pharmaceutical research.

Unit III

Basic techniques in plant tissue culture - Introduction to plant Cell & Tissue Culture. Design
& lab setup of Tissue Culture laboratory, Tissue culture Media (Composition preparation), Types
of culture. Role of Plant Hormones in growth & development of Plants. Micro propagation
(Organogenesis, Somatic Embryogenesis, Shoot tip culture, Rapid clonal propagation, Embryo
Culture & Embryo Rescue, Acclimatization of Plants) In vitro mutagenesis. Cryopreservation,
Slow growth & DNA Banking for germ plasm conservation.

Unit IV

Plant cell culture, plant transformation technology & its applications. Basics of Tumor
formation, Hairy root, features of Ti & Ri Plasmid, Mechanism of DNA transfer role of
Virulence gene, Use of Ti & Ri as vectors, Binary vectors, Use of 35s & other promoters genetic
markers methods of nuclear transformation viral vectors & their applications, Multiple gene
transfers vector less or direct DNA transfer ,Use of reporter gene, Particle bombardment,
electroporation, Microinjection, Transformation of monocots, Transgene stability & gene
silencing in Plant transformation. Applications of Plant Transformation for Productivity &
performance Herbicide resistance like atrazine, Insect resistance Bt gene, non Bt like protease
inhibiters, Virus resistance, disease resistance, antibiotic stress, post harvest losses long shelf life
of fruits & flowers. Chloroplast transformation, Advantage vectors & success with tobacco &
potato Metabolic engineering & Industrial products.

Unit V

Cell Immortalization – Steps and process of species specific cell immortalization, Methods of
immortalization: integration of SV40, hTERT, HPV E6/E7, EBV, and MycT58A, RasV12, and
p53-/- Cell Immortalization Systems, impacts of immortalization in animal cells, Applications of
immortalized cells in clinical research. Ongo genes and tumor suppressor genes.

References

1. Morgan, S. I. Animal cell culture, 1993,Bio Scientific Publishers Ltd, Oxford.

2. Freshney,R.I.Culture of Animal cells:A Manual of Basic Technique, 1994, John Wiley
and Sons Inc. Publication, USA.

Page 15 of 16
3. Butler, M.Mammalian, cell Biotechnology: A Practical Approach (1991), IRL Press,
Oxford.
4. Jenni P.Mather and David Barnes, eds; Animal cell culture Methods, Methods in cell
Biology, vol.57, Academic Press.
5. Cell Culture: Methods in enzymology,Vol-58,Academic Press 1979 or recent.
6. An introduction to Plant Tissue Culture 2nd edn. Razdan, M. K, Science Publishers,
USA.
7. Textbook of plant biotechnology, Chawla P.K.2002,Oxford&IBH,New Delhi.
8. Bhojwani, S. S. and M. K. Razdan 1996.Plant Tissue Culture: Theory and Practice,
Elsevier Pub.
9. Chrispeels, M. J. 2002.Plant Tissue Culture:Genetical Aspects. Jones and Bortlett
Publishers, International.
10. Chopra V. L. et al 1999. Applied Plant biotechnology. Science Publishers Inc.
11. Verpoorte, R. and A.W. Alfermann (Eds) 2000.Metabolic Engineering of plant secondary
metabolism, lower Academic Publisher.

Page 16 of 16
 Manonmaniam Sundaranar University
Abishekapatti – 627 012
Ph. D. PROGRAM IN BOTANY

(For all affiliated colleges/Research centres and University Department)

Course Structure and Syllabus as per the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)

(Curriculum Effective From July 2017 Onwards)

Course Structure for Ph. D. Program in Botany – 2017 onwards

S. Hrs/
Name of the course Credits
No. week
CORE PAPERS
1 Research and Teaching Methodology 4 4
2 Advances in Plant Science 4 4
ELECTIVE PAPERS
3 Plant Conservation Biotechnology 4 4
4 Developmental Botany & Plant Biotechnology 4 4
5 Phytochemistry and Pharmacognosy 4 4
6 Bio fertilizers and Plant Responses 4 4
7 Soil Fertility and Plant Nutrition 4 4
8 Ecology, Biodiversity and Sustainability 4 4
9 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 4 4
10 Plant Anatomy and Reproductive Biology 4 4
11 Algal Technology 4 4
12 Bryophyte Systematics and Evolution 4 4
13 Ethnomedicine 4 4
14 Marine Botany 4 4
15 Vascular Cryptogams 4 4
MINI PROJECT
Mini Project 4 4
Candidates with PG qualification should earn a total of 16 credits
Candidates with M.Phil. qualification should earn a total of 8 credits

Page 1 of 30
 RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY

L C
60 4

Objectives
 To understand the principles and operation of basic and advanced instruments required
for doctoral research
 To analyse the scientific findings and data by applying certain statistical methods and
software
 To learn the methods of teaching and carrying out scientific research, documentation and
communication

Unit I Microscopic and Analytical techniques (15 hrs)

Microscopy-principles and applications. Properties of electromagnetic radiation- Light, Phase
contrast and Fluorescence microscopy. Electron Microscopy-Principles and applications of TEM
and SEM- Preparation of materials for Electron Microscope.Spectroscopic techniques- UV and
Visible, Fluorescence, IR, NMR, AAS, AES and AFM. E l e c t r o c h e m i c a l t e c h n i qu e s -
Radioisotope techniques-radioactivity, atomic stability and radiation-radiation decay. Detection
and measurement of radioactivity and applications of Geiger–Müllerand Scintillation Counter.
Labelling of biological molecules and autoradiography.

Unit II Separation techniques (8 hrs)

Chromatography- Principles and applications- GC, GLC, HPLC, MS.Electrophoretic techniques-
Principles and construction of horizontal and vertical electrophoresis-Buffers and electrolytic
separation- detection by staining and estimation of electrophorogramsgel documentation.
Molecular techniques: PCR based-RFLP, RAPD, AFLP, SSR, blotting techniques.

Unit III Statistical Methods (10 hrs)

Population and sampling, data collection, analysis and graphical representation. Measures of
Central Tendency, Measures of Dispersion-Standard Deviation, Correlation and Regression
analysis, Probability -normal and binomial distribution. Statistical testing: F-test, t-test and chi-
square test. Experimental design, ANOVAone way and two way analysis, statistical software-
MS Excel and SPSS.

Unit IV Research Methods (12 hrs)

Research- Meaning - Role of a researcher – Hypothesis - Methods-Approaches Objectives.
Literature and Reference collection. Role of libraries in research, virtual libraries, Internet-
Worldwide web-searching and browsing tools- e-journals and e-books. Impact factor, H- index,
citation. Manuscript preparation- Citation and Proof correction, Thesis/Dissertation components
- Introduction, Review, Materials and methods, Results -tables, figures, footnote, Discussion,
Summary and Conclusion. Role of Supervisors/Guides in research.

Unit – V Teaching methods (15 hrs)

Page 2 of 30
Teaching – Objectives of teaching, phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: lecture method,
discussion method, discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving method, project method.
Seminar- Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualised instruction, ways for effective presentation
with power points, documentation - Evaluation; formative, summative & continuous and
comprehensive Evaluation. Later Adolescent Psychology: meaning, physical, cognitive,
emotional, Social and moral Development –Teaching later adolescents.

Reference Books:
1. Bryan C Williams and Keith Wilson 1983, A biologist’s guide to practical techniques of
Practical Biochemistry Second edition. Edward Arnold Publications.
2. David Plummer, 1988. An Introduction to Practical Biochemistry, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, New Delhi.
3. George Casella and Roger L. Berger, 2003. Statistical Inference II Ed. Duxbury
Advanced Series, Thomson Press.
4. Jayaraman, J,1985. Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
5. Johansen, M., 1940. Plant Microtechnique, McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New
Delhi.
6. Keith Wilson and John Walker., 2000. Practical biochemistry V Edition Cambridge
Universities Press, London.
7. Stock, R and Rice, C.B. F., 1980. Chromatographic methods, Chapman and Hall Ltd.
London.
8. Steel and Torrie, 1986. Principles and Procedures of Statistics with special reference to
Biological Sciences.
9. Kothari, C.R., 2004. Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Age
International
10. Isaac, S., Michael, W., 1971.Handbook in research and evaluation, (2nd ed.), San Diego,
USA
11. Gomez, K.A., Gomez, A.A., 1984. Statistical procedures for agricultural research, John
Wiley & Sons.
12. Townend, J., 2012. Practical statistics for environmental and biological scientists, John
Wiley & Sons.
13. Sampathkumar, K, Panneerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. 1984. Introduction to educational
technology 2nd revised ed. Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
14. Sharma, S. R. 2003. Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools and techniques.
Mangal Deep publishers, Jaipur.
15. Vedanayagam, E. G. 1989. Teaching technology for college Teachers, Sterling
publishers, New York.

Page 3 of 30
 ADVANCES IN PLANT SCIENCE

L C
60 4
OBJECTIVES
 To comprehend the important aspects of biodiversity and conservation methods
 To make the scholar abreast in advanced areas of plant science and the recent
developments
 To equip the scholar to learn the theoretical and application concepts on economic and
medicinal importance of plants

Unit 1- Climate change and plant diversity (12 hrs)

Biodiversity – Alpha, Beta, Gamma; Species, genetic and ecosystems diversity. Centres of
origins of crops – Vavilov’s Theory, Megabiodiversity, centres of origin of genetic diversity,
Plant Genetic Resources (IBPGR/ NBPGR).
Endangered plants – IUCN categories, Red Data Books, In Situ and Ex situ conservation
strategies. Components of the atmosphere, greenhouse gases & green house effect, global
warming and climate change, sea level rise, increased CO2 levels, impacts on plants. Carbon
sequestration, carbon credits and economy and energy policy. Climate Change adaptation and
mitigation strategies (UNEP/ FAO/ IPCC / GBIF / CBD).

Unit -2 Plant Physiology (12 hrs)

Photosynthesis recent concepts in Photosystems I & II, ATP complex. Chloroplast DNA. Water
transport and utilization. Resource mobilization and allocation. Advances in auxin and cytokinin
molecular synthesis and function. Biochemistry of plant animal interaction.

Unit – 3. Plant Energy (12 hrs)

The concept of energy richness in plants – lignocelluloses, sugars and terpenoids. Plants that
produce fuel, wood, waxes, alcohol and hydrocarbons. Products include biodegradable plastics,
industrial enzymes, industrial oils, biofuels, fibers, papers, agents for bioremediation,
phytoremediation.

Unit – 4 Molecular biology (12 hrs)

Cloning vectors and Transgenics. Genetic improvement of medicinal plants through Bio-
technology and Genetic engineering. Molecular diversity analysis using various types of
markers. Applications of molecular techniques in herbal research. Applications of in-vitro
culture methods in drug production. Growing and harvesting genetically engineered crops to
produce compounds of industrial importance.

Unit – 5 Advances in Plant Medicines (12 hrs)

Plants as bioreactors, molecular pharming - production of pharmaceutically valuable compounds
from plants. Plant made pharmaceuticals (PMP). Plantibodies Edible Vaccines / Plantigens,

Page 4 of 30
Interferon’s, Blood clotting factors, Anticoagulant, Hormones, Enzymes, Secondary metabolites,
other proteins. IPR and medicinal plants.

References

1) Melchias, G. 2001. Biodiversity and Conservation. Science Publishers,NH USA

2) Krishnamurthy K.V. 2004. Advanced Textbook on Biodiversity: Principles and Practice.
Oxford & IBH, New Delhi.
3) The World Conservation Strategy. IUCN, Switzerland.
4) Heywood, VH (Ed.). 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment Report .UNEP.
5) Bidwell. R. G. S. 1979 Plant Physiology. Macmillon Delhi.
6) Lea, P. J. and R. C. Leegood. 1993. Plant Biochemistry and Molecular Biology,
JohnWiley & Sons. New York.
7) Hans-walter heldt. 1997. Plant biochemistry and molecular biology. Oxford university
press, New York. USA.
8) Jogdand. S.N.1997. Environmental Biotechnology – Industrial Pollution Management.
Himalaya Publishing House.
9) Watson, J.D. and W.A. Benjamin. 2004. 3nd Edition. Molecular Biology of the Genes.
Benjamin Cummings.
10) Freifelder, D. 1983. Molecular Biology. 2nd Ed. Narosa publishing house.
11) Lodish, H., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L., Matsudaira, P., Baltimore, D. and Darnell, J. 2000.
Molecular Cell Biology, W.H. Freeman and Co., New York, USA.
12) Wolfer, S.L. 1993 Molecular and Cellular Biology, Wadsworth Publishing, USA.
13) Revised guidelines for research in Transgenic plants (August 1998), Department of
Biotechnology, Ministry of Science & Technology, Government of India, New Delhi.

Page 5 of 30
 PLANT CONSERVATION BIOTECHNOLOGY

L C
60 4
OBJECTIVES
 To study the essentiality of conservation of rare plants and their conservation status by
IUCN
 To enhance the understanding on conservation and linking biotechnological tools in
conservation programs
 To learn the recent theoretical and practical approaches towards conservation of
germplasm

Unit –1 Conservation (12 hrs)

Introduction - Need for inventorying and documentation. Principles of conservation; extinctions;

environmental distribution status of plants based on international union for conservation of
nature (IUCN). Red data list of Indian plants.

Unit – 2 Plant conservation Biotechnology (12 hrs)

Integration of biotechnology into conservation practices. Molecular approaches to assessing
plant diversity. Biotechnology in plant germplasm acquisition. Methods of Plant conservation,
and sustainable utilization of plant genetic resources.

Unit – 3 Tissue culture techniques (12 hrs)

In vitro Plant Conservation: Culture room and lab facilities. Media composition and preparation
– plant growth regulators, adjuvants; sterilization. Morphogenetic patterns. Callus culture -
Subculture, differentiation, and regeneration. Organogenesis : Embryoids, Caulogenesis,
Rhizogenesis, Cell Line, Somaclone, Gametoclone.

Unit – 4 Micro propagation (12 hrs)

Preparative stage: Germplasm acquisition and selection of explants. Establishment stage: Axenic
and viable cultures. Multiplication stage. Plantlet production: induction of roots and
acclimatization of plantlets to green house condition. Somatic embryogenesis. Synthetic seed
technology. Suspension culture, in vitro production of secondary metabolites, cell
immobilization.

Unit – 5Cryopreservation and Germplasm storage (12 hrs)

Slow or retarded growth. Principles, Cryoprotection, Freezing and long term cryogenic storage,
protocols and recovery of germplasm. Conservation of Rare, endemic, threatened and
economically important plants of India, current status and Active research stations in India.
Stability assessments of conserved plant germplasm.

References

Page 6 of 30
1. Dodds.I.H, and Roberts.L.W, 1995, Experiments in plant tissue culture.
Cambridge University press, London.
2. Erica Benson. 1999, Plant conservation Biotechnology. Taylor and Francis Ltd.,
UK.
3. Dixon.R.A, 1994, Plant cell culture, A Practical approach.IRL press.Oxford,
London.
4. Freifelder.D.1990.Molecular Biology.Narosa publishing house, New Delhi.
5. Murray Moo – Young. Plant biotechnology, comprehensive biotechnology series,
pergamon press, Netherlands.
6. Narayanasamy.S, 1994, Plant cell and tissue culture. Tata McGraw – Hill
Publishing co., Delhi.
7. Yeomen, 1987, Plant cell culture technology. Narosa Publication. New Delhi.
8. Lindsay, 1992, Plant Tissue Culture manual, Kluver Academic Publishers.
Netherland.
9. George. E. F, 1994, Plant Propagation by Tissue culture. Exegetics Ltd., England.
10. Vasil.I.L, and Vasil.V.K, 1992, Plant Biotechnology and tissue culture. Kluver
Academic Publishers, Netherlands.
11. Raven, Johnson, Losos, Mason and Singer 2008. BIOLOGY. 8th edition. McGraw
Hill. New York, New Delhi.
12. Russell, Wolfe, Hertz and Starr 2008. Biology – THE DYNAMIC SCIENCE.
Thomson Brooks/Cole, Australia, United States.

Page 7 of 30
 DEVELOPMENTAL BOTANY

L C
60 4
UNIT I -MERISTEMS

Organization of Meristem – Stem (monocot & dicot) – root (monocot & dicot) cambium and
secondary growth in dicots, anomalous secondary growth, Secondary thickening meristem in
monocots. Microtechnique – anatomical fingerprinting. Histochemical localization of starch,
proteins, oil and phenols. 13 HRS

UNIT II – PLANT HORMONES

– Growth hormones and their role in development and resource mobilisation : Auxin, Cytokinin
and Gibberellins- Functions and genetic molecular mechanism. 8 HRS

UNIT III – DIFFERENTIATION AND MORPHOGENESIS

Cellular mechanisms of Development – overview of development- cell differentiation – pattern

formation – morphogeneis – environmental effects on development. Growth and development
through tissue culture – cell, tissue, organ culture – regeneration through somatic embryogenesis.
14 HRS

UNIT IV – WATER AND FOOD MOVEMENT

Mobilization of food reserve – Pathway of upward movement of water and mineral ions –
Mechanism of upward Movement in the xylem – Pathway of Movement of Organic Assimilates
– Mechanisms of movement in Phloem. Cell wall architecture Mobilization of cell wall reserves
(NSPs) in grasses. 12 HRS

UNIT V – GENETIC CONTROL IN DEVELOPMENT

Gene expression with reference to plant development- Auxin response genes: Aux/IAAs, sUAR
and GH3. Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS)- Nuclear gene expression: regulation by light.
Differential gene expression in fruits and seeds. 13 HRS

References

1. Raven, Johnson, Losos, Mason and Singer 2008. Biology. 8th edition. McGraw Hill. New
York, New Delhi.
2. Russell, Wolfe, Hertz and Starr 2008. Biology – THE DYNAMIC SCIENCE. Thomson
Brooks/Cole, Australia, United States.
3. Curtis (1935). The Translocation of Solutes in Plants. McGraw – Hill, New York.
4. Salisbury, Ross 1991. Plant Physiology. 4th edition. Brooks/Cole.

Page 8 of 30
5. Richardson 1968. Translocation in Plants. The English Language Book Society and Edward
Arnold (Publisher) Ltd.
6.Rudall 2006. Anatomy of Flowering Plants – An Introduction to Structure and Development.
Cambridge University Press.
7. Mauseth 1988. Plant Anatomy. The Benjamin/ Cummings Publishung company, Inc.
California.
8. Fahn 1967. Plant Anatomy. Pergamon Press. New York.
9.Lodish, Berk, Matsudaira, Kaiser, Krieger, Scott, Zipursky, Darnell. Molecular Cell Biology
5th edition.
10. Nicholl 2008 – An Introduction to Genetic Engineering 3rd edition. Cambridge University
Press.
11. Primrose and Twyman 2006. Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics 7thy edition.
Blackwell.

Page 9 of 30
 PHYTOCHEMISTRYAND PHARMACOGNOSY

L C
60 4
Objectives

 To have an understanding on the need for phytochemical studies which help to know the
diversity of chemical compounds present in the plants.
 To learn the methods used in the extraction of the diverse compounds and their economic
importance.
 To understand the need for pharmacological studies that help in the formulation of drugs
for the benefit of humankind.
 To know the various analytical methods approved by WHO to standardize crude drugs.

UNIT- I Phytochemistry:
Scope, importance in pharmaceuticals industry, preparation of plant extracts - digestion,
decoction, percolation, hot continuous extraction, aqueous alcoholic extraction, superficial fluid
extraction and counter-current extraction. (12 hrs)

UNIT - II Secondary metabolites:

Definition, classification, natural sources and therapeutic applications of flavonoids: Flavones,
Flavanones Flavonols, Anthocyanins. Alkaloids: Ephedrine, Serpentine and Morphine. Volatile
oils - source, constituents, extraction and uses. (12 hrs)

UNIT- III Glycosides:

Definition, properties, classification, natural sources, pharmacological and toxicological effects
of glycosides. Terpenoids: β-Sitosterol, Glycyrrhizin. Phenolics: Coumarins and Tannins. (12
hrs)
UNIT-IV Pharmacognosy:
Definition, scope, Classification of drugs - morphological, taxonomical, pharmacological and
chemical. Collection and processing of crude drugs - antichemical, phytochemical, antimicrobial
and chemical. Preparation of plant extracts - maceration, infusion, decoction, percolation,
sonication, hot continuous extraction, superficial fluid extraction and counter-current extraction.
(12 hrs)

UNIT -V
Screening and WHO Standardization of crude drugs (WHO guidelines): Physicochemical (Ash
and Extraction values), fluorescence analysis, qualitative and quantitative analysis, basic
chromatographic and spectroscopic analysis of crude drugs. (12 hrs)

References
Page 10 of 30
1. Agarwal, S.S and M. Paridhavi. 2007 Crude Drug Technology. Universities Press,
Hyderabad
2. Anonymous, 1948-1976.The Wealth of India 11 Vols.
3. Bhattacharjee,S. K.2004. Handbook on medicinal plants, Pointer publishers. Jaipur
4. Evans, W.C. 1997. Pharmacognosy. Harcourt Brace & Co., Asios Pvt., Ltd.
5. Faroogi, A.A and Sreeramu, B.S.2001 Cultivation of Medicinal and Aromatic Crops,
Universities press.
6. Gurdeep Chatwal 1983. Organic Chemistry of Natural Products. Himalaya Publishing
house, Mumbai.
7. Joshi, S.G 2000. Medicinal plants, Oxford and IBH Company Private Ltd. New Delhi.
8. Kokate, C.K., Purohit, A.P. & Gokhale, S.B. 2007. Pharmacognosy. Nirali Prakashan,
India.
9. Sharma, P. 2000. Database on Medicinal Plants used in Ayurveda. Ministry of Health and
Family Welfare.
10. Srivastava, A. K. 2006. Medicinal Plants. International Book Distributors, Dehradun.
11. Tewari, K.S., Vishnoi, N.K., Mehrotra, S.N 1998 Text book Of Organic Chemistry.
Vikas Publishing House Ltd.,
12. Wallis T.E. 1985.Text Book of Pharmacognosy. CSB Pub., New Delhi.
13. Yogaarasimhan, S.N. 2000. Medicinal Plants of India. Vol 2. Tamil Nadu., Inderline
Publ. Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore and Dehra Dun.

Page 11 of 30
 BIOFERTILIZER AND PLANT RESPONSES
L C
60 4

Objectives
 To enhance the understanding of the nutrient management and plant nutrient
requirements
 To impart knowledge on the importance and mechanisms of the biological nutrient
enhancement and availability to the plants.
 To reveal the application of potential biofertilizer agents currently used

Unit 1: Integrated Plant Nutrient Management (12 hours.)

Biofertilizers - classification, potential to improve crop production, chemically fixed Nitrogen
versus biologically fixed nitrogen, and synergistic interaction between biofertilizing agents.
Biofertilizing agents and plant disease control. Brief account of beneficial microorganisms –
Rhizobium, Azospirillum, Azatobacter and mycorrhiza.

Unit 2: Nitrogen Fixation (12 hours.)

Historical review, biochemistry and regulation of biological nitrogen fixation, factors affecting
nitrogen fixation, key organism fixing nitrogen - Rhizobium, Azospirillum and Frankia

Unit 3: Phosphate Solubilizing Microorganisms (12 hours.)

Phosphate fixation and solubilization in different soils. Factors affecting phosphate solubilization
- mechanisms of action and role of acids. Biological phosphorus solubilization and effect on crop
yield. key P-fixing fungal and bacteria with special emphasis on mycorrhiza.

Unit 4: Biofertilizer Application and Evaluation Techniques (12 hours.)

Different methods of biofertilizer inoculation - seed inoculation, top dressing of biofertilizers,
granular biofertilizers, frequency of inoculation, liquid inoculation of biofertilizers, culture
pellet, and methods of application of other biofertilizers. Preparation and use of inoculant -
Azatobacter, Azospirillum, mycorrhizae, and Rhizobium. Role of humus in influencing the
biofertilizer inoculation.

Unit 5: Crop Response to Biofertilizers (12 hours.)

Influence of symbiotic nitrogen fixation, Azatobactor, Azospirillum, and mycorrhizae in irrigated
and dry crops and fodder crops. Factors affecting crop response to biofertilizers, interaction
effect of microbial strains, effect of nutrient interactions, interaction of inoculants with other
nutrients, multi-microbial inoculation and compatibility between biofertilizers and chemical
fertilizers.

Page 12 of 30
REFERENCES
1. Rai, M.K. (2006). Handbook of Microbial Biofertilizers, the Haworth Press, Inc
2. Kannaiyan, S. 2002. Biotechnology of Biofertilizers. Springer Netherlands, p.376.
3. Dubey, R.C. and Maheshwari, D.K. 2013. A Textbook of Microbiology (Revised edition). S.
Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi
4. Relevant Journal papers & Reviews

Page 13 of 30
 SOIL FERTILITY AND PLANT NUTRITION

L C
60 4

Objectives
 To introduce the student with the problems of soil plant nutrient availability and the ways
to manage and improve the productivity.
 To impart knowledge on the essentiality of the key elements of plant nutrition and the
ways to enhance their availability in soil.
 To introduce the biological method of enhancing the nutrient availability and plant uptake

Unit 1: Soil as a medium for plant growth (12 hours.)

Abiotic and biotic elements of soils, formation of soil, classification and soil profiling.
Characteristics and impact of acidic, saline, and alkaline soils on crop productivity. Importance
of C: N ratio and pH in plant nutrition.

Unit 2: Soil fertility and productivity (12 hours.)

Soil properties on nutrient availability, definition of soil fertility in terms of productivity, soil
types in wild and agrarian systems, soil patterns and agricultural regimes in Tamilnadu. Factors
affecting soil fertility. Essential plant nutrients- NPK other major and minor nutrients, chelates.
Classification of nutrients based on utilization and metabolic functions in plants. Criteria of
essentiality of elements.

Unit 3: Plant Essential Nutrients (12 hours.)

Essential plant major and minor nutrient elements - functions, deficiency systems,
biogeochemical cycles, transformations and availability. Effective consumption of nutrients,
plant-microbe interface interactions in soils, positive and negative plant to plant interactions,
changes in water table and its consequences.

Unit 4: Influence of microbes on plant nutrition (12 hours.)

Role of microorganisms in organic matter decomposition, and humus formation. Nitrogen
fixation and cycling, phosphorus mobilization, calcium and potassium uptake and transport. Key
microorganisms of nitrogen and phosphorus turnover in soil.

Unit 5: Fertilizer application (12 hours.)

Use of fertilizers, manures, mulch and bio supplements, concept of organic farming, and
significance of green manure. Agricultural applications and dispensation of fertilizers- Methods
of fertilizer application- solid and liquid forms of fertilizer application and their merits and
demerits. Comparison of chemical and biological fertilizers on the basis of definition, application
and crop protection potential. Analytical methods for soil nutrients.

Page 14 of 30
REFERENCES
1. Western Fertilizer Handbook (9th edition). 2002. California Plant Health Association,
Sacramento, Ca.
2. Brady, N.C. and R.R. Weil. 2005. The Nature and Properties of Soils (14th Ed.) Prentice-
Hall, Inc.
3. Rai, M.K. (2006). Handbook of Microbial Bio fertilizers, the Haworth Press, Inc.
4. Benton Jones, Jr. J. 2012. Plant Nutrition and Soil Fertility Manual (Second Edition) CRC
Press.
5. Journal review and research articles.

Page 15 of 30
 ECOLOGY, BIODIVERSITY AND SUSTAINABILITY

L C
60 4
Objectives

 To gain knowledge on the biogeography, ecosystem diversity and biodiversity hotspots of

India.
 To understand the concepts of vegetation analysis
 To understand the reasons for the loss of habitats/biodiversity and learn to find solutions
to minimize degradation.
 To understand the need for the sustenance of habitats including man-made ones and
conserve them for the benefit of humankind.
 To be aware of the existing social issues and the laws enforced to tackle the issues.

UNIT - I Biodiversity: (12 hrs)

Introduction, definition, genetic and species diversity. Ecosystem diversity - Aquatic: ponds,
lakes, streams, rivers, estuaries, oceans, desert ecosystem, grassland ecosystem, forest
ecosystem, insular species diversity.

UNIT - II Biodiversity of India (12 hrs)

India as a Megabiodiversity nation, Biogeographical classification of India, Biodiversity

hotspots of India, Eastern Himalaya, Western Ghats, Eastern Ghats, Deccan Plateau, Gulf of
Mannar, Andaman and Nicobar Islands. Threats to biodiversity: Habitat loss - Causes, effects
and solutions; Poaching of wildlife - Causes, effects and solutions; Man-wildlife conflicts -
Causes, effects and solutions; Endangered and endemic species of Peninsular India.

Unit-III: Vegetation Organisation and Diversity Analysis(12 hours)

Concepts of species, population and community; analysis of communities; community
coefficients, inter specific associations, and concept of ecological niche; temporal and seasonal
changes; island biogeography, and mangroves.
Ecophysiology and Diversity Analysis - Conceptual introduction; plant functional traits;
phenological studies and their importance; analysis of density, species richness and diversity of
plants; diversity indices; ecological genetics.

UNIT–IV Food and Agricultural resources and their conservation:(12 hrs)

Centres of origin of cultivated plants, Wild relatives of cultivated plants, Agriculture and food
production, Agriculture and ecosystem degradation, Impacts of modern agriculture on
environment - effects of fertilizers, pesticides, water logging and salinity, Sustainable
agriculture and food production. Role of FAO.

Page 16 of 30
UNIT – V Social issues and the environment:(12 hrs)

From unsustainable to sustainable development, Environmental ethics: issues and possible

solutions, Consumerism and waste products, Environment Protection Act, Wildlife Protection
Act, Forest Conservation Act, Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation,
Public awareness. KYOTO protocols.

References
1. Annamalai, R. 2004. Tamil Nadu Biodiversity Strategy and Action plan. Wild Plant
Diversity. Government of Tamil Nadu, Chennai.
2. Chapman, J.L. and Reiss, M.J. 1995. Ecology: Principles and Applications. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
3. Chhatwal, G.R. 1998. Encyclopaedia of Environmental Biology. Anmol Publications
Pvt., Ltd. New Delhi.
4. Daniels, R.J.R. & Krishnaswamy, J. 2009. Environmental Studies. Wiley, India.
5. Dash, M.C. 2001. Fundamentals of Ecology, 2nd Edition. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi.
6. Gleason, H.A. & Cronquist, A. 1964. The Natural Geography of plants. UniversityPress,
New York.
7. Groom Bridge, B. 1995. Global Biodiversity. Chapman & Hall, London.
8. Krishnamurthy, K.V., Murugan, R. & Ravikumar, K. 2014. Bioresources of the Eastern
Ghats - their conservation and management. Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra
Dun.
9. Kumaresan, V. and Arumugam, N. 2015. Plant Ecology and Phytogeography. Saras
Pub., Nagercoil.
10. Odum, E.P. & Barrett, G.W. 2005. Fundamentals of Ecology, 5th Edition, Affiliated
East West Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of ecology. W.B. Saunders Company, London.
12. Pullaiah, T., Karuppusamy, S. & Rani, S.S. 2014. Biodiversity in India. Vol. Astral
International Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
13. Schulze ED, Beck E, Muller-Hohenstein K. 2005. Plant Ecology, First edition, Springer,
Heidelberg, Germany
14. South Wick, C.H. 1976. Ecology and the Quality of our Environment. D. Van Nostrand
Company, New York.
15. Turk, J. 1985. Introduction to Environmental Studies, 2nd Edition. Saunders
CollegePublishers, Japan.

Page 17 of 30
 TAXONOMY OF ANGIOSPERMS

L C
60 4

Objectives
 To improve the understanding of the taxonomy of angiosperms and its need
 To instill the significance of angiosperm taxonomy and its importance in conservation
 To prepare the students to become a researcher in angiosperm taxonomy

Unit I: Origin and evolution of Angiosperms (10 hours)

Ascent of angiosperms in geological time scale, major sites of origin. Theories with respect to
time, place possible ancestors

Unit II: Plant nomenclature (13 hours)

Binomial Nomenclature, ICBN to IUCN; Methods of Botanicsal name(Latin)-Plant
identification: Herbarium taxonomy, Botanical gardens, Taxonomic literature, Indented and
Bracketed keys; Taxonomic hierarchy - Major categories, minor categories, species concept;
Taxonomic evidences - Morphology, Anatomy, Palynology, Embryology, Cytology,
Photochemistry, Genome analysis and Nucleic acid hybridization.

Unit III: Plant systematics and classification (13 hours)

Pre Darwinian Classification Based on form relationship (Benthem and Hooker ); Post
Darwinian classification Engler and Prantl, Bessey's, Hutchinson, Takhtajan and Cronquist;
Recent modifications : Dahlgren's system of classification; Biosystematics Concept, aims and
objectives, categories, methods in biosystematics, Ecotypic variations, scope and limitations,
comparison of classical taxonomy and biosystematics; Angiosperm Phylogeny Group IV.

Unit IV: Numerical Taxonomy (12 hours)

Phenetic methods in taxonomy (taxometrics), principles, construction of taxonomic groups,
OUTs, unit character, measurement of resemblances, cluster analysis, phenons and ranks,
discrimination, nomenclature and numerical taxonomy, applications, merits and demerits,
cladistics and cladogram, parsimony analysis, cladistics and classification

Page 18 of 30
Unit V: Chemotaxonomy (12 hours)
Significance of chemotaxonomy, classes of compounds and their biological significance, uses of
chemical criteria in plant taxonomy, protein and taxonomy, seed proteins, serology and
taxonomy, application of serological data in systematic.

REFERENCES
1. Dunn G, Everitt ES. 2012. An Introduction to Mathematical Taxonomy, Dover Publications,
New York
2. Singh G. 2016. Plant Systematics, Third Edition, Science Publishers, Plymouth
3. Sharma OP. 2016. Plant Taxonomy, 13th Reprint, Mc Graw Hill Education, New Delhi
4. Simpson MG. 2010. Plant Systematics, Second Edition, Elsevier Academic Press, USA
5. Scotland R, Pennington TR. 2000. Homology and Systematics, First Edition, Taylor and
Francis, Philadelphia, USA
6. Stevens PF. 1999. The Development of Biological Systematics, First Edition, Columbia
University Press, New York, USA
7. Forey PL. 1993. Cladistics: A Practical Course in Systematics, First Edition, Clarendon
Press, UK
8. Gibbs RD. 1974. Chemotaxonomy of Flowering Plants: Families, Vol 2, First Edition,
McGill Queen’s University Press, Canada
9. Takhtajan A. 2009. Flowering Plants, First Edition, Springer-Verlag, Germany

Page 19 of 30
 PLANT ANATOMY AND REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY

L C
60 4
Objectives:
1. Understand the types of tissues and their organization.
2. Compare the tissue components of vegetative and reproductive parts of a plant.
3. Principles of histochemistry and mothods of localization of important chemical constituents.

UnitI Meristems
Types: Apical, lateral and intercalary. Tissue system: simple and permanent tissues. Complex
tissues- xylem and phloem. vascular cambium origin, structure and development, seasonal
activity of cambium, factors affecting cambial activity. (12 hrs)

Unit II stem anatomy:

Structure of a typical young dicot stem, normal secondary growth in a dicot stem. Leaf anatomy :
structure and ontogeny of a dicot leaf, petiole anatomy. Anatomy of reproductive structure
flower bud and mature flower. Nodal anatomy ‒ Uni, tri and multilacunar node. (13 hrs)

Unit III Reproductive Biology

Floral structure, Pollination types ‒ anemophily, hydrophily entemophily, ornithophily and
chaerapterophily. Pollen pistil interaction and significance of the structure of style and stigma.
(10 hrs)

Unit IV External secretory structures

Trichomes and glands, Nectaries, Hydathodes Internal secretory structures : secretory cells,
secretory cavities and canals, laticifers. (10 hrs)

Unit V Histochemistry
Histochemical localization of cellular components - starch, Proteins Nucleic acids and lipids.
Phytochemistry - basic concepts. Qualitative tests for alkaloids flavonoids, saponins, tannins,
terpenoids and glycosides. (15 hrs)

References:
1. Eames A. J. and Mac Daniels L. H., 1990. An introduction to Plant Anatomy Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company, Bombay-New Delhi. (Unit I & II).
2. Foster and Gifford .1967. Comparative morphology of vascular plants. Second edition.
Valkis Feffer and Simons pvt. Ltd. Bombay.
3. Bhojwani,S.S. and Bhatnagar, S.P. 2005. Embryology of Angiosperms. vikas publishing
house Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. (Unit IV&V)
4. Esau K. 1991. Plant Anatomy. Wiley Eastern Limited. New Delhi.
5. Fahn. A .1987. Plant Anatomy. Pergamon press. New York.
6. Esau. K 1965. vascular differentiation. Halt Rinehart and Winston Inc United States.

Page 20 of 30
7. Metcalfe, C.R. and L Chalk, 1965. Anatomy of Dicotyledons. Vol.II. Oxford University
Press. London.
8. Maheshwari, P.1971. An Introduction to the Embryology of Angiosperms McGraw Hill
Book Company, Inc., London.
9. Shivanna, R. Jobri. B.M. and Sastri. D.C. 1985. Development and physiology
Angiosperm pollen. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. (Unit IV & V).
10. Krishnamurthy, K.V. 1988. Methods in Plant Histochemistry. Viswanathan Printers
Publishers Ltd., Chennai.

Page 21 of 30
 ALGAL TECHNOLOGY
L C
60 4

Objectives:
 To understand the concept and life cycle of algae.
 To learn the methods and approach towards the eco friendly aspects.
 To gain an insight on the various advancement in algal technology
Unit:I - General account (12 Hrs)
Introduction: General account- Distribution, resources of algae. Classification of Algae
(Fritsch,1935 &1945;Chapman and Chapman,1973;and Sybil and Parker,1981 ).Taxonomic Key
for identification of economically important algae – Intended & Bracketed keys. Identification of
algae in the field. Reseacrh centres of algae-Indian algalogists and their contribution:
F.Boergeson. M.O.P Iyengar (1886-1963), M.S.Randhawa (1932-1959). and T.V.Desikachary
(1919-2005) Role of Centre for Seaweed Herbarium & Marine Algal Research Station (MARS).

Unit: II-Structure and Reproductionof Algae(12 Hrs)

Structure and reproduction.- Range of Thallus structure , Patterns of reproduction and life cycle.
Cell structure and oganelles: Fine structure and functions. Chemical composition of marine
algae-Macro & Micromolecules. Economic Importance of Algae.
Unit-III-Common Algal Pigments(12 Hrs)
Introduction- Common Algal Pigments : Structure and propertiesof some important algal
pigments -Phycoerythrin, Phycocyanin, Beta-carotene, Chlorophyll and Fucoxanthin.
Extraction of Algal Pigments and Role of Algal Pigments- Dyes and Colorants from Algae:
Textile dyeing- Chlorophyll (Caulerpa taxifolia.) and Pharmaceutical dyeing-
anthocyanin(Spirulina sp.) .
Unit-IV- Extraction, Processing and uses of Nutraceuticals (12 Hrs)
Phycocolloids: Agar-agar (Gelidiella sp.& Gracilaria sp.), Carageenan (Hypnea sp.
&Eucheuma sp.), Algin ( Sargassum sp. & Padina sp.,) Omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids
(Nannochloropsis). Nutraceutical tablets & tonic from Spirulina sp. and β-Carotene (Dunaliella
sp.).
Unit-V- Commercial products from algae:(12 Hrs)

Page 22 of 30
Preparation and applications of the Following: Salad & Soup (Ulva, Caulerpa) Jelly, Candy,
Gelatin, Food thickners, Sushi, (Gracilaria sp. ) Tooth paste (Carageenan- Euchuma sp. ).
Seaweed Liquid Fertilizer ( Sargassum sp.), Biomedicine: Caulerpin, Caulerpicin (Caulerpa sp.)
and Heparin (Grateloupia sp.)
Text Books :
1. Ashutosh Kar (2010 ) . Chemistry of Natural Products, Vol. 1CBS Publishers and
Distributors Pvt Ltd, e-book.
2. Boergeson,F.(1938). Contributions to the South Indian marine algal flora.III. J. Indian
Bot.Soc.17:205 -242.
3. CMFRI Bulletin:40., (1998). Seweed culture, Processing and utilization, Tatapuram,
Cochin.
4. Fritsch, F.E.(1935) The Structure and Reproduction of the Algae ; Volume 1,First
Edition . Cambridge University Press
5. Fritsch F. E. (1952)The Structure and Reproduction of the Algae ; Volume 2,First
Edition.Cambridge University Press.
6. Ganguly, H.C., Kar,A. K.,and S.C.Chandra (2013) College Botany, Vol-I, New Central
Book Agency PVT.London.
7. Khattar, J.I.S., Singh, D.P., Kaur, ( 2009 ) Algal Biology and Biotechnology, -
Microalgae: A source of natural colours, Edition: 1, I. K. International Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi,
8. Laura Barsanti, Paolo Gualtieri. 2014 Algae: Anatomy, Biochemistry, and
Biotechnology, Second Edition. CRC Press.London.
9. Leela, S.S and Jyothi Kumar,2010. Algal BioProcess Techology, 1st Edition, New age
International Publishing house, New Delhi.
10. NIIR Board of Consultants & Engineers.. ISBN: 8178330326.Code: NI160. Pages: 448.
Published: 2005. The Complete book on Natural Dyes & Pigments. Publisher: Asia
Pacific Business Press Inc. e-book..
11. Pandey B.P., (2000). Revised edition, Text Book of Botany Algae, S.Chand&. Company,
New Delhi .
12. Vashista. P.C. (1996). Text book of Algae, S.Chand Publishers, Meerut.
13. Venkatataman, G.S.91962). Algal Biofertilizer and Rice cultivation, 8th Edition, Today
and Tomorrow Publishers, New Delhi.

Page 23 of 30
 BRYOPHYTE SYSTEMATICS AND EVOLUTION

L C
60 4

Objectives

 To gain knowledge on the origin, evolution and distribution of bryophytes including

fossil evidences globally.
 To have a knowledge on habitat preferences, diversity of bryophytes and factors
influencing their growth.
 To have a brief knowledge on the morphology, anatomy and life-cycle of bryophytes.
 To be aware of the factors responsible for their loss and find measures to minimize
them.

UNIT - I
Origin and evolution: Origin and distribution, Fossil bryophytes, Evolution of gametophytes,
Evolution of sporophytes, Primitive and advanced features of bryophytes. (12 hrs)

UNIT-II
Diversity: Classification of bryophytes, Diversity, Habitat diversity, Factors influencing the
growth of bryophytes, Ecological adaptations. (12 hrs)

UNIT-III
Mosses: A comparative study of the morphological and anatomical features of Sphagnales,
Polytrichales, Fissidentales, Syrrhopodontales, Funariales, Eubryales, Hookeriales and
Hypnobryales. (12 hrs)

UNIT-IV
Liverworts: Calobryales, Sphaerocarpales, Marchantiales, Metzgeriales Jungermanniales and
Anthocerotales. Economic importance of bryophytes. (12 hrs)

UNIT-V
Special features: Life-cycle of bryophytes, types of sporogonia/elaters, gemmae/receptacles,
calyptrae and operculum and peristome teeth. (12 hrs)

References
1. Cavers, F. 1981. The Interrelationships of the Bryophyta. Indian report S.N. Technico (Book
House), Patna.
2. Chopra, R.N. & Kumar, P.K. 1988. Biology of Bryophytes. Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi.
3. Daniels, A.E.D. & Daniel, P. 2013. The Bryoflora of the Southernmost Western Ghats,
India. Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun.
4. Puri, P. 1981. Bryophytes. Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi.
Page 24 of 30
5. Watson, E.V. 1980. British Mosses and Liverworts. Cambridge.

ETHNOMEDICINE

L C
60 4

 To have an insight into the various Indian Systems of medicine.

 To have a knowledge on the plants used in these systems.
 To understand the ethical values of plants involved in these systems.
 To develop methods of conservation of medicinal plants.

Unit-1 Ethnomedicine (12 hrs)

Definition, role of tribal communities in Ethnomedicine. Historical account of medicinal plants
in India. Classification of medicinal plants on the basis of morphological structure viz. leaf,
root, stem, rhizome, flower, fruits and seeds. Religious values of plants, faith and mythology,
folk songs, plants used in rituals, tribals and medicinal plants, Holy plants in ethno medicine.
Unit-2 Distribution and Status (12 hrs)
Medicinal plants in general, distribution in Western Ghats and Eastern Ghats. Medicinal plants
of Tamil Nadu: Endemic, rare and endangered species of medicinal plants.
Unit-3 Conservation (12 hrs)
Collection and conservation of medicinal plants. Sacred groves, Herbal farms, Nurseries,
Medicinal gardens, Plants in Temples, Churches and Mosques. A general account of active
principles found in the medicinal plants of Aegle, Coriandrum, Cuminum, Piper, Brassica,
Catharanthus, Artemisia, Coleus, Trichopus, Wrightia, Azadirachta and Taxus.
Unit-4 Systems of Medicine (12 hrs)
History of Ayurvedic medicine, Ranges of Ayurveda, Significance and plants used in
Ayurveda. Principles of Unani medicine, diagnosis and mode of treatment, Unani approach to
common ailments. Difference between Ayurvedic and Unani medicines, safety measures in
Unani medicines and plants used in Unani system.

Unit-5 Herbal remedies (12 hrs) for Gynaecological morbidity, plants in the treatment of
diabetes, herbal remedies for liver diseases, Plants in the treatment of skin diseases,
antivenomic and antitoxic plants.

Reference Books
1. Gurdeep Chatwal, 1983. Organic chemistry of Natural Products, Himalaya Publishing
Page 25 of 30
 House, Mumbai.
2. Jean Bruneton, 1999. Pharmacognosy, Second Edition, Lavoisier Publishers, Inc. USA.
3. Kokate, C.K., Purohit, A.P and Gokhale, S.R. 2004. Pharmacognosy, Nirali Prakashan
Publications, Pune.
4. Nitin Suri, 2010. Phytochemical Techniques, Oxford Book Company.
5. Roseline, A. 2011. Pharmacognosy, MJP Publishers, Chennai.
6. Rumit M Shah and Rupesh T Nayak, 2012. Pharmacognosy, Global Academic
Publishers, New Delhi. (Part I and Part II).
7. Wallis, T.E. 1985. Text Book of Pharmacognosy, CSB Publishers, New Delhi.
8. William Charles Evans, 2002. Pharmacognosy, Fifteenth edition, Harcourt Brase &
Company, Asia Pvt. Ltd.
9. Anonymous, 1987. The Wealth of India, (vol. 1-11). CSIR, Directorate Publications,
New Delhi.
10. Bhattacharjee, S.K. 2004. Handbook on medicinal plants, Pointer Publishers. Jaipur.
11. Sharma P. and C.Etal, 2000. Database on medicinal plants used in Ayurveda, Ministry
of Health and Family Welfare.
12. Yogaarasimhan S.N. 2000. Medicinal plants of India, Vol 2. Tamil Nadu., Inderline
Publishing Private Ltd. Bangalore, Dehra Dun and Michigan.
13. Joshi, S.J. 2000. Medicinal Plants. Oxford & IBH company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
14. Michael, A.M. Handbook of Medicinal plants. Pointer Pub., Jaipur.
15. Warrier, P.K., Nambiar, V.P.K & Ramamurthy, C. 1996. Indian Medicinal plants.
Vols. 1 - 5. Orient Longman Ltd., Hyderabad.

Page 26 of 30
 MARINE BOTANY

L C
60 4
OUTCOMES

 Students will be introduced to marine and estuarine environments

 Students will become familiar with the major micro- and macro- algal groups and marine
vascular plants.
 Students will appreciate the roles played by algae, seagrasses and aquatic vascular plants
in aquatic ecosystems.
 Students will become aware of how natural events and human activities affect coastal
habitats

UNIT: I (12 hrs)

Marine plant groups and Organisms – Brief account on Marine Phytoplankton –

Seaweeds, Seagrasses and Mangroves – Corals and coral reefs. Mangroves – adaptations of
marine plants.

UNIT: II (12 hrs)

Marine Ecology – Physical, chemical and biological characteristics of marine water.

Zonations in the oceans (Horizontal and vertical) - Dead zones (Annoxia and Hypoxia) - Tides
and their importance.

UNIT: III (12 hrs)

Photosynthesis of algae (Micro and macro) in sea – Photosynthetic pigments – carbon

fixation – Photosynthetic rate – C3 and C4 characters in algae. Photosynthesis of mangroves –
carbon fixation – Photosynthetic enzymes – accumulation of free amino acids – photorespiration
– Nutrition – Salinity regulation and Metabolism of Seaweeds and Mangroves and their methods
of regeneration – Biogeochemical role of algae.

UNIT: IV (12 hrs)

Seaweed Polysaccharides – Commercial and economical products of Seaweed (Agar,

Algin and Carrageenan) and Low molecular weight compounds in algae – Methods of collection
and preservation of Marine algae – Commercial cultivation of seaweeds (Traditional and Recent
methods) – Application and uses of Seaweeds - Economic importance of seaweeds.

UNIT: V (12 hrs)

Page 27 of 30
 Seaweed, Sea grasses, Mangroves and Coral reefs research in India and World. Marine
Pollution – human Impact - Conservation strategies of Marine vegetation - Use of Remote
sensing techniques in mapping of marine vegetation with GIS.

REFERENCES

1. Jackson, D.F. 1972. Algae and Men. Plenum Press.

2. Krishnamurthy, V. 1985. Marine Plants. Seaweed Research and utilization Association,
madras.
3. Chapman, V.J. 1976. Coastal Vegetation. Pergamon press. New York.
4. Daves, C.J. 1985. Marine Botany Physiology and Ecology of Seaweeds.
5. Dawson. 1960. Marine Botany.

Page 28 of 30
 VASCULAR CRYPTOGAMS

L C
60 4
OUTCOME
 An understanding the diversity, life-cycle patterns and major evolutionary trends of
Pteridophytes and gymnosperms.
 An understanding of the diversity of pteridophytes and gymnosperms
 An understanding of the evolution of pteridophytes and the fossilization process.

UNIT: I General characters of Pteridophytes (12 hrs)

General life cycle pattern of homosporous and heterosporous pteridophytes. General ecology of
Pteridophytes. Contributions of Indian Pteridologists.

UNIT: II Pteridophyte classification (12 hrs)

A R Smith et al. General morphological, anatomical and reproductive characters of major classes
of pteridophytes.

UNIT: III Evolution (12 hrs)

Cytological evolution in pteridophytes; apogamy and apospory; mechanism of diplospory in
apogamous ferns (Dopp and Manton, Braithwaite system).

UNIT: IV Steels (12 hrs)

Stelar types and stelar evolution, sporangial/soral types and sporangial/soral evolution in
pteridophytes.

UNIT: V Pteridophytes of India. (12 hrs)

Pteridophytes in India:- Rare and endangered species in Western Ghats, South India. Medicinal
pteridophytes; Conservation of pteridophytes in India.

REFERENCES

1. Sporne, K.R. 1985. The Morphology of Pteridophytes, Hutchinson & Co, London.
2. Pandey, B.P. 1978. Pteridophyta. S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Vashista, P.C. 1997. Pteridophyta. S. Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi
4. Rashid, A. 1990. An introduction to Pteridophyta. Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi.
5. Manickam, V. S. & Irudayaraj, V. 1992. Pteridophyte Flora of the Western Ghats,

Page 29 of 30
 South India. BI Publications, Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
6. Manickam, V. S. & Irudayaraj, V. 2003. Pteridophyte Flora of Nilgiris, south India.
Bishen Singh & Mahendra Pal Singh. Dehradun, India.
7. Nayar, B. K. & Kaur, S. 1971. Gametophytes of homosporous ferns. The Bot. Rev. 37:
295-396.
8. Pullaiah, T. 2003. Pteridophytes in Andhra Pradesh India. Daya Publishing House, India.
9. Smith et al., 2006. A classification of extant pteridophytes. Taxon 55(3): 705-731.
10. Schneider et al., 2016. A community-derived classification for extant lycophytes and
ferns. The Pteridophyte Phylogeny Group. J. Syst. & Evol. 54: 563-603.

Page 30 of 30
 DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
Ph.D. Course Work Papers

Sl. Name of the Course Credit

No.
1 Analytical Methods And Instrumentation 4
2 Corrosion Science and Engineering 4
3 Research and Teaching Methodology 4
4 Advanced Scientific Techniques in 4
Chemical Analysis
5 Advanced Topics in Organic Chemistry 4
6 Chromatography 4
7 Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry 4
8 Adsorption and Catalysis 4
9 Nanomaterials And Their Applications To Solar 4
Energy Conversion
10 Phyto-Biosynthesis and Applications of 4
Metal Nanoparticles
11 Mini Project 4
12 Heterogenous Catalysis 4

Page 1 of 23
Paper: I
ANALYTICAL METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Hrs.– 60 Credit – 4
Objectives:
1. To understand the analytical data interpretation and result analysis.
2. To study about various chromatography technique for chemical
analysis.
3. To study about the spectroscopic technique and instrumentation
method of chemical analysis.
Unit-I Treatment of Analytical data and Interpretation (12hrs.)

Accuracy and Precision in measurements. Reliability of Analytical Data – Errors in

Chemical analysis, Classification, Determination. Improving accuracy of analysis. Statistical
analysis – Student t-test, F-test.

Unit-II Separation Technique (12hrs.)

Chromatographic techniques – paper, thin layer column chromatography, Gas
Chromatography (GC)- Instrumentation, application. Principle and application of GCMS,
LCMS, ion exchange chromatography. Flash Chromatography (FC) – Principle and application.
Extraction Methods – Solvent extraction, Solid Phase extraction (SPE). Microwave Assisted
Extraction (MAE), Soxhlet Extraction.

Unit- III Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis (12hrs.)

Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (AAS) and Atomic Emision Spectroscopy (AES) –
Principle Instrumentation and Application. X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) – Theory
and Instrumentation, XPS imaging, Surface analytical techniques – XRD, SEM, TEM –
applications.

Unit-IV Spectroscopic Analysis (12hrs.)

UV-Vis and IR spectroscopy – UV-Vis spectra of enes, enones, arenes, and conjugated
systems. Effect of solvent on UV-Vis spectra. IR- Principle, Instrumentation and Application.
Characteristiiic group frequencies and functional group detection using IR.

Page 2 of 23
Mass Spectroscopy (MS) – EI, CI, FAB, ESI and MALDI ion sources. Characteristic EIMS
fragmentation and MS rearrangements. Spectral interpretation and structural determining using
mass spectrum.

Unit-V NMR Spectroscopy and Structure elucidation (12hrs.)

1 13
Basic Principle of NMR –H and C Chemical Shift, spin-spin coupling, Coupling
constant, J-value. Applications of NOE, DEPT and 2D techniques – COSY, HSQC and HSBC.
Structure elucidation of organic compounds using spectral data – UV, IR, NMR and MS.

References:
1. Douglas A. Skoog. F James Holler; Stanley; R. Cruch, “Principle of instrumental analysis”
Cole pub Co, (2006).
st
2. S.M. Khopkar, “ Basic Principles of Analytical Chemistry” 1 Edition, Wiley pub, (1984).
rd
3. W. Kemp, “Organic Spectroscopy”, 3 Edition, Palgrave Macmillan, (1991).
rd
4. D.L. Pavia, G.M. Lampman and G.S. Kriz “ Introduction to Spectroscopy” 3 Edition,
Brooks/Cole, (2001).
th
5. D.H. Williams and I. Fleming “ Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry” 5 Edition,
Macraw-Hill (1989).

Page 3 of 23
Paper: II
CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Hours : 60 Credits: 4
Objectives
1. To study the Principle and mechanism of electrochemical reactions involved in corrosion
and preventive methods.

2. To gain knowledge on measurement of various adsorption and thermodynamic parameters

related to corrosion.

3. To learn the basic terminology involved in electrochemical cell reaction and their
application in some electrochemical based titration.

4. To understand the principles and working of some batteries and fuel cells. To impart
knowledge on Classification, properties and uses of alloys.

5. To study the preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.

Unit-1: Corrosion (12 hrs)

Definition – causes - factors – types – chemical, electrochemical corrosion (galvanic,

differential aeration), corrosion control – material selection and design aspect –

electrochemical protection – sacrificial anode method and impressed current cathodic

method. Paints – constituent and function, Electroplating of copper and electroless

plating of nickel

Unit-II: Non-Electrochemical methods (12 hrs)

Adsorption - Physisorption – Chemisorption - Surface area determination - Mass loss

measurements, Corrosion parameters Temperature studies – Adsorption - Temkin –

Langmuir adsorption isotherm, Change in entropy, enthalpy, Gibbs free energy, Heat of

adsorption, Activation energy - Green inhibitors.

Page 4 of 23
Unit-III: Electrochemistry (12 hrs)

Electrochemical cell – redox reaction, electrode potential – origin of electrode potential –

oxidation potential – reduction potential – electrochemical series and its significance –

Nernst equation. Precipitation titration - Conductometric titration – Potentiometric

titration – pH meter.

Unit-IV: Batteries, Fuel cells and Alloys (12 hrs)

Batteries - Types of batteries – alkaline battery – lead storage battery – nickel cadmium

battery – lithium battery – Fuel cells – Hydrogen oxygen fuel cell.

Alloys: Introduction – Definition – Properties of alloys – Significance of alloying,

Function and effects of alloying elements – Ferrous alloys – Nichrome and Stainless

steel – heat treatment of steel; Non-ferrous alloys – brass and bronze.

Unit-V: Engineering Materials (12 hrs)

Abrasives: definition, classification or types, grinding wheel, abrasive paper and cloth.

Refractories: definition, characteristics, classification properties – refractoriness and

RUL, dimensional stability, thermal spalling, thermal expansion, porosity: Manufacture

of alumina, magnesite and silicon carbide.

Reference:
1. R. Winston Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig “Corrosion and Corrosion control: An
th
introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering”, 4 Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc, 2008
nd
2. Perez, Nestor “Electrochemistry and Corrosion Science”, 2 Edition, Springer
nd
3. Principles of Materials Science & Engineering, 2 Edition by W. F. Smith, 1990
4. Robert G. Kelly, John R. Scully, David Shoesmith, Rudolph G. Buchheit
st
“Electrochemical Techniques in Corrosion Science and Engineering” 1 Edition, 2002
5. Volkan Cicek, Bayan Al-Numan “Corrosion Chemistry” Wiley
6. Pierre R. Roberge, “Handbook of Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 2005
Page 5 of 23
7. B. Siva Shankar, “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Limited, 3rd
Edition, 2015.
8. S. S. Dara, Mukkanti, “Text of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Co, New
Delhi, 12th Edition, 2006.
9. C. V. Agarwal, C. P. Murthy, A. Naidu, “Chemistry of Engineering Materials”, Wiley
India, 5th Edition, 2013.
10. R. P. Mani, K. N. Mishra, “Chemistry of Engineering Materials”, Cengage
Learning, 3rd Edition, 2015.
11. S.L.Chawla, R.K.Gupta, “Materials selection for corrosion control, First printing,
Dec.1993.
12. P.H.Reiger, “Electrochemistry”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
rd
13. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill Education, 3 Edition
14. S. Glasstone, An introduction to Electrochemistry, Van Nostrand, New York, 1965.
15. A. J. Bard, L.R. Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and
Applications,John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1980.
16. R. Crow, Principles and Applications of Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall,
London,1979.
17. J. D. M. Bockris, A.K.N. Reddy, Modern Electrochemistry, Vol. I & II, Plenum
Press,New York, 3rd Reprint, 1977.

18. Dr.A.Ravikrishnan, “ Engineering chemistry – II” , Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing

Company Pvt.Ltd, Updated edition,2015-2016.
19. Dr.A.Ravikrishnan, “ Engineering chemistry ” , Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing
Company Pvt.Ltd, Revised edition,2017-2018.
20. P. C. Jain, Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company, 15th Edition, 2015.
21. Shasi Chawla, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, Dhantpat Rai Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 1st Edition.
22. Dr. V. Veeraiyan and Dr. L. Devaraj Stephen, “ Engineering chemistry – II” VRS
Publishers Pvt.Ltd, 2015-2016.

Page 6 of 23
Paper-III

RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objective

1. To introduce the purpose and importance of research for future development.

2. To know the various indexes and abstracts in science and technology as a source
of all information in chemistry.
3. To learn the ways of carrying out literature search for current awareness and for the
retrospective survey.
4. To know the methodology of writing thesis and journal articles.

5. To know about the teaching methodology for teaching the scientific concepts and
techniques to students

Unit –I : Scientific Research (12hrs.)

Introduction to Research, Selection of a research topic, reviewing the literature,

preparing the proposal and design of study Experimentation and interpretation of results.
Formation, testing and rejection of hypothesis. Preparation and presentation of reports,
dissertation and thesis writing.

Unit-II : Chemical Literature (12hrs.)

Primary and secondary literature: Journals, Patents, Reviews, Chemical abstracts,

treatises, monographs and online journals. Web browsing for Research. ASAP alerts, CA Alerts,
Scifinder, Chemport, Science direct, STN international, Journal home pages. Impact factor,
citations and h-index. Scopus, Web of Science and Google scholar.

Unit-III: Error Analysis (12hrs.)

Limitation of analytical methods, accuracy, precision & minimization of errors –

systematic and random errors and reliability of results – Mode – Median – Mean – Standard
deviation- Variance & Covariance, normal distribution and the normal probability curve.

Page 7 of 23
Unit-IV: Correlation methods & Non-parametric tests (12hrs.)

Scatter diagram and linear regression line: Spearman rank order correlation, Pearson’s
product moment correlation - Correlation co-efficient.
Non-parametric tests - ᵡ2 test, Median test, Mann-Whitney test, Sign test, Wilcox on
matched-pairs signed ranks test.

Unit-V: Methodology of Teaching (12hrs.)

Teaching- Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: Lecture Method,

Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving Method, Project method,
Seminar – Integrating ICT in Teaching: Individualized Instruction, Ways for Effective
Presentation with Power Point- Documentation – Evaluation: Formative, Summative &
Continuous and comprehensive Evaluation- Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical,
Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral Development – Teaching Later Adolescents

References:

1. Rajammal P. Devadas, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, S.R.K. Vidyalaya

Press, Chennai, 1976.
2. J. Anderson, B.H. Durstan and M. Poole, Thesis and assignment writing, Wiley
Eastern, New Delhi, 1977.
3. R.O. Butlet, Preparing thesis and other manuscript.
4. R. L. Dominoswki, Research Methods, Prentice Hall, 1981.
5. J. W.Best, Research in Education, 4th ed. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1981.
6. H. F. Ebel, C. Bliefert and W.E. Russey, The Art of Scientific Writing, VCH,
Weinheim, 1988.
7. Joseph, A. Methodology for Research; Theological Publications: Bangalore, 1986.
8. Sampath, K., Panneerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to
educational technology. (2nd revised ed.). New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
9. Sharma, S.R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools &
Techniques. Jaipur: Mangal Deep
10. Vedanayagam, E.G. (1989). Teaching technology for college teachers. New
York: Sterling Publishers.

Page 8 of 23
Paper-IV

ADVANCED SCIENTIFIC TECHNIQUES IN CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To master the basic principles of spectroscopy to apply for structural elucidation.

2. To learn the methods of characterizing compounds by spectroscopic techniques.
3. To learn the various instrumental methods studying a given compound.
4. To learn the separation techniques for organic and inorganic compounds.
5. To learn about industrial analytical processes.

Unit –I : Absorption Spectroscopy (12hrs.)

Infrared and Raman Spectroscopy: FT-IR, basic principles, quantitative IR, resonance
Raman and laser Raman spectroscopy, applications of IR and Raman spectroscopy to organic
and inorganic compounds.
Electronic Spectroscopy: term symbols, spin-orbit coupling in free ions, electronic
spectra of Oh and Td complexes, charge transfer transition, structural evidence from electronic
spectra.
Unit II: Applications of Advanced Organic Spectroscopy (12hrs.)
NMR: Basic principles of two-dimensional NMR spectroscopy – HOMOCOSY,
HETCOSY and NOESY spectra and their applications – use of INEPT and DEPT methods and
their applications.
Mass: Molecular ions, isotope peaks, fragmentation pattern – McLafferty rearrangement
- measurement techniques (EI, CI FI, FD, FAB, SIMS, MALDI) – M + 1 and M + 2 ions –
calculation of molecular formula from PM+1 and PM+2
Road-map problems covering UV, IR, 1H-NMR, 13C-NMR and mass spectral data.
Unit-III: Spectroscopy (12hrs.)

Nuclear Quadruple Resonance Spectroscopy: effect of magnetic field on the spectra,

electric field gradient and molecular structure, structural elucidation of inorganic and
coordination compounds.
Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy: hyperfine splitting in isotropic systems;
epr spectra of systems with more than one unpaired electrons-Kramer’s degeneracy, zero field

Page 9 of 23
splitting, epr of triplet states, anisotropy in g-value, anisotropy in hyperfine splitting, nuclear
quadrupleinteraction; applications of epr to organic and inorganic compounds.
Mossbauer Spectroscopy: interpretation of isomer shifts, quadruple and magnetic
interactions, Mossbauer emission spectroscopy, structural elucidation.

Unit IV: Diffraction & Surface Techniques: (12hrs.)

Principles and applications of XRD, Neutron and electron diffraction – Scanning
electron microscopy (SEM)- Instrumentation – applications – surface area analysis, particle size
determination – Scanning Probe Microscopes – Scanning Tunneling Microscopes – Atomic
force microscopes (AFM) – Principle &applications.

Unit V: Electrochemical Techniques (12hrs.)

Polarography – Chronopotentiometry – Chronoamperometry – chronocontometry- Linear
Potential Sweep voltametry – Cyclic Voltametry – ImpendenceMeasurements – AC Voltametry
– Principles and their applications.

References:

1. Introduction to Nanoscience- Gabor. L, Hornyak. Joydeep Dutta CRC Press 2008.

2. L. Antropov, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Mir Publication, Moscow, 1972.
3. D.A. Skoog and J.J. Leary, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 4th Edn., Saunders
College Publishing, 1992.
4. D.A. Skoog, F.S.Holler, S.R.Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th Edn.,
Thomson Brooks/cole, 2007.
5. A.K. Cheetham, P.Day, Solid State Chemistry: Techniques, Oxford University Press,
Oxford, 1987.
6. G. E. Bacon, Neutron diffraction, Oxford Universtiy Press, Oxford, 1975.
7. R.S. Drago, Physical Methods in Chemistry, Saunders, 1999.
8. Spectrometric Identification of Organic Comounds – Silverstein, Bassler and Morril.
9. Organic Spectroscopy – William Kemp

Page 10 of 23
 Paper V

ADVANCED TOPICS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To learn the various reagents and their application in organic synthesis

2. To study the retro synthetic analysis
3. To understand the concept of linear free-energy relationships
4. To know about the biochemical activities of amino acids and proteins
5. To study on the nucleic acids structure and function

Unit I: Organic Reagents (12hrs.)

Gilman’s reagents – DCC – Grignard reagents – crown ethers – NBS – BF3 complexes –
SeO2 – 1, 3-dithiane, tri-n-butyl tin hydride – phase transfer catalysts – Wilkinson’s catalyst.

Unit II: Retro synthetic Analysis (12hrs.)

Introduction to disconnections – one group disconnections – two group disconnections –

peri cyclic reactions – Heteroatoms and heterocyclic compounds – small rings: three membered,
four membered, and five membered.

Unit III: Advances in Linear Free-Energy Relationships (12hrs.)

An introduction to linear free-energy relationships (LFER) – the Hammett equation – the
duality of substituent constants and the Yukawa-Tasumo equation – the general validity of the
Hammett equation – deviations from the Hammett equation in its various forms; the separation
of polar, steric and resonance effects – Taft’s equations; the ortho-effect; application of LFER to
organic reactions; Influence of solvent on organic reactivity; the reactivity-selectivity principle.

UNIT IV: Amino Acids and Proteins (12hrs.)

Structure and Classification – abbreviated names (1 letter and 3 letter) – Physical

properties of amino acids – chemical properties – codons – Structure and importance of simple
peptides like glutathione, Carnosine, anserine, vasopressin – Peptide antibiotics – gramicidin,

Page 11 of 23
bacitracine, actinomycin D - Peptide synthesis – Acid chloride method – DCC method –
Determination of primary structure of peptide – Identification of N-terminal amino acid –
Barger’s method – the DNP method – identification of C-terminal amino acid – Hierarchial
representation of protein Primary, Secondary, tertiary and quaternary structures – Ramachandran
plot.

UNIT V: Purine, Pyrimidine and Nucleic Acids (12hrs.)

Structure of Purines, Pyrimidines – Nucleoside – ribonucleoside, deoxyribonucleosides –

nucleotides – ribonucleotides – deoxyribonucleotides – structure and functions of DNA - Watson
and Crick model of DNA- Structure of types of RNA (m-RNA, t-RNA and r-RNA) – Nucleases
– structure and function of DNA and RNA – polynucleotide – cyclic nucleotide – structure and
function of cAMP, cGMP nucleoprotein – Types of DNA (A-DNA, B-DNA, Z-DNA)

References:

1. Reaction Mechanism and Reagents in Organic Chemistry – Gurdeep R. Chatwal

2. Designing Organic Synthesis: A Programmed Introduction to the Synthon Approach –
Stuart Warren
3. N.B. Chapman and J. Shorter, Eds., Advances in Linear Free-Energy Relationships,
Plenum Press, London, 1972.
4. J. Shorter, Correlation Analysis in Organic Chemistry – An Introduction to Linear Free-
Energy Relationships, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1973.
5. N.B. Chapman and J. Shorter, Eds., Correlation Analysis in Chemistry-Recent Advances,
Plenum Press, New York, 1978.
6. J. Shorter, Correlation Analysis of Organic Reactivity, Research Studies Press, England,
1982.
7. Biochemistry, Lehinger J.CB S.Publishers,1993.
8. Biochemistry, U. Satyanarayana & U. Chakrapani, Books & Allied Pvt. Ltd, 1999.
9. Biochemistry –– Lubert Stryer – W. H. Freeman and company, 4th Edn., New York,
1995.

Page 12 of 23
Paper VI

CHROMATOGRAPHY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To understand the chromatographic basic principles

2. To learn the thinlayer chromatographic techniques
3. To understand about the ion exchange concepts
4. To learn about the high performance liquid chromatography for organic analysis
5. To study about the gas chromatography technique for volatile and gas molecule analysis

UNIT I: Chromatography (12hrs.)

Classification of Chromatography methods. Column Chromatography- Principles,
experimental procedures, stationary and mobile phases, Choice of Solvent Systems, Separation
techniques. Applications.
Rf values, Factors affecting Rf values, Experimental procedures, Choice of paper and
solvent systems, developments of chromatogram. Detection of the spots. Ascending, Descending
and Radial Paper Chromatography, Two Dimensional Chromatography –Applications.

UNIT II: THINLAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principles, factors affecting Rf values. Experimental Procedures, Choice of adsorbents

and Solvents. Preparation of plates, development of the Chromatogram. Detection of the spots,
advantages of thin Layer Chromatography over paper chromatography and Applications.

UNIT III: ION EXCHANGE CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principle, ion exchange resins and their types- cation exchange resins, anion exchange
resins, ion exchange equilibria, properties of ion exchange resins, ion exchange capacity and
techniques – applications.

Page 13 of 23
UNIT IV: HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Introduction, instrumentation, stationary and mobile Phases. Mobile Phase –

Composition. Column – Preparation, Cleaning –regeneration and Storage Conditions. Retention
time- Types of HPLC. Applications.

UNIT V: GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principle, instrumentation choice of injectors, column and detectors - Programmed

temperature chromatography, flow programming chromatography, gas-solid chromatography,
and hyphenated techniques in chromatography- Applications of Gas chromatography.

REFERENCES:
1. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry – D.A.Skoog, D.M. West, F.J. Holler and S.R.
Crouch – 2004; Thompson Asia Private Ltd., Bangalore.
2. Instrumental Methods of Analysis – B. K. Sharma, 2003; Goel publishing House, Meerut.
3. Contemporary Chemical Analysis - Judith F. Rubinson, Prentice Hall (India).
4. Instrumental Methods of Analysis Hobart H. Willard, Lynne L. Merritt Jr, John Dean,
Wadsworth Publishing Co Inc; 7th Edn., 1988.
5. Thin Layer Chromatography- A laboratory Handbook, Ashworth, Stahl. E., 1st Edn.,
Springer-Verlag, 1969.
6. Dynamics of Chromatography - Principles and Theory, J. Calvin Giddings, CRC Press,
2002.
7. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanley R.
Crouch, 2006.

Page 14 of 23
Paper VII
ADVANCED TOPICS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the concept of Photochemistry

2. To understand the principles about the chemical kinetics
3. To learn about the thermodynamics behavior of systems in chemistry
4. To understand the physical characteristics of biomolecules
5. To understand the various concept of Analytical techniques

Unit I: Advanced Photochemistry (12hrs.)

Artificial photosynthesis and solar energy conversion – Photo electrochemical cells –
dynamics of excited state processes (excited state energy, redox properties, emission lifetime and
its temperature dependence) in micelles, reverse micelles and biomembranes – Fluorescence –
quenching and anisotropy concepts; fluorescence sensing – mechanism and applications;
Radioactive decay engineering – metal-enhanced fluorescence and surface Plasmon-coupled
emission.
Unit – II: Advanced chemical kinetics (12hrs.)
Experimental methods for fast reactions- temperature jump, pressure jump stopped flow
and flash photolysis – pulse technique – short tube kinetics.
NMR studies in rate process - Enzyme kinetics of complicated systems – theory of
diffusion controlled reactions.
Unit – III: Irreversible thermodynamics (12hrs.)
Internal heat & entropy production – relation of entropy production with flux & forces –
phenomenological equation – Prigogine’s principle of minimum entropy production at non-
equilibrium stationary state.

Unit – IV: Biophysical chemistry (12hrs.)

Biomembranes (structure & function) – Active transport & passive transport – multiple
equilibria – specific examples of multiple equilibria – Transport processes – general features of
transport processes optical systems of rht e study of transport processes – self organizing systems

Page 15 of 23
– (Micelles, lipids, cyclodextrins, liquid crystals, reverse micelles ) their interactions and
solutions properties.

Unit – V: Analytical techniques (12hrs.)

Thermal methods: TGA, DTA, DSC, Thermometric titration - Adsorption/desorption

techniques: BET and EGME methods of determination of external and total surface area.

References:

1. K. Kalyanasundaram, Photochemistry in Microheterogeneous Systems, Academic

Press, Orlando, 1987.
2. Extended irreversible thermodynamics – David Jon, Jose casas Vazques, 2012
3. Understanding Non-equilibrium Thermodyanmics – Geogy Lebon, David Jon- 02008
4. Chemical kinetics: Fundementals & New developments, E.T. Densov, Ergenii
tinofeerich , 2003
5. Chemical Kinetics, Laidler
6. Biophysical chemistry Alan Cooper – 2011
7. Biophysical chemistry, James P. Allen – 2008
8. Fundamentals of Analytical chemistry – Douglas A. Skoog Donal M. west 2013

Page 16 of 23
Paper VIII
ADSORPTION AND CATALYSIS

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the various adsorption process connected with catalysis process
2. To study about the preparation methods of adsorbents
3. To evaluate the physico chemical properties of adsorbent by spectral studies
4. To study about the vapour phase and liquid phase catalysis and adsorption parameters
5. To learn about the adsorption isotherms and product analysis

Unit: I Adsorption & Catalysis (12hrs.)

Concept of adsorption – types of adsorption, monolayer and multilayer adsorption.
Adsorption - activation energy and temperature relationships, different between adsorption and
catalysis, catalysis - homogeneous catalysis, heterogeneous catalysis, Acid -- base catalysis.

Unit: II Methods of preparation (12hrs.)

Adsorbent - adsorbent preparation from plant materials, activated carbon preparation, synthetic
adsorbent/catalyst - Molecular sieves – microporous & mesoporous molecular sieves – silicates,
Aluminosilicates, Aluminophosphates – structure, acidic and basic sites.

Unit: III Spectral studies on Adsorbent (12hrs.)

Characterization of adsorbent and catalyst - X-Ray Diffraction (XRD), Fourier transform
infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR), Differential thermal analysis(DTA) , Nuclear magnetic resonance
spectroscopy (NMR), Temperature programmed desorption (TPD), Electron spin resonance
spectroscopy(ESR) Scanning electron microscopy(SEM), BET Surface Area, pore size analysis.

Unit: IV Reactions & Factors (12hrs.)

Liquid phase - heterogeneous reaction conditions optimization - Temperature, pH, time
and molar ratios. Vapor phase reaction, Regeneration of catalyst.
Adsorption – adsorption of dye molecules, metal ions, sugar molecules and other suitable

molecules, conditions optimization – time, temperature, PH, concentration and adsorbent dosage.

Page 17 of 23
Unit: V Techniques (12hrs.)
Product analysis in catalysis reactions – Gas chromatographic technique, conversion and
product selectivity.Interpretation of adsorption parameters - Adsorption kinetics, adsorption
isotherms and adsorption thermodynamics.

References:

1. Environmentally stable adsorbent of tetrahedral silica and non tetrahedral alumina for
removal and recovery of malachite green dye from aqueous solution, J.Hazardous
materials, 157 (2008) 137-145.
2. Plant poisoning organic dyes adsorption on tomato plant root and green carbon from
aqueous solution, Desalination, 249 (2009)1132-1138.
3. Film and pore diffusion modeling for the adsorption of direct red 81 on activated carbon
prepared from balsamodendron caudatum wood waste, Digest Journal of Nanomaterials
and Biostructures, Vol. 5, No 3, July 2010, p. 911 – 919
4. Plant toxic and non-toxic nature of organic dyes through adsorption mechanism on
cellulose surface, Journal of Hazardous materials,189 (2011) 294–300.
5. Adsorption of cationic and anionic organic dyes from aqueous solution using Silica, J.
Environmental Science and Engineering, volume 52, No.4 (2010) 361-366
6. Hazardous dyes removal from aqueous solution over mesoporous aluminophosphate
molecular sieves with textural porosity by adsorption, Journal of Hazardous Materials
244– 245 (2013) 10– 20.
7. A Simple Method for the Synthesis of Thermally Stable Large Pore Mesoporous
Aluminophosphate Molecular Sieves, Materials letters, 113 (2013) 93–95.
8. Aniline methylation over AFI and AEL type molecular sieves, App. Catal., Vol. 174,
1998, 213.
9. Adsorptive removal of metanyl yellow on mesoporous Nickel aluminophosphate
molecular sieves from aqueous solution, Asian J. of chemistry, vol. 24, no.12(2012),
5775-5778
10. Recent trends in catalysis, Narosa publication, 1st edition 2000.

Page 18 of 23
Paper IX
NANOMATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS TO SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the Nanomaterials

2. To study about the dye-sensitized solar cells
3. To learn about the Semiconductor and microemulsion (quantum dots)
4. To understand the Photochemistry and corrosion principles
5. To understand about the solar cell concepts

Unit I: Nanomaterials (12hrs.)

Introduction to Nanoscience: Introduction- definition of Nanoscience, nanochemistry-
classification of the nanomaterials
Synthesis of nanomaterials: Precipitative methods – hydrothermal and solvothermal
methods - chemical methods - reduction methods – colloidal and micellar approach – sol-gel
method – chemical vapor deposition method.
Specialized Nanomaterials: Metal oxide nanoparticles, semiconductor nanoparticles and
core/shell nanoparticles

Unit II: Dye-sensitized solar cells (12hrs.)

Solar energy conversion and storage – photo electrochemical cells – dye-sensitized solar
cells – design and fabrication - power conversion efficiency
Use of metal and metal-free dye sensitizers in photovoltaic devices.

Unit III: Semiconductor and microemulsion (quantum dots) (12hrs.)

Review of published literature – Water-soluble silica-coated semiconductor quantum dots
– synthesis, characterization and properties.
Thickness-controllable silica coating of quantum dots – synthesis by microemulsion
method and application in the growth of rice.

Unit IV: Photochemistry and corrosion (12hrs.)

Review of published literature – Silica coated cadmium sulfide nanocomposites –
synthesis, structure, optic and its photo catalytic properties.
Zirconia-coated carbonyl iron particles – synthesis and corrosion study.
Page 19 of 23
Unit V : Solar cell (12hrs.)
Review of published literature – Ruthenium (II) sensitizer in dye-sensitized solar cells
using an organic dye as co-sensitizer – Fabrication and device characterization - photovoltaic
performance.
Dye-sensitized solar cells - Co-sensitization strategy – electrochemical properties – Photo
electrochemical performances – Electrochemical impedance spectroscopy – dark current
measurement – Open-circuit voltage decay.

References

1. H. R. Allcock, Introduction to Materials Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Publication,
2008.
2. T. Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2007.
3. A. Hagfeldt, et al. Chem. Rev., 2010, 110, pp. 6595–6663.
4. J. Gong, J. Liang, K. Sumathy, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 2012, 16, 8,
5848-5860.
5. X. Chen, F. Liu, Q. Jiang, L. Sun, Q. Wang, J. Inorg. Organomet. Polym, 2012, 22:6-11.
6. A. Wang, Y. Zheng, F. Peng, J. Spectros. 2014, Article ID 169245, 1-5.
7. N. Gupta, B. Pal, J. Colloid and Int. Sci., 2010, 368, 250-256.
8. R. Chen et al. J. Colloid and Int. Sci., 2010, 342, 49-56.
9. U. Mehmood, I. A. Hussein, K. Harrabi, N. Tabet, G. R. Berdiyorov, RSC Adv., 2016, 6,
7897-7901.
10. L. Wei, Y. Na, Y. Yang, R. Fan, P. Wang, L. Li, Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2015, 17,
1273-1280.

Page 20 of 23
Paper X
PHYTO-BIOSYNTHESIS AND APPLICATIONS OF METAL NANOPARTICLES
No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the Extraction and Isolation of natural products from Medicinal plants
2. To synthesis nanomaterial by using natural products
3. To understand the physico chemical properties of Nanoparticles
4. To utilize the nanoparticles for Biological Applications
5. To study the Nanoparticles application on Green catalysis

Unit I - Extraction and Isolation of some Indian Medicinal plants (12hrs.)

i) Solid-Phase Extraction and LC−MS analysis of Pyrrolizidine Alkaloids in Honeys.
ii) Comparative study of phytochemical screening, antioxidant and antimicrobial
capacities of fresh and dry leaves crude plant extracts of Datura metel L.

Unit II – Biosynthesis of Metal Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Green synthesis of silver nanoparticles using Ixora coccinea leaves extract.
ii) Ultrasmall Copper Nanoparticles Synthesized with a Plant Tea Reducing Agent.

Unit III – Characterization of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Phytosynthesis of silver nanoparticles using Coccinia grandis leaf extract and its
application in the photocatalytic degradation
ii) A facile synthesis of high optical quality silver nanoparticles by ascorbic acid
reduction in reverse micelles at room temperature.

Unit IV – Biological Applications of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) The green synthesis, characterization and evaluation of the biological activities of
silver nanoparticles synthesized from Iresine herbstii leaf aqueous extracts
ii) In vitro evaluation of antioxidant and anticancer potential of Morinda pubescens
synthesized silver nanoparticles.

Unit V – Green catalytic activity of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Catalytic Reduction of 4-Nitrophenol using Biogenic Gold and Silver Nanoparticles
Derived from Breynia rhamnoides.
ii) Catalytic degradation of organic dyes using biosynthesized silver nanoparticles.

Page 21 of 23
 References
1. K. A. Beales, K. Betteridge, S.M. Colegate, J.A. Edgar. Journal of Agric. Food Chem.
2015, 63, 7421−7427
2. Tahiya Hilal Ali Alabri, Amira Hamood Salim Al Musalami, Mohammad Amzad
Hossain, Afaf Mohammed Weli, Qasim Al-Riyami. Journal of King Saud University –
Science 2014, 26, 237–243
3. Muthu Karuppiah, Rangasamy Rajmohan. Materials Letters 97 (2013) 141–143.
4. Aaron D. Brumbaugh, Katelyn A. Cohen, and Sarah K. St. Angelo. ACS Sustainable
Chem. Eng. 2014, 2, 1933−1939.
5. Rajeswari Arunachalam, Sujatha Dhanasingh, Balasaraswathi Kalimuthu, Mani
Uthirappan, Chellan Rose, Asit Baran Mandal. Colloids and Surfaces B: Biointerfaces
94, 2012, 226-230
6. Debabrata Singha, Nabajeet Barman, Kalyanasis Sahu. Journal of Colloid and Interface
Science 413 (2014) 37–42.
7. C. Dipankar, S. Murugan. Colloids and Surfaces B: Biointerfaces 98 (2012) 112– 119
8. L. Inbathamizh, T. Mekalai Ponnu, E. Jancy Mary. Journal of pharmacy research 6
(2013) 32-38.
9. Abilash Gangula, Ramakrishna Podila, Ramakrishna M, Lohith Karanam, Chelli
Janardhana, and Apparao M. Rao. Langmuir 2011, 27, 15268 – 15274.
10. V.K. Vidhu, D. Philip. Micron 56 (2014) 54–62.

Paper: XI Mini Project Credit:4

Page 22 of 23
 Paper-XII
Heterogeneous Catalysis

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives
1. To Learn about the prorous materials
2. To Understand the concept of metal doping and photocatalytic function of the material.
3. To study the catalytic and photocatalytic activity of the materials.
Unit I
Zeolite-based photocatalysts - Zeolites and molecular sieves acting as hosts for
photoactive guests - Electron donor photosensitisers - organic dye - electron acceptor
photosensitisers - Zeolites encapsulating clusters of semiconductor oxides - Zeolites having
photocatalytically active framework.
Efficient photocatalytic degradation of organics diluted in water and air using TiO2
designed with zeolites and mesoporous silica materials.
Unit II
Effect of metal-doping of TiO2 nanoparticles on their photocatalytic activities toward
removal of organic dyes.
Solar photocatalytic degradation of phenol using nanosized ZnO and α-Fe2O3.
Unit III
Network Structured SnO2/ZnO Heterojunction Nanocatalyst with High Photocatalytic
Activity.
Green synthesis of copper nanoparticles for the efficient removal (degradation) of dye
from aqueous phase.
Unit IV
Visible Light Photodegradation of Phenol Using Nanoscale TiO2 and ZnO Impregnated
with Merbromin Dye: A Mechanistic Investigation.
Fe(III)/TiO2-Montmorillonite Photocatalyst in Photo-Fenton-Like Degradation of
Methylene Blue.
Unit V
TiO2 nanoparticles immobilized on carbon nanotubes for enhanced visible-light photo-
induced activity.
Preparation of a Titania/X-Zeolite/Porous Glass Composite Photocatalyst Using
Hydrothermal and Drop Coating Processes.

References

1. Chem. Communi., 2004, 1443-1459

2. J. Mater. Chem., 2011, 21, 2407–2416 | 2407
3. Egyptian Journal of Petroleum (2014) 23, 419–426
4. Journal of Chemical Engineering and Materials Science, Vol. 4(7), pp. 87-92, November 2013
5. Inorganic Chemistry, Vol. 48, No. 5, 2009 1819-1825
6. ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND POLLUTION RESEARCH · AUGUST 2015, DOI
10.1007/s11356-015-5223-y
7. Iran. J. Chem. Chem. Eng, Vol. 33, No. 2, 2014
8. International Journal of Chemical Engineering, Volume 2015, Article ID 485463,
9. J. M a t e r . R e s. T e c h n o l . 2 0 1 5;4(2):126–132
10. Molecules 2015, 20, 2349-2363; doi:10.3390/molecules20022349
Page 23 of 23
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

Ph.D - Course Work Papers

Sl.No COURSE TITLE CREDIT

1. Teaching and Research methodology 4
2. Human Resource Management 4
3. Industrial relations and Labour Welfare 4
4. Stress Management 4
5. Training and Development 4
6. Entrepreneurship Development 4
7. Business Ethics and corporate Governance 4
8. Banking theory Law and Practice 4
9. Security Analysis and portfolio Management 4
10. Merchant Banking and Financial services 4
11. International Trade 4
12. International Finance 4
13. Financial Management 4
14. Accounting for Financial decision making 4
15. Indian Financial System 4
16. Customer Relationship Management 4
17. Marketing Management 4
18. Supply chain Management 4
19. Integrated Marketing Communication 4
20. Rural Marketing 4
21. International Marketing 4
22. Consumer Behaviour 4
23. Service Marketing 4
24. Mini Project 4

Page 1 of 25
 Teaching and Research Methodology L T P C
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives :
 To develop understanding of the basic framework of research process.
 To understand the various research designs and techniques.
 To identify various sources of information for literature review, data collection, concept of
research and its methodologies
 To organize and conduct research in a more appropriate manner to write research
reports and theses.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION
Meaning and Significance – the research process – Types of Research – Exploratory and
causal Research – Theoretical and empirical Research – Cross –Sectional and time – series
Research – Research questions / Problems – Research objectives – Research hypotheses –
characteristics.
UNIT – II RESEARCH DESIGN AND MEASUREMENT
Research design – Definition – types of research design – exploratory and causal research
design – Descriptive and experimental design – different types of experimental design –
Validity of findings – internal and external validity – Variables in Research – Measurement and
scaling – Different scales – Construction of instrument – Validity and Reliability of instrument.
UNIT – III DATA COLLECTION
Types of data – Primary Vs Secondary data – Methods of primary data collection – Survey Vs
Observation – Experiments – Construction of questionaire and instrument – Validation of
questionnaire – Sampling plan – Sample size – determinants optimal sample size – sampling
techniques – Probability Vs Non–probability sampling methods.
UNIT – IV DATA PREPARATION AND REPORT WRITING
Data Preparation – editing – Coding –Data entry – Validity of data – Qualitative Vs Quantitative
data analyses – Bivariate and Multivariate statistical techniques – Factor analysis –
Discriminant analysis – cluster analysis – multiple regression and correlation –
multidimensional scaling – Conjoint Analysis - Application of statistical software for data
analysis - Research report – Different types – Contents of report
UNIT – V TEACHING METHODS
Teaching – Objectives of teaching, phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: lecture method,
discussion method, discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving method, project method.
Seminar- Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualised instruction, ways for effective presentation
with power points, documentation - Evaluation; formative, summative & continuous and
comprehensive Evaluation. Later Adolescent Psychology: meaning, physical, cognitive,
emotional, Social and moral Development –Teaching later adolescents
REFERENCES:
01 Kothari C.R, Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Age International
Publishers, 2015.
02 Saravanavel . P, Research Methodology, Margham Publishers, Chennai, 2013.
03 Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma: Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision:
New Delhi.2016.

Page 2 of 25
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
 To know the various functional areas of Human Resource Management.
 To understand the recent developments in Human Resource Management.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION
Introduction to HRM – Definition, Importance, Objective, Evolution of Concept, Changing
Environment of HR, Labour legislation – meaning, Line and Staff Functions of HR. Strategic HR
– Role in Strategy Formulation and Execution, Creating Strategy oriented HR System, HR
Scorecard – Meaning, Information Requirements and Steps in Preparing Scorecard.
UNIT – II PROCUREMENT
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance,
Process, HR Demand and Supply Forecasting Techniques, Recruitment – Importance, Process
and Sources, Selection – Process, Selection Test – Types and Validation Process, Interview
Methods, Socialization – Importance and Types.
UNIT – III DEVELOPMENT
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, Methods and Evaluation of Effectiveness,
Executive Development Programmes – Difference from training, Common Practices,
Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques, MBO, 360 Degree Feedback. Career
Development – Career Choices, Career Stages, Techniques. Talent Management – meaning,
Process. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer.
UNIT – IV COMPENSATION AND INTEGRATION
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process and Techniques, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors,
Framing Process, Strategies, Variable Compensation and Employee Benefits. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories, Employee Engagement, Leadership Theories and Quality of Work life.
Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods.
UNIT – V MAINTENANCE AND SEPARATION
Safety –Safety Procedure and Safety Programme, Change management – Process, Nature ,
forces and Resistance Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement and Discharge HR
Policies – Importance, Types, Process of Framing Policies, Human Resource Accounting &
Audit – Meaning, Types, E-HRM – ERecruitment, E-Selection, E-Training and E-
Compensation..
REFERENCES:
01 Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2016.
02 Aswathappa K., “Human Resource and Personnel Management”, (8th ed.), Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016
03 Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th ed.), Wiley, 2010.
04 Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2016.
05 Snell and Scott, “Human Resource Management: A South Asian Perspective”, 1/e,
Cengage Learning, India.

Page 3 of 25
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR WELFARE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To explore contemporary knowledge and gain a conceptual understanding of industrial
relations.
 To understand the meaning of industrial relations, industrialization and organization
structures.
 To examine the theoretical aspects, problems and issues in arbitration and bargaining
 To understand the various models of bargaining and arbitration. .
UNIT - I INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Concepts – Importance – Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector – Growth of Trade
Unions – Codes of conduct.
UNIT – II INDUSTRIAL CONFLICT
Disputes – Impact – Causes – Strikes – Prevention – Industrial Peace – Government
Machinery – Conciliation – Arbitration – Adjudication.
UNIT - III LABOUR WELFARE
Concept – Objectives – Scope – Need – Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory Welfare
Measures – Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training Schemes.

UNIT - IV INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

Causes of Accidents – Prevention – Safety Provisions – Industrial Health and Hygiene –
Importance – Problems – Occupational Hazards – Diseases – Psychological problems –
Counseling – Statutory Provisions.
UNIT - V WELFARE OF SPECIAL CATEGORIES OF LABOUR
Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction Labour – Agricultural Labour
– Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO Labour - Social Assistance – Social Security –
Implications
REFERENCES:
01 Mamoria C.B. and Sathish Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
02 Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial relations & Labour Laws.
Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
03 Ratna Sen, Industrial Relations in India, Shifting Paradigms, Macmillan India Ltd., New
Delhi, 2012
04 Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour laws, Vikas Publications, 2016.

Page 4 of 25
 STRESS MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To provide a broad physical, social and psychological understanding of human stress.
 To present a broad background knowledge of stress management.
 To understand the management of work related stress at an individual and
organizational level.
 To develop and implement effective strategies to prevent and manage stress at work.
UNIT - I UNDERSTANDING STRESS
Meaning – Symptoms – Works Related Stress – Individual Stress – Reducing Stress –
Burnout.
UNIT – II COMMON STRESS FACTORS
Time Management – Techniques – Importance of planning the day – Time management
schedule – Developing concentration – Organizing the Work Area – Prioritizing – Beginning at
the start – Techniques for conquering procrastination – Sensible delegation – Taking the right
breaks.
UNIT - III CRISIS MANAGEMENT
Implications – People issues – Environmental issues –Psychological fall outs – Learning to
keep calm – Preventing interruptions – Controlling crisis – Importance of good communication
– Taking advantage of crisis – Pushing new ideas – Empowerment.

UNIT - IV WORK PLACE HUMOUR

Developing a sense of Humour – Learning to laugh – Role of group cohesion and team spirit –
Using humour at work – Reducing conflicts with humour.
UNIT - V SELF DEVELOPMENT
Improving Personality – Leading with Integrity – Enhancing Creativity – Effective decision
Making – Sensible Communication – The Listening Game – Managing Self – Meditation for
peace – Yoga for Life.
REFERENCES:
01 Cooper, Managing Stress, Sage Publications, 2014
02 Waltschafer, Stress Management, 4th Edition 2009Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
03 Argyle. The Psychology of Happiness. Tata McGraw Hill. 2014
04 Bartlet. Stress – Perspectives & Process. Tata McGraw Hill. 2014
05 Juan R. Alascal, Brucata, Laurel Brucata, Daisy Chauhan. Stress Mastery. Pearson,2014

Page 5 of 25
 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To improve the participant‟s understanding of training needs
 To focus on assessment of training needs by assessing the existing skill sets of the
employees
 To make aware of the various training programs as well as of knowledge of new training
program.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Training Concept: Definition, Meaning, Need for Training, Objectives of Training, Concept of
Education, Role, Need and Importance of Training, Overview of Training Functions, Types of
Training
UNIT – II TRAINING PROCESS
Process of Training: Steps In Training, Assessment of Training Needs (Person Analysis, Task
Analysis, Organization Analysis), Scope of need assessment, Principles of Learning, Theories
of Learning (Reinforcement Theory, Social Learning Theory, Andragogy), Learning Process
UNIT - III MANAGING TRAINING PROGRAMME
Designing and Implementing a Training Program: Transfer of Training, Training Design,
Traditional Methods and Techniques of Training, Designing a Training Module (Cross Cultural,
Leadership, Training the Trainer, Change), Management Development Program, Training
Budget, Resistance to Training
UNIT - IV EVALUATION OF TRAINING
Evaluation of Training Program: Kirkpatrick Model of Evaluation, CIRO Model, Cost-Benefit
Analysis, ROI of Training
UNIT - V TECHNOLOGY IN TRAINING
CBT, Multimedia Training, E-Learning / Online Learning, Distance Learning, New training
methods, NLP, Various training instruments.
REFERENCES:
01 Lynton Rolf P and Pareek, Udai “Training for Development”, (3rd ed.), Sage pub., 2012.
02 Noe, Raymond A and Kodwani , Amitabh Deo “Employee Training and Development”, (5th
ed.), Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 2014
03 Rothwell William J “Beyond Training and Development”, Jaico, 2007
04 Phillips, Patricia Pulliam “ASTD Handbook for Measuring & Evaluating Training”, (1st ed.),
Cengage, 2012

Page 6 of 25
 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality among the students.
 To impart knowledge of basic entrepreneurial skills.
 To get practical knowledge to run a business efficiently and effectively. .
UNIT - I ENTREPRENEURAL COMPETENCE
Entrepreneurship concept – Entrepreneurship as a Career – Entrepreneurial Personality -
Characteristics of Successful, Entrepreneur – Knowledge and Skills of Entrepreneur.
UNIT – II ENTREPRENEURAL ENVIRONMENT
Business Environment - Role of Family and Society - Entrepreneurship Development Training
and Other Support Organizational Services - Central and State Government Industrial Policies
and Regulations - International Business
UNIT - III BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION
Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning - Market and Channel
Selection - Growth Strategies - Product Launching – Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups
UNIT - IV LAUNCHING OF SMALL BUSINESS
Positioning of services – Designing service delivery System, Service Channel – Pricing of
services, methods – Service marketing triangle - Integrated Service marketing communication
UNIT - V MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS
Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business
Units- Effective Management of small Business.
REFERENCES:
01 Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014..
02 S.S.Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi,
2016.
03 Mathew Manimala, Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads, Paradigms & Praxis,
Biztrantra ,4th Edition ,2014
04 Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and
Reviews, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2015.
05 P.Saravanavel, Entrepreneurial Development, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai
2014.

Page 7 of 25
 BUSINESS ETHICS & CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Course Objectives
 To enhance responsibility and accountability towards business and community
through ethical practices.
 To recognize and resolve ethical issues in business.
 To grasp the current issues and implications of CSR on social development and
progress
 To familiarize the students with the knowledge of emerging trends in good
governance practices and corporate social responsibility in the global and Indian
context.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS
Economic Environment - Philosophy of economic grow and its implications for business
- Main features of Economic Planning with respect to business - Industrial policy and
framework of government contract over Business - Role of chamber of commerce and
confederation of Indian Industries.
UNIT II MANAGING ETHICAL DILEMMA
Characteristics - ethical decision making - ethical reasoning - the dilemma resolution
process - ethical dilemmas in different business areas of finance – marketing - HRM,
international business - Ethical culture in Organization - Developing codes of ethics and
conduct - ethical and value based leadership - Indian Wisdom & Indian approaches
towards business ethics.
UNIT – III CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Introduction to CSR: Meaning & Definition of CSR - History & evolution of CSR.
Concept of Charity - Corporate philanthropy -Corporate Citizenship - Concept of
sustainability & Stakeholder Management - Relation between CSR and Corporate
governance; environmental aspect of CSR; models of CSR in India
UNIT – IV CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Meaning – need- scope- importance – benefits – role of corporate governance -
corporate governance code - transparency & disclosure - role of auditors - board of
directors and share holders - Global issues of governance - accounting and regulatory
frame work - corporate scams - committees in India and abroad - Future of governance-
innovative practices.
UNIT – V CORPORATE MANAGEMENT
Management vs. Governance; internal constituents of the corporate governance; key
managerial personnel (KMP); chairman- qualities of a chairman - powers,
responsibilities and duties of a chairman - chief executive officer (CEO) - role and
responsibilities of the CEO - separation of roles of chairman and CEO; CFO; manager;
company secretary; auditor.
REFERENCES:
01 Murthy C.S.V. Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Himalaya Publishing, 2016
Edition
02 S K Mandal, Ethics in Business and Corporate Governance, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
03 A.C. Fernando, Business Ethics: An Indian Perspective, Pearson, 2015
04 Riya Rupani, Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Himalaya Publishing, 2017.

Page 8 of 25
 L T P C
BANKING THEORY LAW AND PRACTICE
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To acquire specialized knowledge of law and practice relating to Banking.
 To understand Banking theory and to know about the banking innovations.
 To understand the conceptual and legal parameters including the judicial
interpretation of banking law.
 To acquaint students with the banking technology and their recent developments.
 To enhance their knowledge on modern banking concepts and techniques.
UNIT- I STRUCTURE OF INDIAN BANKING BUSINESS
Banking Business Development and Evolution/Innovation in India - Investment policy
and cash reserve ratio of commercial bank - Window dressing - KYC - Concepts of
CAMELS in banking.
UNIT – II BRANCH OPERATION AND CORE BANKING
Introduction and evolution of bank management – Technological impact in banking
operation – Total branch computerization – Concept of opportunities – Centralized
banking – Concept, opportunities, challenges and implementation
UNIT –III REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND COMPLIANCES
Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 - Banking Regulation Act, 1949 - New Bank Licensing
Policy, 2013 - Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 (PMLA) - Banking Codes and
Standards Board of India (BSCSBI)- The Banking Ombudsman Scheme - Bankers‟
Book Evidence Act, 1891- Recovery of Debts Due to Banks and Financial institutions
Act, 1993 (DRT Act).
UNIT –IV INDIAN ELECTRONIC BANKING SYSTEM
Core banking solution - Telebanking - Mobile banking - Forms of E-banking - ATM -
Credit card - Debit card - Smart card - Electronic Money – E- Cheques- Electronic
Token - Electronic Purse - SWIFT - RTGS - NEFT – CHIPS – ECS –IFCS –CBS -
Online IPOs - Green shoe option –international Payment System.
UNIT – V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN BANKING
Techniques Analysis of Rangarajan committee reports – E Banking budgeting –
Banking software‟s - Future of Indian Banking.

REFERENCES:
01P M Sundaram and P N Varshney, - Banking Law and Practice “,Sultan chand &
Sons Publishing House,2016.
02 C Shekar, Lekshmy Shekar, - Banking theory and practice “,Vikas Publishing House
Pvt Ltd.2016.
03Vasant Desal - Bank Management “,Himalaya Publishing House”.2015.
04 E.Gordon & K. Natrajan, ―Banking Theory, Law & Practice”, Himalaya
PublishingHouse, Mumbai, 24th revised edition, 2015.
05 Banking Theory and Practice” by Dr. P.K. Srivastava, Himalaya Publishing House,
Mumbai, 2015..

Page 9 of 25
 SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To Analyze and understand Economic, Industry and Company information.
 To apply fundamental and technical analysis for security valuation.
 To interpret the published information and value the share price movements.
 To understand the various alternatives available for investment and to measure risk and return.
UNIT – I INVESTMENT SETTING AND SECURITIES MARKETS
Financial and economic meaning of Investment – Characteristics and objectives of Investment – Types
of Investment – Making a trade at market place: Primary and Secondary Markets - Methods of floating
new issues Market - Regulation of primary market, Stock exchanges in India - Trading system in stock
exchanges.
UNIT – II FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS
Economic Analysis – Economic forecasting and stock Investment Decisions – Forecasting techniques
Industry Analysis : Industry classification, Industry life cycle – Company Analysis - Measuring Earnings
– Forecasting Earnings – Applied Valuation Techniques – Graham and Dodds investor ratios.
UNIT – III TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
Fundamental Analysis Vs Technical Analysis – Charting methods – Market Indicators Trend – Trend
reversals – Patterns - Moving Average – Exponential moving Average – Oscillators – Market Indicators
– Efficient Market theory.
UNIT – IV PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT AND SELECTION
Portfolio analysis and selection: Portfolio concept, Portfolio risk and return, Beta as a measure of risk,
Calculation of Beta, Selection of Portfolio: Markowitz‟s theory, Single Index Model – Capital Asset
Pricing model –Arbitrage pricing theory.
UNIT – V PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Portfolio management and performance evaluation: Performance evaluation of Existing Portfolio,
Sharpe and Trynor measures; Finding alternatives and revision of portfolio.
REFERENCES:
01 Donald E.Fischer & Ronald J.Jordan, Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, PHI Learning.,
New Delhi, 8th edition, 2014.
02 Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
03 V.A.Avadhan, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
04 Preeti Singh, Investment Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
05 Punithavathy Pandian, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2015.

Page 10 of 25
 MERCHANT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To outline the linkage between Merchant Banking, Retail Banking and central banking.
 To expose the important legislations affecting merchant banking activities.
 To identify the various segments of merchant banking industry.
 To identify the scope and opportunities in the field of Foreign Exchange and Investments.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION OF FINANCIAL SYSTEM
Indian Financial System – Merchant Banking in India – Recent Developments and Challenges
ahead – Functions of Merchant Bank Legal and Regulatory Framework – Relevant Provisions
of Companies Act - Securities Contract Regulation Act, 1956 - SEBI Act,1992 – SEBI
Guidelines relating to Investor Protection - Relation with Stock Exchanges and OTCEI.
UNIT – II NEW ISSUES MANAGEMENT
Role of Merchant Banker in Appraisal of Projects, Designing Capital Structure and Instruments
– Issue Pricing – Book Building – Preparation of Prospectus Selection of Bankers, Advertising
Consultants, etc. - Role of Registrars –Bankers to the Issue, Underwriters, and Brokers. – Offer
for Sale.
UNIT – III MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS
Mergers and Acquisitions – Portfolio Management Services – Credit Syndication –- Credit
Rating – Meaning, Significance Agencies, National & International - Business Valuation
UNIT- IV LEASING AND HIRE PURCHASING
Leasing and Hire Purchasing – Hire Purchase act, 1972 - Financial Evaluation - Factoring and
Forfaiting – Venture Capital.
UNIT- V FOREX SERVICES
Forex Services - Related Regulations - RBI Guidelines – FDI Policy 2013 - FII – SEBI
Guidelines relating to FII, Mutual Funds – Organisation, types & Objectives , SEBI guidelines
relating to Mutual Funds - Foreign Pension Funds – Investment Banking.
REFERENCES:
01 S.Gurusamy,”Merchant Banking & Financial Services”, (2nd ed.),Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2014.
02 M.Y.Khan, “Financial Services”, (11th ed.), Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014. .
03 Nalini Prava Tripathy, “Financial Services”, PHI Learning, 2014.
04 Varshney P.N. “Indian Financial System”, Sultan Chand & Sons, New,Delhi.

Page 11 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL TRADE FINANCE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To describe the importance of balance of trade, balance of payment and various
international commercial terms to the development of macroeconomic policy
 To evaluate the foreign exchange rate and the risk reduction strategies of Forex To
Describe and distinguish among alternative trade documents of both export and import
 To Highlight the Indian government‟s export promotion schemes.
UNIT- I INTERNATIONAL TRADE
International Trade – Meaning and Benefits – Basis of International Trade – Foreign Trade and
Economic Growth – Balance of Trade – Balance of Payment – Current Trends in India –
Barriers to International Trade – WTO – Indian EXIM Policy.
UNIT- II EXPORT AND IMPORT FINACE
Special need for Finance in International Trade – INCO Terms (FOB, CIF, etc.,) – Payment
Terms – Letters of Credit – Pre Shipment and Post Shipment Finance – Forfeiting – Deferred
Payment Terms – EXIM Bank – ECGC and its schemes – Import Licensing – Financing
methods for import of Capital goods.
UNIT-III FOREX MANAGEMENT
Foreign Exchange Markets – Spot Prices and Forward Prices – Factors influencing Exchange
rates – The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade – Tools for hedging against Exchange
rate variations – Forward, Futures and Currency options – FEMA – Determination of Foreign
Exchange rate and Forecasting.
UNIT-IV DOCUMENTATION IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE
Export Trade Documents: Financial Documents – Bill of Exchange- Type- Commercial
Documents - Proforma, Commercial, Consular, Customs, Legalized Invoice, Certificate of
Origin Certificate Value, Packing List, Weight Certificate, Certificate of Analysis and Quality,
Certificate of Inspection, Health certificate. Transport Documents - Bill of Lading, Airway Bill,
Postal Receipt, Multimodal Transport Document. Risk Covering Document: Insurance Policy,
Insurance Cover Note. Official Document: Export Declaration Forms, GR Form, PP From, COD
Form, Softer Forms, Export Certification, GSPS – UPCDC Norms.
UNIT- V EXPORT PROMOTION SCHEMES
Government Organizations Promoting Exports – Export Incentives : Duty Exemption – IT
Concession – Marketing Assistance – EPCG, DEPB – Advance License – Other efforts I Export
Promotion – EPZ – EQU – SEZ and Export House.
REFERENCES:
01 Apte P.G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
02 Jeff Madura, International Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2014.
03 Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, PHI Learning, 5 th Edition, 2016.
04 Eun and Resnik, International Financial Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 5 th Edition, 2015.
05 Website of Indian Government on EXIM policy.

Page 12 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL FINANCE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To get an insight of the International Monetary and Financial System.
 To know about Balance of payments and its components.
 To get an basic idea about calculation of Foreign Exchange Rates and Risks.
 To understand the factors influencing the Foreign Exchange rates
UNIT- I INTERNATIONAL MONETARY AND FINANCIAL SYSTEM
International Monetary and Financial System: Importance of international finance; Bretton
woods conference and afterwards, IMF and the World Bank; European monetary system –
meaning and scope
UNIT- II BALANCE OF PAYMENTS AND ITS COMPONENTS
Balance of Payment and International Linkages: Balance of payments and its components;
International flow of goods, services and capital; Coping with current account deficit.

UNIT- III INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTRUMENTS

International Financial Markets and Instruments: International capital and money markets;
Money and capital market instruments; Salient features of different international markets;
Arbitrage opportunities; Integration of markets; Role of financial intermediaries.
UNIT- IV FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS
Foreign Exchange Markets: determining exchange rates; fixed and flexible exchange rate
system; exchange rate theories; participants in the foreign exchange markets; foreign
exchange markets – cash and spot markets; Exchange rate quotes; LERMS; Factors affecting
exchange rates – spot rates, forward exchange rates, forward exchange contracts; Foreign
exchange and currency futures; Exchange rate arrangement in India ; Exchange dealings and
currency possession; Information and communication; Foreign exchange trades
UNIT - V FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK
Foreign Exchange Risk: Transaction exposure, translation exposure and economic exposure;
Management of exposure – internal techniques, netting, marketing, leading and lagging, pricing
policy, assets and liability management and techniques.
REFERENCES:
01 Apte P.G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
02 Eitman, D.K. and A.I Stenehill : Multinational Business Cash Finance, Addison Wesley,
New York. 2016
03 Henning, C.N., W Piggot and W.H Scott: International Financial Management, McGraw
Hill, International Edition. 2016..
04 Levi, Maurice D : International Finance, McGraw – Hill, International Edition. 2014, 2015.
05 Rodriqufe, R.M. and E.E.Carter: International Financial Management, Prentice Hall,
International Edition.2016
06 Yadav, SurendraS, P.K Jain and Max Peyrard: Foreign Exchange Markets, Macmillion,
New Delhi. 2012.

Page 13 of 25
 L T P C
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:

 To understand the theoretical framework of financial management in business

corporations.
 To understand the goals of the finance manager.
 To help the students gain a detailed account of various financial functions of
business organizations.
 To understand and to apply financial concepts and principles in overall
management..

UNIT –I COST OF CAPITAL

Factors affecting cost of capital - Methods of computation of cost of capital - Methods of
Ranking investment proposal - Capital structure - Theories of capital structure.

UNIT –II PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Portfolio theory - Reducing risk through diversification - Investment preference Factors
contributing to M&A and M&A Wave - Synergies of M&A - Managing M&A.

UNIT – III MANAGEMENT OF CASH AND MARKETABLE SECURITIES

Motives for Holding Cash; Objectives of Cash Management; Factors Determining Cash
Needs; Basic Strategies of Cash Management; Cash Management Techniques /
Processes; Marketable Securities; and Cash Management Practices in India.

UNIT – IV CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Conceptual Framework - Financial Framework - Tax Aspect of Amalgamation -Merger
and Demergers - Legal and Procedural Aspects of Mergers/Amalgamations and
Acquisition/Takeovers - and other forms of Corporate Restructuring.

UNIT – V FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT OF PUBLIC SECTOR UNDERTAKINGS

(PSUS)
Peculiarities of PSUs with Focus on Accounting and Finance - Financial Decisions in
PSUs - Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) in PSUs - and Disinvestment in Public
Sector Enterprises.

REFERENCES:
01 Kishore M Ravi, Strategic Financial Management, Taxmann Publication Pvt. Ltd.
New Delhi,2015.
02 Dhamija Sanjay and Van Horne J.C, Financial Management and Policy, 12th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2016
03 Pandey I. M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2016.
04 Khan M Y, and Jain P. K, Financial Management: Text, Problems & Cases,Tata
McGraw Hill,Education Private Limited., 2015.
05 Fundamentals of Financial Management -”, J. Srinivasan P. Periasamy.”2016.

Page 14 of 25
 ACCOUNTING FOR FINANCIAL DECISION MAKING

Course Objectives: L T P C
 To attain Sustainable Knowledge with decision making in 4 0 0 4
financial related issues.
 To develop a critical understanding of financial tools and techniques.
 To understand both the theoretical and practical role of financial management in
business corporations.
 To have a greater appreciation and understanding of the importance of risk within
the context of financial decision making.

UNIT – I FINANCIAL PLANNING AND STRATEGY

Strategy decision making and planning for Sustainable growth -Risk appraisal methods
- Balancing risk and return - Portfolio theory and asset pricing models -

UNIT – II BETA ESTIMATION AND THE COST OF EQUITY

CAPM and the opportunity cost of equity capital - Options and their valuations -
Binomial model for option valuation - Financial ratio analysis - Trading Legitimacy.

UNIT – III CAPITAL BUDGETING DECISIONS

Investment decision - investment evaluation criteria -Accounting rate of return - Net
Present Value - Internal Rate of Return - Profitability Index - Discounting Payback

UNIT – IV CAPITAL STRUCTURE DECISION

Capital structure & market value of a firm. Theories of capital structure – NI approach,
NOI approach, Modigliani Miller approach, traditional approach. Arbitrage process in
capital structure - Planning the capital structure: EBIT and EPS analysis. ROI & ROE
analysis. Capital structure policy.

UNIT – V WORKING CAPITAL CYCLE

Interpretation of working capital ratios - Capital structure Planning and Policy - Trade-
off theory - Pecking Order theory - Flow-to-Equity Approach - Adjusted Present value
(WACC and Miles-Ezzel).
REFERENCES
01 Khan M.Y and Pillai P.K, “Financial Management”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, New Delhi,Edition 2016.
02 Palanivelu V.R “Financial Management”, S.Chand Publishing House,New Delhi,
Edition 2016.
03 I M Pandey, “Financial Management” , Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi,
Edition 2017.
04 Pearson, “Financial Management and Policy”, James C.Van Horne and Sanjay
Dhamija , Dorling Kindersley (india) Pvt.Ltd.2015.
05Chandra, Prasana: Financial Management; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

Page 15 of 25
 L T P C
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To have a Bird‟s view of the Indian Financial System and in Global Indian
Banking System.
 To provide conceptual understanding and in-depth knowledge of securities
markets in India
 To understand the structure of financial markets and institutions.
 To equip the students with the knowledge of sources of the funds and also of
investing the funds.
UNIT – I FINANCIAL MARKETS
Money and capital markets - Money market – meaning, constituents, participants –
functions. Money market instruments – call money, treasury bills, certificate of deposit,
commercial bills, trade bills, commercial paper, recent trends in Indian money market;
capital market – primary and secondary markets; capital market instruments.
UNIT – II SECURITIES MARKET
Financial Market – Segments – Types –– Participants in financial Market – Regulatory
Environment, Primary Market – Methods of floating new issues, Book building – Role of
primary market – Regulation of primary market, Stock exchanges in India – BSE,
OTCEI , NSE, ISE, and Regulations of stock exchanges – Trading system in stock
exchanges –systematic and unsystematic risk – SEBI – money market – Debt market.
UNIT III FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET
Foreign Exchange Markets – Spot Prices and Forward Prices – Factors influencing
Exchange rates – The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade – Tools for hedging
against Exchange rate variations – Forward, Futures and Currency options – FEMA –
Determination of Foreign Exchange rate and Forecasting.
UNIT IV DERIVATIVES MARKET
Derivatives – Definition – Types – Forward Contracts – Futures Contracts – Options –
Swaps – Differences between Cash and Future Markets – Types of Traders – OTC and
Exchange Traded Securities – Types of Settlement – Uses and Advantages of
Derivatives – Risks in Derivatives – Derivatives market in India.
UNIT – V MARKET PARTICIPANTS & PUBLIC ISSUES
Depository – role and functions – Depository participants‟ issuers and registrars (RTs) –
Role of FIIs, and Investment Bankers – New public issue - book building process –
IPOs, FPOs – Private placement QIP, QIBs, offer for sale – grading of new issues –
content of offer document.
REFERENCES:
01 Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, ―Management of Banking and Financial Services,
Pearson, Delhi, 2016.
02 Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill,
6th edition 2017.
03 Keith Redhead, ‗Financial Derivatives – An Introduction to Futures, Forwards, Options
and SWAPs„,– PHI Learning, 2011.
04 Jeff Madura, International Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2011.
05 M.Y Khan, Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th Edition, 2011

Page 16 of 25
 L T P C
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives
 To impart skill based knowledge of Customer Relationship Management.
 To understand the concepts and principles of CRM.
 To understand the need and importance of maintaining a good customer
relationship.
 To gain knowledge of strategic customer acquisition and retention techniques in
CRM.
 To recognize the basic technological infrastructure and organizations involved in
current and emerging CRM practices.
UNIT I UNDERSTANDING CUSTOMERS
Customer information Database – Customer Profile Analysis - Customer perception,
Expectations analysis – Customer behaviour in relationship perspectives; individual and
group customer‟s - Customer life time value – Selection of Profitable customer
segments.
UNIT II CRM STRUCTURES
Elements of CRM – CRM Process – Strategies for Customer acquisition – Retention
and Prevention of defection – Models of CRM – CRM road map for business
applications.
UNIT III CRM PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
Strategic CRM planning process – Implementation issues – CRM Tools- Analytical CRM
– Operational CRM – Call centre management – Role of CRM Managers - CRM
Implementation Road Map- Developing a Relationship Orientation - Customer-centric
Marketing and Processes - customer retention plans
UNIT – IV SERVICE QUALITY
Concept of Quality - Meaning and Definition of Service Quality - Factors influencing
customer expectation and perception - Types of Service Quality - Service Quality
Dimensions - Service Quality Gaps - Measuring Service Quality - Service Quality
measurement Scales.
UNIT V TRENDS IN CRM
e- CRM Solutions – Data Warehousing – Data mining for CRM – an introduction to
CRM software packages - The Technological Revolution: Relationship Management –
Changing Corporate Cultures.
REFERENCES
01 G.Shainesh, Jagdish, N.Sheth, Customer Relationships Management Strategic
Prespective, Macmillan 2015.
02 Alok Kumar et al, Customer Relationship Management : Concepts and
applications, Biztantra, 2015.
03 H.Peeru Mohamed and A.Sahadevan, Customer Relation Management, Vikas
Publishing 2017.
04 Jim Catheart, The Eight Competencies of Relatioship selling, Macmillan India,
2016.
05 Zikmund. Customer Relationship Management, Wiley 2012 .

Page 17 of 25
 L T P C
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To study the strategies for developing new products and services that are
consistent with evolving market needs.
 To evaluate the viability of marketing a product or service in an international
market or markets.
 To know the contemporary issues in marketing.
 To understand the concept of green marketing.

UNIT-I STRATEGIC MARKETING PLANNING

Market Analysis and Selection: Marketing environment – macro and micro components
and their impact on marketing decisions; Market segmentation and positioning; Buyer
behaviour; consumer versus organizational buyers; Consumer decision making
process.
UNIT-II MARKETING RESEARCH
Meaning and scope of marketing research; Marketing research process. Marketing
Organisation and Control: Organising and controlling marketing operations. -
Understanding the Marketing-Information Systems (MIS)- Introduction, -
Characteristics of MIS- Benefits – Types – Components of Marketing Research.
UNIT – III CRM AND OTHER CONTEMPORARY ISSUES
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Definitions of
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management -
Managing Customer Loyalty and Development - Reasons Behind Losing Customers by
Organisations - Significance of Customer Relationship Management - Social Actions
Affecting Buyer-Seller Relationships - Rural Marketing - Services Marketing - E-
Marketing or Online Marketing - cyber marketing.
UNIT – IV INTERNATIONAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Introduction - Nature of International Marketing - International Marketing Concept
- International Market Entry Strategies - Approaches to International Marketing -
International Product Policy - International Promotions Policy - International
Branding - Country of Origin Effects - International Pricing.
UNIT – V GREEN MARKETING
Green marketing concept Eco-friendly marketing - principles and challenges of green
marketing - Environmentalism concepts - problems in green marketing - green
marketing strategies - Stakeholders of green marketing
REFERENCES:
01 Philip Kotler , Kevin Lane Keller ― Marketing Management‖ 15th Edition, Person
Publications Limited, 2017.
02 Noel Capon and Siddharth Shekar Singh,‖ managing Marketing–An Applied
Approach‖, Wiley India Pvt Limited 2017.
03 Kenneth E.Clow. Donald Baack, ―cases in marketing management,‖ 5 th edition,
Person India Ltd, 2014.
04 Arunkumar and Meenakshi, ―Marketing Management,‖ Vikas Publishing House,
2015.

Page 18 of 25
 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To create awareness on the functions of Supply Chain Management and to lay down the
path to enter the supply chain business.
 To facilitate the development of skills for practical problem solving approach to complex
areas of supply chain management.
 To learn various issues related to demand, inventory and supply management along with
practical implementation.
 To appraise the recent trends, design and redesign of a supply chain Network as key
components of an organization‟s strategic plan.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION OF SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Supply Chain – Fundamentals –Evolution- Role in Economy - Importance - Decision Phases -
Supplier- Manufacturer-Customer chain. - Enablers/ Drivers of Supply Chain Performance -
Supply chain strategy - Supply Chain Performance Measures.
UNIT – II STRATEGICSOURCING
Outsourcing – Make Vs buy - Identifying core processes - Market Vs Hierarchy - Make Vs buy
continuum -Sourcing strategy - Supplier Selection and Contract Negotiation - Creating a world
class supply base- Supplier Development - World Wide Sourcing
UNIT – III SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK
Distribution Network Design – Role - Factors Influencing Options, Value Addition – Distribution
Strategies - Models for Facility Location and Capacity allocation. Distribution Center Location
Models Supply Chain Network optimization models Impact of uncertainty on Network Design -
Network Design decisions using Decision trees.
UNIT – IV PLANNING DEMAND, INVENTORY AND SUPPLY
Managing supply chain cycle inventory Uncertainty in the supply chain –- Analysing impact of
supply chain redesign on the inventory - Risk Pooling - Managing inventory for short life – cycle
products -multiple item -multiple location inventory management - Pricing and Revenue
Management
UNIT – V CURRENT TRENDS
Supply Chain Integration - Building partnership and trust in SC Value of Information: Bullwhip
Effect - Effective forecasting - Coordinating the supply chain - SC Restructuring - SC Mapping -
SC process restructuring, Postpone the point of differentiation – IT in Supply Chain - Agile
Supply Chains -Reverse Supply chain. Agro Supply Chains
REFERENCES:
01 Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management – Text and Cases, Pearson Education,2016.
02 Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and
Operation, PHI Learning / Pearson Education, 2016.
03 Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and
Operation, PHI Learning / Pearson Education, 2016
04 David Simchi-Levi, Philip Kaminsky, Edith Simchi-Levi, Designing and Managing the
Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014
05 Altekar Rahul V, Supply Chain Management-Concept and Cases, PHI, 20142.

Page 19 of 25
 INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To get an insight of the importance of advertising and sales promotion campaigns in
relation to consumer decision making processes.
 To draft oral and written integrated marketing communications plan based on primary and
secondary research.
 To ensure a substantive assessment of corporate strengths, weaknesses, opportunities
and threats (SWOT analysis) and create a substantive research plan for one‟s project.
 To construct IMC creative strategies and tactics, including digital & social media
executions, advertising, promotions, and public relations initiatives.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISEMENT
Concept – Definition-scope – Objectives-functions – principles of advertisement – Social,
Economic and Legal Implications of advertisements – setting advertisement objectives –
Advertisement Agencies – Selection and remuneration – Advertisement campaigns.
UNIT – II ADVERTISEMENT MEDIA
Media plan – Type and choice criteria – Reach and frequency of advertisements – Cost of
advertisements – related to sales – Media strategy and scheduling design and execution of
advertisements – Message development – Different types of advertisements – Layout – Design
appeal – Copy structure – Advertisement production – Print – Radio. T.V. and Web
advertisements.
UNIT – III SALES PROMOTION
Scope and role of sale promotion – Definition – Objectives of sales promotion – sales
promotion techniques – Trade oriented and consumer oriented. Sales promotion –
Requirement identification – Designing of sales promotion campaign – Involvement of
salesmen and dealers – Out sourcing sales promotion national and international promotion
strategies.
UNIT – IV PUBLIC RELATIONS
Introduction – Meaning – Objectives –Scope-Functions-integrating PR in to Promotional Mix-
Marketing Public Relation function- Process of Public Relations-advantages and disadvantages
of PR-Measuring the Effectiveness of PR- PR tools and techniques. PR and Media Relations, -
PR consultancy: Pros and Cons.
UNIT – V PUBLICITY
Introduction – Meaning – Objectives – Tools – Goals of Publicity – Scope of Publicity –
Importance of Publicity – Difference between Marketing, PR and Publicity – Social publicity –
Web Publicity and Social media – Publicity Campaigns
REFERENCES:
01 George E Belch and Michel A Belch, Advertising & Promotion, Tata McGraw Hill,
7th edition, 2016.
02 S. H. H. Kazmi and Satish K Batra, Advertising & Sales Promotion, Excel Books,
New Delhi, 2014.
03 Julian Cummings, Sales Promotion, Kogan Page, London 2015.
04 Jaishri Jefhwaney, Advertising Management, Oxford, 2014
L T P C

Page 20 of 25
 RURAL MARKETING
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To gain insight into the socio-economic structure of rural India.
 To explore the various facets of rural marketing and to develop an insight into rural
marketing regarding different concepts and basic practices in this area.
 To understand the buying behaviour, the consuming pattern, the needs and wants of the
rural consumer.
 To understand the concept and methodology for conducting the research in rural
markets.
UNIT – I OVERVIEW OF RURAL MARKETING
Introduction of Rural marketing –Evolution of Rural Marketing in Indian and Global Context-
Definition- Nature –Scope-Characteristics and potential of Rural Marketing - Importance of
Rural Marketing- Socio-Cultural-economic & other environmental factors affecting in Rural
Marketing- Emerging challenges & Opportunities in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – II RURAL MARKETS & DECISION
Profile of Rural Marketing Dimensions & Consumer Profile- Rural Market Equilibrium-
Classification of Rural Marketing – Regulated- Non Regulated Marketing Mix- Segmentation-
Targeting- Position- Rural Marketing Strategies- Role of Central, State Government and other
Institutions in Rural Marketing Integrated Marketing Communication in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – III PRODUCT & DISTRIBUTION
Product / Service Classification in Rural Marketing - New Product Development in Rural
Marketing- Brand Management in Rural Marketing- Rural Distribution in channel management-
Managing Physical distribution in Rural Marketing- Fostering Creativity& Innovation in Rural
Marketing- Sales force Management in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – IV RURAL CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR IN MARKETING RESEARCH
Consumer Buyer Behaviour Model in Rural Marketing- Rural Marketing Research-Retail &IT
models in Rural Marketing-CSR and Marketing Ethics in Rural Marketing- Source of Financing
and credit agencies- Consumer Education & Consumer Methods in Promotion of Rural
Marketing- Advertisement & Media Role in Rural Marketing Promotion Methods.
UNIT – V TRENDS IN RURAL MARKETING
e- Rural Marketing-CRM &e-CRM in Rural Marketing- Advanced Practices in Rural Marketing-
Social Marketing-Network Marketing- Green Marketing in Indian and Global Context-Co-
operative Marketing- Micro Credit Marketing- Public Private Partnership Model in Rural
Marketing- Advancement of Technology in Rural Marketing- Structure of Competition in Rural
India.
REFERENCES:
01 Rural Marketing – C G Krishnamacharyulu, Lalitha Ramakrishnan – Pearson
Education,2016.
02 Rural Marketing: Indian Perspective by Awadhesh Kumar Singh Satyaprakash pandey,
New age publishers, 2014.
03 New Perspectives on Rural Marketing: Includes Agricultural Marketing By Ramkishen
Y., 2016.
04 Rural Marketing, Pradeep Kashyap & Siddhartha Raut, Biztantra Publications, 2016.

Page 21 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To gain knowledge of basic elements of International Marketing.
 To know the Marketing environment in the context of Globalisation.
 To understand the Policy Framework and Procedural Aspects of International Marketing.
UNIT- I INTRODUCTION OF INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
International markets – Definition – Basic modes of entry – Nature of International Marketing-
Benefits of International Marketing-– International Marketing Task – World Trade – India‟s
Foreign Trade – Characteristics of MNCs - Global and Domestic marketing - International
Product Life cycle – EPRG Framework - Institutional set up – Advisory bodies – Commodity
organizations – Service Institutions – Government participation in Foreign Trade
UNIT- II INTERNATIONAL MARKETING ENVIRONMENT
Business culture around the world- language, customs, attitudes - marketing strategy
adjustments - product adaptations. Geographic Description of Market – Political risk – Political
Environment - Import quotas – tariffs - customs restrictions - required licenses – registrations –
permits. Development and scope of International law – INCOTERMS – WTO – GATT
UNIT- III POLICY FRAMEWORK AND PROCEDURAL ASPECTS
India‟s Export – Import policy – EXIM Policy – promotional measures - Export oriented Units –
Deemed Exports - Export- Import Documentation – Kinds of Documents – Principal Export
Documents – Auxiliary documents – Documents in Import Trade – Export Documentation and
procedures - Demand Estimation – GDP – Producer consumer target – Market segmentation
UNIT - IV INTERNATIONAL MARKETING PLANNING
International Market Selection – Factors influencing – Process – Strategies and approaches –
Competition-International Marketing research – Global scene- International marketing research
procedure – Techniques – survey – interview techniques – Analysis of field data – Research
report-International Marketing Planning and Control – Framework – marketing control – Control
sequence
UNIT - V INTERNATIONAL MARKETING MIX
Developing an International Product Line, Foreign Product Diversification, International
Branding Decisions, International Packaging, International Warranties and Services.
International Pricing Strategy - International Promotion Strategies- Promotion Mix-International
Sales Negotiations - Patterns of Global Advertising -Current trends in international Marketing
REFERENCES:
01 Varshney “International Marketing”, McGraw Hill, International Edition. 2016
02 Global Marketing, Third Edition, by Warren J. Keegan and Mark C. Green, Prentice Hall,
2015.
03 Philip .R. Cateora, John.L.Graham. Prasanth Salwan. International Marketing, Tata
McGraw Hill,13 th edition, 2014
04 Onkvisit, Sak., and John J.Shaw., International Marketing, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2012.

Page 22 of 25
 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To understand the dimensions of consumer behavior and their decision making process
 To know the Consumer Behaviour Models.
 To Understand the Internal and External Influences on Consumer Behaviour.
 To recognize the social and ethical implications of marketing on consumer behavior.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Concepts – Significance – Dimensions of Consumer Behavior – Application of knowledge of
Consumer Behaviour in marketing decisions.
UNIT - II CONSUMER BEHAVIOR MODELS
Industrial and individual consumer behaviour models - Howard- Sheth, Engel – Kollat, Webster
and wind Consumer Behaviour Models – Implications of the models on marketing decisions.
UNIT - III INTERNAL INFLUENCES
Psychological Influences on consumer behavior – motivation – perception – personality
Learning and Attitude- Self Image and Life styles – Consumer expectation and satisfaction.
UNIT - IV EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
Socio-Cultural, Cross Culture - Family group – Reference group – Communication -Influences
on Consumer behavior
UNIT - V PURCHASE DECISION PROCESS
High and low involvement - Pre-purchase and post-purchase behavior – Online purchase
decision process – Diffusion of Innovation – Managing Dissonance - Emerging Issues.
REFERENCES:
01 Leon G.Schiffman, Leslie Lazar Kanuk and S. Ramesh Kumar, Consumer Behavior,
Pearson Education, India, 11th Edition, 2015..
02 Jay D. Lindquist and Joseph Sirgy, Shopper, Buyer and Consumer Behavior, Biztranza,
2012.
03 David L. Louden and Albert J Della Bitta, Consumer Behavior, McGraw Hill, New Delhi
2012.
04 Sheth Mittal, Consumer Behavior- A Managerial Perspective, Thomson Asia (P) Ltd., 2013

Page 23 of 25
 SERVICE MARKETING L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To understand the role of consumer behavior in marketing and to identify qualitative and
quantitative methods of measuring consumer behavior.
 To Know the Service Design and Development of Service Marketing.
 To Understand the Service Delivery and Promotion of Service Marketing..
 To know the importance of Service Strategies for Health, Tourism, Financial, Logistics
and Educational Institutions.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Definition – Service Economy – Evolution and growth of service sector – Nature and Scope of
Services – Unique characteristics of services - Challenges and issues in Services Marketing.
UNIT - II SERVICE MARKETING OPPORTUNITIES
Assessing service market potential - Classification of services – Expanded marketing mix –
Service marketing – Environment and trends – Service market segmentation, targeting and
positioning.
UNIT - III SERVICE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
Service Life Cycle – New service development – Service Blue Printing – GAP model of service
quality – Measuring service quality – SERVQUAL – Service Quality function development.
UNIT - IV SERVICE DELIVERY AND PROMOTION
Positioning of services – Designing service delivery System, Service Channel – Pricing of
services, methods – Service marketing triangle - Integrated Service marketing communication
UNIT - V SERVICE STRATEGIES
Service Marketing Strategies for health – Hospitality – Tourism – Financial – Logistics -
Educational – Entertainment & public utility Information technique Services
REFERENCES:
01 Christopher Lovelock, Jochen Wirtz & Jayantha Chatterjee, Services Marketing - People,
Technology, Strategy, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 7th edition, 2015.
02 Hoffman, Marketing of Services, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition, 2014.
03 Kenneth E Clow, et al, Services Marketing Operation Management and Strategy,
Biztantra, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
04 Christian Gronroos, Services Management and Marketing a CRM Approach, John Wiley,
2015.
05 Valarie Zeithaml et al, Services Marketing, 5th International Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2014

Page 24 of 25
Page 25 of 25
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI 627 012.
Syllabus for Ph.D., Course Work in Communication
(with effect from the academic year 2018-2019 onwards)
Following is the list of 10 courses carrying 4 credits each available to
the Ph.D., candidates of Communication for selection according to their requirements:

S.No. Course

1 Research Methods in Communication

2 Media Uses and Effects

3 Journalism

4 Semiotics

5 Development Communication

6 New Media Studies

7 Media, Gender and Human Rights

8 Film Studies

9 Media Audience Studies

10 Mini Project

Page 1 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4

Paper 1 - RESEARCH METHODS IN COMMUNICATION

UNIT 1

Introduction to Communication Research

Fundamentals of research- Basic principles of research, Theory building, facts, concepts,

constructs and definitions, Variable and its attributes, Ethics in research, Preparation of proposal,
Review of literature, formation and types of hypothesis and testing of the hypothesis, Research
designs, sampling designs, methods, techniques and tools of research.
14 L

UNIT 2

Research Approaches

Methods/techniques of research; Hypothesis and variables; Research design and its types of
Research Design; Experimental Research; Descriptive research; Exploratory Research;
Conclusive Research; Sources and collection of Secondary Data; Types of data; Secondary data;
Advantages & Limitations of secondary data ; Internal Sources; External Sources.
12 L

UNIT 3

Sampling Techniques

Scaling Techniques; Concept of Attitude; Types of Scales; Criterion for good scale; General
Procedure in Attitude Scaling; Selected Attitude Scales; Limitations of Attitude Scale.

Sampling Design; Some basic Terms; Advantages of Sampling; Disadvantages of Sampling; The
sampling process; Sampling methods; Characteristics of Good Sampling Design; sampling and
non sampling errors; Sample size calculation (Numerical expected); Practical considerations in
determining sample size.

Tools and methods of research; Sources of data - primary and secondary source; Questionnaire
and schedules; Observation - participatory and non participatory; Interview method; Case study;
Content analysis of audio and video. 12 L

Page 2 of 16
UNIT 4

Research Applications, Analysis and Report

Areas of Research – Communication and Society – Process and Product Aspects – Media
problems and Issues – Mass media and traditional media – Research problems in information and
Communication society; Telecommunication – Convergence of technologies – Media ownership
and Regulation aspects. Importance of research in media; Application of research in electronic
media, Print, Advertising, New Media; Formative and summative research; Ethical issues in
media research; Media research as a tool of reporting. Application of Statistics; Data analysis,
Inferential statistics: Indexing, citation and bibliography; Research report writing.
12 L

UNIT 5

Methodology of Teaching

Teaching Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching - Teaching Methods: Lecture Method,

Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving Method, Project method,
Seminar- Integrating ICT in Teaching: Individualized Instruction, Ways for Effective
Presentation with Power Point- Documentation - Evaluation: Formative, Summative &
Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical,
Cognitive, Emotional Moral Development - Teaching Later Adolescents, Social and Moral
Development - Teaching later Adolescents.
10 L

REFERENCES

 Mass media research by Dominick and Wimmer

 Research methods in social relations by ClarieSelitz et al
 Mass media and the national experience: essays in communication history by Farrpr and
Stevens
 Methods in social research by Kothari
 Sampath,K., Panneerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to educational
technolog. (2nd revised ed.). New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
 Sharma, S.R.(2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools & techniques.
Jaipur: Mangal Deep.
 Vedanayagam, E.G. (1989). Teaching technology for college teachers. New York:
Sterling Publishers.

Page 3 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 2 -MEDIA USES AND EFFECTS
UNIT I

Present media context: Socio, Economic, Political and Cultural changes New Communication
Technologies: Cable and Satellite Television, Telecommunications and Internet. 14 L

UNIT II

New media Technology – characteristics: Information Superhighway, Convergence, Structure

and Functions; - social and cultural consequences: fragmentation and digital Isolation; Social
Control and Democracy – Privatization and Competition – New media access and control –
Digital Divide: - E-governance – process, social and legal frameworks – Policy initiatives.
12 L

UNIT III

Information and Knowledge society – Definitions and characteristics of Information Society,

Post-industrial society – Information Society Theories: Daniel Bell, Machlup, Webster, Schiller
– Evolution of New media audiences: Elite, Mass, Specialized and Interactive – New media uses
and gratifications – Influencing factors.
12 L

UNIT IV

Social and Cultural effects of New Media: Social Networking, Information Overload,
Information Rich and Information Poor, Knowledge Gap and Cultural Alienation New media
impact on old media – ICTs for Development – Empowerment, right to information.
12 L

UNIT V

New Media Theory – Perspectives, Technological Determinism, Constructivism, Functionalism,

Postmodernism, Characteristics of New Media – Uses, Adoption ICT and Social Transformation
– socio-technical paradigm, Information commodification new consumption norms – knowledge
gap. New media issues: Invasion of Privacy, Piracy, Cybercrimes and Pornography IT policies,
Information Bill and Regulations 10 L

Page 4 of 16
REFERENCES

• Global Communication in Transition: The end of diversity – By Hamid Mowlana, Sage

Publications, Newbury Park, 1996
• Information and Communication Technology in Development: Cases from India –Ed. By
SubhashBhatnagar and Robert Schwann, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2000
• Electronic Communication Convergence: Policy challenges in Asia – Ed. By Mark
Hukill et al. Sage publications, New Delhi, 2000
• Global Information and World Communication (2nd edition)– by Hamid Mowlana Sage
Publications, New Delhi, 1997

• New media and Politics – Ed. By Barrie Oxford and Richard Huggins, Sage Publications,
New Delhi, 2001
• World Communication Report: The media and the challenge of the new technologies –
Ed. By AlaineModouz, UNESCO Publishing 1997
• Reshaping Communications: Technology, Information and Social change – By Paschel
Preston, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2001

• Internationalizing media theory: Transition, Power, Culture – By John DH Downing,

Sage Publications, New York 1997
• The media and cultural production – By P. Eric Louw, Sage publications, New Delhi,
2001
• Media morphosis – By Roger Fidler, Sage publications, 1998
• New media – By Ronald Rice, Sage Publications, 1984
• Media Policy – Ed. By Denis McQuail, Sage Publications, London, 1998
• Media performance – By Denis McQuail, Sage Publications London, 1992
• New Communications Technology and the Public Interest: Comparative perspectives on
policy and research – Ed. By Marjorie Ferguson, Sage publications, 1986
• Theories of Information Society – by Frank Webster, Routledge Publications, London,
1995
• New Media Technology – Cultural and Commercial Perspectives – by John V. Pavlik,
Allyn and Bacon Publications
• E-Governance – by Pankaj Sharma, APH Publishing Corporation, 2004

Page 5 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 3 - JOURNALISM
UNIT I
Imperialism and globalization; Media and cultural studies; Critical attitudes to the Four theories
of the Press; Media as political subjects; Media ethics studies; Globalization theories and media
Internationalization: a critical appraisal ; Globalizing media law and policy. 14 L

UNIT II
Origin and development of press – importance of Hudson to the rise of modern journalism –
Guard dog theory of journalism - black era of Indian press – Indian media in the age of
Globalization – characteristics of yellow journalism. 12 L

UNIT III
Historical perspective of mass media laws – press commissions – objects and functions of press
council: general powers, guidelines and policy formulations - Report on Deshar Katha, Ayodhya,
AIDS and Media, etc. – impropriety and press freedom – code of conduct for newspapers –
Small and Medium Newspaper Development Corporation – protection of confidential sources of
information – controversies over confidentiality 12 L

UNIT IV
Ethical Issues and Challenges of Electronic News Gathering (ENG) – news in the global public
space - peak and valley theory of producing - opening and closing the package: merits and
demerits – off-the-record comments – Freedom of Information Act - Government control of
media – leak, trial balloon, false light, back time - developing sources. 12 L

UNIT V
Thick Journalism – formation of public opinion – emerging chaos of global news culture – the
local press and the McDonaldization thesis - centrality of banal journalism in news discourse –
gendered news practices in different national contexts – Concepts and case studies: Annotative
reporting – Interpretative and Investigative journalism - Chequebook journalism - political,
international relations, current affairs - journalism of record emerging forms and practices of
online journalism – basic tools of computer assisted reporting. 10 L

REFERENCES:
 Boyd- Barrett, O. & Rantanen, T (eds) (1999) The Globalization of News. London: Corwin
Press
 Clausen, L (2003) Global News Production. Copenhagen: Copenhagen Business School
Press
 Elliott, W.A. (1986) Us and Them: A Study of Group Consciousness. Aberdeen: Aberdeen
University Press.
 Franklin, Bob et al (2005) Key Concepts in Journalism Studies. New Delhi: Vistaar
Publications
 Keeble, Richard (2009) The newspapers handbook. NY:Routledge
 Singh, Manorama (2007) History of Journalism. New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House
 White, Ted (2005) Broadcast news: Writing, Reporting and Producing. USA: Elsevier

Page 6 of 16
 L T P C
Paper 4 - SEMIOTICS
4 0 0 4
UNIT 1:
Definitions - Origins of semiotics – semiotics and the philosophy of language, Russian formalism,
Bakhtin school, Prague structuralism, Jacobson’s communication paradigm, the advent of structuralism,
post-structuralism - Buhler and intimations of semiotics, Sebeok’s Thomism, branches and scope of
Peirce’s semiotic. 14 L

UNIT II:
Signs as the medium of semiotic - concept - sign systems: vocabulary, function, syntax, psychological
aspects of signification - critique of sign – theories: principle of difference, paradigmatic-syntagmatic
relationships, code-message, denotation-connotation, anchorage-relay, modality-representation, literary
Semiotics-Doctrine of Signs - sign production: semiotics and factual elements, the problem of a typology
of signs, critique of iconism, typology of modes of production. 12 L

UNIT III:
Textual analysis - aesthetic text as invention - the models: discursive, narrative, deep or abstract.
12 L

UNIT IV:
Codes – the sign function, expression and content, message and text, content and referent, meaning as
cultural unit, the interpretant, KF model, Q model, over coding under coding, interplay of codes, message
as an open form. 12 L

UNIT V: Possessions and commercial communication - Cine-semiology: the cinematic sign, syntagmatic
types, codes-subcodes, semiotics of narrative, cinematic realism, the nature of reflexivity - Decoding
advertisements: role of semiotics in consumer aesthetics research, advertising as social discourse:
positioning and image creation, immunization - Television drama: the naturalism debate, Morse code,
emergence of expressionism - Crisell’s semiotics of radio drama - Esslin’s radio drama signs - Marketing
and semiotics: defining the scope, ideology of consumption, product conceptualization and design, signs
in consumer aesthetics, consumer identity. 10 L

References:
 Allen, Robert C. (1992) Channels of Discourse, Reassembled: Television and Contemporary
Criticism. University of North Carolina Press.
 Beasley, Ron & Danesi, Marcel (2002) Persuasive Signs: The Semiotics of Advertising. Berlin:
Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co.
 Buckland, Warren (2000) The Cognitive Semiotics of Film. UK: Cambridge UniversityPress.
 Chandler, Daniel (2007) Semiotics –the Basics. NY: Taylor and Francis.
 Crook, Tim (1999) Radio Drama: Theory and Practice. NY: Routledge
 Deely, John (2004) Basics of semiotics. St. Augustine’s Press.
 Eco, Umberto (1979) A theory of semiotics. Milan: Indiana University Press.
 Holbrook, Morris B. & Hirschman, Elizabeth .C. (1993) The Semiotics of Consumption:
Interpreting Symbolic Consumer Behavior in Popular Culture and Works of Art. Berlin: Walter
de Gruyter GmbH & Co. Innis, Robert E. (1985) Semiotics - An Introductory Anthology. Milan:
Indiana University Press.

Page 7 of 16
 Jean, Donna & Sebeok, Umiker (1987) Marketing and Semiotics: New Directions in the Study of
Signs for Sale Berlin: Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co
 Krampen, Martin (1981) Classics of semiotics
 Lidov, David (1999) Elements of Semiotics. NY: St. Martin’s Press
 Martin, Bronwen (2006) Key Terms in Semiotics. Continuum books
 Page, Adrian (2000) Cracking Morse Code: Semiotics and Television Drama. UK: University of
Luton Press
 Stam, Robert, Robert Burgoyne, Sandy Flitterman, Lewis (1992) New Vocabularies in Film
Semiotics: Structuralism, Post-Structuralism and Beyond. NY: Routledge.
 Tejera, Victorino (1988) Semiotics from Peirce to Barthes: A Conceptual Introduction to the
Study of Communication, Interpretation and Expression. Netherlands: E.J.Brill, Leiden

Page 8 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 5 - DEVELOPMENT COMMUNICATION
UNIT I

Development: meaning, concept, process - Evolution of the theory and practice of development
communication - Critical perspectives - characteristics of developing societies, development dichotomies,
gap between developed and developing societies - Critique of communication approaches in Third World
development - Enterprise of modernization and the dominant discourse of development - Liberation
theology and development - Communication strategies for empowerment - Agricultural communication
and rural development. 14 L

UNIT II

Demography as development indicators - political profile (Indian constitution, Parliament, Legislative,

Judiciary, political processes, centre-state relations, local governments: urban and rural) - Right to
Information, Human Rights - Social stratification: development implications in rural-urban context -
Pluralism and its implications - Conflict and Consensus in Indian Society - Development of behaviour,
perception, learning, motivation and attitude. 12 L

UNIT III

Changing structure of Indian economy: Role and performance of agriculture - Organized and unorganized
sectors - Poverty and Unemployment problems - Liberalization and Globalization - Consumer movements
and Environmental movements - Role of government - Foreign investments and Role of multinational
corporations - International organizations for development such as World Bank, UNDP, IMF.
Development related concepts of cultural heritage, Cultural determinants of social values, beliefs and
behaviour, Regional culture and ethnic identity.

12 L
UNIT IV

Comparing communication profiles and policies of Developed and Developing countries - Population,
Health, Agriculture, Education, Communication/media, Industrial, Economic, Science and technology,
Environment, National integration, Communalism, Religion and politics, Class and Caste conflict,
Gender equality, Minimum needs, Child labour - Major Development Programmes such as Tribal
development, Watershed management. 12 L

UNIT V Media credibility, Ethics, Code and Analysis – impact of new communication technology:
Quality of life, Access to information, Privacy, Interactive communication, Rich-poor divide, New World
Information and Communication order – Emerging issues: influence on Women, Children, Religion -
Foreign channels, Commercialization, Globalization, etc. 10 L

Page 9 of 16
REFERENCES

 Agunga, R.A. (1997) Developing the Third world. A communication approach. Commack, NY:
Nova Science.
 Altafin, I. (1991) Participatory Communication in Social Development Evaluation. Community
Development Journal, 26 (4), 312-314.
 Atkin C. & Wallack L. (Eds.) (1990) Mass Communication and Public Health: Complexities and
Conflicts. Newbury Park: Sage Publications.
 Bandura, A. (1977) Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
 Beltrán, L.R. (1976) Alien premises, objects, and methods in Latin American communication
research. In E. M. Rogers (Ed.) Communication and development: Critical perspectives (pp. 15-
42). Beverly Hills: Sage.
 Bowes, J.E. (1997) Communication and community development for health information:
Constructs and models for evaluation, www.nnlm.nlm.nih.gov/pnr/eval/bowes/
 Brawley, E.A. &. Martinez-Brawley, E.E. (1999) Promoting Social Justice in Partnership with the
Mass Media, Journal of Sociology & Social Welfare, 26 (2), 63-86.
 Buchanan, D.R., Reddy, S. & Hossian Z. (1994) Social marketing: A critical appraisal, Health
promotion international, 9 (1), 49-57.
 Carey, J.W. (1989) Communication as culture : essays on media and society. Boston: Unwin
Hyman.
 Diaz-Bordenave, J. (1977) Communication and rural development. Paris: Unesco.
 Glanz K. & Rimer B.K. (1995) Theory at a glance. Washington: National Institute of Health.
 Hagen, E. (1962) On the theory of social change. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press.
 Hamelink, C. (1990) Integrated approaches to development communication: A study and training
kit, Journal of development communication.
 Holder, H.D. & Treno, A.J. (1997) Media advocacy in community prevention: News as a means
to advance policy change,
 Hornik, R.C. (1989) Channel effectiveness in development communication programs. In Rice,
R.E. & Atkin, C. K. (Eds.) Public information campaigns, 2nd edition, (pp. 309- 330). Newbury
Park: Sage.
 Inkeles A. & Smith D.H. (1974) Becoming modern. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
 Kavinya A., Alam S. & Decock A. (1994) Applying DSC methodologies to population issues: A
case study in Malawi. Rome: FAO.
 Kotler, P. & Zaltman, G. (1971) Social marketing: An approach to planned social change, Journal
of marketing, 35, 3-12.
 Kotler, P. & Roberto, E. (1989) Social marketing: Strategies for changing public behavior. New
York: Free Press.
 Lerner D. (1958) The passing of traditional society. New York: Free Press.
 McKee, Neill (1999) Social Mobilization & Social Marketing in Developing Communities:
Lessons for Communicators. Southbound.
 Melkote, S.R. (1991) Communication for development in the Third world. Newbury Park: Sage.
 Mita, R. & Simmons, R. (1995) Diffusion of the culture of contraception: Program effects on
young women in rural Bangladesh, Studies in family planning, 26 (1), 1-13.

Page 10 of 16
 Mlama, P.M. (1991) Women's participation in "communication for development": The popular
theater alternative in Africa, Research in African Literatures, 22 (3), 41-53.
 Mody, B (1991) Designing messages for development communication: An audience
participation-based approach. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
 Ogundimu, F. (1994) Communicating knowledge of immunization for development: A case study
from Nigeria, in Moemeka, A.A. (Ed.) Communicating for development
 Zinanga, A. & Ikim, Y.M. (1992) Changing men’s attitudes and behavior: The Zimbabwe male
motivation project, Studies in Family Planning 23 (6), 365-375.
 Quarmyne, W. (1991) Towards a more participatory environment: Cross-linking establishment
and alternative media, In K. Boafo (Ed.), Communication processes: Alternative channels and
strategies for development support. Ottawa: IDRC.
 Rockefeller Foundation (1999) Communication for social change: A position paper and
conference report. New York: Rockefeller Foundation.
 Rogers, E.M. (1976) Communication and development: The passing of the dominant paradigm,
Communication research 3 (2), 213-240.

Page 11 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 6 - NEW MEDIA STUDIES
UNIT I:
Foundations and theories of media, technology, & culture-Historical Foundations of New Media: What is
Technology? Digitization, Remediation, & Convergence. 14 L

UNIT II:

Theories of Media Technology-Technological Determinism, Social Construction of Technology, Social

and Technical Affordances, Diffusion of Innovation, Information Society, Network Society, Networked
Individualism, Social Networks, Networked Publics. 12 L

UNIT III:
Using the networks- Social production of knowledge, creative cultural production, Identity formation,
Sociality , connectivity, social media, locative and mobile media. Identity formation, the body and
information technology- selfies, blogs, wearable devices. 12 L

UNIT IV:
Controlling the networks- Governance of Infrastructures and Platforms, Surveillance and Privacy, Race
Online, Economics and Ownership, youth media, Digital Literacy, Digital Education. 12 L

UNIT V:
Digital Inequality: Social, political and infrastructural contexts, Public sphere, polarization, citizen
journalism, digital activism, Cyber culture. 10 L

REFERENCES:
1. Understanding Digital Culture, Vincent Miller
2. The Culture of Connectivity: A critical history of social media, Jose Van Dijck
3. Seeing Ourselves through Technology, Jill Walker Rettberg
4. Spreadable Media: Creating value and meaning in a networked culture, Jenkins, Ford, &
Green
5. Smartphones as Locative Media –Jordan Frith
6. Tim O’Reilly and John Battelle – “Web Squared: Web 2.0 Five Years On”
7. Frank Webster – “Theories of the Information Society” (Ch. 1-3)
8. David R. Brake – “Are we all online content creators now?: Web 2.0 and digital divides”
9. Niels van Doorn – “Digital spaces, material traces: how matter comes to matter in online
performances of gender, sexuality and embodiment”
10. Jill Walker Rettberg – Seeing Ourselves through Technology
11. Henry Jenkins, Sam Ford, & Joshua Green – Spreadable Media: Creating value and meaning in a
networked culture
12. David Buckingham – “Is there a digital generation?”
13. Mark Deuze – “The changing context of news work: liquid journalism and monitorial
citizenship”
14. Heather Horst, Becky Herr-Stephenson, & Laura Robinson – “Media Ecologies”
15. Jose van Dijck – “Users like you?: theorizing agency of user-generated content”

Page 12 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 7 - Media, Gender and Human Rights
Unit I

Gender - Understanding gender – Sex and Gender – Types of gender - Gender roles – Social construction
of feminity and masculinity - Feminist theories –First wave-Second wave and Third wave feminists
thinkers Feminist language – Post Modern Feminist thoughts – Masculinities – Queer theory –
Transgender politics, cyber feminism – Feminism in Indian context – Tamilnadu – Periyar and Bharathiar
- Feminism in literature – writers.
14 L

Unit II

Feminist Communication Theories- Feminist epistemology – empiricism – feminist ethnography – The

Structuralist Paradigm – muted group theory – standpoint theory –Critical theories of communication –
Sociological theories of mass communication - Judith Butler, Gaye Tuchman, Laura Mulvey, - Foucault
– Derrida - intersectionality – Framing – Discourse analysis – Popular culture.
12 L
Unit III

Human Rights - Human rights –Meaning – Nature - Principles of Human Rights – Characteristics of
Human Rights - UN – - UDHR - Classification of human rights– International Human Rights
Conventions – Special focus to CEDAW – Indian constitution and human rights –Protection of Human
Rights Act 1993 - National and international Human rights institutions – Role of civil society
organizations – Human rights organizations – national and international – human rights of marginalized
people
12 L
Unit IV

Media stereotypes and popular culture - Media stereotypes in entertainment media – news media –
representation – film, serials, news, reality shows, advertisements etc – Commercialization and
Objectification 12 L
Unit V

Human Rights Reporting - Role of mass media in protection of human rights – monitoring techniques –
complaint mechanism - Media and Contemporary Issues on Human Rights: Children’s Rights -
International standards on reporting human rights violations relating to Women’s Rights - Dalit’s Rights -
Bonded Labour and Wages - Refugees - Capital Punishment
10 L
REFERENCES
1. Gaye Tuchman, “The Symbolic Annihilation of Women by the Mass Media
2. Laura Mulvey, “Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema” (GMR)
3. Sandra Lee Bartky, “Femininity, Foucault and the Modernization of Patriarchal Power”
4. Marita Sturken and Lisa Cartwright, “Spectatorship, Power and Desire”

Page 13 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 8 - Film Studies
Unit I

Film theories- Film form – film language - Film theory – realist and formalist film theory – neo
formalism - auteur theory- structuralism- Marxist film theory - psychoanalysis – Freudian film theory –
feminist film theory - film and identity – audiences and spectatorship – modern film theory.

14 L

Unit II

Film form and culture -Image and reality – formal structures of film – film narratives – Film in the realm
of culture – theories of culture – Cultural meanings - The Frankfurt school – the critique of American
popular culture – high culture, masscult and midcult – The Birmingham School of Cultural Studies –
Cultural criticism – Modernity, modernism and the postmodernism. 12 L

Unit III

Film and representation -Encoding and decoding - Representation – Stuart Hall – Representations of Race
– Class – Caste – Gender – physically challenged – Muslim representation – minority representation –
constructions of social reality – intersectionality. 12 L

Unit IV

Film and society- Film – popular culture – Cinema and propaganda - film and politics – film and
everyday life - influence studies –crime films and society – film in different political contexts around the
world – film festivals. 12 L

Unit V

Research methodology in Film studies - Content analysis – Critical Discourse Analysis (CDA) in Film -
Reception studies in film – Reception and negotiation - Intertextuality and postmodernism.
10 L
REFERENCES

1. Adorno,Theodor (2002) The Culture Industry, Routledge.

2. Baskaran, Theodore (1981)The Message Bearers: The Nationalist Politics and the
Entertainment Media in South India, Cre-A.
3. David Bordwell and Kristin Thompson (2010), Film Art: An Introduction, McGraw Hill.
4. John Hill and Pamela Church Gibson (1998), The Oxford Guide to Film Studies,
Oxford,1998.
5. Hayward,Susan (1996) Key Concepts in Cinema Studies, Routledge.

Page 14 of 16
 L T P C
4 0 0 4
Paper 9 – Media Audience Studies
UNIT I-
Introduction to Media Audiences - Early Audience Research - The Effects Tradition Introduction
to audience analysis - Patterns of audiences: nature and characteristics - Audience demographics
Audience lifestyles and psychographics.
14 L

UNIT II-
Cultural Studies and the Audience - Cross-cultural audiences: “the rest” look at the west and
Cross-cultural audiences: the west looks at “the rest” - Theorizing the pleasures of popular culture - The
scary world of television: Cultural Indicators & Cultivation theory.
12 L

UNIT III-
Audiences as publics Audiences, identification, and realism Audiences, - Fans and Fandom -
Theories and applications of the active audience - Conceptual models of the audience - Measuring
Audiences: The Role of the Media Industry 12 L

UNIT IV-
Race, Identity and Media Consumption - Audiences and modernity - Audiences and new media
technologies - New Media Audiences: Interactivity and Fragmentation - Media ethnography: a contested
concept 12 L

UNIT V-
Trends in consumer habits and response - Media impact on audiences Techniques and strategies
of collecting information - Design of a basic audience research survey - Data analysis, interpretation
techniques, and research application: audience rating and experimental research
12 L
REFERENCES

1. Culture, Media, Language edited by Stuart Hall, Dorothy Hobson, Andrew Lowe and Paul Willis,
London: Hutchinson, 1980
2. Beville,H.M.., Jr. (1988). Audience ratings: Radio, television, cable (rev.ed). Hillsdale, NJ,
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates
3. Buckingham, D. (1993). Reading Audiences: Young people and the media. Manchester and New
York, Manchester University Press.
4. Livingstone, S. (1998). Making Sense of Television: The Psychology of Audience Interpretation.
London, Rouledge.
5. Moores, S. (1993). Interpreting audiences: The ethnography of media consumption. Thousand
Oaks, CA, Sage.

Page 15 of 16
Paper 10 - Mini Project

For dissertation the student has to take up a research study with the permission and approval
from the guide allotted. He/she should Choose from the broad field of Journalism and Mass
Communication and submit the research report. The viva-voce will be held at the end of the
semester.

Page 16 of 16
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

Ph.D - Course Work Papers

Sl.No COURSE TITLE CREDIT

1. Teaching and Research methodology 4
2. Human Resource Management 4
3. Industrial relations and Labour Welfare 4
4. Stress Management 4
5. Training and Development 4
6. Entrepreneurship Development 4
7. Business Ethics and corporate Governance 4
8. Banking theory Law and Practice 4
9. Security Analysis and portfolio Management 4
10. Merchant Banking and Financial services 4
11. International Trade 4
12. International Finance 4
13. Financial Management 4
14. Accounting for Financial decision making 4
15. Indian Financial System 4
16. Customer Relationship Management 4
17. Marketing Management 4
18. Supply chain Management 4
19. Integrated Marketing Communication 4
20. Rural Marketing 4
21. International Marketing 4
22. Consumer Behaviour 4
23. Service Marketing 4
24. Mini Project 4

Page 1 of 25
 Teaching and Research Methodology L T P C
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives :
 To develop understanding of the basic framework of research process.
 To understand the various research designs and techniques.
 To identify various sources of information for literature review, data collection, concept of
research and its methodologies
 To organize and conduct research in a more appropriate manner to write research
reports and theses.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION
Meaning and Significance – the research process – Types of Research – Exploratory and
causal Research – Theoretical and empirical Research – Cross –Sectional and time – series
Research – Research questions / Problems – Research objectives – Research hypotheses –
characteristics.
UNIT – II RESEARCH DESIGN AND MEASUREMENT
Research design – Definition – types of research design – exploratory and causal research
design – Descriptive and experimental design – different types of experimental design –
Validity of findings – internal and external validity – Variables in Research – Measurement and
scaling – Different scales – Construction of instrument – Validity and Reliability of instrument.
UNIT – III DATA COLLECTION
Types of data – Primary Vs Secondary data – Methods of primary data collection – Survey Vs
Observation – Experiments – Construction of questionaire and instrument – Validation of
questionnaire – Sampling plan – Sample size – determinants optimal sample size – sampling
techniques – Probability Vs Non–probability sampling methods.
UNIT – IV DATA PREPARATION AND REPORT WRITING
Data Preparation – editing – Coding –Data entry – Validity of data – Qualitative Vs Quantitative
data analyses – Bivariate and Multivariate statistical techniques – Factor analysis –
Discriminant analysis – cluster analysis – multiple regression and correlation –
multidimensional scaling – Conjoint Analysis - Application of statistical software for data
analysis - Research report – Different types – Contents of report
UNIT – V TEACHING METHODS
Teaching – Objectives of teaching, phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: lecture method,
discussion method, discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving method, project method.
Seminar- Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualised instruction, ways for effective presentation
with power points, documentation - Evaluation; formative, summative & continuous and
comprehensive Evaluation. Later Adolescent Psychology: meaning, physical, cognitive,
emotional, Social and moral Development –Teaching later adolescents
REFERENCES:
01 Kothari C.R, Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Age International
Publishers, 2015.
02 Saravanavel . P, Research Methodology, Margham Publishers, Chennai, 2013.
03 Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma: Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision:
New Delhi.2016.

Page 2 of 25
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To make the participant understand the role of HR Department in an organization
 To know the various functional areas of Human Resource Management.
 To understand the recent developments in Human Resource Management.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION
Introduction to HRM – Definition, Importance, Objective, Evolution of Concept, Changing
Environment of HR, Labour legislation – meaning, Line and Staff Functions of HR. Strategic HR
– Role in Strategy Formulation and Execution, Creating Strategy oriented HR System, HR
Scorecard – Meaning, Information Requirements and Steps in Preparing Scorecard.
UNIT – II PROCUREMENT
Job Analysis – Meaning, Process and Methods, Human Resource Planning – Importance,
Process, HR Demand and Supply Forecasting Techniques, Recruitment – Importance, Process
and Sources, Selection – Process, Selection Test – Types and Validation Process, Interview
Methods, Socialization – Importance and Types.
UNIT – III DEVELOPMENT
Training – Purpose, Process – Need Identification, Methods and Evaluation of Effectiveness,
Executive Development Programmes – Difference from training, Common Practices,
Performance Appraisal – Process, Techniques, MBO, 360 Degree Feedback. Career
Development – Career Choices, Career Stages, Techniques. Talent Management – meaning,
Process. Job Changes - Promotion, Demotion and Transfer.
UNIT – IV COMPENSATION AND INTEGRATION
Job Evaluation – Meaning, Process and Techniques, Compensation Plan – Deciding factors,
Framing Process, Strategies, Variable Compensation and Employee Benefits. Human Needs –
Motivation Theories, Employee Engagement, Leadership Theories and Quality of Work life.
Grievances – Causes and Redressal methods.
UNIT – V MAINTENANCE AND SEPARATION
Safety –Safety Procedure and Safety Programme, Change management – Process, Nature ,
forces and Resistance Separation – Retirement, Layoff, Out-placement and Discharge HR
Policies – Importance, Types, Process of Framing Policies, Human Resource Accounting &
Audit – Meaning, Types, E-HRM – ERecruitment, E-Selection, E-Training and E-
Compensation..
REFERENCES:
01 Dessler, “Human Resource Management”, (12th ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2016.
02 Aswathappa K., “Human Resource and Personnel Management”, (8th ed.), Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2016
03 Decenzo and Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, (10th ed.), Wiley, 2010.
04 Mamoria C.B & Mamoria S., “Personnel Management”, Himalaya Publishing Co., 2016.
05 Snell and Scott, “Human Resource Management: A South Asian Perspective”, 1/e,
Cengage Learning, India.

Page 3 of 25
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR WELFARE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To explore contemporary knowledge and gain a conceptual understanding of industrial
relations.
 To understand the meaning of industrial relations, industrialization and organization
structures.
 To examine the theoretical aspects, problems and issues in arbitration and bargaining
 To understand the various models of bargaining and arbitration. .
UNIT - I INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
Concepts – Importance – Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector – Growth of Trade
Unions – Codes of conduct.
UNIT – II INDUSTRIAL CONFLICT
Disputes – Impact – Causes – Strikes – Prevention – Industrial Peace – Government
Machinery – Conciliation – Arbitration – Adjudication.
UNIT - III LABOUR WELFARE
Concept – Objectives – Scope – Need – Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory Welfare
Measures – Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training Schemes.

UNIT - IV INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

Causes of Accidents – Prevention – Safety Provisions – Industrial Health and Hygiene –
Importance – Problems – Occupational Hazards – Diseases – Psychological problems –
Counseling – Statutory Provisions.
UNIT - V WELFARE OF SPECIAL CATEGORIES OF LABOUR
Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction Labour – Agricultural Labour
– Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO Labour - Social Assistance – Social Security –
Implications
REFERENCES:
01 Mamoria C.B. and Sathish Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.
02 Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial relations & Labour Laws.
Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
03 Ratna Sen, Industrial Relations in India, Shifting Paradigms, Macmillan India Ltd., New
Delhi, 2012
04 Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour laws, Vikas Publications, 2016.

Page 4 of 25
 STRESS MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To provide a broad physical, social and psychological understanding of human stress.
 To present a broad background knowledge of stress management.
 To understand the management of work related stress at an individual and
organizational level.
 To develop and implement effective strategies to prevent and manage stress at work.
UNIT - I UNDERSTANDING STRESS
Meaning – Symptoms – Works Related Stress – Individual Stress – Reducing Stress –
Burnout.
UNIT – II COMMON STRESS FACTORS
Time Management – Techniques – Importance of planning the day – Time management
schedule – Developing concentration – Organizing the Work Area – Prioritizing – Beginning at
the start – Techniques for conquering procrastination – Sensible delegation – Taking the right
breaks.
UNIT - III CRISIS MANAGEMENT
Implications – People issues – Environmental issues –Psychological fall outs – Learning to
keep calm – Preventing interruptions – Controlling crisis – Importance of good communication
– Taking advantage of crisis – Pushing new ideas – Empowerment.

UNIT - IV WORK PLACE HUMOUR

Developing a sense of Humour – Learning to laugh – Role of group cohesion and team spirit –
Using humour at work – Reducing conflicts with humour.
UNIT - V SELF DEVELOPMENT
Improving Personality – Leading with Integrity – Enhancing Creativity – Effective decision
Making – Sensible Communication – The Listening Game – Managing Self – Meditation for
peace – Yoga for Life.
REFERENCES:
01 Cooper, Managing Stress, Sage Publications, 2014
02 Waltschafer, Stress Management, 4th Edition 2009Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
03 Argyle. The Psychology of Happiness. Tata McGraw Hill. 2014
04 Bartlet. Stress – Perspectives & Process. Tata McGraw Hill. 2014
05 Juan R. Alascal, Brucata, Laurel Brucata, Daisy Chauhan. Stress Mastery. Pearson,2014

Page 5 of 25
 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To improve the participant‟s understanding of training needs
 To focus on assessment of training needs by assessing the existing skill sets of the
employees
 To make aware of the various training programs as well as of knowledge of new training
program.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Training Concept: Definition, Meaning, Need for Training, Objectives of Training, Concept of
Education, Role, Need and Importance of Training, Overview of Training Functions, Types of
Training
UNIT – II TRAINING PROCESS
Process of Training: Steps In Training, Assessment of Training Needs (Person Analysis, Task
Analysis, Organization Analysis), Scope of need assessment, Principles of Learning, Theories
of Learning (Reinforcement Theory, Social Learning Theory, Andragogy), Learning Process
UNIT - III MANAGING TRAINING PROGRAMME
Designing and Implementing a Training Program: Transfer of Training, Training Design,
Traditional Methods and Techniques of Training, Designing a Training Module (Cross Cultural,
Leadership, Training the Trainer, Change), Management Development Program, Training
Budget, Resistance to Training
UNIT - IV EVALUATION OF TRAINING
Evaluation of Training Program: Kirkpatrick Model of Evaluation, CIRO Model, Cost-Benefit
Analysis, ROI of Training
UNIT - V TECHNOLOGY IN TRAINING
CBT, Multimedia Training, E-Learning / Online Learning, Distance Learning, New training
methods, NLP, Various training instruments.
REFERENCES:
01 Lynton Rolf P and Pareek, Udai “Training for Development”, (3rd ed.), Sage pub., 2012.
02 Noe, Raymond A and Kodwani , Amitabh Deo “Employee Training and Development”, (5th
ed.), Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 2014
03 Rothwell William J “Beyond Training and Development”, Jaico, 2007
04 Phillips, Patricia Pulliam “ASTD Handbook for Measuring & Evaluating Training”, (1st ed.),
Cengage, 2012

Page 6 of 25
 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To develop and strengthen entrepreneurial quality among the students.
 To impart knowledge of basic entrepreneurial skills.
 To get practical knowledge to run a business efficiently and effectively. .
UNIT - I ENTREPRENEURAL COMPETENCE
Entrepreneurship concept – Entrepreneurship as a Career – Entrepreneurial Personality -
Characteristics of Successful, Entrepreneur – Knowledge and Skills of Entrepreneur.
UNIT – II ENTREPRENEURAL ENVIRONMENT
Business Environment - Role of Family and Society - Entrepreneurship Development Training
and Other Support Organizational Services - Central and State Government Industrial Policies
and Regulations - International Business
UNIT - III BUSINESS PLAN PREPARATION
Finance and Human Resource Mobilization Operations Planning - Market and Channel
Selection - Growth Strategies - Product Launching – Incubation, Venture capital, IT startups
UNIT - IV LAUNCHING OF SMALL BUSINESS
Positioning of services – Designing service delivery System, Service Channel – Pricing of
services, methods – Service marketing triangle - Integrated Service marketing communication
UNIT - V MANAGEMENT OF SMALL BUSINESS
Monitoring and Evaluation of Business - Preventing Sickness and Rehabilitation of Business
Units- Effective Management of small Business.
REFERENCES:
01 Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014..
02 S.S.Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S.Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi,
2016.
03 Mathew Manimala, Entrepreneurship Theory at the Crossroads, Paradigms & Praxis,
Biztrantra ,4th Edition ,2014
04 Prasanna Chandra, Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and
Reviews, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2015.
05 P.Saravanavel, Entrepreneurial Development, Ess Pee kay Publishing House, Chennai
2014.

Page 7 of 25
 BUSINESS ETHICS & CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Course Objectives
 To enhance responsibility and accountability towards business and community
through ethical practices.
 To recognize and resolve ethical issues in business.
 To grasp the current issues and implications of CSR on social development and
progress
 To familiarize the students with the knowledge of emerging trends in good
governance practices and corporate social responsibility in the global and Indian
context.
UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL ETHICS
Economic Environment - Philosophy of economic grow and its implications for business
- Main features of Economic Planning with respect to business - Industrial policy and
framework of government contract over Business - Role of chamber of commerce and
confederation of Indian Industries.
UNIT II MANAGING ETHICAL DILEMMA
Characteristics - ethical decision making - ethical reasoning - the dilemma resolution
process - ethical dilemmas in different business areas of finance – marketing - HRM,
international business - Ethical culture in Organization - Developing codes of ethics and
conduct - ethical and value based leadership - Indian Wisdom & Indian approaches
towards business ethics.
UNIT – III CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Introduction to CSR: Meaning & Definition of CSR - History & evolution of CSR.
Concept of Charity - Corporate philanthropy -Corporate Citizenship - Concept of
sustainability & Stakeholder Management - Relation between CSR and Corporate
governance; environmental aspect of CSR; models of CSR in India
UNIT – IV CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Meaning – need- scope- importance – benefits – role of corporate governance -
corporate governance code - transparency & disclosure - role of auditors - board of
directors and share holders - Global issues of governance - accounting and regulatory
frame work - corporate scams - committees in India and abroad - Future of governance-
innovative practices.
UNIT – V CORPORATE MANAGEMENT
Management vs. Governance; internal constituents of the corporate governance; key
managerial personnel (KMP); chairman- qualities of a chairman - powers,
responsibilities and duties of a chairman - chief executive officer (CEO) - role and
responsibilities of the CEO - separation of roles of chairman and CEO; CFO; manager;
company secretary; auditor.
REFERENCES:
01 Murthy C.S.V. Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Himalaya Publishing, 2016
Edition
02 S K Mandal, Ethics in Business and Corporate Governance, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
03 A.C. Fernando, Business Ethics: An Indian Perspective, Pearson, 2015
04 Riya Rupani, Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Himalaya Publishing, 2017.

Page 8 of 25
 L T P C
BANKING THEORY LAW AND PRACTICE
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To acquire specialized knowledge of law and practice relating to Banking.
 To understand Banking theory and to know about the banking innovations.
 To understand the conceptual and legal parameters including the judicial
interpretation of banking law.
 To acquaint students with the banking technology and their recent developments.
 To enhance their knowledge on modern banking concepts and techniques.
UNIT- I STRUCTURE OF INDIAN BANKING BUSINESS
Banking Business Development and Evolution/Innovation in India - Investment policy
and cash reserve ratio of commercial bank - Window dressing - KYC - Concepts of
CAMELS in banking.
UNIT – II BRANCH OPERATION AND CORE BANKING
Introduction and evolution of bank management – Technological impact in banking
operation – Total branch computerization – Concept of opportunities – Centralized
banking – Concept, opportunities, challenges and implementation
UNIT –III REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AND COMPLIANCES
Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 - Banking Regulation Act, 1949 - New Bank Licensing
Policy, 2013 - Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002 (PMLA) - Banking Codes and
Standards Board of India (BSCSBI)- The Banking Ombudsman Scheme - Bankers‟
Book Evidence Act, 1891- Recovery of Debts Due to Banks and Financial institutions
Act, 1993 (DRT Act).
UNIT –IV INDIAN ELECTRONIC BANKING SYSTEM
Core banking solution - Telebanking - Mobile banking - Forms of E-banking - ATM -
Credit card - Debit card - Smart card - Electronic Money – E- Cheques- Electronic
Token - Electronic Purse - SWIFT - RTGS - NEFT – CHIPS – ECS –IFCS –CBS -
Online IPOs - Green shoe option –international Payment System.
UNIT – V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN BANKING
Techniques Analysis of Rangarajan committee reports – E Banking budgeting –
Banking software‟s - Future of Indian Banking.

REFERENCES:
01P M Sundaram and P N Varshney, - Banking Law and Practice “,Sultan chand &
Sons Publishing House,2016.
02 C Shekar, Lekshmy Shekar, - Banking theory and practice “,Vikas Publishing House
Pvt Ltd.2016.
03Vasant Desal - Bank Management “,Himalaya Publishing House”.2015.
04 E.Gordon & K. Natrajan, ―Banking Theory, Law & Practice”, Himalaya
PublishingHouse, Mumbai, 24th revised edition, 2015.
05 Banking Theory and Practice” by Dr. P.K. Srivastava, Himalaya Publishing House,
Mumbai, 2015..

Page 9 of 25
 SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To Analyze and understand Economic, Industry and Company information.
 To apply fundamental and technical analysis for security valuation.
 To interpret the published information and value the share price movements.
 To understand the various alternatives available for investment and to measure risk and return.
UNIT – I INVESTMENT SETTING AND SECURITIES MARKETS
Financial and economic meaning of Investment – Characteristics and objectives of Investment – Types
of Investment – Making a trade at market place: Primary and Secondary Markets - Methods of floating
new issues Market - Regulation of primary market, Stock exchanges in India - Trading system in stock
exchanges.
UNIT – II FUNDAMENTAL ANALYSIS
Economic Analysis – Economic forecasting and stock Investment Decisions – Forecasting techniques
Industry Analysis : Industry classification, Industry life cycle – Company Analysis - Measuring Earnings
– Forecasting Earnings – Applied Valuation Techniques – Graham and Dodds investor ratios.
UNIT – III TECHNICAL ANALYSIS
Fundamental Analysis Vs Technical Analysis – Charting methods – Market Indicators Trend – Trend
reversals – Patterns - Moving Average – Exponential moving Average – Oscillators – Market Indicators
– Efficient Market theory.
UNIT – IV PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT AND SELECTION
Portfolio analysis and selection: Portfolio concept, Portfolio risk and return, Beta as a measure of risk,
Calculation of Beta, Selection of Portfolio: Markowitz‟s theory, Single Index Model – Capital Asset
Pricing model –Arbitrage pricing theory.
UNIT – V PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Portfolio management and performance evaluation: Performance evaluation of Existing Portfolio,
Sharpe and Trynor measures; Finding alternatives and revision of portfolio.
REFERENCES:
01 Donald E.Fischer & Ronald J.Jordan, Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, PHI Learning.,
New Delhi, 8th edition, 2014.
02 Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
03 V.A.Avadhan, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
04 Preeti Singh, Investment Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
05 Punithavathy Pandian, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2015.

Page 10 of 25
 MERCHANT BANKING AND FINANCIAL SERVICES L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To outline the linkage between Merchant Banking, Retail Banking and central banking.
 To expose the important legislations affecting merchant banking activities.
 To identify the various segments of merchant banking industry.
 To identify the scope and opportunities in the field of Foreign Exchange and Investments.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION OF FINANCIAL SYSTEM
Indian Financial System – Merchant Banking in India – Recent Developments and Challenges
ahead – Functions of Merchant Bank Legal and Regulatory Framework – Relevant Provisions
of Companies Act - Securities Contract Regulation Act, 1956 - SEBI Act,1992 – SEBI
Guidelines relating to Investor Protection - Relation with Stock Exchanges and OTCEI.
UNIT – II NEW ISSUES MANAGEMENT
Role of Merchant Banker in Appraisal of Projects, Designing Capital Structure and Instruments
– Issue Pricing – Book Building – Preparation of Prospectus Selection of Bankers, Advertising
Consultants, etc. - Role of Registrars –Bankers to the Issue, Underwriters, and Brokers. – Offer
for Sale.
UNIT – III MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS
Mergers and Acquisitions – Portfolio Management Services – Credit Syndication –- Credit
Rating – Meaning, Significance Agencies, National & International - Business Valuation
UNIT- IV LEASING AND HIRE PURCHASING
Leasing and Hire Purchasing – Hire Purchase act, 1972 - Financial Evaluation - Factoring and
Forfaiting – Venture Capital.
UNIT- V FOREX SERVICES
Forex Services - Related Regulations - RBI Guidelines – FDI Policy 2013 - FII – SEBI
Guidelines relating to FII, Mutual Funds – Organisation, types & Objectives , SEBI guidelines
relating to Mutual Funds - Foreign Pension Funds – Investment Banking.
REFERENCES:
01 S.Gurusamy,”Merchant Banking & Financial Services”, (2nd ed.),Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2014.
02 M.Y.Khan, “Financial Services”, (11th ed.), Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014. .
03 Nalini Prava Tripathy, “Financial Services”, PHI Learning, 2014.
04 Varshney P.N. “Indian Financial System”, Sultan Chand & Sons, New,Delhi.

Page 11 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL TRADE FINANCE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To describe the importance of balance of trade, balance of payment and various
international commercial terms to the development of macroeconomic policy
 To evaluate the foreign exchange rate and the risk reduction strategies of Forex To
Describe and distinguish among alternative trade documents of both export and import
 To Highlight the Indian government‟s export promotion schemes.
UNIT- I INTERNATIONAL TRADE
International Trade – Meaning and Benefits – Basis of International Trade – Foreign Trade and
Economic Growth – Balance of Trade – Balance of Payment – Current Trends in India –
Barriers to International Trade – WTO – Indian EXIM Policy.
UNIT- II EXPORT AND IMPORT FINACE
Special need for Finance in International Trade – INCO Terms (FOB, CIF, etc.,) – Payment
Terms – Letters of Credit – Pre Shipment and Post Shipment Finance – Forfeiting – Deferred
Payment Terms – EXIM Bank – ECGC and its schemes – Import Licensing – Financing
methods for import of Capital goods.
UNIT-III FOREX MANAGEMENT
Foreign Exchange Markets – Spot Prices and Forward Prices – Factors influencing Exchange
rates – The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade – Tools for hedging against Exchange
rate variations – Forward, Futures and Currency options – FEMA – Determination of Foreign
Exchange rate and Forecasting.
UNIT-IV DOCUMENTATION IN INTERNATIONAL TRADE
Export Trade Documents: Financial Documents – Bill of Exchange- Type- Commercial
Documents - Proforma, Commercial, Consular, Customs, Legalized Invoice, Certificate of
Origin Certificate Value, Packing List, Weight Certificate, Certificate of Analysis and Quality,
Certificate of Inspection, Health certificate. Transport Documents - Bill of Lading, Airway Bill,
Postal Receipt, Multimodal Transport Document. Risk Covering Document: Insurance Policy,
Insurance Cover Note. Official Document: Export Declaration Forms, GR Form, PP From, COD
Form, Softer Forms, Export Certification, GSPS – UPCDC Norms.
UNIT- V EXPORT PROMOTION SCHEMES
Government Organizations Promoting Exports – Export Incentives : Duty Exemption – IT
Concession – Marketing Assistance – EPCG, DEPB – Advance License – Other efforts I Export
Promotion – EPZ – EQU – SEZ and Export House.
REFERENCES:
01 Apte P.G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
02 Jeff Madura, International Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2014.
03 Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, PHI Learning, 5 th Edition, 2016.
04 Eun and Resnik, International Financial Management, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 5 th Edition, 2015.
05 Website of Indian Government on EXIM policy.

Page 12 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL FINANCE L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To get an insight of the International Monetary and Financial System.
 To know about Balance of payments and its components.
 To get an basic idea about calculation of Foreign Exchange Rates and Risks.
 To understand the factors influencing the Foreign Exchange rates
UNIT- I INTERNATIONAL MONETARY AND FINANCIAL SYSTEM
International Monetary and Financial System: Importance of international finance; Bretton
woods conference and afterwards, IMF and the World Bank; European monetary system –
meaning and scope
UNIT- II BALANCE OF PAYMENTS AND ITS COMPONENTS
Balance of Payment and International Linkages: Balance of payments and its components;
International flow of goods, services and capital; Coping with current account deficit.

UNIT- III INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTRUMENTS

International Financial Markets and Instruments: International capital and money markets;
Money and capital market instruments; Salient features of different international markets;
Arbitrage opportunities; Integration of markets; Role of financial intermediaries.
UNIT- IV FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS
Foreign Exchange Markets: determining exchange rates; fixed and flexible exchange rate
system; exchange rate theories; participants in the foreign exchange markets; foreign
exchange markets – cash and spot markets; Exchange rate quotes; LERMS; Factors affecting
exchange rates – spot rates, forward exchange rates, forward exchange contracts; Foreign
exchange and currency futures; Exchange rate arrangement in India ; Exchange dealings and
currency possession; Information and communication; Foreign exchange trades
UNIT - V FOREIGN EXCHANGE RISK
Foreign Exchange Risk: Transaction exposure, translation exposure and economic exposure;
Management of exposure – internal techniques, netting, marketing, leading and lagging, pricing
policy, assets and liability management and techniques.
REFERENCES:
01 Apte P.G., International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014.
02 Eitman, D.K. and A.I Stenehill : Multinational Business Cash Finance, Addison Wesley,
New York. 2016
03 Henning, C.N., W Piggot and W.H Scott: International Financial Management, McGraw
Hill, International Edition. 2016..
04 Levi, Maurice D : International Finance, McGraw – Hill, International Edition. 2014, 2015.
05 Rodriqufe, R.M. and E.E.Carter: International Financial Management, Prentice Hall,
International Edition.2016
06 Yadav, SurendraS, P.K Jain and Max Peyrard: Foreign Exchange Markets, Macmillion,
New Delhi. 2012.

Page 13 of 25
 L T P C
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:

 To understand the theoretical framework of financial management in business

corporations.
 To understand the goals of the finance manager.
 To help the students gain a detailed account of various financial functions of
business organizations.
 To understand and to apply financial concepts and principles in overall
management..

UNIT –I COST OF CAPITAL

Factors affecting cost of capital - Methods of computation of cost of capital - Methods of
Ranking investment proposal - Capital structure - Theories of capital structure.

UNIT –II PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Portfolio theory - Reducing risk through diversification - Investment preference Factors
contributing to M&A and M&A Wave - Synergies of M&A - Managing M&A.

UNIT – III MANAGEMENT OF CASH AND MARKETABLE SECURITIES

Motives for Holding Cash; Objectives of Cash Management; Factors Determining Cash
Needs; Basic Strategies of Cash Management; Cash Management Techniques /
Processes; Marketable Securities; and Cash Management Practices in India.

UNIT – IV CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING

Conceptual Framework - Financial Framework - Tax Aspect of Amalgamation -Merger
and Demergers - Legal and Procedural Aspects of Mergers/Amalgamations and
Acquisition/Takeovers - and other forms of Corporate Restructuring.

UNIT – V FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT OF PUBLIC SECTOR UNDERTAKINGS

(PSUS)
Peculiarities of PSUs with Focus on Accounting and Finance - Financial Decisions in
PSUs - Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) in PSUs - and Disinvestment in Public
Sector Enterprises.

REFERENCES:
01 Kishore M Ravi, Strategic Financial Management, Taxmann Publication Pvt. Ltd.
New Delhi,2015.
02 Dhamija Sanjay and Van Horne J.C, Financial Management and Policy, 12th
Edition, Pearson Education, 2016
03 Pandey I. M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2016.
04 Khan M Y, and Jain P. K, Financial Management: Text, Problems & Cases,Tata
McGraw Hill,Education Private Limited., 2015.
05 Fundamentals of Financial Management -”, J. Srinivasan P. Periasamy.”2016.

Page 14 of 25
 ACCOUNTING FOR FINANCIAL DECISION MAKING

Course Objectives: L T P C
 To attain Sustainable Knowledge with decision making in 4 0 0 4
financial related issues.
 To develop a critical understanding of financial tools and techniques.
 To understand both the theoretical and practical role of financial management in
business corporations.
 To have a greater appreciation and understanding of the importance of risk within
the context of financial decision making.

UNIT – I FINANCIAL PLANNING AND STRATEGY

Strategy decision making and planning for Sustainable growth -Risk appraisal methods
- Balancing risk and return - Portfolio theory and asset pricing models -

UNIT – II BETA ESTIMATION AND THE COST OF EQUITY

CAPM and the opportunity cost of equity capital - Options and their valuations -
Binomial model for option valuation - Financial ratio analysis - Trading Legitimacy.

UNIT – III CAPITAL BUDGETING DECISIONS

Investment decision - investment evaluation criteria -Accounting rate of return - Net
Present Value - Internal Rate of Return - Profitability Index - Discounting Payback

UNIT – IV CAPITAL STRUCTURE DECISION

Capital structure & market value of a firm. Theories of capital structure – NI approach,
NOI approach, Modigliani Miller approach, traditional approach. Arbitrage process in
capital structure - Planning the capital structure: EBIT and EPS analysis. ROI & ROE
analysis. Capital structure policy.

UNIT – V WORKING CAPITAL CYCLE

Interpretation of working capital ratios - Capital structure Planning and Policy - Trade-
off theory - Pecking Order theory - Flow-to-Equity Approach - Adjusted Present value
(WACC and Miles-Ezzel).
REFERENCES
01 Khan M.Y and Pillai P.K, “Financial Management”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, New Delhi,Edition 2016.
02 Palanivelu V.R “Financial Management”, S.Chand Publishing House,New Delhi,
Edition 2016.
03 I M Pandey, “Financial Management” , Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi,
Edition 2017.
04 Pearson, “Financial Management and Policy”, James C.Van Horne and Sanjay
Dhamija , Dorling Kindersley (india) Pvt.Ltd.2015.
05Chandra, Prasana: Financial Management; Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

Page 15 of 25
 L T P C
INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To have a Bird‟s view of the Indian Financial System and in Global Indian
Banking System.
 To provide conceptual understanding and in-depth knowledge of securities
markets in India
 To understand the structure of financial markets and institutions.
 To equip the students with the knowledge of sources of the funds and also of
investing the funds.
UNIT – I FINANCIAL MARKETS
Money and capital markets - Money market – meaning, constituents, participants –
functions. Money market instruments – call money, treasury bills, certificate of deposit,
commercial bills, trade bills, commercial paper, recent trends in Indian money market;
capital market – primary and secondary markets; capital market instruments.
UNIT – II SECURITIES MARKET
Financial Market – Segments – Types –– Participants in financial Market – Regulatory
Environment, Primary Market – Methods of floating new issues, Book building – Role of
primary market – Regulation of primary market, Stock exchanges in India – BSE,
OTCEI , NSE, ISE, and Regulations of stock exchanges – Trading system in stock
exchanges –systematic and unsystematic risk – SEBI – money market – Debt market.
UNIT III FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKET
Foreign Exchange Markets – Spot Prices and Forward Prices – Factors influencing
Exchange rates – The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade – Tools for hedging
against Exchange rate variations – Forward, Futures and Currency options – FEMA –
Determination of Foreign Exchange rate and Forecasting.
UNIT IV DERIVATIVES MARKET
Derivatives – Definition – Types – Forward Contracts – Futures Contracts – Options –
Swaps – Differences between Cash and Future Markets – Types of Traders – OTC and
Exchange Traded Securities – Types of Settlement – Uses and Advantages of
Derivatives – Risks in Derivatives – Derivatives market in India.
UNIT – V MARKET PARTICIPANTS & PUBLIC ISSUES
Depository – role and functions – Depository participants‟ issuers and registrars (RTs) –
Role of FIIs, and Investment Bankers – New public issue - book building process –
IPOs, FPOs – Private placement QIP, QIBs, offer for sale – grading of new issues –
content of offer document.
REFERENCES:
01 Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, ―Management of Banking and Financial Services,
Pearson, Delhi, 2016.
02 Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill,
6th edition 2017.
03 Keith Redhead, ‗Financial Derivatives – An Introduction to Futures, Forwards, Options
and SWAPs„,– PHI Learning, 2011.
04 Jeff Madura, International Corporate Finance, Cengage Learning, 9th Edition, 2011.
05 M.Y Khan, Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th Edition, 2011

Page 16 of 25
 L T P C
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives
 To impart skill based knowledge of Customer Relationship Management.
 To understand the concepts and principles of CRM.
 To understand the need and importance of maintaining a good customer
relationship.
 To gain knowledge of strategic customer acquisition and retention techniques in
CRM.
 To recognize the basic technological infrastructure and organizations involved in
current and emerging CRM practices.
UNIT I UNDERSTANDING CUSTOMERS
Customer information Database – Customer Profile Analysis - Customer perception,
Expectations analysis – Customer behaviour in relationship perspectives; individual and
group customer‟s - Customer life time value – Selection of Profitable customer
segments.
UNIT II CRM STRUCTURES
Elements of CRM – CRM Process – Strategies for Customer acquisition – Retention
and Prevention of defection – Models of CRM – CRM road map for business
applications.
UNIT III CRM PLANNING AND IMPLEMENTATION
Strategic CRM planning process – Implementation issues – CRM Tools- Analytical CRM
– Operational CRM – Call centre management – Role of CRM Managers - CRM
Implementation Road Map- Developing a Relationship Orientation - Customer-centric
Marketing and Processes - customer retention plans
UNIT – IV SERVICE QUALITY
Concept of Quality - Meaning and Definition of Service Quality - Factors influencing
customer expectation and perception - Types of Service Quality - Service Quality
Dimensions - Service Quality Gaps - Measuring Service Quality - Service Quality
measurement Scales.
UNIT V TRENDS IN CRM
e- CRM Solutions – Data Warehousing – Data mining for CRM – an introduction to
CRM software packages - The Technological Revolution: Relationship Management –
Changing Corporate Cultures.
REFERENCES
01 G.Shainesh, Jagdish, N.Sheth, Customer Relationships Management Strategic
Prespective, Macmillan 2015.
02 Alok Kumar et al, Customer Relationship Management : Concepts and
applications, Biztantra, 2015.
03 H.Peeru Mohamed and A.Sahadevan, Customer Relation Management, Vikas
Publishing 2017.
04 Jim Catheart, The Eight Competencies of Relatioship selling, Macmillan India,
2016.
05 Zikmund. Customer Relationship Management, Wiley 2012 .

Page 17 of 25
 L T P C
MARKETING MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
 To study the strategies for developing new products and services that are
consistent with evolving market needs.
 To evaluate the viability of marketing a product or service in an international
market or markets.
 To know the contemporary issues in marketing.
 To understand the concept of green marketing.

UNIT-I STRATEGIC MARKETING PLANNING

Market Analysis and Selection: Marketing environment – macro and micro components
and their impact on marketing decisions; Market segmentation and positioning; Buyer
behaviour; consumer versus organizational buyers; Consumer decision making
process.
UNIT-II MARKETING RESEARCH
Meaning and scope of marketing research; Marketing research process. Marketing
Organisation and Control: Organising and controlling marketing operations. -
Understanding the Marketing-Information Systems (MIS)- Introduction, -
Characteristics of MIS- Benefits – Types – Components of Marketing Research.
UNIT – III CRM AND OTHER CONTEMPORARY ISSUES
Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Definitions of
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management -
Managing Customer Loyalty and Development - Reasons Behind Losing Customers by
Organisations - Significance of Customer Relationship Management - Social Actions
Affecting Buyer-Seller Relationships - Rural Marketing - Services Marketing - E-
Marketing or Online Marketing - cyber marketing.
UNIT – IV INTERNATIONAL MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Introduction - Nature of International Marketing - International Marketing Concept
- International Market Entry Strategies - Approaches to International Marketing -
International Product Policy - International Promotions Policy - International
Branding - Country of Origin Effects - International Pricing.
UNIT – V GREEN MARKETING
Green marketing concept Eco-friendly marketing - principles and challenges of green
marketing - Environmentalism concepts - problems in green marketing - green
marketing strategies - Stakeholders of green marketing
REFERENCES:
01 Philip Kotler , Kevin Lane Keller ― Marketing Management‖ 15th Edition, Person
Publications Limited, 2017.
02 Noel Capon and Siddharth Shekar Singh,‖ managing Marketing–An Applied
Approach‖, Wiley India Pvt Limited 2017.
03 Kenneth E.Clow. Donald Baack, ―cases in marketing management,‖ 5 th edition,
Person India Ltd, 2014.
04 Arunkumar and Meenakshi, ―Marketing Management,‖ Vikas Publishing House,
2015.

Page 18 of 25
 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To create awareness on the functions of Supply Chain Management and to lay down the
path to enter the supply chain business.
 To facilitate the development of skills for practical problem solving approach to complex
areas of supply chain management.
 To learn various issues related to demand, inventory and supply management along with
practical implementation.
 To appraise the recent trends, design and redesign of a supply chain Network as key
components of an organization‟s strategic plan.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION OF SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
Supply Chain – Fundamentals –Evolution- Role in Economy - Importance - Decision Phases -
Supplier- Manufacturer-Customer chain. - Enablers/ Drivers of Supply Chain Performance -
Supply chain strategy - Supply Chain Performance Measures.
UNIT – II STRATEGICSOURCING
Outsourcing – Make Vs buy - Identifying core processes - Market Vs Hierarchy - Make Vs buy
continuum -Sourcing strategy - Supplier Selection and Contract Negotiation - Creating a world
class supply base- Supplier Development - World Wide Sourcing
UNIT – III SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK
Distribution Network Design – Role - Factors Influencing Options, Value Addition – Distribution
Strategies - Models for Facility Location and Capacity allocation. Distribution Center Location
Models Supply Chain Network optimization models Impact of uncertainty on Network Design -
Network Design decisions using Decision trees.
UNIT – IV PLANNING DEMAND, INVENTORY AND SUPPLY
Managing supply chain cycle inventory Uncertainty in the supply chain –- Analysing impact of
supply chain redesign on the inventory - Risk Pooling - Managing inventory for short life – cycle
products -multiple item -multiple location inventory management - Pricing and Revenue
Management
UNIT – V CURRENT TRENDS
Supply Chain Integration - Building partnership and trust in SC Value of Information: Bullwhip
Effect - Effective forecasting - Coordinating the supply chain - SC Restructuring - SC Mapping -
SC process restructuring, Postpone the point of differentiation – IT in Supply Chain - Agile
Supply Chains -Reverse Supply chain. Agro Supply Chains
REFERENCES:
01 Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management – Text and Cases, Pearson Education,2016.
02 Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and
Operation, PHI Learning / Pearson Education, 2016.
03 Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and
Operation, PHI Learning / Pearson Education, 2016
04 David Simchi-Levi, Philip Kaminsky, Edith Simchi-Levi, Designing and Managing the
Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2014
05 Altekar Rahul V, Supply Chain Management-Concept and Cases, PHI, 20142.

Page 19 of 25
 INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To get an insight of the importance of advertising and sales promotion campaigns in
relation to consumer decision making processes.
 To draft oral and written integrated marketing communications plan based on primary and
secondary research.
 To ensure a substantive assessment of corporate strengths, weaknesses, opportunities
and threats (SWOT analysis) and create a substantive research plan for one‟s project.
 To construct IMC creative strategies and tactics, including digital & social media
executions, advertising, promotions, and public relations initiatives.
UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISEMENT
Concept – Definition-scope – Objectives-functions – principles of advertisement – Social,
Economic and Legal Implications of advertisements – setting advertisement objectives –
Advertisement Agencies – Selection and remuneration – Advertisement campaigns.
UNIT – II ADVERTISEMENT MEDIA
Media plan – Type and choice criteria – Reach and frequency of advertisements – Cost of
advertisements – related to sales – Media strategy and scheduling design and execution of
advertisements – Message development – Different types of advertisements – Layout – Design
appeal – Copy structure – Advertisement production – Print – Radio. T.V. and Web
advertisements.
UNIT – III SALES PROMOTION
Scope and role of sale promotion – Definition – Objectives of sales promotion – sales
promotion techniques – Trade oriented and consumer oriented. Sales promotion –
Requirement identification – Designing of sales promotion campaign – Involvement of
salesmen and dealers – Out sourcing sales promotion national and international promotion
strategies.
UNIT – IV PUBLIC RELATIONS
Introduction – Meaning – Objectives –Scope-Functions-integrating PR in to Promotional Mix-
Marketing Public Relation function- Process of Public Relations-advantages and disadvantages
of PR-Measuring the Effectiveness of PR- PR tools and techniques. PR and Media Relations, -
PR consultancy: Pros and Cons.
UNIT – V PUBLICITY
Introduction – Meaning – Objectives – Tools – Goals of Publicity – Scope of Publicity –
Importance of Publicity – Difference between Marketing, PR and Publicity – Social publicity –
Web Publicity and Social media – Publicity Campaigns
REFERENCES:
01 George E Belch and Michel A Belch, Advertising & Promotion, Tata McGraw Hill,
7th edition, 2016.
02 S. H. H. Kazmi and Satish K Batra, Advertising & Sales Promotion, Excel Books,
New Delhi, 2014.
03 Julian Cummings, Sales Promotion, Kogan Page, London 2015.
04 Jaishri Jefhwaney, Advertising Management, Oxford, 2014
L T P C

Page 20 of 25
 RURAL MARKETING
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To gain insight into the socio-economic structure of rural India.
 To explore the various facets of rural marketing and to develop an insight into rural
marketing regarding different concepts and basic practices in this area.
 To understand the buying behaviour, the consuming pattern, the needs and wants of the
rural consumer.
 To understand the concept and methodology for conducting the research in rural
markets.
UNIT – I OVERVIEW OF RURAL MARKETING
Introduction of Rural marketing –Evolution of Rural Marketing in Indian and Global Context-
Definition- Nature –Scope-Characteristics and potential of Rural Marketing - Importance of
Rural Marketing- Socio-Cultural-economic & other environmental factors affecting in Rural
Marketing- Emerging challenges & Opportunities in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – II RURAL MARKETS & DECISION
Profile of Rural Marketing Dimensions & Consumer Profile- Rural Market Equilibrium-
Classification of Rural Marketing – Regulated- Non Regulated Marketing Mix- Segmentation-
Targeting- Position- Rural Marketing Strategies- Role of Central, State Government and other
Institutions in Rural Marketing Integrated Marketing Communication in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – III PRODUCT & DISTRIBUTION
Product / Service Classification in Rural Marketing - New Product Development in Rural
Marketing- Brand Management in Rural Marketing- Rural Distribution in channel management-
Managing Physical distribution in Rural Marketing- Fostering Creativity& Innovation in Rural
Marketing- Sales force Management in Rural Marketing.
UNIT – IV RURAL CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR IN MARKETING RESEARCH
Consumer Buyer Behaviour Model in Rural Marketing- Rural Marketing Research-Retail &IT
models in Rural Marketing-CSR and Marketing Ethics in Rural Marketing- Source of Financing
and credit agencies- Consumer Education & Consumer Methods in Promotion of Rural
Marketing- Advertisement & Media Role in Rural Marketing Promotion Methods.
UNIT – V TRENDS IN RURAL MARKETING
e- Rural Marketing-CRM &e-CRM in Rural Marketing- Advanced Practices in Rural Marketing-
Social Marketing-Network Marketing- Green Marketing in Indian and Global Context-Co-
operative Marketing- Micro Credit Marketing- Public Private Partnership Model in Rural
Marketing- Advancement of Technology in Rural Marketing- Structure of Competition in Rural
India.
REFERENCES:
01 Rural Marketing – C G Krishnamacharyulu, Lalitha Ramakrishnan – Pearson
Education,2016.
02 Rural Marketing: Indian Perspective by Awadhesh Kumar Singh Satyaprakash pandey,
New age publishers, 2014.
03 New Perspectives on Rural Marketing: Includes Agricultural Marketing By Ramkishen
Y., 2016.
04 Rural Marketing, Pradeep Kashyap & Siddhartha Raut, Biztantra Publications, 2016.

Page 21 of 25
 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To gain knowledge of basic elements of International Marketing.
 To know the Marketing environment in the context of Globalisation.
 To understand the Policy Framework and Procedural Aspects of International Marketing.
UNIT- I INTRODUCTION OF INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
International markets – Definition – Basic modes of entry – Nature of International Marketing-
Benefits of International Marketing-– International Marketing Task – World Trade – India‟s
Foreign Trade – Characteristics of MNCs - Global and Domestic marketing - International
Product Life cycle – EPRG Framework - Institutional set up – Advisory bodies – Commodity
organizations – Service Institutions – Government participation in Foreign Trade
UNIT- II INTERNATIONAL MARKETING ENVIRONMENT
Business culture around the world- language, customs, attitudes - marketing strategy
adjustments - product adaptations. Geographic Description of Market – Political risk – Political
Environment - Import quotas – tariffs - customs restrictions - required licenses – registrations –
permits. Development and scope of International law – INCOTERMS – WTO – GATT
UNIT- III POLICY FRAMEWORK AND PROCEDURAL ASPECTS
India‟s Export – Import policy – EXIM Policy – promotional measures - Export oriented Units –
Deemed Exports - Export- Import Documentation – Kinds of Documents – Principal Export
Documents – Auxiliary documents – Documents in Import Trade – Export Documentation and
procedures - Demand Estimation – GDP – Producer consumer target – Market segmentation
UNIT - IV INTERNATIONAL MARKETING PLANNING
International Market Selection – Factors influencing – Process – Strategies and approaches –
Competition-International Marketing research – Global scene- International marketing research
procedure – Techniques – survey – interview techniques – Analysis of field data – Research
report-International Marketing Planning and Control – Framework – marketing control – Control
sequence
UNIT - V INTERNATIONAL MARKETING MIX
Developing an International Product Line, Foreign Product Diversification, International
Branding Decisions, International Packaging, International Warranties and Services.
International Pricing Strategy - International Promotion Strategies- Promotion Mix-International
Sales Negotiations - Patterns of Global Advertising -Current trends in international Marketing
REFERENCES:
01 Varshney “International Marketing”, McGraw Hill, International Edition. 2016
02 Global Marketing, Third Edition, by Warren J. Keegan and Mark C. Green, Prentice Hall,
2015.
03 Philip .R. Cateora, John.L.Graham. Prasanth Salwan. International Marketing, Tata
McGraw Hill,13 th edition, 2014
04 Onkvisit, Sak., and John J.Shaw., International Marketing, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2012.

Page 22 of 25
 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To understand the dimensions of consumer behavior and their decision making process
 To know the Consumer Behaviour Models.
 To Understand the Internal and External Influences on Consumer Behaviour.
 To recognize the social and ethical implications of marketing on consumer behavior.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Concepts – Significance – Dimensions of Consumer Behavior – Application of knowledge of
Consumer Behaviour in marketing decisions.
UNIT - II CONSUMER BEHAVIOR MODELS
Industrial and individual consumer behaviour models - Howard- Sheth, Engel – Kollat, Webster
and wind Consumer Behaviour Models – Implications of the models on marketing decisions.
UNIT - III INTERNAL INFLUENCES
Psychological Influences on consumer behavior – motivation – perception – personality
Learning and Attitude- Self Image and Life styles – Consumer expectation and satisfaction.
UNIT - IV EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
Socio-Cultural, Cross Culture - Family group – Reference group – Communication -Influences
on Consumer behavior
UNIT - V PURCHASE DECISION PROCESS
High and low involvement - Pre-purchase and post-purchase behavior – Online purchase
decision process – Diffusion of Innovation – Managing Dissonance - Emerging Issues.
REFERENCES:
01 Leon G.Schiffman, Leslie Lazar Kanuk and S. Ramesh Kumar, Consumer Behavior,
Pearson Education, India, 11th Edition, 2015..
02 Jay D. Lindquist and Joseph Sirgy, Shopper, Buyer and Consumer Behavior, Biztranza,
2012.
03 David L. Louden and Albert J Della Bitta, Consumer Behavior, McGraw Hill, New Delhi
2012.
04 Sheth Mittal, Consumer Behavior- A Managerial Perspective, Thomson Asia (P) Ltd., 2013

Page 23 of 25
 SERVICE MARKETING L T P C
Course Objectives : 4 0 0 4
 To understand the role of consumer behavior in marketing and to identify qualitative and
quantitative methods of measuring consumer behavior.
 To Know the Service Design and Development of Service Marketing.
 To Understand the Service Delivery and Promotion of Service Marketing..
 To know the importance of Service Strategies for Health, Tourism, Financial, Logistics
and Educational Institutions.
UNIT - I INTRODUCTION
Definition – Service Economy – Evolution and growth of service sector – Nature and Scope of
Services – Unique characteristics of services - Challenges and issues in Services Marketing.
UNIT - II SERVICE MARKETING OPPORTUNITIES
Assessing service market potential - Classification of services – Expanded marketing mix –
Service marketing – Environment and trends – Service market segmentation, targeting and
positioning.
UNIT - III SERVICE DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
Service Life Cycle – New service development – Service Blue Printing – GAP model of service
quality – Measuring service quality – SERVQUAL – Service Quality function development.
UNIT - IV SERVICE DELIVERY AND PROMOTION
Positioning of services – Designing service delivery System, Service Channel – Pricing of
services, methods – Service marketing triangle - Integrated Service marketing communication
UNIT - V SERVICE STRATEGIES
Service Marketing Strategies for health – Hospitality – Tourism – Financial – Logistics -
Educational – Entertainment & public utility Information technique Services
REFERENCES:
01 Christopher Lovelock, Jochen Wirtz & Jayantha Chatterjee, Services Marketing - People,
Technology, Strategy, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 7th edition, 2015.
02 Hoffman, Marketing of Services, Cengage Learning, 1st Edition, 2014.
03 Kenneth E Clow, et al, Services Marketing Operation Management and Strategy,
Biztantra, 2nd Edition, New Delhi, 2014.
04 Christian Gronroos, Services Management and Marketing a CRM Approach, John Wiley,
2015.
05 Valarie Zeithaml et al, Services Marketing, 5th International Edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
2014

Page 24 of 25
Page 25 of 25
 DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12
Ph.D. Course Work Papers

Sl. Name of the Course Credit

No.
1 Analytical Methods And Instrumentation 4
2 Corrosion Science and Engineering 4
3 Research and Teaching Methodology 4
4 Advanced Scientific Techniques in 4
Chemical Analysis
5 Advanced Topics in Organic Chemistry 4
6 Chromatography 4
7 Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry 4
8 Adsorption and Catalysis 4
9 Nanomaterials And Their Applications To Solar 4
Energy Conversion
10 Phyto-Biosynthesis and Applications of 4
Metal Nanoparticles
11 Mini Project 4
12 Heterogenous Catalysis 4

Page 1 of 23
Paper: I
ANALYTICAL METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Hrs.– 60 Credit – 4
Objectives:
1. To understand the analytical data interpretation and result analysis.
2. To study about various chromatography technique for chemical
analysis.
3. To study about the spectroscopic technique and instrumentation
method of chemical analysis.
Unit-I Treatment of Analytical data and Interpretation (12hrs.)

Accuracy and Precision in measurements. Reliability of Analytical Data – Errors in

Chemical analysis, Classification, Determination. Improving accuracy of analysis. Statistical
analysis – Student t-test, F-test.

Unit-II Separation Technique (12hrs.)

Chromatographic techniques – paper, thin layer column chromatography, Gas
Chromatography (GC)- Instrumentation, application. Principle and application of GCMS,
LCMS, ion exchange chromatography. Flash Chromatography (FC) – Principle and application.
Extraction Methods – Solvent extraction, Solid Phase extraction (SPE). Microwave Assisted
Extraction (MAE), Soxhlet Extraction.

Unit- III Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis (12hrs.)

Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (AAS) and Atomic Emision Spectroscopy (AES) –
Principle Instrumentation and Application. X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) – Theory
and Instrumentation, XPS imaging, Surface analytical techniques – XRD, SEM, TEM –
applications.

Unit-IV Spectroscopic Analysis (12hrs.)

UV-Vis and IR spectroscopy – UV-Vis spectra of enes, enones, arenes, and conjugated
systems. Effect of solvent on UV-Vis spectra. IR- Principle, Instrumentation and Application.
Characteristiiic group frequencies and functional group detection using IR.

Page 2 of 23
Mass Spectroscopy (MS) – EI, CI, FAB, ESI and MALDI ion sources. Characteristic EIMS
fragmentation and MS rearrangements. Spectral interpretation and structural determining using
mass spectrum.

Unit-V NMR Spectroscopy and Structure elucidation (12hrs.)

1 13
Basic Principle of NMR –H and C Chemical Shift, spin-spin coupling, Coupling
constant, J-value. Applications of NOE, DEPT and 2D techniques – COSY, HSQC and HSBC.
Structure elucidation of organic compounds using spectral data – UV, IR, NMR and MS.

References:
1. Douglas A. Skoog. F James Holler; Stanley; R. Cruch, “Principle of instrumental analysis”
Cole pub Co, (2006).
st
2. S.M. Khopkar, “ Basic Principles of Analytical Chemistry” 1 Edition, Wiley pub, (1984).
rd
3. W. Kemp, “Organic Spectroscopy”, 3 Edition, Palgrave Macmillan, (1991).
rd
4. D.L. Pavia, G.M. Lampman and G.S. Kriz “ Introduction to Spectroscopy” 3 Edition,
Brooks/Cole, (2001).
th
5. D.H. Williams and I. Fleming “ Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry” 5 Edition,
Macraw-Hill (1989).

Page 3 of 23
Paper: II
CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Hours : 60 Credits: 4
Objectives
1. To study the Principle and mechanism of electrochemical reactions involved in corrosion
and preventive methods.

2. To gain knowledge on measurement of various adsorption and thermodynamic parameters

related to corrosion.

3. To learn the basic terminology involved in electrochemical cell reaction and their
application in some electrochemical based titration.

4. To understand the principles and working of some batteries and fuel cells. To impart
knowledge on Classification, properties and uses of alloys.

5. To study the preparation, properties and applications of engineering materials.

Unit-1: Corrosion (12 hrs)

Definition – causes - factors – types – chemical, electrochemical corrosion (galvanic,

differential aeration), corrosion control – material selection and design aspect –

electrochemical protection – sacrificial anode method and impressed current cathodic

method. Paints – constituent and function, Electroplating of copper and electroless

plating of nickel

Unit-II: Non-Electrochemical methods (12 hrs)

Adsorption - Physisorption – Chemisorption - Surface area determination - Mass loss

measurements, Corrosion parameters Temperature studies – Adsorption - Temkin –

Langmuir adsorption isotherm, Change in entropy, enthalpy, Gibbs free energy, Heat of

adsorption, Activation energy - Green inhibitors.

Page 4 of 23
Unit-III: Electrochemistry (12 hrs)

Electrochemical cell – redox reaction, electrode potential – origin of electrode potential –

oxidation potential – reduction potential – electrochemical series and its significance –

Nernst equation. Precipitation titration - Conductometric titration – Potentiometric

titration – pH meter.

Unit-IV: Batteries, Fuel cells and Alloys (12 hrs)

Batteries - Types of batteries – alkaline battery – lead storage battery – nickel cadmium

battery – lithium battery – Fuel cells – Hydrogen oxygen fuel cell.

Alloys: Introduction – Definition – Properties of alloys – Significance of alloying,

Function and effects of alloying elements – Ferrous alloys – Nichrome and Stainless

steel – heat treatment of steel; Non-ferrous alloys – brass and bronze.

Unit-V: Engineering Materials (12 hrs)

Abrasives: definition, classification or types, grinding wheel, abrasive paper and cloth.

Refractories: definition, characteristics, classification properties – refractoriness and

RUL, dimensional stability, thermal spalling, thermal expansion, porosity: Manufacture

of alumina, magnesite and silicon carbide.

Reference:
1. R. Winston Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig “Corrosion and Corrosion control: An
th
introduction to Corrosion Science and Engineering”, 4 Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc, 2008
nd
2. Perez, Nestor “Electrochemistry and Corrosion Science”, 2 Edition, Springer
nd
3. Principles of Materials Science & Engineering, 2 Edition by W. F. Smith, 1990
4. Robert G. Kelly, John R. Scully, David Shoesmith, Rudolph G. Buchheit
st
“Electrochemical Techniques in Corrosion Science and Engineering” 1 Edition, 2002
5. Volkan Cicek, Bayan Al-Numan “Corrosion Chemistry” Wiley
6. Pierre R. Roberge, “Handbook of Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 2005
Page 5 of 23
7. B. Siva Shankar, “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Limited, 3rd
Edition, 2015.
8. S. S. Dara, Mukkanti, “Text of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Co, New
Delhi, 12th Edition, 2006.
9. C. V. Agarwal, C. P. Murthy, A. Naidu, “Chemistry of Engineering Materials”, Wiley
India, 5th Edition, 2013.
10. R. P. Mani, K. N. Mishra, “Chemistry of Engineering Materials”, Cengage
Learning, 3rd Edition, 2015.
11. S.L.Chawla, R.K.Gupta, “Materials selection for corrosion control, First printing,
Dec.1993.
12. P.H.Reiger, “Electrochemistry”, Prentice Hall, 1987.
rd
13. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill Education, 3 Edition
14. S. Glasstone, An introduction to Electrochemistry, Van Nostrand, New York, 1965.
15. A. J. Bard, L.R. Faulkner, Electrochemical Methods: Fundamentals and
Applications,John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1980.
16. R. Crow, Principles and Applications of Electrochemistry, Chapman and Hall,
London,1979.
17. J. D. M. Bockris, A.K.N. Reddy, Modern Electrochemistry, Vol. I & II, Plenum
Press,New York, 3rd Reprint, 1977.

18. Dr.A.Ravikrishnan, “ Engineering chemistry – II” , Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing

Company Pvt.Ltd, Updated edition,2015-2016.
19. Dr.A.Ravikrishnan, “ Engineering chemistry ” , Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing
Company Pvt.Ltd, Revised edition,2017-2018.
20. P. C. Jain, Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company, 15th Edition, 2015.
21. Shasi Chawla, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, Dhantpat Rai Publishing
Company, New Delhi, 1st Edition.
22. Dr. V. Veeraiyan and Dr. L. Devaraj Stephen, “ Engineering chemistry – II” VRS
Publishers Pvt.Ltd, 2015-2016.

Page 6 of 23
Paper-III

RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objective

1. To introduce the purpose and importance of research for future development.

2. To know the various indexes and abstracts in science and technology as a source
of all information in chemistry.
3. To learn the ways of carrying out literature search for current awareness and for the
retrospective survey.
4. To know the methodology of writing thesis and journal articles.

5. To know about the teaching methodology for teaching the scientific concepts and
techniques to students

Unit –I : Scientific Research (12hrs.)

Introduction to Research, Selection of a research topic, reviewing the literature,

preparing the proposal and design of study Experimentation and interpretation of results.
Formation, testing and rejection of hypothesis. Preparation and presentation of reports,
dissertation and thesis writing.

Unit-II : Chemical Literature (12hrs.)

Primary and secondary literature: Journals, Patents, Reviews, Chemical abstracts,

treatises, monographs and online journals. Web browsing for Research. ASAP alerts, CA Alerts,
Scifinder, Chemport, Science direct, STN international, Journal home pages. Impact factor,
citations and h-index. Scopus, Web of Science and Google scholar.

Unit-III: Error Analysis (12hrs.)

Limitation of analytical methods, accuracy, precision & minimization of errors –

systematic and random errors and reliability of results – Mode – Median – Mean – Standard
deviation- Variance & Covariance, normal distribution and the normal probability curve.

Page 7 of 23
Unit-IV: Correlation methods & Non-parametric tests (12hrs.)

Scatter diagram and linear regression line: Spearman rank order correlation, Pearson’s
product moment correlation - Correlation co-efficient.
Non-parametric tests - ᵡ2 test, Median test, Mann-Whitney test, Sign test, Wilcox on
matched-pairs signed ranks test.

Unit-V: Methodology of Teaching (12hrs.)

Teaching- Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: Lecture Method,

Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving Method, Project method,
Seminar – Integrating ICT in Teaching: Individualized Instruction, Ways for Effective
Presentation with Power Point- Documentation – Evaluation: Formative, Summative &
Continuous and comprehensive Evaluation- Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical,
Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral Development – Teaching Later Adolescents

References:

1. Rajammal P. Devadas, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, S.R.K. Vidyalaya

Press, Chennai, 1976.
2. J. Anderson, B.H. Durstan and M. Poole, Thesis and assignment writing, Wiley
Eastern, New Delhi, 1977.
3. R.O. Butlet, Preparing thesis and other manuscript.
4. R. L. Dominoswki, Research Methods, Prentice Hall, 1981.
5. J. W.Best, Research in Education, 4th ed. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1981.
6. H. F. Ebel, C. Bliefert and W.E. Russey, The Art of Scientific Writing, VCH,
Weinheim, 1988.
7. Joseph, A. Methodology for Research; Theological Publications: Bangalore, 1986.
8. Sampath, K., Panneerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to
educational technology. (2nd revised ed.). New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
9. Sharma, S.R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools &
Techniques. Jaipur: Mangal Deep
10. Vedanayagam, E.G. (1989). Teaching technology for college teachers. New
York: Sterling Publishers.

Page 8 of 23
Paper-IV

ADVANCED SCIENTIFIC TECHNIQUES IN CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To master the basic principles of spectroscopy to apply for structural elucidation.

2. To learn the methods of characterizing compounds by spectroscopic techniques.
3. To learn the various instrumental methods studying a given compound.
4. To learn the separation techniques for organic and inorganic compounds.
5. To learn about industrial analytical processes.

Unit –I : Absorption Spectroscopy (12hrs.)

Infrared and Raman Spectroscopy: FT-IR, basic principles, quantitative IR, resonance
Raman and laser Raman spectroscopy, applications of IR and Raman spectroscopy to organic
and inorganic compounds.
Electronic Spectroscopy: term symbols, spin-orbit coupling in free ions, electronic
spectra of Oh and Td complexes, charge transfer transition, structural evidence from electronic
spectra.
Unit II: Applications of Advanced Organic Spectroscopy (12hrs.)
NMR: Basic principles of two-dimensional NMR spectroscopy – HOMOCOSY,
HETCOSY and NOESY spectra and their applications – use of INEPT and DEPT methods and
their applications.
Mass: Molecular ions, isotope peaks, fragmentation pattern – McLafferty rearrangement
- measurement techniques (EI, CI FI, FD, FAB, SIMS, MALDI) – M + 1 and M + 2 ions –
calculation of molecular formula from PM+1 and PM+2
Road-map problems covering UV, IR, 1H-NMR, 13C-NMR and mass spectral data.
Unit-III: Spectroscopy (12hrs.)

Nuclear Quadruple Resonance Spectroscopy: effect of magnetic field on the spectra,

electric field gradient and molecular structure, structural elucidation of inorganic and
coordination compounds.
Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy: hyperfine splitting in isotropic systems;
epr spectra of systems with more than one unpaired electrons-Kramer’s degeneracy, zero field

Page 9 of 23
splitting, epr of triplet states, anisotropy in g-value, anisotropy in hyperfine splitting, nuclear
quadrupleinteraction; applications of epr to organic and inorganic compounds.
Mossbauer Spectroscopy: interpretation of isomer shifts, quadruple and magnetic
interactions, Mossbauer emission spectroscopy, structural elucidation.

Unit IV: Diffraction & Surface Techniques: (12hrs.)

Principles and applications of XRD, Neutron and electron diffraction – Scanning
electron microscopy (SEM)- Instrumentation – applications – surface area analysis, particle size
determination – Scanning Probe Microscopes – Scanning Tunneling Microscopes – Atomic
force microscopes (AFM) – Principle &applications.

Unit V: Electrochemical Techniques (12hrs.)

Polarography – Chronopotentiometry – Chronoamperometry – chronocontometry- Linear
Potential Sweep voltametry – Cyclic Voltametry – ImpendenceMeasurements – AC Voltametry
– Principles and their applications.

References:

1. Introduction to Nanoscience- Gabor. L, Hornyak. Joydeep Dutta CRC Press 2008.

2. L. Antropov, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Mir Publication, Moscow, 1972.
3. D.A. Skoog and J.J. Leary, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 4th Edn., Saunders
College Publishing, 1992.
4. D.A. Skoog, F.S.Holler, S.R.Crouch, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th Edn.,
Thomson Brooks/cole, 2007.
5. A.K. Cheetham, P.Day, Solid State Chemistry: Techniques, Oxford University Press,
Oxford, 1987.
6. G. E. Bacon, Neutron diffraction, Oxford Universtiy Press, Oxford, 1975.
7. R.S. Drago, Physical Methods in Chemistry, Saunders, 1999.
8. Spectrometric Identification of Organic Comounds – Silverstein, Bassler and Morril.
9. Organic Spectroscopy – William Kemp

Page 10 of 23
 Paper V

ADVANCED TOPICS IN ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To learn the various reagents and their application in organic synthesis

2. To study the retro synthetic analysis
3. To understand the concept of linear free-energy relationships
4. To know about the biochemical activities of amino acids and proteins
5. To study on the nucleic acids structure and function

Unit I: Organic Reagents (12hrs.)

Gilman’s reagents – DCC – Grignard reagents – crown ethers – NBS – BF3 complexes –
SeO2 – 1, 3-dithiane, tri-n-butyl tin hydride – phase transfer catalysts – Wilkinson’s catalyst.

Unit II: Retro synthetic Analysis (12hrs.)

Introduction to disconnections – one group disconnections – two group disconnections –

peri cyclic reactions – Heteroatoms and heterocyclic compounds – small rings: three membered,
four membered, and five membered.

Unit III: Advances in Linear Free-Energy Relationships (12hrs.)

An introduction to linear free-energy relationships (LFER) – the Hammett equation – the
duality of substituent constants and the Yukawa-Tasumo equation – the general validity of the
Hammett equation – deviations from the Hammett equation in its various forms; the separation
of polar, steric and resonance effects – Taft’s equations; the ortho-effect; application of LFER to
organic reactions; Influence of solvent on organic reactivity; the reactivity-selectivity principle.

UNIT IV: Amino Acids and Proteins (12hrs.)

Structure and Classification – abbreviated names (1 letter and 3 letter) – Physical

properties of amino acids – chemical properties – codons – Structure and importance of simple
peptides like glutathione, Carnosine, anserine, vasopressin – Peptide antibiotics – gramicidin,

Page 11 of 23
bacitracine, actinomycin D - Peptide synthesis – Acid chloride method – DCC method –
Determination of primary structure of peptide – Identification of N-terminal amino acid –
Barger’s method – the DNP method – identification of C-terminal amino acid – Hierarchial
representation of protein Primary, Secondary, tertiary and quaternary structures – Ramachandran
plot.

UNIT V: Purine, Pyrimidine and Nucleic Acids (12hrs.)

Structure of Purines, Pyrimidines – Nucleoside – ribonucleoside, deoxyribonucleosides –

nucleotides – ribonucleotides – deoxyribonucleotides – structure and functions of DNA - Watson
and Crick model of DNA- Structure of types of RNA (m-RNA, t-RNA and r-RNA) – Nucleases
– structure and function of DNA and RNA – polynucleotide – cyclic nucleotide – structure and
function of cAMP, cGMP nucleoprotein – Types of DNA (A-DNA, B-DNA, Z-DNA)

References:

1. Reaction Mechanism and Reagents in Organic Chemistry – Gurdeep R. Chatwal

2. Designing Organic Synthesis: A Programmed Introduction to the Synthon Approach –
Stuart Warren
3. N.B. Chapman and J. Shorter, Eds., Advances in Linear Free-Energy Relationships,
Plenum Press, London, 1972.
4. J. Shorter, Correlation Analysis in Organic Chemistry – An Introduction to Linear Free-
Energy Relationships, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1973.
5. N.B. Chapman and J. Shorter, Eds., Correlation Analysis in Chemistry-Recent Advances,
Plenum Press, New York, 1978.
6. J. Shorter, Correlation Analysis of Organic Reactivity, Research Studies Press, England,
1982.
7. Biochemistry, Lehinger J.CB S.Publishers,1993.
8. Biochemistry, U. Satyanarayana & U. Chakrapani, Books & Allied Pvt. Ltd, 1999.
9. Biochemistry –– Lubert Stryer – W. H. Freeman and company, 4th Edn., New York,
1995.

Page 12 of 23
Paper VI

CHROMATOGRAPHY

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To understand the chromatographic basic principles

2. To learn the thinlayer chromatographic techniques
3. To understand about the ion exchange concepts
4. To learn about the high performance liquid chromatography for organic analysis
5. To study about the gas chromatography technique for volatile and gas molecule analysis

UNIT I: Chromatography (12hrs.)

Classification of Chromatography methods. Column Chromatography- Principles,
experimental procedures, stationary and mobile phases, Choice of Solvent Systems, Separation
techniques. Applications.
Rf values, Factors affecting Rf values, Experimental procedures, Choice of paper and
solvent systems, developments of chromatogram. Detection of the spots. Ascending, Descending
and Radial Paper Chromatography, Two Dimensional Chromatography –Applications.

UNIT II: THINLAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principles, factors affecting Rf values. Experimental Procedures, Choice of adsorbents

and Solvents. Preparation of plates, development of the Chromatogram. Detection of the spots,
advantages of thin Layer Chromatography over paper chromatography and Applications.

UNIT III: ION EXCHANGE CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principle, ion exchange resins and their types- cation exchange resins, anion exchange
resins, ion exchange equilibria, properties of ion exchange resins, ion exchange capacity and
techniques – applications.

Page 13 of 23
UNIT IV: HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Introduction, instrumentation, stationary and mobile Phases. Mobile Phase –

Composition. Column – Preparation, Cleaning –regeneration and Storage Conditions. Retention
time- Types of HPLC. Applications.

UNIT V: GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY (12hrs.)

Principle, instrumentation choice of injectors, column and detectors - Programmed

temperature chromatography, flow programming chromatography, gas-solid chromatography,
and hyphenated techniques in chromatography- Applications of Gas chromatography.

REFERENCES:
1. Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry – D.A.Skoog, D.M. West, F.J. Holler and S.R.
Crouch – 2004; Thompson Asia Private Ltd., Bangalore.
2. Instrumental Methods of Analysis – B. K. Sharma, 2003; Goel publishing House, Meerut.
3. Contemporary Chemical Analysis - Judith F. Rubinson, Prentice Hall (India).
4. Instrumental Methods of Analysis Hobart H. Willard, Lynne L. Merritt Jr, John Dean,
Wadsworth Publishing Co Inc; 7th Edn., 1988.
5. Thin Layer Chromatography- A laboratory Handbook, Ashworth, Stahl. E., 1st Edn.,
Springer-Verlag, 1969.
6. Dynamics of Chromatography - Principles and Theory, J. Calvin Giddings, CRC Press,
2002.
7. Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Douglas A. Skoog, F. James Holler, Stanley R.
Crouch, 2006.

Page 14 of 23
Paper VII
ADVANCED TOPICS IN PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY
No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the concept of Photochemistry

2. To understand the principles about the chemical kinetics
3. To learn about the thermodynamics behavior of systems in chemistry
4. To understand the physical characteristics of biomolecules
5. To understand the various concept of Analytical techniques

Unit I: Advanced Photochemistry (12hrs.)

Artificial photosynthesis and solar energy conversion – Photo electrochemical cells –
dynamics of excited state processes (excited state energy, redox properties, emission lifetime and
its temperature dependence) in micelles, reverse micelles and biomembranes – Fluorescence –
quenching and anisotropy concepts; fluorescence sensing – mechanism and applications;
Radioactive decay engineering – metal-enhanced fluorescence and surface Plasmon-coupled
emission.
Unit – II: Advanced chemical kinetics (12hrs.)
Experimental methods for fast reactions- temperature jump, pressure jump stopped flow
and flash photolysis – pulse technique – short tube kinetics.
NMR studies in rate process - Enzyme kinetics of complicated systems – theory of
diffusion controlled reactions.
Unit – III: Irreversible thermodynamics (12hrs.)
Internal heat & entropy production – relation of entropy production with flux & forces –
phenomenological equation – Prigogine’s principle of minimum entropy production at non-
equilibrium stationary state.

Unit – IV: Biophysical chemistry (12hrs.)

Biomembranes (structure & function) – Active transport & passive transport – multiple
equilibria – specific examples of multiple equilibria – Transport processes – general features of
transport processes optical systems of rht e study of transport processes – self organizing systems

Page 15 of 23
– (Micelles, lipids, cyclodextrins, liquid crystals, reverse micelles ) their interactions and
solutions properties.

Unit – V: Analytical techniques (12hrs.)

Thermal methods: TGA, DTA, DSC, Thermometric titration - Adsorption/desorption

techniques: BET and EGME methods of determination of external and total surface area.

References:

1. K. Kalyanasundaram, Photochemistry in Microheterogeneous Systems, Academic

Press, Orlando, 1987.
2. Extended irreversible thermodynamics – David Jon, Jose casas Vazques, 2012
3. Understanding Non-equilibrium Thermodyanmics – Geogy Lebon, David Jon- 02008
4. Chemical kinetics: Fundementals & New developments, E.T. Densov, Ergenii
tinofeerich , 2003
5. Chemical Kinetics, Laidler
6. Biophysical chemistry Alan Cooper – 2011
7. Biophysical chemistry, James P. Allen – 2008
8. Fundamentals of Analytical chemistry – Douglas A. Skoog Donal M. west 2013

Page 16 of 23
Paper VIII
ADSORPTION AND CATALYSIS

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the various adsorption process connected with catalysis process
2. To study about the preparation methods of adsorbents
3. To evaluate the physico chemical properties of adsorbent by spectral studies
4. To study about the vapour phase and liquid phase catalysis and adsorption parameters
5. To learn about the adsorption isotherms and product analysis

Unit: I Adsorption & Catalysis (12hrs.)

Concept of adsorption – types of adsorption, monolayer and multilayer adsorption.
Adsorption - activation energy and temperature relationships, different between adsorption and
catalysis, catalysis - homogeneous catalysis, heterogeneous catalysis, Acid -- base catalysis.

Unit: II Methods of preparation (12hrs.)

Adsorbent - adsorbent preparation from plant materials, activated carbon preparation, synthetic
adsorbent/catalyst - Molecular sieves – microporous & mesoporous molecular sieves – silicates,
Aluminosilicates, Aluminophosphates – structure, acidic and basic sites.

Unit: III Spectral studies on Adsorbent (12hrs.)

Characterization of adsorbent and catalyst - X-Ray Diffraction (XRD), Fourier transform
infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR), Differential thermal analysis(DTA) , Nuclear magnetic resonance
spectroscopy (NMR), Temperature programmed desorption (TPD), Electron spin resonance
spectroscopy(ESR) Scanning electron microscopy(SEM), BET Surface Area, pore size analysis.

Unit: IV Reactions & Factors (12hrs.)

Liquid phase - heterogeneous reaction conditions optimization - Temperature, pH, time
and molar ratios. Vapor phase reaction, Regeneration of catalyst.
Adsorption – adsorption of dye molecules, metal ions, sugar molecules and other suitable

molecules, conditions optimization – time, temperature, PH, concentration and adsorbent dosage.

Page 17 of 23
Unit: V Techniques (12hrs.)
Product analysis in catalysis reactions – Gas chromatographic technique, conversion and
product selectivity.Interpretation of adsorption parameters - Adsorption kinetics, adsorption
isotherms and adsorption thermodynamics.

References:

1. Environmentally stable adsorbent of tetrahedral silica and non tetrahedral alumina for
removal and recovery of malachite green dye from aqueous solution, J.Hazardous
materials, 157 (2008) 137-145.
2. Plant poisoning organic dyes adsorption on tomato plant root and green carbon from
aqueous solution, Desalination, 249 (2009)1132-1138.
3. Film and pore diffusion modeling for the adsorption of direct red 81 on activated carbon
prepared from balsamodendron caudatum wood waste, Digest Journal of Nanomaterials
and Biostructures, Vol. 5, No 3, July 2010, p. 911 – 919
4. Plant toxic and non-toxic nature of organic dyes through adsorption mechanism on
cellulose surface, Journal of Hazardous materials,189 (2011) 294–300.
5. Adsorption of cationic and anionic organic dyes from aqueous solution using Silica, J.
Environmental Science and Engineering, volume 52, No.4 (2010) 361-366
6. Hazardous dyes removal from aqueous solution over mesoporous aluminophosphate
molecular sieves with textural porosity by adsorption, Journal of Hazardous Materials
244– 245 (2013) 10– 20.
7. A Simple Method for the Synthesis of Thermally Stable Large Pore Mesoporous
Aluminophosphate Molecular Sieves, Materials letters, 113 (2013) 93–95.
8. Aniline methylation over AFI and AEL type molecular sieves, App. Catal., Vol. 174,
1998, 213.
9. Adsorptive removal of metanyl yellow on mesoporous Nickel aluminophosphate
molecular sieves from aqueous solution, Asian J. of chemistry, vol. 24, no.12(2012),
5775-5778
10. Recent trends in catalysis, Narosa publication, 1st edition 2000.

Page 18 of 23
Paper IX
NANOMATERIALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS TO SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the Nanomaterials

2. To study about the dye-sensitized solar cells
3. To learn about the Semiconductor and microemulsion (quantum dots)
4. To understand the Photochemistry and corrosion principles
5. To understand about the solar cell concepts

Unit I: Nanomaterials (12hrs.)

Introduction to Nanoscience: Introduction- definition of Nanoscience, nanochemistry-
classification of the nanomaterials
Synthesis of nanomaterials: Precipitative methods – hydrothermal and solvothermal
methods - chemical methods - reduction methods – colloidal and micellar approach – sol-gel
method – chemical vapor deposition method.
Specialized Nanomaterials: Metal oxide nanoparticles, semiconductor nanoparticles and
core/shell nanoparticles

Unit II: Dye-sensitized solar cells (12hrs.)

Solar energy conversion and storage – photo electrochemical cells – dye-sensitized solar
cells – design and fabrication - power conversion efficiency
Use of metal and metal-free dye sensitizers in photovoltaic devices.

Unit III: Semiconductor and microemulsion (quantum dots) (12hrs.)

Review of published literature – Water-soluble silica-coated semiconductor quantum dots
– synthesis, characterization and properties.
Thickness-controllable silica coating of quantum dots – synthesis by microemulsion
method and application in the growth of rice.

Unit IV: Photochemistry and corrosion (12hrs.)

Review of published literature – Silica coated cadmium sulfide nanocomposites –
synthesis, structure, optic and its photo catalytic properties.
Zirconia-coated carbonyl iron particles – synthesis and corrosion study.
Page 19 of 23
Unit V : Solar cell (12hrs.)
Review of published literature – Ruthenium (II) sensitizer in dye-sensitized solar cells
using an organic dye as co-sensitizer – Fabrication and device characterization - photovoltaic
performance.
Dye-sensitized solar cells - Co-sensitization strategy – electrochemical properties – Photo
electrochemical performances – Electrochemical impedance spectroscopy – dark current
measurement – Open-circuit voltage decay.

References

1. H. R. Allcock, Introduction to Materials Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Publication,
2008.
2. T. Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 2007.
3. A. Hagfeldt, et al. Chem. Rev., 2010, 110, pp. 6595–6663.
4. J. Gong, J. Liang, K. Sumathy, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 2012, 16, 8,
5848-5860.
5. X. Chen, F. Liu, Q. Jiang, L. Sun, Q. Wang, J. Inorg. Organomet. Polym, 2012, 22:6-11.
6. A. Wang, Y. Zheng, F. Peng, J. Spectros. 2014, Article ID 169245, 1-5.
7. N. Gupta, B. Pal, J. Colloid and Int. Sci., 2010, 368, 250-256.
8. R. Chen et al. J. Colloid and Int. Sci., 2010, 342, 49-56.
9. U. Mehmood, I. A. Hussein, K. Harrabi, N. Tabet, G. R. Berdiyorov, RSC Adv., 2016, 6,
7897-7901.
10. L. Wei, Y. Na, Y. Yang, R. Fan, P. Wang, L. Li, Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2015, 17,
1273-1280.

Page 20 of 23
Paper X
PHYTO-BIOSYNTHESIS AND APPLICATIONS OF METAL NANOPARTICLES
No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives

1. To study about the Extraction and Isolation of natural products from Medicinal plants
2. To synthesis nanomaterial by using natural products
3. To understand the physico chemical properties of Nanoparticles
4. To utilize the nanoparticles for Biological Applications
5. To study the Nanoparticles application on Green catalysis

Unit I - Extraction and Isolation of some Indian Medicinal plants (12hrs.)

i) Solid-Phase Extraction and LC−MS analysis of Pyrrolizidine Alkaloids in Honeys.
ii) Comparative study of phytochemical screening, antioxidant and antimicrobial
capacities of fresh and dry leaves crude plant extracts of Datura metel L.

Unit II – Biosynthesis of Metal Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Green synthesis of silver nanoparticles using Ixora coccinea leaves extract.
ii) Ultrasmall Copper Nanoparticles Synthesized with a Plant Tea Reducing Agent.

Unit III – Characterization of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Phytosynthesis of silver nanoparticles using Coccinia grandis leaf extract and its
application in the photocatalytic degradation
ii) A facile synthesis of high optical quality silver nanoparticles by ascorbic acid
reduction in reverse micelles at room temperature.

Unit IV – Biological Applications of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) The green synthesis, characterization and evaluation of the biological activities of
silver nanoparticles synthesized from Iresine herbstii leaf aqueous extracts
ii) In vitro evaluation of antioxidant and anticancer potential of Morinda pubescens
synthesized silver nanoparticles.

Unit V – Green catalytic activity of Nanoparticles (12hrs.)

i) Catalytic Reduction of 4-Nitrophenol using Biogenic Gold and Silver Nanoparticles
Derived from Breynia rhamnoides.
ii) Catalytic degradation of organic dyes using biosynthesized silver nanoparticles.

Page 21 of 23
 References
1. K. A. Beales, K. Betteridge, S.M. Colegate, J.A. Edgar. Journal of Agric. Food Chem.
2015, 63, 7421−7427
2. Tahiya Hilal Ali Alabri, Amira Hamood Salim Al Musalami, Mohammad Amzad
Hossain, Afaf Mohammed Weli, Qasim Al-Riyami. Journal of King Saud University –
Science 2014, 26, 237–243
3. Muthu Karuppiah, Rangasamy Rajmohan. Materials Letters 97 (2013) 141–143.
4. Aaron D. Brumbaugh, Katelyn A. Cohen, and Sarah K. St. Angelo. ACS Sustainable
Chem. Eng. 2014, 2, 1933−1939.
5. Rajeswari Arunachalam, Sujatha Dhanasingh, Balasaraswathi Kalimuthu, Mani
Uthirappan, Chellan Rose, Asit Baran Mandal. Colloids and Surfaces B: Biointerfaces
94, 2012, 226-230
6. Debabrata Singha, Nabajeet Barman, Kalyanasis Sahu. Journal of Colloid and Interface
Science 413 (2014) 37–42.
7. C. Dipankar, S. Murugan. Colloids and Surfaces B: Biointerfaces 98 (2012) 112– 119
8. L. Inbathamizh, T. Mekalai Ponnu, E. Jancy Mary. Journal of pharmacy research 6
(2013) 32-38.
9. Abilash Gangula, Ramakrishna Podila, Ramakrishna M, Lohith Karanam, Chelli
Janardhana, and Apparao M. Rao. Langmuir 2011, 27, 15268 – 15274.
10. V.K. Vidhu, D. Philip. Micron 56 (2014) 54–62.

Paper: XI Mini Project Credit:4

Page 22 of 23
 Paper-XII
Heterogeneous Catalysis

No. of Hrs – 4 / Week Credits - 4

Objectives
1. To Learn about the prorous materials
2. To Understand the concept of metal doping and photocatalytic function of the material.
3. To study the catalytic and photocatalytic activity of the materials.
Unit I
Zeolite-based photocatalysts - Zeolites and molecular sieves acting as hosts for
photoactive guests - Electron donor photosensitisers - organic dye - electron acceptor
photosensitisers - Zeolites encapsulating clusters of semiconductor oxides - Zeolites having
photocatalytically active framework.
Efficient photocatalytic degradation of organics diluted in water and air using TiO2
designed with zeolites and mesoporous silica materials.
Unit II
Effect of metal-doping of TiO2 nanoparticles on their photocatalytic activities toward
removal of organic dyes.
Solar photocatalytic degradation of phenol using nanosized ZnO and α-Fe2O3.
Unit III
Network Structured SnO2/ZnO Heterojunction Nanocatalyst with High Photocatalytic
Activity.
Green synthesis of copper nanoparticles for the efficient removal (degradation) of dye
from aqueous phase.
Unit IV
Visible Light Photodegradation of Phenol Using Nanoscale TiO2 and ZnO Impregnated
with Merbromin Dye: A Mechanistic Investigation.
Fe(III)/TiO2-Montmorillonite Photocatalyst in Photo-Fenton-Like Degradation of
Methylene Blue.
Unit V
TiO2 nanoparticles immobilized on carbon nanotubes for enhanced visible-light photo-
induced activity.
Preparation of a Titania/X-Zeolite/Porous Glass Composite Photocatalyst Using
Hydrothermal and Drop Coating Processes.

References

1. Chem. Communi., 2004, 1443-1459

2. J. Mater. Chem., 2011, 21, 2407–2416 | 2407
3. Egyptian Journal of Petroleum (2014) 23, 419–426
4. Journal of Chemical Engineering and Materials Science, Vol. 4(7), pp. 87-92, November 2013
5. Inorganic Chemistry, Vol. 48, No. 5, 2009 1819-1825
6. ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND POLLUTION RESEARCH · AUGUST 2015, DOI
10.1007/s11356-015-5223-y
7. Iran. J. Chem. Chem. Eng, Vol. 33, No. 2, 2014
8. International Journal of Chemical Engineering, Volume 2015, Article ID 485463,
9. J. M a t e r . R e s. T e c h n o l . 2 0 1 5;4(2):126–132
10. Molecules 2015, 20, 2349-2363; doi:10.3390/molecules20022349
Page 23 of 23
 L T P C
4 - - 4
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Objectives:
 To introduce the scholars to the basic concepts of research.
 To train the scholars in the art of thesis writing and the methods of analyzing and
organizing the material and the mechanics of thesis.
 To learn to use relevant critical concepts in order to effectively analyze and evaluate
examples of rhetorical discourse

Unit I: FUNDAMENTALS OF RESEARCH

Selecting a Topic - Using the Library - Compiling a Working Bibliography - Taking
Notes - Plagiarism

Unit II: STYLE AND ORGANISATION

Outlining - Language and Style – Paraphrasing - Writing Drafts

Unit III: MECHANICS OF WRITING

Spelling – Punctuation - Typing, Margin and Spacing

Unit IV: FORMAT

Principles of MLA Styles - Details of MLA Styles

Unit V: DOCUMENTATION
Parenthetical Documentation - Preparing List of Works Cited - Sample Entries

References:

MLA Handbook 8th Edition. The Modern Language Association of America. 2016.
Gilbaldi, Joseph. The MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing. Modern
Language Association of America. 1998.

Page 1 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
RHETORICS & STYLISTICS
Objectives:
 To familiarize the scholars with the Paradigms involved in Knowledge
Production.
 To make the researchers self aware and Purposive Researchers.
 To develop Collaborative capabilities of Knowledge Acquisition.

Unit – I
Rhetorics – Definition and Scope – History of Rhetorics – Classical Rhetorics
– Aristotelian Rhetorics – Cognitive Rhetorics - Political Rhetorics – Modern
Rhetorics – Literary Rhetorics.
Hermeneutics – Epistemology
Unit – II
Stylistics – Literary features – Figures of Speech – Literary stylistics –
Interpretive stylistics – Evaluative stylistics – Discourse stylistics
Genre studies – Types – Social Background
Unit – III
Expository writing - Descriptive writing – Repository writing – Narrative –
Persuasive - Argumentative – Point of view
Unit – IV
Discourse analysis – Discourse as Social institution - Narratology
Unit – V
Thesis writing – Objective – Hypothesis – Antithesis - Synthesis
References:
Barry, Peter. 2002. Beginning Theory: an Introduction to Literary and Cultural
Theory. New York: Manchester United Press.
Booth, Wayne C.1983. The Rhetoric of Fiction. University of Chicago Press.
Brooks, Cleanth and Robert Penn Warren. 1970. Modern Rhetoric.Harcourt, Brace &
World.
Crystal, David. 1994. The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language.
London: CUP.
Fish, Stanely. Rhetoricity of Knowledge Rhetoric.
Foucault, Mitchell. 1982. The Archaeology of Knowledge. Vintage.
Frow, John. 2009. Genre. Routledge Publication.
Madden, Frank. 2002. Exploring Poetry. London: Longman.
Paltridge, B. 2006. Discourse Analysis: An Introduction. London: Continuum
Discourse.
Verdonk, Peter. 2002. Stylistics. Oxford: OUP.
MLA Handbook 8th Edition. The Modern Language Association of America. 2016.
New York.

Page 2 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4

INDIAN AESTHETICS AND POETICS

Objectives:
 To familiarize the scholars with the aesthetics of Indian texts.
 To make the scholars be aware of the literary techniques of Indian poetics.
 To impart Indian consciousness and encourage research based on Indian
aesthetics.
Unit I
The Nature of Aesthetics, its relation to Philosophy and Literature: Indian traditions
V.S. Sethuraman. - Indian Aesthetics: An Introduction
Unit II
The Concept of Rasa:
(a)Bharata Muni‟s Natya Shastra and its Critics
(b)Abhinavagupta‟s Rasa Siddhanta.
The Concept of Dhvani:
(a)Anandavardana‟sDhanyaloka, with reference to Abhidha, Lakshana,
Vyanjana and Tatparya.
(b)Its extension to music, dance and drama.
Unit III:Poetry
Sri Aurobindo – Rose of God
– Transformation
–Life and Death
Rabindranath Tagore – The Child
– Gitanjali (1-15)
Unit IV: Fiction
Puthumaipittan – The Complete Short Stories (1-10)
Hermann Hesse – Siddhartha
M.T. Vasudevan Nair – Kaalam (Time)
Unit V: Non-Fiction
Ananda K. Coomaraswamy – The Dance of Shiva

Reference:
Barlingay S.S - A Modern Introduction to Indian Aesthetics
Coomaraswamy, Ananda K. “Cosmopolitan View of Nietzsche,” in The Dance of Shiva:
Fourteen Indian Essays, Revised Ed., New York: The Noonday Press, 1957.
G.K. Bhatt- Rasa Theory
M. Hiriyanna - Essentials of Indian Philosophy.
M. Hiriyanna - Outlines of Indian of Philosophy
Nair, Vasudevan M.T. Kaalam. Translated by Gita Krishnankutty, Orient Blackswan Private
Limited, 2012.
Pudumaipittan. The Complete Short Stories. Translated by R E Asher, SahityaAcademi,
2014.
Rabindranath Tagore- Art and Aesthetics 22. Bharats‟ NatyashastraTr,
Sethuraman, V.S., editor. Indian Aesthetics: An Introduction. Trinity Publications, 2000.
Sri Aurobindo. The Future Poetry. (Pondicherry: Sri Aurobindo Ashram Publication, 1997)

Page 3 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
COMPARATIVE LITERARY STUDIES
Objective:
 To inculcate an awareness of Comparative Literary Studies in learners.
 To expose learners to the methodology and application of theories in
Comparative literature.
 To help researchers understand Thematology and Genre studies, and
Translation Studies.
Unit – I
Historical Survey – American and French schools – Attitudes and Approaches –
Comparatism – Historical Survey of Comparative Studies in India.
Unit – II
Historical Comparisons: Influence and Imitation – Reception and Survival –
Analogy and Communication.
Literary History: Epoch – Period, Generation and Movement.
Unit – III
Aesthetic Comparisons: Thematology – Themes – Motifs and Types.
Unit – IV
Translation Studies: Translation as an art – Role of translation
Literature and Psychology/Mythology/Sociology etc
Unit – V
Practice of Comparative Literature: Comparative study of Bama‟s Karukku and
Alice Walker‟s Color Purple.
References:
Bama 2014: Karukku. Oxford University Press.
Basnet, Susan 1993: Comparative Literature. Blackwell.
Bhatnagar, M K 1999: Comparative English Literature. Atlantic Publishers and Distributors.
George, K M 1984: Comparative Indian Literature. Kerala Sahitya Akademi.
Guillen, Claudio 1993: The Challenge of Comparative Literature. Cambridge.
Prawar SS 1973: Comparative Literature Studies. Duckworth.
Stalknett NP et al. Editors 1951: Comparative Literature. Carbondolle.
Spivak, Gayatri Chakravorty 2005: Death of a Discipline. Seagull. Calcutta
Walker, Alice 2011: The Color Purple. Orion.
Wellek, Rene and Austin Warren 1963: Theory of Literature. Harmondsworth.
Weisstein, Ulrich 1973: Comparative Literature and Literary Theory. Bloomington.

Page 4 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4

THEORIES AND PRACTICES OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING

Objectives:
 To sensitize the scholars towards the various methods of teaching in English.
 To enable scholars to research in improving the methods of teaching L2.
 To synchronize technology and language teaching.
Unit I :
 Historical development of English in India
 Status of English language in India ( pre-independence and post-independence
 Problems in Teaching English in India
 Functions of English as a Language
Unit II :
 Methods of English Language Teaching
 Principles of English Language Teaching
 The goals of Language Teaching
 Varieties of English Language
Unit III :
Language Learning Methods - Traditional Method -Audio-lingual Method –
Suggestopedia- Total Physical Response-Direct Method-Natural Approach- Cognitive
Approach- CLL – Silent Way- Content Based learning- Task Based Learning – NLP-
Other modern practices.
Unit IV:
 Role of an English Teacher
 ICT in English Language Teaching
 Language games
 Mother-tongue influence on English
Unit V :
 Developing Language skills
 Teaching English for specific purposes
 Facilitating workplace communicative competency
 Teaching Interview skills.
References
1) The Story of English in India- N.Krishnaswamy
2) Communication Techniques- A.P Girdhar
3) Approaches and methods in language teaching (Second edition ) by Jack C. Richards &
Theodore S.Rodgers, Cambridge University Press, 2001
4) English Language Teaching Today: Linking Theory and Practice– Willy A Renandya,
Handovo Puji Widodo
5) Teaching of English (2013) by M.S Sachdeva

Page 5 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
TRANSLATION STUDIES
Objectives:
 To understand the nuances of translation.
 To interact productively with literatures from different languages and diverse cultures.
 To have a better understanding of one‟s own culture by comparing with other cultures
Unit – I Introduction

Definition – Scope – Limitations – History

Unit – II Schools of Translation

Equivalence – Skopos theory – descriptive translation – cultural translation

Unit – III Poetry

A. K. Ramanujan – Interior Landscape

Unit – IV Non-Fiction

Bama – Karukku

Sir William Jones – Kalidas‟ Shakunthala

Unit – V Fiction

U. R. Anantha Murthy – Samskara (OUP 1979)

References:

Bassnett, Susan. Political Discourse, Media and Translation, Cambridge Scholars, 2010.

Bassnett Susan and Trivedi Harish, “Post-Colonial Writing and Literary Translation” in Post
Colonial Translation: Theory and Practice. Ed. London: Routledge, 1999.

Spivak, Gayatri Chakrovorty. “The politics of Translation” “The Politics of Translation”, in

Lawrence Ventui (ed.), The Translation Studies Reader. London. New York: Routledge,
2000.

Page 6 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
PSYCHOANALYTIC STUDIES
Objectives:
 To enable the students to understand the basic concepts in Psychology.
 To enable learners to understand the nuances of Psychology and apply the
same in the study of literature.

Unit I:
Sigmund Freud – “Creative Writers and Day Dreaming”
The Psychology of the Dream Processes
Unit II:
Carl Gustav Jung – Analytical Psychology: Theory and Practice
“Psychology and Literature”

Unit III:
Jacques Lacan – The Four Fundamental Concepts of
Psychoanalysis
Unit IV:
E. H. Erikson – “The Growth of the Ego” from Childhood and
Society
Karen Horney – Self Analysis
Unit V:
Harold Bloom – The Poetic Origins and Final Phase
Claude Levi Strauss – Myth and Meaning

Further Reading:
1. Shakespeare -- Hamlet
2. Thomas Hardy -- The Well Beloved (1897), Wordsworth Classics.
3. Breuer and Freud -- Studies on Hysteria
4. Lodge, David. Twentieth Century Literary Criticism: A Reader. 1973.

Page 7 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
GENDER STUDIES
Objectives:
 To sensitize the students towards the various issues and challenges faced by women.
 To create an awareness of the potential capabilities of women and to empower them.

Unit I

Simone de Beauvoir: The Second Sex

Unit II

Mary Wollstonecraft: A Vindication of the Rights of Woman

Unit III
Chimamanda Ngozi Adichi : Dear Ijeawele, or A Feminist Manifesto in Fifteen
Suggestions
Unit IV
Amina Wadud: Inside The Gender Jihad: Women's Reform in Islam
Unit V
Patricia Hill Coillins: Black Feminist Thought: Knowledge, Consciousness and the
Politics of Empowerment

Further Reading:

 The Subjection of Women-----John Stuart Mill

 Sexual Politics is a 1970 book by Kate Millett,[1

A Room of One's Own is an extended essay by Virginia Woolf, first published in
September 1929.[
 We Should All Be Feminists is a book-length essay by
the Nigerian author Chimamanda Ngozi Adichie. First published in 2014

 The Emergence of Feminism in India, 1850-1920 By Padma Anagol

 Literary Theory and Criticism: An Oxford Guide edited by Patricia Waugh

Page 8 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
CULTURAL STUDIES: THEORY & PRACTICE
Objectives:
 To sensitize and enable the scholars understand the theories in Cultural
Studies.
 To inculcate in learners the idea of understanding culture in all its complex
forms.
 To make the researchers identify, analyze and address the specific cultural
issues in literary texts.
Unit I
Wilfred L. Guerin & et.al : What is Cultural Studies?
Jonathan Culler : Literature and Cultural Studies
Stuart Hall : Notes on Deconstructing “The Popular”
Unit II
Walter Benjamin : The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction
Foucault : Space, Power and Knowledge
Judith Butler : Subjects of Sex/Gender/Desire
Unit III
Leopold Senghor : Negritude: A Humanism of the Twentieth Century
Homi. K. Bhaba : The Post Colonial and the Postmodern: The Questions
of Agency
Richard Kerridge : Environmentalism and Eco-criticism
Unit IV
Christopher Norris : Science and Criticism beyond the Culture Wars
Ranajit Guha & Gayatri Spivak: Introduction to Subaltern Studies. (Vol.1)
Janardhan Waghmare : Black Literature and Dalit Literature
Unit V
Ishmael Reed : Yellow Back Radio Broke-down
Amos Oz : Tale of Love and Darkness
Sivakami P : Grip of Change and Author’s Notes
References:
Arendt H. Illuminations. Fontana, 1992.
Culler, Jonathan. Critical Theory. Oxford UP, 2000.
Dangle, Arjun. The Poisoned Bread. Orient Black Swan, 2009.
During, Simon. The Cultural Studies Reader. Routledge, 1993.
Guerien, Wilfred L & et.al. A Handbook of Critical Approaches to Literature.6th ed. Oxford
UP, 2005.
Samuel, Raphael. People’s History and Socialist Theory. Routledge, 1981.
Waugh, Patricia. Literary Theory and Criticism. Oxford UP, 2014.

Page 9 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
GREEN STUDIES
Objectives:
 This paper seeks to introduce to the students, to Ecocriticism which is one of the most
relevant critical theories of the post-modern era.
 To advocate a more thoughtful and ecologically sensitive relationship of man to
nature.
Unit I – Introduction
Introduction – Definition, scope and importance.
William Howarth – Ecocriticism in Context
Cherryl Glotfelty – Literary Studies in the Age of Environmental Crisis
Lawrence Buell – Ecological Imagination; Ecofeminism,
Ecopsychology Paradigm shifts.
Unit II – Essays
Catherine V. Gardner – Ecofeminism and the city: An Ecofeministic
Perspective on the Urban Environement.
Andre Light – Boyz in the woods: Urban Wilderness in American Cinema
Unit III – Poetry
Margaret Atwood – Red Fox
Kamala Das – The Sandalwood Trees
Gary Snyder – From Turtle Island
Unit IV – Prose
Selections from Also Leopold‟s Sand Country Almanac (The Land Ethic)
Selections from Edward Abbey‟s Desert Solitaire (Water, and Serpants of Paradise)
Unit V – Fiction
Amitav Ghosh – The Hungry Tide
Rabindranath Tagore – Muktha Dhara
Easterine Kire – When the River Sleeps
References:
Glotfelty, Cheryll & Harold Fromm. The Ecocriticism Reader. The U of Georgia, 1996.
The Oxford Handbook of Eco criticism, Greg Garrad, OUP 2014, 1Edition
The Green Studies Reader: From Romanticism to Ecocriticism, Laurence Coupe Routledge
(3 August 2000) 1Edition
Barry Peter, Beginning Theory, 2010, 3rd Edition.
Maria Mies & Vandana Shiva, Ecofeminism. Rawat Publications 1993, 1Edition
Benett Michea. The Nature of Cities: Ecocriticism and Urban Environments.The University
of Arizona press, 1999.
Electronic Source - www.greenschool.org
Prescribed text
A Fable for Tomorrow from Silent Spring – Rachel Carson
The Hungry Tide, Amitav Ghosh, Haeper Collins, 2011.
Tagore Rabindranath, Sasta Sahitya Mandal, 2012.
Kire Easterine: When the River Sleeps Zuban Publishers, 2011.

Page 10 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4
INDIGENOUS LITERATURE
Objectives:
 To disseminate the Indigenous Knowledge System.
 To comprehend the Indigenous Culture and Narrative Patterns
 To help the researchers assure further researches on the multifaceted aspects
of Indigenous Literature.
Unit I - Theory
Armand Garnet Ruffo : "Why Native Literature?"
Renate Eigenbrod : “A Necessary Inclusion: Native Literature in Native Studies”
Linda Tuhiwai Smith : Choosing the Margins: The role of research in indigenous struggles
for social justice
Unit II - Poetry
Lionel Hogarty : Dream Time, A Vera takes a Ride
Kimberly Blaser : Goodbye to all That
Maurice Kenney : They Tell Me I am Lost, Amerindian
Mary Tallmountain : Good Griece, Indian Blood
David Diop : Africa
Mamang Dai : The Voice of the Mountain
Unit III – Biography & Fiction
C K Janu : Mother Forest: The Unfinished Story of C K Janu
Scott Momaday : House Made of Dawn
Thomas King : Green Grass, Running Water
Mahashwetha Devi : Draupadi
Unit IV – Fiction II
Eden Robinson : Monkey Beach
Alexis Wright : Carpentarie
Leslie Marmon Silko : The Yellow Woman
Kath Walker : Mirrabooka
Unit V - Drama
Jack Davies : The Cake Man
Wole Soyinka : A Dance of the Forests
Reference:
Eigenbrod, Renate. “A Necessary Inclusion: Native Literature in Native Studies”, Studies in
American Indian Literatures. Eds. Cox, James h. & Austin Daniel, Volume 22. Nebraska
Press, 2010.
Janu, C. K. Mother Forest: The Unfinished Story of C K Janu. Tr. Ravishanker. Kali for
Women, 2004.
Ruffo, Armand Garnet. Introduction to indigenous literary criticism in Canada. Ed.
Heather Macfarlane & et.al, Canada Broadview Press, 2016.
Smith, Linda Tuhiwai. ed. Decolonizing methodologies: Research and Indigenous peoples.
Zed Books, 2012.

Page 11 of 15
 L P T C
4 - - 4
POSTCOLONIAL LITERATURE
Objectives:
 To enable scholars understand the dimensions of Postcolonial Literature
 To help scholars identify the various themes presented in Postcolonial
Literature
 To make the scholars be aware of the postcolonial texts.
Unit I:
Introducing Post- Colonial Literatures –Invader and settler colonies, Commonwealth
Literature, New Literatures
Ngugi wa Thiong‟O - “The language of African Fiction” From
Decolonizing the Mind
Unit II: African literature
Poetry: MakabongweNkambule- I Am Africa
Prose: Chinua Achebe - Novelist as Teacher
Novel: ChimamandaNgoziAdichie–Half of a Yellow Sun
Unit III: Canadian literature
Poetry: James Reaney - Maps
Prose: Susana Moodie - From Roughing It in the Bush
Novel: Sinclair Rose- As for Me and My House
Unit IV: New Zealand
Poetry: Allen Curnow – “Time”, “House and Land”
Prose: KonaiThaman, - „Decolonizing Pacific Studies‟
Novel: Patricia Grace - Potiki
Unit V: Australian Literature
Poetry: Peter Porter – “Your Attention Please”
Prose: Barbara Baynton – “The Chosen Vessel”
Novel: Patrick White – Voss
Reference:
Adichie, Chimamanda. Half of a Yellow Sun. Harper Perennial. 2007.
An Anthology of Commonwealth Poetry – Ed., C. D. Narasimhaiah
Ashcroft, Bill, Gareth Griffiths and Helen Tiffin. Key Concepts in Post-Colonial Studies,
London and New York: Routledge, 1998. Print.
Boehmer, Elleke. Colonial and Postcolonial Literature: Migrant Metaphors. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1995.
Bhabha, Homi. Nation and Narration, London and New York: Routledge, 1990. Print.
King, Bruce, Ed. The New National and Postcolonial Literatures: An Introduction, Oxford:
Clarendon, 1996. Print
Leela Gandhi, Postcolonial Theory: A Critical Introduction (New Delhi, OUP. 1998)
Loomba, Ania. Colonialism/Postcolonialism. London: Routledge, 1998
Moodie, Susanna. From Roughing It in the Bush.An Anthology of Canadian Literature in
English. OUP. 2010.
The Postcolonial Studies Reader ed. Bill Ashcroft, Gareth Griffths, Helen Tiffin(London,
Routledge,1995) Ania Loomba, Colonialism/Postcolonialism 2nd ed. ( London,
Routledge,2007)
Thiong‟o, NgugiWa. “The Language of African Fiction”. Decolonisng the Mind. East
African Education Publishers. 2004.

Page 12 of 15
 L P T C
4 - - 4
DIASPORIC STUDIES
Objectives:
 To make the scholars understand the concepts of Diasporic Studies.
 To make the scholars appreciate the Diaspora texts.
 To make the scholars be aware of the sufferings of the settlers.
Unit 1
Concepts: Diaspora, Neo-Diaspora, Ethnicity, Alienation, Issues of Location,
Nostalgia and Memory, Loss,
Nation-State and Exile, and Cultural Hybridity.
Unit II
ChelvaKanaganayakam – Introduction to Lutesong and Lament
AvtarBrah - Thinking Through the Concept of Diaspora
- The Homing of Diaspora the Diasporising of Home
Unit III: Poetry
Mahakavi - Ahalikai
M A Nuhman - Passion
Cheran - Yaman
Agha Shahid Ali - “The Wolf‟s Postscript to “Little Red Riding Hood”
Unit IV: Short stories
From JhumpaLahiri‟sThe Unaccustomed Earth
- The Unaccustomed Earth
- Hell-Heaven
- Once in a lifetime
- Year‟s End
Unit V: Novel
V. N. Giritharan - An Immigrant
Mary Anne Mohanraj - The Stars Change
References:
Brah, Avtar."Thinking through the Concept of Diaspora".The Post-Colonial
StudiesReader.2nd
ed. Eds. Ashcroft, Bill, Griffiths Gareth, Tiffin Helen. London: Routledge, 2006. pp. 443-
446.
Cheran. A Second Sunrise. Edited and translated from Tamil by Lakshmi Holmström and
SaschaEbeling. NavayanaPublicatins, 1982.
Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Self-Reliance. Create Space Independent Publishing Platform. 2017.
Clifford, James. "Diasporas",The Post-Colonial Studies Reader,2nded.Eds. Ashcroft, Bill,
Giritharan, V.N. An Immigrant. Trans. Latha Ramakrishnan. 2012.
Griffiths Gareth, Tiffin Helen. London: Routledge, 2006. pp 451-454.
Jain, Jasbir. "The New Parochialism: Homeland in the Writing of The Diaspora". In
Diaspora:
Theories, Histories, Texts. Ed. MakarandParanjape, New Delhi: Indialog Publication Pvt.Ltd,
2001. pp.79-81.
Lahiri, Jhumpa. The Unaccustomed Earth. Vintage. 2009.
Mishra Vijay: Theorizing the Diasporic Imaginary, Routledge, 2007.

Page 13 of 15
 L P T C
4 - - 4
AMERICAN STUDIES
Objectives:
 To make the scholars be aware of the life and culture of American people
 To Gain competence in African American theories and methods
appropriate to research work in American Studies
 To understand the relationships between race, power, gender, class,
sexuality, religion, and technology in America.

Unit I
Background to American Literature American myths of origin; Cisatlanticism;
Adamic myths; multiculturalism. Puritanism; Unitarianism; Transcendentalism.
Afro-American Theories: Alain Locke–Self Criticism: the Third Dimension in
Culture
Unit II: Poetry
William Carlos Williams - The Red Wheel Barrow
- This is Just to Say
Wallace Stevens – The Snow Man
- Anecdote of the Jar
Karen Volkman - Create Desire
Unit III: Fiction
Harper Lee – To Kill a Mockingbird
John Steinbeck – Grapes of wrath
Zora Neil Hurston – Their eyes were watching God
Unit IV: Non-Fiction
W. E. B. Du Bois - Of the Faith of the Fathers
James Thurber – University Days
William Faulkner – Nobel Acceptance speech
Unit V: Drama
Edward Albee - Who's Afraid of Virginia Woolf?
CJ Hopkins - Horse Country
Reference:
Albee, Edward. Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf?.Scribner Classics. 2003.
American Literature. Volume 2, Ed. William E. Cair. Newyork: Penguin Academics, 2004.
Hopkins, CJ. Horse Country. Bloomsberry Academic. 2014.
Napier, Winston, 1953-African American Literary theory: A Reader
William J. Fisher et al, “An Anthology American Literature of the Nineteenth Century”.
Delhi, S. Chand & Company, 2008.
William Carlos Williams,''This Is Just to Say'' from The Collected Poems: Volume I, 1909-
1939, New Directions Publishing Corp.
Karen Volkman, “Create Desire” from Spar. Copyright © 2002 by Karen Volkman.
Reprinted by permission of University of Iowa Press.
Wallace Stevens, "The Snow Man" from The Collected Poems of Wallace Stevens. Knopf
Doubleday Publishing Group

Page 14 of 15
 L T P C
4 - - 4

MEDIA AND LITERATURE

Objectives
 To orient the scholars to develop media consciousness.
 To interpret literary texts with media literacy.
 To encourage researchers to pursue multidisciplinary research.
Unit I
Stuart Hall : Deviancy, Politics and the Media
Unit II
Marshall McLuhan : Understanding Media
Anders Skare Malvik & Sarah. J. Paulson : Introduction: Technology-Subjectivity-
Aesthetics: Three Perspectives On
Contemporary Media Culture
Richard Hoggart : The „Real‟ World of People:
Illustrations from Popular Art: Peg‟s
Paper
Unit III
David Beniof : The film script of Troy
James Cameron : The film script of Avatar
Unit IV
John Carlin : Playing the Enemy: Nelson Mandela
and the Game that made A Nation
Clint Eastwood : Invictus (Movie)
Unit V
Jayakanthan : Of Men and Moments (Translation)
A. Bhimsingh : Sila Nerangalil Sila Manithargal (Movie)
References:
Hall, Stuart. Deviancy, Politics and the Media. Centre for Contemporary Cultural
Studies Birmingham, 1971.
Jayakanthan. Of Men and Moments, Trans. K S Subramanian. Sahitya Akademi,
2014.
Lodge, David. 20th Century Literary Criticism: A Reader. Longman, 1972.
Malvik, Anders Skare & Paulson, Sarah.J. Literature in Contemporary Media
Culture. John Benjamins Publishing Company, 2016.
McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media. McGraw-Hill, 1964.
www.imdb.com/title/tt1057500
www.imdb.com/title/tt0157039

Page 15 of 15
 Department of Education
Manonmaniam Sundaranar University

Ph. D Course Work – Syllabus

(2018-19)

Page 1 of 42
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI - 627 012
Ph. D Course Work - Syllabus
(2018-19)

Course Structure and Syllabus

The credit based theory papers are given below.

Course Subject Title Contact Credits

Work Hrs./
No. Week
1. Perspectives In Higher Education 5 4
2. Teacher Education across the World 5 4
3. Cognitive Psychology 5 4
4. Educational Studies 5 4
5. Education at Elementary Level 5 4
6. Education at Secondary and Higher 5 4
Secondary Levels
7. Educational Sociology 5 4
8. Educational Statistics 5 4
9. ICT in Education 4 4
10. Curriculum Studies 6 4
11. Teacher Education - I 7 4
12. Education for Differently Abled 7 4
13. Educational Policy, Planning & Financing 5 4
14. Teacher Education - II 5 4
15. Educational Evaluation 5 4
16. Behaviour Modification 4 4
17. Psychotherapy 4 4
18. Psychology of Addiction 4 4
-
Note:
 Among the above 15 papers, any one of the first three papers (Perspectives in Higher
Education, Teacher Education across the world and Cognitive Psychology) in the above
list has to be chosen as a compulsory paper by the proposed scholars who have not
completed M.Phil.

 Candidates with PG qualification should earn 16 credits as per UGC Regulations in the
following option: (4 Course works of 4 credits each (Or) 3 Course work of 4 credits

Page 2 of 42
 each and 1 mini project of 4 credits). Candidates with M.Phil, qualification should
earn 8 credits as per UGC regulations in the following options (2 Course works of 4
credits each (Or) 1 Course work of 4 credits and 1 mini project of 4 credits). The
above course work should be recommended by the Doctoral Committee.

 Mini Project carried out by a Ph.D scholar as part of his/her course work, shall have the
following components:
 Objective and methodology of the problem
 Literature survey
 Preliminary results of the research work

 Format of the mini project shall be same as like that of a thesis

 Total number of pages shall be between 50 and 80 pages

 The Doctoral Committee shall value of the mini project and submit the marks to the
Controller of Examinations and the same marks would be incorporated in the mark
sheet along with the marks of the other course work examinations.

Page 3 of 42
 1. PERSPECTIVES IN HIGHER EDUCATION

L T P C
3 2 0 4

Preamble: Higher education is very important for the growth and development of any country.
It is a living organ and requires continuous changes to ensure the quality of education. National
Knowledge Commission and University Grants Commission have recommended many
academic reforms to address the challenges of today’s networked globalized world. People are
coming together with the help of new technologies which is resulting towards new aspirations,
expectations, collaborations and associations. The National bodies provide an important step to
revamp the processes, systems and methodologies of Higher Educational Institutions (HEIs).
The teacher centric mode is changed to learner centric mode. Class room teaching and learning
about the managerial aspects of higher education is made effective, relevant and interesting.
Concepts and theories of higher education is explained with examples, experimentation and
related applications.

Objectives:
To enable the scholar
 to comprehend the objectives demands, and problems of higher education;
 to acquire knowledge about the managerial aspects of higher education;
 to understand the importance of linking community and industry with higher education;
 to comprehend the role of ICT in higher education and
 to acquire knowledge about the role of funding agencies at higher education level

Unit I: Trends in Higher Education

Objectives of Higher Education – Demand for Higher Education – Problems of Higher
Education – Policy of admission in Higher Education – Growth of colleges and Universities in
recent years – National Policy on Education (1986 &1992) – PoA – National Knowledge
Commission (NKC) (L7, T3 = 10 Hrs)

Unit II: Management of Higher Education

Management of Higher Education – Education in Concurrent list – Types of universities –
Decentralization – Democratization of Higher Education – Autonomy to colleges. Innovations
in Higher Education – Utilization of modern techniques – Open book exam – self financing
colleges – Open university – Distance education – Institutions with linked industries
interaction and public sector units (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Page 4 of 42
Unit III: Community and Higher Education
Need & Significance of Linking Higher Education with community – Involvement in
community development – Participation in Adult Literacy Programme – Consultancy services
Extension Activities – College complex – Need & significance of Environmental education –
Utilizing community resources – Accountability to community (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit IV: Research in Higher Education

Research in Higher Education – Needed Research in Higher Education – Teachers and
Research - Research organizations in India –Funding Agencies – UGC, CSIR, DST, ICSSR,
DPT - Maintenance of Standards in Higher Education–Role of ICT in research
(L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V: Quality in Higher Education

Application of ICT in Higher Education - Relationship between Technology and Quality in
Higher Education - NAAC, NCTE, TANSCHE and International Accreditation Bodies–
Present scenario in the implication of modern technologies in Higher Education
(L8, T6 = 14 Hrs)

(Total = 60 Hrs)

References

Arya, P. P (2006). Higher education and global challenges systems and opportunities. New
Delhi: Deep & Deep Publications.
Bourai, H. H. A & Uniyal B. P. (2005). Challenges in administration of higher education. New
Delhi: Abhijeet Publications.
Dahiya, S. (1996). Higher education in India: Some reflections. New Delhi: Kanishka
Publishers.
Dhar, B. (2008). Higher education system. New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
Jagannath, Patnaik. (2005). Higher education in information age. New Delhi: Authors Press.
Patil, V.T. (2010). Higher education in India the international engagement. New Delhi:
Authors Press.
Rao, U. K. (2004). Higher education. New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
Sahoo, R. K. & Senapati, T. (2008). Resource mobilisation for higher education. New Delhi:
Regal Publications.
Sharma, R.S. (2005). Higher education scope and development. New Delhi: Commonwealth
Publishers.
Sharma, S. R. (2005). History and development of higher education in free India. Jaipur: ABD
Publishers.

Page 5 of 42
 2. TEACHER EDUCATION ACROSS THE WORLD

L T P C
4 0 0 4

Preamble: The aim of this study is to explore the policies and procedures designed to equip
prospective teachers with the knowledge, attitudes, behaviors and skills they require to perform
their tasks effectively in the classrooms. The acquisition or improvement of teacher
competences requires training, through which it will be improved educational planning and
assessment. In some parts of the world (USA, Netherlands, Canada etc.) specific standards of
professional practice have been developed for, or by, teacher educators. Modern society
demands high quality teaching and learning from teachers. Teachers have to possess a great
deal of knowledge and skills with regard to both teaching and assessment practices in order to
meet those demands and standards of quality education.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to –
 understand the features of the teacher educational system;
 gain knowledge about the system of education and teacher preparation in various
countries;
 critically examine the growth and development of teacher education in nations;
 develop an awareness of the problems in teacher education across the world; and
 tie the performance of teachers to numerous, larger societal goals and problems.

Unit I: Concept of Teacher Education

Meaning of training and education - Difference between training and education - Need for
teacher training - Objectives of teacher education – NCTE and Teacher education -
Recommendations of NCTE - Research based objectives of NCTE - Difficulties of teacher
education curriculum in India - New Regulations of NCTE (L9)

Unit II: Teacher Education in Developed Countries (UK & USA)

Teacher Education in UK: Stages of education - Models of initial teacher education -
Curriculum and courses of study. Teacher education in USA: Teaching quality and equity
attacks - The potential power of teacher education - Curriculum and courses of study - The
challenges for teacher education in USA (L11)

Page 6 of 42
Unit III: Teacher Education in Developing Countries (China & Korea)
Teacher Education in China: The era of professional teacher education - Teacher education for
ethnic minorities. Teacher education in Korea: Current status of teachers in Korea - Main
Teacher Policies in Korea - Analysis of features and implications (L10)

Unit IV: Teacher Education in Underdeveloped Countries (Nigeria & Ethiopia)

Teacher education in contemporary Nigeria: Trends, Challenges and prospects - Teacher
education and national development - Exploring alternatives for teacher education provision.
Teacher education in Ethiopia: Present state of teacher education - Challenges in teacher
education in Ethiopia (L10)

Unit V: Major Issues and Problems of Teacher Education

Issues, Problems in Teacher Education - Maintaining standards in teacher education -Service
conditions of Teacher Educators - Quality management of teacher education -Privatization,
Globalization in teacher education - Autonomy in teacher education – MHRD, UGC, NCERT,
NCTE, NACC, ICSSR, NUEPA, CASE, DEC and Teacher Education (L8)

(Total = 48 Hours)

References

Darling, H.,& Lieberman (2012). Teacher education around the world. UK: Routledge
Publications.

Jain, Kavitha (2003). World teachers training today. New Delhi: Mohit Publications.

Prasad, Janardan (2007). Principles and practices of teacher education. New Delhi: Kanishka
Publishers.

Rao, V.K. (2009). Teacher education. New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.

www.article.sciencepublishinggroup.com/...

www.edu.cn.>Home page>English

www.european-agency.org/agency-projects/t

www.gov.uk/…/

www.journal.lib.uoguelph.ca/.. 3254

www.kice.re.kr

www.mest.go.kr

www.np.chinese embassy

Page 7 of 42
 3. COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY

L T P C
3 2 0 4

Preamble: Cognitive psychology is an interdisciplinary field that attempts to provide a

framework to the various facets of the enquiry into the nature of the human mind and brain.
The field lies at the intersection of several other disciplines, including philosophy (knowledge
representation, logic), psychology (basic human cognition, perception and performance),
computer science (computational theory, artificial intelligence and robotics), linguistics
(theories of language structure) and cognitive neuroscience (brain mechanisms for intelligent
behaviour). Typical research areas of cognitive psychology include perception, attention,
learning & memory, goal directed movement in complex environments and consciousness,
language comprehension and production and language acquisition. Cognitive psychology also
studies behavioural deficits due to brain trauma, congenital or other reasons.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the nature of cognition as a discipline/an area of study;
 learn the basic concepts of brain and cognitive processes through scientific methods;
 acquire strong empirical and theoretical background in areas of cognitive psychology;
 understand various mental processes: Attention and consciousness, memory processes,
reasoning and decision making;
 develop ability to conduct original research in chosen area; and
 inculcate analytical and technical skills to conduct and critically examine research.

Unit I - Cognitive Psychology and Brain

Influences on the study of Cognition - Research methods in cognitive psychology - Paradigms

of cognitive psychology. Brain: structure of the brain, Localization of function, Lateralization
of function, Brain imaging technique (L8, T3 = 11 Hrs)

Unit II - Basic Processes

Perception: Gestalt approaches to perception, Bottom- up processes, Top-down processes,

direct perception, and Disruption of perceptions. Attention: Selective attention, Neuroscientific
studies of attention, Automaticity and effects of practice, Divided attention. Forming and using
new memory traces, Metaphors of memory, Sensory memory, Short-term memory, Working
memory, Executive functioning, Neurological studies of memory processes. Memories:
Traditional view of long-term memory, Levels-of-processing view, Reconstructive nature of
memory, Amnesia (L8, T2 = 10 Hrs)

Page 8 of 42
Unit III - Representation and Organization of Knowledge
Memory for general knowledge: Semantic/ Episodic distinction, Semantic memory modals,
Schemata, Implicit versus Explicit memory. Concepts and Categorization: Theoretical
descriptions of the nature of concepts, forming new concepts and classifying new instances,
Visual imagery and Spatial cognition: Mnemonics and memory codes, Empirical investigations
of imagery, Nature of mental imagery, Neuro-psychological findings, Spatial cognition
(L8, T4 = 12 Hrs)

Unit IV - Manipulation of Information

Language: Structure of language, Language comprehension and production, Language and
cognition. Thinking and problem solving: Classic problems and general methods of solution,
Blocks to problem solving, Problem space hypothesis, Expert systems, Finding creative
solutions, Critical thinking. Reasoning: Types, Patterns of reasoning performance.
Approaches to the study of reasoning, Neuro psychological evidence on reasoning. Making
decisions: Phases of decision making, Basic concepts of probability, Cognitive illusions in
decision making, Utility models of decision making, improving decision making
(L11, T4 = 15 Hrs)

Unit V - Individual and Situational Differences in Cognition

Cognitive development through Adolescence, Piagetian theory, Non-Piagetian approaches to
cognitive development, some Post-Piagetian answers to the question “What develops?”,
Individual, aging and gender differences in cognition: Individual differences in cognition,
effects of aging on cognition, gender differences in cognition. Cognition in cross-cultural
perspective: Effects of schooling and literacy, situated cognition in everyday settings
(L9, T3 = 12 Hrs)
(Total = 60 Hours)

References
Eysenck M. W.,& Keane M. T. (2005). Cognitive psychology: A student’s handbook (5th Ed.).
New York: Psychology Press.
Galotti, K. M. (2011). Cognitive development. UK: SAGE Publications.
Hunt, R. R., & Ellis, H. C. (2004). Fundamentals of cognitive psychology (7th Ed.). New
Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
Menon, S. (2006). Consciousness, experience and ways of knowing. Bangalore: National
Institute of Advanced Studies.
Raja, B. W. D., Yuvaraj, T. & Baboo, S. (2014). Cognitive Science in India. Chennai: TR
Publications.
Riegler, B. R., &Riegler, G. R. (2008). Cognitive psychology: Applying the science of the mind
(2nd Ed.). New Delhi: Dorling Kindersley.
Upton, D. & Upton, P. (2011). Test yourself cognitive psychology. UK: Learning Matters.

Page 9 of 42
 4. EDUCATIONAL STUDIES
L T P C
3 2 0 4

Preamble: Education is the process of facilitating learning or the acquisition of

knowledge, skills, values, beliefs, and habits. Education frequently takes place under
the guidance of educators, but learners may also learn by themselves. In addition to
the formal/informal setting of Education and the experience of an individual has a
formative effect on the way he/she thinks, feels, or acts. This course brings together
the various perspectives of education including its interdisciplinary nature, socio–
cultural contexts, and place of education in Constitution and also reflects its various
support systems. The learner will understand education as a key discipline for
learning. The vital features of education in Indian scenario are focused in this course.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the nature of education as a discipline/an area of study;
 understand the basic concepts/issues of education with reference to kind of
concerns the NCF (2005) and NCFTE (2009) have raised;
 examine critically the theories and basic concepts of education drawn from
various disciplines cognate to education;
 examine critically the concerns arises from vision of school education;
 reflect on the multiple contexts in which the school education institutions are
working; and
 discuss the emerging dimensions of school education.

Unit I - Education as a Discipline

Discipline - Meaning, Concepts, principles, theories, assumptions and contexts related
to education discipline: schooling – curriculum – syllabus - text books – assessment -
teaching-learning process - School education: Contemporary challenges - Aims of
Indian Education (L7, T3 = 10 Hrs)

Unit II - Education as Interdisciplinary Knowledge

Interdisciplinary nature of education - relationships with various disciplines/subjects
(philosophy, psychology, sociology, management, economics, anthropology) -
Contribution of science and technology to education - Challenges to education -
Axiological issues in education (role of peace and other values) (L7, T6 = 13 Hrs)

Page 10 of 42
Unit III - Socio-cultural Context of Education
Social purpose of education – Cultural purpose of education - Socialization and
acculturation of learners - Contemporary Indian society (with reference to
multilingual, multicultural, gender, equity, poverty, diversity, human rights and
rights of the child) - Teaching in the context of diversities - Appraisal of the role of
school, parents, peer group and the community - Equality in educational opportunity
(L8, T5 = 13 Hrs)

Unit IV- Constitutional Provisions and Education

Constitutional Provisions and Education that reflect national ideals: Democracy and
values of equality, justice, freedom, secularism, respect for human dignity and rights –
Aims and purposes of Education drawn from Constitutional Provisions –
Fundamental Rights and Duties of Citizens – Role of Central and state governments in
the development of education (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V- Support Systems of Education

Support systems: Principles and guidelines - Teacher education and NCF (2005), Right
to Education Act, (2009) - Department of Public instruction, Ministry and other
government agencies, Academic Institutes: Role, involvements, issues related to
control and autonomy –Participation of stakeholders in school education: NGOs, civil
society groups, teacher organisations, parents, family, PTA and local community
(L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

(Total= 60 Hours)

References
Banrs, J.A. (1996). Cultural diversity and education: Foundations curriculum and teaching
(4thed.). Boston: Alynand, Becon.
Beyer, L.E. (Ed.) (1996). Creating democratic classrooms: The struggle to integratetheory and
practice. New York: Teachers College Press.
Bruubacher, John S. (1969). Modern philosophies of education. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company.
Butchvarov, P. (1970) The concept of knowledge. Evanston, Illinois: North Western
University Press.
Debra Heyes, Martin Hills, Pam Chistie& Bob Lingard. (2007). Teachers and schooling:
Making a difference. Australia: Allen and Unwin,
Delors, Jacques et al. (1996). Learning: The treasure within report of the international
commission on education for 21st century. UNESCO.

Page 11 of 42
Freire, Paulo (1970). Pedagogy of the oppressed. New York: Continuum.
Matheson, David (2004). An introduction to the study of education (2nded.). David Fulton
Publish.
Naik, J.P. (1975). Equality, quality and quantity: The elusive triangle of Indian education.
Bombay: Allied Publications.
Slatterry, Patrick & Dana Rapp. (2002). Ethics and the foundations of education-Teaching
convictions in a postmodern world. Allyn & Bacon.
Wall, Edmund (2001). Educational theory: philosophical and political perspectives.
Prometheus Books.
Winch, C. (1996). Key Concepts in the philosophy of education. Routledge.

Page 12 of 42
 5. EDUCATION AT ELEMENTARY LEVEL
L T P C
3 1 1 4

Preamble: This course presents the overview of the elementary education at the
national and global levels. It is aimed at describing the historical progression of
elementary education to help the teachers understand the nature and development of
elementary education in a holistic way. This has been designed based on the needs of
the society and varied life experiences to facilitate fair understanding of elementary
education in the contemporary Indian society.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the context of elementary education;

 recognize the concept, objectives, rationale, challenges and extent of success of

universal elementary education (UEE);

 expand an understanding of underlying principles of curriculum development

and evaluation at elementary stage;

 develop research insight for curriculum development in elementary education.

 build up an understanding of underlying principles of curriculum

development and evaluation at elementary stage;

 widen research insight for curriculum development in elementary education;

 understand the development of elementary teacher education in post-

independent India; and

 develop understanding of status of elementary teachers, the problems and

issues related to professional growth.

Unit I -Context of Elementary Education

Developmental characteristics and norms-physical, cognitive process and abilities;
language development; socio-emotional development during early and late childhood
- Influence of home, school and community related factors on child’s development -
learner/learning centered approach, activity centered approach, freedom and
discipline; reflection on present practices (L7, T2, P1 = 10 Hrs)

Page 13 of 42
Unit II -Development of Elementary Education
Nature of Elementary Education after independence - Educational thought of
Mahatma Gandhi and Tagore to elementary education - Constitutional provision for
education and Directive Principles related to elementary education - Provision in RTE
Act and related issues - Elementary education in NPE (1986), PoA (1992), NCF (2005).
(L6, T2, P2 =10 Hrs)

Unit III - UEE and Challenges

Concept, objectives, meaning and justification of UEE - Current status of UEE (access
enrolment, and retention) with reference to the equity principles: differential across
habitation, gender, caste andother socially disadvantaged groups - Access and
enrolment of different types of learners-issues and challenges - Enrolment and
dropout: meaning and assessment and related issues and dropout - Achievement
levels of different types of learners-status and issues - Inclusive education
(L8, T2, P4 = 14 Hrs)

UNIT IV- Programmes in Elementary Education

Panchayatraj and community involvement in educational planning and management
related issues - Participation of NGOs in achieving goals of UEE - ECCE programme,
women empowerment as support services - District primary education programme:
goals and strategies–SarvaShikshaAbhiyan:goals and specific programme
interventions namely access, enrolment, retention/participation and achievement -
Monitoring, research and evaluation of schemes viz., mid-day meals, VEC and
incentive schemes and achievement levels (L8, T3, P3 = 14 Hrs)

UNIT V- Curriculum and Evaluation in Elementary Education

Elementary School Curriculum: Principles - Curriculum, Objectives, Planning,
Organisation and Evaluation of for Work Experience, Art Education, Health &
Physical Education, Language(s), Mathematics, Environmental Studies/ Social
Sciences and Natural Sciences in Elementary Education (L7, T3, P2 = 12 Hrs)

(Total = 60 Hours)

References

Celin, Richards. (1984).The study of primary education and resource book.Vol. I.

Erickson, H.L. (2002). Concept-based curriculum and instruction. California: Crown Press.
GOI. (1986). National policy on education. New Delhi: MHRD.
GOI. (1987). Programme of action. New Delhi: MHRD.
Page 14 of 42
Hayes, Denis. (2008). Primary teaching today: An introduction. UK: Routledge
Publications.
Hurlock, E. (1995). Child development. USA: McGraw Hill Book Company.
Kurrian, J. (1993). Elementary education in India. New Delhi: Concept Publication.
MHRD (2001). Convention on the Right to the child. New Delhi: MHRD.
NCERT (2005). National Curriculum Framework. New Delhi: NCERT.
NCERT (2005). Position paper on teacher education for curricular renewal. New Delhi:
NCERT.
Rao, V.K. (2007). Universalisation of elementary education. New Delhi: Indian
Publishers.
UNESCO (2006). Teachers and educational quality: Monitoring global needs for 2015.
Montreal: UNESCO Publication.

Page 15 of 42
 6. EDUCATION AT SECONDARY AND HIGHER SECONDARY LEVELS
L T P C
3 1 1 4
Preamble: Secondary and higher secondary education is increasingly becoming an
area of focus in developing countries, which have thus far concentrated on achieving
universal elementary education. This policy note on secondary education in India
discusses issues and aspects critical for the development of this subsector. Secondary
education, in terms of policy, is a concurrent item in that it is within the purview of
both State and Central governments. State level implications and strategies for
developing this sub-sector are critical. The Central government involvement in
secondary education thus far has been through discrete programs, such as computer
and vocational education.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the nature-scope and systems of secondary and senior secondary
education;
 examine the status of development of secondary and senior secondary
education in India after independence;
 understand the problem and challenges related to secondary and senior
secondary education;
 understand the interventions to solve the problems and issues related to
alternative schooling at secondary and higher secondary levels;
 identify critical issues related to universalization of secondary education; and
 know about the innovations at secondary and higher secondary levels of
education.
Unit I - Secondary Education
General Aims and Objectives of Secondary Education, Education during Post
Independence Period. Secondary Education Commission 1952-53, Education
Commission 1964-66, New Education Policy 1986 with Programme of Action, 1992.
(L7, T2, P2 = 11 Hrs)

Unit II - Secondary and Higher Secondary School Curriculum

Principles of school curriculum development at secondary and higher secondary level
and text book development in secondary and higher secondary education -
Approaches to career guidance, Vocationalisation of education and
careerdevelopment - Ginzberg’s theory about guidance, Holland’s theory of
vocational choice. (L8, T2, P3 = 13 Hrs)

Page 16 of 42
Unit III - Problems and Challenges of Secondary Education
Problems and challenges related to universalisation of secondary education -
Alternative schooling at secondary stage - Problems / challenges / to access
enrolment, dropout, achievement- equality of educational opportunities - Problems
of education for girls, disadvantaged and differently abled children - Classroom
problems: discipline, underachievement, lack of motivation, slow learners,
delinquency and maladjustment - Issues of quality in secondary and higher secondary
education. (L7, T4, P2 = 13 Hrs)

Unit IV - Research and Innovation in Secondary and Higher Secondary Education

Purpose - scope - trends of research in secondary and higher secondary education,
innovative practices at secondary and higher secondary levels– micro teaching,
simulated social skill training, team teaching, brain storming, independent study,
group discussions and role playing. (L7, T2, P3 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V - Monitoring for Quality Improvement in Schools

Monitoring – meaning, objectives and significance - Monitoring mechanism at
different levels of schooling –Alumni association - Evaluation in Schools at State and
Central boards. (L7, T2, P2 = 11 Hrs)
(Total = 60 Hours)
References
Adams& James, F. (1986). Counseling and guidance: A summary view. New York.
Ahuja A.,& Jangira, N.K. (2002).Effective teacher training: cooperative learning based
approach. New Delhi: National publishing house.
Bhatnagar, R. P. Technology of teaching. Meerut: International Publishing House.
Burkes, H.M. &Steffir, B. (1979). Theories of counseling (3rd ed.). New York: McGraw
Hill.
Jangira, N.K. & Mani, M.N. (1990).Integrated education for visually handicapped.
Gurgaon: Old Subjimandi Academic Press.
Jha, M. (2002).Inclusive education for all: Schools without walls.Chennai: Heinemann
Educational publishers.
Mohammad,Miyan. (2004).Professionalisation of teacher education. New Delhi: Mittal
Publications.
Sharma, P.L. (2003).Planning inclusive education in small schools. Mysore: RIE.
Sharma, P.L.(1990).Teachers’ handbook on IED-Helping children with special needs.
NCERTPublication.
Sudesh,Mudhopadyay& Anil Kumar, K. (2001).Quality profiles of secondary schools.
New Delhi: NIEPA
Yadav, M.S. & Lakshmi, T.K.S. (2003).Conceptual inputs for secondary teacher education:
the instructional role. New Delhi: NCTE.


Page 17 of 42
 7. EDUCATIONAL SOCIOLOGY

L T P C
3 2 0 4

Preamble: This paper aims to probe the nature of Sociology and Education and to
establish and develop students’ educational-sociological competences. This paper
introduces the sociological bases of Education. The educational thoughts of
sociological exponents are also able to understand in a detailed means. This also gives
a clear understanding of the educational structure and educational opportunities
available for the different strata in the society.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the sociological perspective in education;
 understand the structure and function of the educational system in the social
system of today;
 understand the trends of social development and its impact on education;
 understand the quality perspective in Education; and
 realize the perspective changes in the society.

Unit I - Education and Sociology

Meaning, aims and functions of education; Sociology – Relationship with education;
Educational sociology- nature; Sociology of education; Individual and social aims in
education; Education and Society as mutually supporting systems (L7, T4 = 11 Hrs)

Unit II - Sociological Bases of Education

Socialization and Education – Education and Culture – Cultural lag- Education and
Education and Values – Agencies of Education – Education for Modernization –
Education for National Integration and International understanding-Education and
Democracy (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit III - Educational Thoughts of Sociologists

Auguste Comte (1798-1857) – Herbert Spencer (1820-1903) – Charles Horton Cooley
(1864-1929) – Pitirim A. Sorokin (1889-1968) – Talcot Parsons (1902-1979)
(L8, T5 = 13 Hrs)

Page 18 of 42
Unit IV - Social Structure and Education
Education and adjustment; Social stratification; Social mobility; Social equity: value
education - Education and Social Change: Process, patterns, factors responsible for
social change, relationship between education and social change (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V - Equality of Educational Opportunities

Meaning – Constraints: Caste, Community, Religion, Social status, etc.; Women’s
Education; Education for socially, economically backward people – Scheduled caste,
Scheduled Tribes, Rural population – Human Rights Education (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

(Total = 60 Hours)

References

Gore, M.S. (1984). Education and modernization in India. Jaipur: Rawat Publishers.
Havighurst, Robert et al., (1995). Society and education.Baston: Allyen and Bacon.
Kamat, A.R. (1985). Education and social change in India. Bombay: Samaiya Publishing
Co.
Pandey, K.P. (1983). Perspectives in social foundations of education. Ghaziabad:
AmitashPrakashan.
Purkait, Biswa, Ranjan. (1996). Principles and practices of education. Calcutta: New
Central Book Agency.
Ruhela, S.P. (2002). Sociology of education. Ambalacontt: Associated publishers.
Sha A.M. et al., (1998). Social structure and change. New Delhi: Sage publications India.
Shah, B.V. & Shah K.V. (1998). Sociology of education. New Delhi: Rawat Publications.
Swift, D.F. (1969). The sociology of education: Introductory analytical perspectives. London:
Routledge.
Syed, M.H. (2007). Teacher’s handbook of sociology. New Delhi: Anmol Publication.
Talesra, Hemlata. (2002). Sociological foundations of education, New Delhi: Kanishka
Publisher.

Page 19 of 42
 8. EDUCATIONAL STATISTICS
L T P C
3 2 0 4

Preamble: This paper capacitates acquire knowledge about the Educational Statistics
and the fundamental concepts and procedures of descriptive and inferential statistics.
The need of statistics to analyse the data which the scholars collect for their research
work for inquiry in the social and behavioral sciences during the current programme
and to utilize the same in their future research venturesis made clear through this
course.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the meaning and need of statistics in educational researches;
 know the difference between descriptive and inferential statistics;
 distinguish parametric and non-parametric statistics; and
 select and apply appropriate statistical techniques.

Unit I - Descriptive Statistics

Statistics – meaning and scope – Scales: types and applications. Data: tabulation and
graphic representation – types and uses. Measures of Central Tendency and
Dispersion - Elementary ideas of probability - Normal probability curve – properties
and applications (L7, T7 = 14 Hrs)

Unit II - Correlational Techniques

Scatter Diagram – meaning and uses, Product moment and Rank Correlations,
Biserial, Point biserial, tetrachoric and phi-coefficient correlations, Partial and multiple
correlations, and applications (L9, T5 = 14 Hrs)

Unit III - Prediction

Linear Regression Equations, Prediction of Variables, Multiple regression (L6 = 6 Hrs)

Unit IV - Parametric Tests

Sampling Distribution - Standard error - Estimation of population parameters - testing
of hypotheses – degrees of freedom – levels of significance – errors in making
inference – t-tests - ANOVA - and applications (L7, T5 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V - Non-parametric Tests

Sign test - Median test - Chi-square Test – Kolmogrov-Smirnov test - Two sample
Mann-Whitney test, Kruskal-Walli’s test and applications (L7, T7 = 14 Hrs)

(Total = 60 Hours)

Page 20 of 42
 References
Aron, A., Aron, E.,& Coups, E.(2012). Statistics for psychology. Noida: Pearson.
Argyrous, George. (2011). Statistics for research. New Delhi: Sage.
Best, John W., & Kahn, James V. (2012). Research in education(10thed.). New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India.
Garrett, Henry. (1961). Statistics in psychology and education. New Delhi: Paragon
International Publishers.
Guiford, J.F. (1950). Fundamental statistics in psychology and education. New York:
McGraw Hill.
Gupta, C. (1981). Fundamentals of statistics. Bombay: Himalaya Publishing House.
Mangal, S.K. (2002). Statistics in psychology and education (2nded.). New Delhi: Prentice-
Hall of India.
Pillai, R.S.N., Bagavathi. (2013). Statistics: Theory and practice. New Delhi: S. Chand &
Company.
Sidhu, Kulbir Singh. (2010). Statistics in education and psychology. New Delhi: Sterling
Publishers.
Sharma, R.N. (2003). Statistical techniques in educationalresearch. New Delhi: Surjeet
Publications.

Page 21 of 42
 9. ICT IN EDUCATION
L T P C
4 0 0 4

Preamble: ICT in Education aims at preparing the scholars to participate creatively in

the establishment, sustenance and growth of a knowledge society leading to all round
socioeconomic development of the nation and global competitiveness. To catalyse,
support and sustain ICT and ICT enabled activities and processes in order to improve
access, quality and efficiency in the school educational system and ICT literate
community which can deploy, utilise and contribute to nation building. To create an
environment of collaboration, cooperation and sharing, conducive to the creation of a
demand for optimal utilisation of and optimum returns on the potentials of ICT in
education.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 appreciate the role of ICT in teaching learning;
 use ICT devices and its applications in teaching learning contexts;
 understand the fundamentals of computers and operating systems;
 understand the operations and use of computers and common accessories;
 understand the features, working and use of the Internet and the Web;
 appreciate the use of word, date and media processing for teaching learning;
 appreciate the use of multimedia and web content for teaching learning; and
 appreciate the use of MS word, MS Excel, MS Power Point, HTML – for
teaching and learning.

Unit I -Computer Fundamentals: Hardware & Software

Introduction to computer - Functional overview of a personal computer: its parts and
functions - Standard computer accessories –operating system: files and folders - the
concept of window and multi-tasking (L9)

Unit II -MS-Office
MS Word: Creating a file, saving, editing a text, finding and replacing a text,
formatting a text, creating a table, inserting, deleting a row and column
MS-Excel:Creating a Excel work sheet file, entering data in the sheet, manipulating
data in the row and column, inserting a chart, Functions
MS-PowerPoint: Creating a Power Point file, inserting a new slide, slide show –view
show- creating a link between the slides and files Developing a module (Using MS Word,
MS-Excel, and MS-PowerPoint) (L11)

Page 22 of 42
Unit III - Role of ICT in Teaching and Learning
ICT: Meaning and importance – theories of teaching and learning. Uses of resources in
Video conferencing
e-learning:Definitions, scope, trends, Synchronous and Asynchronous mode -
Pedagogical designs & e-learning - Assessments, feedback and e-moderation - Role of
Computers in Evaluation – EDUSAT - Mobile learning
On line learning management system: Digital learning objects, Online learning course
development models, Management and implementation of e-learning (L10)

Unit IV- WWW & Web Based Learning

Internet and the WWW:Information, services and functions of the internet and web;
connecting to and using the web - Using search engines and Web utilities: Keywords
and search strategies - e-mail, chat, news groups and forums, web blogs
Multimedia: Concept and meaning, text, graphics, animation, audio & video
Multimedia applications: Computer based training - Electronic books and references -
Information kiosks - web2 and web3 Tools - cloud computing (L10)

Unit V - Hyper Text Markup Language

Script writing html-part of the HTML script – defining header and body sections-
formatting statements – listing statements – creating menus -Creating link between
files inserting pictures and images (L8)

(Total = 48 Hours)

References

Anandan, K. &Raja, B. W. D. (2010). Educational technology. New Delhi: APH

Publishing Corporation.
Flynn, M.&Rutkosky, N. (2000). Advanced Microsoft office. New Delhi: BPB
Publications.
Hergest, D. (1992). Excel 4 for windows – instant reference. Singapore: Tech Publications.
Hillman, D. (1998). Multimedia technology and applications. New York: Delmar
Publishers.
Jonathan, A.& Tom V. W. (2002). Information and communication technology in education:
A curriculum for schools and programme of teacher development. UNESCO.
Jones, B. (1990). Technology and future of work. Oxford University Press.
Microsoft Corporation (1994). User Guide, MS Office, Microsoft Word, Microsoft
Corporation. USA.

Page 23 of 42
Minasi, Mar, Christiansen, Eric &Shapar, K. (1998). Expert guide to window 98. San
Francisco: Sysbex.
Norton, (1998). Windows 95, New Delhi: BPB Publication.
Rajaraman, V.(1997). Fundamentals of computers. New Delhi: Prentice -Hall of India.
Rasool,S. (2012). Educational Television in India: Present scenario and future proslects. New
Delhi: Concept publishing company.
Sanders, Donald, H. (1988). Computers today. New York: McGraw Hill Book Co.

Page 24 of 42
 10. CURRICULUM STUDIES
L T P C
3 1 1 4

Preamble: Curriculum Studies is a concentration within curriculum and instruction

concerned with understanding curricula as an active force of human educational
experience. One of the vital roles of teachers is to facilitate and refine the knowledge
of students by using the curriculum as a tool. This course imparts necessary
preparation of the learners to know the basic concepts and process of curriculum. It
also helps to get acquaintance on various approaches and models of curriculum
development.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 acquire knowledge and get insight into curriculum perspectives;
 understand the concept of curriculum and characteristics of a good curriculum;
 gain experience in constructive and critical analysis of text book;
 get insight into the guiding principles and recommendations of NCF 2005 and
NCFTE 2009;
 develop the capability to play the role of curriculum designer, reviewer,
implementer and assessor; and
 gain total curricular experiences

Unit I - Curriculum Perspectives

Curriculum: Concept, definitions, need and importance, Principles, aims and
objectives – Philosophical and ideological basis of curriculum - Characteristics of a
good curriculum – Components of curriculum: Objectives, content, transaction mode
and evaluation - Preservation of culture - Curriculum for the differently- abled
students - Curriculum vs Syllabus – Source book vs Textbook (L5, T5, P5 = 15 Hrs)

Unit II - Language Curriculum

Inclusion of First language / ESL in school curriculum: Need – Specific objectives of
teaching First language / ESL – Developing LSRW skills – Learning outcomes at
elementary level – Teacher as Implementer and Assessor - Textbook Review:
Meaning, Need, Uses - Qualities of a good text book - Content analysis: Meaning,
Need and significance. (L5, T5, P5 = 15 Hrs)

Page 25 of 42
Unit III - Approaches to Curriculum Development
Subject-centred: Core curriculum, Learner-centred, Community-centred - Curriculum
frameworks of school education and Teacher education - Humanistic Curriculum and
Social ReconstructionistCurriculum: characteristics, purpose, role of the teacher,
psychological basis (L5, T5, P5 = 15 Hrs)

Unit IV - Models of Curriculum Development

Tylers model (1949) - Hilda Taba model (1962) - Nicholls and Nicholls model (1972) -
Willes and Bondi model (1989) - Need assessment model - Futuristic model -
Vocational/Training model (L4, T4, P4 = 12 Hrs)

Unit V – Curriculum Implementation and Renewal

Teachers role in generating dynamic curriculum – Selection and development of
learning resources (textbooks, teaching – learning materials and resources outside the
institution – local environment, community, media, etc. - Process of Curriculum
evaluation and revision – Need for continual evaluation – Feedback from learners,
teachers, community and Administrators – Observable incongruencies and
correspondence between expectations and actual achievements (L5, T5, P5 = 15 Hrs)

(Total = 72 Hours)

References
Aggarwal, Deepak. (2007). Curriculum development: concept, methods and techniques.
New Delhi: Book Encla.
Hutchinson, T. Gom& Alan, Waters. (1987). English for specific purposes. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Johnson, et al., (1982). Communication in the classroom. Honkong: Longman Edrs.

Madhulika, Sharma. (2013). Education management, curriculum development and

teaching techniques. New Delhi: Kanishka Publishers.

McKernan, James. (2007). Curriculum and imagination: process, theory, pedagogy and
action research. UK: Routledge.

NCERT (2009). National curriculum framework – 2005. New Delhi: NCERT.

O'hara,M. (2004). Meeting the standard for initial teacher training and induction.London:
Continuum.

Page 26 of 42
Parkinson, J. (2000). Reflective teaching of science. London: Continuum.

Prasad, Janardan&Kaushik, Vijay Kumari. (2013).Advanced curriculum construction.

New Delhi: Kanishka Publishers.

Roland, C. Faunce& Nelson, L. Bossing. (1967). Developing the core curriculum (2nded.).
New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.

Taba, H. (1962). Curriculum development: Theory and practice. New York: Harcourt
Brace.

Wheeler, D. (1967). Curriculum process. London: University of London press.

Page 27 of 42
 11. TEACHER EDUCATION – I
L T P C
2 2 2 4

Preamble: Teachers are the builders of a nation. This course work enables to acquire
necessary skills for planning and organizing classroom management. The scholar will
be able to gain insight and reflect values and status of teaching as a profession,
understand the roles and responsibilities of teachers and teacher educators. They will
be able to examine critically the issues, problems and concerns of teacher education.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to-
 study the changing concepts of teacher education during various periods of
educational development in the country;
 develop an awareness of the problems in teacher education;
 acquaint with the responsibilities pertaining to the organization of a teacher
education institution; and
 develop necessary skills for planning and organization of functions for effective
school management

Unit I - Teacher Education: Objectives and Growth

Teacher Education: Definition, scope, objectives, functions. Development of teacher
education in India - Types of Teacher Education Institutions: Primary, Secondary and
Tertiary levels (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit II -Academic and Administrative Functions of Teacher Education Institutions

Selection of Students: Conduct of tests viz. attitude, aptitude and achievement and
interviews- Evaluation of Teacher Education Curriculum - Curriculum development
in Teacher Education - Advanced methods of teaching adopted in Teacher Education -
ICT in the curriculum (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit III - Organization of Practice Teaching and Assessment

Different methods of practice teaching: model lessons, criticism lessons - Role of co-
operating schools, Trends in teacher preparation: Interaction analysis& micro-teaching
training and periodical assessment of cognitive and affective variables of teacher
trainees. Tools for assessment of teacher trainees and need for maintaining cumulative
records (L3, T8, P8 = 19 Hrs)

Page 28 of 42
Unit IV - Pre-Service and In-service Teacher Education Programmes
National Council for Teacher Education: Roles and responsibilities in Teacher
Education - Planning of Secondary and Elementary Teacher Education Institutions
with reference to infrastructural facilities and human resources - Criteria for
evaluating teacher education institutions - In-service Teacher Education: Objectives,
organization, methods and follow up actions (L3, T7, P7 = 17 Hrs)

Unit V - Research in Teacher Education

Research Programmes: Action Research, Experimental Projects and Major & Minor
Research Projects. Funding Agencies for Researches in Teacher Education: NCTE,
NCERT, UGC, DTERT, etc. Survey of Educational Researches conducted in India and
Abroad. Role played by University Departments in researches related to Teacher
Education (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

(Total = 84 Hours)

References
Anderson, L.W. (1995).International encyclopaedia of teaching and teacher education
(2nded.). Oxford: Elsevier Science.
Arora, G.L. (2002). Teachers and their teaching: need for new perspectives. New Delhi: Ravi
Books.
Joyce, B., & Weal, M. (2003). Modals of teaching (7thed.). Boston: Allyn& Bacon.
Lampert, M. (2001). Teaching problems and the problems of teaching. New Haven: Yale
University Press.
Linda, Darling, Hammond & John,Bransford. (2005). Preparing teachers for a changing
world. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
National Curriculum Frame Work Review. (2005).National focus groups – position paper
on teacher education.New Delhi: NCERT.
Ram, S. (1999).Current issues in teacher education.New Delhi: Sarup& Sons
Publications.
Ramanath,Kishan, N. (2007). Global trends in teacher education. New Delhi: APH
Publising Corporation.
Rao, V.K. and Reddy, R.S. (1992). Instructional objectives and teacher education.New
Delhi: Commonwealth Publishers.
Srivastava, R.C.& Bose, K. (1973). Theory and practice of teacher education in
India.Allahabad: Chug Publications.

Page 29 of 42
 12. EDUCATION FOR DIFFERENTLY ABLED
L T P C
2 2 2 4

Preamble: This paper enables to acquire knowledge about the differently abled
children and the label under which they are categorized. The problems of these
children are made clear and the need and significance of educating these children are
realized through this paper. Moreover the paper is also systematically designed how
to identify and detect the children with specific disabilities and how to sort
educational provisions to meet the unique needs of the children with disabilities.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 identify the types and categories of differently abled children;
 develop a favourable attitude towards differently abled children;
 develop an understanding of problems in educating these children; and
 appreciate the need, scope and significance of special educational treatments.

Unit I - Differently Abled Children

Meaning and definition of exceptional children - Types of Exceptional Children:
Intellectually Exceptional, Physically Exceptional, Emotionally Exceptional – Need
and significance of education of exceptional - Importance of early detection - Inclusive
and integrated education - Role of teachers working in inclusive settings
(L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit II - Education of the Intellectually Exceptional

Meaning, nature and characteristics of gifted, creative, backward, mentally retarded,
autism, and cerebral palsy - Identification, needs, problems and educational
provisions of Intellectually Exceptional Children (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit III - Education of the Physically and Emotionally Exceptional

Meaning of Physical disability – Causes, Educational provisions for Visually
impaired, hearing impaired children and children with learning disabilities – dyslexia,
dyscalculia, dysgraphia. Meaning of emotionally exceptional – Causes, provision and
treatment (L3, T7, P8 = 18 Hrs)

Page 30 of 42
Unit IV - Recent trends and issues in the Education of Differently AbledChildren
Need based and skill oriented education - Role of Educational Technology –
Computer assisted instruction, Tutorial, self-study and distance learning -Assistive
technology in special education - Use of hardware and software devices
(L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit V -Policies and Legislations

International and national legislations for education of children with special needs -
National policy on education with reference to Education of the exceptional learners -
Government schemes and provisions for children with special needs - Services and
programmes for the disabled – Research in Special Education (L3, T8, P7 = 18 Hrs)

(Total = 84 Hours)
References
Alice,Rajkumar, M., Rita,Sundari,D.,& Digumarti,Bhaskara,Rao, (2004).Special
education.New Delhi: Discovery Publishing House.
Bharat, Singh. (2008).Modern teaching of exceptional children.New Delhi: Anmol
Publications.
Chakraborty, Asok; Bhattacharjee, Amit et al., (2013). Principles of management in
employment of persons with mental retardation. New Delhi: Kanishka Publishers.
Chintamani,Kar. (2008).Exceptional children their psychology and education.New Delhi:
Sterling Publishers.
Dash, M. (2007).Education of exceptional children.New Delhi: Atlantic Publishers and
Distributors.
Dharma Raja, B. William., & Kumar, Praveen S. (2011). Special education: Focus on
mathematics learning disability. New Delhi: APH Publishing Corporation.
Kavitha, Jain. (2006).Special education. New Delhi: Mohit Publications.
Meenakumari. (2009).Education for the children with special needs.New Delhi: Centrum
Press.
Philip, E. Vernon, Georgina, Adamson & Dorothy, F. Vernon. (1977).The psychology
and education of gifted children.London: Methuen of Co.Ltd.
Prem,Prakash. (2008).Education of exceptional children challenges and strategies.New
Delhi: Kanishkha Publishers.
Saini, B. L. (2002). Education of exceptional children.Ludhiana: Tandon Publications.
Samuel, Kirk, James, J. Gallagher et al., (2009). Educating exceptional children. USA:
Wadsworth.

Page 31 of 42
 13. EDUCATIONAL POLICY, PLANNING AND FINANCING
L T P C
1 3 3 4

Preamble: Planned development of skills must be strengthened by a “policy”, which

is both comprehensive as well as national in character. Educational Planning in
India is one of the vital areas of concern in all the Five year Plans in India. With the
onset of globalization and modernization in recent times, education at all levels is very
necessary if India is to surpass other nations. Its purpose is to guide the skill
development strategies and coordinated action by all stake holders. It is also
important to refresh the knowledge of educational policies in the economic,
employment and social development arenas.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 enrich the knowledge of learners in educational policies
 understand the principles and theories in governance and planning of
educational organizations
 sensitize the learners the importance of leadership in the accomplishment of
educational goals and objectives
 acquire the importance of supervision, financing and budgeting to ensure
managerial effectiveness
 refresh the knowledge in the field of economic development

Unit I - Educational Policy before Independence

Policies of Educationin India – Macaulay’s Minute on Education (1835), Woods
Despatch (1854), Indian University Commission (1902), Calcutta University
Commission (1917-19), Hartog Committee (1928-29), Zakir Hussain Committee (1938),
Sargent Report (1944) (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit II- Educational Policy after Independence

University Education Commission (1948-49), Secondary Education Commission (1952
- 53), Education Commission (1964-66), National Policy of Education (1968),
Committee on Governance of Universities and Colleges (1969-73) - Development of
Higher Education in India: A policy framework (1978), National Commission on
Teachers I (1983–85), National Commission on Teachers II (1983-85), National Policy
on Education (1986), Programme of Action (1992), Women Education Commission,
National Knowledge Commission. RUSA in Higher Education (L3, T8, P8 = 19 Hrs)

Page 32 of 42
Unit III - Educational Planning
Educational Planning – Meaning, need and importance, areas of planning, salient
features, principles of educational planning - approaches to educational planning,
techniques of planning, execution and evaluation of planning - First exercise
Educational plan (1938 – 44) - Education in Five Year Plans, limitations and
suggestions for effective planning, role of government in education
(L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit IV - Financing in Education

Definition, meaning and principles of educational finance - Educational finance at
Macro and Micro levels – Budgeting: Steps in budget preparation, fund allocations
and expenditure, fund raising, accounting and auditing - Financial accountability
Systems - Educational Loans and Taxes (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit V - Economic Development in Education

Development of country’s economy, Social Relevance, Human resource development -
Financial resource: Procurement, utilization and maintenance of resources, allocation
of resources – Economic and social bases for allocation of resources in educations -
Cost benefit analysis and cost management (L3, T7, P7 = 17 Hrs)
(Total = 84 Hours)

References
Becker, G.W. (1964). Human capital. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Bell & Bell. (2006). Education, policy and social class. Routledge.
Blaug, Mark. (1970). Economics of education. London: Penguin.
Bowman, M.J. et al., (Eds). (1968). Readings in the Economic of Education. Paris:
UNESCO.
Harbison, F.H. &Myres, C.A. (1964). Education, man power and economic growth.
Maidenhead: McGraw - Hall.
Hedge, O. (1998). Economics of education. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishers.
Mathur, S.P. (2001). Financial administration and management. India: The Indian
Publications.
Mukhopadadyay, Mamar&Tyagi, R.S. (2005). Governance of school education inIndia.
New Delhi: NIEPA.
Pandit, H.S. (Ed). (1969). Measurement of cost productivity and efficiency of education. New
Delhi: NCERT.
Perlman, Richard. (1973).The economics of education: conceptual problems and policy
issues. New York: McGraw Hill Book Company.
Sacharopoulos, George, P. &Woodhall, M. (1985). Education for development: New York:
Columbia University Press.

Page 33 of 42
 14. TEACHER EDUCATION –II
L T P C
1 3 3 4
Preamble: By the end of the course, the scholar will be able to gain insight and reflect
on the concept of teaching and the status of teaching as a profession, understand the
roles and responsibilities of teachers and teacher educators. They will be able to
examine critically the growth and development of teacher education in the country
along with the various techniques for the evaluation of in-service teacher education
programmes reflecting the issues, concerns and problems ofpre-service and teacher in-
service education of the teachers.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 gain insight and reflect on the concept of teaching and the status of teaching as
a profession;
 understand the roles and responsibilities of teachers and teacher educators;
 prepare teachers for reflective teaching, critically examine the role and
contribution of various regulating bodies and support institutions for
improving quality of teacher’s education;
 critically examine the growth and development of teacher education in various
countries;
 adopt various methods and techniques for transaction of curriculum ;
 use various techniques for the evaluation of in-service teacher education
programmes; and
 reflect on issues, concerns and problems of teacher in-service education of the
teachers.

Unit I - Teachers and Teaching Profession

Teachers changing roles and responsibilities - Concept of Professionalism; Teaching as
a profession - Service conditions of school teachers - Professional ethics of teachers -
Social status of teachers; Teacher appraisal and accountability - Who is a Teacher
educator? - Roles and responsibilities of teacher educators - Preparation of teacher
educators - Continuing education of teacher educators: provisions for the continuing
education of teacher educators and institutional mechanism (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit II - Nature, Objectives, Structure and Models of Pre-Service Teacher Education

Recommendations of various commissions and committees concerning teacher
education system - Impact of NPE, 1986 and its POA on teacher education system -
The Centrally Sponsored Scheme for the Reconstructing and Strengthening of Teacher

Page 34 of 42
Education: Components of pre-service teacher education: foundational component,
specialization areas, practicum internship, co-curricular activities, working with the
community and work experience. Teacher education curriculum at different stages -
Models of Pre-service teacher education at secondary level: regular and distance mode
- Model of pre-service teacher education at elementary levels - Issues, concerns and
problems of pre-service teacher education (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit III - Curriculum transaction in Pre-service Teacher Education

Methods and Techniques: Lecture-cum-Discussion, Demonstration, Group
Discussion, Brain storming, Team Teaching, Use of ICT, Case analysis, reading and
review of original texts, projects and assignments - taxonomy formulating of
instructional objectives, unit planning, lesson planning, and teacher’s diary - School
Experience Programme (SEP)/Internship- Planning and organization of SEP -
Monitoring and supervision - Internship: concept; planning and organization - Critical
reflection as the central aim of teacher education (L3, T7, P7 = 17 Hrs)

Unit IV- Continuing Professional Development of the In-Service Teachers

Modes of Teaching: face to face, distance mode, eclectic mode. Assessment of training needs,
formulation of training curriculum, preparation of course materials - appraisal of course
materials - Issues, concerns and problems of Teachers’ In-service education - Split Model
followed in-service training of teacher under SSA - Professional development –Concept and
significance - Strategies of professional development: workshops, seminars, symposium,
panel discussion, conferences, self-study and study groups book clubs, extension lectures,
research colloquium, refresher courses, orientation programmes -Teacher learning resource
centre : functions – State Provisions for professional development of the teachers
(L3, T8, P8 = 19 Hrs)

Unit V - Innovations and Quality in Teacher Education

Innovations in teacher education – Integrated teacher education, comprehensive
teacher education - Teacher Effectiveness - ICT in Teacher education - Professional
competence of Teacher Educators – Assessment and Accreditation of teacher
education institutions (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

(Total = 84 Hours)

References
Mohammad,Miyan. (2004). Professionalization of teacher education. New Delhi:Mittal
Publications.
NCTE. (1998). Policy perspective in teacher education-critique and documentation. New
Delhi: NCTE.

Page 35 of 42
Ramanath, Kishan, N. (2007).Global trends in teacher education.New Delhi. APH
Publising Corporation.
Reimers, Eleonora, Villegas. (2003). Teacher professional development: An international
review of the literature. Paris: UNESCO: IIEP.
Sarita&Tomar, Monika. (2005).Teacher education, making education effective. Delhi: ISHA
Books.
Sharma, B.M. (2005). Teacher training and educational research. New
Delhi:Commonwealth Publications.
Siddiqui, M.A. (1993). In-service education of teachers.New Delhi: NCERT.
Singh, Yogesh Kumar. (2005). Teacher education. New Delhi: APH Publishing
Corporation.
Srivastave, Prakash, G.N. (2004). Perspectives in teacher education. New Delhi: Concept
Publishing Company.
The National Assessment and Accreditation Council, (2004). Innovations in teacher
education international practices of quality assurance. Bangalore: NAAC.

Page 36 of 42
 15. EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION
L T P C
1 3 3 4
Preamble: Evaluation is an indispensable component of the educational process,
which helps teachers and learners to improve teaching and learning. It is continuous
process not a periodic exercise. It helps in forming the values of judgment,
educational status, or achievements of students. It is desirable that teachers must
acquire knowledge and understanding about the various aspects of evaluation and its
application in classrooms. It provides students with the need, importance, concepts
and characteristics of educational evaluation.

Objectives:
After completing the course, the scholar will be able to -
 understand the difference between measurement and evaluation;
 develop skills in conducting internal assessment exams and external
assessment exams;
 apply the characteristics of an effective tool of evaluation to design a standard
question paper;
 utilize the recommendations of various commissions in the evaluation of
academic and non-academic development of learners;
 understand the specific uses of the different procedures of evaluation; and
 apply the various types of activities for the effective use of CCE techniques in
evaluating the primary level learners.

Unit I - Status of Evaluation

Educational evaluation in teaching learning process - Difference among measurement,
evaluation, assessment, testing, appraisal and examination - Tests and examinations -
Examination reforms - Norm-referenced testing & Criterion-referenced testing -
Formative and Summative Tests – Indicators of formative assessment - Cognitive and
Non-cognitive assessment of learning outcomes - Internal examination verses
External examinations (L3, T7, P7 = 17 Hrs)

Unit II - Procedure of Evaluation

Bloom’s taxonomy – Revised taxonomy of objectives 2001 – Oral test and Written test -
Different forms of test items – Framing test items and question papers– Diagnostic,

Page 37 of 42
Prognostic and Achievement test - Preparation of a Blue print - Preparing a good
question paper - Characteristics of a good test (L2, T7, P7 = 16 Hrs)

Unit III - System Assessment and Evaluation

Secondary Education Management Information System (SEMIS) - Evaluation of school
experience/internship programmes. Assessment of teaching proficiency: criterion,
tools and techniques. Organisation and regulation of internal assessment in PSTE:
Preparation of guidelines and scheme of internal assessment. Portfolio assessment -
Structure of MIS School mapping at secondary level - Course mapping at senior
secondary level (L2, T8, P7 = 17 Hrs)

Unit IV - Evaluation - Tools and Techniques

Testing and Non-testing tools of evaluation-essay type, short answer and objective
types of achievement test, observation, interview, rating scale, check list, attitude
scale, interest inventories, socio-metric techniques, anecdotal records, question bank,
grading (L2, T7, P8 = 17 Hrs)
Unit V - Current Trends in Evaluation
Computers in students’ evaluation – Electronic delivery of objective tests – Alternative
assessment – Rubrics - Assessment as an aspect of learning - Continuous and
Comprehensive Evaluation – Progress report and Cumulative record - Open book
examination (L3, T7, P7 = 17 Hrs)

(Total = 84 Hours)

References
Aggarwal, J.C. (2005). Essentials of examination system. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing
House.
Drummond, M.J. (1993). Assessing children’s learning. London: David Fulton.
Ebel, Robert L. &Fribie, David. A. (1991). Essentials of educational achievement. New
Delhi: Prentice-Hall of Hall.
Frey, B. (2014). Modern classroom assessment. California: Sage Publication.
Freeman, Richard & Lewis, Roger. (1998). Planning and implementing assessment.
London: Kogan Page.
GOI. (1991). Minimum levels of learning at primary stage. New Delhi: MHRD.
Gronlund, N.E. (1990). Measurement and evaluation in teaching (6thed.). New York: The
MacMillan.

Page 38 of 42
Lindgren, B, W. (1975). Basic ideas of statistics. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co.
Inc.
NCERT (1985). Contemporary issues in public examination. New Delhi: NCERT.
NCERT (1985). Handbook of continuous and comprehensive evaluation. New Delhi:
NCERT.
Shah, Beena (Ed.). (1988). Revamping the examination system. New Delhi: Northern Book
Cent.
Singh, Pritam. (2003). Dynamics of a question. New Delhi: Doaba House.


Page 39 of 42
 16. BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION
L T P C

4 1 0 4

UNIT I: FUNDAMENTALS OF BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION

Basic concepts of Behaviour Modification, Definition and goal; Learning, Biological &
Cognitive Foundations; meaning of Behavioral Assessment, Behavior Analysis and
Formulation: desirable and undesirable behaviour – overt and covert - Deficit & Excess –
normal & deviant – Conceptual issues: antecedents, consequences, stimulus control,
generalization and discrimination;
(12L)
UNIT II: CLASSICAL CONDITIONING TECHNIQUES
Relaxation Techniques - Systematic Desensitization – Covert & Overt Conditioning -
Flooding – Shaping
(12L)
UNIT III: OPERANT CONDITIONING TECHNIQUES
Aversion Therapy – Thought Stopping - Time out - Token Economy, Shaping, Chaining,
Premack’s Principle, Prompting and Fading - Biofeedback.
(13L)
UNIT IV: SOCIAL & COGNITIVE LEARNING TECHNIQUES
Organizational & Clinical Behaviour Modification Models: Role Play &Behavioural
Rehearsal – Psychodrama - Modelling - Meichenbaum’s Self- Instruction Training-
Assertion Training
(13L)
UNIT V: APPLICATIONS & ETHICAL ISSUES
Application of Behavioural Modification techniques in Industrial / Organisational setting
– Institutional setting – Social setting.
(10L)
(Total 60L)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Milternberger, R. (2007). Behaviour modification: Principles and procedures. 4th ed. Cengage
Learning.
2. Jena, SPK. (2008). Behaviour Therapy: Techniques, Research and Applications. Sage
Publications, New Delhi.
3. Fisher, W. W., Piazza, C. C., & Roane, H. S. (2011). Handbook of applied behaviour analysis. The
Guilford Press, London.
REFERENCES
1. Sundel&Sundel (1990). Behavior change in the Human Services, 4th edition, Thousan
Oaks: Sage Publications.

Page 40 of 42
 17. PSYCHOTHERAPY
L T P C

4 1 0 4

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Definition – Goals of Psychotherapy – Professional issues – Personal characteristics of
therapists – common and unique features of Psychotherapies – Psychotherapy in India
(10L)
UNIT II: PSYCHOANALYSIS
Psycho-Dynamic therapies – Indications and evaluations – Neo-Freudian approaches –
Group therapy - Current status and evaluation
(12L)
UNIT III: HUMANISTIC – EXISTENTIALISTIC THERAPIES
Person-centred therapy – Gestalt therapy – Transactional analysis – Reality therapy –
Existential therapy – Logotherapy– Current status and evaluation
(12L)
UNIT IV: COGNITIVE BEHAVIOUR THERAPIES
Behaviour therapy – Rational Emotive behaviour therapy – Cognitive therapy – Current
status and evaluation
(11L)
UNIT V: POSTMODERN THERAPIES
Solution-focused therapy – Brief therapy – Narrative therapy - Eclecticism– Current
status and evaluation
(10L)
(Total 45L)
TEXT BOOKS
1. Corey, G. (2009). Theory and Practice of Counselling & Psychotherapy. 8th ed.
Thomson Brooks/Cole.
2. Nelson-Jones, R. (2014). Theory and Practice of Counselling &Psychotherapy. 6th
ed. Sage, New Delhi.
3. Kottler, J. A., & Montgomery, M. J. (2011). Theories of Counselling and Therapy: an
experimental approach. 2nd ed. Sage, New Delhi.

REFERENCES
1. Nelson-Jones, R. (2005). Practical Counselling and Helping Skills, 5th Edition, Sage,
New Delhi.
2. Nelson-Jones, R. (2005). Theory and Practice of Counselling, 5th Edition, Sage, New
Delhi.

Page 41 of 42
 18. PSYCHOLOGY OF ADDICTION

L T P C

4 1 0 4
UNIT 1: NATURE AND SCOPE OF ADDICTION
Definition, nature and characteristics; scope of addiction in the field of
health care; Non legal and illicit drugs of abuse; DSM criteria for substance dependence and
abuse; Demographic & Epidemiological Considerations
(8L)
UNIT 2: THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES
Biological, Psychological, Cognitive, Socio-cultural and Integrative Perspectives
(8L)
UNIT 3: STIMULANTS & DEPRESSENTS
Stimulant – related disorders – Tobacco – Caffeine
Depressant – related disorders – Alcohol - Sedatives
(10L)
UNIT 4: OTHER DRUGS OF ABUSE
Opioids – Cannabis - Hallucinogens
(10L)
UNIT 5: SUBSTANCE DEPENDENCE AND ITS MANAGEMENT
Prediction & prevention; Assisting change; Preventing relapse, anonymous and support groups –
Pathological gambling: Law and regulations – Internet Addiction: causes, signs and symptoms.
(9L)
(Total 45L)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Barlow, D. H., & Durand, V. M. (2016). Abnormal Psychology. 6th ed. Cengage, India.
2. Woolfe, R. Dryden, W. (1996). Handbook of Counseling Psychology, London, Sage
Publishers.
3. Carson & Butcher (1998). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Pearson Publishers.
4. Taylor, S.E. (2006). Health psychology, 6th Ed. Tata Mc.Graw Hill Edition, New Delhi.
5. Corner, R.J. (1995). Abnormal Psychology, 2nd Ed. NY: W.H. Freeman & Co.

REFERENCES:
1. Velleman, R. (2001). Counseling for Alcohol Problems, 2nd Ed. London, Sage.
2. World Health Organisation. ICD-10. Classification of Mental and Behavioral Disorders.
3. Woolman, B.B. (1965). Handbook of Clinical Psychology, London, Pergaman Press.

Page 42 of 42
 COURSE - I
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble
The course is designed to create academic researchers as well as professionals who are capable of
conducting policy analysis, relating to National and Global economic and development issues from
quantitative and inter-disciplinary perspectives. While an interdisciplinary approach is encouraged,
the programme lays somewhat larger emphasis on economics to provide an integrated framework
within which various development issues can be addressed.

Objectives:
1. To train the research scholars to use the techniques of statistical analysis, which are
commonly applied to understand and analyze economic problems.
2. To learn robust statistical and econometrics tools and techniques for research analysis.

Module I: Research Methods (10 L)

Social Research – Nature, Scope, Uses and Major steps – Pure, Applied and Action Research –
Scientific Method: Theory and Facts – Formulation of a Research problem – Hypothesis: Types,
Sources and Characteristics of a good hypothesis.

Module II: Research Design (12 L)

Need and Types of Research Design – Exploratory, Descriptive, Diagnostic and Experimental
Design – Sampling Design: Probability Sampling, Simple Random, Systematic, Stratified and
Multistage or Cluster Sampling, Non Probability Sampling – Purposive, Judgment, Quota and
convenience sampling – Data Collection – Primary and Secondary methods – Observation,
Document, Case Study and Survey – Schedule and Questionnaire – Construction and Requisites of
a Good Questionnaire – Mechanics of Thesis writing – Format of a Research Report – Footnotes
and Reference.

Module III: Descriptive Statistical (12 L)

Presentation of data – Editing, coding and tabulating data – Diagrammatic and Graphic
representation of data – Processing data – Averages: Mean, Median, Mode and Weighted average –
Merits and Demerits – Dispersion: Range, Standard deviation, Co-efficient of variation and Gini
Ratio – Skewness, Pearson‘s and Bowley‘s coefficient of skewness.

Module IV: Statistical Methods (14 L)

Correlation – Simple, Partial and Multiple – Pearson‘s coefficient of correlation and Rank
correlation – Regression: Simple, Linear and non-linear regression – Multiple regression – Probit
model and Logit model – Time Series Analysis – Components and Uses – Methods of estimation
trend and seasonal variation – Scaling techniques – Types – Reliability and validity – doctometry –
Statistical Packages in Computer – Interpretation of SPSS Package output relevant for Multivariate
analysis Logit model.
Module V: Statistical Inference (12 L)
Steps in testing of hypothesis – Large sample Z – Test – Uses and Simple problems – ‗t‘ Test:
Assumptions, Properties and Applications and Simple problems – ‗F‘ Test Assumptions, Properties
and Applications and Simple problems, Chi-square [χ2] Test: Assumptions, Properties and
applications and non parametric tests – ‗U‘ test and ‗H‘ test.

References:

Basic Reading list:

1. Elhance, D.N.(2000), Fundamentals of Statistics, Allahabad; Kitab Mahal.
2. S.P. Gupta (2001), Statistical Methods, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi.
3. Kothari, C.R (1998), Research Methodology, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Wilkision and Bhandarkar (1991), Methodology and techniques of social Research, Himalaya
Publishing House, Bombay.
Additional Reading List:

1. Eari Babbie (1975), Practice of Social Research, Wadsworth Publishers, New York.
2. Ferber and Verdoon (1962), Research Methods in Economics and Business, Macmillan,
New York.
3. Goode and Halt (1987), Methods in Social Research, MoCraw Hill, London.
4. Kurein, C.T. (1973), Research Methods in Economics, Madras Sangam Publisher.
5. Moser, C.A. and Kolton, C (1980) Survey Educational Methods in Social investigation,
investigation, Heinemann Educational Books, London.
6. Sonachalam, K.S. (1978), Research methodology in Social Science, Kadayam, Tamilnadu.
7. Shanmugasundaram, V. (1974), Papers on the Methodology of Research in Social Sciences,
University of Madras, Chennai.
8. Sitaram Pillai (1989), Basic Statistic, Progressive Publishers, Chennai.
 COURSE - II
BASIC CONCEPTS AND THEORIES IN ECONOMICS
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

The objective of this course is the make the students aware of the fundamentals of economics and
also the contemporary issues of social and water Irrigation in India. This course will help the student
in deciding their area of research interest.

Objectives:

1. To learn basic concepts and theories of economics will gain the importance because of
sustained interest of the developing countries in uplifting their economic condition by
restructuring their economies to greater diversity, efficiency and equity in consonance with
their priorities.

Unit I Basic Economics (12 L)

Demand and Supply, Concept of Elasticity, Movement along the curve versus shift of the curve -
Basic Utility Theory, Indifference Curves- Production Function, Average Cost, Marginal Cost,
Short run, Long run cost curves- Perfect Competition and Monopoly- National Income (GDP,
GNP) and multipliers, inflation, price index number.

Unit II Micro Economics (12 L)

Consumer Behaviour - Production and Costs - Markets – Perfect Competition, Monopoly,
Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly - Theory of Distribution/ Theory of Factor Market.

Unit III Macro Economics (12 L)

National Income Accounting Methods - Classical Model, Keynesian Model, IS-LM Model, Fiscal
and Monetary Policies - Solow Growth Model - Inflation, Index Numbers - Exchange Rate
Systems - Balance of Payments Account - Keynesian Multipliers in an Open Economy - Structural
Reforms - Indian Money Market and RBI‘s Monetary Policy.

Unit IV Social Issues (12 L)

Discrimination, the market, statistical discrimination, minimum wage, gender discrimination,
exclusion - Income inequality and poverty, causes of income inequality and poverty (inflation)
income distribution over time, the official poverty rate - Unemployment, measurement, types and
cost of unemployment, interpreting the unemployment rate, social security - Governance and
Corruption.

Unit V Water Irrigation and Pricing (12 L)

Irrigation development in post-independence India - Interlinking of rivers - Water shed
development - Impact of irrigation development in agriculture- Ground water market - Efficiency
and equity in water use - Political economy of water pricing.
References:

Unit I Suggested readings

 Mankiw G N. Principles of Macroeconomics. 6th ed. South Western, 2012.

 Robert S Pindyck & Daniel L Rubinfeld. Microeconomics. 7 th ed. Dorling Kindersley (RS),
2008.

Unit II Suggested readings

 Hal R. Varian. Microeconomic Analysis. 3rd ed. Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited,
2005.
 Anna Koutsoyiannis. Modern Microeconomics. 2nd ed. Macmillan India Limited.

Unit III Suggested readings

 Rudiger Dornbusch & Stanley Fischer. Macroeconomics 6th ed. Tata Mcgraw Hill Education
Private Limited, 2005.
 William H. Branson. Macroeconomic Theory & Policy 3rd ed. East-West Press, 2005.

Unit IV Suggested readings

 Pissarides, C A, Equilibrium Unemployment Theory, MIT Press 2000.
 Menger, Carl (1976), Principles of Economics, New York University Edition
 Marshall, Alfred (1890), Principles of Economics: An Introductory Volume
 Mankiw, N Gregory (2009), Principles of Economics, 6th edition, South Western Cengage
Learning, USA.

Unit V Suggested readings

 Vaidyanathan A. (2006) ―India‘s water resources – Contemporary issues on irrigation‖,
Oxford University press, New Delhi.
 Vaidyanathan A. (2013) Water resources of India, Oxford University Press.
 Ariel Dinar and Ashok Subramanian ―Water Pricing Experiences – An International
Perspective‖ World Bank, Washington, D.C.
 Hellergers P.J.G.J. and Perry C.J (2004) ―Water as an Economic Good in Irrigated
Agriculture: Theory and Practice‖ The Hague, Agricultural Economics Research Institute.
 Subranmanian Asok, VijayJaganathan N. and Ruth Merinzen Dick ―User Organizations for
sustainable water services‖ World Bank technical paper no. 354, The Worl Bank,
Washingion D.C.
 Bhattarai, M A Narayanamoorthy and Randolf Barker (2006) ―Direct and Total Benefits of
irrigation in India and Its Implications to Irrigation Financing and Cost Recovery‖,
International Association of Agricultural Economists, Australia.
 COURSE – III (Optional Papers)
1. AGRICULTURE AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

The place of agriculture and rural economics in the overall economic literature is unique in the
context of the Indian economy. The development programmes in India are centered around the
rural area. The paper is intended to highlight the working and significance of the rural economy
along with the institutional involvement in implementing the government programmes. Agriculture,
allied sectors, the non-farm sector and Co-operative movement is the thrust area of the paper.

Objectives:

1. To enable the learners to know about preparation of plan and management of agricultural
and rural development
2. To acquaint the learners with the different strategies adopted by the Government of India
for enabling financial resources for agriculture and rural development.

Unit I Agriculture and Economic Development (12 L)

Nature and scope of agricultural and rural economics; Traditional agriculture and its modernization;
Role of agriculture in economic development; Interdependence between agriculture and industry —
some empirical evidence; Agricultural development, poverty and environment. Land Reforms and
Land Policy

Unit II Agricultural Growth in India (12 L)

Recent trends in agricultural growth in India; Inter-regional variations in growth of output and
productivity; Cropping pattern shifts; Supply of inputs — Irrigation, power, seed and fertilizers;
Pricing of inputs and role of subsidies; Role of Public investment and capital formation in Indian
agriculture; Agricultural and non agricultural pricing policies in India. Food security issue and Public
distribution system, Recent initiative for second green revaluation, Globalization of Indian economy
and problems and prospects of Indian agriculture; Impact of World Trade Organization on Indian
agriculture.

Unit III Agricultural Transformation and Rural Economy (12 L)

Role of agriculture in rural economic development, rural credit markets, Micro Finance in India:
Microfinance and rural development, SHGs-Bank Linkage Programmes and emerging scenario of
Microfinance regulation in India, Causes and effects of rural urbanization Migration, Harris-Todaro
model of rural-urban migration, Agricultural wages in India; Non-agricultural rural employment-
Trends and determinants.

Unit IV Diversification of Rural Economy (12 L)

Diversification of Agriculture-Dairy Farming, Horticulture, Floriculture, Fishery, and Farm
Forestry; Rural Industrialisation- Importance, Programmes, Progress and Problems of Small- Scale
and Cottage Industries and Remedial Measures. Rural social infrastructure: issues and problems in
Educational and Health infrastructure; Housing and Sanitation; Drinking Water Supply; Rural
Transport and Communication; Rural Electrification.
Unit V Agricultural Finance (12 L)
Need for Agricultural Finance – Non-institutional sources of Agricultural Finance: Money Lenders-
Traders commission Agency – Land Lords – Institutional Sources of Agricultural Finance:
Cooperative Banks, Commercial Banks, NABARD, RRBs.

Reading List:

1. Biradar, R.R.(2008): Rural Non-Agricultural Employment in India: An Analysis of Its

Determinants and Impact on Poverty and Inequality, Concept Publishing Company, New
Delhi
2. Chadha, G. K. and A. N. Sharma (Eds) (1997): Growth, Employment and Poverty: Change
and Continuity in Rural India, D K Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Chambers, R. (1983): Rural Development: Putting the Last First, Longman, Harlow.
4. Dandekar, V.M. and N. Rath (1971): Poverty in India, GIPE, Pune.
5. Dantwala, M. L. (1973): Poverty in India: Then and Now, 1870-1970, Macmillan, Bombay.
6. Dantwala, M. L. and Others (Ed) (1986): Indian Agricultural Development since
Independence: A Collection of Essays, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co.Pvt. LTd. New
Delhi.
7. Gupta. K .R. (Ed) (2003): Rural Development in India, Atlantic Publishers and Distributors,
New Delhi.
8. Jain, Gopal Lal (1997): Rural Development, Mangal Deep Publications, Jaipur,.
9. Singh, Katar (1986): Rural Development: Principles, Polices and Management, Sage
Publications, New Delhi, (Second Edition).
10. Karalay, G. N. (2005): Integrated Approach to Rural Development: Polices, Programmes
and Strategies, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi
11. Maheshwari, S. R. (1985): Rural Development in India, Sage, Publications New Delhi.
12. Satya Sundaram, I. (1997): Rural Development, Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi.
13. Mehta, Shiv R. (1984): Rural Development Polices and Programmes, Sage Publications, New
Delhi.
14. Srinivasan, T. N. and P. K. Bardhan (Eds) (1974): Poverty and Income Distribution in India,
Statistical Publishing Society, Calcutta.
15. Tyagi, B. P. (1998): Agricultural Economics and Rural Development, Jai Prakash Math and
Co., Meerut.
16. Visaria, P. and R. Basant Ed) (1994): Non-Agricultural Employment in India: Trends and
Prospects, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
 2. ECONOMICS OF INFRASTRUCTURE AND DEVELOPMENT
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

The important role infrastructure plays in a country‘s development need not be reiterated. In case of
developing countries, lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major obstacle to growth.
Of the various categories of infrastructure, the category of social overhead capital has gained
particular prominence. The contents of the paper ‗Economics of Infrastructure‘ exposes the student
wholly to issues involved in development of infrastructure in developing countries like India.

Objectives:

1. To study the role of infrastructure plays in a country‘s development need not be reiterated.
2. To expose the students wholly the lack of adequate infrastructure has been held as a major
obstacle to growth in developing countries like India.

I Infrastructure and Economic Development – Concepts (12 L)

Definition, Meaning, Classification of infrastructure (Social and Economic Infrastructure);
Infrastructure and economic development — Infrastructure as a public good; Special characteristics
of public utilities. The peak-load, Off-Load Problem, Dual Principle Controversy; Economies of
scale of Joint supply; Marginal Cost Pricing vs. other methods of pricing in public utilities; Cross-
subsidization — free prices, equity and efficiency. Urban and Rural Infrastructure schemes in India
– PURA; Spatial aspects of development and linkages with infrastructure.

II Physical Infrastructure – I (Energy, Electricity, Gas and water Supply) (14 L)

Primacy of Energy in the Process of Economic Development. Factors Determining Demand for
Energy; Effects of Energy Shortages. Energy Conservation. Renewable and Non-conventional
Sources of Energy. Energy Modelling. The Search for an Optimal Energy Policy in the Indian
Context- Electricity, Gas and Water Supply: Bulk Supply and Pricing of Electricity. The Relative
Economics of Thermal, Hydel and Nuclear Power Plants. The Case for a National Power Grid.
Financing Water Utilities. Urban and Rural Water Supply. The Exploitation of Natural Gas. Pricing
Problem.

III Physical Infrastructure – II (Transport & Communication) (14 L)

Significance of Transport Infrastructure; Factors affecting Transport Network – Growth and
Present status of Transport System in India; Impact of Transport Development on location of
economic activities; Transport Sector Reforms in India Postal and Telegraph. Telecommunication
and Information Technology; Major issues in IT – Growth and present status of IT industry in
India; Implications for Regional Development

IV Social and Tourism Infrastructure (10 L)

Growth and present status of Social Infrastructure – Education, Health, Housing and Banking &
Insurance; Impact of Social Infrastructure on Human and Economic Development, and
development of social services in Indian plans-tourism and economic development - role of state in
promoting tourism - tourism planning - infrastructural requirements for marketing tourism.
V Infrastructure Demand & Financing (10 L)
Demand Simulation for Infrastructure; Financing Needs; Infrastructure Financing in Plan Period;
Infrastructure Financing in Recent Times; Privatization of Infrastructure and PPP Models;
Implications for Infrastructural Development.

References:

1. Baru, R.V. (1998), Private Health Care in India : Social Characteristics and Trends, Sage
Publications, New Delhi.
2. Becker, G.S. (1974), Human Capital (2nd Edition), National Bureau of Economic Research,
New York.
3. Berman, P. and M.E. Khan (1993), Paying for India‘s Health Care, Sage Publications, New
Delhi.
4. Centre for Monitoring Indian Economy (1996), India : Energy Sector, CMIE, Mumbai.
5. Crew, M.A. and P.R. Kleindorfer (1979), Public Utility Economics, Macmillan, London.
6. Indian Council of Social Sciences Research (ICSSR) (1976), Economics of Infrastructure
Vol. VI, New Delhi.
7. McMohan, W.W. (1999), Education and Development : Measuring the Social Benefits,
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
8. National Council of Applied Economic Research (NCAER) (1996), India Infrastructure
Report : Policy Implications for Growth and Welfare, NCAER, New Delhi.
9. Parikh, J. (Ed.) (1997), Energy Models for 2000 and Beyond, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
10. Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1997), India Development Report 1997, Oxford, New Delhi.
11. Parikh, K.S. (Ed.) (1999), India Development Report — 1999-2000, Oxford, New Delhi.

3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND RESOURCE ECONOMICS

Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

Due to the speedy growth of industries and population there is an increasing demand for the
environmental resources. The free goods in the nature have now become the priced goods in the
economy. The various types of pollutions have created the problems to the human beings as well as
the biosphere. The quality of environmental resources is being fastly deteriorated. This paper would
enable the students to know about the relationship between environment and economy, global
Issues relating to environmental problems, policies and protection.

Objectives:

1. To learn the environmental degradation can very badly affect all living things coupled with
human beings in particular and it should be resorted to achieve sustainable development.
2. To undertake research pertaining to economic aspects of environment and development.
Unit I Introduction to Environmental Economics (12 L)

Basic concepts of Environmental Economics, Economy-Environment interaction, Market failure,

Property rights, Open access resources, Collective action, Environment and development trade-off,
Environmental Kuznet‘s curve.

Unit II Economics of Exhaustible and Renewable Resources (14 L)

Basic concepts - Hotelling's rule, Solow-Harwick's rule, Market structure and optimal extraction
policy, Uncertainty and the rate of resource extraction, Resource scarcity; Economic models of
forestry and fisheries, Economics of biodiversity.

Unit III Environmental Valuation (10 L)

Market and non-market valuation; Physical linkage methods; Revealed and stated preference
methods, Hicksian equivalence, Exposure to the type of models.

Unit IV Environmental Policy (10 L)

Command and control versus market mechanisms; Uncertainty and instrument choice, Regulatory
compliance and enforcement, Eco-taxes and other fiscal measures.

Unit V Global Environmental Issues (14 L)

Trans-boundary pollution, economics of global warming, Climate change negotiations, Kyoto

protocol, Impact of trade on environment and environment on trade, Porter's hypothesis, Pollution
havens hypothesis.

Suggested Readings

1. Kolstad, C., Environmental Economics, Oxford University Press, 2000.

2. Baumol, W.J, and W.E. Oates, The Theory of Environmental Policy, Cambridge University
Press, 1988.
3. Freeman, A. M., The Measurement of Environmental and Resource Values, 2nd Edition,
Resources for the Future, 2003.
4. Hanley, N., J.F. Shogren, and B. White, Environmental Economics: In Theory and Practice,
Macmillan India Ltd., 1997.
 4. FINANCIAL ECONOMICS
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

The positive and significant role of finance in the process of growth and development has been very
well recognized in the literature and indeed has become more important during the last two decades
as the financial systems of different countries have become integrated in the process of
globalization. India is no exception and has taken far reaching measures since 1991 in this direction.
This paper focuses on the financial system and its relationship with the financial markets both at the
national and international levels.

Objectives:

1. To develop an understanding of the basic principles of financial economics and also to

improve student‘s analytical skills and ability to solve financial market problems.
2. To learn in-depth concepts financial system and its relationship with the financial markets
both at the national and international levels.

Unit I Introduction (10 L)

Nature and Scope of Financial Economics; Basic financial concepts, Economics of capital
Budgeting; Investment Criteria, Estimation of project Cash Flows, Risk Analysis.

Unit II Financial System (14 L)

Financial System-Meaning, constituents, functions and importance of financial system; Indian
Banking System: Banking structure in India, Structure and functions of commercial banks;
Functions of Central bank, Monetary policy and Central bank; Money market: Introduction,
Treasury bills, Commercial paper, Certificates of deposit; Call money market, Money market mutual
funds; Capital market: Primary market-shares and debentures-Types and their issuance; Secondary
market- Stock exchange - Stock market indices, Methods of trading; Reforms in the Indian stock
market; Role of SEBI, Debt market: Introduction; Private corporate debt market, Government
securities market; Capital asset pricing model; Arbitrage pricing theory; Stock market efficiency.

Unit III Security Analysis (14 L)

Price-value interaction model- Buy-sell decision rules, information traders and liquidity traders,
Samuelson‘s continuous equilibrium, Passive and Aggressive trading. Risk and Return: Expected
return and variances-portfolios systematic and unsystematic risk-diversification and portfolio risk
Mean- Variance Criterion -systematic risk and beta-efficient frontier characteristic lines- optimum
portfolio -capital asset pricing model, arbitrage pricing theory, Valuation: Bond valuation-equity
valuation.

Unit IV Systems of Financial Markets (10 L)

Spot Markets – Contingent Claims Markets – Arrow Securities – Ordinary Securities Markets –
Incomplete Markets – Financial Markets and Financial Intermediaries.

Unit V Firms and Financial Markets (12 L)

Firms and Stock Market Equilibrium – Separation of Ownership and Control – Financial Structure
of the Firm – Insurance Markets – Debt Contracts – Credit Rationing.
Suggested Readings:

1. Bhole, L M, Financial Institutions and Markets: Structure, Growth and Innovations, Fourth
Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2004.
2. Brealey, R. and S. Myers, Principles of Corporate Finance, Fifth edition, New York, McGraw
Hill, 1997.
3. Copeland, T. E. and J. F. Weston, Financial Theory and Corporate Policy, Addison Wesley,
1992.
4. Elton, E.J and M.J. Gruber, Modern Portfolio Theory & Investment Analysis, Fourth
edition, John Wiley & Sons 1991.
5. Houthakker, H.S. and P.J. Williamson, Economics of Financial Markets, Oxford University
Press, 1996.
6. Khan, M Y, Indian Financial System, Seventh edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.,
New Delhi, 2009.
7. Copeland T.E., J. F. Weston and K. Shastri (2005): Financial Theory and Corporate Policy,
Fourth Edition, Pearson Addison-Wesley USA.
8. Cuthbertson, K, (1996): Quantitative Financial Economics: Stocks, Bonds and Foreign
Exchange, John Wiley and Sons, USA
9. Eichberger J. and I.R. Harper (1997): Financial Economics, Oxford University Press, New
York.
10. Tuckman, B. (1995), Fixed Income Securities – Tools for Today‘s Markets, Wiley Frontiers
in Finance.
11. Zvi Bodie, Alex Kane and Alan J. Marcus, Investments, 8th edition, ISBN: 0-07- 338237-X,
McGraw-Hill.

5. GENDER ECONOMICS
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

Gender biases in societal practices and development policies have resulted in persistent gender
inequalities. It is increasingly being realized that mitigating such inequalities and enhancing women‘s
capabilities and entitlements are crucial to the overall development of the country. This course
―Economics of Gender and Development‖ would provide students an understanding of the nature
of the economic role of women and their contribution to the national economy on the basis of a
scientific and non-sexist analysis. The modules incorporated in this course provide an analysis of
issues at the theoretical level and also with regard to specificity of issues prevailing in the Indian
context.

Objectives:

1. To understand the nature of the economic role of women and their contribution to the
national economy on the basis of women-social nexus analysis.
2. To analyze the various modules related to gender and development, especially with reference
to India.
Unit I Introduction and Review (10 L)

Families and households, Importance and concepts of women studies — Women in patriarchal and
matriarchal societies and structures, patrilineal and matrilineal systems and relevance to present day
society in India, Gender bias in the theories of value, distribution, and population, Women in the
economic history , Race, class, and the economics of gender , The economics of gay identity
D'Emilio

Unit II Demography (10 L)

Demography of female population: Age structure, mortality rates, and sex ratio — Causes of
declining sex ratios and fertility rates in LDCs and particularly India — Theories and measurement
of fertility and its control; Women and their access to nutrition, health, education, and social and
community resources, and their impact on female mortality and fertility, economic status, and in
work participation rate.

Unit III Women in Decision Making (12 L)

Factors affecting decision making by women; property rights, access to and control over economic
resources, assets; Power of decision making at household, class, community level; Economic status
of women and its effect on work-participation rate, income level, health, and education in
developing countries and India; Role of kinship in allocating domestic and social resources.

Unit IV Gender and the Economics of the Labor Market (14 L)

Labour force participation patterns, Labour force participation and family structure Factors affecting
female entry in labour market; Supply and demand for female labour in developed and developing
countries, particularly India; Studies of female work participation in agriculture, non-agricultural
rural activities, informal sector, cottage and small-scale industries, organized industry, and services
sector; Discrimination : Labour market biases and gender discrimination Compensating Differentials
: Wage differentials in female activities; Determinants of wage differentials; gender, education, skill,
productivity, efficiency, opportunity; Structures of wages across regions and economic sectors.
Feminisation of the economic sector, Human Capital,

Unit V Social Security and Social Protection for Women (14 L)

Social security of women: entitlements, ensuring economic independence and risk coverage, access
to credit and insurance markets; Role of voluntary organizations, self-help groups in providing social
security; effectiveness of collective bargaining; Review of legislation for women‘s entitlements,
protection of property rights, social security — Schemes for safety net for women; Need for female
labour unions; affirmative action for women and improvement in their economic and social status-
Gender and development indices; Mainstreaming gender into development policies; Gender
planning techniques; Gender sensitive governance; Paradigm shifts from women‘s wellbeing to
women‘s empowerment; Democratic decentralization (panchayats) and women‘s empowerment in
India, Gender Budgeting.
Suggested Books and Readings

Books:

 Blau, Francine, Marianne Ferber and Anne Winkler 1998. The Economics of Men,Women
and Work (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, Third Edition). (BFW)
 Boserup E. (1970), Women‘s Role in Economic Development, George Allen and Unwin,
London.
 Desai, N. and M.K. Raj. (Eds.) (1979), Women and Society in India, Research Centre for
Women Studies, SNDT University, Bombay.
 Government of India (1974), Towards Equality — Report of the Committee on the Status
of Women in India, Department of Social Welfare, Ministry of Education and Social
Welfare,New Delhi.
 Hoffman, Saul D. and Susan L. Averett 2004. Women and the Economy: Family, Work and
Pay (Addison-Wesley-Longman). (HA)
 Krishnaraj, M., R.M. Sudarshan and A. Shariff (1999), Gender, Population and
Development,Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
 Jacobsen, Joyce P.. 1998. The Economics of Gender, 2nd edition, New York: Blackwell.
 Jacobsen, Joyce. 1998. The Economics of Gender (Cambridge: Blackwell, 2nd Edition).(On
reserve at Odegaard).
 Stack, Carol B. 1974. All Our Kin: Strategies For Survival in a Black Community. New York,
NY: Harper & Row.
 Seth, M. (2000), Women and Development : The Indian Experience, Sage Publications, New
Delhi. Economics 179
 Srinivasan K. and A. Shroff (1998), India : Towards Population and Development
Goals,Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
 Venkateswaran, S. (1995), Environment, Development and the Gender Gap, Sage
Publications, New Delhi.
 Wazir, R. (2000), The Gender Gap in Basic Education : NGOs as Change Agents, Sage
Publications, New Delhi.

Readings:

 D'Emilio, John. 1993. "Capitalism and Gay Identity," reprinted in The Lesbian and Gay
Studies Reader, Henry Abelove, et. al., eds., New York: Routledge.
 Ehrenreich, Barbara and Deirdre English. 1973. "Women and the Rise of the American
Medical Profession," reprinted in Wendy McElroy, ed., Freedom, Feminism, and the State,
2nd edition, New York: Holmes and Meier, 1991.
 Hochschild, Arlie Russel. 1989. The Second Shift, New York: Avon, chapter 4.
 McKenzie, Richard and Gordon Tullock. 1975. The New World of Economics, Homewood,
IL: Richard Irwin, chapter 9.
 Rhoads, Steven E.. 1993. Incomparable Worth: Pay Equity Meets the Market, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, chapter 2.
  Robinson, John P. and Melissa A. Milkie. 1998. "Back to Basics: Trends in and Role
Determinants of Women's Attitudes Toward Housework," Journal of Marriage and the
Family 60, February: 205-18.
 Segalen, Martine. 1996. "The Industrial Revolution: From Proletariat to Bourgeoisie," in
Andre Barguiere, et. al., eds, Sarah Hamburg Tenison, trans., A History of the Family vol. 2,
Cambdrige, MA: MIT Press.
 Walker, Deborah. 1995. "Feminism and Economics: Legislation or Markets?" in Rita J.
Simon, ed., Neither Victim nor Enemy, Lanham, MD: Women's Freedom Network and
University Press of America.

Videos:

 1900 House (selected episodes). Shown on the campus network

6. HEALTH ECONOMICS
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

Health status of the population forms a major variable in measuring the Human Development
Index. Health infrastructure provisions both public and private sector assumes significance in the
overall health policy of a country. The present paper analyses the national health scene, correlation
of health output and input indicators with level of economic development. Resource allocation in
the health sector both public and private sector, evaluation of benefits and costs of health services,
financing of health services and role of government and institutions also is examined.

Objectives:

1. To enable the learners to understand of the interplay between demographic processes and
economic development.
2. To acquaint the learners to gain a sound command over the basic tenets of demography as
well as key demographic issues and illustrations in India‘s context.

Unit I Introduction to Health Economics (12 L)

Defining Health Economics. Importance of Health Economics – Essential Features. Basic concepts
of health economics: Health, Health Care, Birth rate, Fertility rate, Death rate, IMR, CMR, MMR,
Morbidity rate (Acute and Chronic), Disability Adjusted Life Year (DALY), Quality Adjusted Life
Year (QUALY), Sex Ratio.

Unit II Demand for Health and Health Care (12 L)

Welfare economics of medical care, production of health, demand for health and health care, equity,
efficiency and the need, link between development and health, investing in health for economic
development.
Unit III Health Production Function (12 L)

Nature of production function, different types of production function and their applications,
national and international perspective, distributional inequities in opportunity and commercialization
of medical and para-medical education, cost escalation in the health care system, easy access and
availability to appropriate technology, need for regulation and control

Unit IV Health Care Incentives, Costing and Financing (12 L)

Goals of health care provision and financing, competitive health insurance and risk adjustment,
Demand and supply of health insurance, asymmetric information and agency, costing of health care
market insurance, self-insurance and protection, employment based insurance, health insurance in
India, , public-private partnership and the role of state

Unit V Measuring Health Status and Health Care in India (12 L)

Measurement of health state utilities, QALYs and its alternatives- different approaches of valuing
health, multi-attribute utility instruments and their development - Various health indicators and its
recent trend, health care expenditures, target of health care and achievements, different options for
financing healthcare, taxation, user fees, health insurance, role of urban and rural local bodies, role
of WHO, economic impact of HIV/AIDS in India and gender issues.

Suggested Readings

1. CII-Mckinsey Report, Healthcare in India: The Road Ahead, 2004.

2. Culyer, A. J. and J.P. Newhouse (eds.), Handbook of Health Economics, Volume 1 A & 1 B,
NorthHolland, 2000.
3. Folland, S., A.C. Goodman and M. Stano, Economics of Health and Health Care, Fifth
edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2006.
4. Pradhan, B.K. and R Sundar, Gender Impact of HIV and AIDS in India, United Nations
Development Programme, 2006.
5. Pradhan, B.K. and R Sundar, Socio-economic impact of HIV AIDS in India, United Nations
Development Programme, 2006.
6. Reports of WHO.
7. Zweifel, P., Health Economics, Oxford University Press, 1997.
 7. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND POLICY
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4

Preamble

International Economics and Economic Policy focuses on contributions that are relevant to
economic policy, emphasizing both theoretical and empirical papers. In particular, the course
focuses on comparative economic policy; international political economy, including international
organizations and policy cooperation; monetary and real/technological dynamics in open
economies; globalization and regional integration; trade; migration; international investment; internet
commerce; and regulation.

Objectives:

1. To enable the students to understand to analyze various issues pertaining to India‘s

International Trade and Policies for economic development.
2. To learn the student about the International monetary systems and its reforms.

Unit I Theory of International Trade (12 L)

Mercantilist theory, Classical and Neo-classical (Adam Smith, Ricardo, J.S.Mill,H-O Model,
Haberler), Theory of Opportunity Cost, New construction of Ricardian Theory, New Trade
Theories (Vernon, Posner, Cannon) Technological dynamics, Factor intensity Reversal, Leontief
Paradox, Stopler Samuelson theorem, Theory of Change in Factor Endowment, Factor Equalization
Theorem, Specific Factor Model, Immisirizing Growth, Theory of Custom Union, Gains From
Trade, Inter and Intra Industry Trade Model, Free trade better than no trade, Restricted trade better
than no trade and free trade

Unit II External Trade Policy (12 L)

Exim policy, ECGC, Export Promotion Councils, DGFT, Incoterm, Tariff and Non-Tariff Barriers,
Terms of trade, Protection, New Economic Policy

Unit III Theory of International Finance (12 L)

Prices in the open economy: purchasing power parity, Financial markets in the open economy,
Open economy macroeconomics, exchange rate determination: Flexible prices: the monetary Model,
Fixed prices: the Mundell-Fleming model, Coordination of Fiscal and Monetary policy under fixed
and flexible exchange rate, Asset Market Model, Exchange rate dynamics, Expectations, Balance of
Payment and adjustment Mechanisms, Foreign Trade Multiplier and repercussion effect.
Unit IV International Monetary System (12 L)

International Monetary system, Euro currency, Euro dollar, Dollarization, SDR, China and reserve
currency issues. Optimum currency areas and monetary union, Recent Financial crisis Regional
Trade Agreement, Economic Integration in North America, The European Union: Many Markets
into One, ASEAN, Trade and Policy Reform in Latin America, Emerging Economies, BRICS and
the world economy,

Unit V International Financial Architecture (12 L)

IMF, World Bank, WTO, GATT, UNCTAD, Reforming the international institutional architecture

Suggested Reading:

 Pugel, T.A. (2008), International Economics, 13th Edition, Tata Mcgraw hill publishing Co,
New Delhi.
 Bhagwati, J. N., A. Panagariya and T.N.Srinivasan(1998), Lectures on International Trade,
OUP,NewDelhi, Second Edition.
 Krugman, P.A. and M Obstfeld (2003), International Economics: Theory and Policy,Sixth
Ed.
 Salvatore Dominick (2010), International economics, 8th edition, Wiley Publication, New
Delhi, ISBN: 978-81- 265-1413-7
 Laurence Copeland (May, 2008), Exchange Rates and International Finance 5th Edition
Paperback, ISBN13: 9780273710271
 Leontief, W. W. (1953). "Domestic Production and Foreign Trade: The American Capital
Position Re-examined". Proceedings American Philosophical Society 97: 332–349.
 Leamer, E.E. (1980). "The Leontief Paradox Reconsidered". Journal of Political Economy
88: 495– 503.
 Y. Shiozawa (2007) A New Construction of Ricardian Trade Theory: A Many-country,
Manycommodity with Intermediate Goods and Choice of Techniques, Evolutionary and
Institutional Economics Review, 3(2): 141-187.
 Jones, Ronald W. 1961 Comparative Advantage and the theory of Tariffs; A Multi-Country,
Multi-commodity Model, Review of Economic Studies, 28(3): 161-175.
 R. Dornbusch; S. Fischer; P. A. Samuelson 1977 Comparative Advantage, Trade, and
Payments in a Ricardian Model with a Continuum of Goods, The American Economic
Review, 67(5): 823-839.
 Shiozawa, Y. 2007 A New Construction of Ricardian Trade Theory—A Many-country,
Manycommodity Case with Intermediate Goods and Choice of Production Techniques—,
Evolutionary and Institutional Economics Review 3(2): 141-187.
 Shiozawa, Y. 2007 A New Construction of Ricardian Trade Theory—A Many-country,
Manycommodity Case with Intermediate Goods and Choice of Production Techniques—,
Evolutionary and Institutional Economics Review 3(2): 141-187.
 Chipman, J. (1965) ―A Survey of the Theory of International Trade, Part I: The Classical
Theory,‖ Econometrica 33: 477–519.
 Balassa, B. (1963) ―An Empirical Demonstration of Classical Comparative Cost Theory,‖
Review of Economics and Statistics 45: 231–8.
 Haberler, Gottfried (1936) The Theory of International Trade, New York: Macmillan, ch.
12.
 Heller, H. Robert (1968) International Trade, Theory and Empirical Evidence, Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, ch. 4.
 Rybczynski, T. M. (1955) ―Factor Endowments and Relative Commodity Prices,‖
Economica 22: 336–41; reprinted in R. Caves and H. Johnson (eds) (1968) Readings in
International Economics, Homewood, IL: Irwin.
 Samuelson, P.A. (1949) ―International Factor-Price Equalization Once Again,‖ Economic
Journal 59: 181–97.
 Stolper, W. and Samuelson, P.A. (1941) ―Protection and Real Wages,‖ Review of Economic
Studies 9: 58–73.
 Vernon, R. (1966) ―International Investment and International Trade in the Product Cycle,‖
Quarterly Journal of Economics 80:190–207.
 Balassa, B. (1975) ―Trade Creation and Diversion in the European Common Market,‖
European Economic Integration. Amsterdam: North-Holland.
 Brown, A., Deardorff, A., and Stern, R. (1992) ―North American Integration,‖ Economic
Journal 102: 1507–1518.
 Frankel, J.(1997) Regional Trading Blocs in the World Economic System, Washington, DC:
Institute for International Economics.
 Hufbauer, G. and Schott, J. (1993) NAFTA: An Assessment, Washington, DC: Institute for
International Economics.
 Staiger, Robert (1995) ―International Rules and Institutions for Trade Policy,‖ in G.
Grossman and K. Rogoff
 Jackson, John (1997) The World Trading System, Law and Policy of International Economic
Relations, 2nd edn, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
 Amiti, M. and Freund, C. (2007) ―An Anatomy of China‘s Export Growth,‖ Paper prepared
for Global Implications of China‘s Trade, Investment and Growth Conference, IMF
Research Department.
 Balassa, B. (1971) The Structure of Protection in Developing Countries, Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press.
 Havrylyshyn, O. (1990) ―Trade Policy and Productivity Gains in Developing Countries,‖
World Bank Research Observer, 1–24.
 8. PUBLIC ECONOMICS AND POLICY
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

Role and functions of the Government in an economy have been changing with the passage of time.
The term ‗Public Finance‘ has traditionally been applied to the package of those policies and
operations which involve the use of tax and expenditure measures. This course covers the rationale
for government provision of goods in a market economy and the effects of taxes on economic
efficiency. We will also contrast the traditional public finance view of the role of government with
the public choice school of thought. The primary emphasis is on expenditures and taxes at the
federal level. As a part of the broader fiscal restructuring plan of the central and state governments
in India, reforms have been initiated with particular emphasis on radical reforms in indirect taxes
both in terms of tax policy reforms like base broadening, elimination of tax concessions and
reduction in the number of tax rates and rationalization of tax structures, as well as tax
administrative reforms like modernization of tax administration and extensive use of IT.

Objectives:

1. To enable the students to understand about the fiscal institutions, tax structure and its
distribution, public policy and other several issues related to public economics.
2. To help the students to understand the nature, structure and functioning of the public
economics, especially with reference to India.

Unit I Introduction (12 L)

Public Finance – Definition and Scope; Public and Private finance. The Role of the Government in
a changing perspective, Fiscal Functions of the Government, Co-ordination among these functions.

Unit II Welfare Foundations of Public Economics (12 L)

Distinction between Private and Public Goods, Pareto Optimality, Theory of Second best, Market
Failure, Optimal provision of Public Goods, Free Rider Problem. The Pure Theory of Public Goods
by Samuelson.

Unit III Public Expenditure (12 L)

Growth and Structural changes in public expenditure, Wagner‘s Law, Peacock and Wiseman‘s
hypothesis, Public Choice in Determining the Level of Public expenditure, Public expenditure on
health, education and subsidies in India, Criteria for Expenditure Evaluation - Valuation of Benefit
and Cost, Choice of Discount rate.

Unit IV Principles of Taxation (12 L)

Principle of Fiscal Neutrality, Excess Burden, Principle of Equity, Benefit Principle, Bowen and
Lindhal Models, Ability to pay Principle.(7) Tax policy and administration Reform in indirect tax
structure of India: MODVAT, CENVAT, Value Added Tax (VAT), Issue of taxation of services in
India, Goods and Service Tax (GST), Problem of Tax Evasion and Parallel Economy.
Unit V Issues on Federal Finance in India (12 L)
Devolution Criteria, Division of fiscal powers between the centre and states and local bodies,
problems of inter-jurisdictional spillovers and issues of tax harmonisation, Report of latest Finance
Commission.

Suggested Readings:

 Richard A. Musgrave (1989), Public Finance in Theory and Practice McGraw Hill Book
Company, New York.
 M. Govinda Rao and Tapas Sen (1998) : Financial Federalism in India, McMillan, Delhi.
 Arun Kumar (1998) : Black Economy in India, Penguin Books, New Delhi.
 Buchaman J.M. (1970), The Public Finances, Richard D.Irwin, Homewood.
 Hemlata Rao (2006) Fiscal Federalism –Issues and Policies, New Countury Publications,
New Delhi.
 Atkinson A.B. and J.E. Siglitz (1980). Lectures on Public Economics, Tata MacGraw Hill,
New Delhi.
 Comes R. and T.Sandler (1986) The theory of Externalities, Public Goods and Club Goods,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
 Alan, A. Tait, (1972): The Value Added Tax, McGraw- Hill Publications.
 National Institute of Public Finance and Policy, (1989): The Operation of MODVAT,
NIPFP, New Delhi.

9. REGIONAL ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

It is being increasingly recognized that market forces do not result automatically in regionally
balanced development of economics. For effective and meaningful intervention to pull up
economically and socially the less developed regions, it is necessary to understand the dynamics of
regional development. This paper attempts to teach to the students the dynamics of regional
development right from the meaning and concepts related to regional development to a broad
overview of the techniques of regional analysis.

Objectives:

1. To enable the students to understand the basic concepts of regional importance of economic
development
2. To enable the students to cope up regional coastal resources and management for
sustainable economic development.
Unit I Basics of Regional Economics (12 L)

Need for study of Regional Economics, Definition of a region, Different types of regions,
Differences between region and a nation; Regional income, Problems of estimation, Indicators of
regional development, Social, Economic and Political factors in regional growth.

Unit II Regional Allocation of resources (12 L)

Balanced regional development; Cumulative Causation Models, Regional linkage-spread and

backwash effects; Regional Convergence and divergence theories, Regional Polarisation, regional
Economic Multiplier. The basis of interregional trade, Regional trade and factor price equalization,
Regional trade and factor migration, issues and challenges in regional trade

Unit III Transport costs and location (12 L)

Location and regional growth, Transportation and regional growth, the role of cities in regional
development, Thunen‘s, Weber‘s theory of location; Locational and weight triangles; Locational
interdependence. Locational – Views of Christaller, Losch, Perroux, Florance, Hoover, Polander and
Isaxd – Dynamic theory of regions. Hotelling Prinicple

Unit IV Regional Development in India (12 L)

Socio-Economic Regional imbalance in India; Regional planning; Rural urban inequality; Role of
Planning commission and finance commission in regional development, Trends in Regional
Disparities in Income & Consumption, Sectoral Income and Employment Pattern across regions,
Spatial Concentration of Industries in Liberalised Regime, Trends in regional agro production and
productivity, Regional Distribution of Infrastructure, Trends in regional disparities in Infrastructure.
Key issues in regional development of Rajasthan.

Unit V Coastal Resource and Environment (12 L)

Issues in Coastal Zone Management in India – Impact of Globalisation in Coastal Zone - Impact of
Megacities in Coastal Zone – Coastal Disasters - Coastal Erosion - Coastal Disaster Planning and
Management - Tourism Issues - Coastal Zone Regulations in India – CRZ Classification - Coastal
Resource Management in Tamil Nadu – Issues – Gulf of Mannar and Bio diversity and Its
Conservation - Coral Reef Management Issues in Gulf of Mannar – and Role of Government,
NGOs and Communities

Selected Readings:

 Adelman, I. and C.T. Morris (1973) – Economic Growth and Social Equity in Developing
Countries, Stanford, USA
 Ahluwalia, M. (1976) – ―Inequality, Poverty, and Development‖, Journal of Development
Economics, Vol. 6
 Anand, S. and R. Kanbur (1993) – ―The Kuznets Process and the Inequality-Development
Relationship‖, Journal of Development Economics, Vol. 40
 Anand, S. and R. Kanbur (1993a) – ―Inequality and Development: A Critique‖, Journal of
Development Economics, Vol. 41
 Hoover, Edgar M., An Introduction to Regional Economics. New York. Alfred A. Knopf,
2nd edition.
 Isard, Welter, (1976), Methods of Regional Analysis, The M.I.T. Press Massachusetts and
London, England, Chaps, 4,6,7,9 & 11.
 Kuznets, S. (1955) – ―Economic Growth and Economic Inequality, American Economic
Review, Vol. 45, Kuznets, S. (1963) – ―Quantitative Aspects of Economic Growth of
Nations: VIII, Distribution of Income by Size‖, Economic Development and Cultural
Change, Vol. 12.
 Mathur, Ashok (2000), National and Regional Growth Performance in the Indian Economy,
in Reform and Employment, New Delhi, IAMR and Concept Publishers.
 Needleman,L., (ed.), 1968), Regional Economics, Penguin Books Ltd., Part-II, Cha. 4.
 Parioff, Harvey et. al., Regions, Resources and Economic Growth. University of Nebraska
Press, Lincoin USA. Part II, pp.55-104.
 Richardson, Harry W., (1976): Regional Economics, Weidenfold and Nicoloson, London,
Chaps. 1 to 5,7,9 & 13.
 Shand, Ric and S. Bhide (2000), ―Sources of Economic Growth: Regional Dimensions of
Reforms,‖ Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 35, No. 42, October 14.
 Smith, David, (1971), Industrial Location: An Economic Geography Analysis, Hohn Wiley,
New York.
 Donald Robadue, Jr. (Ed.) Eight years in Ecuador The Road to Integrated Coastal
Management –Coastal Resources Centre University of Rhode Island, USA, 1995.
 Richard B. Pollnac and Brian R. Crawford, Discovering Factors that Influence the Success of
Community –Based Marine Protected Areas in the Visayas, Philippines,
 Coastal Resources Center, University of Rhode Island, USA,2000.
 Gordon W. Thayer et al., Science – Based Restoration Monitoring of Coastal Habitats, USA
Department of Commerce NOAA, USA,2003.
 Richard K. Wallace and Kristen M. Fletcher, Understanding Fisheries Management, Auburn
University and the University of Mississippi, USA, 1996.
 Stephen Olsen, Donald D. Robadue, Jr., Luis Arriaga , Atacames Special Area Management
Plan ,Atacames-Sua-Muisne, CRC,URI, USA,1993.
 10. INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT
Total Credit: 04 Subject Code:
LTPC 4 0 0 4
Preamble

It is being increasingly recognized that market forces do not result automatically in regionally
balanced development of economics. For effective and meaningful intervention to pull up
economically and socially the less developed regions, it is necessary to understand the dynamics of
regional development. This paper attempts to teach to the students the dynamics of regional
development right from the meaning and concepts related to regional development to a broad
overview of the techniques of regional analysis.

Objectives:

1. To enable the learners to understand in the contemporary world with globalization and
liberalization more and more attention is being given to industry.
2. To acquire knowledge among the students on the basic issues such as productivity,
efficiency, capacity utilization and debates involved in the industrial development of India.

Unit I Theory of the Firm (10 L)

Undifferentiated Products - Cournot, Stackelberg, Dominant firm model, Bertrand-Heterogeneous
products - Chamberlin‗s small and large number case-Kinked demand curve theory - Bain‗s limit
pricing - Sales and growth maximization hypothesis - Managerial theories of the firm - Game
theoretical models.

Unit II Investment Decisions (10 L)

Conventional and modern methods - Risk and uncertainty - Sensitivity analysis - Financial
statements and ratio analysis - Inflation accounting - Project appraisal methods – Industrial finance-
Sources of finance - Capital structure - Incentive, signaling and control arguments - Separation of
ownership and control.

Unit III Vertically Related Markets and Competition Policy (12 L)

Successive and mutually related market power - Monopoly, variable proportions and price
discrimination - Monopsony and backward integration - Uncertainty - Diversification, rationing and
cost economics and asset specificity - Internal hierarchies Hierarchies as information systems -
Incentive structures and internal labour markets - Supervision in hierarchies - Competition policy:
Need and requirements - Mergers and acquisitions - Coordination with other policies.

Unit IV Product market Differentiation and Imperfect Information (14 L)

Lancastrian and Hotelling approaches – representative consumer approach and Chamberlin‗s model
of diversity of tastes - The address approach -Competition in address-Free entry-Pure profit and
non-uniqueness in free entry equilibriumproduct diversity and multi address firms - Bargains and
rip-offs - Theory of sales - Quality and reputations-Product varietyImperfect discrimination and
price dispersions -Advertising - Dorfman Steiner condition - Lemons and information asymmetries.
Unit V Technical Change, Market Structure and Indian Industry (14 L)
The Economics of patents - Adoption and diffusion of innovations - Innovations and rivalry :
Kamien and Schwartz - Measures of concentration - Concentration ratio - Hirschman - Herfindahl
index - Entropy measure - Structure conduct performance paradigm - Contestable markets - Fixed
costs, Sunk costs and contestability - Stackelberg - Spence – Dixit model- Industrial growth in India:
Trends and prospects – Public enterprises; efficiency, productivity and performance constrains-
Small scale industries : definition, role, policy issues and performance - Capacity utilization -
Industrial sickness and Exit policy - Concept of competitiveness - Nominal protection-coefficients
(NPC) and effective rate of protection (ERP) – Total-factor productivity - Technology transfer -
Pricing policies-Administered pricing and LRMC based tariffs – Industrial location policy in India;
regional imbalance - Globalization and competition - Privatization.

Selected Readings:

 Ahluwalia, I. J. (1985), Industrial Growth in India – Stagnation since Mid-sixties, Oxford

University Press, New Delhi.
 Ahluwalia, I. J. (1991), Productivity and Growth in Indian Manufacturing, Oxford University
Press, New Delhi.
 Desai, A. V. (1994), ―Factors Underlying the Slow Growth of Indian Industry‖, in Indian
Growth and Stagnation - The Debate in India Ex. Deepak Nayyar, Oxford University Press.
 Ferguson, Paul R. and Glenys J. Ferguson, (1994), Industrial Economics - Issues and
Perspectives, Macmillan, London.
 Shepher, William G. (1985), The Economics of industrial Organisation, Prentice - Hall, Inc,
Englewood Cliffs, N. J.
 Staley, E & Morse R. (1965), Modern Small Industry for Developing Countries, McGraw
Hill Book Company.
 Vepa R. K. (1988), Modern Small Industry in India, Sage Publications.
 Srivastava, M.P. (1987), Problems of Accountability of Public Enterprises in India, Uppal
Publishing House, New Delhi.
 Mohanty, Binode (1991), Ed. Economic Development Perspectives, Vol. 3, public
Enterprises and Performance, Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi.
 Jyotsna and Narayan B. (1990), ―Performance Appraisal of PEs in India: A Conceptual
Approach‖, in Public Enterprises in India - Principles and Performance, Ed. Srivastave
V.K.L., Chug Publications, Allahabad

***
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVEL-12

PhD Course Structure for our University Departments

(Effective from the academic year 2018-2019 onwards)

Sri Paramakalyani Centre of Excellence in Environmental Science

PhD Programme: Environmental Science

Page 1 of 35
 PhD PROGRAMME: ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

S.No TITLE OF THE SUBJECT

1. Environmental Pollution and Toxicology
2. Instrumentation and Methodology for Environmental Analysis
3. Environmental Chemistry
4. Waste Recycling and Resource Recovery Technology
5. Fundamental Chemistry
6. Environmental Nanoscience
7. Environmental Microbiology
8. Pollution Control Engineering and Bioremediation
9. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management
10. Introduction to Nanoscience
11. Synthesis of Nanomaterials
12. Characterization techniques for Nanomaterials
13. Methods of Nanofabrication
14. Nanomedicine
15. Nanocomposite
16. Nanobiotechnology
17. Environmental Pollution Control
18. Research and Teaching Methodology
19. Agricultural Entomology and Pest Management
20. Sustainable Agriculture
21. Eco Friendly Bioproducts
22. River Ecosystem Ecology
23. Restoration Ecology and Management
24. Biostatistics and Science Writing
25. Freshwater Ecology
26. Biological Invasions and Management
27. Mini Project

Page 2 of 35
 Environmental Pollution and Toxicology
Unit I 8hrs
Introduction – Major Industrial Effluents – Sewage – Characteristics, Fertilizers – Pesticides
and other agrochemicals – Heavy metals – Mercury, Cadmium, Chromium, Lead, Aluminum,
Arsenic, Copper, Nickel and their toxicity – Ground water contamination – Soil Pollution –
Environmental impacts of use and throw plastics - Hospital wastes and their environmental
impacts
Unit II 8hrs
Air pollution – Sources – Oxides of Carbon, Nitrogen, Sulphur, Hydrocarbons – Transport
and Diffusion – Effects of air pollutants on life and properties – Measurement of airborne
contaminants-Acid rain – Ozone depletion – Global warming and their consequences –
Radioactive Pollution – Thermal pollution – Noise pollution – Sources and effects – Fate of
air, water and soil pollutants - Episodes of pollution
Unit III 8hrs
Principles and Methodologies for the quantitative analyses of TOC, chromium, cadmium,
arsenic, mercury, copper, lead, nickel and zinc in waste water – Estimation of NOx, CO2,
CO, SO2 and SPM in air.
Unit IV 8hrs
General principles of toxicology - Scope of toxicology - Outlines of toxicological testing
methods, cost effective bioassays - Toxicity and Probit Analysis - Bioassays – Mechanism of
action of toxicants - Routes of exposure - Routes of entry of xenobiotics - Absorption and
Translocation – Biotransformation - Combined action of toxicants - Factors influencing
toxicity - Dose effect and Dose response relationship

Unit V 8hrs
Toxicity – Cytotoxicity, Immunotoxicity, Hepatotoxicity, Molecular toxicity, Neurotoxicity -
Carcinogens, mutagens and teratogens. Ecotoxicology and human toxicology, Behaviour of
toxicants in the environment – Occupational exposure to industrial toxicants -
Bioaccumulation, Biomagnification – Toxic residues - Residual analytical methods - Safety
evaluation of toxic chemicals
Reference
1.Josephy, P. D., Mannervik, B., de Montellano, B.O., 1997. Molecular Toxicology. Oxford
University Press, UK.
2.Tomlin, C., 2000. The Pesticide Manual. 11th edition,. British Crop Protection Council.
Several editions. updated every few (2-4) years.
3.Bryant, R., Bite, M., Hopkins, WL., 1999. Global insecticide directory, 2nd ed. Ed.. Ag.
Chem. Inform. Services, Agranova.
4.Krishnan Kannan, K., 1997. Fundamentals of Environmental Pollution, S. Chand Company,
New Delhi.
5.Sharma, B. K., Kaur, H., 2000. Environmental Chemistry, Goel Publishing House, Meerut,
India.
6.Anderson, K., Scott, R., 1981. Fundamentals of industrial toxicology, Ann. Arbor. Science
Publishing Inc. Michigam. USA.
7.Ecobicham, D., 2004. The basis of toxicity testing, CRC press, USA.
Page 3 of 35
8.Prasad, D.N., Kashyap, V., 1999. Introduction to toxicology, S. Chand Company, New
Delhi
9.De Matters, F., Smith, L., 1995. Molecular and Cellular Mechanisms of Toxicity CRC
Press, USA
10.Dara, S.S., 2000. A text book of environmental chemistry and pollution control. S. Chand
Company, New Delhi.
11.Sharma, P. D., 1993. Environmental Biology and Toxicology, Rastogi Publications, New
Delhi.
12.A.G.Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, Environmental Science and Biotechnology – Theory
and Techniques, MJP Publishers.
13.Nation, J. L., 2008. Insect Physiology and Biochemistry, Second Edition, CRC Press,
USA.
14.Josephy, P. D., Mannervik, B., de Montellano, P.O., 1997. Molecular Toxicology, Oxford
University Press, UK.
15.Finney, D. J., 1971. Probit Analysis. 3rd edition. Cambridge University Press, UK
16.Subramanian, M.A., 2004. Toxicology: Principals and methods, MJP Publishers.
17.APHA. 1975. Standard methods for the examination of waste water. AWWA, New York.
18.A.K. Gupta. Industrial Safety and Environment. 2013. University Science Press.

Page 4 of 35
 Instrumentation and Methodology for Environmental Analysis
Unit- I 8hrs
Centrifugation: Low speed-high speed-ultra refrigerated centrifuges. Principles and operation
methods of weighing devices- Preparation of buffers and stock solutions of media/ reagents-
Preparation of normality- ppm- solutions. Microtome-Cryocutting-Sectioning-Staining,
Haemocytometer
Unit –II 8hrs
Chromatographic techniques- TLC- Electrophoresis: Polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis
(PAGE) and agarose gel electrophoresis. Biosensors: Definition – components of biosensors-
types of biosensors- Enzyme electrodes- Bacterial electrodes- Enzyme immunosensors-
Environmental biosensors. Instrumentation techniques: HPLC, SEM, XRD, GC, UV, FTIR,
DSC/TGA, TEM, AFM
Unit- III 8hrs
Scientific research: Methods of scientific research- Preparation of rebview article- editing
research paper- collection of literature- references- bibliography and thesis writing
Unit-IV 8hrs
Principles of pollution analysis: Gravimetric Methods- Volumetric Methods- Solvent
Extraction evaporations- Toxic metal pollutants analysis (Chromium, Mercury)- Air pollution
analysis- Sampling Methods for Aerosols- Sampling of Gaseous Pollutants-Analysis of
aerosols- Analysis of gaseous pollutants (SO2, H2S, NO2-NOX, CO-CO2, ozone and NH3 )
Unit-V 8hrs
Principles of Monitoring Methods- Analysis of Soil Quality- pH, EC, Total Nitrogen-Organic
Carbon-C: N ratio – Water Quality- Residual Chlorine- Fluorides. Estimation of Phenols.
Pesticide Analysis- Spectroscopic Analysis and GC- Noise Measurement – Sampling of
Odors- Measurement of Odor.
References
1.Chatwal, G. and Anand, S. 1989. Instrumentation methods of chemical analysis. Himalayas
Publishing House, Delhi.
2.Robinson, J.W. (ed) 1991. Practical Handbook of spectroscopy CRC Press, Boston.
3.Webster, J.C. (ed). 2005. Bioinstrumentation. John Wiley & Sons Inc., Singapore
4.Guruman, N. 2006. Research methodology for Biological Sciences. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
5.Palanichamy, S. Shunmugavelu, M. 2006. Research methods in Biological sciences. Sarojini for
Palani paramount Publication. Anna Nagar Palani.
6.Cannel, J.P.1998. Natural products isolation, Humana Press New Jersey.
7.Harbone, J.B. 2003. Phytochemical methods. (5th Edition) Chapman &Hall, London.
8.Keith Wilson, 2000. A practical guide to clinical biochemistry.
9.Murugesan A.G. andRajakumari C. Environmental Science and Biotechnology Theory and
Techniques. 2009 (3rd Edition). MJP Publishers.
10.S.M. Khopkar. (2001). Environmental Pollution analysis. New Age International (p) Limited,
Publishers

Page 5 of 35
 Environmental Chemistry
UNIT I 7hrs
Introduction to Environmental Science – Water, Air, Earth, Life and Technology – Ecology –
Energy and Cycles of Energy – Human impact and Pollution – Atmosphere and Atmospheric
chemistry – The Geosphere and Soil – The Biosphere
UNIT II 7hrs
Overview to Environmental chemical analysis – Classical methods – Spectrophotometric
method – Electrochemical methods – Gas Chromatography – Mass spectrometry – Analysis
of water samples – Analysis of sulfur dioxide – Analysis of Hydrocarbons
UNIT III 7hrs
Introduction to water pollution – Nature and types of water pollutants – Elemental pollutants,
Heavy metals and Metalloids – Organic pollutants – Pesticides in water – Water treatment
and water use – Sewage treatment – Removal calcium and other metals- Water Reuse and
recycle
UNIT IV 7hrs
Particles in the atmosphere – Physical behavior of particles in the atmosphere – The
composition of inorganic particles – Toxic metals – Radioactive particles – The composition
of organic particles – Effect of particles – Control of particulate emissions
UNIT V 7hrs
Origin of Hazardous wastes – Transport of Hazardous wastes – Effect of Hazardous wastes –
Fates of Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes in the Geosphere - Hazardous wastes in
Hydrosphere - Hazardous wastes in Atmosphere - Hazardous wastes in Biosphere
References
1.Manahan SE, Environmental Chemistry (6th Ed.), Lewis Publishers, USA
2.Schwarzenbach, Rene P., Phillip M. Gschwend, and Dieter M. Imboden, Environmental
Organic Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993.
3.Simpson, Peter, Basic Concepts in Organic Chemistry—A Programmed Learning
Approach, Chapman and Hall, London, 1994.
4.Solomons, T. W. Graham, Organic Chemistry, 6th ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York,
1998.
5.Sorrell, Thomas N., Organic Chemistry, University Science Books, Sausalito, CA, 1999.
6.Timberlake,Karen C., Chemistry: An Introduction to General, Organic, and Biological
Chemistry, Benjamin/Cummings, Menlo Park, CA, 1999.
7.Vollhardt, K. Peter C. and Neil E. Schore, Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function, 3rd
ed., W.H. Freeman, New York, 1999.

Page 6 of 35
 Waste Recycling and Resource Recovery Technology
Objectives:
To impart knowledge on waste recycling and resource recovery from wastes.
UnitI:Introduction
Solid waste – Sources – Domestic, industrial and agriculture sources- Industrial wastes-
Mineral wastes – Indentification waste – Minimizing options -Recovery and Recycle-
Composting- Vermi composting – Incineration – Energy from waste- Pyrolysis, chemical
processing- Legislative measures for garbage disposal.
UnitII: FlyAsh
Introduction- Nature- Direct Replacement of Cement- Waste Land Development- Soil
Amendment to grow Crops- Utilization of Flyash In Afforestation, Limitation of Land
Application of Fly Ash.
UnitIII:PlasticWaste,IndustrialWaste
Introduction – Amount and types of plastic waste – Recycling of plastic waste-cement
manufacture from industrial solid waste – Paper industry waste – Calcium carbide industry
waste.
UnitIV:BioFuels&BioEthanol
Bio ethanol production technologies- Bio hydrogen- its application – Methanogenesis from
agroindustrial residues- Bio mass – Gasifier based power plants.
UnitV:WasteWater
Introduction reuse- Quality, the basic treatment processes – Benefits of reuse in agriculture –
The costs of reuse projects and economic justification – Factors essential for the success of
reuse projects- Case study.
Textbook:
1. Agarwal S.K. ―Wealth from Waste‖,Kul Bhushan Nangia, APH Publishing
Corporation, New Delhi, 2005
References:
1. Nemerow N.L., ―Industrial Water Pollution‖, Addison – Wesley Publishing
Company inc., USA, 1978
2. Wesley Eckenfelder Jr. W, Industrial water pollution control, McGraw Hill
book Co, New Delhi, 1989.
3. Mahajan S.P. ―Pollution Control in process industries‖, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd., New Delhi, 1989.

Page 7 of 35
 FUNDAMENTAL CHEMISTRY
Unit I Inorganic chemistry –Zero group elements 5 Hrs (3L+2P)
Isolation of inert gases by physical and chemical methods – preparation and properties of
xenon tetrafluoride, xenon hexafluoride, xenon oxytetrafluoride – uses of noble gases –
clathrates and their uses.
Unit II Organic chemistry – Principles of reactions 6 Hrs (3L+3P)
Heterolytic and hemolytic cleavage – nucleophiles and electrophiles – reaction intermediates
– preparation and properties of carbonium ions, carbanions and free radicals – types of
reactions – substitution, addition, elimination and polymerization reactions.
Unit III Physical chemistry – Photochemistry 7Hrs (4L+3P)
Definition – composition between thermal and photochemical reactions – Laws of
photochemistry-Beer Lambert‘s law-Grothus Draper law-Einstein‘s law-Quantum yield-low
and high quantum yield-determination of quantum yield-fluorescences, phosphorescence,
thermoluminescence, chemiluminescence and bioluminescence – definition with examples –
photosensitization.
Unit IV Polymer chemistry 7 Hrs (4L+3P)
Defination-Monomers, Oligomers, Polymers – Classification of polymers – Natural,
synthetic, linear, cross linked and network – plastics, elastomers, fibres, homopolymers and
Co-polymers. Thermoplastics – Polyethylene, Polypropylene, polystyrene, Polyacrylonitrile,
poly vinyl chloride, nylon and polyester – Thermosetting plastics - :Phenol formaldehyde and
exposxide resin – Elastomers – Natural rubber and synthetic rubber – Buna N, Buna – S and
neoprene.
Unit V Applied chemistry 7 Hrs (4L+3P)
Lubricants – classification - criteria of good lubricating oils – synthetic lubricating oils – poly
glycols and poly alkene oxides – greases or semi solid lubricants examples – solid lubricants
– graphite. Preparation and uses of shampoo, nail polish, sun screens, tooth powder, tooth
paste, boot polish, moth ball, chalk piece.
Suggested List of Exercises:
Books Studies:
1. R. T. Morrison, R. N. Boyd and S. K. Bhattacharjee, Organic Chemistry, 7th Edition,
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. S. H. Pine, Organic Chemistry, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2008.
3. Michael B. Smith, Jerry March, March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions,
Mechanisms, and Structure, John Wiley & Sons, 6th edition, 2007.
Books References:
1. L. Finar, Organic Chemistry, Vol. I & II, 5th Edition, Longman Ltd., New Delhi,
1975.
2. D. Nasipuri, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds: Principles and Applications,
4th edition, New Academic Science Publisher.
3. Peter Sykes, Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry (6th Edition), Longman
Scientific & Technical, 1985
4. K.J. Laidler, Chemical Kinetics, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Gurdeep Raj, Chemical Kinetics, Goel Publishing House.
6. P.W.Atkins, Physical Chemistry
7. W.J.Moore, Physical Chemistry, Longmans
8. A.A.Frost and R.G.Pearson, Kinetics and Mechanism, Wiley Eastern, Pvt. Ltd.
9. F.W. Billmeyer, Text book of Polymer science, Wiley- Interscience
10. Fundamentals of Photochemistry – K.K.Rohatgi – Mukherjee (Revised Edition) New age
International publications, Reprint 2002.
Page 8 of 35
 Environmental Nanoscience
UNIT 1 8hrs
Background to nanotechnology: scientific revolutions – types of nanotechnology and nano
machines – atomic structure – molecules & phases – energy – molecular and atomic size –
surfaces and dimensional space.
UNIT 2 8hrs
Nanomaterials Fabrication: Principles and Methods - Nanomaterials Fabrication-Specificity
and Requirements in the fabrication methods of nanoparticles oxide-Semiconductor
nanoparticles-metallics-Bimetallics and alloys-carbon based nanomaterials.
UNIT 3 8hrs
Membrane Process: Overview of membrane processes-transport principles for membrane
processes-Membrane fabrication using nanomaterials-Nanoparticle Membrane reactors-
Active membrane systems.
UNIT 4 8hrs
Nanocomposites: Introduction-Advantages and Disadvantages of Nano-sized Additions-
Application of Nanocompsites-Areas of Application-Clay-based Nanocomposities.
UNIT 5 8hrs
Environmental Applications of Nanomaterials: Nanomaterials for Groundwater Remediation
–Reactivity, fate and lifetime, Nanoiron reactivity, Reaction products, Intermediates and
efficiency, Effects of competing oxidants, Delivery and transport issues, Injection methods
and delivery vehicles.
References
1.Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies – Mick Wilson,
KamaliKannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, BurkhardRaguse, Overseas Press
(2005).
2.Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and Applications,
A.Inoue, K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000)
3.Nanocomposite science and technology, PulickelM.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul
V.Braun, Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
4.Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives, ChristofM.Niemeyer, /
ChadA.Mirkin, (eds.), Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, (2004)
5.Bionanotechnology: Lessons from Nature, by: David S. Goodsell, Wiley-Liss. (2004).
6.Nanotechnology - Fundamentals and Applications. Manasikarkare.I.K. International
Publishing HousinPvt.Ltd. New Delhi.

Page 9 of 35
 Environmental Microbiology
UNIT I: 8hrs
hrsIntroduction – History of microbiology – Scope of microbiology- Concept of Microbial
Ecology– Succession and Colonization of Microbes in Environment- Positive and Negative
roles of Microbes in Environment- Atmosphere as habitat and medium for microbial dispersal
– Air borne diseases – Air sanitation
UNIT II: 8 hrs
Biogeochemical cycles – Carbon, Nitrogen, Sulfur, Phosphorus, Iron and other elements -
Microbial Nitrogen fixation – Anabaena, Azospirillumand Rhizobium – Nitrogenase,
Hydrogenase
UNIT III: 8 hrs
Microbiology of waste water: Waterborne pathogens – Salmonella, Shigella, Vibrio cholera,
Gastroenteritis, Escherichia coli, Hepatitis viruses, Chikungunya, Swine flu and Dengue.
Tests for water quality – Microbiological water quality standards - Detection of faecal
contamination - Detection of virus – Biological oxygen demand - Eutrophication – Microbial
indicators of water pollution-Water purification and recycling process.
UNIT IV: 8 hrs
Microbiology of Soil –- Soil types and their microbes- Microbes in soil fertility- Humus-
Microbial degradation of lignin – Tannin – Rhizobacteria- Microbial degradation of
pesticides – Microbial interactions with inorganic pollutants – Microbial leaching of metals –
Microorganisms in abatement of heavy metal pollution - Microbial composting of biowastes
UNIT V: 8 hrs
Strategies in bioconversion - bioconversion of lignocelluloses into product-Biogas from
wastes – Specific methanogenic activity – Microbial production of fuels: Ethanol, Methane
and Hydrogen – Microbial production of biopolymers
References
1.Atlas & Bartha, 1981, Microbial Ecology and Fundamental Applications, The Benjamin
Kummings Publishing Co
2.Grant and Long, 1981, environmental Microbiology, Blackie and Sons ltd.,
BishopbridgeGlassgow
3.Ralph Mitchell, 1974, Introduction to Environmental Microbiology, Prentice Hall London
4.Cambell, 1983, Microbial control of pollution, Blackwell Scientific Publication
5.A.K. Chatterji , Introduction to Environmental Biotechnology, Prentice – Hall of India,
Newyork
6.A.G. Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, 2005, Environmental Science and Biotechnology –
Theory and Techniques, MJP Publishers
7.J.C. Fry et al., 1992. Microbial Control of Pollution, Cambridge University Press
8.K. Vijaya Ramesh, 2003, Environmental Microbiology, MJP Publishers, Chennai. ISBN
No – 81-8094-003-9.
9.A.H. Patel. 2016. Industrial Microbiology. Trinity Press. ISBN 978-93-85750-26-7
10.R.C.Dubey and D.K.Maheswari, 1999. A Textbook of Microbiology. S. Chand and
Company LTD, New Delhi. ISBN No – 81-219-1803-0.

Page 10 of 35
 POLLUTION CONTROL ENGINEERING AND BIOREMEDIATION
UNIT I: 8 hrs
Concept of pollution control and management – Characteristics of major industrial effluents –
primary – secondary and tertiary treatment of effluents – Ion exchange – reverse osmosis –
electrodialysis – colour removal from industrial effluents – Sludge treatment and disposal –
Modelling of activated sludge process.
UNIT II: 8hrs
Working principles of the following reactors – Rotating Biological Contactors, Fluidized Bed
Reactor, Trickling filter - Expanded Bed Reactor, Contact Digesters, Packed Column
Reactors, UASB Reactor – Sequencing batch reactors – High Rate reactors – Microbial
removal of nitrogen and phosphorus – Nutrient removal through biomass production –
Hospital waste management – Air Pollution Control Strategies: Automotive and industrial
emission control, greenhouse gases emission control– biological purification of contaminated
air
UNIT III: 8hrs
Metal microbes interactions – Microbial immobilization and transformation of metals –
Genetic aspects of heavy metal resistance – Anaerobic decomposition of organic matter –
Pesticide biodegradation – Microbial leaching of metal – Biotechnological applications for
pesticide waste disposal – Oil degradation by microbes – Aquatic macrophytes for waste
water treatment – Biotechnology in soil pollution abatement
UNIT IV: 8hrs
Bioremediation General perspectives – Microbes for bioremediation – Bioremediation
techniques– Advantages and disadvantages Bioremediation monitoring and case studies–
Effluent irrigation in agriculture – phytoremediation: approaches and types, factors
influencing phytoremediation – advantages and disadvantages – Microalgal species for
aquaculture – Mass cultivation techniques – Harvesting and Drying of Algal Biomass –
Bioagumentation for commercial production of algae
UNIT V: 8hrs
Genetics of microbial bioremediation – Microbial genetic plasticity – Role of plasmids in
bioremediation – Evolution barriers for new microbes – Enhancement of novel microbial
degradative abilities – Genetics and gene manipulation –Transgenic microbes for treating
toxic chemicals – Gene transfer in the environment – GEMS and biosafety – Ethics of
microbial biotechnology – application of genetic engineering in bioremediation
References
1. Pradipta Kumar Mohapatra (2007), Text book of Environmental Biotechnology, I.K.
International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
2. Jogdand. S.N. (2003) Environmental Biotechnology, Himalaya Publishing House
3. Chatterji, (2003), Introduction to Environmental Biotechnology, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd
4. A.G.Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, Environmental Science and Biotechnology –
Theory and Techniques, MJP Publishers
5. J.C. Fry et al., 1992. Microbial Control of Pollution, Cambridge University Press
6. C.S.Rao, (1997), Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd, India
7. Dara.S.S. (2000), Environmental Chemistry and Pollution Control, S. Chand & Co.,
Pvt. Ltd

Page 11 of 35
8. William C. Blackman, Jr, (1996), Basic Hazardous waste management (Ed.) CRC
Press Inc
9. Sharon Mc Eldowney et al, (1993), Pollution Ecology Biotreatment – Longman
Scientific & Technical, Harlow, England
10. Herber F. Lund – Industrial Pollution control handbook
11. Mahajan, S.P. Pollution control processing in industries
12. Trivedy, R.K. (1995). Encyclopedia of environmental pollution and control, Vol.2.
Enviromedia
13. Jenkins,D & B.H.Olson, Waste water microbiology, Pergamon Press
14. Kaul, Nandy & Trivedy, (1989). Pollution control in Distilleries Enviromedia, India
15. P. Rajendran and P. Gunasekaran (2006) Microbial bioremediation, MJP publishers

Page 12 of 35
 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management
Unit 1 8hrs
Introduction:Sources and generation of solid waste, their classification and chemical
composition; characterizationof municipal solid waste; hazardous waste and biomedical
waste.Effect of solid waste disposal on environment: Impact of solid waste on environment,
human and plant health; effect of solid waste and industrialeffluent discharge on water
quality and aquatic life; mining waste and land degradation; effect of land fill leachate on soil
characteristics and ground water pollution.
Unit 2 8hrs
Solid waste and Hazardous waste Management: Different techniques used in collection,
storage, transportation and disposal of solid waste (municipal, hazardous and biomedical
waste); landfill (traditional and sanitary landfill design); thermal treatment (pyrolysis and
incineration) of waste material; drawbacks in waste management techniques. Types of
industrial waste: hazardous and non-hazardous; effect of industrial waste on air, water and
soil; industrial waste management and its importance; stack emission control and emission
monitoring; effluent treatment plant and sewage treatment plant.
Unit 3 8 hrs
Resource Recovery : R- reduce, reuse, recycle and recover; biological processing -
composting, anaerobic digestion, aerobic treatment; reductive dehalogenation; mechanical
biological treatment; green techniques for waste treatment.
Unit 4 8hrs
Waste- to- energy : Concept of energy recovery from waste; refuse derived fuel (RDF);
different WTE processes: combustion, pyrolysis, landfill gas (LFG) recovery; anaerobic
digestion; gasification.
Unit 5 8 hrs
Integrated waste management: Concept of Integrated waste management; waste management
hierarchy; methods and importance of Integrated waste management.: Life cycle assessment:
Cradle to grave approach; lifecycle inventory of solid waste; role of LCA in waste
management; advantage and limitation of LCA; case study on LCA of a product.
References
1. Asnani, P. U. 2006. Solid waste management. India Infrastructure Report 570.
2. Bagchi, A. 2004. Design of Landfills and Integrated Solid Waste Management. John
Wiley & Sons.
3. Blackman, W.C. 2001. Basic Hazardous Waste Management. CRC Press.
4. McDougall, F. R., White, P. R., Franke, M., & Hindle, P. 2008. Integrated Solid Waste
Management: A Life Cycle Inventory. John Wiley & Sons.
5. US EPA. 1999. Guide for Industrial Waste Management. Washington D.C.
6. White, P.R., Franke, M. &Hindle P. 1995. Integrated Solid waste Management: A
Lifecycle Inventory. Blackie Academic & Professionals.
7. Zhu, D., Asnani, P.U., Zurbrugg, C., Anapolsky, S. & Mani, S. 2008. Improving
Municipal Solid waste Management in India. The World Bank, Washington D.C.

Page 13 of 35
 INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE
UNIT I 8hrs
Scientific revolution- Atomic structures-Molecular and atomic size-Bohr radius – Emergence
of Nanotechnology – Challenges in Nanotechnology - Carbon age–New form of carbon (from
Graphene sheet to CNT).
UNIT II 8hrs
Influence of nucleation rate on the size of the crystals- macroscopic to microscopic crystals
and nanocrystals - large surface to volume ratio, top-down and bottom-up approaches-self
assembly process-grain boundary volume in nanocrystals-defects in nanocrystals-surface
effects on the properties.
UNIT III 8hrs
Definition of a Nano system - Types of Nanocrystals-One Dimensional (1D)-Two
Dimensional (2D) -Three Dimensional (3D) nanostructured materials - Quantum dots -
Quantum wire-Core/Shell structures.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Surface energy – chemical potential as a function of surface curvature-Electrostatic
stabilization- surface charge density-electric potential at the proximity of solid surface-Van
der Waals attraction potential.
UNIT V 8hrs
Properties of Individual Nanoparticle - Metal Nanoclusters- Semiconducting Nanoparticle-
Rare Gas and molecular Clusters- Method of synthesis - RF plasma- Chemical methods-
Thermolysis - Pulsed Laser Methods.
References
1. M. Wilson, K. Kannangara, G Smith, M. Simmons, B. Raguse, Nanotechnology: Basic
science and Emerging technologies, Overseas Press India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, First Edition,
2005.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham (Eds), The chemistry of nanomaterials: Synthesis,
properties and applications, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh&Co, Weinheim, 2004.
3. Kenneth J. Klabunde (Eds), Nanoscale Materials Science, John Wiley & Sons, InC, 2001.
4. C.S.S.R.Kumar, J.Hormes, C.Leuschner, Nanofabrication towards biomedical
applications, Wiley –VCH Verlag GmbH & Co, Weinheim, 2004.
5. W. Rainer, Nano Electronics and information Technology, Wiley, 2003.
6. K.E.Drexler, Nano systems, Wiley, 1992.
7. G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications,
Imperical College Press, 2004
8. R. Cantor, P.R.Samuel, ―Biophysical Chemistry‖, W.H., Freeman & Co., 1985.
9. Watson, James, T.Baker, S.Bell, A.Gann, M.Levine, and R.Losick. ―Molecular
Biology of the Gene‖, 5th ed., San Francisco: Addison-Wesley, 2000.
10. Alberts, Bruce, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts,
and Peter Walter. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 4th ed. New York: Garland
Science, 2002.
11. Branden, Carl-Ivar, and John Tooze. Introduction to Protein Structure. 2nd ed.
New York: Garland Pub., 1991.
12. Creighton, E, Thomas, ―Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties‖, 2nd Ed.
New York: W.H. Freeman, 1992.
13. B.Lewin, ―Genes IX‖, International Edition. Sudbury: Jones & Bartlett, 2007.

Page 14 of 35
 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I 8hrs
Synthesis of bulk nanostructured materials - Sol Gel processing- Mechanical alloying and
milling - Grinding – high energy ball milling-types of balls-WC and ZrO2-materials –ball
ratio-limitations- melt quenching and annealing.
UNIT II 8hrs
Self Assembled Monolayers (SAM) - Vapour Liquid Solid (VLS) approach- Chemical
Vapour Deposition (CVD) - Langmuir-Blodgett (LB) films - Spin coating - Electrochemical
approaches: Anodic oxidation of alumina films, porous silicon and pulsed electrochemical
deposition - Spray pyrolysis - Flame pyrolysis - Thin films - Lithography.
UNIT III 8hrs
Homogenous Nucleation -diffusion and surface controlled growth process - synthesis of
metallic nanoparticles - semiconductor nanoparticles-metal oxide nanoparticles - vapor phase
reactions - solid state phase segregation -Heterogenous nucleation - kinetically confined
nanoparticles.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Evaporation-condensation - Vapor- liquid - solid (VLS) - VLS model - Nucleation and
growth - surface and bulk diffusion – kinetics – growth of various nanowires –control of size
–precursors and catalysts - single- and multi- wall CNT - Si nanowires – density and diameter
– doping in nanowires.
UNIT V 8hrs
Thin films- Environment for thin film deposition (Gas and Plasma) - Introduction to vacuum
technology-physical vapour deposition techniques (Reactive sputtering (DC and RF), laser
ablation); Epitaxy-different types of Epitaxy - Lattice mismatch - Liquid Phase Epitaxy
(LPE) - Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE)- Pulsed laser deposition (PLD) - Atomic layer
deposition (ALD)
References
1. W. Gaddand, D.Brenner, S.Lysherski and G.J.Infrate (Eds), Handbook of nanoscience,
Engg and Technology, CRC Press,2002.
2. G.Cao, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications,
Imperical College Press, 2004.
3. J.George, Preparation of thin films, Marcel Dekker, InC., New York, 2005.
4. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham (Eds), The chemistry of nanomaterials: Synthesis,
properties and applications, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh&Co, Weinheim, 2004

Page 15 of 35
 CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I 8hrs
X-ray diffraction – powder diffraction–single crystal XRD –thin film analyses –
determination of lattice parameters-structure analyses-rocking curve-strain analyses-phase
identification-particle size analyses using Debye- Scherer`s formula - X-ray photoelectron
spectroscopy (XPS)- Auger electron spectroscopy (AES)- low energy electron diffraction and
reflection high energy electron diffraction (LEED, RHEED).
UNIT II 8hrs
Electron Microsopy ( Basic principle only)-Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) – Field
Emission scanning Electron microscope (FESEM)-Atomic force microscopy (AFM ), –
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)- Scanning Probe Microscopy (SPM)- scanning
Tunnelling microscopy (STM), scanning near field optical microscopy (SNOM) .
UNIT III 8hrs
Infra red spectroscopy (IR) - UV-visible-Absorption and reflection-Raman Spectroscopy –
Micro- Raman spectra--Tip enhanced Raman-Surface Enhanced Raman scattering (SERS) –
Photoluminescence (PL)– Cathodeluminescence (CL).
UNIT IV 8hrs
Magnetic measurements using vibrating sample magnetometer (VSM) - magnetic force
microscopy (MFM) – SQUID-Electron Paramagnetic Resonance (EPR)-Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy . Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI).
UNIT V 8hrs
Hall Effect - Quantum Hall effects and its applications –Four –Probe resistivity
measurements- LED Characteristics-measurements of band gap - FET characteristics and its
applications.
References
1. Ghuzang G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and
applications, Imperical College Press, 2004
2. Zhong Lin Wang, Hand Book of Nanophase & Nanostructured materials (Vol. I&II),
Springer, 2002.
3. B.D. Cullity, Elements of X-ray diffraction, Addison Wesley, 1977
4. B.W.Moot, Micro-indentation hardness testing, Butterworths, London , 1956.
5. R.M.Rose, L.A.Shepard and J. Wulff, The structure and properties of materials, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., 1966.
6. S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices – Physics and Technology, Wiley, 1985.
7. D. K. Schroder, Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1998.
8. C. Richard Brundle Charles A. Evans, Jr.Shaun Wilson, Encyclopedia of Materials
Characterization Butterworth-Heinemann, 1992.

Page 16 of 35
 METHODS OF NANOFABRICATION
UNIT I 8hrs
Introduction to microelectronics fabrication and Moore`s empirical law - Limitations – Si
processing methods:Cleaning/etching, oxidation, Gettering, doping, epitaxy- semiconductor
device road map –gate dielectrics, poly Si, high k dielectrics.
UNIT II 8hrs
Necessity of clean a room – different types of clean rooms – maintenance - Importance of
Lithography techniques – Photolithography – Electron Beam lithography – Extreme UV
lithography – X-ray Lithography – Focused ion beam Lithography (FIB).
UNIT III 8hrs
Types of etching - Reactive ion etching (RIE) - Wet chemical etching - Isotropic etching –
Anisotropic etching- electrochemical etching.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Self-assembly, self-assembled monolayers, directed assembly, layer-by layer assembly,
patterned growth - control of position and diameter - Combinations of top-down and bottom-
up techniques: current state of the art - DNA self-assembly-Nanocrystals - Nanowires by
catalytic (Au, Ni and Ag) and non-catalytic VLS approach.
UNIT V 8hrs
Nanoimprint lithography (NIL) –soft polymer photoresistive - moulding /replica - printing
with stamp pads - RIE etching - patterned growth - control of position, size and density - Dip-
pen lithography - setup - working principle.
References
1. M. Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication CRC press, 1997.
2. G. Timp, Nanotechnology, AIP press, Springer Verlag, New York , 1999.
3. M.J.Jackson, Micro fabrication and Nanomanufacturing, CRC press.2005
4. G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications, Imperical
College Press, 2004
5. W.T.S Huck, Nanoscale assembly : Chemical Techniques (Nanostructure Science and
Technology, Springer, 2005.
6. H. Schift et al Fabrication of polymer photonic crystals using nanoimprint lithography,
Nanotechnology 16, 261, (2005).
7. R.D.Piner, Dip-pen lithography, Science 283, 661(1999).

Page 17 of 35
 NANOMEDICINE
UNIT I 8hrs
Nanomedicine: Introduction – Basic of Nanobiotechnology in Relation to Nanomedicine –
Landmarks in the Evolution of Nanomedicine – Classification of Nanobiotechnologies –
Visualization and Manipulation on Nanoscale.
UNIT II 8hrs
Nanomolecular Diagnostics: Introduction – Nanodiagnostics – Nanoarrays for Molecular
Diagnostics – Nanoparticles for Molecular Diagnostics – Nanobarcodes Technology –
Nanoparticle-Based Colorimetric DNA Detection Method – Nanobiotechnology for
Detection of Proteins – Nanobiosensors – Applications of Nanodiagnostics.
UNIT III 8hrs
Nanopharmaceuticals: Introduction – Nanobiotechnology for Drug Discovery &
Development – Drug Delivery – Nanoparticle based Drug Delivery - Liposomes –
Nanospheres – Nanotubes – Future Prospects of Nanobiotechnology based Drug Delivery
UNIT IV 8hrs
Role of Nanotechnology in Biological Therapies: Introduction – Vaccination – Cell & Gene
Therapy – Antisense Therapy – RNA Interference - Nano-Oncology – Nanomicrobiology –
Regenerative Medicine & Tissue Engineering - Nanodentistry - Nanobiotechnology &
Nutrition.
UNIT V 8hrs
Miscellaneous Applications of Nanobiotechnology – Nanoimmunology – Nanobiotechnology
for Public Health - Role of Nanobiotechnology in Biodefence - Worldwide Development &
Commercialization of Nanomedicine – Research & Education in Nanomedicine – Future of
Nanomedicine – Ethical, Safety and Regulatory Issues of Nanomedicine.
References
1. The Handbook of Nanomedicine – Kewal K. Jain, Humana Press (Springer) (2008)
2. Bio-Applications of Nanoparticles – Warren C.W. Chan, Lands Bioscience &
Springer Science Business Media, LLC (2007)

Page 18 of 35
 NANOCOMPOSITE
UNIT I
Introduction of Nanocomposites: Nanocomposites- Definition - Nanocomposites past and
present- Nomenclature -Solids -Atomic and molecular solids -Role of statistics in materials -
Primary , secondary and tertiary structure - Transitions
UNIT II
Properties and features of nanocomposites: Physics of modulus - Continuum measurements -
Yield -Fracture -Rubbery elasticity and viscoelasticity - Composites and nanocomposites -
Surface mechanical properties -Diffusion and permeability -Features of nanocomposites -
basics of polymer nano compos1tes
UNIT III
Processing of nanocomposites: Viscosity -Types of flow -Viscosity - Experimental viscosity -
Non-newtonian Flow -Low-viscosity processing –Solvent processing -Particle behavior -In
situ polymerization -Post-Forming -Hazards of solvent Processing -Melt, high -shear, and
direct processing
UNIT IV
Characterization of nanocomposites: Introduction to characterization - Experiment design -
Sample preparation -Imaging -Structural characterization - Scales in nanocomposites -
Texture -Electromagnetic energy -Visualization - Physicochemical analysis -Characterization
of physical properties -Identification -\Mechanical -Surface mechanical properties.
UNIT V
Applications of nanocomposites: Nanocomposites -Optical, structural applications -
Nanoparticulate systems with organic matrices -Applications - Biodegradable protein
nanocomposites -Applications Polypropylene nanocomposites - Application as exterior
automatic components -Hybrid nanocomposite materials - Application for corrosion
protection
References
1. Thomas E. Twardow ski, Introduction to Nanocomposite Materials -Properties, Processing,
Characterization, DesTech Publications, April 2007
2. Boston New york Washing ton, DC. and Woodhead publishing Itd, England, 2006.
3. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj. Nanocomposites Pentagon Press
4. Nanocomposite Science and Technology Pulickel M. Ajayan , Linda S. Schadler, Paul V.
Braun, 2006, Wiley-VCH

Page 19 of 35
 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
Objectives:
Understand the bases for Introduction to Nanotechnology
The principle of surface Biology and Analysis of Biomolecular Structure.
UNIT I
Introduction to Nanotechnology – Scientific Revolutions – Types of Nanotechnology and
Nanomachines – Nanotechnology Products and Applications – Future Applications of
Nanotechnology – Risks of Nanotechnology.
UNIT II
Nanobiotechnology Overview – Nanobiometrics – Introduction – Lipids as nano-bricks and
mortar – Biocompatible Inorganic Devices - Cell-Nanostructure Interactions - Structure
information-DNA – Nanostructured Systems from Low-Dimensional Building Blocks.
UNIT III
Protein-based Nanostructures – S-Layers – Engineered Nanopores – Microbial Nanoparticle
Production – Magnetosomes-Nanoscale Magnetic Iron Minerals in Bacteria – Polymer
Nanocontainers – Biomolecular Motors Operating in Engineered Environments –
Nanoparticle-Biomaterial Hybrid Systems for Bioelectronic Devices and Circuitry.
UNIT IV
DNA-Protein Nanostructures – DNA-Templated Electronics – Biomimetic Fabrication of
DNA-Based Metallic Nanowires and Networks – Mineralization in Nanostructured
Biocompartments: Biomimetic Ferritins for High-Density Data Storage - DNA-Gold-
Nanoparticle Conjugates.
UNIT V
Surface Biology: Analysis of Biomolecular Structure - Application of Nanoparticle in
Biomedical research: Introduction – Nanotechnologies for Cellular and Molecular Imaging –
Nanoparticles for Cancer Drug Delivery – Bioconjugated Silica Nanoparticles for
Bioanalytical Applications - Impact of Biomedical Nanotechnology – Nanobiomedical
Technology: Financial, Legal, Clinical and Societal Challenges to Implememtation
References
1. Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives – Christof M.
Niemeyer, Chad A. Mirkin, John Wiley & Sons Inc (2004)
2. Nanofabrication Towards Biomedical Applications – Challa S.S.R. Kumar, Josef
Hormes, Carola Leuschner, John Wiley & Sons Inc (2005)
3. Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies – Michael Wilson,
Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Buckhard Raguse, Chapman &
Hall/CRC Press (2002)

Page 20 of 35
 Environmental Pollution Control
Unit – I : Air Pollution: Air pollution Control Methods–Particulate control devices –
Methods of Controlling Gaseous Emissions – Air quality standards.Noise Pollution: Noise
standards, Measurement and control methods – Reducing residential and industrial noise –
ISO14000.
Unit –II : Industrial wastewater Management: – Strategies for pollution control – Volume
and Strength reduction – Neutralization – Equalization – Proportioning – Common Effluent
Treatment Plants – Recirculation of industrial wastes – Effluent standards.
Unit – III : Solid Waste Management: solid waste characteristics – basics of on-site
handling and collection – separation and processing – Incineration- Composting-Solid waste
disposal methods – fundamentals of Land filling.
Unit – IV : Environmental Sanitation: Environmental Sanitation Methods for Hostels and
Hotels, Hospitals, Swimming pools and public bathing places, social gatherings (melas and
fares), Schools and Institutions, Rural Sanitation-low cost waste disposal methods.
Unit – V: Hazardous Waste: Characterization – Nuclear waste – Biomedical wastes –
Electronic wastes – Chemical wastes – Treatment and management of hazardous waste-
Disposal and Control methods.
Text Books
1. Environmental Engineering, by Ruth F. Weiner and Robin Matthews – 4th Edition
Elesevier, 2003.
2. Environmental Science and Engineering by J.G. Henry and G.W. Heinke –
Pearson Education.
3. Environmental Engineering by Mackenzie L Davis & David A Cornwell.
McGraw Hill Publishing.

Page 21 of 35
 Research and Teaching Methodology

Objective:
The main aim of this study is to understand the scope, depth and the overall direction of the
research and teaching methods.

UNIT I (12hrs)
Significance of Life Science Research – Types of Research – Formation of Research
Problem –Formulation of Hypothesis – Sources of Data – Methods of Data Collection –
Sampling design: Random and Non-random.

UNIT II (12hrs)
Meaning of Research - Objectives of Research - Types of Research - Research Approaches
Significance of Research - Research and Scientific Methods - Criteria of Good Research -
Funding agencies- Choosing the Research Problem- Layout of the Research Report – Types –
Precautions in writing Research Reports – Footnotes Bibliography- bibliographic software

UNIT-III (12hrs)
Statistical analysis: Tests of Hypothesis- Parametric and Non-Parametric test:‗t‘ and ‗f‘ Test
ANOVA –χ2 Test-statistical software including SAS, SPSS, sigma and origin

UNIT-IV (10hrs)
Basic Correlation: Definition, Meaning- Correlation types: Simple, Partial and Multiple
Correlation - Regression: Meaning - Linear Regression- Difference between Correlation and
Regression.

UNIT-V (14hrs)
Methodology of teaching:Teaching- Objective of teaching, Phase of teaching- Teaching
methods: Lecture method, Discussion method, Discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving
method, Project method Seminar, Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualized instruction ,
Ways for effective presentation with power point –Documentation – Evaluation: Formative,
summative, & Continuous and comprehensive evaluation- Later adolescent Psychology:
Meaning, Physical, Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral development- Teaching Later
Adolescents.

References:
1. Sampath, K., Pannerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to education and
technology. (2nd reviseded.). New Delhi: Starting publishers.
2. Sharma, S.R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools and
techniques. Jaipur:Mangal:Deep.
3. Vedanayagam, E.G. (1989). Teaching Knowledge for college teachers. New york
:Sterling Publishers.
4. Berg, B. L., Lune, H., 2004. Qualitative research methods for the social sciences,
Pearson Boston.
5. Kothari, C.R., 2004. Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Age
International

Page 22 of 35
6. Merriam, S. B., 1998. Qualitative Research and Case Study Applications in Education.
Revised and Expanded from" Case Study Research in Education.", Jossey-Bass
Publishers, Sansome St, San Francisco, CA.
7. Bogdan, R.C., Biklen, S. K., 1998. Qualitative research in education. An introduction to
theory and methods, Allyn & Bacon, A Viacom Company, MA 02194.
8. Davis, M., 1997. Scientific Papers and Presentations‖ San Diego: Academic Press.
9. Isaac, S., Michael, W., 1971.Handbook in research and evaluation, (2nd ed.), San Diego,
USA.
10. McDonald, J. H., 2009. Handbook of biological statistics, Vol. 2, Baltimore, Sparky
House Publishing. MD, USA.
11. Gomez, K.A., Gomez, A.A., 1984. Statistical procedures for agricultural research, John
Wiley & Sons.
12. Townend, J., 2012. Practical statistics for environmental and biological scientists, John
Wiley & Sons.

Page 23 of 35
 Agricultural Entomology and Pest Management
Pests and diseases are one of the most important factors affecting crop production. Proper
management is critical in order to avoid damages, meet regulatory standards, protect the
environment and decrease pesticide resistance. This course focuses on pest and disease
management in vegetables, greenhouse crops and flowers. However, the principles that are
discussed in this course are relevant also for many other crops.

Objectives
1. To learn about agriculturally important pests.
2. To learn the different methods to avoid occurrence of pests.
3. To study the principles of biological control and pesticides, their properties and how
to wisely use them.

UNIT I
Introduction to Insects; Insect Classification and Agricultural Pests; General anatomy of
insects: Digestive system, Respiratory system, Circulatory system, Reproductive systems of
male and female, Excretory system, Nervous system, Endocrine system. Economic
importance of insects: Harmful, beneficial and productive insects.

UNIT II
Insect Behaviour and Reproduction: Mechanoreception – Mechanical stimuli, detection and
processing; Thermoreception; Chemoreception; Semiochemicals; Vision/light reception-
Reproduction.

UNIT III
Pest management - Sampling and monitoring arthropods - Methods of sampling and
monitoring, Sampling plan – components & types; Insecticides – Types and formulation;
Classification of insecticides on the basis of their chemical nature, mode of entry and mode of
action. Application of insecticides; Problems associated with using insecticides - Toxicity to
humans and wildlife, Resistance to insecticides.

UNIT IV
Integrated pest management – Concepts and principles; Components of IPM – Ecological
aspects of pest management, Host plant resistance and biological components of IPM – Host
plant resistance, biological control predators, parasitoids, microbes (fungi, bacteria, virus),
entomopathogenic nematodes. Pest management through botanicals, behavioural
modification and radiation technology.

UNIT V
Spray application techniques - Contact pesticides, Systemic insecticides and Translaminar
insecticides, spray application, types nozzle selection, spray pressure and sprayer capacity.
Biotechnology approaches and IPM case studies - Biotechnology approaches in IPM; IPM
case studies - field crops and pulses (Paddy), Commercial crops (Cotton and sugarcane),
vegetable (Tomato) and fruits (Mango).

Page 24 of 35
Text books:
1. Richards, O.W., Davies,R. G., 1977. Imms' general textbook of entomology. Volume 2:
classification and biology, Springer, pp. 388.
2. Whitten, M.J., 1992. Pest management in 2000: what we might learn from the twentieth
century In: Kadir, A.A.S.A. (Ed.), Pest Management and the Environment in 2000. C.A.B.I.,
Wallingford, pp. 9-44.
3. Hall, F. R., Menn, J. J., 1998. Biopesticides: Use and Delivery (Methods in
Biotechnology), Humana Press, 1st Edition, pp 640.
4. Pedigo, L. P., Rice, M. E., 2006. Entomology and Pest Management, 5th edn. Upper
Saddle River, N], USA.
5. Harris, J., Dent, D., 2001.Priorities in Biopesticide Research and Development in
Developing Countries (Biopesticides), CABI Publ.
7. Burgess, H.D., 1981. Microbial control of pest and diseases, Academic press, New York.
8. Hunter-Fujita, F. R., Entwistle, P. F., Evans, H. F., Crook, N.E., 1998. Insect Viruses and
Pest Management, John Wiley, New York, pp. 620.
9. Ramakrishna Ayyar,T.,1940 Handbook of economic Entomology for South India,
Government Press, Madras [Chennai], pp. 528.

Page 25 of 35
 Sustainable Agriculture
Sustainable agriculture is farming in sustainable ways (meeting society's food and
textile needs in the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet
their own needs) based on an understanding of ecosystem services, the study of relationships
between organisms and their environment.
Objectives
1. To achieve environmental health by meeting current needs without sacrificing future
needs.
2. To attain economic profitability by sustainable use of energy sources along with
renewable energy production and consumption
3. To adopt labour practices along with social and economic equity.
Unit I 12 hours
Fundamentals of Agronomy - Importance of agriculture, Agricultural classification of crops,
Soil and climatic requirements, varieties, cultural practices, special systems of cultivation,
harvesting and processing of major crops, Soil productivity and fertility. - Crop nutrition -
nutrients -classification - Nutrient sources - organic manures -fertilizers – biofertilizers;
Irrigation - methods - drip and sprinkle irrigation systems. Water management of different
crops - rice, banana and vegetables.
Unit II 12 hours
Plant Breeding and Seed technology - Morphology and systematics of crop plants - General
features - morphology of roots, stem, leaves, flowers, fruits and seeds .Introduction to field
crops - Classification of field crops. Principles of plant breeding - Modes of reproduction,
Sexual, Asexual, Apromixis and their classification; Modes of pollination, genetic
consequences, differences between self and cross pollinated crops; Methods of breeding.
Seed Technology - definition-structure of a seed-seed development process, Definition,
Characters of good quality seed, Factors affecting seed quality - ecological influences ,
packing practices, harvest and post-harvest handling, Genetic and agronomic principles of
seed production, Seed testing procedures for quality assessment- Physical, Purity,
germination and viability test.
Unit III 12 hours
Fundamentals of organic farming - Conventional, sustainable, and alternate agriculture-
Alternate agricultural systems- biodynamic farming, natural farming, organic farming,
permaculture, homa farming, and other formslimitations- Modernization of agriculture and its
relation to sustainability. -Natural resource management as a part of sustainable resource
management -crop production practices; Organic agriculture - Organic farming and food
security-Principles of organic farming. Tools and practices of organic farming: Planned crop
rotation, Green manures and cover crops, Manuring and composting, multiple
cropping.Intercropping in relation to maintenance of soil productivity Farming System
Approach for Sustainable Crop Production.
Unit IV 12 hours
Farming System Approach for Sustainable Crop Production - crop production, different
cropping systems; Cropping pattern - Multiple cropping and various forms- advantages and
disadvantages- Intercropping- ecological basis of intercropping systems- types; Crop
planning, crop calendar and cropping scheme preparation-factors affecting cropping schemes.
Plant interactions- Allelopathy, Competition; Farming systems- components- Livestock-
poultry- aquaculture- apiculture- sericulture. Incorporation of components of Integrated
farming system in homestead farming. Integrated farming system (IFS) models for uplands
and low lands for sustainable and organic agriculture- Evaluation of farming systems.

Page 26 of 35
 Unit V 12 hours
Government Policies and Programmes related to agriculture – National Agricultural Policy in
brief; Agricultural policies regarding land and labour; Agricultural policies regarding seeds -
National Seeds Policy -varietal development and plant variety protection - seed production -
quality assurance - seed distribution and marketing - infrastructure facilities - transgenic plant
varieties - import of seeds and planting material - export of seeds -promotion of domestic
seed industry Agricultural policies regarding fertilizers - Fertilizer pricing policy - payment
of subsidy. Agricultural policies regarding plant protection chemicals - pesticide production
and consumption in India - protection of consumers from adverse impacts of pesticides.
Agricultural policies regarding irrigation, machinery, technology.
Text Books:
1. Balasubramaniyan, P and Palaniappan, S.P. 2001. Principles and Practices of Agronomy
2. AgroBios(India )Ltd., Jodhpur.
3. Cox, G.W and Atkins, M.D. 1979. Agricultural Ecology : An Analysis of World Food
4. Production Systems. W.H. Freeman and Company, San Francisco
5. De, G.C.1989.Fundamentals of Agronomy. Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi.
6. Havlin, J. L., Beaton, J. D., Tisdale, S.L., and Nelsothn, W.L. 2006. Soil Fertility and
7. Fertilizers: An Introduction to Nutrient Management (7 ed.). Pearson Education, Delhi.
8. Chalam, G.V., J. Venkateswarlu. 1966. Agricultural Botany in India-Vol. 1. Asia
pulishing house, Bombay, New Delhi
9. Daniel Sundararaj, D and G. Thulasidas, 1993. Botany of field crops. Macmillan India
Ltd., New Delhi.
10. Palaniappan, S.P and Anandurai, K. 1999. Organic Farming- Theory and Practice,
Scientific Pub., Jodhpur.
11. Government of India. Five year Plan Documents.
12. Government of India.Economic Survey. Published by Planning Commission (various
issues)
13. Government of India.Economic Review. Published by State Planning Board (various
issues).

Page 27 of 35
 Eco friendly Bioproducts
It is essential to develop alternative technologies to prevent any further damage health and the
environment. Speeding their implementation can benefit our environment and truly protect
the planet. Explore the goals of green technology, introducing sustainable living, develop
renewable energy and reduce waste.
Objective:
1. To provide knowledge on biofertilizer
2. To develop students technical skills on bio fertilizer production
Unit I General Biofertilizers 12 Hours
Bacterial, fungal and algal biofertilizers; mycorrhiza -types-endo, ectomycorrhiza and
orchidaceous mycorrhiza, Problems and prospects of biofertilizers. Rhizobium- Physiology,
Rhizobium interactions, mass cultivation
Unit II Production of Biofertilizers 12 hours
Largescale production of biofertilizers, Blue green algae, VAM fungi- Field application of
biofertilizers - method of application; Chlorella biofertilizer-growth parameters-Mushroom
cultivation.
Unit III Bacterial Biofertilizers 12 hours
Cyanobacteria as biofertilizers – Azolla- Bacterial biofertilizers - Mass production of
Azospirillum, Azotobacter and Phosphobacteria; N2 fixation - Phosphate solubilization and
mobilization.
Unit IV Biopesticides 12 hours
Definition, kinds and commerce of biopesticide, Bacillus thuringiensis, insect viruses and
entomopathogenic fungi – its characters, physiology, mechanism of action and application of
bioinsectides - neem and related natural products.
Unit V Vermicompost Technology 12 hours
Introduction to vermiculture, biology, economic important, their value in maintenance of soil
structure, production of organic fertilizers by vermiculture- Earthworm farming, Extraction
(harvest), vermicomposting- vermiwash collection, composition and use harvest and
processing.
Suggested List of Exercises:

Books Studies:
1. Altman, A., 1997. Agricultural biotechnology, CRC Press.
2. Ariëns, E.J., Van Rensen J., Welling, W., 1988. Stereo selectivity of pesticides.
Biological and chemical problems. Chemicals in agriculture. Volume 1, Elsevier
Science Publishers, The Netherland.
3. Blackburn, R.S., 2009. Sustainable textiles: Life cycle and environmental impact.
Elsevier Science Publishers, The Netherland.
4. Board, N., 2004. The complete technology book on vermiculture and vermicompost
CRC Press.
5. Costanza, R., Norton, B.G., Haskell, B. D., 1992. Ecosystem health: new goals for
environmental management, Island Press.USA.
6. Kannaiyan, S. 2002.Biotechnology of Biofertilizer, Narosa Publishing House, New
Delhi.

Page 28 of 35
Book References:
1. Franklin R.H., Julius, J.M. 1999.Biopesticides - Use and Delivery. Humana Press Inc,
USA.
2. Purohit, S.S. 2003. Agricultural Biotechnology, Agrobios, India.
3. Nutman, P.S. 1976. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation in plants, Cambridge Univ. Press,
London.
4. Cavaco-Paulo, A., Gubitz, G., 2003. Textile processing with enzymes Elsevier
Science Publishers, The Netherland.
5. Chouhan, N., Kumar, A., Sharma, A., Ameta, R., 2013. Eco-Friendly Products. Green
Chemistry: Past, Present, and Future: CRC Press.
6. Croft, B.A., 1990. Arthropod biological control agents and pesticides. John Wiley and
Sons Inc., UK.
7. Entwistle, P.F., Cory, J., Bailey, M., Higgs, S., 1993. Bacillus thuringiensis: an
environmental biopesticide: theory and practice, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
UK.eprnt), CBS Publishers and Distributers, New Delhi.
7. Yadav, A.K., Motsara M.R and Raychaudhuri S., 2001 Recent Advances in
Biofertilizer Technology, SPURT publication, New Delhi.

Page 29 of 35
 River Ecosystem Ecology
Preamble: The goals for this course are to gain an understanding of: 1) major physical and
biological features of streams and rivers, 2) the range of diversity of running waters around
the world, 3) fundamental processes producing patterns of riverine structure and function, and
4) critical issues associated with the conservation and management of streams and their biota.
Objective:
The main aim of the course is to teach the Stream/River ecology.
To provide scientific knowledge on Stream/River management.
Unit 1
Introduction – Stream order – Stream flow – Hydrology- Flow alteration- Environmental
Flow- Fluvial Geomorphology – Discharge – Channel Morphology.
Unit 11
Stream water chemistry – Nutrient dynamics – Nutrient pollutions –Scaling of Sediment
dynamics in the River Environment– Sediment Management - Influence of chemical factors
on stream / river biota.
Unit 111
Stream / River ecological theories – River continuum concept – importance of connectivity
in stream / Riverine Ecology- River Fragmentation- Biogeochemistry of NPC (nitrogen,
phosphorus, carbon) – Organic matter budgets.

Unit 1V
Biotic interactions – Terrestrial aquatic linkage. Primary producer – Heterotrophic energy –
Source in stream/river – Trophic relationships – Drift composition and periodicity –
Functional basis of drift – Riparian vegetation.
Unit V
Stream/River management – River modifications – Dams and impoundments – Alien species
– Climate change – Recovery and restoration of running waters.
Reference Books:
1. Nancy D. Gordon, Thomas A. McMahon, Brian L. Finlayson, Christopher J. Gippel,
Rory J. Nathan. Stream Hydrology: An introduction for Ecologists.
2. Barbara A. Hauser. Drinking Water Chemistry: A Laboratory Manual.
3. Richard F. Hauer, Gary Lamberti. Methods in Stream Ecology: Volume 1: Ecosystem
Structure.
4. Walter K. Dodds and Matt R. Whiles. Freshwater Ecology: Concepts and
Environmental Applications of Limnology.
5. David J. Allan. Stream Ecology: The Structure and Function of Running Waters.
6. Philip J. Boon, Paul J. Raveen. River Conservation and Management.
7. Gary J. Brierley and Kirstie A. Fryirs (2005) Geomorphology and River Management:
Applications of the River Styles Framework. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, UK,
398pp.
8. Kathleen Weathers, David Strayer, Gene Likens. Fundamental of Ecosystem Science.
9. Vannote et al . The River Continum Concept.
10. Allan, J. David, Castillo, Maria M. Stream Ecology: Structure and function of running
waters.

Page 30 of 35
 RESTORATION ECOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
Preamble: The primary goal of this course is to develop critical thinking skills in the
application of ecological principles to restoration.
Objective:
1.To understand the ecological concepts relevant for restoring ecosystems and critically think
about the scientific/logistic challenges of applying these concepts into a restoration plan.
2. Students will describe the role of key ecological concepts in restoration
Unit I
Restoration Ecology - Definition, principles, concepts and strategies.(long term vs. short
term); physical, chemical and biological restoration; role of ecological principles in
restoration, role of pioneer species in restoration and holistic approach in restoration.
Unit II
Restoration of natural resources; restoration of river corridor, water resources and mine
spoils. Approaches to Flood Plain Mana4ement, Concepts and Programs related to
Restoration and Management of Lakes, Rivers and streams, Riverine = Riparian ecosystem
and Wetlands, Fluvial restoration.
Unit III
Planning and evaluating aquatic ecosystem restoration — Project planning, Purpose of
evaluation, Selecting assessment criteria and synthesizing data. Introduction to watershed,
concept and significance. Physical and hydrological characteristics of watershed. Drain —
line treatment; Area treatment — Goals, features and watershed as unit of sustainable
development.

Unit IV
Integrated Aquatic Ecosystem Restoration- Introduction, Institutional barriers to Integrated
Aquatic Restoration, Importance of Integrated restoration to wildlife, Appropriate scale for
restoration, Use of Historical records in reconstructing watersheds. Impact of human
activities on water resources, climate change threats to water quality, Shifts in freshwater
ecosystems
Unit V
National restoration goals, Policy and Program. redesigning for restoration Integrated Water
Resource Management (IWRM),. Role of. public participation, government agencies and
NGOs in conservation and restoration; environmental education and its role in conservation
and restoration. Finish Biotic restoration Landscape ecology and restoration Finish
monitoring and adaptive management
Reference Book
1. John CairnS Jr., 1992. Restoration of Aquatic Ecosystems - Science, Technology and
Public Policy. National Academy Press. Washington D.C.
2. Adamus, P.R., Clairain, E. J., Smith R.D., Young R. E., 1987. Wetland Evaluation
Technuique (WET). Vol II. Methodology Operational Draft. U.S. Army cors of Engineers
waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
3. Barker, LA and E. B. Swain, 1989. Review of lake management in Minne-sota. Lake
Reservoir Manage. 5:1-10.

Page 31 of 35
4.Young, T. P. 2000. Restoration ecology and conservation biology. Biological Conservation
92: 73.83.
5. Hobbs, R. J. and Harris, J. A 2001. Restoration ecology: repairing the Earth's ecosystems
in the new millennium. Restoration Ecology 9: 239-246.
6. Van Diggelen et al. 2001. Ecological restoration: state of the art or state of the science?
Restoration Ecology 9: 115-118.
7. Ehrenfeld, J. G. 2000. Defining the limits of restoration: the need for realistic goals.
Restoration Ecology 8: 2-9.
8. McClanahan, T. R. and Wolfe, ft W. 1993. Accelerating forest succession in a fragmented
landscape: the role of birds and perches. Conservation Biology 7: 279-288.
9. Palmer et al. 1997. Ecological theory and community restoration ecology. Restoration
Ecology 5: 291-300.
10.Cairns, J.Jr., and T. V. Crawford, eds. 1991. Integrated Environmental Management.
Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, Mich. 214 pp.

Page 32 of 35
 Biostatistics and Science writing
Course overview:
Biostatistics is essential to analyse biological variations by the interpretation of results obtained from
various research studies. This course would help in acquiring knowledge on the statistical tools
relevant for the study. Science communication is a rapidly expanding area and meaningful
engagement between scientists and the public requires effective communication. Contents of this
course would enable research scholars to get started with science writing and effective communication
Objectives:
to understand the basic concepts and utility of common statistical techniques for biological data.
to stress on the importance and appropriateness of statistical methods, their assumptions, validity and
interpretation.
to understand the methods of communicating science research to the community.
to use writing for the purposes of reflection, action and participation in academic inquiry.

Unit I 6 Hrs
Introduction to Biostatistics - population, sample, variable, parameter, primary and secondary data,
screening and representation of data, frequency distribution, tabulation, bar diagram, histograms, pie
diagram.
Unit II 10 hrs
Mean, median, mode, quartiles and percentiles, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of variation;
Probability and distributions- definition of probability (frequency approach), independent events.
Addition and multiplication rules, conditional probability.
Unit III 10 hrs
Correlation and Regression analysis: Correlations and regressions-: Relation between two variables,
scatter diagram, definition of correlations, curve fitting, principles of least squares, Two regression
lines, Karl Pearson‘s coefficient of correlation, Rank correlation, chi-square test for independence, P-
value of the statistic, confidence limits, one way analysis of variance.
Unit IV 6 hrs
Introduction to concepts research communication - popular science writing genres,
Components of research article – various types and styles of writing - opinion –
correspondence – Research communication – research article – review article.
Unit V 5 hrs
Report writing scholarly and popular media - disciplinary relevance - effective drafting
techniques. – Peer review process - Plagarism - publication ethics – copyright and use of
publication - Creative Commons
Text Book/Reading material
1. Gurumani, N. 2010 An introduction to Biostatistics. MJP Publishers. Chennai. 376 pp.
2. Rao, P.S.S S and J. Richard 2012 Introduction to Biostatistics and Research Methods (Fifth
Edition) PHI Learning Private Limited. 322 pp.
3. Banerjee, K. P. 2007 Introduction to Biostatistics. S Chand publishers, New Delhi.
4. Ramakrishnan, P. 2015 Biostatistics Saras publication, 416 pp.
Reference
1. Pagano M. and Gauvreau, K, 2000 Principles of Biostatistics, Duxbury Press, USA.
2. Turabian, K. L. 2007 A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Dissertations 7th
edition. University of Chicago Press. 470 pp.

Page 33 of 35
 Freshwater Ecology
Course Overview This course will develop the principles of aquatic ecology, with a focus on
their application to freshwater ecosystems (streams, rivers, wetlands, and lakes). This course
aims at providing a comprehensive understanding of all the major element cycles, patterns of
energy flow through ecosystems, and the links between ecosystem structure and function so
that we can critically evaluate how complex processes (climate change, watershed
urbanization) may directly or indirectly impact aquatic ecosystems.
Objectives:
To understand the interaction of biotic and abiotic factors in aquatic systems.
To have an overview of the role of hydrological cycle and importance of aquatic
systems.
To critically evaluate the complexity of ecosystem processes (nutrient distribution,
impact of climatic change) in aquatic ecosystems
To impart knowledge on various threats and conservation strategies.
Unit I 10 Hrs
Introduction to Aquatic ecology – Hydrological cycle - Properties of Water –- Stratification
and Mixing Classification – biotic and abiotic components. Biotic integrity.

Unit II 8 Hrs
Energy and Trophic Dynamics - Primary production in streams, rivers, and lakes - Energy
transfer – modification of organic matter - Stream metabolism
Unit III 10 Hrs
Various Freshwater bodies – streams, rivers, lakes Swamps and marshes: Physicochemical
conditions. Nutrient cycling. Biotic components. Origin and characteristics of river.
Functions. Biological productivity. watershed and water drainage.
Unit IV 9 Hrs
Major threats to freshwater systems - Impact of dams and fragmentation on river ecology.
River continuum concept. Pollution and eutrophication. Climate change implications on
freshwater systems. Habitat quality and Biomonitoring potential
Unit V 7 Hrs
Conservation and Management of aquatic ecosystems – role of government and agencies –
Restoration ecology - Ecological concepts of restoration ecology - Barriers to effective
management
Text Book/Reading material
1. Dey. S and B. Nasrin 2014 Ecology of Aquatic systems. Scientific International (Pvt.) Ltd.
2. Munshi J. D., and J. Datta 2015 Fundamentals of Limnology. Astral Publisher.
3. Agarwal. S.C., 1999 Limnology 4th edition CBS Publishers.
Reference
1. Allan, J.D. and Castillo, M.M. 2009. Stream Ecology (Second Ed.). Springer, Netherlands.
2. Keddy, P.A. 2000. Wetland Ecology. Principles and Conservation. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
3. Dodds. W and W. M. Whiles 2010 Freshwater Ecology 2nd Edition Concepts and
Environmental Applications of Limnology. Academic Press. 829 Pp.
4. Closs, G., Downes, B and A. Boulton 2004 Freshwater Ecology: A Scientific Introduction
EPZ Edition
5. Falk, D. A., Palmer, M. A. et al. 2006. Foundations of Restoration Ecology. Island Press,
Washington, DC.
6. Frid C and M Dobson 2013 Ecology of Aquatic Management Second Edition. Oxford
Unviersity Press 352 pages

Page 34 of 35
 Biological Invasions and Management
Course Overview
Invasive species are among the world‘s worst threats to biodiversity and is likely to cause
economic and environmental damage. This course aims to provide an overall understanding
of the impact of invasive species and its management. The important aspect of this course is
to extend the learning to help in protecting the species and ecosystems from the impact of
invasive species.
Objectives
To learn the basic concepts of invasive species and their impacts
To understand the patterns of invasion and traits of successful invasive species
To develop concepts based on the information available from various invasion models
To design and develop management measures to control exotic invasive species
Unit I 8 Hrs
Biological invasions – invasive species: impact, overview of the problem and modes of
exotics spread both historically and currently, political impacts.

Unit II 6 Hrs
Accidental introductions - Aquatic and terrestrial environments - Human mediated spread and
other intentional introductions - Epidemics and epizootics
Unit III 8 Hrs
Characteristics of successful invasive species - Community and ecosystem - structure and
function - Disruption of normal ecosystem function by exotics
Unit IV 8 Hrs
Patterns and dynamics of spread of invasive species – overview of invasion models – Case
studies – Biosecurity failures - Feral Cat Management in Tasmania – African cat fish in India.
Unit V 10 Hrs
Invasive species management – organizations – IUCN – Invasive Species Specialist Group
(ISSG) – National biodiversity authority (NBA) - methods of invasive species control –
awareness and strategies

References:
1. Shigesada N and K. Kawasaki, 1997, Biological Invasions: Theory and Practice , Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
2. Simberloff D 2013 Invasive Species: What Everyone Needs to Know. Oxford University
Press,. 352 pp
3. Lockwood, Julie L., Martha F. Hoopes and Michael P. Marchetti. 2007. Invasion Ecology.
Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
4. Mooney, Harold A. and Richard J. Hobbs. 2000. Invasive Species in a Changing World.
Washington: Island Press.

Page 35 of 35
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVEL-12

PhD Course Structure for our University Departments

(Effective from the academic year 2018-2019 onwards)

Sri Paramakalyani Centre of Excellence in Environmental Science

PhD Programme: Environmental Science

Page 1 of 35
 PhD PROGRAMME: ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

S.No TITLE OF THE SUBJECT

1. Environmental Pollution and Toxicology
2. Instrumentation and Methodology for Environmental Analysis
3. Environmental Chemistry
4. Waste Recycling and Resource Recovery Technology
5. Fundamental Chemistry
6. Environmental Nanoscience
7. Environmental Microbiology
8. Pollution Control Engineering and Bioremediation
9. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management
10. Introduction to Nanoscience
11. Synthesis of Nanomaterials
12. Characterization techniques for Nanomaterials
13. Methods of Nanofabrication
14. Nanomedicine
15. Nanocomposite
16. Nanobiotechnology
17. Environmental Pollution Control
18. Research and Teaching Methodology
19. Agricultural Entomology and Pest Management
20. Sustainable Agriculture
21. Eco Friendly Bioproducts
22. River Ecosystem Ecology
23. Restoration Ecology and Management
24. Biostatistics and Science Writing
25. Freshwater Ecology
26. Biological Invasions and Management
27. Mini Project

Page 2 of 35
 Environmental Pollution and Toxicology
Unit I 8hrs
Introduction – Major Industrial Effluents – Sewage – Characteristics, Fertilizers – Pesticides
and other agrochemicals – Heavy metals – Mercury, Cadmium, Chromium, Lead, Aluminum,
Arsenic, Copper, Nickel and their toxicity – Ground water contamination – Soil Pollution –
Environmental impacts of use and throw plastics - Hospital wastes and their environmental
impacts
Unit II 8hrs
Air pollution – Sources – Oxides of Carbon, Nitrogen, Sulphur, Hydrocarbons – Transport
and Diffusion – Effects of air pollutants on life and properties – Measurement of airborne
contaminants-Acid rain – Ozone depletion – Global warming and their consequences –
Radioactive Pollution – Thermal pollution – Noise pollution – Sources and effects – Fate of
air, water and soil pollutants - Episodes of pollution
Unit III 8hrs
Principles and Methodologies for the quantitative analyses of TOC, chromium, cadmium,
arsenic, mercury, copper, lead, nickel and zinc in waste water – Estimation of NOx, CO2,
CO, SO2 and SPM in air.
Unit IV 8hrs
General principles of toxicology - Scope of toxicology - Outlines of toxicological testing
methods, cost effective bioassays - Toxicity and Probit Analysis - Bioassays – Mechanism of
action of toxicants - Routes of exposure - Routes of entry of xenobiotics - Absorption and
Translocation – Biotransformation - Combined action of toxicants - Factors influencing
toxicity - Dose effect and Dose response relationship

Unit V 8hrs
Toxicity – Cytotoxicity, Immunotoxicity, Hepatotoxicity, Molecular toxicity, Neurotoxicity -
Carcinogens, mutagens and teratogens. Ecotoxicology and human toxicology, Behaviour of
toxicants in the environment – Occupational exposure to industrial toxicants -
Bioaccumulation, Biomagnification – Toxic residues - Residual analytical methods - Safety
evaluation of toxic chemicals
Reference
1.Josephy, P. D., Mannervik, B., de Montellano, B.O., 1997. Molecular Toxicology. Oxford
University Press, UK.
2.Tomlin, C., 2000. The Pesticide Manual. 11th edition,. British Crop Protection Council.
Several editions. updated every few (2-4) years.
3.Bryant, R., Bite, M., Hopkins, WL., 1999. Global insecticide directory, 2nd ed. Ed.. Ag.
Chem. Inform. Services, Agranova.
4.Krishnan Kannan, K., 1997. Fundamentals of Environmental Pollution, S. Chand Company,
New Delhi.
5.Sharma, B. K., Kaur, H., 2000. Environmental Chemistry, Goel Publishing House, Meerut,
India.
6.Anderson, K., Scott, R., 1981. Fundamentals of industrial toxicology, Ann. Arbor. Science
Publishing Inc. Michigam. USA.
7.Ecobicham, D., 2004. The basis of toxicity testing, CRC press, USA.
Page 3 of 35
8.Prasad, D.N., Kashyap, V., 1999. Introduction to toxicology, S. Chand Company, New
Delhi
9.De Matters, F., Smith, L., 1995. Molecular and Cellular Mechanisms of Toxicity CRC
Press, USA
10.Dara, S.S., 2000. A text book of environmental chemistry and pollution control. S. Chand
Company, New Delhi.
11.Sharma, P. D., 1993. Environmental Biology and Toxicology, Rastogi Publications, New
Delhi.
12.A.G.Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, Environmental Science and Biotechnology – Theory
and Techniques, MJP Publishers.
13.Nation, J. L., 2008. Insect Physiology and Biochemistry, Second Edition, CRC Press,
USA.
14.Josephy, P. D., Mannervik, B., de Montellano, P.O., 1997. Molecular Toxicology, Oxford
University Press, UK.
15.Finney, D. J., 1971. Probit Analysis. 3rd edition. Cambridge University Press, UK
16.Subramanian, M.A., 2004. Toxicology: Principals and methods, MJP Publishers.
17.APHA. 1975. Standard methods for the examination of waste water. AWWA, New York.
18.A.K. Gupta. Industrial Safety and Environment. 2013. University Science Press.

Page 4 of 35
 Instrumentation and Methodology for Environmental Analysis
Unit- I 8hrs
Centrifugation: Low speed-high speed-ultra refrigerated centrifuges. Principles and operation
methods of weighing devices- Preparation of buffers and stock solutions of media/ reagents-
Preparation of normality- ppm- solutions. Microtome-Cryocutting-Sectioning-Staining,
Haemocytometer
Unit –II 8hrs
Chromatographic techniques- TLC- Electrophoresis: Polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis
(PAGE) and agarose gel electrophoresis. Biosensors: Definition – components of biosensors-
types of biosensors- Enzyme electrodes- Bacterial electrodes- Enzyme immunosensors-
Environmental biosensors. Instrumentation techniques: HPLC, SEM, XRD, GC, UV, FTIR,
DSC/TGA, TEM, AFM
Unit- III 8hrs
Scientific research: Methods of scientific research- Preparation of rebview article- editing
research paper- collection of literature- references- bibliography and thesis writing
Unit-IV 8hrs
Principles of pollution analysis: Gravimetric Methods- Volumetric Methods- Solvent
Extraction evaporations- Toxic metal pollutants analysis (Chromium, Mercury)- Air pollution
analysis- Sampling Methods for Aerosols- Sampling of Gaseous Pollutants-Analysis of
aerosols- Analysis of gaseous pollutants (SO2, H2S, NO2-NOX, CO-CO2, ozone and NH3 )
Unit-V 8hrs
Principles of Monitoring Methods- Analysis of Soil Quality- pH, EC, Total Nitrogen-Organic
Carbon-C: N ratio – Water Quality- Residual Chlorine- Fluorides. Estimation of Phenols.
Pesticide Analysis- Spectroscopic Analysis and GC- Noise Measurement – Sampling of
Odors- Measurement of Odor.
References
1.Chatwal, G. and Anand, S. 1989. Instrumentation methods of chemical analysis. Himalayas
Publishing House, Delhi.
2.Robinson, J.W. (ed) 1991. Practical Handbook of spectroscopy CRC Press, Boston.
3.Webster, J.C. (ed). 2005. Bioinstrumentation. John Wiley & Sons Inc., Singapore
4.Guruman, N. 2006. Research methodology for Biological Sciences. MJP Publishers, Chennai.
5.Palanichamy, S. Shunmugavelu, M. 2006. Research methods in Biological sciences. Sarojini for
Palani paramount Publication. Anna Nagar Palani.
6.Cannel, J.P.1998. Natural products isolation, Humana Press New Jersey.
7.Harbone, J.B. 2003. Phytochemical methods. (5th Edition) Chapman &Hall, London.
8.Keith Wilson, 2000. A practical guide to clinical biochemistry.
9.Murugesan A.G. andRajakumari C. Environmental Science and Biotechnology Theory and
Techniques. 2009 (3rd Edition). MJP Publishers.
10.S.M. Khopkar. (2001). Environmental Pollution analysis. New Age International (p) Limited,
Publishers

Page 5 of 35
 Environmental Chemistry
UNIT I 7hrs
Introduction to Environmental Science – Water, Air, Earth, Life and Technology – Ecology –
Energy and Cycles of Energy – Human impact and Pollution – Atmosphere and Atmospheric
chemistry – The Geosphere and Soil – The Biosphere
UNIT II 7hrs
Overview to Environmental chemical analysis – Classical methods – Spectrophotometric
method – Electrochemical methods – Gas Chromatography – Mass spectrometry – Analysis
of water samples – Analysis of sulfur dioxide – Analysis of Hydrocarbons
UNIT III 7hrs
Introduction to water pollution – Nature and types of water pollutants – Elemental pollutants,
Heavy metals and Metalloids – Organic pollutants – Pesticides in water – Water treatment
and water use – Sewage treatment – Removal calcium and other metals- Water Reuse and
recycle
UNIT IV 7hrs
Particles in the atmosphere – Physical behavior of particles in the atmosphere – The
composition of inorganic particles – Toxic metals – Radioactive particles – The composition
of organic particles – Effect of particles – Control of particulate emissions
UNIT V 7hrs
Origin of Hazardous wastes – Transport of Hazardous wastes – Effect of Hazardous wastes –
Fates of Hazardous wastes - Hazardous wastes in the Geosphere - Hazardous wastes in
Hydrosphere - Hazardous wastes in Atmosphere - Hazardous wastes in Biosphere
References
1.Manahan SE, Environmental Chemistry (6th Ed.), Lewis Publishers, USA
2.Schwarzenbach, Rene P., Phillip M. Gschwend, and Dieter M. Imboden, Environmental
Organic Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993.
3.Simpson, Peter, Basic Concepts in Organic Chemistry—A Programmed Learning
Approach, Chapman and Hall, London, 1994.
4.Solomons, T. W. Graham, Organic Chemistry, 6th ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York,
1998.
5.Sorrell, Thomas N., Organic Chemistry, University Science Books, Sausalito, CA, 1999.
6.Timberlake,Karen C., Chemistry: An Introduction to General, Organic, and Biological
Chemistry, Benjamin/Cummings, Menlo Park, CA, 1999.
7.Vollhardt, K. Peter C. and Neil E. Schore, Organic Chemistry: Structure and Function, 3rd
ed., W.H. Freeman, New York, 1999.

Page 6 of 35
 Waste Recycling and Resource Recovery Technology
Objectives:
To impart knowledge on waste recycling and resource recovery from wastes.
UnitI:Introduction
Solid waste – Sources – Domestic, industrial and agriculture sources- Industrial wastes-
Mineral wastes – Indentification waste – Minimizing options -Recovery and Recycle-
Composting- Vermi composting – Incineration – Energy from waste- Pyrolysis, chemical
processing- Legislative measures for garbage disposal.
UnitII: FlyAsh
Introduction- Nature- Direct Replacement of Cement- Waste Land Development- Soil
Amendment to grow Crops- Utilization of Flyash In Afforestation, Limitation of Land
Application of Fly Ash.
UnitIII:PlasticWaste,IndustrialWaste
Introduction – Amount and types of plastic waste – Recycling of plastic waste-cement
manufacture from industrial solid waste – Paper industry waste – Calcium carbide industry
waste.
UnitIV:BioFuels&BioEthanol
Bio ethanol production technologies- Bio hydrogen- its application – Methanogenesis from
agroindustrial residues- Bio mass – Gasifier based power plants.
UnitV:WasteWater
Introduction reuse- Quality, the basic treatment processes – Benefits of reuse in agriculture –
The costs of reuse projects and economic justification – Factors essential for the success of
reuse projects- Case study.
Textbook:
1. Agarwal S.K. ―Wealth from Waste‖,Kul Bhushan Nangia, APH Publishing
Corporation, New Delhi, 2005
References:
1. Nemerow N.L., ―Industrial Water Pollution‖, Addison – Wesley Publishing
Company inc., USA, 1978
2. Wesley Eckenfelder Jr. W, Industrial water pollution control, McGraw Hill
book Co, New Delhi, 1989.
3. Mahajan S.P. ―Pollution Control in process industries‖, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co Ltd., New Delhi, 1989.

Page 7 of 35
 FUNDAMENTAL CHEMISTRY
Unit I Inorganic chemistry –Zero group elements 5 Hrs (3L+2P)
Isolation of inert gases by physical and chemical methods – preparation and properties of
xenon tetrafluoride, xenon hexafluoride, xenon oxytetrafluoride – uses of noble gases –
clathrates and their uses.
Unit II Organic chemistry – Principles of reactions 6 Hrs (3L+3P)
Heterolytic and hemolytic cleavage – nucleophiles and electrophiles – reaction intermediates
– preparation and properties of carbonium ions, carbanions and free radicals – types of
reactions – substitution, addition, elimination and polymerization reactions.
Unit III Physical chemistry – Photochemistry 7Hrs (4L+3P)
Definition – composition between thermal and photochemical reactions – Laws of
photochemistry-Beer Lambert‘s law-Grothus Draper law-Einstein‘s law-Quantum yield-low
and high quantum yield-determination of quantum yield-fluorescences, phosphorescence,
thermoluminescence, chemiluminescence and bioluminescence – definition with examples –
photosensitization.
Unit IV Polymer chemistry 7 Hrs (4L+3P)
Defination-Monomers, Oligomers, Polymers – Classification of polymers – Natural,
synthetic, linear, cross linked and network – plastics, elastomers, fibres, homopolymers and
Co-polymers. Thermoplastics – Polyethylene, Polypropylene, polystyrene, Polyacrylonitrile,
poly vinyl chloride, nylon and polyester – Thermosetting plastics - :Phenol formaldehyde and
exposxide resin – Elastomers – Natural rubber and synthetic rubber – Buna N, Buna – S and
neoprene.
Unit V Applied chemistry 7 Hrs (4L+3P)
Lubricants – classification - criteria of good lubricating oils – synthetic lubricating oils – poly
glycols and poly alkene oxides – greases or semi solid lubricants examples – solid lubricants
– graphite. Preparation and uses of shampoo, nail polish, sun screens, tooth powder, tooth
paste, boot polish, moth ball, chalk piece.
Suggested List of Exercises:
Books Studies:
1. R. T. Morrison, R. N. Boyd and S. K. Bhattacharjee, Organic Chemistry, 7th Edition,
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. S. H. Pine, Organic Chemistry, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2008.
3. Michael B. Smith, Jerry March, March's Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions,
Mechanisms, and Structure, John Wiley & Sons, 6th edition, 2007.
Books References:
1. L. Finar, Organic Chemistry, Vol. I & II, 5th Edition, Longman Ltd., New Delhi,
1975.
2. D. Nasipuri, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds: Principles and Applications,
4th edition, New Academic Science Publisher.
3. Peter Sykes, Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry (6th Edition), Longman
Scientific & Technical, 1985
4. K.J. Laidler, Chemical Kinetics, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Gurdeep Raj, Chemical Kinetics, Goel Publishing House.
6. P.W.Atkins, Physical Chemistry
7. W.J.Moore, Physical Chemistry, Longmans
8. A.A.Frost and R.G.Pearson, Kinetics and Mechanism, Wiley Eastern, Pvt. Ltd.
9. F.W. Billmeyer, Text book of Polymer science, Wiley- Interscience
10. Fundamentals of Photochemistry – K.K.Rohatgi – Mukherjee (Revised Edition) New age
International publications, Reprint 2002.
Page 8 of 35
 Environmental Nanoscience
UNIT 1 8hrs
Background to nanotechnology: scientific revolutions – types of nanotechnology and nano
machines – atomic structure – molecules & phases – energy – molecular and atomic size –
surfaces and dimensional space.
UNIT 2 8hrs
Nanomaterials Fabrication: Principles and Methods - Nanomaterials Fabrication-Specificity
and Requirements in the fabrication methods of nanoparticles oxide-Semiconductor
nanoparticles-metallics-Bimetallics and alloys-carbon based nanomaterials.
UNIT 3 8hrs
Membrane Process: Overview of membrane processes-transport principles for membrane
processes-Membrane fabrication using nanomaterials-Nanoparticle Membrane reactors-
Active membrane systems.
UNIT 4 8hrs
Nanocomposites: Introduction-Advantages and Disadvantages of Nano-sized Additions-
Application of Nanocompsites-Areas of Application-Clay-based Nanocomposities.
UNIT 5 8hrs
Environmental Applications of Nanomaterials: Nanomaterials for Groundwater Remediation
–Reactivity, fate and lifetime, Nanoiron reactivity, Reaction products, Intermediates and
efficiency, Effects of competing oxidants, Delivery and transport issues, Injection methods
and delivery vehicles.
References
1.Nanotechnology: basic science and emerging technologies – Mick Wilson,
KamaliKannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, BurkhardRaguse, Overseas Press
(2005).
2.Amorphous and Nanocrystalline Materials: Preparation, Properties, and Applications,
A.Inoue, K.Hashimoto (Eds.,) (2000)
3.Nanocomposite science and technology, PulickelM.Ajayan, Linda S.Schadler, Paul
V.Braun, Wiley-VCH Verlag, Weiheim (2003).
4.Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives, ChristofM.Niemeyer, /
ChadA.Mirkin, (eds.), Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, (2004)
5.Bionanotechnology: Lessons from Nature, by: David S. Goodsell, Wiley-Liss. (2004).
6.Nanotechnology - Fundamentals and Applications. Manasikarkare.I.K. International
Publishing HousinPvt.Ltd. New Delhi.

Page 9 of 35
 Environmental Microbiology
UNIT I: 8hrs
hrsIntroduction – History of microbiology – Scope of microbiology- Concept of Microbial
Ecology– Succession and Colonization of Microbes in Environment- Positive and Negative
roles of Microbes in Environment- Atmosphere as habitat and medium for microbial dispersal
– Air borne diseases – Air sanitation
UNIT II: 8 hrs
Biogeochemical cycles – Carbon, Nitrogen, Sulfur, Phosphorus, Iron and other elements -
Microbial Nitrogen fixation – Anabaena, Azospirillumand Rhizobium – Nitrogenase,
Hydrogenase
UNIT III: 8 hrs
Microbiology of waste water: Waterborne pathogens – Salmonella, Shigella, Vibrio cholera,
Gastroenteritis, Escherichia coli, Hepatitis viruses, Chikungunya, Swine flu and Dengue.
Tests for water quality – Microbiological water quality standards - Detection of faecal
contamination - Detection of virus – Biological oxygen demand - Eutrophication – Microbial
indicators of water pollution-Water purification and recycling process.
UNIT IV: 8 hrs
Microbiology of Soil –- Soil types and their microbes- Microbes in soil fertility- Humus-
Microbial degradation of lignin – Tannin – Rhizobacteria- Microbial degradation of
pesticides – Microbial interactions with inorganic pollutants – Microbial leaching of metals –
Microorganisms in abatement of heavy metal pollution - Microbial composting of biowastes
UNIT V: 8 hrs
Strategies in bioconversion - bioconversion of lignocelluloses into product-Biogas from
wastes – Specific methanogenic activity – Microbial production of fuels: Ethanol, Methane
and Hydrogen – Microbial production of biopolymers
References
1.Atlas & Bartha, 1981, Microbial Ecology and Fundamental Applications, The Benjamin
Kummings Publishing Co
2.Grant and Long, 1981, environmental Microbiology, Blackie and Sons ltd.,
BishopbridgeGlassgow
3.Ralph Mitchell, 1974, Introduction to Environmental Microbiology, Prentice Hall London
4.Cambell, 1983, Microbial control of pollution, Blackwell Scientific Publication
5.A.K. Chatterji , Introduction to Environmental Biotechnology, Prentice – Hall of India,
Newyork
6.A.G. Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, 2005, Environmental Science and Biotechnology –
Theory and Techniques, MJP Publishers
7.J.C. Fry et al., 1992. Microbial Control of Pollution, Cambridge University Press
8.K. Vijaya Ramesh, 2003, Environmental Microbiology, MJP Publishers, Chennai. ISBN
No – 81-8094-003-9.
9.A.H. Patel. 2016. Industrial Microbiology. Trinity Press. ISBN 978-93-85750-26-7
10.R.C.Dubey and D.K.Maheswari, 1999. A Textbook of Microbiology. S. Chand and
Company LTD, New Delhi. ISBN No – 81-219-1803-0.

Page 10 of 35
 POLLUTION CONTROL ENGINEERING AND BIOREMEDIATION
UNIT I: 8 hrs
Concept of pollution control and management – Characteristics of major industrial effluents –
primary – secondary and tertiary treatment of effluents – Ion exchange – reverse osmosis –
electrodialysis – colour removal from industrial effluents – Sludge treatment and disposal –
Modelling of activated sludge process.
UNIT II: 8hrs
Working principles of the following reactors – Rotating Biological Contactors, Fluidized Bed
Reactor, Trickling filter - Expanded Bed Reactor, Contact Digesters, Packed Column
Reactors, UASB Reactor – Sequencing batch reactors – High Rate reactors – Microbial
removal of nitrogen and phosphorus – Nutrient removal through biomass production –
Hospital waste management – Air Pollution Control Strategies: Automotive and industrial
emission control, greenhouse gases emission control– biological purification of contaminated
air
UNIT III: 8hrs
Metal microbes interactions – Microbial immobilization and transformation of metals –
Genetic aspects of heavy metal resistance – Anaerobic decomposition of organic matter –
Pesticide biodegradation – Microbial leaching of metal – Biotechnological applications for
pesticide waste disposal – Oil degradation by microbes – Aquatic macrophytes for waste
water treatment – Biotechnology in soil pollution abatement
UNIT IV: 8hrs
Bioremediation General perspectives – Microbes for bioremediation – Bioremediation
techniques– Advantages and disadvantages Bioremediation monitoring and case studies–
Effluent irrigation in agriculture – phytoremediation: approaches and types, factors
influencing phytoremediation – advantages and disadvantages – Microalgal species for
aquaculture – Mass cultivation techniques – Harvesting and Drying of Algal Biomass –
Bioagumentation for commercial production of algae
UNIT V: 8hrs
Genetics of microbial bioremediation – Microbial genetic plasticity – Role of plasmids in
bioremediation – Evolution barriers for new microbes – Enhancement of novel microbial
degradative abilities – Genetics and gene manipulation –Transgenic microbes for treating
toxic chemicals – Gene transfer in the environment – GEMS and biosafety – Ethics of
microbial biotechnology – application of genetic engineering in bioremediation
References
1. Pradipta Kumar Mohapatra (2007), Text book of Environmental Biotechnology, I.K.
International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd
2. Jogdand. S.N. (2003) Environmental Biotechnology, Himalaya Publishing House
3. Chatterji, (2003), Introduction to Environmental Biotechnology, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd
4. A.G.Murugesan and C.Rajakumari, Environmental Science and Biotechnology –
Theory and Techniques, MJP Publishers
5. J.C. Fry et al., 1992. Microbial Control of Pollution, Cambridge University Press
6. C.S.Rao, (1997), Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd, India
7. Dara.S.S. (2000), Environmental Chemistry and Pollution Control, S. Chand & Co.,
Pvt. Ltd

Page 11 of 35
8. William C. Blackman, Jr, (1996), Basic Hazardous waste management (Ed.) CRC
Press Inc
9. Sharon Mc Eldowney et al, (1993), Pollution Ecology Biotreatment – Longman
Scientific & Technical, Harlow, England
10. Herber F. Lund – Industrial Pollution control handbook
11. Mahajan, S.P. Pollution control processing in industries
12. Trivedy, R.K. (1995). Encyclopedia of environmental pollution and control, Vol.2.
Enviromedia
13. Jenkins,D & B.H.Olson, Waste water microbiology, Pergamon Press
14. Kaul, Nandy & Trivedy, (1989). Pollution control in Distilleries Enviromedia, India
15. P. Rajendran and P. Gunasekaran (2006) Microbial bioremediation, MJP publishers

Page 12 of 35
 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management
Unit 1 8hrs
Introduction:Sources and generation of solid waste, their classification and chemical
composition; characterizationof municipal solid waste; hazardous waste and biomedical
waste.Effect of solid waste disposal on environment: Impact of solid waste on environment,
human and plant health; effect of solid waste and industrialeffluent discharge on water
quality and aquatic life; mining waste and land degradation; effect of land fill leachate on soil
characteristics and ground water pollution.
Unit 2 8hrs
Solid waste and Hazardous waste Management: Different techniques used in collection,
storage, transportation and disposal of solid waste (municipal, hazardous and biomedical
waste); landfill (traditional and sanitary landfill design); thermal treatment (pyrolysis and
incineration) of waste material; drawbacks in waste management techniques. Types of
industrial waste: hazardous and non-hazardous; effect of industrial waste on air, water and
soil; industrial waste management and its importance; stack emission control and emission
monitoring; effluent treatment plant and sewage treatment plant.
Unit 3 8 hrs
Resource Recovery : R- reduce, reuse, recycle and recover; biological processing -
composting, anaerobic digestion, aerobic treatment; reductive dehalogenation; mechanical
biological treatment; green techniques for waste treatment.
Unit 4 8hrs
Waste- to- energy : Concept of energy recovery from waste; refuse derived fuel (RDF);
different WTE processes: combustion, pyrolysis, landfill gas (LFG) recovery; anaerobic
digestion; gasification.
Unit 5 8 hrs
Integrated waste management: Concept of Integrated waste management; waste management
hierarchy; methods and importance of Integrated waste management.: Life cycle assessment:
Cradle to grave approach; lifecycle inventory of solid waste; role of LCA in waste
management; advantage and limitation of LCA; case study on LCA of a product.
References
1. Asnani, P. U. 2006. Solid waste management. India Infrastructure Report 570.
2. Bagchi, A. 2004. Design of Landfills and Integrated Solid Waste Management. John
Wiley & Sons.
3. Blackman, W.C. 2001. Basic Hazardous Waste Management. CRC Press.
4. McDougall, F. R., White, P. R., Franke, M., & Hindle, P. 2008. Integrated Solid Waste
Management: A Life Cycle Inventory. John Wiley & Sons.
5. US EPA. 1999. Guide for Industrial Waste Management. Washington D.C.
6. White, P.R., Franke, M. &Hindle P. 1995. Integrated Solid waste Management: A
Lifecycle Inventory. Blackie Academic & Professionals.
7. Zhu, D., Asnani, P.U., Zurbrugg, C., Anapolsky, S. & Mani, S. 2008. Improving
Municipal Solid waste Management in India. The World Bank, Washington D.C.

Page 13 of 35
 INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE
UNIT I 8hrs
Scientific revolution- Atomic structures-Molecular and atomic size-Bohr radius – Emergence
of Nanotechnology – Challenges in Nanotechnology - Carbon age–New form of carbon (from
Graphene sheet to CNT).
UNIT II 8hrs
Influence of nucleation rate on the size of the crystals- macroscopic to microscopic crystals
and nanocrystals - large surface to volume ratio, top-down and bottom-up approaches-self
assembly process-grain boundary volume in nanocrystals-defects in nanocrystals-surface
effects on the properties.
UNIT III 8hrs
Definition of a Nano system - Types of Nanocrystals-One Dimensional (1D)-Two
Dimensional (2D) -Three Dimensional (3D) nanostructured materials - Quantum dots -
Quantum wire-Core/Shell structures.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Surface energy – chemical potential as a function of surface curvature-Electrostatic
stabilization- surface charge density-electric potential at the proximity of solid surface-Van
der Waals attraction potential.
UNIT V 8hrs
Properties of Individual Nanoparticle - Metal Nanoclusters- Semiconducting Nanoparticle-
Rare Gas and molecular Clusters- Method of synthesis - RF plasma- Chemical methods-
Thermolysis - Pulsed Laser Methods.
References
1. M. Wilson, K. Kannangara, G Smith, M. Simmons, B. Raguse, Nanotechnology: Basic
science and Emerging technologies, Overseas Press India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, First Edition,
2005.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham (Eds), The chemistry of nanomaterials: Synthesis,
properties and applications, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh&Co, Weinheim, 2004.
3. Kenneth J. Klabunde (Eds), Nanoscale Materials Science, John Wiley & Sons, InC, 2001.
4. C.S.S.R.Kumar, J.Hormes, C.Leuschner, Nanofabrication towards biomedical
applications, Wiley –VCH Verlag GmbH & Co, Weinheim, 2004.
5. W. Rainer, Nano Electronics and information Technology, Wiley, 2003.
6. K.E.Drexler, Nano systems, Wiley, 1992.
7. G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications,
Imperical College Press, 2004
8. R. Cantor, P.R.Samuel, ―Biophysical Chemistry‖, W.H., Freeman & Co., 1985.
9. Watson, James, T.Baker, S.Bell, A.Gann, M.Levine, and R.Losick. ―Molecular
Biology of the Gene‖, 5th ed., San Francisco: Addison-Wesley, 2000.
10. Alberts, Bruce, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts,
and Peter Walter. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 4th ed. New York: Garland
Science, 2002.
11. Branden, Carl-Ivar, and John Tooze. Introduction to Protein Structure. 2nd ed.
New York: Garland Pub., 1991.
12. Creighton, E, Thomas, ―Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties‖, 2nd Ed.
New York: W.H. Freeman, 1992.
13. B.Lewin, ―Genes IX‖, International Edition. Sudbury: Jones & Bartlett, 2007.

Page 14 of 35
 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I 8hrs
Synthesis of bulk nanostructured materials - Sol Gel processing- Mechanical alloying and
milling - Grinding – high energy ball milling-types of balls-WC and ZrO2-materials –ball
ratio-limitations- melt quenching and annealing.
UNIT II 8hrs
Self Assembled Monolayers (SAM) - Vapour Liquid Solid (VLS) approach- Chemical
Vapour Deposition (CVD) - Langmuir-Blodgett (LB) films - Spin coating - Electrochemical
approaches: Anodic oxidation of alumina films, porous silicon and pulsed electrochemical
deposition - Spray pyrolysis - Flame pyrolysis - Thin films - Lithography.
UNIT III 8hrs
Homogenous Nucleation -diffusion and surface controlled growth process - synthesis of
metallic nanoparticles - semiconductor nanoparticles-metal oxide nanoparticles - vapor phase
reactions - solid state phase segregation -Heterogenous nucleation - kinetically confined
nanoparticles.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Evaporation-condensation - Vapor- liquid - solid (VLS) - VLS model - Nucleation and
growth - surface and bulk diffusion – kinetics – growth of various nanowires –control of size
–precursors and catalysts - single- and multi- wall CNT - Si nanowires – density and diameter
– doping in nanowires.
UNIT V 8hrs
Thin films- Environment for thin film deposition (Gas and Plasma) - Introduction to vacuum
technology-physical vapour deposition techniques (Reactive sputtering (DC and RF), laser
ablation); Epitaxy-different types of Epitaxy - Lattice mismatch - Liquid Phase Epitaxy
(LPE) - Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE)- Pulsed laser deposition (PLD) - Atomic layer
deposition (ALD)
References
1. W. Gaddand, D.Brenner, S.Lysherski and G.J.Infrate (Eds), Handbook of nanoscience,
Engg and Technology, CRC Press,2002.
2. G.Cao, Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications,
Imperical College Press, 2004.
3. J.George, Preparation of thin films, Marcel Dekker, InC., New York, 2005.
4. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham (Eds), The chemistry of nanomaterials: Synthesis,
properties and applications, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh&Co, Weinheim, 2004

Page 15 of 35
 CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES FOR NANOMATERIALS
UNIT I 8hrs
X-ray diffraction – powder diffraction–single crystal XRD –thin film analyses –
determination of lattice parameters-structure analyses-rocking curve-strain analyses-phase
identification-particle size analyses using Debye- Scherer`s formula - X-ray photoelectron
spectroscopy (XPS)- Auger electron spectroscopy (AES)- low energy electron diffraction and
reflection high energy electron diffraction (LEED, RHEED).
UNIT II 8hrs
Electron Microsopy ( Basic principle only)-Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) – Field
Emission scanning Electron microscope (FESEM)-Atomic force microscopy (AFM ), –
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM)- Scanning Probe Microscopy (SPM)- scanning
Tunnelling microscopy (STM), scanning near field optical microscopy (SNOM) .
UNIT III 8hrs
Infra red spectroscopy (IR) - UV-visible-Absorption and reflection-Raman Spectroscopy –
Micro- Raman spectra--Tip enhanced Raman-Surface Enhanced Raman scattering (SERS) –
Photoluminescence (PL)– Cathodeluminescence (CL).
UNIT IV 8hrs
Magnetic measurements using vibrating sample magnetometer (VSM) - magnetic force
microscopy (MFM) – SQUID-Electron Paramagnetic Resonance (EPR)-Nuclear Magnetic
Resonance (NMR) spectroscopy . Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI).
UNIT V 8hrs
Hall Effect - Quantum Hall effects and its applications –Four –Probe resistivity
measurements- LED Characteristics-measurements of band gap - FET characteristics and its
applications.
References
1. Ghuzang G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and
applications, Imperical College Press, 2004
2. Zhong Lin Wang, Hand Book of Nanophase & Nanostructured materials (Vol. I&II),
Springer, 2002.
3. B.D. Cullity, Elements of X-ray diffraction, Addison Wesley, 1977
4. B.W.Moot, Micro-indentation hardness testing, Butterworths, London , 1956.
5. R.M.Rose, L.A.Shepard and J. Wulff, The structure and properties of materials, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., 1966.
6. S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices – Physics and Technology, Wiley, 1985.
7. D. K. Schroder, Semiconductor Material and Device Characterization, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1998.
8. C. Richard Brundle Charles A. Evans, Jr.Shaun Wilson, Encyclopedia of Materials
Characterization Butterworth-Heinemann, 1992.

Page 16 of 35
 METHODS OF NANOFABRICATION
UNIT I 8hrs
Introduction to microelectronics fabrication and Moore`s empirical law - Limitations – Si
processing methods:Cleaning/etching, oxidation, Gettering, doping, epitaxy- semiconductor
device road map –gate dielectrics, poly Si, high k dielectrics.
UNIT II 8hrs
Necessity of clean a room – different types of clean rooms – maintenance - Importance of
Lithography techniques – Photolithography – Electron Beam lithography – Extreme UV
lithography – X-ray Lithography – Focused ion beam Lithography (FIB).
UNIT III 8hrs
Types of etching - Reactive ion etching (RIE) - Wet chemical etching - Isotropic etching –
Anisotropic etching- electrochemical etching.
UNIT IV 8hrs
Self-assembly, self-assembled monolayers, directed assembly, layer-by layer assembly,
patterned growth - control of position and diameter - Combinations of top-down and bottom-
up techniques: current state of the art - DNA self-assembly-Nanocrystals - Nanowires by
catalytic (Au, Ni and Ag) and non-catalytic VLS approach.
UNIT V 8hrs
Nanoimprint lithography (NIL) –soft polymer photoresistive - moulding /replica - printing
with stamp pads - RIE etching - patterned growth - control of position, size and density - Dip-
pen lithography - setup - working principle.
References
1. M. Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication CRC press, 1997.
2. G. Timp, Nanotechnology, AIP press, Springer Verlag, New York , 1999.
3. M.J.Jackson, Micro fabrication and Nanomanufacturing, CRC press.2005
4. G.Cao, Naostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, properties and applications, Imperical
College Press, 2004
5. W.T.S Huck, Nanoscale assembly : Chemical Techniques (Nanostructure Science and
Technology, Springer, 2005.
6. H. Schift et al Fabrication of polymer photonic crystals using nanoimprint lithography,
Nanotechnology 16, 261, (2005).
7. R.D.Piner, Dip-pen lithography, Science 283, 661(1999).

Page 17 of 35
 NANOMEDICINE
UNIT I 8hrs
Nanomedicine: Introduction – Basic of Nanobiotechnology in Relation to Nanomedicine –
Landmarks in the Evolution of Nanomedicine – Classification of Nanobiotechnologies –
Visualization and Manipulation on Nanoscale.
UNIT II 8hrs
Nanomolecular Diagnostics: Introduction – Nanodiagnostics – Nanoarrays for Molecular
Diagnostics – Nanoparticles for Molecular Diagnostics – Nanobarcodes Technology –
Nanoparticle-Based Colorimetric DNA Detection Method – Nanobiotechnology for
Detection of Proteins – Nanobiosensors – Applications of Nanodiagnostics.
UNIT III 8hrs
Nanopharmaceuticals: Introduction – Nanobiotechnology for Drug Discovery &
Development – Drug Delivery – Nanoparticle based Drug Delivery - Liposomes –
Nanospheres – Nanotubes – Future Prospects of Nanobiotechnology based Drug Delivery
UNIT IV 8hrs
Role of Nanotechnology in Biological Therapies: Introduction – Vaccination – Cell & Gene
Therapy – Antisense Therapy – RNA Interference - Nano-Oncology – Nanomicrobiology –
Regenerative Medicine & Tissue Engineering - Nanodentistry - Nanobiotechnology &
Nutrition.
UNIT V 8hrs
Miscellaneous Applications of Nanobiotechnology – Nanoimmunology – Nanobiotechnology
for Public Health - Role of Nanobiotechnology in Biodefence - Worldwide Development &
Commercialization of Nanomedicine – Research & Education in Nanomedicine – Future of
Nanomedicine – Ethical, Safety and Regulatory Issues of Nanomedicine.
References
1. The Handbook of Nanomedicine – Kewal K. Jain, Humana Press (Springer) (2008)
2. Bio-Applications of Nanoparticles – Warren C.W. Chan, Lands Bioscience &
Springer Science Business Media, LLC (2007)

Page 18 of 35
 NANOCOMPOSITE
UNIT I
Introduction of Nanocomposites: Nanocomposites- Definition - Nanocomposites past and
present- Nomenclature -Solids -Atomic and molecular solids -Role of statistics in materials -
Primary , secondary and tertiary structure - Transitions
UNIT II
Properties and features of nanocomposites: Physics of modulus - Continuum measurements -
Yield -Fracture -Rubbery elasticity and viscoelasticity - Composites and nanocomposites -
Surface mechanical properties -Diffusion and permeability -Features of nanocomposites -
basics of polymer nano compos1tes
UNIT III
Processing of nanocomposites: Viscosity -Types of flow -Viscosity - Experimental viscosity -
Non-newtonian Flow -Low-viscosity processing –Solvent processing -Particle behavior -In
situ polymerization -Post-Forming -Hazards of solvent Processing -Melt, high -shear, and
direct processing
UNIT IV
Characterization of nanocomposites: Introduction to characterization - Experiment design -
Sample preparation -Imaging -Structural characterization - Scales in nanocomposites -
Texture -Electromagnetic energy -Visualization - Physicochemical analysis -Characterization
of physical properties -Identification -\Mechanical -Surface mechanical properties.
UNIT V
Applications of nanocomposites: Nanocomposites -Optical, structural applications -
Nanoparticulate systems with organic matrices -Applications - Biodegradable protein
nanocomposites -Applications Polypropylene nanocomposites - Application as exterior
automatic components -Hybrid nanocomposite materials - Application for corrosion
protection
References
1. Thomas E. Twardow ski, Introduction to Nanocomposite Materials -Properties, Processing,
Characterization, DesTech Publications, April 2007
2. Boston New york Washing ton, DC. and Woodhead publishing Itd, England, 2006.
3. Parag Diwan and Ashish Bharadwaj. Nanocomposites Pentagon Press
4. Nanocomposite Science and Technology Pulickel M. Ajayan , Linda S. Schadler, Paul V.
Braun, 2006, Wiley-VCH

Page 19 of 35
 NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
Objectives:
Understand the bases for Introduction to Nanotechnology
The principle of surface Biology and Analysis of Biomolecular Structure.
UNIT I
Introduction to Nanotechnology – Scientific Revolutions – Types of Nanotechnology and
Nanomachines – Nanotechnology Products and Applications – Future Applications of
Nanotechnology – Risks of Nanotechnology.
UNIT II
Nanobiotechnology Overview – Nanobiometrics – Introduction – Lipids as nano-bricks and
mortar – Biocompatible Inorganic Devices - Cell-Nanostructure Interactions - Structure
information-DNA – Nanostructured Systems from Low-Dimensional Building Blocks.
UNIT III
Protein-based Nanostructures – S-Layers – Engineered Nanopores – Microbial Nanoparticle
Production – Magnetosomes-Nanoscale Magnetic Iron Minerals in Bacteria – Polymer
Nanocontainers – Biomolecular Motors Operating in Engineered Environments –
Nanoparticle-Biomaterial Hybrid Systems for Bioelectronic Devices and Circuitry.
UNIT IV
DNA-Protein Nanostructures – DNA-Templated Electronics – Biomimetic Fabrication of
DNA-Based Metallic Nanowires and Networks – Mineralization in Nanostructured
Biocompartments: Biomimetic Ferritins for High-Density Data Storage - DNA-Gold-
Nanoparticle Conjugates.
UNIT V
Surface Biology: Analysis of Biomolecular Structure - Application of Nanoparticle in
Biomedical research: Introduction – Nanotechnologies for Cellular and Molecular Imaging –
Nanoparticles for Cancer Drug Delivery – Bioconjugated Silica Nanoparticles for
Bioanalytical Applications - Impact of Biomedical Nanotechnology – Nanobiomedical
Technology: Financial, Legal, Clinical and Societal Challenges to Implememtation
References
1. Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives – Christof M.
Niemeyer, Chad A. Mirkin, John Wiley & Sons Inc (2004)
2. Nanofabrication Towards Biomedical Applications – Challa S.S.R. Kumar, Josef
Hormes, Carola Leuschner, John Wiley & Sons Inc (2005)
3. Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies – Michael Wilson,
Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons, Buckhard Raguse, Chapman &
Hall/CRC Press (2002)

Page 20 of 35
 Environmental Pollution Control
Unit – I : Air Pollution: Air pollution Control Methods–Particulate control devices –
Methods of Controlling Gaseous Emissions – Air quality standards.Noise Pollution: Noise
standards, Measurement and control methods – Reducing residential and industrial noise –
ISO14000.
Unit –II : Industrial wastewater Management: – Strategies for pollution control – Volume
and Strength reduction – Neutralization – Equalization – Proportioning – Common Effluent
Treatment Plants – Recirculation of industrial wastes – Effluent standards.
Unit – III : Solid Waste Management: solid waste characteristics – basics of on-site
handling and collection – separation and processing – Incineration- Composting-Solid waste
disposal methods – fundamentals of Land filling.
Unit – IV : Environmental Sanitation: Environmental Sanitation Methods for Hostels and
Hotels, Hospitals, Swimming pools and public bathing places, social gatherings (melas and
fares), Schools and Institutions, Rural Sanitation-low cost waste disposal methods.
Unit – V: Hazardous Waste: Characterization – Nuclear waste – Biomedical wastes –
Electronic wastes – Chemical wastes – Treatment and management of hazardous waste-
Disposal and Control methods.
Text Books
1. Environmental Engineering, by Ruth F. Weiner and Robin Matthews – 4th Edition
Elesevier, 2003.
2. Environmental Science and Engineering by J.G. Henry and G.W. Heinke –
Pearson Education.
3. Environmental Engineering by Mackenzie L Davis & David A Cornwell.
McGraw Hill Publishing.

Page 21 of 35
 Research and Teaching Methodology

Objective:
The main aim of this study is to understand the scope, depth and the overall direction of the
research and teaching methods.

UNIT I (12hrs)
Significance of Life Science Research – Types of Research – Formation of Research
Problem –Formulation of Hypothesis – Sources of Data – Methods of Data Collection –
Sampling design: Random and Non-random.

UNIT II (12hrs)
Meaning of Research - Objectives of Research - Types of Research - Research Approaches
Significance of Research - Research and Scientific Methods - Criteria of Good Research -
Funding agencies- Choosing the Research Problem- Layout of the Research Report – Types –
Precautions in writing Research Reports – Footnotes Bibliography- bibliographic software

UNIT-III (12hrs)
Statistical analysis: Tests of Hypothesis- Parametric and Non-Parametric test:‗t‘ and ‗f‘ Test
ANOVA –χ2 Test-statistical software including SAS, SPSS, sigma and origin

UNIT-IV (10hrs)
Basic Correlation: Definition, Meaning- Correlation types: Simple, Partial and Multiple
Correlation - Regression: Meaning - Linear Regression- Difference between Correlation and
Regression.

UNIT-V (14hrs)
Methodology of teaching:Teaching- Objective of teaching, Phase of teaching- Teaching
methods: Lecture method, Discussion method, Discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving
method, Project method Seminar, Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualized instruction ,
Ways for effective presentation with power point –Documentation – Evaluation: Formative,
summative, & Continuous and comprehensive evaluation- Later adolescent Psychology:
Meaning, Physical, Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral development- Teaching Later
Adolescents.

References:
1. Sampath, K., Pannerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to education and
technology. (2nd reviseded.). New Delhi: Starting publishers.
2. Sharma, S.R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools and
techniques. Jaipur:Mangal:Deep.
3. Vedanayagam, E.G. (1989). Teaching Knowledge for college teachers. New york
:Sterling Publishers.
4. Berg, B. L., Lune, H., 2004. Qualitative research methods for the social sciences,
Pearson Boston.
5. Kothari, C.R., 2004. Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Age
International

Page 22 of 35
6. Merriam, S. B., 1998. Qualitative Research and Case Study Applications in Education.
Revised and Expanded from" Case Study Research in Education.", Jossey-Bass
Publishers, Sansome St, San Francisco, CA.
7. Bogdan, R.C., Biklen, S. K., 1998. Qualitative research in education. An introduction to
theory and methods, Allyn & Bacon, A Viacom Company, MA 02194.
8. Davis, M., 1997. Scientific Papers and Presentations‖ San Diego: Academic Press.
9. Isaac, S., Michael, W., 1971.Handbook in research and evaluation, (2nd ed.), San Diego,
USA.
10. McDonald, J. H., 2009. Handbook of biological statistics, Vol. 2, Baltimore, Sparky
House Publishing. MD, USA.
11. Gomez, K.A., Gomez, A.A., 1984. Statistical procedures for agricultural research, John
Wiley & Sons.
12. Townend, J., 2012. Practical statistics for environmental and biological scientists, John
Wiley & Sons.

Page 23 of 35
 Agricultural Entomology and Pest Management
Pests and diseases are one of the most important factors affecting crop production. Proper
management is critical in order to avoid damages, meet regulatory standards, protect the
environment and decrease pesticide resistance. This course focuses on pest and disease
management in vegetables, greenhouse crops and flowers. However, the principles that are
discussed in this course are relevant also for many other crops.

Objectives
1. To learn about agriculturally important pests.
2. To learn the different methods to avoid occurrence of pests.
3. To study the principles of biological control and pesticides, their properties and how
to wisely use them.

UNIT I
Introduction to Insects; Insect Classification and Agricultural Pests; General anatomy of
insects: Digestive system, Respiratory system, Circulatory system, Reproductive systems of
male and female, Excretory system, Nervous system, Endocrine system. Economic
importance of insects: Harmful, beneficial and productive insects.

UNIT II
Insect Behaviour and Reproduction: Mechanoreception – Mechanical stimuli, detection and
processing; Thermoreception; Chemoreception; Semiochemicals; Vision/light reception-
Reproduction.

UNIT III
Pest management - Sampling and monitoring arthropods - Methods of sampling and
monitoring, Sampling plan – components & types; Insecticides – Types and formulation;
Classification of insecticides on the basis of their chemical nature, mode of entry and mode of
action. Application of insecticides; Problems associated with using insecticides - Toxicity to
humans and wildlife, Resistance to insecticides.

UNIT IV
Integrated pest management – Concepts and principles; Components of IPM – Ecological
aspects of pest management, Host plant resistance and biological components of IPM – Host
plant resistance, biological control predators, parasitoids, microbes (fungi, bacteria, virus),
entomopathogenic nematodes. Pest management through botanicals, behavioural
modification and radiation technology.

UNIT V
Spray application techniques - Contact pesticides, Systemic insecticides and Translaminar
insecticides, spray application, types nozzle selection, spray pressure and sprayer capacity.
Biotechnology approaches and IPM case studies - Biotechnology approaches in IPM; IPM
case studies - field crops and pulses (Paddy), Commercial crops (Cotton and sugarcane),
vegetable (Tomato) and fruits (Mango).

Page 24 of 35
Text books:
1. Richards, O.W., Davies,R. G., 1977. Imms' general textbook of entomology. Volume 2:
classification and biology, Springer, pp. 388.
2. Whitten, M.J., 1992. Pest management in 2000: what we might learn from the twentieth
century In: Kadir, A.A.S.A. (Ed.), Pest Management and the Environment in 2000. C.A.B.I.,
Wallingford, pp. 9-44.
3. Hall, F. R., Menn, J. J., 1998. Biopesticides: Use and Delivery (Methods in
Biotechnology), Humana Press, 1st Edition, pp 640.
4. Pedigo, L. P., Rice, M. E., 2006. Entomology and Pest Management, 5th edn. Upper
Saddle River, N], USA.
5. Harris, J., Dent, D., 2001.Priorities in Biopesticide Research and Development in
Developing Countries (Biopesticides), CABI Publ.
7. Burgess, H.D., 1981. Microbial control of pest and diseases, Academic press, New York.
8. Hunter-Fujita, F. R., Entwistle, P. F., Evans, H. F., Crook, N.E., 1998. Insect Viruses and
Pest Management, John Wiley, New York, pp. 620.
9. Ramakrishna Ayyar,T.,1940 Handbook of economic Entomology for South India,
Government Press, Madras [Chennai], pp. 528.

Page 25 of 35
 Sustainable Agriculture
Sustainable agriculture is farming in sustainable ways (meeting society's food and
textile needs in the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet
their own needs) based on an understanding of ecosystem services, the study of relationships
between organisms and their environment.
Objectives
1. To achieve environmental health by meeting current needs without sacrificing future
needs.
2. To attain economic profitability by sustainable use of energy sources along with
renewable energy production and consumption
3. To adopt labour practices along with social and economic equity.
Unit I 12 hours
Fundamentals of Agronomy - Importance of agriculture, Agricultural classification of crops,
Soil and climatic requirements, varieties, cultural practices, special systems of cultivation,
harvesting and processing of major crops, Soil productivity and fertility. - Crop nutrition -
nutrients -classification - Nutrient sources - organic manures -fertilizers – biofertilizers;
Irrigation - methods - drip and sprinkle irrigation systems. Water management of different
crops - rice, banana and vegetables.
Unit II 12 hours
Plant Breeding and Seed technology - Morphology and systematics of crop plants - General
features - morphology of roots, stem, leaves, flowers, fruits and seeds .Introduction to field
crops - Classification of field crops. Principles of plant breeding - Modes of reproduction,
Sexual, Asexual, Apromixis and their classification; Modes of pollination, genetic
consequences, differences between self and cross pollinated crops; Methods of breeding.
Seed Technology - definition-structure of a seed-seed development process, Definition,
Characters of good quality seed, Factors affecting seed quality - ecological influences ,
packing practices, harvest and post-harvest handling, Genetic and agronomic principles of
seed production, Seed testing procedures for quality assessment- Physical, Purity,
germination and viability test.
Unit III 12 hours
Fundamentals of organic farming - Conventional, sustainable, and alternate agriculture-
Alternate agricultural systems- biodynamic farming, natural farming, organic farming,
permaculture, homa farming, and other formslimitations- Modernization of agriculture and its
relation to sustainability. -Natural resource management as a part of sustainable resource
management -crop production practices; Organic agriculture - Organic farming and food
security-Principles of organic farming. Tools and practices of organic farming: Planned crop
rotation, Green manures and cover crops, Manuring and composting, multiple
cropping.Intercropping in relation to maintenance of soil productivity Farming System
Approach for Sustainable Crop Production.
Unit IV 12 hours
Farming System Approach for Sustainable Crop Production - crop production, different
cropping systems; Cropping pattern - Multiple cropping and various forms- advantages and
disadvantages- Intercropping- ecological basis of intercropping systems- types; Crop
planning, crop calendar and cropping scheme preparation-factors affecting cropping schemes.
Plant interactions- Allelopathy, Competition; Farming systems- components- Livestock-
poultry- aquaculture- apiculture- sericulture. Incorporation of components of Integrated
farming system in homestead farming. Integrated farming system (IFS) models for uplands
and low lands for sustainable and organic agriculture- Evaluation of farming systems.

Page 26 of 35
 Unit V 12 hours
Government Policies and Programmes related to agriculture – National Agricultural Policy in
brief; Agricultural policies regarding land and labour; Agricultural policies regarding seeds -
National Seeds Policy -varietal development and plant variety protection - seed production -
quality assurance - seed distribution and marketing - infrastructure facilities - transgenic plant
varieties - import of seeds and planting material - export of seeds -promotion of domestic
seed industry Agricultural policies regarding fertilizers - Fertilizer pricing policy - payment
of subsidy. Agricultural policies regarding plant protection chemicals - pesticide production
and consumption in India - protection of consumers from adverse impacts of pesticides.
Agricultural policies regarding irrigation, machinery, technology.
Text Books:
1. Balasubramaniyan, P and Palaniappan, S.P. 2001. Principles and Practices of Agronomy
2. AgroBios(India )Ltd., Jodhpur.
3. Cox, G.W and Atkins, M.D. 1979. Agricultural Ecology : An Analysis of World Food
4. Production Systems. W.H. Freeman and Company, San Francisco
5. De, G.C.1989.Fundamentals of Agronomy. Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi.
6. Havlin, J. L., Beaton, J. D., Tisdale, S.L., and Nelsothn, W.L. 2006. Soil Fertility and
7. Fertilizers: An Introduction to Nutrient Management (7 ed.). Pearson Education, Delhi.
8. Chalam, G.V., J. Venkateswarlu. 1966. Agricultural Botany in India-Vol. 1. Asia
pulishing house, Bombay, New Delhi
9. Daniel Sundararaj, D and G. Thulasidas, 1993. Botany of field crops. Macmillan India
Ltd., New Delhi.
10. Palaniappan, S.P and Anandurai, K. 1999. Organic Farming- Theory and Practice,
Scientific Pub., Jodhpur.
11. Government of India. Five year Plan Documents.
12. Government of India.Economic Survey. Published by Planning Commission (various
issues)
13. Government of India.Economic Review. Published by State Planning Board (various
issues).

Page 27 of 35
 Eco friendly Bioproducts
It is essential to develop alternative technologies to prevent any further damage health and the
environment. Speeding their implementation can benefit our environment and truly protect
the planet. Explore the goals of green technology, introducing sustainable living, develop
renewable energy and reduce waste.
Objective:
1. To provide knowledge on biofertilizer
2. To develop students technical skills on bio fertilizer production
Unit I General Biofertilizers 12 Hours
Bacterial, fungal and algal biofertilizers; mycorrhiza -types-endo, ectomycorrhiza and
orchidaceous mycorrhiza, Problems and prospects of biofertilizers. Rhizobium- Physiology,
Rhizobium interactions, mass cultivation
Unit II Production of Biofertilizers 12 hours
Largescale production of biofertilizers, Blue green algae, VAM fungi- Field application of
biofertilizers - method of application; Chlorella biofertilizer-growth parameters-Mushroom
cultivation.
Unit III Bacterial Biofertilizers 12 hours
Cyanobacteria as biofertilizers – Azolla- Bacterial biofertilizers - Mass production of
Azospirillum, Azotobacter and Phosphobacteria; N2 fixation - Phosphate solubilization and
mobilization.
Unit IV Biopesticides 12 hours
Definition, kinds and commerce of biopesticide, Bacillus thuringiensis, insect viruses and
entomopathogenic fungi – its characters, physiology, mechanism of action and application of
bioinsectides - neem and related natural products.
Unit V Vermicompost Technology 12 hours
Introduction to vermiculture, biology, economic important, their value in maintenance of soil
structure, production of organic fertilizers by vermiculture- Earthworm farming, Extraction
(harvest), vermicomposting- vermiwash collection, composition and use harvest and
processing.
Suggested List of Exercises:

Books Studies:
1. Altman, A., 1997. Agricultural biotechnology, CRC Press.
2. Ariëns, E.J., Van Rensen J., Welling, W., 1988. Stereo selectivity of pesticides.
Biological and chemical problems. Chemicals in agriculture. Volume 1, Elsevier
Science Publishers, The Netherland.
3. Blackburn, R.S., 2009. Sustainable textiles: Life cycle and environmental impact.
Elsevier Science Publishers, The Netherland.
4. Board, N., 2004. The complete technology book on vermiculture and vermicompost
CRC Press.
5. Costanza, R., Norton, B.G., Haskell, B. D., 1992. Ecosystem health: new goals for
environmental management, Island Press.USA.
6. Kannaiyan, S. 2002.Biotechnology of Biofertilizer, Narosa Publishing House, New
Delhi.

Page 28 of 35
Book References:
1. Franklin R.H., Julius, J.M. 1999.Biopesticides - Use and Delivery. Humana Press Inc,
USA.
2. Purohit, S.S. 2003. Agricultural Biotechnology, Agrobios, India.
3. Nutman, P.S. 1976. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation in plants, Cambridge Univ. Press,
London.
4. Cavaco-Paulo, A., Gubitz, G., 2003. Textile processing with enzymes Elsevier
Science Publishers, The Netherland.
5. Chouhan, N., Kumar, A., Sharma, A., Ameta, R., 2013. Eco-Friendly Products. Green
Chemistry: Past, Present, and Future: CRC Press.
6. Croft, B.A., 1990. Arthropod biological control agents and pesticides. John Wiley and
Sons Inc., UK.
7. Entwistle, P.F., Cory, J., Bailey, M., Higgs, S., 1993. Bacillus thuringiensis: an
environmental biopesticide: theory and practice, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
UK.eprnt), CBS Publishers and Distributers, New Delhi.
7. Yadav, A.K., Motsara M.R and Raychaudhuri S., 2001 Recent Advances in
Biofertilizer Technology, SPURT publication, New Delhi.

Page 29 of 35
 River Ecosystem Ecology
Preamble: The goals for this course are to gain an understanding of: 1) major physical and
biological features of streams and rivers, 2) the range of diversity of running waters around
the world, 3) fundamental processes producing patterns of riverine structure and function, and
4) critical issues associated with the conservation and management of streams and their biota.
Objective:
The main aim of the course is to teach the Stream/River ecology.
To provide scientific knowledge on Stream/River management.
Unit 1
Introduction – Stream order – Stream flow – Hydrology- Flow alteration- Environmental
Flow- Fluvial Geomorphology – Discharge – Channel Morphology.
Unit 11
Stream water chemistry – Nutrient dynamics – Nutrient pollutions –Scaling of Sediment
dynamics in the River Environment– Sediment Management - Influence of chemical factors
on stream / river biota.
Unit 111
Stream / River ecological theories – River continuum concept – importance of connectivity
in stream / Riverine Ecology- River Fragmentation- Biogeochemistry of NPC (nitrogen,
phosphorus, carbon) – Organic matter budgets.

Unit 1V
Biotic interactions – Terrestrial aquatic linkage. Primary producer – Heterotrophic energy –
Source in stream/river – Trophic relationships – Drift composition and periodicity –
Functional basis of drift – Riparian vegetation.
Unit V
Stream/River management – River modifications – Dams and impoundments – Alien species
– Climate change – Recovery and restoration of running waters.
Reference Books:
1. Nancy D. Gordon, Thomas A. McMahon, Brian L. Finlayson, Christopher J. Gippel,
Rory J. Nathan. Stream Hydrology: An introduction for Ecologists.
2. Barbara A. Hauser. Drinking Water Chemistry: A Laboratory Manual.
3. Richard F. Hauer, Gary Lamberti. Methods in Stream Ecology: Volume 1: Ecosystem
Structure.
4. Walter K. Dodds and Matt R. Whiles. Freshwater Ecology: Concepts and
Environmental Applications of Limnology.
5. David J. Allan. Stream Ecology: The Structure and Function of Running Waters.
6. Philip J. Boon, Paul J. Raveen. River Conservation and Management.
7. Gary J. Brierley and Kirstie A. Fryirs (2005) Geomorphology and River Management:
Applications of the River Styles Framework. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, UK,
398pp.
8. Kathleen Weathers, David Strayer, Gene Likens. Fundamental of Ecosystem Science.
9. Vannote et al . The River Continum Concept.
10. Allan, J. David, Castillo, Maria M. Stream Ecology: Structure and function of running
waters.

Page 30 of 35
 RESTORATION ECOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT
Preamble: The primary goal of this course is to develop critical thinking skills in the
application of ecological principles to restoration.
Objective:
1.To understand the ecological concepts relevant for restoring ecosystems and critically think
about the scientific/logistic challenges of applying these concepts into a restoration plan.
2. Students will describe the role of key ecological concepts in restoration
Unit I
Restoration Ecology - Definition, principles, concepts and strategies.(long term vs. short
term); physical, chemical and biological restoration; role of ecological principles in
restoration, role of pioneer species in restoration and holistic approach in restoration.
Unit II
Restoration of natural resources; restoration of river corridor, water resources and mine
spoils. Approaches to Flood Plain Mana4ement, Concepts and Programs related to
Restoration and Management of Lakes, Rivers and streams, Riverine = Riparian ecosystem
and Wetlands, Fluvial restoration.
Unit III
Planning and evaluating aquatic ecosystem restoration — Project planning, Purpose of
evaluation, Selecting assessment criteria and synthesizing data. Introduction to watershed,
concept and significance. Physical and hydrological characteristics of watershed. Drain —
line treatment; Area treatment — Goals, features and watershed as unit of sustainable
development.

Unit IV
Integrated Aquatic Ecosystem Restoration- Introduction, Institutional barriers to Integrated
Aquatic Restoration, Importance of Integrated restoration to wildlife, Appropriate scale for
restoration, Use of Historical records in reconstructing watersheds. Impact of human
activities on water resources, climate change threats to water quality, Shifts in freshwater
ecosystems
Unit V
National restoration goals, Policy and Program. redesigning for restoration Integrated Water
Resource Management (IWRM),. Role of. public participation, government agencies and
NGOs in conservation and restoration; environmental education and its role in conservation
and restoration. Finish Biotic restoration Landscape ecology and restoration Finish
monitoring and adaptive management
Reference Book
1. John CairnS Jr., 1992. Restoration of Aquatic Ecosystems - Science, Technology and
Public Policy. National Academy Press. Washington D.C.
2. Adamus, P.R., Clairain, E. J., Smith R.D., Young R. E., 1987. Wetland Evaluation
Technuique (WET). Vol II. Methodology Operational Draft. U.S. Army cors of Engineers
waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
3. Barker, LA and E. B. Swain, 1989. Review of lake management in Minne-sota. Lake
Reservoir Manage. 5:1-10.

Page 31 of 35
4.Young, T. P. 2000. Restoration ecology and conservation biology. Biological Conservation
92: 73.83.
5. Hobbs, R. J. and Harris, J. A 2001. Restoration ecology: repairing the Earth's ecosystems
in the new millennium. Restoration Ecology 9: 239-246.
6. Van Diggelen et al. 2001. Ecological restoration: state of the art or state of the science?
Restoration Ecology 9: 115-118.
7. Ehrenfeld, J. G. 2000. Defining the limits of restoration: the need for realistic goals.
Restoration Ecology 8: 2-9.
8. McClanahan, T. R. and Wolfe, ft W. 1993. Accelerating forest succession in a fragmented
landscape: the role of birds and perches. Conservation Biology 7: 279-288.
9. Palmer et al. 1997. Ecological theory and community restoration ecology. Restoration
Ecology 5: 291-300.
10.Cairns, J.Jr., and T. V. Crawford, eds. 1991. Integrated Environmental Management.
Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, Mich. 214 pp.

Page 32 of 35
 Biostatistics and Science writing
Course overview:
Biostatistics is essential to analyse biological variations by the interpretation of results obtained from
various research studies. This course would help in acquiring knowledge on the statistical tools
relevant for the study. Science communication is a rapidly expanding area and meaningful
engagement between scientists and the public requires effective communication. Contents of this
course would enable research scholars to get started with science writing and effective communication
Objectives:
to understand the basic concepts and utility of common statistical techniques for biological data.
to stress on the importance and appropriateness of statistical methods, their assumptions, validity and
interpretation.
to understand the methods of communicating science research to the community.
to use writing for the purposes of reflection, action and participation in academic inquiry.

Unit I 6 Hrs
Introduction to Biostatistics - population, sample, variable, parameter, primary and secondary data,
screening and representation of data, frequency distribution, tabulation, bar diagram, histograms, pie
diagram.
Unit II 10 hrs
Mean, median, mode, quartiles and percentiles, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of variation;
Probability and distributions- definition of probability (frequency approach), independent events.
Addition and multiplication rules, conditional probability.
Unit III 10 hrs
Correlation and Regression analysis: Correlations and regressions-: Relation between two variables,
scatter diagram, definition of correlations, curve fitting, principles of least squares, Two regression
lines, Karl Pearson‘s coefficient of correlation, Rank correlation, chi-square test for independence, P-
value of the statistic, confidence limits, one way analysis of variance.
Unit IV 6 hrs
Introduction to concepts research communication - popular science writing genres,
Components of research article – various types and styles of writing - opinion –
correspondence – Research communication – research article – review article.
Unit V 5 hrs
Report writing scholarly and popular media - disciplinary relevance - effective drafting
techniques. – Peer review process - Plagarism - publication ethics – copyright and use of
publication - Creative Commons
Text Book/Reading material
1. Gurumani, N. 2010 An introduction to Biostatistics. MJP Publishers. Chennai. 376 pp.
2. Rao, P.S.S S and J. Richard 2012 Introduction to Biostatistics and Research Methods (Fifth
Edition) PHI Learning Private Limited. 322 pp.
3. Banerjee, K. P. 2007 Introduction to Biostatistics. S Chand publishers, New Delhi.
4. Ramakrishnan, P. 2015 Biostatistics Saras publication, 416 pp.
Reference
1. Pagano M. and Gauvreau, K, 2000 Principles of Biostatistics, Duxbury Press, USA.
2. Turabian, K. L. 2007 A Manual for Writers of Research Papers, Theses, and Dissertations 7th
edition. University of Chicago Press. 470 pp.

Page 33 of 35
 Freshwater Ecology
Course Overview This course will develop the principles of aquatic ecology, with a focus on
their application to freshwater ecosystems (streams, rivers, wetlands, and lakes). This course
aims at providing a comprehensive understanding of all the major element cycles, patterns of
energy flow through ecosystems, and the links between ecosystem structure and function so
that we can critically evaluate how complex processes (climate change, watershed
urbanization) may directly or indirectly impact aquatic ecosystems.
Objectives:
To understand the interaction of biotic and abiotic factors in aquatic systems.
To have an overview of the role of hydrological cycle and importance of aquatic
systems.
To critically evaluate the complexity of ecosystem processes (nutrient distribution,
impact of climatic change) in aquatic ecosystems
To impart knowledge on various threats and conservation strategies.
Unit I 10 Hrs
Introduction to Aquatic ecology – Hydrological cycle - Properties of Water –- Stratification
and Mixing Classification – biotic and abiotic components. Biotic integrity.

Unit II 8 Hrs
Energy and Trophic Dynamics - Primary production in streams, rivers, and lakes - Energy
transfer – modification of organic matter - Stream metabolism
Unit III 10 Hrs
Various Freshwater bodies – streams, rivers, lakes Swamps and marshes: Physicochemical
conditions. Nutrient cycling. Biotic components. Origin and characteristics of river.
Functions. Biological productivity. watershed and water drainage.
Unit IV 9 Hrs
Major threats to freshwater systems - Impact of dams and fragmentation on river ecology.
River continuum concept. Pollution and eutrophication. Climate change implications on
freshwater systems. Habitat quality and Biomonitoring potential
Unit V 7 Hrs
Conservation and Management of aquatic ecosystems – role of government and agencies –
Restoration ecology - Ecological concepts of restoration ecology - Barriers to effective
management
Text Book/Reading material
1. Dey. S and B. Nasrin 2014 Ecology of Aquatic systems. Scientific International (Pvt.) Ltd.
2. Munshi J. D., and J. Datta 2015 Fundamentals of Limnology. Astral Publisher.
3. Agarwal. S.C., 1999 Limnology 4th edition CBS Publishers.
Reference
1. Allan, J.D. and Castillo, M.M. 2009. Stream Ecology (Second Ed.). Springer, Netherlands.
2. Keddy, P.A. 2000. Wetland Ecology. Principles and Conservation. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
3. Dodds. W and W. M. Whiles 2010 Freshwater Ecology 2nd Edition Concepts and
Environmental Applications of Limnology. Academic Press. 829 Pp.
4. Closs, G., Downes, B and A. Boulton 2004 Freshwater Ecology: A Scientific Introduction
EPZ Edition
5. Falk, D. A., Palmer, M. A. et al. 2006. Foundations of Restoration Ecology. Island Press,
Washington, DC.
6. Frid C and M Dobson 2013 Ecology of Aquatic Management Second Edition. Oxford
Unviersity Press 352 pages

Page 34 of 35
 Biological Invasions and Management
Course Overview
Invasive species are among the world‘s worst threats to biodiversity and is likely to cause
economic and environmental damage. This course aims to provide an overall understanding
of the impact of invasive species and its management. The important aspect of this course is
to extend the learning to help in protecting the species and ecosystems from the impact of
invasive species.
Objectives
To learn the basic concepts of invasive species and their impacts
To understand the patterns of invasion and traits of successful invasive species
To develop concepts based on the information available from various invasion models
To design and develop management measures to control exotic invasive species
Unit I 8 Hrs
Biological invasions – invasive species: impact, overview of the problem and modes of
exotics spread both historically and currently, political impacts.

Unit II 6 Hrs
Accidental introductions - Aquatic and terrestrial environments - Human mediated spread and
other intentional introductions - Epidemics and epizootics
Unit III 8 Hrs
Characteristics of successful invasive species - Community and ecosystem - structure and
function - Disruption of normal ecosystem function by exotics
Unit IV 8 Hrs
Patterns and dynamics of spread of invasive species – overview of invasion models – Case
studies – Biosecurity failures - Feral Cat Management in Tasmania – African cat fish in India.
Unit V 10 Hrs
Invasive species management – organizations – IUCN – Invasive Species Specialist Group
(ISSG) – National biodiversity authority (NBA) - methods of invasive species control –
awareness and strategies

References:
1. Shigesada N and K. Kawasaki, 1997, Biological Invasions: Theory and Practice , Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
2. Simberloff D 2013 Invasive Species: What Everyone Needs to Know. Oxford University
Press,. 352 pp
3. Lockwood, Julie L., Martha F. Hoopes and Michael P. Marchetti. 2007. Invasion Ecology.
Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
4. Mooney, Harold A. and Richard J. Hobbs. 2000. Invasive Species in a Changing World.
Washington: Island Press.

Page 35 of 35
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
Abishekapatti – 627 012

Ph. D. Program in Geotechnology / Geology

(For all affiliated colleges / Research centers and University Department)

Course Structure and Syllabus as per the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
(Curriculum Effective From 2018-2019 Onwards)

Course Structure for Ph. D. Program in Geotechnology / Geology –2018-2019 onwards

Course Name of the Course credits Hours /week

Core-I Analytical Techniques in Geology 4 4
Core-II Coastal Environments 4 4
Core-III Groundwater Chemistry 4 4
Core-IV Engineering Geology 4 4
Core-V Geohazards 4 4
Core-VI Research Methodology 4 4
Core-VII Geomagnetism 4 4
Core-VIII Geophysical prospecting methods 4 4
Core-IX Remote Sensing & GIS 4 4
Core-X Mini Project 4 4

Page 1 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology) /Ppr-1/

1. ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES IN GEOLOGY

LTPC
4 0 0 4
Unit-I: Introduction to advanced laboratory techniques: Working principles and concepts of
Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA), X-ray Diffractions (XRD), Scanning Electron Microscope
(SEM), ICP MS, X-ray fluorescence (XRF),Energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy(EDS, EDX,
or XEDS), Mass spectrometer, CT-scan tomography, Fission Track Dating, etc.

Unit-II: Sample Preparations: Techniques of sample preparation, applications and limitations

of Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA), X-ray Diffractions (XRD), Scanning Electron
Microscope (SEM), ICP MS, X-ray fluorescence (XRF), Energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy
(EDS, EDX, or XEDS), Mass spectrometer, CT-scan tomography, Fission Track Dating, etc. in
the field of geosciences.

Unit-III: Optical Studies: Understanding of petrological and stereozoom microscopes.

Identification of common rock forming minerals. Sample preparation techniques for petrological
sections studies, geochemical and palaeontological studies. Review of literatures on the
applications of advance laboratory techniques in geology.

Unit-IV: Pollution And Quality Analysis Of Ground Water: Municipal /industrial /agricultural
/miscellaneous sources & causes of pollution, attenuation/ underground distribution / potential
evaluation of pollution, physical /chemical /biological analysis of ground water quality, criteria &
measures of ground water quality, ground water salinity & samples, graphical representations of
ground water quality.

Unit-V : Surface, Sub-Surface Investigation Of Ground Water: Geological, geophysical

exploration, remote sensing ,electric resistivity ,seismic refraction based methods for surface
investigation of ground water. Test drilling & ground water level measurement, sub-surface
ground water investigation through geophysical / resistivity /spontaneous potential /radiation /
temperature / caliper / fluid conductivity / fluid velocity /miscellaneous logging.

References:
1. Recent developments in geochemical microanalysis: Chemical Geology by Reed, S. J. B., 1990,
Volume. 83, PP. 1-9.
2. Elements of X-ray Diffraction by Cullity B.D., 1978, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
3. Principles of isotope geology by Faure,G.,1986, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York.
4. Introduction to Analytical Electron Microscopy by Goldstein, J., 1979, Plenum Press, New York
and London.
5. Introduction to X-ray Powder Diffractometry by Jenkins, Ron and Snyder, Robert L., 1996, Vol.
138, Wiley & Sons, New York.
6. Electron Microprobe and Scanning Electron Microscopy in Geology by Reed, S. J. B., 1996,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
7. Handbook of Instrumental Techniques for Analytical Chemistry by Frank A. Settle, 1997,
Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ.
8. Stable isotope geochemistry by Hoefs J., 1987, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Germany.
9. Microprobe Techniques in Earth Sciences by Potts, P. J., Bowles, J. F. W., Reed, S. J. B., and
Cave, M. R., 1995, Chapman and Hall, London.
10. Electron Microprobe Analysis by Reed, S. J. B., 1993, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
11. Quantitative Electron-probe microanalysis by Scott, V., and Love, G., 1983. : West Sussex, Ellis
Horwood.
Page 2 of 12
12. Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Chemical Analysis by Slavin, Morris, 1978, John Wiley and
Sons, New York.
13. D.K. Todd and L. F. Mays, "Groundwater Hydrology", John Wiley and sons.
14. K. R. Karanth, "Hydrogeology", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company.

Page 3 of 12
 2019-20 / MSU / 49th SCAA / Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology.) / Ppr-2/

2. COASTAL ENVIRONMENTS
LTPC
4 0 0 4

UNIT-I: Introduction – nature of the shore line – coastal erosion, sediment deposition
and transport – Cliff erosion, sediment deposition and transport – cliff erosion –storms
and coastal erosion – strategies for limiting cliff erosion – emergent and submerging
coastlines – causes of changes in shore and elevation – wave cut platforms – drowned
valleys.

UNIT-II: Present and future sea level trends – difficult coastal environments – barrier
islands – cost of construction in high energy environments – land reclamation from
estuaries – recognition of coastal hazards.

UNIT-III: Definition, meaning and scope of coastal regulations – sustainable coastal

zone management – river input to the ocean system – Man’s influence on river input to
the ocean system and comparison of pathways in the coastal zone – land water interface.

UNIT-IV: International initiatives for coastal zone protection – defense of the coastal
areas and coastal zone management- principles – bases for decisions on coastal zone
development – Essential national and international linkages.

UNIT-V: Planning and management of coastal zone – coastal zone regulations in the
world and in India – Success and failures of coastal zone management

References:
1. Coastal and estuarine sediment dynamics by Dyer.K.R, John Wiley and sons.
2. The waters of the sea by Groen, P., Van Nostrand.
3. Sedimentology – process and product by Leeder, M.R.,Pethick, Edward Arnold.
4. Tides, Surges and Mean Sea Level by pugh, D.T.,wiley.
5. The waters of the sea by P.Groen., Van Nostrand.
6. Satellite Oceanography by Robinson, I.S., Ellis Horwood

Page 4 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-3/

3. GROUNDWATER CHEMISTRY
LTPC
4 0 0 4

Unit-I: Hydrogeology: Hydrologic cycle and its components, Origin and age of groundwater,
Occurrence of groundwater, Global distribution of fresh water. Vertical distribution of
groundwater. Aquifers: Types of aquifers. Springs: Types of springs. Hydrologic properties of
rocks: Porosity, Permeability, Specific yield, Specific retention, Hydraulic conductivity,
Transmissivity and Storage coefficient. Groundwater movements: Sub surface movement, Base
flow, Effluent flow and influent flow. Darcy’s law, Reynold’s number, Laminar flow and
turbulence flow. Water level fluctuation: Water table and Piezometric surface and its fluctuations.
Pumping test: objectives, layout of the test and measurements.

Unit – II: Water well technology: Well types, drilling methods, construction of well, design of
well, development and maintenance of wells. Artificial recharge of groundwater: Concept and
methods. Saline water intrusion in aquifers: Saline water intrusion, Ghyben–Herzberg relation
between fresh and saline water, Prevention and control of salt water intrusion in the coastal
aquifers.
Unit – III: Ground water quality: Sources of salinity, estimation of major elements, reporting of
chemical analysis; Groundwater pollution: Problems of arsenic and fluoride, groundwater quality
map of India, quality criteria for groundwater use, salt water intrusion in coastal aquifers and
remedial measures.
Unit-IV: Hydrochemistry: Analysis surface water and subsurface water; classification of
groundwater for use in drinking, irrigation and industrial purposes; presentation of chemical
analysis; data and plotting; chemical classification diagram.

Unit-V: Groundwater exploration techniques: Surface investigation of groundwater- Geologic

method, electrical resistivity method, seismic method, gravity and magnetic method. Subsurface
investigation of groundwater: test drilling,water level measurements. Application of Geophysical
logging in Groundwater exploration. Groundwater provinces of India.

References:

1. Alley, W.M., (1993), Regional Groundwater Quality-VNR, New York

2. Davies, S.N. and De Wiest, D.R., (1966), Hydrogeology-John Wiley& sons, Inc, New York,
463p.
3. Fetter, C.W., (1990), Applied Hydrogeology-Mc Graw Hill, Publisher, New Delhi.
4. Freeze, R.A. and John, A., (1979), Groundwater, Cherry, Prentice Hall, Inc, 604p.
5. Hem J.D., (1970), Study and interpretation of the chemical characteristics of Natural water,
USGS Edition.
6. Hiscock, K., (2005), Hydrogeology, Principles and Practice, Blackwell Publishing, 389p.
7. Karanth, K.R., (1987), Groundwater Assessment, Development and Management-Tata
McGraw Hill New Delhi 720p.
8. Manning, J.C., (2007), Applied Principles of Hydrology, CBS Publishers and Distributers,
New Delhi.
9. Raghunath, H.M., (2007), Groundwater 3rd edition, New Age International Publishers,520p.
10. Reddy and Rami, J.P., (2008), A Textbook of Hydrology, University Science Press,
Bangalore.
11. Schwartz, F.W and Zhang, H., (2003), Fundamentals of groundwater, John Wiley& sons, Inc,
New York, 583p.
12. Shaw, E.M., (1994), Hydrology in Practice,3rd edition, Chapman and Hall,London,569p.
Page 5 of 12
13. Subramaniam, V., (2000), Water-Kingston Publ. London.
14. Todd, D.K., (1980), Groundwater Hydrology-John Wiley & sons publishers, New York,
535p.

Page 6 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-4/

4. ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
LTPC
4 0 0 4

UNIT-I: Surface and Subsurface Geological Investigations

Field investigations, electrical and seismic geophysical methods in subsurface
geological investigations for foundation engineering, Description of discontinuities, bed
rock attitudes, thickness, calculation of True thickness and vertical thickness of bed
rock. Geological information for slope stabilization.

UNIT-II: Engineering Properties Of Rocks And Soils

Rock description and engineering classification of rocks – weathering and its
significance in engineering site- Engineering properties of rocks and soils, RMR, RQD
methods, determination of engineering properties in field and laboratory.

UNIT-III: Geological Investigations For Dams & Tunnels

Dams-geological investigations- suitability of site, geological profile from
catchment area to Dam site, lithology, structures, topography, slope, drainage system,
water budget studies, Reservoir site investigations, siltation analysis, Geological
investigations for soft rock and hard rock tunnels construction.

UNIT-IV: Geological Investigations For Coastal Development

Coastal erosion and accretion process and its impact. Geological investigations for
harbor construction, Coastal protection structures-Sea walls, bulk heads, groins, jetties.

UNIT-V: Geotechnical Studies Of Landslides And Subsidence

Landslide - Classification, causative factors, control measures. Land subsidence,
factors, causes and remedial measures. Geological considerations for monitoring of
landslides. geotechnical problems related to foundation for bridge and building site
investigations.

References:
1. Krynine and Judd. Principles of Engineering Geology and Geotechnology, McGraw
Hill, New York, 1962.
2. Chandler. R.J. Slope Stability and Engineering Developments, 1992.
3. Waltham, T. Foundations of Engineering Geology, SPON Press, London 2002, ISBN
0-415- 25449-3.
4. Bell F G Engineering Geology, Second Edition by, 2007. Butterworth-Heinemann,
Oxford
5. Sathya Narayanaswami. Engineering Geology. Dhanpat Rai and Co. 1710, Nai Sarak,
Delhi- 110006, 2000.
6. Waltham, A.C. Foundations of Engineering Geology, Blackie Academic Professional
Pub., I Ed.,UK,1994.
Page 7 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-5/

5. GEOHAZARDS
LTPC
4 0 0 4

Unit-I: Internal structure of the Earth. Endogenic and exogenic earth processes. Earth as a
dynamic and continuously evolving system as a result of interactions between lithosphere,
hydrosphere, atmosphere and biosphere.

Unit-II: Definition, types and genesis of natural geohazards - Earthquake, Volcanism,

Landslide, Tsunami, Flood, Drought, Cyclone, Forest Fire, Meteorite impact, land
subsidence, Quick sand, Heat wave, coastal erosion and inundation. Primary, secondary and
tertiary impacts of geohazards.

Unit-III: Causes and consequences of geohazards. Anthropogenic intervention with natural

processes and exacerbation of hazard vulnerability. Man made hazards.

Unit-IV: Hazard zonation, hazard mitigation. Tools and methods. Relief and rescue
operations.

Unit-V: Hazard vulnerability classification of Indian sub-continent. Indian scenario of hazard

preparedness. Command structure and operations of National Disaster Management Agency.

References:

1. Bandibas, J.C., Wakita, K. and Kato, H., 2003 Interactive presentation of geological
hazard maps using Geohazardview. Jour.Nat.Dis.Sci. v.25. pp.75-83.
2. Government of India, 2004 Disaster management in India – A status report.88p.
3. Government of India, 2007 National disaster management guidelines. 72p.
4. Hamilton, R., 1997 Report on early warning capabilities for geological hazards.
IDNDR. 35p.
5. Kato, H., Wakita, K. and Bandibas, J.C., 2003 Eastern Asia geological hazards map:
Paper and digital versions. Jour.Nat.Dis.Sci.v.25. pp.65-74.
6. Ramkumar, M. and Neelakantan, R., 2007 GIS technology based geohazard zonation
and advance warning system for geohazard mitigation and information dissemination
towards relief and rescue operations. Jour.Earth.Sci. v.1. pp.65-70.
7. Ramkumar, Mu., 2008 Geohazards: Causes, consequences and methods of mitigation.
New India Publishers, New Delhi.

Page 8 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-6/

6. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
LTPC
4 0 0 4

Unit-I: Types of research- Process of Research-Formulation of objectives. Hypothesis to

theory – geological example: Continental drift hypothesis to plate tectonics theory. Research
plan and its components.

Unit-II: Methods of research (Survey, observation, case studies, experimental, historical and
comparative methods) Methods of Literature collection, Experimental design, planning and
execution of investigation.

Unit-III: Analysis of numerical data – Central tendencies, dispersion, testing significance of

variations, analyzing correlation of variables. Regression analysis, Principal Component
Analysis and Factor Analysis, and Cluster Analysis and its use in geological research.
Application of GIS in Spatial analyses of geological datasets.

Unit-IV: Writing of Research proposal, Report and Research paper, Meaning and types –
stages in preparation-characteristics-structure-documentation, foot notes and bibliography-
Editing the final draft - Evaluating the final draft-checklist for a good
proposal/reporter/research paper.

Unit-V: Research ethics – ethical issues, ethical committees; Scholarly publishing – IMRAD
concept and design of research paper, citation and acknowledgement, plagiarism,
reproducibility and accountability.

References :

1. John C. Davis (2002), Statistics and Data Analysis in Geology

2. Kothari C R (2009), Research Methodology, 2nd edition, New Age Institute, New Delhi
3. Kenneth, J.P., Marine Geology, Prentice Hall Inc., 1982
4. Petti John, (2000) Sedimentary Rocks, CBS publications, New Delhi
5. Philips E M & Pugh D.S., (1998), How to get a Ph D, UBS publishers & Distributors, New
Delhi
6. Rajit Kumar, (2005), Research Methodology, Pearson edition, New Delhi
7. Venugopal K , (2008), Research Methodology, university of Calicut
8. Rajendra Naragundkar : Marketing Research, Text and Cases, Mc Graw Hill, 2008.

Page 9 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-7/

7. GEOMAGNETISM
LTPC
4 0 0 4
Unit-I: Origin and sources of geomagnetic field, geomagnetic field elements, different
periodicities and their implications, field variation of external origin, solar quiet variations,
disturbed time variations, geographic and geomagnetic coordinates, concept of universal
time, local time and magnetic local time, geomagnetic activity indices, importance of
geomagnetic observatories.

Unit-II: Understanding the Earth’s inner and outer atmosphere, Reversals of Earth’s
magnetic field, Magnetic observatory instrumentation, Micro pulsations, Analysis of
Geomagnetic variations, Application of Geomagnetic data to explore the Earth and its
atmosphere, Spherical Harmonic Analysis of Geomagnetic data, Introduction to Geomagnetic
Hazards and Space weather.

Unit-III: Palaeomagnetism and history of the Earth’s magnetic field, Palaeomagnetism,

archeomagnetism and magnetic observatory records, Palaeolatitudes, pole position and
apparent polar wander path, Geomagnetism from palaeomagnetism- basis of palaeomagnetic
dating, Study areas and major findings.

Unit-IV: Environmental mineral magnetism: A multi-disciplinary approach, Environmental

mineral magnetism and palaeomagnetism, Environmental magnetism: objectives and
evolution, Characteristic curves for interpreting mineral magnetic data.

Unit-V: Measurements of magnetic susceptibility and remanence, Sediment and rock dating
techniques, some complex issues associated with magnetic studies, Environmental
magnetism- its application to Indian depositional settings, Magnetic susceptibility and
depositional environments, Magneto-minerological s-ratio and palaeoclimate in sediments,
Future studies.
References:
1. George Backus, Robert Parker, Catherine Constable, 1996, Foundations of
Geomagnetism, Cambridge University Press.
2. Ronald T. Merrill, 2010, Our Magnetic Earth: The Science of Geomagnetism,
University of Chicago Press.
3. Ronald T. Merrill, Michael W. McElhinny, Phillip L McFadden, 1998, The Magnetic
field of the Earth: Paleomagnetism, the Core, and the Deep Mantle, Academic Press.
4. Nathani Basavaiah, 2011, Geomagnetism: Solid Earth and Upper Atmosphere
Perspectives, Capital Publishing Company.
5. Gubbins-Herrero-Bervera, Encyclopedia of Geomagnetism and Paleomagnetism,
Springer.
6. Tsuneji Rikitake, Yoshimori Honkura, 2011, Solid Earth Geomagnetism, Springer
7. Jack A. Jacobs, 1963, The Earth’s Core and Geomagnetism, Elsevier Science and
Technology.
8. William Lowrie, 1997, Fundamentals of Geophysics, Cambridge University Press.
9. Michael W. McElhinny, Phillip L. McFadden, 1999, Paleomagnetism: Continents and
Oceans, Elsevier.

Page 10 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./ Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-8/

8. GEOPHYSICAL PROSPECTING METHODS

LTPC
4 0 0 4

Unit-I: Internal structure of the earth, Structure, composition and evolution of the earth and
distribution of elements, Density distribution, shape and mass of the earth. Density vs depth
profile, Various Geophysical Exploration Methods, Sea-floor spreading and magnetic
polarity reversals, Magneto-stratigraphy.

Unit-II: Basic concepts, Earth’s magnetism and gravity, Geomagnetic and gravity fields,
Crustal magnetic and gravity anomalies & their sources, Surveying instruments for magnetic
and gravity measurements, Magnetic and gravity surveys- ground, airborne, marine and
satellite, Magnetic and gravity data processing & interpretation, Case studies.

Unit-III: Classification of electrical methods, Electrical properties of rocks and minerals,

Elementary theory, Electrode layouts and field procedure, Processing & interpretation of
resistivity data. Electromagnetic theory, Telluric and magnetotelluric methods, Geomagnetic
depth sounding, Field survey and instrumentation, Interpretation techniques, Case studies.

Unit-IV: Seismic wave theory; Seismometry; Seismogram interpretation; Earthquake

locations and Seismic sources; Determination of Earth structure; Earthquake kinematics and
dynamics; Seismotectonics.

Unit-V: Elements of Geodesy, GPS Technology, Contributory Error and accuracy, GPS
Observables, measurements and strategies, Terrestrial Reference frame, Applications of GPS,
GPS measurements and active crustal motions: Case studies, Other spaceborne Geodetic
techniques.

References:

1. Keller, G.V. Electrical Methods in Geophysical Prospecting, Frischnett, Pergamon

2. Patra, H.P. and Mallick, K. Principles of Geoelectric Soundings
3. Telford, W. K and Geldart, L.P., Sheriff, R. F and Keys D.A Applied Geophysics
Cambridge
4. Keller and Frischkeicht , 1966, electrical methods in Geophysical prospecting
Pergaon
5. Patra and Bhattacharya 1969 , Direct Current,Geoelectrical Sounding, Elsevier
6. Yilmaz, O, 1987, Seismic Data Processing, SEG Publication.
7. Dobrin M.B. Savit C.H. 1988 Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting. Mc. Graw
Hill Book
8. Sheriff. R.E. and Geldart. L.P. 1987 Exploration Seismology, Vol. 1. Cambridge
Univ. Press.

Page 11 of 12
 2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-9/

9. REMOTE SENSING & GIS

LTPC
4 0 0 4

Unit-I: Electromagnetic energy resources, electromagnetic radiation (EMR) spectrum, EMR

energy – frequency – wavelength relationship, Boltzman law, Wien Law.

Unit-II: Characteristics of aerial photographs and satellite imagery – false colour composites,
photo-elemental characters, reflectance and emittance- Geosynchronous and sunsynchronous
orbits, location of a satellite in space, world referencing system.
Unit-III: Remote sensing plate forms - Characteristics of different remote sensing satellites
and sensors, resolution, parallex, vertical exaggeration, relief displacement, mosaic, analysis
and interpretations of aerial photographs and satellites imagery. Satellite remote sensing
digital data products, data format and storage, preprocessing – atmospheric, geometric and
radiometric correction, image rectification and registration.
Unit-IV: Digital image processing – contrast enhancement, image arithmetic, filtering, image
transformation, classification of satellite image – supervised and unsupervised classification
techniques, visible, thermal infra-red, microwave and hyper-spectral remote sensing
principles and techniques. Advantages and disadvantages of Remote Sensing –Various
application of remote sensing.
Unit-V: Definition of GIS – components of GIS – Geographical concepts – Input data for
GIS – Types of output products – GIS Data types – Data representation – Data sources – Data
acquisition – Geo referencing of GIS data – Spatial data errors – Spatial data structures.
database management – hierarchical, network, relational, object oriented databases, data
stream – data encoding and editing, data analysis - Application of GIS.

References:
1. P.K. Guha, Remote sensing for Beginner – EWP, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Sabino. F.F. Remote sensing principles and interpretation, Freeman, San Francisco,
1978.
3. Arnold. R.H. Interpretation of air-photo and Remotely sensed imagery, Printice-Hall,
New Jersey, 1997.
4. Drury. S.A. Image Interpretation in Geology – Chapman Hall, London, 1993.
5. Lillesand. T.M. and Kiefu. R.W. Remote sensing and Image Interpretation, Willey,
New York.
6. Miller.V.C, Photogeology, McGraw Hill – London, 1961.

2019-20/MSU/49th SCAA/Univ.Depts./Ph.D. Geotechnology / Geology/Ppr-10/

10. MINI PROJECT

LTPC
0 0 04
Page 12 of 12
COURSEWORK FOR DOCTORAL DEGREE

HISTORY

2018

MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY

TIRUNELVELI, TAMILNADU – 627 012.

1
PART – A (ANY ONE SUBJECT COMPULSORY)

SL.NO SUBJECT TITLE CREDITS

1 HISTORICAL METHODS AND RESEARCH 4
2 STATE AND SOCIETY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA 4
3 CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF INDIA (1947-1991 A.D) 4

PART – B (OPTIONAL)

SL.NO SUBJECT TITLE CREDITS

1 SOCIO-CULTURAL HISTORY OF TAMILNADU(1916-1967 A.D) 4
2 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN TAMIL NADU(1900-2000 A.D) 4
3 LOCAL HISTORY 4
(KANYAKUMARI,THOOTHUKUDI AND TIRUNELVELI
DISTRICTS)

SL.NO SUBJECT TITLE CREDITS

4 GREAT THINKERS OF MODERN INDIA 4
5 ECOLOGICAL HISTORY OF INDIA (1865-2000 A.D) 4
6 WOMEN‟S MOVEMENT IN INDIA (1885-1985A.D) 4

SL.NO SUBJECT TITLE CREDITS

7 STATE AND SOCIETY IN ANCIENT INDIA UPTO HARSHA 4
8 HUMAN RIGHTS IN INDIA (1945-1995 A.D) 4
9 HISTORY OF ART AND ARCHITECTURE IN TAMILNADU 4
UPTO 1947 A.D

SL.NO SUBJECT TITLE CREDITS

10 ARCHAEOLOGY AND EPIGRAPHY:PRICIPLES AND METHODS 4
11 ECONOMIC HISTORY OF INDIA(1800-1947 A.D) 4
12 PROJECT 4

2
PART – A (1)
HISTORICAL METHODS AND RESEARCH
LTPC
4004

Preamble: The Syllabus covers the basic concept of Ancient, Medieval and Modern
Historiography.It also very useful to learn the different trends in Historical writings
and Components of Research Methodology.

UNIT – I : Meaning, kinds and Nature of History :

Meaning of History – Definition of History – Scope and purpose of History – Important
study of History – Uses and Abuses of History – History and Allied subjects. (10L)

UNIT – II : Historiography in Ancient, Medieval and Modern period :

Ancient Historiography – Greek, Rome and India Medieval Historiography – Church,
Arab and Indo-Muslim Historiography – Modern Historiography – Post modernist
Historiography and Subaltern Historiography in India and Abroad – Selected Modern Historians
in India and Abroad – William Byrd, Gerhard Friedrich Muller – Kalkana – Mohammed Iqbal –
Alberuni – Amirkhusru – Ferishta – Abdur Razzak – Gulbadan Begum – Abudl Hamid
Lohani – Positivism – Auguste Comte – Historical Materialism – Karl Marx and Eric Hobsbawn
– Imperialist Historians – J.S.Mill, Marx Muller – William Jones – F.W. Hegd – Nationalist
Historians – Irban Habib – Bipin Chandra – B.D. Kosambi pal – Romilathopar – R.C.Majumdar
– D.D.Kosambi – K.M.Panikkar – B.A. Smith – Post Modernist – Derida and Michael Faucault –
Subaltern Historians – Ranajit Guha – David Arnold – David Hariman – Gyanendra Pandey –
Dipesh Chakrabarty – Annals – Marc Block – Fernand Braudel – South Indian Historians – K.K.
Pillai – S.Manickam – K.A.Neelakanda Sastri – S.Krishnaswami Iyengar. (15L)

UNIT – III : Philosophy of History & Research Methodology

Meaning and Philosophy of History – Definition Development of Philosophy of History
in Ancient times – Contribution of Vico, Hegel, Spengular, Tynbee. Choosing of Topic –
Reasons for Undertaking Research – Choice of Topic – Historical Surveys – Primary Sources –
Secondary Sources – Problem faced by the scholar and Historians – Collection of sources –
Qualification of Research scholar. (12L)

UNIT –I V : Writing of History :

Objectivity in Historical Writing – Analysis of Sources – Problem of Authenticity or
External Criticism – Forgery of documents – How to confirm Authenticity – Problem of
credibility (or) Internal Criticism – Positive Criticism – Negative Criticism – Synthesis –
Exposition – Documentation – Foot Notes – Abbreviation Glossary – Bibliography – Appendix –
Format of Thesis – Format of Articles. (12L)

3
UNIT V - Methodology of Teaching
Teachings –Objectives of Teaching, Phase of Teaching – Teaching Methods: Letcture Method,
Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving Method, Project Method,
Seminar – Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualised Instruction, Ways for Effective
Presentation with Power Point – Documentation – Evaluation: Formative, Summative, &
Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation – Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical,
Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral Development- Teaching Later Adolescents (11L)

(TOTAL:60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS

Mahalingam, T.V., Early South Indian Palaeography.

Majumdar R.C – Historiography in Modern India, Bombay, 1970.
Majumdar, R.C., Historiography in Modern India, Bombay, 1970.
Malcolm Williams, Science and Social Science – An Introduction (London and Newyork :
Routeldege, 2000)
Manickam, S., Theory of History and Methods of Research, Madurai, 2000.
Nagasamy, R., Kalvettiyal
Rajayyan, K., History in Theory and Method, Madurai, 1993
Ralph De Sola Microfilming.
Rowse, A.L., The use of History, London, 1963.
SailanGhose Archives in India
Sastri, K.A.N., Historical Method, Mysore, 1956.
Schallenberg, T.R., Modern Archives – Principles and Techniques
Sheik Ali, B., History: It’s Theory and Method, Madras, 1991.
Sircar, D.C., Indian Epigraphy
Sivaramamurthi, C., Indian Epigraphy and Indian Scripts.
South India Historians: K.K.Pillai, K.A.N. K Rajayan
Sreedharan, E.A., Text book o9f Historiography 500 BC to 2000 A.D. Delhi, 2004
Subramanian, N., Historiography, Madurai, 1973.
Sampath, K., Pannerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to educational technolog. (2 nd
revised ed.). New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
Sharma, S. R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools & techniques. Jaipur: Mangal
Deep.
Vedanayagam, E. G. (1989). Teaching technology for college teachers. New York: Sterling Publishers.

4
PART – A (2)
STATE AND SOCIETY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA
LTPC
4 004

Preamble:The Study enables to provide clear cut idea about the condition of Medieval Indian
States and Society.The Study is very useful to know about Market reforms, War
techniques, Development of Mathematics, Astronomy, Medicine, and Art and
Architecture of Medieval Indian Society.

UNIT I
Fixing the period of Medieval India- Sources for the Study of Regional States and
Empires- Historiography on Medieval India- Land Grants and Development of Feudalism in
North Indian Society- debate on Indian Feudalism (11L)

UNIT II
Important Regional Ruling Families- Southern Kingdoms: Cholas, Chalukyas, Pallavas
and Rashtrakutas –Temples and Brahmadeyas-Ideological base of Kingship- Devotional
Movement in Tamil Country during Cholas and Pallavas-Territorial Divisions of Mandalam and
Nadus- Development of trade and Mercantile Corporations- Theory of Segmentary state. (13L)

UNIT III
Important Dynasties of Delhi Sultanate: Slave, Khalji, Tughlaq, Sayyid and Lody:
State under Delhi Sultanate: Salient features of administration- Bureaucracy and Revenue
system- Iqta system- Nobility and Ulemas- Socio-economic Conditions-Urban centres-Market
Reforms of Alauddin Khalji- War technology- Knowledge systems: Mathematics, Astronomy
and Medicine- Failure of Rajputs against Turks. (13L)

UNIT IV
Mughal State: Mughal Empire: Babar to Aurangzeb-Bureaucracy- Administration of
Sher Shah Suri- Akbar‟s Mansab and Jagirdari Systems- Din‐Illahi – Socio-economic
Conditions- Mughal Literature, Art, Music and Architecture- Decline of Mughal Empire. (12L)

UNIT V

Vijayanagara: Krishnadevaraya and his welfare administration- Maratha State: Shivaji

and his Administration- Marathas in Tamilnadu- Nayaks of Madurai, Thanjavur and Senji-
Nayak administration and Palayakarar system. (11L)

5
 (TOTAL :60L)
REFERENCE BOOKS

Irfan Habib, Medieval India: The Study of Civilization, National Book Trust, 2008
Irfan Habib, Economic History of Medieval India, Pearson Education, India, 2011
Noboru Karashima, Concise History of South India: Issues and Interpretations, OUP, 2014
Kesavan Veluthat, Political Structure of Early Medieval South India, Orient Longman, 1993
K.A. Nilakanda Sastri, Colas, University of Madras, 1955.
S.B.P. Nigam, Nobility under the Sultans of Delhi, Munshi Ram Manoharlal, 1968.
Qanungo K.R., Sher Shah and His Times, Oriental New Delhi, 1965.
K.A. Nizami, State and Culture in Medieval India, Adam Publishers and Distributors, 1985
Sathish Chandra, Medieval India (2 volumes), Har Anand Publications, 2005.
R.S. Sharma, Indian Feudalism, Macmillan, 1980.
R. S. Sharma, India‟s Ancient Past, Oxford, 2006
R.S. Sharma, Early Medieval Indian Society, Orient BlackSwan, 2014.
Romila Thapar, The Penguin History of Early India, Penguin, 2003.
Alam Muzafar & Subramaniyam(ed.), The Mughal State , O.U.P., 2002.
M. Athar Ali, Mughal Indian Studies in Polity, Society and Culture, O.U.P., 2006.
Anwar Firdous, Nobility under the Mughals, Manohar Books, 2001.
Kulke Harman, State in India (1000 - 1700), O.U.P. 1997.
Richards J.F., The Mughal Empire, Cambridge University Press, 1993.
Burton Stein, Peasant State and Society in Early Medieval South India, OUP, 1980
S. Kathirvel, History of Maravas, 1971.
K. Rajayyan, Rise and Fall of Poligars, University of Madras, 1974.
R. Champakalakshmi, Tradition, Ideology and Urbanization, OUP, 1996
Salma Ahmed Farooqui, A Comprehensive History of Medieval India: From Twelfth Century to
Mid Eighteenth Century, Pearson, 2011.
J.N. Sarkar, Shivaji and his Times, Sarvar and Sons, Calcutta, 1961.
Sunil Kumar, The Emergence of Delhi Sultanate: AD 1192- 1286, Permanent Black, 2010.
R. Champakalakshmi, Religion, Tradition and Ideology, OUP, 2011.
Abraham Eraly, The Age of Wrath: A History of Delhi Sultanate, Penguin, 2017.
Abraham Eraly, The Emperors of Peacock Throne, Penguin, 1997.

6
PART – A (3)
CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF INDIA (1947 – 1991A.D)
LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Syllabus Covers the entire Panorama of events right from Indias Independence
to the assassination of Rajiv Gandhi, the then Prime Minister of India and the
formation of Narasimha Rao‟s Ministry.

The Study will create a deep and intense Political Knowledge of India Since 1947.

UNIT – I
Partition and its fallout – Gandhijis Martyrdom – Making of Indian Constitution –
Adoption of draft report of the Constituent Assembly – Basic features of Indian Constitution –
Principles of India Foreign Policy – Merger of Princely States with Indian Union – I General
Elections (1952) – Re-organization of States on Linguistic basis. (12L)

UNIT – II
Five Year Plans – Thrust to agriculture and Industry – Land Reforms Abolition of
Zamindari System. Land Ceiling Acts in States – War with China (1962) and Pakistan (1974) –
Contrasting pictures of famines and Green Revolution Language Policy issue – Adoption of two
language formula. (12L)

UNIT – III
Congress loosing elections in many states in 1967 – rise of regionalism and
regional politics. Issues in centre – State relations – Split in the congress – Emergence of India
Gandhi as leader of Congress Party – Indra Gandhi‟s popularity on account of India‟s
intervention in the formation of Bangladesh – unseating of Indra Gandhi by Allahabad Court
Judgment and declaration of Emergency. (14L)

UNIT – IV
Emergency abuses and the call for total revolution by Jayaprakash Narayan –
Punjab Crisis and Operation Blue Star – Assassination of Indra Gandhi and emergence of Rajiv
Gandhi. (10L)

7
UNIT – V
Rajiv Gandhi‟s initiative in resolving the issues relating to Assam Mizoram and
Srilanka – Rajiv Gandhi falling a prey to Tamil Tigers Terror attack – Congress returning to
power with great majority with Narasimha Rao as Prime Minister. (12L)
(TOTAL:60L)
REFERENCE BOOKS

Bipan Chandra, (1999). India after Independence. Agra, Penguin Books.

Durga Das, (1969). India from Curzon to Nehru and After. New Delhi, Rupa & Co.
Publishing Company.

Kapoor, A.C. (1963). Select Constitutions. (4th ed.). New Delhi, S. Chand & Co.

Kuldip Nayar, (1975). India after Nehru. Kanpur, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

Pylee, M. V. (1962). India’s Constitution. Bombay, Asia Publishing House.

Sachin Kundar, (2013). India since Independence. New Delhi, Mohit Publications.

Sharma, M.P. (1968). The Government of the Indian Republic. (5th ed.). Allahabad, Kitab
Mahal.

Venkatesan, K. (2014). History of Contemporary India: 1947 – 2012. Rajapalayam,VC

Publication.

8
PART – B (1)

SOCIO – CULTURAL HISTORY OF TAMILNADU (1916 – 1967 A.D)

LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Syllabus Covers the entire Panorama of events right from the beginning of Non-
Brahmin Movement to the Formation of D.M.K Ministry under C.N.Annadurai in
Tamil Nadu.

The Study will create Knowledge about the Socio-Cultural issues like Non-Brahmin
Movement, Self-Respect Movement, Depressed Class Movement, Anti-Hindi
Agitation and Tamil Nadu Politics and the formation of DMK Ministry.

UNIT – I:

Madras Presidency – Tamil Districts – Impact of the Advent of the Europeans –

Christian Missionaries – London Mission - Trancubar Mission – Madura Mission – Objective
conditions for conversion – Christianity and Social Transformation. (11L)

UNIT–II:
Muthulakshmi Reddy - Abolition of Devadasi system – Right to Temple Entry movement
– M. C. Raja‟s Bill, Central Legislative Bill – Temple Entry Act passed in Rajaji Ministry, 1938
- Temple Entry in Madurai, Srirangam and Kumbakonam. (11L)

UNIT–III:
Early associations on Social and Cultural issues – South Indian Liberal Federations –
Justice Party – Non Brahmin Manifesto – Non – Brahmin Movement – Self Respect Movement
of Periyar – Status of Women – Self respect Marriage – Tamil revivalism - Anti-Hindi Agitation
– Launch of Dravidar Kazhakam – Birth of DMK. (12L)

UNIT – IV:
Social Legislation under diarchy - Admission of the Depressed class people into Public
School – Labour Schools – scholarship – Hostel for Depressed class students – Buckkingkam
and Carnatic Mill labourer strike and – M.C. Raja‟s Reaction – Gandhiji‟s Harijan Welfare
Schemes – Separate Electorate for Harijans and the Poona Pact. (13L)

9
Unit –V:
Rajaji‟s vocational education scheme - Anti Hindi Agitations –Two Language Formula –
Kamaraj ministry - Mid day meals schemes – Opening of schools – Empowerment of Backward
Classes – Programmes of Dravida Munnetra Kazhagam – 1967 Elections and formation of
DMK ministry under C.N. Annadurai – D.M.K‟s Social Legislation – Cultural Symbolism of
D.M.K. – Change of the name of State – Measures adopted for the Welfare of Backward
Classes and Adi Dravidas. (13L)
(TOTAL:60L)
REFERENCES BOOKS :

Dube, S. C; – Caste and Race in India, Bombay 1969.

Rajayan, K; – History of Tamilnadu, 1565 – 1982, Madurai, 1982.
Baliga, B. S ; – Studies in Madras Administrations, Vol.I. Madras, 1960
Bishop Caldwell; – A History of Tinnelveli, New Delhi, 1982.
I. Udayasankar; – Periyar E. V. Ramasamy: Communal Justice and Social Recognition,
Chennai, 2006.
Pillai, K.K; - Tamizhaga Varalarum Makkalum Panpadum, Madras 1972.
“ ; - Then India Varalarum, Madras, 1960.
“ : - The Caste System in Tamilnadu, Madras, 1977.. Pate H.R ; - Tinnevelly District
Gazetteer, Madras, 1917.
Baliga, B.S; - Madras in the Struggle for Independence, Vol.I, Madras 1957.
“ ; - Studies in Madras Administration, Vol.I, Madras, 1960.
Chandra Babu, B.S; - Social Protest in Tamilnadu, Madras, 1993.
Mangala Murugesan, N.K; - Self Respect movement in Tamilnadu 1920 – 1940 Madurai.

Udhaya Sankar, I; - Backward Class Movement in Tamilnadu, 2005.

Venu Gopal, P; - Justice Party and Social Justice, Madras 1992.
Raja, M.C; - Oppressed Hindus, Madras 1922
Gupta, S.K; - The Scheduled Caste in Modern India politics: Their Emergence as a
Political Power, New Delhi, 1985.
Hardgrave, I, Robert, Jr.; - Nadars of Tamilnadu – The Political Culture of Community in
change , Bombay1969.
Radhakrishnan. P; - Backward Class Movement in Tamilnadu, in M.N. Srinivas (Ed.), Caste, its
20th Century Natar, Penguin India (1996).

10
PART – B (2)

SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN TAMILNADU (1900 – 2000A.D)

LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Study enables to provide clear cut idea about the important Social Movements
like Women‟s rights movement, Dalit Rights Movement and Movement against
Dominant Caste Violence in Tamil Nadu upto 2000 A.D.

UNIT – I: Introduction
Meaning – Definition – Scope – purposes – Differences between Social Movement and
Social Justice Movement. (11L)

UNIT – II:
Impact of Western Education – Role of Missionaries in creating Social Awareness – First
Social Movement – Nadar‟s Temple Entry Agitation in Madurai, Kamuthi, Kazhugumalai and
Sivakasi – Women‟s Rights to wear Upper garment in South Travancore – Muttukutti
Swamigal. (12L)

UNIT – III:
Movement for Women‟s Rights – Western Education‟s – Impact on Women – Women‟s
participation in Indian National Movement and the Corollary effect of consciousness on their
rights – Women‟s Movement led by Annie Besant – Sarojini Naidu, Aruna Asaf Ali – Women‟s
Movement in the Post-Independence Period. (13L)

UNIT – IV:
Social Movement for Dalit Rights – M.C. Raja – Rettaimalai Srinivasan – Deivendrakula
Vellalar Movement – Perumal Peter – Immanual Sekaran. (12L)

UNIT – V:
Movement against dominant caste violence – Meenakshipuram – Sankaralingapuram –
Uthapuram – Movement against Police Violence – Kodiyankulam and Tiruneveli (Tamiraparani
tragedy) (12L)
(TOTAL: 60L)

11
REFERENCES BOOKS:

Ambedkar, B.R; - The Untouchable who were they and why they became Untouchables?
New Delhi, 1948.
Antony Raj, S.J; - A Study on Atrocities against the Dalits in Tamilnadu, Madurai.
Chandra Babu, B.S.; - Subaltern Protest, Emerald Publications, Madras 1995.
Chidambaram Pillai, P; - Rights of Temple Entry, Chennai, 2008.
Desai, A. R.; - Social Background of Indian Nationalism, Bombay, 1970.
Dhananjay Keer; - Ambedkar Life and Missions, Bombay, 1981.
Dube, S.C.; - Caste and Race in India, Bombay, 1969.
Hanumanthan, K. R.; - Untouchability – A Historical Study Upto 1500 A.D. Madurai, 1979.
Hardgrave, L, Robert Jr.; - Nadars of Tamilnadu – The Political Culture of Community in
Change, Bombay, 1969.
Ranjit Guha; - Subaltern Studeis, Vol.I – IV, Oxford University Press, Newyork, 1985.
Rangaraju, G; - Temple Entry Politics in Colonial Tamilnadu, Chennai 2006.

12
PART – B (3)
LOCAL HISTORY
(TIRUNELVELI, KANYAKUMARI AND THOOTHUKUDI DISTRICTS)
LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Study enable to provide clear cut idea about the Socio-economic and religious
Movements of the Southern most Districts of Tamil Nadu like Tirunelveli,
Kanyakumari and Thoothukudi.

The Study will create a deep and intense knowledge of Advent of Missionaries,
Growth of Education and participation of freedom struggle in the three Districts.

UNIT I
Meaning – Sources – Constructing Local History – Themes and Projects – Local History
Research and its Significance – Relating Local History to their region / nation / world. (10L)

UNIT II
Tirunelveli during the times of Pandyas – Cholas – Cheras – Tenkasi Pandyas –
Vijayanagar – Nayaks – Poligars – Islam in Tirunelveli – Arab Traders in Kayalpattinam,
Thoothukudi – Marakkayars – Portuguese and Dutch in Tirunelveli and Thoothukudi – European
Missionaries and their contributions – Catholic and Protestant – Cotton Cultivation and its
impacts – Building of dams and reservoirs – Setting up of textile industries – Coral Mill,
Thoothukudi – Harvey Mill, Papanasam – Joyal Mill, Kovilpatti – Intellectual Origin of Non-
Brahman Movement – Swadeshi Movement in Tirunelveli – National Movement : Gandhian
Phase. (13L)

UNIT III
Social Condition : Caste System – Caste hierarchy – Caste conflicts and Communal
Violence – Social Disabilities – Slavery – Devadasi System – Marumakkathayam – Pullappedi –
Parappedi – Mannappedi - Feudalism - Social reform movements – Upper Cloth Movement –
Temple Entry Movement – Suchindram Satyagraha – New Social Formation – Social Conflicts
and Social Change in Colonial Tirunelveli. (12L)

UNIT IV
South Travancore before the advent of Europeans – Portuguese Missionaries – Francis
Xavier – Conversion of Paravas – Protestant Missionaries – Society for the Promotion of
Christian Knowledge – London Missionary Society - Conversion of people to Christianity –

13
Growth of Education – South Travancore‟s advancement in literacy and education – Other
Missionary Activities – Salvation Army – Lutheran Mission – Islam – Religious reformists –
Muthukutti Swamigal – Introduction of Commercial Crops and its effects. (13L)

UNIT V
South Travancore in the Freedom Struggle – Salt Satyagraha – Nanjilnad Congress Youth
League – Quit India Movement – Travancore Tamil Nadu Congress – State - re – organization -
Formation of Kanyakumari District – Nesamony. (12L)
(TOTAL: 60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS
George, D. H. (1982). Kumari Mavattap Pennurimaip Porattam. Chennai, Mani
Pathippagam.

Kalyani Prabakaran, (2013). Kumari Maavatta Samoogap Panpattu Varalaru. Chennai,

Kaavya.

Patchaimal, K. (2001). Kumari Mavattam Pirantha Varalaru. Samythoppu, Thamilalayam.

Perumal, A. K. (2012). Then Kumariyin Chariththiram. Nagercoil, Sudharsan Books.

Perumal, A. K. (2003). Then Kumariyin Kathai. Chennai, United Writers.

Peter, D. (2008). Kumari Mavatta Viduthalai. Nagercoil, Kanyakumari Institute of

Development Studies.

Vivekananthan, S. (2013). Kumarinattuk Kottaikalum Kottaarankalum. Chennai, Kaavya.

David Ludden, Peasant History in South India, Oxford University Press

Hardgrave, R. Nadars of Tamilnad

Kathirvel, S., A History of Maravas

Kammen, C., On Doing Local History

Pate, H. R., District Gazetteer: Tinnevelly

Philip, D., Jordan, The Nature and Practice of State and Local History

Robert Caldwell, A History of Tinnevelly

Stuart, H., Manual of Tinnevelly

14
PART – B (4)

GREAT THINKERS OF MODERN INDIA

LTPC
4 004
Preamble:The Syllabus Covers the entire Panorama of events right from the evolution of
Modern India to Indian Renaissance.

The Study will create a deep and intense knowledge about the Role played by
Modern Indian Social reformers and freedom fighters to make democratic India.

UNIT - I
Evolution of Modern India and her Socio-Economic and Political thought. Impact
of Western Education – Emergence of indigenous educated elite – Indian Renaissance. (12L)

UNIT - II
Trend Setter Raam Mohan Rai – Kesav Chandra Sen – Eswar Chandra Vidyasagar
– Dayanand Saraswathi – Swami Vivekananda and Tagore. (12L)

UNIT - III
Gokhale – M.G. Ranade – Dadabai Naoroji representing Economic Nationalism –
Sir Syyad Ahmad Khan, Muslim Moderlist – Tilak, M.N.Roy, Aurobindu, V.O.C. and
Subramania Bharathi representing Militant Nationalism – B.R.Ambedkar – and his concept of
annihilation of caste Ambedkar as archited of Indian constitution – Kamala Chatto Pathayaya.
(14L)
UNIT - IV
Gandhi and his ideas on Swaraj, Sathyagraha & Ahimsa, Hindu – Muslim unity
and Harijan Welfare. (10L)

UNIT – V
Post – Independent Era – Nehru – Vinobha Bhave – Sarvapalli Radhakrishnan –
Rajaji – Jayaprakash Narayan – Ram Manohar Lohia – Periyar E.V.R and C.N. Annadurai.
(12L)
(TOTAL:60L)

15
REFERENCE BOOKS
Ramachandra Guha, Makers of Modern India, Benguin Books India, 2010.

N. Jayabalan, Indian Political Thinkers Modern Indian Political Thought, Atlantic

Publishers,2010.

Vishnoo Bhagwan, Indian Political Thinkers, Atma Ram & Sons,1999.

Verinder Grover, Rabindranath Tagore, Deep & Deep Publications, 1993

Raghavan Iyer, The Moral and Political Thought of Mahatma Gandhi, Oxford University Press,
2000

Desh Raj Sirswal, Dr B.R.Ambedkar – The Maker of Modern India, CPPIS Publication , 2016

Desh Raj Sirswal, Jyotiba Phule, A Modern Indian Philosopher, Darshan Journal, 2013

K Veeramani, Collected works of Periyar E.V.R, Amazon Digital Services, 2014.

V.Geetha Towards a Non-Brahmin Millennium: From Iyothee Thass to Periyar, Bhatkal &
Sen,2001

Jayaprakash Narayan, India : Struggle For Freedom, Political Social andEconomic, Hope India
Publications, 2006

16
PART –B (5)

ECOLOGICAL HISTORY OF INDIA (1865- 2000 A.D)

LTPC
4 004

Preamble: This Course aims to understand the evolution of the Eco-System, its impact for
human beings, the threat to wild life and the problem of Slash and burn method of
Cultivation.

The Course also explains environmental awareness through Chipco and Narmada
Bachao Andalan Movements.

UNIT I
Evolution of the Eco-System: Foundation of Biosphere- Process of Evolution from Azoic
Age to Quaternary Period- Symbiotic existence of plants and animals- Ascent of Human Beings-
Emergence of Hunter-Gatherer Society. (12L)

UNIT II
Demographic Spread: Pastoralism- Use of iron and iron-plough agriculture-Settled
Agriculture and Population Growth- The Age of Empires-Conservation from Above- Co-
existence of different type of resource users. (12L)

UNIT III
Colonialism and Disruption of Ecology: Establishment of British rule- Plantation
Forestry and Deforestation- The threat to wild life and the problem of slash and burn method of
cultivation- British policy on forest management-Legislation on reserve forests- Social conflicts
and their consequences. (12L)

UNIT IV
Industrialization and Mechanized Agriculture: Green Revolution and the advent of
chemical agriculture-Depletion of natural resources for energy use-Industrial Impact-Polution
and Ecological Degradation. (12L)

UNIT V
Capitalist mode of development and its impact on Eco System: Change in land use
pattern-Erosion of local economic base-Displacement of People and Conservation from the
below-Chipco movement and Narmada Bachao Andalan- Towards Environmental Awareness.
(12L)

(TOTAL:60L)

17
REFERENCE BOOKS
G. Khozim, The Biosphere and Politics, Central Books Ltd, 1979.
Hugh Stretton, Capitalism, Socialism and the Environment, Cambridge University Press, 1976
William L. Thomas, Man‟s Role in Changing the Face of the Earth, 2 vols., Chicago, 1956
Donald Worster, The Ends of the Earth: Perspectives on Modern Environmental History,
Cambridge University Press, 1988.
Eugene P. Odum, Fundamentals of Ecology, University of Georgia, 1959
Laeeq Futehally, Our Environment, National Book Trust, 1999.
Alfred W. Crossby, Ecological Imperialism, OUP, 1986
Madhav Gadgil and Ramachandra Guha, This Fissured Land: An Ecological History of India,
OUP, 1993
C.J. Baker, An Indian Rural Economy, 1880-1955, OUP, 1995
Joy Tivy, Agricultural Ecology, Longman, 1990.
Ramachandra Guha, The Unquiet Woods, Orient BlackSwan, 2013.
Mahesh Rangarajan, Fencing the Forest, Conservation and Ecological Change in India‟s Central
Provinces, OUP, 1996
Mahesh Rangarajan and Sivaramakrishnan, India‟s Environmental History: A Reader, Orient
BlackSwan, 2013.

18
PART – B (6)

WOMEN’S MOVEMENT IN INDIA (1885 – 1985 A.D)

LTPC
4 004

Preamble:This Course aims to understand on various organized efforts by women to improve

their conditions and remove gender based inequalities and Social evils in India and to
raise awareness on women‟s participation on Social issues.

UNIT – I HISTORY OF WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS IN THE WORLD:

The fight for women‟s educational rights, suffrage and fair working conditions for
women and girls. Movement in Britain and USA – Un convention on the Elimination of All
Forms of Discrimination against women – 1979 – International Bill of Rights for women 1981 –
Women‟s Movement in USA, Europe, Africa, Asia and Latin America. (12L)

UNIT – II STATUS OF WOMEN IN INDIA:

Status of Women in Pre-Independent India, Independent India, Gandhi and status of
Women – Gandhi‟s contribution for the betterment of women. The roots of discrimination
against women. (11L)

UNIT – III WOMEN’S MOVEMENT IN INDIA ;

Social Reform Movements : Their efforts in addressing various women centered issues
like, Women‟s education, Widow remarriage, abolition of polygamy, child marriage, inheritance
and property rights. Role of women in the struggle for freedom : Women‟s organizations – All
India Women‟s organization, Bengal Women‟s education League, Women‟s role in Civil
Disobedience Movement, Non Co-operation Movement, Quit India Movement – Role played by
Annie Besant. (13L)

UNIT – IV WOMEN’S MOVEMENT IN POST INDEPENDENT INDIA:

Anti-arrack Movement in Andhra Pradesh, Himachal, Haryana, Orissa, Madhya Pradesh
– Chipko Movement – Legal Status – poltical participation, Minority rights – Telengana and
Tebhaga Movements – Madhura Movement, Dalit Women issues – Women‟s Political
Movement for 33% reservation in Registration – Social Welfare activities of All India Women‟s
Conference. (13L)

19
UNIT – V WOMEN LEADERS:
Bhikhaiji Rustom Cama – Kamala Devi, Aruna Asaf Ali – Durgabai Deshmukh,
Satyawati, Swaroop Rani – Muthulekshmi Reddy, Kasturba Gandhi, Vijaya Lekshmi Pandit,
Sarojini Naidu. (11L)
(TOTAL:60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS:

Laxmi Rani – Women Empowerment and Family Welfare, New Generation Press, Delhi, 2014.

Geraldine Forbes, Women in Modern India, Cambridge University Press 2008.

Maitrayi Krishnaraj, Women and Society.

Mary Wollescroft, Vidication of Women‟s Rights.

P.K. Giri – Crime against Women, Sublime Publications, Jaipur, 2009.

Somya Banerjee (Ed) – National Policy for Women, Arise Publishers, New Delhi, 2009.

Madhu Kumar – Women‟s Movements, Random Publications, New Delhi, 2012.

20
PART – B(7)
STATE AND SOCIETY IN ANCIENT INDIA UPTO HARSHA
Preamble: The Study enable to provide clear cut idea about the different Stages of State
formation in ancient India and the unique features of Indian way of life.

UNIT – I ORIGIN OF STATE:

Origin and evolution of state. Four important theories of state: Evolution theory, Force
theory, Mystical theory and the contract theory, Kautilya‟s theory of State. (12L)

UNIT – II STATE FORMATION IN ANCIENT INDIA:

From chiefdom to Kindgom – Mahajanapadas and the evolution of territorial state.
(10L)

UNIT – III INDIA BETWEEN 650 BC – 185BC:

Kingship based Social relations – rigidity of Social structure – Revolt against orthodox
religious beliefs – Birth of Hedrodox faiths – Influence of Jainism and Buddhism.Empire
building : Centralised Administrative System – State Monopoly over agriculture and trade.
Asoka‟s Dharma State – Megasthenes account of Mauryan State and Society. (14L)

UNIT – IV INDIA DURING POST-MAURYA PERIOD:

Indo – Greeks and the Kushanas – Trade and Commerce – Inland and Maritime – Guild
System – Trade with Rome, Egypt and China – Mutual Cultural influence. (12L)

UNIT – V THE CLASSICAL AGE OF INDIA :

Political unity under Guptas – Government – Social changes during the Gupta period –
Fa-Hien‟s account of Indian Social life – Hieun-Tsang‟s account of people and the religious
conditions in the country. (12L)
(TOTAL:60L)

21
REFERENCE BOOKS :

Romila Thapar, The Penguin Early India, 2012.

R. S. Sharma, India‟s Ancient Past, Orient Black Swam, 2014.

Padma Charan Dhal, Indian Society and Culture Atlantic Publishers (P) Ltd.

A.L.Basham, The Wonder that was India Rupa & Co, Calcutta, 1998.

“…………” – A Cultural History of India, Oxford Press, 2004.

S.P.Nanda, History of Ancient India, Dominant Publishers, New Delhi,2010.

Mahendra Kumar Talware, History of Indian Culture, Mangalam Publications, New Delhi,
2014.

S.C.Ray Chaudary, Social,Cultural and Economic History of India, Surjeet Publications, Delhi,
2002.

22
PART – B (8)
HUMAN RIGHTS IN INDIA (1945-1995A.D)
LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Syllabus covers the entire panorama of events right from Indian Independence to
the formation of Indian Human Rights NGO of Peoples watch at Madurai in 1995.

The Study will create a deep and intense knowledge about the evolution of Human
Rights, Discrimination against women and issues related to Minorities, Dalits and
Tribals.

UNIT - I
Human Rights – Concept – Theories – Evolution – Historical – Political and
Philosophical – From Magna Carta to Declaration of Rights of man – Vindication of Women‟s
Rights. (11L)

UNIT - II
Circumstances leading to the appointment of commission on Human Rights by the
U.N.O - Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948). International Covenant on Civil and
Political Rights (1966) – International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rihts (1966)
Convention on all forms of Discrimination against Women (1979) – Other Declaration of U.N.O
on Human Rights – Helsinki Declaration (1975) – Vienna Declaration (1993). (13L)

UNIT - III
India and Human Rights – Constitutional Provisions –Evolution of Fundamental
Rights during the Struggle for Freedom – Nature of Fundamental Rights – Directive Priniciples
of State Policy – Proponents of Indian Human Rights Movement – M.G. Ranade (Colonial
Exploitation) Jothiba Phule (Mass Education) – Mahatma Gandhi (Multiple Strategies ) –
Iyothidas Pandithar and B.R. Ambedkar (Depressed Class Voice) – Pandita Ramabai and
Darasin Shinde (Women Rights). (12L)

UNIT - IV
National Human Rights Commission and its main recommendations – State
Human Rights Commission – National Commission for Minorites (1978) – National
Commission for SC and ST (1990) – National Commission for Women (1992) Role of NGO‟s –
Peoples union for Civil Liberties (PUCL) (1976) – Peoples union for Democratic Rights (PUDR)
(1976) – Kailas Satyarti‟s Childrens Foundation – Peoples Watch, Madurai (1995). (12L)

23
UNIT – V
Contemporary Human Rights issues in India – Dowry Menace – Sexual
harassment at working places – Children‟s issues – female infanticide and child labour – bonded
labour – Refugees and their issues – Issues related to minorities Dalits and Tribals. (12L)
(TOTAL:60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS:
A.Andrews and W.D.Hines, International Protection of Human Rights, Mansell Publishing Ltd,
London, 1987.

Maurice Carnston,What are Human Rights?, The Bodlay Head Ltd,London, 1973.

Jack Donnelly, The Concept of Human Rights, Croom Helm, London, 1978.

V.R.Krishna Iyer, Human Rights and Law, Vedpal Law House, Indore, 1984.

Sivagami Paramasivan, Studies in Human Rights, Salem, 2000.

Subbian, A Human Rights Systems, New Delhi, 2000.

24
PART- B (9)

HISTORY OF ART AND ARCHITECTURE IN TAMIL NADU

UPTO 1947A.D
LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The syllabus covers the basic concept and development of art and architecture in
Tamil Nadu right from Sangam period to India‟s Independence.

The study will create deep and intense Salient features of Art and Architecture in
Tamil Nadu.

UNIT-I
Definition – origin and growth – nature - scope – importance – various styles of
architecture – Nagara, Vesara, Dravida and their features. (12L)

Unit-II
Buddhist architecture – Stupas – Chaityas – Viharas – Jain Architecture – Caves – Pillars.
(12L)

Unit-III
Hindu Architecture representing Saivism and Vaishnavism: Pallava art and architecture –
Chola art and architecture – Pandya art and architecture – Vijayanagar art Architecture – Nayak
architecture. (14L)

Unit-IV
Islamic Architecture in Tamil Nadu. (10L)

Unit-V
Architecture under the foreigners – Portuguese – French – British – Churches and
Buildings – Gothic Style. (12L)
(TOTAL: 60L)

25
Reference Books
Basham, A.L. (1975). History of India. New Delhi, Oxford University Press.

Mohideen Badusha, A. H. (2009). History of Indian Architecture. Tirunelveli, Sultans

Publications.

Niccolo Manucci, (2010). Mughal India. Delhi, Low Price Publications.

Revathy Girish, (2013). Architectural Tourism. New Delhi, Dominant Publishers.

Saharan, M. S. (2014). Modern Indian History. New Delhi, Black Prints.

Selvaraj, C. (2009). Indian Architecture. Devidode, CSR Publication.

Smith, V.A. (2001). Early History of India. London, Odhamas Press.

26
PART – B (10)

ARCHAEOLOGY AND EPIGRAPHY: PRINCIPLES AND METHODS

LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The syllabus covers the basic concept of Excavation principles and conservation
techniques of Archaeology and Epigraphy.

The study will create a deep knowledge of dating and recording of antiquities and
Inscriptions of Cholas, Pandiyas, Pallavas and Vijayanagar.

UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO ARCHAEOLOGY

Definition, aim, scope of Archaeology, Pre historic Archaeology – Proto-historic
and Historic Archaeology Relationship of Archaeology with social and Natural sciences. Kinds
of Archaeology: Archaeological themes: Functionalism, New Archaeology,- Processual Theory
Archaeology and Archaeology To-Day. Archaeological finds Artifacts. Weapons- Inscriptions –
Coins – Pots heads and Monuments. (12L)

UNIT - II: RETRIEVAL OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL DATA

Techniques of Exploration, Surface Exploration. Transformational Process Field
Survey On – Site investigations – site survey methods Horizontal Excavation – Vertical
Excavation – The on a drant method- Trial Trench – Digging method. Stratigraphy, Principles of
Excavation – Excavation of a Burial, Excavation tools – Survey Equipment. (12L)

UNIT - III: PRESERVATION AND RECORDING

Aims and Methods of Conservation – Preliminary conservation methods. Organic
material – Inorganic material- Natural Preservation. Recording and preparation of Reports.
Photography Maps Site Note Books – Catalogue card Trench Report . Relative, Stratigraphy,
Typology, Absolute, Carbon 14, Pottasium –Argon, Fission Track. Thermo luminescence,
Uranium series Dendro chronology , Pollen analaysis – Varve clay analysis. Other methods.
Flourine, Nitrogen, Phosphate analaysis. Pollen Dating – Historical Dating.
(12L)

UNIT - IV: INTRODUCTION TO EPIGRAPHY

Definition and meaning of Epigraphy Origin - Kinds - Supplementary source for
the study of Political and Cultural History of India. Incriptions - Types of Inscriptions of Texts -
T Brahmi - Vatteluttu - Grabtga -Nagaru – Kharoshti. (12L)
.

27
UNIT – V: INSCRIPTIONS AND DATING
Estampage method-Decipherment of scripts - Cave Inscriptions - Inscriptions of
Pallavas, Cholas, Pandiyas and Vijayanagar. Copper Plate Inscriptions - Royal Seals - Symbols
of Ruling Powers of North and South India - Difference between Stone Inscriptions and copper
Plate Inscriptions. Inscriptions on Pottery. (12L)
(TOTAL:60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS

Joseph W. Miches 1973, Dating Methods in Archaeology.

Rajan K. 1976, Archaeology: Principles and Methods.

Raman K.V. 1986, Principle and Methods of Archaeology.

Balasubramanian .R 2002, Delhi Iron Pillar – New Insights.

Daniel Glyn .E, 1967, The origin and Growth of Archaeology.

Buhler .G, Indian Palaeography, New Delhi, 1968.

Pandey .R.B, Indian Palaeography, Benaras, 1952.

Mahalingam T.V. Early South Indian Palaeography, University of Madras, 1967.

Rajan.K., Kalvettiyal(Tamil), Thanjavur.

Subramanian, T.N., South Indian Temple Inscriptions.

Sivarama Murthy,C., Indian Epigraphy and South Indian Scripts.

Hultzsch E.,Venkayya.V.,and Rai Bahadur.,South Indian Inscriptions(34 Vol).,1890.

B.R.Gopal,South Indian Studies,Mysore,1990.

28
 PART – B(11)

ECONOMIC HISTORY OF INDIA (1800-1947 A.D)

LTPC
4 004

Preamble: The Syllabus covers the entire panorama of events right from 1800 to Indian
Independence.

The Study will create deep and intense economic policiesand developments
made by British in India, Industrial and Agricultural bases set by the British for
further developments and knows about the exploitation of the Indian economy by the
British.

UNIT I
The rise of British East India Company as a territorial power-De-industrialization
and loss of independent livelihood to artisans engaged in traditional arts and crafts in
the aftermath of Industrial Revolution in England- Impact of Company rule on
agrarian conditions-de-urbanization- Impoverishment of the rural society. (12L)

UNIT II:
Experiments in land revenue administration- Permanent Settlement/ Zamindari, Ryotwari
and Mahalwari systems-Introduction of commercial agriculture-cash crops: cotton,
groundnut, indigo, tobacco- plantation crops: coffee, tea, rubber- Oppressive land revenue
system-resettlement operations-neglect of irrigation- Protection to money-lending class-
practice of usury and resultant indebtedness leading to rural distress- emigration to Empire
colonies to escape starvation deaths under indentured labour system. (13L)

UNIT III:
Transfer of power to Crown in the wake of Great Rebellion- Investment of British surplus
capital in India- Building of railways under guaranteed interest scheme-Home Charges-Drain
of wealth- Free Trade policy of the British- Worsening terms of trade - Maintaining balance
of payments by export of gold- Growth of European enterprises in cotton textiles, jute and
plantations. (12L)

UNIT IV:

29
 Recurring famines and epidemics-inadequate relief measures of the imperial government-
Nationalists‟ critique on fiscal and monetary policy of the colonial state- banking, currency
and exchange rates- The fallout of Swadeshi movement and World War I- Emergence of
indigenous capital and industrial labour- state industrial policy- factory legislation- labour
and trade union movements. (12L)

UNIT V:
Discriminating protection and measures aiming at decolonization-Great Depression and
Its impact on agriculture, trade and industry- overvaluing of Indian rupee- Colonialism
adding to the Depression- experiences during World War II- Bombay Plan-End of Colonial
rule. (11L)
(TOTAL:60L)

REFERENCE BOOKS

Veera Anstey, The Economic Development in India, Longman, 1936

Radha Kamal Mukherjee & H.L. Dey, eds. Economic Problems of Modern India, 2 vols.,
Macmillan, 1941.

Baker, C.J. An Indian Rural Economy: The Tamilnadu Countryside, Oxford University Press,
1984

Bhattacharya, D. A Concise History of Indian Economy, Prentice Hall, 1977.

Bipan Chandra, Nationalism and Colonialism in Modern India, Vikas, 1979

Buchanan, D.H. The Development of Capitalist enterprise in India, Frank Cass, 1966

Dadabhai Naoroji, Poverty and Un-British Rule in India, Publication Division, Govt. of
India, 1962.

Daniel Thorner and Alice Thorner, Land and Labour in India, Asia Publishing House, 1962

David Washbrook,. "The Commercialization of Agriculture in Colonial India: Production,

Subsistence and Reproduction in the 'Dry South', C. 1870-1930." Modern Asian Studies:28,
no. 1 (1994).

Dharma Kumar, Tapan Raychouthry eds. The Cambridge Economic History of India,
volume II, 1757-1970, Cambridge, 1983

Dutt, R. C. The Economic History of India, Vols. I & II, Publication Division, Govt. Of
India, 1970.

30
Dutt, R.P. India Today, Manisha Granthalaya, Calcutta, 1979.

Gadgil, D.R. Industrial Evolution of India in Recent Times, Oxford University Press,1954

Gopal, S. Permanent Settlement in Bengal and its Results, OUP, London, 1949.

Hugh Tinker A New System of Slavery: The Export of Indian Labour Overseas 1830-
1920. London: Inst. of Race Relations, 1974.

Irfan Habib, „Colonialization of Indian Economy (1757-1900)‟ Social Scientist, No. 3, 1975

Loganathan, P.S. Industrial Organization in India, George Allen and Unwin, 1935

Nilmoni Mukherjee, The Ryotwari System in Madras 1792-1827, 1962

Rajat K. Ray (ed) Entrepreneurship and Industry in India, 1800-1947, OUP, 1994.

Rothermund, D. Asian Trade and European Expansion in the Age of Mercantilism, Manohar,
1981.

----------------------, An Economic History of India, Croom Helm, 1988

----------------------, The Global Impact of the Great Depression, Routledge, 1996

----------------------, Indian Economy and other Essays, Manohar, 1983

31
PART – B (12)

PROJECT

********************************************

32
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI
Department of Library and Information Science
Ph.D. Course Work Syllabus (2017-18 ONWARDS)

S.No Name of the Course

CORE PAPER
1. Research Methodology
ELECTIVE PAPERS (ANY TWO from Group A or B or C )
Group – A
2 Informetrics and Scientometrics
3 User Studies in Digital Era
4 Information Literacy
Group – B
5 Electronic Resources Management
6 Library Automation and Digitization
7 Digital Libraries
Group – C
8 E-Learning and Content Development
9 Public and Academic Library System
10 Marketing of Information Products and Services
MINI PROJECT
11 Mini Project

Page 1 of 20
 Core Paper

Title: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Objectives

1. To understand the role and importance of research in Library and Information Science
2. To introduce different methods and techniques of research
3. To familiarize in the use of statistical tools of research and to develop research report skills.

Unit – I
Research: Concept, Characteristics and Types- Pure, Applied, Action and Inter
Disciplinary Research – Logic and Scientific method.

Unit - II
Research Problem-Identification, Selection and Formulation of a Research
Problem; Research design; Literature Search and Review of Literature; Hypothesis-
definition, Types and Characteristics.

Unit – III
Research Methods- Survey – Historical – Case study – Experimental etc; Sampling – Definition,
Types and Relevance -Data Collection: Data Sources – Field data and Secondary data; Data
collection Methods – Questionnaire / Schedule, Observation etc.

Unit – IV
Data Analysis: Analysis and Interpretation – Statistical Tools and Techniques- Measure
of Central Tendency, Frequency Distribution, Regression and Correlation; SPSS.

Unit – V
Research Report Writing – Structure and Presentation – Article, Thesis and Dissertation,
Project Report – Style Manuals – APA, MLA – Application IT in Research.
Reference

Flick,Uwe.(2015). Introducing Research methodology: a beginner’s guide to doing a research

project. Sage

Kothari, C.R.(2017). Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques. Reprint.New Age

International

Kumar, PSG. (2016). Research and Statistical Techniques, BR Publishing

Page 2 of 20
 Group-A

Title: INFORMETRICS AND SCIENTOMETRICS

Objectives

1. To learn the concept, use, theories, laws and parameters of bibliometrics.

2. To understand citation analysis and operation research

3. To teach the students the application of bibliometrics to study the literature in

different subjects.

Unit -I
Informetrics – Evaluation – Concept, Librametrics, Bibliometrics, Scientometrics, Webometrics.

Unit –II
Theory and Laws - Zipf’s law, Lotka’s Law, Bradford’s Law. Price Theory.

Unit – III
Quantitative and Qualitative techniques: Types, Multidimensional scaling, Cluster analysis,
Correspondence analysis, Co-word analysis, media and audience analysis.

Unit –IV
Citation Theory and Analysis; Definition, Theory of citing, different forms of citations, Age of
citation – citation counts , Self –citation – Citation Index - Impact Factor – H Index.

Unit – V
Bibliometrics and Scientometric Analysis using Statistical Software packages

(Hits cite, Bib excel and VoS - Viewer ).

Page 3 of 20
Reference
Almind, T.C., and Ingwersen, P. (1997). “Informetric analyses on the World Wide Web:
methodological approaches to Webometrics. Toward a basi framework forWebometrics.”Journal
of the American Society for Information Science and Technology, 55 (14), 1216-27.

Aslib proceedings. 1, 1949, 102.

Bradford , S.C. (1934). Sources of information on specific subjects. (Engineering. Jan 26; 85-6).

Bookstein, A.(1976). Bibliometric distributions. Library Quarterly. 46, 4; 416-23.

Brookes, B.C. (1968). The derivation and application of the Bradford-Zip fdistribution. Journal of
Documentation. 24, 4; 247-265.

Brookes, B.C. (1969b). Bradford's law and the bibliography of science. Nature. 224; 953-6.

Brookes, B.C. (1970). Obsolescence of special library periodicals: sampling errors and utility
contours. Journal of the American Society for Information Science. 21; 320-9.

Brookes, B.C. (1990). Biblio-, Scient-, Informetrics??? What are we talking about? In Legghe and
R Rousseau (Eds.) Informetrics 89/90, 31-43.

Cole, F.J and Eales, N.B. The History of Comparative Anatomy Part-I: A Statistical analysis of
Literature. Science Progress, 11 April 1917.pp. 578-96.

Dolrov,G.H and Korennoi, A.A. The informational basis of scientometrics: on theoretical

problems of informetrics.F.I.D.435.1969.pp.165-191.

Egghe, L. (1990). The duality of informetric systems with applications to empirical laws. Journal
of Information Science, 16, 1; 17-27.

Firthorne,Robert A (1969). Empirical hyperbolic distributions (Bradford-Zipf-Mondelbrot) for

bibliometric description and prediction. Journal of Documentation, 25,4; 319-43

Page 4 of 20
 Group-A

Title: USER STUDIES In DIGITAL ERA

UNIT I
Information users and their information needs: Categories of information
users, Information needs- definition and models, Information seeking
behavior.
UNIT II
Information need - Definitional and conceptual problems. Distinction
between needs, - wants, demands and requirements; Levels of information
need Taylor‟s model, Lancaster‟s four levels, - Cronin‟s three levels; -
Koikela‟s two levels of information need.
UNIT III
User studies: Concept of user studies, Importance of user studies, Types of
user studies, Methods and techniques of user studies: Questionnaire,
interview, observation and diary.
UNIT IV
Library Surveys Techniques of library and information centres survey,
Proforma method, Interview method, Record analysis method.
UNIT V
Planning a library or user survey, User - Understanding the psychology of
information user.

Reference
Mai, J.E.(2016) .Looking for Information: A Survey of research on
information Seeking, needs and behavior. Emerald Publishing.
Osborne,Larry N. and Nakamura, Margaret. System for Librarians and
Information Professionals. 2nd ed. Engewook: Libraries unlimited, 2014
Devarajan. User Studies. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2017

Page 5 of 20
Kumar, PSG. Library and Users: Theory and Practice. BR Publications, New
Delhi, 2016
Ravichandra Rao (2016): Quantitative Methods in Library and Information
Science. Delhi: Wiley Eastern, 2016.
Sridhar, MS. Library Use and User Research. Concept Publishing Co.,New
Delhi;

Page 6 of 20
 Group- A

Title: INFORMATION LITERACY

Objective:
 To know the concept of Information Literacy
 Understand the application of Information Literacy in Library
 To know the trend in Information Literacy
Unit I
Fudamentals of Information Literacy – Concept ,Need and Objectives – Areas of
Information Literacy – standards in Information Literacy – Role of Institution in
Information Literacy
Unit II
Information Literacy programmes – Scope of Information Literacy Programme –
National Programmes in Information Literacy – International Programmes in Information
Literacy – various information Literacy models – Rubrics, ALA, ACRL, CILs,
SCONUL, ICDLs..
Unit III
Methodolody of information Literacy – Information Literacy Products : Library
Brochure, Database Brochure, Web-Based Access Instructions, Information Bulletin –
Designing of Information Literacy Programme – Implementation of Information Literacy
Programmes
Unit IV
Application of Information Literacy in Library and information centres – Information
Literacy for Users – Information Literacy for Professionals – IL for Science and
Technology –IL for Social Science – IL for Research and development.
Unit V
Trends in Information Literacy Web based Information Literacy system – OPAC
Information Literacy System – Lifelong learning system

Reference

Alagaran II, Jose Reuben Q (2015). Explore, Engage, Empower Model: Integrating
Media and Information Literacy for Sustainable Development in Communication
Education Curriculum; in Media Information Literacy for the Sustainable Development
Goals; Jagtar Singh, Alton Grizzle, Sin JoanYee and Sherri Hope Cuiver edited; MILID
Yearbook 2015; International Clearinghouse on Children, Youth and Media;
NORDICOM; University of Gothenburg.
Asthana, S. (2008). Innovative Practices of Youth Participation in Media; UNESCO.

Buckingham, D. (2003).Mediaeducation:Literacy,learning and

contemporaryculture.Cambridge, MA: Polity Press.

Page 7 of 20
Gerbner, G., Gross, L., Morgan, M., & Signorielli, N. (1994). Growingup with television:
The cultivation perspective.In J. Bryant & D. Zillmann (Eds.),Media effects: Advances in
theory and research (pp.17-42). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.

Gerbner, G. 1999. Foreword: What do we know? In J. Shanaha and M. Morgan (Eds.),

Television and its Viewers: Cultivation Theory and Research, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, and elsewhere.

Hobbs, R., & Jensen, A., (2009). The past, present, and future of media literacy
education.JournalofMediaLiteracyEducation,1(1), 1-11.

Hobbs, Renee; Cohn-Geltner, Henry & Landis, John (2011). Views on the News:
Media Literacy Empowerment Competencies in the Elementary Grades; in New
Questions, New Insights, New Approaches ; Cecilia Von Feilitzen, Ulla Carlsson
& Catharina Bucht Edited; The International Clearinghouse on Children, Youth and
Media; Nordicom; University of Gothenburg.

Horton, Forest Woody, Jr (2007). Understanding Information Literacy: A Primer;

United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization.

Martens, Hans (2010). Evaluating Media Literacy Education: Concepts, Theories and
Future Directions; in the Journal of Media Literacy Education 2:1 (2010) 1-22; The
National Association for Media Literacy Education.

Masternam, L (2001). A Rationale for Media Education, in Kubey, R. (Ed). Media

Literacy in the Information Age: Current Perspectives. Information and Behaviour,
6, New Brunawick, N J Transaction Publishers.

Media and Information Literacy; Policy and Strategy Guidelines; UNESCO; 2013.

NCERT Position Paper on National Policy on Education for Peace; NCERT, 2006.

Potter, W J(2004). Theory of media literacy: A cognitive approach; Thousand Oaks,

CA:Sage.

Tornero, J M Perez & Varis, Tapio (2010). Media Literacy and New Humanism;
UNESCO Institute for Information Technologies in Education.

Page 8 of 20
 Group –B
Title: Electronic Resources Management
Objectives

 To familiarize with the various Electronic resources available in libraries

 To Know categories of E- resources according to their forms
 To understand the different formats of E- resources and their capacity in terms of
memory
 To know the preservation methods of various types of media resources.

Unit I

Introduction to Electronic Resources - Types of Electronic Resources - Primary Sources

-Online Databases -Reference Sources-Libraries and Subject Gateways - e-books,
ejoumals,e-databases .
Unit II

Building and Management of e-resources - Multimedia basede-resources - Commercial

Vendors -Meta Resources -Electronic Books -Advantages of Internet Resources -
Evaluation of Internet Resources

Unit – III

Role of Internet in Information Transfer - Subject gateways - Commercial database

services COMPENDEX, EiTech, SCOPLTS, Emerald - Database Searchware SCIRUS"
Google Scholar, EBSCO.

Unit IV

Types of Media Resources -Paper (Print) -Care, Handling and Storage - Film –
Filmstrips- Slides -Cinefilm -Microforms -Care, Handling and Storage - Magnetic -
Audio Tape - Video Tape - Storage Disks - Care, Handling and Storage - Plastic -
Transparent Plastics - Vinyl Discs - Optical Storage Systems - Care, Handling and
Storage

Unit V

Types of Equipment -Filmstrip Projectors - Slide Projectors - Cine Projectors -

Microform Readers - Magnetic Tape Recorders - Overhead Projector - Record Player -
CD-Player - Criteria for Selecting Equipment - Maintenance of Equipment - Problems
with Equipment

Page 9 of 20
Reference

American Library Association. Scholarly communication tool kit.

(http://www.ala.org/ala/acrl/acrlissues/scholarlycomm/scholarlycommunicationtoolkit/to
olkit.cfm)

Armbrust, M., Fox, A., Friffith, R., (et. al.) (2009). Above the clouds: a Berkeley view of
cloudcomputing.

Technical report No. UCB/EECS-2009-28. Available at.

http://www.eecs.berkeley.edu/Pubs/TechRpts/2009/EECS-2009-28.html

Association of Research Libraries (1995), “Definition and purposes of a digital library”,

available at:www.arl.org/sunsite/definition.html

Budapest Open Access Initiative. Available online at

http://www.soros.org/openaccess/read

Directory of Open access Repositories. http://www.opendoar.org/

Chepesuik, R. (1997). The future is here: America's libraries go digital. American

Libraries, 2(1), 47-49.

Chowdhury, G, & Foo, S. (2012). Digital Libraries and Open Access. InChowdhury, G,
& Foo, S. (Eds). Digital libraries and information access: Research perspectives, Facet
Publishing, UK

Page 10 of 20
 Group- B
Title: LIBRARY AUTOMATION AND DIGITILIZATION
Objective

1. To get familiarized with the various library software.

2. To know the process of Digitalization.

Unit – I
Library Automation: Historical Perspectives, Need and Purpose, Approaches to Library
Automation – Hardware and Software requirements – Commercial Software and
Open Source Library automation Software - Automated Housekeeping Operations:
Acquisition, Serials Control, Circulation, OPAC and Administration. Management of
Library Automation: Planning, Data, Formats and Standards – ISO 2709, MARC21,
Z39.50 - Retrospective Conversion, Implementation and Evaluation.
Unit – II
Computerized Information Services: Alerting Services, Bibliographic Services,
Document Delivery Services and Reference Services.ICT Infrastructures – Systems –
Configuration. NetworksTypes Routers Reprography Machine –Barcode Scanner – RFID
Unit – III
Library / Bibliographic application software, Koha, SOUL, over view of other packages,
Boolean Search - Evaluation of Library automation software.
Digitization: Basics - Definition - Need for Digitization, Tools of Digitization: Scanners,
Scanning Software, Digital Library Software.
Unit – IV
Selection of Materials for Digitization: Steps in the Process of Digitization, Scanning,
Indexing, Storing and Retrieving. Digitization: Input and Output Options - Scanning as
Image Only, Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and Retaining Page Layout, Retaining
Page Layout using Acrobat Capture and Re-keying.
Unit – V
Technology of Digitization : Bit Depth or Dynamic Range, Resolution- Threshold -
Image Enhancement -Compression - Lossless Compression - Lossy Compression -
Compression Protocols, File Formats and Media Types, Formats and Encoding used for
Text. Planning and Implementation: Feasibility - Planning the Project - Purchase of
Hardware and Software, Selection of Material for Digitization and „Born Digital‟-
Placement and Training of Manpower - Content Creation and Execution of the Project.

Page 11 of 20
Reference

Guha, B., A report on feasibility study on Automation and Networking of Library

(DLNET).NISSAT, DSIR, New Delhi.

Kimber, Richard T., Automation in Libraries. Oxford Pergamon.1986.

http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream/10603/5661/9/09_chapter%204.pdf

Rao, I K Ravichandra., Automation of Academic Libraries in India: Status, Problems and Future
(INFLIBNET Centre, March 8, 1997)

SAFFADY, WILLIAM., Library Automation: An Overview, LIBRARY TRENDS, Vol. 37, No.
3, Winter 1989, pp. 269-81

Sharma, Pandey S.K., Fundamentals of Library Automation. New Delhi, Ess Ess,1995.

Reynolds, Dennis. Library Automation issue and applications, New York, R.R.Bowker,1985.

Sinha, P.K. Software for Libraries. In: Sharma, C.D. and Ojha, D.C. eds., Advancesin Library
and Information Science. Vol. 3. Jodhpur, Scientific, 1992. p.127-128.

Lihitkar, R S &Lihitkar, Shalini R., (2011) "Ranking of selected library software packages in
India", Library Hi Tech News, Vol. 28 Iss: 4, pp.8 –17

Schroeder, Rebecca., (2012) "When patrons call the shots: patron-driven acquisition at Brigham
Young University", CollectionBuilding, Vol. 31 Iss: 1, pp.11 –14

Kemdarne, Suryakant Balbhim (2012)., A study of library automation and networking in dental
collegelibraries affiliated to Rajiv Gandhi University of Health Sciences, Bangalore., Tilak
Maharashtra Vidyapeeth

Sompel, Vande H & Beit-Arie, Oren (2001). Open linking in the scholarly information
environment using Open URL framework.
[http://www.dlib.org/dlib/march01/vandesompel/03vandesompel.html]

Page 12 of 20
 Group –B
Title: DIGITAL LIBRARIES

Objective
1. To get familiarized with the various digital libraries
2. To know about different types of content and technology
3. To know about the collection development and infrastructure
Unit I
Introduction-Traditional Library- Information Retrieval System and Digital Library
Electronic, Virtual, Hybrid and Digital Libraries Characteristics of Digital Libraries
World Wide Web (WWW) V/s Digital Library
Unit II
Digital Library: Towards a Definition Why Digital Library? Some Important Digital
Libraries New Zealand Digital Library
(http://www.nzld.org/NetworkedComputerScienceTechnicalReferenceLibrary(http://ww
w.ncstrl.orgArXiv.org(http://www.arxiv.org/)ScienceDirect
(http://www.sciencedirect.com/)
Unit III
Digital Storage Technology -Magnetic Storage Media -Optical Storage Media -Flash
Memory Devices or USB Drives -Online Databases and Information Retrieval System
(IRS) -Computer-based Information Storage and Retrieval System- Digital Imaging
Technology -Institutional Repositories -Internet Technology and its Services
Development of Web Browsers -Hyperlinks and Development of World Wide Web -
Electronic Resources
Unit IV
Collections Infrastructure -Digital Knowledge Organization -Access Infrastructure:
Browse, Search and Navigation Interfaces of Digital LibrarySearch, Browsing and
Navigational Interfaces-Network and Computing Infrastructure-Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) and Digital Rights Management- Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Digital
Rights Management and Access Control in Digital Library-User Authentication -User
Authorization T-echnology of Access Control and Access Tracking in Digital Library -
Digital Library Services

Unit V
Collection Development -Digital Collection -Identification of Digitization-Benefits of
Digitization-Selection of Electronic Resources -Selection Criteria and Evaluation of
Electronic Resources Content -Functionality and Reliability -Technical Support-Vendor
support-Pricing Model-Print + E Model-Electronic Only-Full-time Equivalent Models -
Concurrent-Users Model -Perpetual Access V/s Annual Lease-Back-file Access -
Document Delivery and Pay-Per-View Models-Licensing Consideration -Access Concern
Copy Right and Fair Use-Flexibility and Enhancement- Legal Issue

Page 13 of 20
Reference

Arms, William Y. (2000). Digital Libraries. The MIT Press: Cambridge, MA.

Arms, W.Y. (1995). Key Concepts in the Architecture of the Digital Library. D-lib Magazine.

Haigh, S. (1996). Optical Character Recognition (OCR) as a Digitization Technology.

Jantz, Ronald. (2001). Technological Discontinuities in the Library: Digital Projects That Illustrate
New Opportunities for the Librarian and the Library. IFLA Journal 27, 74-77.

Kenney, Anne R. and Stephen Chapman. (1996). Digital Imaging forLibraries and Archives. Ithaca:
Dept. of Preservation and Conservation, Cornell University Library.

Kessler, Jack. (1996). Internet Digital Libraries: The International Dimension. Boston: Artech
House Publishers.

Lesk, Michael. (1997). Practical Digital Libraries: Books, Bytes and Bucks. San Fransisco: Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers. NorthEast Document Conservation Center. NEDCC Handbook for Digital
Projects: A Management Tool for Preservation and Access.

Page 14 of 20
 Group –C
Title: E-learning and content Development
Objective:

 To explain the concepts such as content development and collaborative content

development
 To discuss content development tools and the various formats of content
 To explain the different types of content management system
 To highlight the best practices for collaborative content development

Unit I
Content:An Overview - Concept - Content Tools (Media-wise) - Content Formats - Introduction
to Collaboration - Tools for Collaboration on the Web - Features of Collaboration Tools -
Collaborative Content Development - Content Management System: Models and Best Practices -
Web Content Management System - E-learning Content Management System - Collaborative
Content Development System.
Unit II
Digital Research Repository System - Best Practices for Collaborative Content Development -
Web Content Life Cycle Framework 12.5.1 Life Cycle Management - Issues and Challenges:
Quality, Validity and Authentication - Implications for Libraries
Unit III
Web-based Products and Services - Web 2.0: Characteristics - Web 2.0 Tools - Some Popular
Web-based Services - Wikis - Blogs - Social Bookmarking - Social Networking - Use of Web-based
Services in Libraries - Web-based Library Services - Lib 2.0 or Library 2.0 - Web-based Learning
and Education - AnswerTips - Campusbug - Elgg – Moodle
Unit IV
World Wide Web - Conceptual Framework of WWW - Communication Architecture - Protocols -
Markup Languages - Definition and Need - Types of Markup Languages - Web 2.0 - Definition
and Need -Features of Web 2.0 Applications - Web 2.0 Applications - Impact of Web 2.0 Tools
Over WWW and Semantic Web
Unit V
Distributed Service - Web Directory - Bulletin Board - Mailing List and Discussion Lists - Resource
Sharing - Online Document Repositories - Web Portals - Email - Online Storage and Searching - E-
publishing - Webcasting - Interactive Distributed Services - Interactive Learning - Interactive
Business and Trading - Remote Computing and File Transfer - Interactive Communication -
Interactive Search Agent and Document Delivery - Interactive Bookmarking - Interactive
Translation Service

Page 15 of 20
Reference

Beck, S. (1997). Evaluation Criteria: The Good, the Bad and the Ugly: Or Why is it Good Idea to
Evaluate Web Sources. Available online (http://lib.nmsu.edu/instruction/ evalcrit.html).

Cooke, A. (2001). A Guide to Finding Quality Information on the Internet: Selection and
Evaluation Strategies, 2nd ed. London: Library Association Publishing.

Critical Evaluation of Resources. (2002). Available online (http://www.lib.berkeley.edu/

TeachingLib/Guides/Evaluation.html).

Doherty,Paul. (2000). Cyberplaces: The Internet Guide for A/E/C. Kingston, H.A., U.S.A.: Robert
S. Means Co.

Miller, P. Web 2.0: Building the new library. Ariadne, No.45, October 2005.

Miller, P. and Chad, K. Do libraries matter?: The rise of Library 2.0, Talis November
2005.

Miller, P. Library 2.0: The challenge of disruptive innovation. Talis, February 2006.
O‟Reilly, Tim. Web 2.0: Compact Definition. Radar blog, 1 October2005.
(http://radar.oreilly.com/archives/2005/10/web_20_compact_definition.html)

O‟Reilly, Tim. What Is Web 2.0? OReilly.net. PostedSeptember 30,

2005.(http://www.oreillynet.com/pub/a/oreilly/tim/news/2005/09/30/what-is-web-
20.html)

Page 16 of 20
 Group- C
Title: PUBLIC AND ACADEMIC LIBRARY SYSTEM

Objectives
1. To define the basic objectives of academic libraries
2. To know the various sources of finance to strengthen the academic library system
3. To encourage students to evaluate the user studies using new techniques

Unit – I
Public Libraries and their Development: Objectives and Functions- History and
Development of Libraries with Special Reference to India - Role of Public Libraries in
Society - Agencies and their Role in Promotion and Development of Public Libraries in
India.Collection Development and Management: Periodicals, Conference Literature,
Grey Literature and Government Publications - Non-Book Materials – Electronic Sources
and Online Databases

Unit – II
Library Organization and Administration: Organizational Structure - Staff Manual,
Library Surveys, Statistics and Standards, etc.Information Services: CAS, SDI,
Abstracting and Indexing Services - Library Bulletin, Newspaper Clipping Services -
Computerized Services - Resource Sharing and Networking

Unit – III
Financial and Human Resource Management: Determination of Finance, Sources of
Finance - Types of Budget - Nature, Size, Selection, Recruitment, Qualification and
Training - Responsibilities and Duties - Competency Development.

Unit-IV
Academic Library: Objectives, Functions and Services – Role of Academic Library in
Higher Education – Academic Library Services – Academic Library Management – Role
of UGC for Academic Library Development. Resource Development: Physical Resources
including ICT infrastructure – Human Resource Development – Financial Resource
Development: Sources of Library Finance in University and College Libraries, Library
Expenditure, Budget and its Kinds, Financial Estimation.

Unit-V
Collection Development: Collection Development, Write-off and Weeding out policy –
Problems in Collection Development – Role of Library Committee in Collection
Development.

Page 17 of 20
Reference

Agarwal, J. N. “Libraries in Ancient India.” Indian Librarian8.4 (1954): 141.

Bhatt, R.K. Academic Libraries In India: A Historical Study

Bhatt, R.K. History and Development of Libraries in India. Delhi: Mittal, 1995

Gill, Philip, ed.The Public Library Service: IFLA/UNESCO guidelines for development.
München: K.G. Saur,2001.
http://archive.ifla.org/VII/s8/proj/publ97.pdf(Accessed on 12.09.2013)

Harrod, LM. Harrod‟s Librarians‟ Glossary and Reference Book. London: Gower Publishing,
1987.p.636.

India. Ministry of education and Youth Services, Report of the Advisory Committee for
Libraries, 1959, New Delhi: Ministry of Education (Rev. Ed.) p. 32

Kent, Allen, ed.Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science. V24. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 1978. p. 267-291

Ranganathan, S.R. LibraryDevelopment Plan : Thirty years Programme for India,with draft
library bills for the union and the constituent states.Delhi: University of DelhiPress, 1950.p.274

UNESCO Public Library Manifesto, 1994. Paris: Unesco, 1995

Page 18 of 20
 Group- C

Title: MARKETING OF INFORMATION PRODUCT AND SERIVICES

Objectives

1. To familiarize the students about the changing philosophy of Library and Information
Services from free to fee based information services.
2. To understand the Economic value of information.
3. To impart knowledge in product planning, product pricing and also to understand the
market behaviour

Unit -I
Information as a commodity and resource – information products – nature and types –
tangible and intangible, Information Commons, Information Ecology.

Unit-II
Marketing of information- concept – need and purpose – marketable products and
services – approaches- corporate strategy.

Unit - III
Market segmentation – Targeting – geographic – Demographic –Behavioral –
Psychographical segmentation – user behaviour – adoption, marketing plan – Marketing
Strategies.

Unit -IV
Marketing mix: Designing – communication – product mix strategy – Kotlers Four C‟s
Mccarthy‟s Four P‟s – competition analysis – pricing policy and methods.

Unit -V
Marketing research; definition, functions, types and scope – applications – Technique‟s –
marketing information system – components-functions

Page 19 of 20
Reference

Bhat, Ishwara. Designing efficient home pages for special libraries. In Shaping the future
of special libraries, ed by S M Dhawanetal. New Delhi, Ane Books, 208, p 420 –435.
Booms, B. H and Bitner, M. J (1981). “ Marketing strategies and organization structure
for service firms” in Donnelly, J. H and George, W. R (eds). The marketing of services,
American Marketing Association, Chicago, pp. 47-51.

Dewhurst, Charlotte. How marketing can help increase the value of e-resource
investments : five key findings. Library Connect Newsletter. 2008, 6(1), pp. 1.

Dhingra, Navjyoti and MAHAJAN, Preeti. Use of electronic journals : A case study of
Panjab University Library. In Proceedings of International C ALIBER 2007, Ahmedabad,
Inflibnet, p. 744 –755.

Elsevier. How libraries are training users on e-resources : Best practices. Library
Connect. 2005, 6(1), p. 8.

Gupta, D. K. and Jambhekar, A (eds.) (2003). An integrated approach to services

marketing : A book of readings in marketing of library and information services, Allied
Publishers, Mumbai, p.7.

Kotler, P. and Levy, S. J. (1969). Broadening the concept of marketing. Journal of

Marketing, 33 (1), pp. 10-15.

Kotler, P. (1982). Marketing for non-profit organizations. (2nded). Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi, p.6.

Library Association (1997). Training package on marketing. Library Association,

London, p. 2.6.

Raina, R. (1988). Marketing in library and information context. Desidoc Bulletin for
libraries, 18(3), p. 8.

Page 20 of 20
 1. RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
To improve the research acumen and the teaching ability of the students and help them to probe
business issues scientifically.

UNIT I:

RESEARCH – Definition, Objectives, Scope, Scientific, Ethics, Process. Research in Social Sciences –
Classification. Need for Research – identification of an issue, formulation of a problem. HYPOTHESIS –
Sources, Types, Characteristics. RESEARCH DESIGN ‐ Review of Literature ‐ Primary and Secondary
Sources. Measurement – Function, Characteristic, Construction of Measurement Tool. Research Plan.
DATA – Meaning, Importance, Sources, applicability. Sources of secondary data. Sources of Primary
data. Methods of Collection ‐ Observation, Experimentation, Survey (Types)

UNIT II:

SAMPLING – Definition, Objectives, Characteristics. Sample design ‐ Universe, Sample Unit, Sample Size
(Determination), errors (sampling and non sampling) Sampling Techniques (Probability and Non
Probability), Advantages and Limitations of each Sampling technique. TOOLS FOR DATA COLLECTION
‐Choice on Methods of data collection ‐ Nature of Fieldwork, Sampling Frame and Sample Selection.
Schedule and Questionnaire – Construction, types of questions, Measurement Scale and Indices, Pilot
Study and Pre‐test.– Field Operation. DATA PROCESSING ‐Editing, coding, transcription, Classification
and Tabulation of data. Data analysis – meaning, methods, quantitative and qualitative analysis,
introduction to uses of Statistics and its limitation, introduction to parametric and non‐parametric tests,
graphic presentation.

UNIT III:

DATA STATISTICS – measures of central tendency, measures of dispersion, Uni‐variate, Bi‐variate,

Multivariate, Contingent Table, Measure of Association / Relationship. HYPOTHESIS – Formulation,
Testing. DATA ANALYSIS (Uni and Bi‐variate) – Percentage, Weighted Average, Garret Ranking,
correlation and regression, T‐ test, Z – Test, Run Test, F – Test, One Way ANOVA, Two Way ANOVA, Chi
Square Test. MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS ‐ Multi Dimensional Scaling, Factor Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
MANOVA, Cluster analysis, Discriminate analysis.

Page 1 of 25
UNIT IV:

REPORT WRITING – Types, Different stages in research Report. Layout of the research report.
Precautions for writing Research Reports. Problems of Inference in Non‐experimental Sciences. Uses of
footnotes, References and Bibliography. Software Packages for Statistical Tools.

UNIT V: METHODOLOGY OF TEACHING

Teaching - Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching - Teaching Methods: Lecture Method,

Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving Method, Project Method,
Seminar - Integrating ICT in Teaching: Individualized Instruction, Ways for Effective Presentation
with PowerPoint - Documentation - Evaluation: Formative, Summative & Continuous and
Comprehensive Evaluation - Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical, Cognitive,
Emotional, Social and Moral Development - Teaching Later Adolescents.

COURSE OUTCOME:
After studying this course, the student will be able to improve the research acumen and develop a
passion for teaching.

REFERENCES:

1. Research Methodology, Methods and Techniques - C.R. Kothari

2. Methodology of Research in social Sciences - O.R. Krishnaswami
3. Business Research Methods - Donald R. Cooper, Pamela S. Schindler
4. Statistics for Management‐Richard I.Levin&David S.Rubin
5. Statistical Methods‐S.P.Gupta
6. Statistics for Business and Economics‐ R.P Hooda‐Mac Millan India Ltd.
7. Sampath, K., Panneerselvam, A & Santhanam S(1984), Introduction to Educational Technology,
(2nd Revised Edition), New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
8. Sharma, S. R. (2003), Effective Classroom Teaching Modern Methods, Tools and Techniques,
Jaipur: Mangaldeep
9. Vedanayagam, E. G (1989), Teaching Technology for College Teachers, New York: Sterling
Publishers.

Page 2 of 25
 2. COMPETENCIES FOR EXCELLENCE
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
This course will enable the students to

i. develop an understanding on competency framework, assessment and development of

competency.
ii. inculcate critical thinking process to analyze and solve the problems.
iii. understand the power of team dynamics.
iv. learn the value of time and art of managing time.
v. create an awareness on cause and consequence of stress and to develop strategies to manage
stress
UNIT I: COMPETENCY DEVELOPMENT
Meaning-Importance-Framework-Measuring Competency-Developing Competency

UNIT II: PROBLEM SOLVING AND DECISION MAKING

Identifying, Defining and Solving the Problems-Creative Thinking-Group Decision making-Negotiation
Skill

UNIT III: TEAM BUILDING

Significance-Understanding role of teams-Strategies and Tools for Team Building-Leadership Skill-
Conflict Resolution.

UNIT IV: TIME MANAGEMENT

Significance-Assessment of Time Management- Strategies and Tools.

UNIT V STRESS MANAGEMENT:

Significance-Causes for Stress-Symptoms of Stress- Strategies for Managing and Overcoming Stress

COURSE OUTCOME
On completion of this course, the students will be able to-
i. critically think on a particular problem and evolve workable solutions to solve the problem.
ii. understand the dynamics of the team and effectively use them for productive result.
iii. understand the importance of time, prioritize and schedule the time.
iv. understand the significance and strategies of managing stress for the wellbeing of both
individual and organization

Page 3 of 25
REFERENCES:
1. Barun K Mitra, Personality Development and Soft Skill, Oxford Publishers.
2. Alex,K.Soft Skills: Know Yourself & Know the World,S. Chand & Co
3. Kalyana,Soft Skill for Managers,Wiley Publishing Ltd.
4. Shalini Verma, Development of Life Skills and Professional Practice,Sultan Chand & Co

WEBSITES
www.mindtools.com
www.free-management-ebooks.com

Page 4 of 25
 3. CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN FINANCE

UNIT I
Finance - Concept, scope, objectives. Profit maximization vs. Wealth maximization; Functions of Finance
Manager in Modern Age; Financial decision areas, Time value of money, risk and return analysis

UNIT II
Long-term finance - sources, equity shares, preference shares, debentures and bonds. Working Capital
Financing - Sources, Role of commercial bank, Commercial paper, Factoring and other tools. Capital
Structue – Concept, Approaches; NI, NOI, Traditional and Modigliani Miller Approach. Cost of Capital -
equity share, preference share, debentures.

UNIT-III
Working Capital – Concept, Approaches to Working Capital Management, Factors affecting working
capital requirement, Management of cash, inventory and receivables.
Dividend Decision: Concept of retained earnings and plough back of profits, relevancy and irrelevancy
theory of dividend decision; Walter’s model; Gordon’s Model and Modigliani Miller model; Factor
affecting dividend decision.

UNIT-IV
Investment decision – Appraisal, Capital budgeting, Profitability Index, Capital Rationing, Risk and
Uncertainty. Leverage analysis (financing, operating, combined leverage), EBIT, EPS analysis, EVA. Credit
rating. Institutional Investors. Mutual Funds. Speculation and Investment. Portfolio Analysis, Venture
Capital.

UNIT-V
Activity Based Costing. Insurance as an Investment. Derivatives. Venture Capital. International Financial
Institutions - BoP, Foreign Exchange Rate. Corporate sickness - Turn around strategies. EXIM bank,
International Monetary Fund (IMF), Asian Development Bank (ADB), Export Credit Guarantee
Corporation (ECGC), World Bank, International Development Association, Bank for International
Settlement and such other International financial Institutions.

Page 5 of 25
REFERENCES:
1. Financial Management - I M Pandey
2. Financial Management and Policy - James C Varnhorne
3. Financial Management - Theory and practice - Prasanna Chandra
4. Financial Management Principles and Practice - S.N. Maheswari
5. Corporate Finance Theory and Practice - Aswat Damodaran
6. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management – Fischer and Jordan
7. Investments – Sharpe, Bailey and Alexander.
8. Foreign Exchange and Risk Management – C. Jeevanandam
9. Capital Market Management - VA Avadhani
10. Financial Services – MY Khan
11. Project Planning Analysis, Selection and Implementation – Prasanna Chandra.

Page 6 of 25
 4. CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MANAGING HUMAN RESOURCES

UNIT - I
Human Resource – Philosophy, Changing environments. Organization of HR departments. Line and staff
functions. Role of HR Managers. Job analysis – Methods, Purpose, Job Description, Job Specification.
Man power planning. Recruitment and Selection. Socialization.

UNIT - II
Performance appraisal - 360 degrees appraisal. Job evaluation and merit rating. Computerized
evaluation. Training and Development. Employee compensation and rewards. Mentoring. Discipline
administration. Trade unions. Grievance handling. Exit Interview.

UNIT - III
Labour Welfare: Employees safety and Health. Benefits and services: Statutory benefits – non-statutory
(voluntary) benefits Using HRM to attain competitive advantage. HR Audit. Human Information System.
Industrial relations. Industrial Disputes.

UNIT - IV
Understanding Individual – Personality, Perception, Attitude, Values. Development of Individual –
Motivation, Leadership, Group dynamics, Transactional analysis, Creativity, Assertiveness training, Team
Building. Organisational Climate and Culture. Career management. Organizational development.
Managing Self – Mediation for peace – Yoga for Life.

UNIT –V

Knowledge Management. Employee engagement. Competency Mapping. Retention strategies –

Outplacement, Quality of work life, Flexi timing. Stress, Crisis & Conflict Management. Workers
participation. Collective bargaining. Counseling – Strategies, Behavior Modification.

Page 7 of 25
REFERENCES:
1. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations - P.C. Tripathi.
2. Dynamics of Personnel Management - C.B. Mamoria
3. Human Resource Management - N.G. Nair, Latha Nair.
4. Essential of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations - P. Subbarao
5. Managerial effectiveness and Quality of Work life: Indian Insights - Chakraborthy
6. Managing Human Resource - Wayne Cascio
7. Organization development - Wendell I. French cooil H. Bell, Jr.
8. Managing Stress - Jeff Davidson
9. Elternal Values for a changing society - Swami Ranganathananda
10. Management Development and Training Hand Book - Taylor and Lippiff
11. Management Development and Training Hand Book - L.W. Humble
12. Explorations in Management Development - Lynton & Pareek
13. Total Career Management - Frances A. Clark
14. Successful Negotiation - Rao, S.L.

Page 8 of 25
 5. CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING

UNIT I
Marketing – Evolution, Concepts, Purpose, Process, Types, Indian Environment, International
Environment. Marketing Mix – Definition, Decision on Components.

UNIT II
Product – Definition, Differentiation, New product development, Product Life cycle, Product mix,
Branding. Pricing – Definition, Concepts, Methods. Packaging. Promotion – Definition, Techniques.
Promotion mix – Components, Advertising, Sales promotion, Personal selling, Publicity, Public relations.
Physical distribution – Definition, Types of channels, Levels, Strategies, Direct marketing

UNIT III
Segmenting – Nature, Characteristics, Process, Bases. Targeting – Bases, Decisions on segments,
analyzing consumer behavior, selecting segments. Positioning – Definition, Strategies.

UNIT IV
Customer Relationship Management. Perceptual mapping. Brand building. Rural Marketing. E-
Marketing - Online and Web marketing. Marketing ethics. Expanding the Horizon. Multi Level Marketing.
Consumerism. Marketing to non-profit organizations. Green Marketing. Consumer research

UNIT V
Marketing Information system. Marketing Intelligence. Scope for Research in Marketing.

Page 9 of 25
References:
1. Marketing Research - Rajendra Nargundkar
2. Marketing Research - Harper W Boyd, Ralph Westfall, Stanley F Stasch
3. Strategic Brand Management - Kevin Lane Keller
4. Rural Marketing Environment, Problem and Strategies - T.P.Gopalaswamy
5. Marketing Management, Planning Implementing and Control, An Indian Context –
V.S.Ramasamy & Namakumari
6. Advertising & Promotion - George E.Belch & Michael E.Belch
7. Retail Management - Chetan Bajaj, Tuli , Srivastava
8. Retailing - Burman, Evans
9. International Marketing - Philip R. Cateora
10. Hand book of Relationship Marketing - Jagadish N.Sheth and Atul Parvatiyar
11. Key Customer Relationship Management - Ken Burnett
12. Consumer Behavior - Leon G Schiffman, Leslie Lazar Kanuk
13. Marketing management (Millenium edidtion) - Philip Kortler
14. Essential of Marketing Research - Aakar Day, Kumar

Page 10 of 25
 6. BUSINESS ANALYTICS
Course Objective:
To enable the scholars to understand the need and importance of Business Analytics in solving business
problems. To educate the scholars on different tools of Business Analytics. To understand the
opportunities for Business Analytic professionals.

Unit 1:
Introduction and Definition of Business Analytics – Application of Business Analytics in operations,
marketing, finance, and strategic planning
Unit 2:
Data – Sources of Data – Collecting Data – Data Accuracy – Issues with Missing Data – Data Classification
–Methods for Data Analysis – Deciding appropriate method and tool for analysis – Effective
Interpretation
Unit 3:
Introduction to data Mining – Process of Data Mining – Predictive Analysis – Lending Analytics –
Recommendation Analytics –Healthcare Analytics – Financial Analytics – Sports Analytics.
Unit 4:
Prescriptive Analytics – Testing – Simulating the Future – Optimising complex decisions -
Unit 5:
Basics on Software requirement for business analytics – Decision support Systems – Implementation
strategy of the prescriptions.

References:
1. Data Science for Business, Provost and Fawcett: O’Reilly
2. Data Mining for Business Intelligence, Concepts, Techniques and Applications, Shmueli, Patel,
and Bruce: Wiley
3. Management Science: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets, Powell and Baker: Wiley

Page 11 of 25
 7. ENTREPRENEURSHIP ECOSYSTEM

Unit I:
Basic of Entrepreneurship: Definition- Importance of entrepreneurship- Characteristics of
entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurship and economic development- Entrepreneurship process,
Challenges in entrepreneurship and its sustainability.

Unit II:
The fundamental of starting a business, Developing a business plan, Protecting the ideas-IPR-Testing
the idea, Operating a business - Financing a business, Market identification and communication,
Management of the business

Unit III:
Entrepreneurship Ecosystem: Elements of the entrepreneurship ecosystem, Frame work of
entrepreneurial ecosystems. Environment perspectives for nurturing entrepreneurship,
Entrepreneurial support systems such as government policy, services available to entrepreneurs,
entrepreneurial culture, infrastructure, promoting institutions.

Unit IV:
Start up Ecosystem: Individual interest, entrepreneurial behavior - The startup and associated
challenges. Basics of starting a business- legal and tax considerations- different types of business
structures

Unit V:
Business clusters-Types of Business Clusters - Cluster effect – Cluster and Entrepreneurship-Famous
entrepreneurial clusters - Silicon valley, Digital Media City, Foot wear cluster of Kolkatta, Garments
cluster of Tiruppur.

References:
1. Entrepreneurship Development by Sharma - PHI
2. Entrepreneurial Development by Khanka S.S.- Sultan Chand
3. Global Entrepreneurship: Environment and Strategy by Nir Kshetri
4. Entrepreneurship Development by K Ramachandran
5. Entrepreneurship Development by S Anil Kumar
6. Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprises, by Charantimath
7. Small scale Enterprises And Entrepreneurship Ecosystem by Dr. Vasant Desai

Page 12 of 25
 8. CORPORATE FINANCIAL ANALYSIS

COURSE OBJECTIVE : TO ENRICH THE PH.D LEVEL SCHOLARS WITH SOME HIGHLIGHTING
CORPORATE LEVEL FINANCIAL ANALYIS CONCEPTS AND TOOLS

Unit .1.
Company accounts – kinds of joint stock companies---- Shares, and share capital --- different types of
shares---different types of share capital --- Debentures—different types of debentures --- Acquisition of
Business --- profit prior to incorporation --- Underwriting.

Unit . 2.
Horizontal form of company Balance sheet – Vertical form Of Balance sheet – contents as per
Companies Act --- Form and contents of Profit and Loss Account.

Unit . 3.
Financial Statements --- Nature – Analysis and Interpretation—Different accounting Ratios, their nature,
application, uses, and their limitations.

Unit .4 .
Fund flow statement --- theory – construction—sources of funds—uses of funds---- Usefulness of fund
flow statements to the society and to the Company.----Cash flow statement--- its construction ----uses

Unit . 5.
Case study: Relating to the use of ratios, fund flow statements, cash flow statements and peer analysis
to assess earning dynamics and asset efficiency of companies.--- application of all the tools of financial
analysis to a company to make a balanced assessment of its operational performance and funding
structure

Page 13 of 25
 9. INVESTMENT AVENUES AND INVESTORS BEHAVIOUR

OBJECTIVE:
The objective of this course is to impart knowledge to students regarding the theory and practice of
investors’ behaviour towards the various investment alternatives.

UNIT – I
Definition, Micro & macroeconomic concepts relating to investment, Investment objective, Investment
process, Investment constraints, Investment strategy, Investment v/s Speculation, Arbitrage, Gambling,
Types of investors.

UNIT – II
Investment goals, Liquidity, Investment horizons and taxation, Alternatives for investment,
Equity market, Mutual funds, Pension funds, Endowment funds, Insurance (life and nonlife), Banks,
Money market, T-bills, Commercial paper, Certificates of deposit, Repos and
reverses, Bond market, Treasury notes (T-notes) and T-bonds, bonds, Fixed income
securities, Time value of money, Interest rates, Bond pricing bond yields, Coupon yield.

UNIT – III
Risk and Return, Historical and Expected return, Measurement, Risk and its measurement, Systematic
and Unsystematic risk, Types, Measurement and significance of Beta.

UNI T – IV
History of Behavioural Finance, Psychology: Concept, Nature, Importance, The psychology of financial
markets, The psychology of investor behaviour, Behavioural Finance Market Strategies, Prospect Theory,
Loss aversion theory under Prospect Theory & mental accounting, Investors Disposition effect .

UNIT – V
External factors and investor behaviour: Fear & Greed in Financial Market, Emotions and financial
markets: Geomagnetic storm, Statistical methodology for capturing the effects of external influence
onto stock market returns.

OUTCOME:
To gain knowledge about various investment alternatives and to identify persistent or systematic
behavioural factors that influence investment behaviour.

Page 14 of 25
Reference Books:
1. Donald E.Fischer & Ronald J.Jordan, Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, PHI
Learning., New Delhi, 8th edition, 2011.
2. Prasannachandra, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Reilly & Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, Cengage Learning, 9th
Edition, 2011.
4. S. Kevin, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI Learning, 2015, Second Edition .
5. V.A.Avadhani, Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
6. V.K.Bhalla, Investment Management, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2012.
7. Bisen,pandey-Learning Behavioural Finance(Excel Books).
8. Forbes- Behavioural Finance (Wiley India).
9. The Little Book of Behavioral Investing James (Montier) 2010.

Page 15 of 25
 10. RISK MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES

OBJECTIVE:
The objective of this course is to provide in depth knowledge of risk management.

UNIT – I
Introduction to risk management, Definition, Objectives of risk management and tools, Need for a risk
management, Types of risk, Sources of risk, Risk identification.

UNIT – II
Management of risk, Risk management process, Risk management policies, Value of risk management,
Risk management v/s Risk avoidance, Risk retention, Risk transfer, Risk immunization strategies,
Measurement and control of risk, Measurement and controlling risk.

UNI T – III
Foreign Exchange Markets, Spot Prices and Forward Prices, Exchange control, Fixation of exchange rate,
The effects of Exchange rates in Foreign Trade, Factors influencing Exchange rates, Exchange control in
India, Tools for hedging against Exchange rate variations, Forward, Futures and Currency options, FEMA,
Determination of Foreign Exchange rate and Forecasting.

UNIT – IV
Trading, Futures trading system, Entities in the trading system, Commodity futures trading
cycle, Order types and trading, Margins for trading in futures, Charges, Clearing, Settlement, Risk
management, Margining at NCDEX and Standard Portfolio Analysis of Risk (SPAN).

UNIT – V
Evolution of Derivatives Market in India, Regulations, Framework, Trading at NSE and BSE Regulations of
financial derivatives, Futures Vs. Forward contracts, Hedging strategy using futures Stock index futures,
Interest rate futures, Hedge ratio, Stock index futures and Indian stock market.

OUTCOME:
To gain knowledge about different types of risks.

Page 16 of 25
Reference Books:
1. Jeevanandam, C, Risk Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, 2005.
2. Emmett J. Vaughan, Risk Management, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Jeevanandham C.Foreign Exchange & Risk management, Sultan chand & sons.
4. Stephens, John. (2001), Managing Commodity Risk, John Wiley & Sons.
5. S.L.Gupta, Financial Derivaties- Theory, Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall Of India,
2017, Second Edition.
6. Stulz, Risk Management and Derivaties, Cengage Learning, 2nd Edition, 2011.

Page 17 of 25
 11. HUMAN RESOURCE DYNAMICS

Unit-I
Cognitive Processes: Thinking and Problems Solving – Thinking – Concept – Theoretical Perspectives;
Types – Convergent – Divergent Lateral – Reasoning – Decision Making Process – Approaches – People
Focused &Product focused – Strategies employed – Creating Positive Mindsets Problem Solving –
Concept – Approaches in Managerial Perspectives – Brain Storming, Sensitivity Training – T Groups –
Encounter Groups. Emotional Intelligence – Concept – Nature – E.Q. for Improving Emotional
Intelligence.

Unit-II
Personality: Concept, Theoretical perspective- Trait & Type Approach (Brief); Self Concept, Meaning &
Nature, Self Growth Movement, Type A, B, C, Personality, Healthy Personality (All port’s Mature), Jungs
Personality Indicators.

Unit-III
Mental Health: Concept Principles of Deviance and Disability, Act; Stigma, National Mental Health Act
Provision for the Attitude Job Satisfaction and Mental Health & Work Ethics; Parameters of Positive
Mental Health; National Services for the Mentally ill.

Unit IV
Stress: Concept Types, Physiological Arousal as Base Reactions and Coping (Task Oriented, Ego Defense
Mechanism), and Managing Stress – Time Management Skills Relaxation Exercises Handling External
Toxins. Behavioral Change: Concept Significance Self Awareness, Methods and Techniques of Self
Development.

Unit IV:
Intergroup Dynamics-Intergroup behavior – Working in group – Task types & group performance – Task
interdependence – Goal differences – Difference in time horizons – Perceptual differences – Emphasis
on loyalty – Managing intergroup conflict (Conflict – resolution grid) – Group influence [Conformity,
Social Pressure, Compliance& Underlying principles] – Pro social Behavior – Groups affecting Task
performance – Social facilitation effect & Social loafing – Cooperation and group impact – Coalitions –
Resistances to change.

Page 18 of 25
Recommended books:
1. Arnold, John, Robertson, Iran T. and Cooper, Cary L., Work Psychology- Understanding Human
Behaviour in the Work Place.
2. Mac Millan Baron, Robert A. and Greenberg, Jerald, Behaviour in Organizations, Prentice Hall
International.
3. McConnel, James V., Understanding Human Behaviour, Holt Rinehart and Winston.
4. Spencer, Christopher and Scelt, Peter, Psychology : A Contemporary Introduction, Black Well.
5. Tiffin, J. and McGormick, B.J., Industrial Psychology, Prentice Hall of India .
6. C.S. Venkata Ratnam, Globalization And Labour-Management Relations-Dynamics Of Change,
Response Books,2001.
7. E;ezmol A : The Dynamics of Inter-personnel Behaviour, John Wiley & Sons., Inc., New York,
1969.
8. Mamoria CB, Mamoria, Gankar-Dynamics of Industrial Relations (Himalayan Publication, 2003)

Page 19 of 25
 12. PERSPECTIVES
DIGITALON KNOWLEDGE
MARKETINGMANAGEMENT

Course Objective:
Unit I
To enableofthe
Overview scholarsManagement
Knowledge to understand issuesofinKnowledge
- Nature online Marketing
- Subjectiveand theofstrategies
View knowledgeadopted by
- Objective
different
View companies.
of knowledge To educate
- Need the scholars
for Knowledge on the- dynamics
Management inIntellectual
Valuation of Digital Marketing Field. To
Capital - Human vs.
Structural
understandCapital - Forcesthe
and analyse Driving Knowledgeand
opportunities Management - Issues in Knowledge
their attractiveness Management.
for professionals.

Unit 1:Principles of digital marketing – E-Commerce Marketing – E-Mail Marketing – Mobile

Unit II
Marketing
Types – Affiliate
of Knowledge - Procedural – Infographic
marketingvs. Content Marketing
Declarative Knowledge - Tacit vs. Explicit Knowledge - General vs.
Unit 2: Knowledge
Specific Social Media Marketing
- Technically vs.-Contextually
Social Media Optimisation
Specific Knowledge– Facebook
- Knowledge Marketing – Google
and Expertise +
- Types
of Expertise–Twitter
Marketing - Specificity of Knowledge
Marketing- - Reservoirs
Linkedin – Video-Marketing
of Knowledge
Marketing – Social
Characteristics of Knowledge.
Media Strategy
Unit 3:Social Shopping and Opinions – Social Events and Wikis – Social News and Social Book
Unit III
Marking – Blogging and Micro Blogging - Posting on Forums, Guestbooks, and free Classified
Knowledge Management Systems Life Cycle - Challenges in KM Systems Development - Conventional Vs
Unit 4:Website development – Search Engine Optimisation– Optimising for Google, Yahoo, and
KM Systems Life Cycle (KMSLC) - Key Differences - Key Similarities - KMSLC Approaches - Technologies to
Bing –Keyword research And Analysis – basics of SEO friendly web design – Website
Manage Knowledge - Advantage and disadvantage of Knowledge Based Systems.
Architecture Analysis – Web Master tool–Directory Submission on Web – Google Analytics –
Unit IV algorithms – Google Adwords – Google Adsense – Google Sandbox Effect – Search
Google
Knowledge Creation & Knowledge Architecture - Nonaka’s Model of Knowledge Creation &
Engine Spam
Transformation
Unit 5:Digital -Marketing
KnowledgeStrategy
Architecture - Acquiring the
– Competitor KM System
analysis – LSI- (Latent
CapturingSemantic
the Tacit Indexing)
Knowledge –-
Expert Evaluation - Developing Relationship with Experts - Fuzzy Reasoning & Quality of Knowledge
Online reputation management – Advanced Link Building and Concept of Link Popularity– App
Capture - Interviewing as a Tacit Knowledge Capture Tool.
Store Optimisation – Career Opportunities in Digital Marketing
References:
Unit V
Knowledge Capturing Techniques
1. Understanding Digital -Marketing:
On-Site Observation
Marketing(Action Protocol)for
Strategies – Brainstorming
Engaging the - Electronic
Digital
Brainstorming - Protocol
Generation, Analysis
Damian Ryan(Think-Aloud Method) - Consensus Decision Making - Repertory Grid -
Nominal Group Technique (NGT) Delphi Method - Concept Mapping -Black boarding - Modes of
2. The Art of Digital Marketing: The Definitive Guide to Creating Strategic, Targeted, and
Knowledge Conversion - Codifying Knowledge - Codification Tools.
Measurable Online Campaigns, Ian Dodson
3. Digital Marketing Strategy: An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing, Simon
Kingsnorth.

Page 20 of 25
 13. DIGITAL MARKETING

Course Objective:
To enable the scholars to understand issues in online Marketing and the strategies adopted by different
companies. To educate the scholars on the dynamics in Digital Marketing Field. To understand and
analyse the opportunities and their attractiveness for professionals.

Unit 1:
Principles of digital marketing – E-Commerce Marketing – E-Mail Marketing – Mobile Marketing –
Affiliate marketing – Infographic Content Marketing

Unit 2:
Social Media Marketing - Social Media Optimisation – Facebook Marketing – Google + Marketing –
Twitter Marketing- Linkedin Marketing – Video Marketing – Social Media Strategy

Unit 3:
Social Shopping and Opinions – Social Events and Wikis – Social News and Social Book Marking –
Blogging and Micro Blogging - Posting on Forums, Guestbooks, and free Classified

Unit 4:
Website development – Search Engine Optimisation– Optimising for Google, Yahoo, and Bing –Keyword
research And Analysis – basics of SEO friendly web design – Website Architecture Analysis – Web Master
tool–Directory Submission on Web – Google Analytics – Google algorithms – Google Adwords – Google
Adsense – Google Sandbox Effect – Search Engine Spam

Unit 5:
Digital Marketing Strategy – Competitor analysis – LSI (Latent Semantic Indexing) – Online reputation
management – Advanced Link Building and Concept of Link Popularity– App Store Optimisation – Career
Opportunities in Digital Marketing

References:
1. Understanding Digital Marketing: Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation,
Damian Ryan
2. The Art of Digital Marketing: The Definitive Guide to Creating Strategic, Targeted, and
Measurable Online Campaigns, Ian Dodson
3. Digital Marketing Strategy: An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing, Simon Kingsnorth.

Page 21 of 25
 14. RURAL MARKETING STRATEGIES

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to make the doctoral students understand the basic theories
and functions of Rural Marketing with regard to the rural business in the current economic scenario.

UNIT I
Introduction to Rural market – Definition – Rural Marketing – Scope and Limitations – Rural Market in
India - Characteristics of Indian rural market environment – Demographic details –
Marketing challenges and opportunities under rural setting

UNIT II
Rural buyers – understanding Rural buyer behavior – Rural Demand and Consumption pattern Purchase
decision making process – Influencing factors – changes in behavioral pattern

UNIT III
Relevance of Marketing mix for rural market – Product types in rural market setting – Product strategies
– Nature of Rural market competition – Packing and Packaging strategies

UNIT IV
Pricing objectives and strategies - Market segmentation – Targeting – Positioning products in rural
market - Rural market channels – Haats – Mandis – Society – PDS – strategies and current trends in rural
distribution – Channel management - Examples

UNIT V
Communication to rural market – Communication objectives – strategies – challenges Advertising
strategy for rural buyers –Rural media - Personalised communication - Mass media - Conventional
media and its types - sales promotion under rural setting – conduct of marketing research in rural
markets

OUTCOMES: After undergoing this course the scholars could able to understand the problems with
regard to the subject and formulate objectives for further research.

Page 22 of 25
References

1. T P Gopalsamy, Rural Marketing Environment, Problem and Strategies -, Vikas

Publishing House, Pvt. Ltd.

2. Dogra and Ghuman, Rural Marketing TATA McGraw Hill

3. U C Mathu, Rural Marketing, Excel Books

4. Badi & Badi, Rural Marketing

5. Krishnamacharyalu and Ramkrishnan, Rural Marketing, Pearson Education

6. Sukhpal Singh, Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishing House, Pvt. Ltd.

7. Rajagopal – Managing Rural Business

Page 23 of 25
 15. SERVICES AND LOGISTICS PRACTICES

OBJECTIVES: The objective of this course is to make the doctoral students understand the basic theories
and practices of Services marketing and Logistics management in modern and liberalized business
dynamics.

UNIT I
Introduction to Services in recent economy- Classification of services - Meaning – Nature of services –
Types and importance – Relationship Marketing – Services market segmentation

UNIT II
Customer loyalty – Positioning of services – Planning and Branding of service deliveries – New Service
development – Service pricing objectives – Price mix - GAPS Model of service quality – Consumer
behaviour in services – Consumer expectations in services – Consumer perceptions in services –
understanding customer requirements - CRM

UNIT III
Service recovery - Delivery of service – Services promotion strategies – Role of intermediaries –
marketing strategy formulation – Managing Demand – Marketing of Non- profit organisations, Financial
Services, Hospitality Services, Leisure Services

UNIT IV
Logistics - definition – objectives - importance – Scope - Functions - need for planning
Logistics - Role of logistics in SCM – Functional Applications of Logistics – Logistics organisation Activities
of Logistics – 3PL – 4PL – Reverse Logistics - Packaging -Principles, Functions – Types – Concepts -
Materials and Cost - Consumer and Industrial Packaging - Infrastructure - Customs Issue - Service
utilization Models. Logistics Costs –Concept - Identification of Costs - Accounting methods - Logistics
Audit

UNIT V
Transporting system - Infrastructure and Networks - Freight Management -Route Planning –
Containerization - Inter-modal Operators and Transport Economies - Transportation model -
Transhipment model - Traveling Sales man technique Logistics Information Systems – Needs -
Characteristics – Design - E-Logistics – Structure and Operation. Logistics Resource Management - Global
Logistics - Operational and Strategic Issues, Strategic Logistics Planning – Role of government in
domestic and international logistics - challenges

Page 24 of 25
OUTCOMES: After studying this course the doctoral students could able to understand the basic
principles of practices of the subject in current scenario for development of research problems and for
further discussions.

References

1. S.M.Jha, Services Marketing, Himalaya Publishing Company.

2. Cristopher Lovelock, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall.
3. Valarie A Zeitmanl and Mary Jo Bitmer, Services Marketing, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Apte, Services Marketing, Oxford
5. Rao, Services Marketing, Pearson Education
6. Stock & Lambert Strategic Logistics Management
7. Raghuram & Rangraj Logistics & Supply chain management; cases & concepts
8. Bowersox, Closs& Cooper Supply Chain Logistics Management

Page 25 of 25
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
Syllabus for Ph.D. Course Works in Mathematics
(For Affiliated Colleges and University Department)
PH.D COURSE WORKS (2016-17) ONWARDS

THE FOLLOWING ARE THE LIST OF 14 COURSE WORKS AVAILABLE FOR SELECTION ACCORDING
TO THEIR REQUIREMENTS FOR PH.D. CANDIDATES IN MATHEMATICS AND EACH OF THEM
CARRIES 4 CREDITS.

Course 1. Commutative algebra

Course 2. Advanced analysis
Course 3. Banach algebra and spectral theory
Course 4. Advanced graph theory
Course 5. Harmonic analysis
Course 6. Stochastic modeling
Course7. Wavelets
Course8. Theory of near-rings
Course9. Advanced calculus
Course10. Algebraic graph theory
Course11. Combinatorial theory
Course12. Advanced domination theory in graphs
Course13. Graph reconstruction theory
Course14. Algebraic topology
The equivalence of these course works with courses in M.Phil / M.Sc are given
inAnnexure I.

Page 1 of 18
 Detailed Syllabus

Course 1. COMMUTATIVE ALGEBRA (60 hours)

Preamble:It is the study of commutative rings. The objective of the paper is to introduce algebraic
structure through the modules and different types of modules and it's algebraic application. A pass in
PG level algebra course is the prerequisite for this paper. Out come of this paper is to motivate
students to do research in diverse fields such as homological algebra, algebraic number theory,
algebraic geometry, finite fields and computational algebra.

Unit I: Rings and Ideals – Modules (12 hours)

Unit II: Rings and Modules fractions – Primary Decomposition (12 hours)
Unit III: Integral Dependence and valuations – Chain conditions (12 hours)
Unit IV: Noetherian Rings – Artin Rings (12 hours)
Unit V: Discrete valuation rings and Dedekind domains (12 hours)
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Atiyah and Macdonald, Introduction to
Commutative Algebra, Chapters 1 to 9.

Page 2 of 18
 Course 2. ADVANCED ANALYSIS (60 hours)
Preamble :The objective of this course is to understand borel measure in real and complex field.
Prerequisite of this course is good knowledge of calculus, real and complex analysis, topology and
measure theory.Motivation is to prepare scholars with an excellence in Lp spaces for the study of
analysis. The out come of this course is to help the students to undertake further research in Fourier
analysis, Harmonic analysis and Functional analysis.

Unit I : Abstract Integration : The concept of measurability – Simple functions –

Elementary properties of measures – Arithmetic in [0, ∞] - Integration of positive
functions – Integration of complex functions – The role played by sets of measure
zero(12 hours).

Unit II :Positive Borel Measures : Topological preliminaries – The Riesz

representation theorem – Regularity properties of Borel measures – Lebesgue measure –
Continuity properties of measurable functions(12 hours).

Unit III :Complex Measures : Total variation – Absolute continuity – Consequences

of the Radon-Nikodym theorem – Bounded linear functions on 𝐿𝑝 - The Riesz
representation theorem(12 hours).

Unit IV :𝑯𝒑 - Spaces : Sub-harmonic functions – The spaces 𝐻 𝑝 and 𝑁 - The theorem
of F. and M. Reisz – Factorization theorems – The shift operator – Conjugate
functions(12 hours).

Unit V : Fourier Transforms : Formal properties – The inversion theorem – The

Plancherel theorem – The Banach algebra 𝐿1 .

Holomorphic Fourier Transforms : Two theorems of Paley and Wiener – Quasi-

analytic classes – The Denjoy- Careman theorem(12 hours).

Text Book : Content and Treatment as in Walter Rudin, Real and Complex Analysis,
Third Edition, Chapters 1, 2, 6, 9, 17 and 19.

Page 3 of 18
Course3. BANACH ALGEBRA AND SPECTRAL THEORY (60 hours)
Preamble: This syllabus is designed to introduce the students to the topics of Banach algebra
and Hilbert spaces. Knowledge expected is to be aware of the background concepts in
algebra. The students are expected to know about functionals. This will motivate the students
to learn about various operators and their characteristics.
Unit I: Banach algebras – Complex Homomorphisms – Basic properties of Spectra –
Symbolic Calculus(12 hours).
Unit II: Differentiation - Group of invertible elements – Commutative Banach
algebra – Ideals and Homomorphisms – Gelfand transforms(12 hours).
Unit III: Involutions – Applications to non commutative algebra – Positive Linear
Functional (12 hours).
Unit IV: Bounded Operators on Hilbert spaces – Bounded Operators – A
commutativity theorem – Resolution of the Identity – Spectral theorem(12 hours).
Unit V: Eigen values of normal operators – Positive operators and square roots –
Group of invertible operators – Characterization of V* algebra(12 hours).

Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Rudin, Functional Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill,
Chapters 10,11 & 12.

Page 4 of 18
 Course 4. ADVANCED GRAPH THEORY (60 hours)
Preamble: This course aims to introduce the learner some topics for his research in graph
theory. It provides several conjectures and open problems to widen the scope of research. The
pre-requisite for the course is a sound knowledge in graph theory at the post- graduate level.
The outcome of the course is identification area and problems for research in graph theory.
Unit I: Dominating sets in graphs - Bounds on the domination number: in terms of order,
degree, size, degree, diameter and girth(12 hours).
Unit II: Product graphs and Vizing’s conjecture – Domatic number - Nordhaus-Gaddum
type theorems - dominating functions(12 hours).
Unit III: Decompositions and colorings of a graph – Generalizations of graph
decompositions(12 hours).
Unit IV: Necessary conditions for the existence of a G-decomposition of a graph- cycle
decompositions, Vertex labelings and graceful graphs(12 hours).
Unit V: Perfect graphs: The perfect graph theorem – p-critical and partitionable graphs –
A polyhedral characterization of perfect graphs and p-critical graphs – The strong perfect
graph conjecture (and recent theorem)(12 hours).

Text Books: Content and Treatment as in

1) Teresa W. Haynes, Stephen T. Hedetniemi and Peter J. Slater, Fundamentals of Domination
in graphs, Marcel Decker (1998), Section 1.2, 2.1to2.4 (For Unit I) Sections 2.6, 8.3, 9.1 and
10.1 to10.3 (for Unit II).
2) Juraj Bosak, Decompositions of graphs , Kluwar Academic Publishers, Chapters 2, 3 4, 6 and
7. (for Units III and IV).

3) Martin Charles Golumbic, Algorithmic graph theory, Academic Press, Chapter 3 (for Unit
V).

Page 5 of 18
 Course 5. HARMONIC ANALYSIS(60 hours)
Preamble: Periodic functions play a vital role in solving many problems in Mathematics and
Physics. Fourier analysis is the study of various aspects of periodicity of functions. Harmonic
Analysis is a natural generalization of Fourier analysis and is significant for its mathematical
aspect. The pre requisite for this course is a basic knowledge of Real and Complex analysis
covered in a post graduate programme in Mathematics. The outcome of the course is to help
researchers in both pure and applied mathematical fields.

Unit I: Fourier series and integrals – Definitions and easy results – The Fourier transform
– Convolution – Approximate identities – Fejer’s theorem – Unicity theorem – Parselval
relation – Fourier Stieltjes Coefficients – The classical kernels(12 hours).

Unit II: Summability – Metric theorems – Pointwise summability – Positive definite

sequences – Herglotz;s theorem – The inequality of Hausdorff and Young(12 hours).

Unit III: The Fourier integral – Kernels on R. The Plancherel theorem – Another
convergence theorem – Poisson summation formula – Bachner’s theorem – Continuity
theorem(12 hours).

Unit IV: Characters of discrete groups and compact groups – Bochners’ theorem–
Minkowski’s theorem(12 hours).

Unit V: Hardy spaces- Invariant subspaces – Factoring F and M. Rieza theorem – Theorems
of Szego and Beuoling(12 hours).

Text Book: Content and Treatment as in Henry Helson, Harmonic Analysis, Hindustan Book
Agency, Chapters 1.1 to 1.9, 2.1 to 3.5 and 4.1 to 4.3.

Page 6 of 18
 Course 6. STOCHASTIC MODELING(60 hours)

Recap : Basics of Probability space random variable – Discrete distributions and Continuous
distributions – Expectation – Conditional Expectation – Moment Generating Function –
Probability Generating Function – Laplace Transform – Joint Distributions – Functions of
random variables and random vectors.
Unit I : Markov chains : Transition probability matrix of a Markov chain – First step
Analysis – Functional of Random walks and successive runs – classification of states – Basic
Limit Theorem of Markov Chain(12 hours).

Unit II : Continuous time Markov Chains : Poisson distribution and Poisson process –
Distributions associated with Poisson process – Pure Birth Process – Pure Death process –
Birth and Death Process – Limiting behavior of Birth and Death Process – Birth and Death
Process with absorbing states(12 hours).

Unit III : Renewal Phenomena : Renewal process and Related concepts – Poisson process
viewed a Renewal Process – Asymptotic behavior of Renewal process(12 hours).

Unit IV : Branching Process and Population Growth : Branching process – branching process
and generating functions – Geometrically distributed offspring – variation on Branching
process – Stochastic models of Plasmid Reproduction and Plasmid copy Number partition(12
hours).

Unit V : Queueing Systems : Queueing Processes – Poisson Arrival and exponentially

distributed service times – The M/G/I and M/G/8 systems – variations and extensions(12
hours).

Text Book : Content and Treatment as in Howard M. Taylor and Samuel Karlin, An
Introduction to Stochastic Modeling (Revised Version), Academic Press, New York, 1984.

Page 7 of 18
 Course7. WAVELETS (60 hours)

Preamble: Wavelet analysis has drawn much attentionfrom both mathematicians and
engineers alike. The emphasis of the course is on spline wavelets and time-frequency
analysis. The only pre-requisite is a basic knowledge of function theory and real analysis. The
outcome of the course is to enable the learner to apply the pure mathematics in signal
processing and image analysis.
Unit I :An Overview : Fourier to Wavelets – Integral Wavelets Transform and Time
frequency analysis – Inversion formulas and duals – Classification of Wavelets – Multi-
resolution analysis – Spines and Wavelets.
Fourier Analysis : Fourier and Inverse Fourier Transformation – Continuous Time
Convolution – The delta function – Fourier Transformation of square integrable functions(12
hours).
Unit II : Fourier Analysis (contd): Fourier Series – Basic Convergence Theory – Poisson
Summation Formula.
Wavelet Transforms and Time Frequency Analysis : The Gabor Transforms – Short time
Fourier Transforms and the uncertainty principle – The integral Wavelet Transform – Dyadic
Wavelets – Inversion – Frames – Wavelet Series(12 hours).
Unit III :Cardinal Spline Analysis : Cardinal Spline spaces – B-splines and their basic
properties – The time scale relation and an interpolating graphical display algorithm – B-Net
representations and computation of cardinal splines – Constructions of cardinal splines –
constructions of spline application formulas – Construction of Spline interpolation
formulas(12 hours).
Unit IV :Scaling functions and Wavelets : Multi-resolution analysis – Scaling functions
with finite two scale relation – Direction sum Decompositions of 𝐿2 (𝑅) - Wavelets and their
duals(12 hours).
Unit V :Cardinal Splines Wavelets : Interpolating splines wavelets – Compactly supported
spline – Wavelets – Computation of Cardinal spline Wavelets – Euler – Frebenious
Polynomials(12 hours).
Orthogonal Wavelets : Examples of orthogonal Wavelets – Identification of orthogonal two
scale symbols – Construction of compactly supported orthogonal wavelets(12 hours).
Text Book : Content and Treatment as in Charles K. Chui, An introduction to Wavelets,
Academic Press, New York, 1992.
Reference Books :
1. Chui C. K. (ed) Approximation theory and Fourier Analysis, Academic Press
Boston, 1991.
2. Daribechies. I. Wavelets, CBMS-NSF Series in Appl, SIAM Philadelphia, 1992.
3. Schurnaker, L. L. Spline Functions : Basic Theory, Wiley, New York, 1981.
4. Nurnberger, G. Applications to Spline Functions, Springer Verlag, New York, 1989.

Page 8 of 18
 Course8. THEORY OF NEAR-RINGS(60 hours)
Preamble: The main objective of this course is to provide the knowledge about the
generalized ring structures. In fact, near-ring is a natural generalization of rings in the sense
that the set of all endomorphisms of a group form a ring, where the set of all mappings of a
group form a near-ring. The structure of near-rings is useful in project geometry to deal about
generalized field conditions.
Unit I: The elements of theory of near-rings(12 hours).
Unit II: Ideal theory(12 hours)
Unit III: Elements of structure theory(12 hours)
Unit IV: Near-fields(12 hours)
Unit V: More classes of near-rings(12 hours).
Text Book: Content and Treatment as in G. Pilz, Theory of Near-rings, North Holland,
Chapters 1,2,3, 8(a), 9(a) and 9(b).

Page 9 of 18
 Course9. ADVANCED CALCULUS(60 hours)
Preamble:The Calculus of several variables involves many branches of Mathematics such as
Partial Differential Equations, Optimization, Statistics etc. The main objective of this course
is to give a thorough understanding of differentiation and integration of functions of several
variables. The prerequisite is a precise knowledge of Calculus of single variable. The outcome
of the course is the ability to solve problems involving several variables.

Unit I : Differentiation – Basic theorems – Partial derivatives – Derivatives – Inverse

Functions(12 hours).
Unit II : Implicit functions – Integration – Measure zero and Content zero – Integrable
Functions(12 hours).
Unit III : Fubini’s theorem – Partitions of Unity – Change of Variables(12 hours).
Unit IV : Integration on chains – Algebraic preliminaries – Fields and Forms –Geometric
preliminaries – The fundamental theorem of Calculus(12 hours).
Unit V : Manifolds – Fields and Forms on Manifolds – Stokes’ theorem on Manifolds -
The Volume element – The Classical theorems(12 hours).

Text book :
Calculus on Manifolds by Michael Spivak, The Benjamin / CummingsPublishing Company
References :
(1) Mathematical Analysis by Tom M. Apostol, Narosa Publishing Company.
(2) Advanced Calculus by Gerald B.Folland, Pearson Publishing Company.

Page 10 of 18
 Course10. ALGEBRAIC GRAPH THEORY (60 hours)
Preamble: This course aims to improve the knowledge of the learner to apply algebra in
graph theory. It is framed to give adequate exposure about algebraic approach to graph
theory. The beginner of this course is expected to have sound understanding of graph theory
and algebra at PG level. The outcome of the course is to enable the student to do qualitative
research in algebraic graph theory.
Unit 1: Linear Algebra in graph theory: The spectrum of a graph – Regular graphs and
line graphs - The homology of graphs(12 hours).
Unit 2: Spanning trees and associated structures – Complexity – Determinant expansions(12
hours).
Unit 3: Symmetry and regularity of graphs: General properties of graph automorphisms –
Vertex-transitive graphs – Symmetric graphs – Trivalent symmetric graphs(12 hours).
Unit 4: The Covering - graph construction – Distance-transitive graphs - The feasibility
of intersection arrays(12 hours).
Unit 5: The Laplacian of a graph: The Laplacian matrix – trees – representations – energy
and eigenvalues – connectivity – the generalized Laplacian – Multiplicities – embedding(12
hours).

Text Books:
1) Norman Biggs, Algebraic Graph Theory, Cambridge University Press, London, 1974.
Chapters 2, 3 and 4 for Unit I, 5, 6 and 7 for Unit II,C 15, 16, 17 and 18 for Unit III,
19, 20 and 21 for Unit IV.
2) Chris Godsil, Gordon Royle, Algebraic Graph Theory, Springer-Verlag, New York,
2006. Chapter 13 (Sections 13.1 to 13.6, 13.9 to 13.11) for Unit V.

Page 11 of 18
 Course11. COMBINATORIAL THEORY(60 hours)

Preamble: This objective of this course is to develop skillsto apply the techniques of
combinations and permutations for counting the number of certain configurations. The
prerequisite are the basic ideas on classical algebra and trigonometry. After completing this
course, the student will be able to solve problems involving the distributions of objects into
cells, partitions of integers, generating functions, permutations with restrictions on relative
positions, rook polynomials and Polya’s theory.
Unit I: Permutations and Combinations - rule of sum and product – distributions of distinct
objects – Distributions of non-distinct objects(12 hours).

Unit II - Generating functions for combinations – Enumerators for permutations –

Distributions of distinct objects into non-distinct cells – partitions of integers – Ferrers graph
– elementary relations(12 hours).

Unit III: Recurrence relations – Linear recurrence relations with constant co-efficients –
solution by the technique of generating functions – a special class of non-linear difference
equation - recurrence relations with two indices(12 hours).

Unit IV: The principle of inclusion and exclusion – general formula – derangements – rook
polynomials – permutations with forbidden positions(12 hours).

Unit V: Polya’s theory of counting Equivalence classes under a permutation groups –

Equivalence classes of functions – Weights and inventories of functions – Polya’s
fundamental theorem – Generalization of Polya’s theorem(12 hours).

Text Book: Introduction to Combinatorial Mathematics by C.L. Liu, Chapters 1 to 5.

Page 12 of 18
 Course12. ADVANCED DOMINATION THEORY IN GRAPHS(60 hours)

Preamble:Domination theory in graphs is a potential area of research with many open

problems. The objective of this course is to introduce various branches and recent
developments in domination theory. The course is designed so that each unit introduces
a new aspect of domination theory. Knowledge of a post graduate course in graph
theory is a prerequisite. It helps the candidate to identify an interested area with wide
scope for research.

Unit I : Dominating functions in graphs: Minus domination in graphs – signed

domination in graphs – real and integer domination(12 hours).

Unit II :Domination parameters of a graph:Connected domination – strong and weak

domination and domination balance – the least domination number – dominating strength and
weakness – set and global set domination – point-set and global point-set domination –
neighbourhood numbers – neighbourhood number variations – mixed domination(12 hours).

Unit III :Global domination:Some early results – global interpretations of other

domination invariants – applications – concerning a characterization – sub problems(12
hours).

Unit IV :Distance domination in graphs :The distance domination number – the total
distance domination number – independent distance domination – the distance irredundance
number – relations involving distance domination parameters(12 hours).

Unit V :Topics on domination in directed graphs:Definitions – motivation – kernels in

digraphs – kernels and grundy functions – solutions in digraphs – domination in digraphs –
applications in game theory(12 hours)..

Text book :Teresa W. Haynes , Stephen T. Hedetniemi and Peter J. Slater, Domination in
graphs – Advanced Topics, Chapters : 2, 10, 11, 12 and 15.

Page 13 of 18
 Course13. GRAPH RECONSTRUCTION THEORY(60 hours)

Preamble: Reconstruction Conjecture is one of the foremost and famous unsolved problems
in Graph Theory. It requires deep knowledge of graph theory at PG level. The learners are
expected to know some interesting classes of reconstructible graphs, some reconstructible
parameters of graphs, an innovative technique used in counting lemma and the current status
of the Conjecture. The outcome of the course is to enable the scholars to prove more new
classes of graphs and new parameters of graphs to be reconstructible.

Unit I: Reconstruction Problem : Reconstruction Conjecture – Kelly’s lemma – Counting

lemma(12 hours)

Unit II: Edge Reconstruction Problem : Edge Reconstruction Conjecture –Greenwell

theorem – Maximal Planar Graphs -Edge-recognizable domination numbers(12 hours).

Unit III: Diameter of Graphs : Recognizability of graphs of Diameter two –Reconstruction

of edge minimal graphs of diameter two(12 hours).

Unit IV: Graph Reconstruction: Graphs with at least n-1 cards isomorphic - Unicyclic graphs
– Graphs of diameter two or three – Reduction usingdiameter – Vertex switching
Reconstruction(12 hours)

Unit V: Reconstruction of Bipartite Graphs – Reconstruction of Geodesic graphs(12 hours).

Text Books / Published Papers:

1. Graphs and digraphs by Mehdi Behzad, Gary Chatrand and Linda Lesniak Foster,
Wadsworth International Group, 1979.
Unit I : Chapter 10 – Sections 10.2 to 10.15

2. Topics in graph Automorphisms and Reconstruction by Josef Lauri and Raffaele

Scapellato. Cambridge University Press, 2003.
Unit II : Chapter 8 – Section 8.6 to 8.13

3. S.K. Gupta , Pankaj Mangal , Vineet paliwal , Some work towards the proof of
reconstruction conjecture, Discrete Mathematics 272 (2003) 291-296.

4. R. D. Duttona, R. C. Brighamb, C. Guia, Edge-recognizable domination numbers,

Discrete Mathematics 272 (2003) 47 – 51.
Unit III

5. Recent Advances in Graph Reconstruction by S. Monikandan and J. Balakumar,

Lambert Academic Publishing, Germany, 2014.
Unit IV : Chapter 1
Unit V : Chapter 2 and 4.

Page 14 of 18
Course14. ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY(60 hours)

Preamble: Algebraic topology is concerned with the construction of algebraic invariants

associated to topological spaces which serve to distinguish between them. Most of these
invariants are homotopy invariants. This course elaborates topological spaces and
continuous maps between them. It demonstrates the power of topological methods in
dealing with problems involving shape and position of objects and continuous mappings,
and shows how topology can be applied to many areas, including geometry, analysis,
group theory and physics. The outcome of the course is to the ability to pursue further
studies in this and related areas of the candidate.

Unit I : The Fundamental Group : Homotopy of Paths- The Fundamental Group- Covering
spaces – The Fundamental Group of the circle- Retraction and Fixed points(12 hours).

Unit II : The Fundamental theorem of Algebra – The Borsuk – Ulam theorem- Deformation
- Retracts and Homotopy Type – The Fundamental Group of 𝑆 𝑛 - Fundamental Group of
some surfaces(12 hours).

Unit III : Separation Theorem in the plane: The Jordan Separation Theorem – invariance of
domain - The Jordan curve Theorem- imbedding Graphs in the plane(12 hours).

Unit IV: The Selfert – van Kampen Theorem: Direct sums of abelian groups- Free product of
groups- Free groups – The Selfert –van kampen Theorem – The Fundamental Group of a
Wedge of circles(12 hours).

Unit V: Classification of surfaces: Fundamental Groups of surfaces – Homology of surfaces

– Cutting and pasting – The Classification theorem – Constructing compact surfaces(12
hours).

Text Book:Treatment as in : J.R.Munkres,Topology, Second Edition, New Deihi, 2006.

Unit I: Chapter 9 (Sec 5.1-5.5), Unit II:Chapter 9 (Sec 5.6-6.0), Unit III:Chapter 10 (Sec 6.1-
6.4), Unit IV: Chapter 11 (Sec 6.7-7.1), Unit V: Chapter 12 (Sec 7.4-7.8)

References:

1.Dugundiji, Topology, Allyn and Bacon, Boston, 1966.

2. W.S.Massey, Algebraic Topology – An Introduction, Springer Verlag, New York, 1975

*******

Page 15 of 18
 Annexure I

EQUIVALENCE OF Ph.D. COURSE WORKS

with Courses in M.Phil / M.Sc Programmes

Sl.No Ph.D. Course Work Affiliated University

College Department
Research Research
1. Commutative Algebra Methodology – Methodology –
Commutative Commutative
Algebra Algebra (DTMAC1)

2. Advanced Analysis Same title --------

Same title Same Title
3. Banach Algebra and Spectral Theory (DTMAC2)

Same title Same title

4. Advanced Graph Theory (DTMAE1)
Same title Same title
5. Harmonic Analysis (DTMAE2)

Same title
6. Stochastic Modeling -----
Same title
7. Wavelets ------
Same title Same title
8. Theory of Near-rings (DTMAE4 )

Same title Same Title

9. Advanced Calculus (DTMAE5)

Same title Same title

10. Algebraic Graph Theory (DTMAE6)

--- M.Sc (Mathematics)

Combinatorial Theory IV Semester
11. (LMAEF)

Page 16 of 18
 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI-12

Ph.D. Course Work Papers

(Addition of two more Papers)

Paper Name of the Course Credit

1 Research and Teaching Methodology 4
2 Mini Project 4

Page 17 of 18
 Paper:I RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY (60 hours)

Preamble: The objective of the course is to study basic concepts of research and teaching
methodology and its implication in the area of commutative algebra. A pass in PG level algebra
course is the prerequisite for this course. Out come of this course is to qualify the students to do
research in diverse fields such as homological algebra, algebraic number theory, algebraic
geometry, finite fields and computational algebra.

Unit I: Research Methodology : An introduction - Meaning of Research Objectives of Research -

Motivation in Research - Types of Research -Research Approaches - Significance of Research -
Research Methods versus Methodology – Reseearch and Scientific Method - Importance of Knowing
How Research is Done - Research Process - Criteria of Good Research - Problems Encountered by
Researchers in India. Defining research problem - What is a Research Problem? - Selecting the
Problem - Necessity of Defining the Problem Technique Involved in Defining a Problem - An
Illustration. (10 hours)

Unit II: Commutative algebra - Modules - Rings and Modules of fractions - Primary Decomposition

(15 hours)

Unit III: Integral Dependence and valuations - Chain conditions’ (15 hours)

Unit IV: Noetherian Rings - Artin Rings (10 hours)

Unit V: Methodology of Teaching : Teaching - Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching -

Teaching Method’ Lecture Method, Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem
Solving Method, Project method, Seminar - Integrating ICT in Teaching: individualised Instruction,
Ways for Effective presentation with Power point - Documentation - Evaluation: Formative
Summative & Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation - Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning,
Physical, Cognitive, Emotional, Social and Moral Development - Teaching Later Adolescents .
(10 hours )

Text Book:

1. C.R Kothari, Research Methodology - Methods and Techniques, Second revised Edition,
New Age International Publishers, 2004, Chapters 1&2 for Unit I
2. Content and Treatment as in Atiyah and Macdonald, Introduction to Commutative
Algebra, Addision – Wesley Publishers Company (1969) Chapters 2 to 8. (For Units 2 to 4)
3) References for Unit V
i) Sampath, K., Panneerselvam, A. & Santhanam, S. (1984). Introduction to Educational
Technology (2nd revised ed.), New Delhi : Sterling Publishers.
ii) Sharma, S.R. (2003). Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools &
techniques. Jaipur: Mangal Deep
iii) Vedanayam, E. G. (1989) Teaching Technology for College Teachers New York:
Sterling Publishers.

Page 18 of 18
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI
Ph.D. course work study papers in Marine Biotechnology
Ph.D. Marine Biotechnology
(With effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

Details for Course Work Papers

Sl. Subject Title

No.
1 Nanoscience and Nanobiotechnology
2 Marine Biofouling
3 Marine Natural Products
4 Bioethics and Biosafety
5 Extremophiles
6 Animal Cell Culture Technology
7 Marine Pharmacology
8 Research Methodology
9 Marine Toxicology
10 Marine Genomics & Proteomics
11 Marine Planktology
12 Mini Project

Page 1 of 18
 NANOSCIENCE AND NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY
LTPC
4 0 0 4
Objectives:
The objective of this course is to be familiar with the synthesis and preparation of nano-
structured materials and to understand the chemical background involved in the chemical
reactions, their characterization.

Unit I: Classification of Nanomaterials and Synthesis: Nanomaterials as nano particles and

1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials. Concept of bulk versus nanomaterials and dependence of properties
on size. Introduction to ‘Top down’ vs. ‘Bottom up’ approach of synthesis. Nano synthesis
techniques based on liquid and vapour phase as the starting material. The study of wet chemical
method like sol-gel method, micro emulsion technique, reduction of metal salts, decomposition
of organometallic precursors, organic block copolymers, cryochemical synthesis. Study of rapid
solidification route, electro and electroless deposition etc. (12 h)

Unit II: Protein and DNA Based Nanostructures: Introduction to nanolithography and self-
assembly routes. Preparation of quantum dots, nano wires and films, preparation of single-walled
and multi-walled nanotubes; Nanocircuitry – S-layer proteins: structure, chemistry and assembly
– lipid chips – S – layers as templates – engineered nanopores – DNA - Protein nanostructures
DNA-based metallic nanowires and networks, DNA - Gold - Nanoparticle conjugates. (12 h)

Unit III: Nanostructured Materials Characterization Techniques: Techniques on

characterization of size of nano powders/ particles using BET method and laser diffraction. X-
ray diffraction (XRD), SEM, EDAX, TEM, Elemental mapping, FTIR, UV-Visible
spectrophotometer, Laser Raman Spectroscopy, Nanomechanical Characterization using
Nanoindentation, Differential Scanning Calorimeter (DSC), Differential Thermal Analyzer
(DTA), Thermo gravimetric Analysis (TGA), TEM, X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS),
Electrochemcial Characterization measurements. (12 h)

Unit IV: Nanobiomaterials and Biocompatibility: Surface and bulk properties of biomaterials
– Nanobiomaterials –Nanoceramics – Nanopolymers – Nano silica – Hydroxy apatite – Carbon
based nanomaterials surface modification – Textured and porous materials – Surface
immobilized biomolecules – Cell-biomaterial interactions – immune response – In vitro and in
vivo assessment of tissue compatibility. (12 h)

Unit V: Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food Technology: Nanotechnology in

agriculture - Precision farming, Smart delivery system – Nanofertilizers: Nanourea and mixed
fertilizers, Nanofertigation - Nanopesticides, Nanoseed science. Nanotechnology in Food
industry – Nanopackaging for enhanced shelf life - Smart/Intelligent packaging - Food
processing and food safety and bio-security – Electrochemical sensors for food analysis and
contaminant detection. (12 h)
Total 60 h

Page 2 of 18
References

1. Nanomaterials Chemistry by C.N. Rao, A. Muller, A.K. Cheetham, Wiley VCH, 2007.
2. Nanoscale Materials in Chemistry by Kenneth J. Klabunde, Wiley Interscience
Publications, 2001.
3. Nanochemistry by G.B. Sergeev, Elseiver Publication, 2006.
4. Nanomaterials – Handbook by Yury Gogotsi, CRC Press, Taylor & Francis group, 2006.
5. Biomaterials: A Nano Approach, Seeram Ramakrishna, Murugan Ramalingam, T.S.
Sampath Kumar, Winston O. Soboyejo, CRC Press, 2010.
6. Bionanotechnology: Lessons from Nature, David S. Goodsell, by John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., 2004.
7. Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives, Eds. Christof M.
Niemeyer and Chand A. Mirkin, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim,
2004.

Page 3 of 18
 MARINE BIOFOULING
LTPC
40 0 4
Objectives:
This course will introduce the concept of marine pollution, biofouling patterns and their
control technology.

Unit 1: Fouling and Corrosion: Biofouling, biofilm formation; Marine fouling and boring
organisms - their biology, adaptation; Factors influencing the settlement of macrofoulers;
Antifouling and Anti boring treatments; Corrosion process and control of marine structures.
(12 h)
Unit 2: Marine Pollution and Biodeterioration: Marine pollution-major pollutants and
Biological indicators (e.g., Marine microbes, algae and crustaceans) and accumulators, Oil
pollution: Sources, composition and its fate in marine habitats. Treatment options available, case
studies, Thermal and radioactive pollution: sources, effects and remedial measures. Solid
dumping, mining and dredging operations: their effects on marine ecosystem, Biofouling and
biodeterioration: Agents and protection methods. (14 h)

Unit 3: Biofouling Patterns: Biofouling patterns with depth, Natural control of fouling,
Freshwater biofilms, Biofilms in medicine, Fouling on artificial substrata, Paint and coatings
technology for the control of marine fouling, Fouling on shipping: Data-Mining the World’s
largest Antifouling archive. (12 h)

Unit 4: Biofouling and Control Technology: Biofouling organisms - Problems due to

biofouling - Antifouling paints and its environmental pollution - Biotechnological approach to
control of biofoulers. (12 h)

Unit 5: Biofouling, Biocorrosion and Biomaterials: Microorganisms in biofouling and

biocorrosion. Biofilms and general mechanisms in biocorrosion. Biocorrosion and biofouling –
Mechanisms, failure analysis and control. Biomaterials and human implants. (10 h)
Total 60 h

References
1. Fouling Organisms of the Indian Ocean, Biology and Control Technology,
Nagabushanam, R and Thompson, M.F. (Eds), Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd,
1997.
2. Absorption of Microorganisms to Surfaces, Bilton, G. and Marshall. C. (Eds), John Wiley
and sons, New York, 1980.
3. Marine Biodeterioration: an Interdisciplinary Study, Costlow, J.D. and Tipper, R.C.
(Eds), Naval institute press, Annapolis, 1984.
4. Environmental Biotechnology, Principles and Applications, Bruce E. Rittmann and Perry
L. McCarthy, McGraw Hill, 2001.

Page 4 of 18
 MARINE NATURAL PRODUCTS
LTPC
4004
Objectives:
This course work will provide an understanding on the marine environment and its
metabolites, as it became a focus of natural products drug discovery research because of its
relatively unexplored biodiversity compared to terrestrial environments.

Unit 1: Introduction to Marine Natural Products: Survey, resource assessment, sampling and
identification of organisms containing bioactive compounds. Theories of drug action and factors
affecting drug action. (10 h)

Unit 2: Significance of Marine Natural Products: Isolation techniques- liquid-liquid

extraction, membrane separation methods, chromatography (Paper, TLC, HPLC) techniques.
Characterization techniques- IR, UV, NMR and Mass Spectral analysis. (12 h)

Unit 3: Types of important products: Antibiotic, anti-tumour, tumour-promotor, anti-

inflammatory, analgesic, cytotoxic, anti-viral and anti-fouling compounds of marine origin.
Marine toxins- saxitoxin, brevitoxin and ciguatoxin. Marine peptides and alkaloids-
pyridoacridine, pyrrolocridine indole, pyrrole, isoquinoline alkaloids. Marine prostaglandins and
marine cosmetic products. (14 h)

Unit 4: Important Products isolated from Marine Organisms and Their Uses: Marine
colloids and hydrocolloids, agarose, agar, alginate, carageenans, chitin, chitosan and
glucosamines – their extraction process, methods of purification, their importance and uses.
(12 h)

Unit 5: Other By-Products from Marine Organisms: Fish meal, silage products, FPC, fish
hydrolydate, fish flakes, fish glue, pearl essence, fish peptones – their production process and
importance. (12 h)
Total 60 h

References
1. Fish Resources of the ocean – J.A. Gulland, Fishing News (Books) Ltd., England, 1971.
2. Pharmaceuticals and the Sea - C.W. Jefford, Kenneth L. Rinehart, Lois S. Shield, Taylor
& Francis, 1988.
3. Marine Natural Products – Editors: Paul J. Scheuer, 1st Edition, Academic Press, 1998.
4. Bioactive Marine Natural Products - Bhakuni, S. Dewan, D.S. Rawat, Springer, 2005.
5. Fish and fish products – A.L. Winton, B.K.B. Winton, Allied Scientific Publishers, 1998
6. Fishery by products (CIFT Manual) – CIFT Publications, Cochin, India, 2002.

Page 5 of 18
 BIOETHICS AND BIOSAFETY
LTPC
4 0 0 4
Objectives:
Aims to study the typically controversial ethical issues emerging from new situations and
possibilities brought about by advances in biology and medicine. It is also moral discernment as
it relates to medical policy, practice, and research and the prevention of large-scale loss
of biological integrity, focusing both on ecology and human health.

Unit 1: Biosafety-Regulatory Framework for GMOs in India: Regulatory framework in India

governing GMOs-Recombinant DNA Advisory Committee (RDAC), Institutional Biosafety
Committee (IBC), Review Committee on Genetic Manipulation, Genetic Engineering Approval
Committee (GEAC), State Biosafety Coordination Committee (SBCC), District Level
Committee (DLC). Recombinant DNA Guidelines (1990), Revised Guidelines for Research in
Transgenic Plants (1998), Seed Policy (2002), Prevention Food Adulteration Act (1955), The
Food Safety and Standards Bill (2005), Plant Quarantine Order (2003), Regulation for Import of
GM Products Under Foreign Trade Policy (2006-2007), National Environment Policy (2006).
Rules for the manufacture, use/import/export and storage of hazardous
microorganisms/genetically engineered organisms or cells (Ministry of Environment and Forests
Notification (1989). (14 h)

Unit 2: Biosafety-Regulatory Framework for GMOs at International Level: Convention of

Biological Diversity (1992) – Cartagena Protocol on Biosafety – Objectives and salient features
of Cartagena Protocol – Advanced Information Agreement (AIA) procedure – procedures for
GMOs intended for direct use-risk assessment-risk management-handling, transport, packaging
and identification of GMOs- Biosafety Clearing House-unintentional transboundary movement
of GMOs-Benefits of becoming a party to the Cartagena Protocol- status of implementation in
India.
(12 h)
Unit3: Bioethics: Distinction among various forms of IPR, Prior art for a patent, Patenting live
microorganism, Human genome project and ethical issues, Animal cloning, human cloning and
their ethical issues, Experimenting on animals. Public education of producing transgenic
organism, legal and socioeconomic impacts of biotechnology, testing drugs on human
volunteers, Hazardous materials used in biotechnology, their handling and disposal. (12 h)

Unit 4: Intellectual Property Rights: Concept of property, rights, duties and Jurisprudential
definition, Introduction to patent, copy right, trademarks, Design, geographical indication.
History and evolution of IPR, Economic importance of IPR, Indian patent act 1970 (amendment
2000), Distinction among various forms of IPR, invention step, biopiracry and bioprospecting-
Appropriate case studies. Infringement/violation of patent, remedies against infringement (civil,
criminal, administrative) (12 h)

Page 6 of 18
Unit 5: Patents and Patent Laws: Plant and Animal growers rights patents trade secrets, and
plant genetic recourses GATT and TRIPS, Dunkels Draft Patenting of biological materials,
Current Issues of Patents for higher animal and higher plants, patenting of transgenic organisms,
isolated genes and DNA sequences. (10 h)
Total 60 h
References
1. Biotechnology and Patent Protection – An International Review - F.K. Beier, R.S. Crespi,
and J. Straus, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. New Delhi, 1985.
2. Intellectual Property Rights and Biotechnology (Biosafety and Bioethics) - Anupam
Singh and Ashwani Singh, Narendra Publishing House, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Biotechnologies and Development, A. Sasson, UNESCO Publications, 1988.
4. Intellectual Property Rights on Biotechnology – K. Singh, BCIL, New Delhi, 2010.
5. IPR, Biosafety and Bioethics – Deepa Goel, Shomini Parashar, Pearson, New Delhi,
2013.
6. Regulatory Framework for GMOs in India - Ministry of Environment and Forest,
Government of India, New Delhi, 2006.
7. Cartagena Protocol in Biosafety - Ministry of Environment and Forest, Government of
India, New Delhi, 2006.

Page 7 of 18
 EXTREMOPHILES
LTPC
4 00 4
Objectives:
This course will provide an understanding about the extreme microorganisms and their
applications.

Unit 1: Microbes in Extreme Environments: Thermophilic, alkalophilic, asmophilic,

barophilic, psychrophilic microorganisms – Hyperthermophilic and halophilic
organisms and their importance in biotechnology. (12 h)

Unit 2: Classification and Characteristics of Archaebacteria: Halophiles – Dead Sea –

halotolerence – Applications of halophiles and their extremozymes. Barophiles – high pressure
habitats, life under pressure, barophily, death under pressure. (12 h)

Unit 3: Biotechnological Applications of Extremophiles in Bioprocessing: diagnostics,

molecular biology, food industry, genetic engineering, geo-microbiology sectors. (10 h)

Unit 4: Thermophiles: History and discovery of hyper thermophiles, Carbohydrate-active

enzymes from hyper thermophiles. Lignocellulose converting enzymes from thermophiles.
Enzymes involved in DNA amplification (e.g., polymerases) from thermophiles, evolution of
PCR enzymes. Metalloproteins from hyperthermophiles. (14 h)

Unit 5: Psychrophiles: Ecology of Psychrophiles-Subglacial and permafrost environments.

Taxonomy, adaptative mechanisms of psychro tolerant bacterial pathogens. Psychrophilic
enzymes, Acidophiles: Physiological features, adaptative strategies, growth kinetics and enzymes
of various extremophilic acidophiles. (12 h)
Total 60 h
References
1. Microbiology, Prescott, Harley and Klein, W.C. Brown publishers, 2006.
2. Bacterial Systematics, N.A. Logan, Blackeell Scientific publishers, 1994.
3. Biology of Microorganisms, T.D. Brock and M. T.Madigan, Prentice Hall publishers,
1991.
4. Microbiology, M.J. Pelczar and Reid, 5th Edn., Tata Mc Graw Hill Co., New Delhi, 1986.
5. Introduction of Microbiology, Robert G. Arnegar, Mac Millan, New York, 1973.

Page 8 of 18
 ANIMAL CELL CULTURE TECHNOLOGY
LTPC
4 00 4
Objectives:
Animal cell culture is an important course for any biotechnology-related training program
because it is a technique that must be performed by investigators before they perform many
molecular procedures and vertebrate cell culture is becoming increasingly important for
biomanufacturing of therapeutic proteins.

Unit 1: Introduction and Biology of Cultured Cells: Introduction - historical background-

technological innovations in development of cell and tissue culture-types of tissue culture-
culture environment- cell adhesion, cell proliferation, differentiation, cell signalling, energy
metabolism- selection –cell line development. (12 h)

Unit 2: Laboratory Design: Requirements, ventilation - design and layout, Equipments - sterile
working area, incubation and culture, preparation and sterilization, storage, supplementary and
specialized equipments; aseptic techniques - sterile handling, standard procedure; safety
protocols - biohazards, bioethics and quality assurance. (12 h)

Unit 3: Culture Vessels and Media Development: Culture vessel-substrate, substrate coating,
choice of culture vessel, specialized systems; Media development - physicochemical parameters,
balanced salt solutions, complete media, serum, selection of media, supplements. Serum-free
medium development and sterilization. (12 h)

Unit 4: Primary Culture, Secondary Culture, Cloning and Selection: Isolation of tissue,
types of primary culture, subculture and cell lines, cloning and selection- monolayer clones and
suspension clones, Contamination, cryopreservation and cytotoxicity. (12 h)

Unit 5: Organo-typic Culture and Specialized Cell Culture Techniques: Cell separation,
characterization, differentiation & transformation; organ culture- histotypic culture -organotypic
culture; Culture of specialised cells - epithelial, mesenchymal, neuroectodermal, hematopoietic
and tumour cell culture; stem cell culture. (12 h)
Total 60 h

References
1. Culture of Animal Cells, 6th Edition- R Ian Freshney – John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2016.
2. Cell Culture Technology: Recent Advances and Future Prospects (Euroscicon Meeting Reports
Book 1) - Oystein Bruserud, Astrid Englezou – Honnao Publishers, 2012.
3. Vertebrate Cell Culture II and Enzyme Technology: Volume 39 (Advances in Biochemical
Engineering/ Biotechnology) - A.F. Bückmann et al., Springer, 2013.
4. Animal Cell Culture and Technology (The Basics) (Garland Science)) - Michael Butler, CRC
Press, 2003.
5. The Immortal Life of Henrietta Lacks - Rebecca Skloot, Crown, 2010.

Page 9 of 18
 MARINE PHARMACOLOGY
LTPC
4 00 4
Objectives:
This course enables the students to know the efficacy and specificity of the different
classes of drugs available from marine resource.

Unit 1: Terms and Definitions: Pharmacokinetics – ADMET properties- drug metabolism;

Bioavailability; Pharmacodynamics – Dose response relationship, drug receptors- interactions-
quantification. (12 h)

Unit 2: Biologically Active Compounds from marine flora, fauna and microbes – Anti-bacterial
anti-fungal, anti-viral, anti-parasitic, anti-inflammatory and cytotoxic compounds, anti-
coagulants and marine toxins. Fish pharmacological and pharmacodynamical agents: - vaccines,
immunostimulants, breeding induction agents, osmoregulators, disinfectants. (12 h)

Unit 3: Bioprospecting of Marine Natural Products: Isolation, structural elucidation and

mode of action. Biological evaluation of novel compounds-Primary screens-broad spectrum
evaluation; secondary screens- binding assays, functional activity, reporter gene assay,
phamacodynamic assays; animal models- preclinical proof of concept. Strategy and tactics in
drug discovery-target identification and validation, lead identification, optimization-candidate
selection. (14 h)

Unit 4: Computational Chemistry: Introduction- basic toolkit-protein modelling programs-

structural information-X-ray crystallography, NMR, databases- Docking and virtual screening-
prediction of binding energies- homology modelling- QSAR. (12 h)

Unit 5: Drug Safety: Methods of drug administration, antibiotic hazards and

biotransformation; Toxicology in drug discovery process- toxicity assessment-in vivo, in vitro, in
silico systems; - genetic toxicity- target organ toxicity; Novel technologies in safety assessment-
toxicogenomics, proteomics, NMR; ethical issues; IPR and patents. (12 h)
Total 60 h

References
1. Pharmacolgy – Rapid Review – T. Pazdernik, L. Kerecsen, Elseiver Health Sciences,
2010.
2. Essentials of Medical Pharmacology, 8th Edition - K.D. Tripathi, Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers, 2018.
3. Marine Natural Products – D.S. Bhakuni, S. Devan and D.S. Rawat, Springer, 2005.
4. Applied Fish Pharmacology, 2nd Edition – John F. Burka, Kluwer Acudemic Publishers,
2000.
5. Medicinal Chemistry- Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition, Frank. D. King (Ed.),
Glaxosmithklime, UK, 2002.

Page 10 of 18
 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
LTPC
4 0 0 4
Objectives:
This course will introduce the concept and methods of research, to impart knowledge on
scientific procedures on preparing research reports and papers and making presentations and to
provide information on preparing research projects, research ethics and impact factors of
publications.

Unit 1: Foundations of Research: Meaning, objectives, motivation, utility. Concept of theory,

empiricism, deductive and inductive theory. Characteristics of scientific methods –
Understanding the language of research – Concept, construct, definition, variable, research
process. Problem identification and formulation – Research question – Investigation question –
Measurement issues. (12 h)

Unit 2: Research Design: Concept and importance in research – Features of a good research
design – Exploratory research design – concept, types and uses, Descriptive research designs –
concept, types and uses. Experimental design: Concept of independent and dependent variables.
Qualitative and quantitative research: Qualitative research – Quantitative research – Concept of
measurement, merging the two approaches. (12 h)

Unit 3: Sampling: Concepts of statistical population, sample, sampling frame, sampling error,
sample size, non response. Characteristics of a good sample. Probability sample – Simple
random sample, systematic sample, stratified random sample and Multi-stage sampling.
Determining size of the sample – Practical considerations in sampling and sample size. (12 h)

Unit 4: Data Analysis: Data preparation – Univariate analysis (frequency tables, bar charts, pie
charts, percentages), Bivariate analysis – Cross tabulations numerical and graphical presentation
of data; Measures of central tendency; Measures of dispersion; Testing of significance of
hypothesis by student’s t-test, paired t-test and Fisher’s t test; Determination of correlation
coefficient between two variables; Regression analysis; Analysis of variance; Chi-square test
including testing hypothesis of association Post-hoc test; Basic statistical modelling. (12 h)

Unit 5: Interpretation of Data and Paper Writing: Layout of a research paper, Journals in life
science, Impact factor of journals, When and where to publish?, Ethical issues related to
publishing, Plagiarism and self-plagiarism. Use of tools/techniques for research: Methods to
search required information effectively. Reference management software like Zotero/Mendeley,
Software for paper formatting like LaTeX/MS Office, Software for detection of plagiarism.
(12 h)
Total 60 h

Page 11 of 18
References:
1. Introducing Research Methodology – A Beginners Guide to do Research Project – Uwe
Flick, 2nd Edition, SAGE Publishing, 2015.
2. Quality Inquiry and Research Design: Choosing among five approaches – John W.
Creswell, Cheryl N. Poth, 4th Edition, SAGE Publications Inc, 2017.
3. Research Methodology – Methods and Techniques, C.R. Kothari and Gaurav Garg, New
Age International Publishers, 2019.
4. Biostatistics – P.N. Arora, P.K. Malhan, Himalayan Publishing House, 2010.
5. Statistical Methods – S.P. Gupta, S. Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2017.
6. Biostatistical Analysis – Jerrold H. Zar, 5th Edition, Northern Illionois University,
Pearson, 2010.

Page 12 of 18
 MARINE TOXICOLOGY
LTPC
4 00 4
Objectives:
This course will provide an understanding on different marine habitats: salt marshes,
mangroves, corals, barrier beaches, rocky coastlines and openocean. This course will give
opportunity to take a close look at coastal ecosystems, and learn about the scientific sampling
techniques in the field and also the sample handling and analyses techniques in the lab.

Unit 1: Coastal and Marine Ecosystems: Estuarine and mangrove ecology – Soft sediment
ecology - Salt marsh ecology - Coral reef ecology - Rocky intertidal ecology - Hydrothermal
vents ecology - Polar ecology - Human impacts on the marine environment and biofouling.(10 h)

Unit 2: Marine Ecotoxicology and Toxicants: General introduction and principles on marine
toxicology – General chemistry of different types of pesticides and toxicants like organochlorine,
organophosphate, PCBs, POPs, PAH, Dioxins, heavy metals – Effect of Toxicants on animal
physiology – Global transport of POPs – Mercury and Lead cycling in the environment. (12 h)

Unit 3: Metal Sources in Marine Environment and Their Impacts: Natural, anthropogenic,
metal retention in sediments, role of grain size, organic matter, Fe-Mn oxides, sulphides.
Bioaccumulation of metals: definition, metal accumulation in benthic biota, Arsenic
bioaccumulation in biota of the Sundarban mangrove wetland – a case study. Bioaccumulation
factor (BAF): concept of Bioconcentration, Bioconcentration factor (BCA), harmful effects of
bioaccumulation of metals on biota, Biomagnification in trophic levels – risk to human health.
Metal accumulation in mangroves, Remediation of metal contamination: phytoremediation,
techniques of phytoremediation, phytostabilization, phytodegradation and advantages &
disadvantages of phytoremediation. (16 h)

Unit 4: Toxicology: Principles of toxicology, dose-response relationships, chronic and acute

toxicity; effective concentration, LD50, Median tolerance limit and Margin of safety; Toxicity
testing (holistic and numeric approach). Uptake, bioaccumulation, bio-transformation and
excretion of xenobiotics. (10 h)

Unit 5: Risk Assessmesnt: Aquatic toxicology testing methods – Chemical uptake,

transformation, elimination and accumulation – Marine and estuarine invertebrate toxicity tests -
Bioassays and biomarkers – Multi-species test systems – Biodegradation – Factors influencing
bioaccumulation and trophic transfer – Sub-lethal effects – Acute and chronic lethal effects –
Risk assessment of contaminants on communities and ecosystems. (12 h)
Total 60 h

Page 13 of 18
References

1. Toxicology- The Basic Science of Poisons - Klaassen, D. Curtis, 7th Edition, McGraw-
Hill, 2008.
2. Essentials of Toxicology - Curtis D. Klaassen, John B. Watkins III, 3rd edition, LANGE,
2015.
3. Environmental Toxicology – D.A. Wright, P. Welbourne, Cambridge University Press,
2002.
4. Principles and Practices of Toxicology in Public Health - Ira. S. Richards, Barlett
Publications, 2008.
5. Trace Elements in Terrestrial Environments – D.C. Adriano, Springer Science, 2001.
6. Bioaccumulation in Marine Organisms – J.M. Neff, Elsevier Ltd, 2002.

Page 14 of 18
 MARINE GENOMICS AND PROTEOMICS
LTPC
4 0 0 4
Objectives:
The objective of this course is to get a thorough knowledge about the marine genomics
and proteomics and the techniques involved in it.

Unit 1: Genomes and Genomics: Genomics as a discipline, Structure and organization of

genomes- prokaryotic, eukarytoic, organellar genomes, transposable elements, Beyond the
genome-Epigenome, Central dogma revisited, Genome function, chromatin modification and
gene expression, transcription initiation, synthesis and processing of RNA, synthesis and
processing of proteome, Regulons and regulation of gene expression, Genomes of marine
organisms, Genomics and human health-Gene Therapy-Somatic and germ-line therapy, Suicide
gene therapy; Gene replacement; Gene targeting, Personalized medicine; Pharmacogenomics,
Ethical, Legal and Social Implications (ELSI) of genomics. (12 h)

Unit 2: Genomic Techniques for Marine Genomics: Genomic libraries of marine organisms,
Genome mapping methods, Sequencing genomes- Classical and next generation sequencing
methods; Assembly of DNA sequences- methods; Databases-; Primary Databases; Nucleotide
Sequence Database - NCBI, EMBL, EBI, DDBJ, Genome databases; Comparative genomics,
Functional genomics- Transcriptomics; Computational functional genomics-, ORF and promoter
predictions. Intron and exon predictions. Experimental- cDNA libraries of marine organisms,
Assigning gene function; Differential gene expression, digital gene expression, DNA and cDNA
microarrays. (12 h)

Unit 3: Marine Genomics: Population genomics of marine organisms to understand

environmental adaptations, Phylogenomics of marine animals, Genomics of marine model
organisms; Genomic approaches- fisheries and aquaculture- breeding and reproduction, growth
and nutrition, host-pathogen interactions, seafood product quality and safety. Marine
metagenomics- Accessing the metagenome, Construction of metagenomic libraries, Metagenome
analyses, Library independent metagenomic analyses. (12 h)

Unit 4: Structural Proteomics: X-ray crystallography and NMR spectroscopy; Protein

engineering; Interaction proteomics- complex isolation of proteins, protein interactionsgenetic
methods, affinity approaches, physical methods, Functional proteomics - protein arrays; methods
of analysis of protein modifications. (12 h)

Unit 5: Marine Proteomics: Marine based drug discovery, Protein structure prediction methods;
Homology modeling; Threading and ab intio methods; Protein function prediction; Protein
structure visualization tools- Rasmol, Swiss PDB Viewer; Target identification and validation;
Lead optimization and validation; Structure-based drug design and ligand-based drug design.
(12 h)
Total 60 h

Page 15 of 18
References
1. Genomes, T.A. Brown, 3rd ed. Garland Science, 2007.
2. Introduction to Marine Genomics, Cock, JM, Tessmar-Raibe, K., Boyen, C., Viard F.
(Eds)., Springer, 2010.
3. Metagenomics: Theory, Methods and Applications, Diana M. (Ed.), Caister Academic
Press, 2010.
4. Introduction to Proteomics: Tools for the New Biology, Liebler D.C., Humana Press Inc.,
New Jersey, 2002.
5. Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics, 7th Edition, Primrose, S.B., Twyman.
R.M., Blackwell Publishing, 2006.
6. Principles of Proteomics, Twyman R.M., Garland Science/BIOS Scientific Publishers,
New York, 2004.
7. An Introduction to Molecular Biotechnology, Wink, W., Wiley VCH Verlag Gm BH and
Co. KGaA, Germany, 2006.
8. Introduction to Bioinformatics: A theoretical and Practical Approach, Stephen A.
Krawetz and David D. Womble, Humana Press, Totowa, NJ, 2003.
9. Molecular Approaches to the Study of the Ocean, Cooksey, K.E. (Ed.)., Springer
Netherlands, 1998.
10. Discovering Genomics, Proteomics and Bioinformatics, Heyer L. and Campbell A. 2006,
Cold Spring Harbor Lab. Press, USA, 2006. .

Page 16 of 18
 MARINE PLANKTOLOGY

LTPC
40 0 4
Objectives:

This course will give a detailed idea about the phytoplanktons and zooplanktons present
in the marine environment, their preservation and commercial applications.

Unit 1: General Planktology: Definition for plankton, history of planktology, Plankton and
environment, habit and habitat, nutrition, thallus, organisation and life cycle of commercially
important phytoplankton, life cycle of commercially important zooplankton. (10 h)

Unit 2: Phytoplankton: Methods for isolation of phytoplankton from the natural stock, Strain
improvement, Stock maintenance of isolated species, Culture – Culture media preparation,
Continuous culture system, Batch-culture system, Photo bioreactors and its application.
Phytoplankton used in aquaculture, Oil industry and algal carotenoid production, Green water
Aquaculture and preparation of pure culture of phytoplankton. (14 h)

Unit 3: Zooplanktons: General characteristics of zooplankton, Feed and feeding of

zooplanktons. Methods for isolation and identification of zooplankton, Stock maintenance,
Indoor and outdoor culture of commercially important zooplankton, Improvement of nutritive
quality in zooplankton. Preparation of pure culture of zooplankton. (12 h)

Unit 4: Plankton and Larval Rearing: Selection and preparation of plankton for larval feeding
optimization of physiochemical and biological parameters for the better growth of plankton,
Enrichment and storage of planktons. (10 h)

Unit 5: Preservation of Plankton: Short term storage – Indoor culture (Stock culture), Longer
term storage – Cryopreservation – Introduction to algal cryopreservation, Internal and External
cryoprotectants and their advantages and disadvantages, Freezing Techniques – Slow and Rapid
Freezing and their advantages and disadvantages, Vitrification – Importance and their
advantages and disadvantages. (12 h)
Total 60 h
References:
1. Algae Anatomy, Biochemistry and Biotechnology, Laura Barsanthi, Paolo Gualtieri,
CRC Press Taylor & Francis Group, 2013.
2. Plankton- A Guide to their Ecology and Monitoring for Water Quality, Iain M. Suthers
and David Rissik, CSIRO Publishing, 2009.
3. Introduction to Marine Plankton, Abhijit Mitra, Kakoli Banerjee and Avijit
Gangopadhyay, Daya Publishing House, 2004.

Page 17 of 18
 4. Introduction to Marine Phytoplankton, Abhijit Mitra, Kakoli Banerjee and D.P.
Bhattacharyya, Narendra Publishing House, 2006.
5. Basic and Applied Zooplankton Biology, Perumal, Santhanam, Begum,
Ajima, Pachiyappan, Perumal, Springer, 2019.
6. Zooplankton and Phytoplankton: Types, Characteristics and Ecology, Giri Kattel, Nova
Science Publishers Inc., 2012.
7. An Introduction to Phytoplanktons: Diversity and Ecology, Avik Kumar Choudhury and
Ruma Pal, Springer, 2014.
8. Practical Manuel on Microalgal Technology, M. Michael Babu and T. Citarasu, Southern
Book Star Publishers, Trivandrum, 2019.

Websites
1. Plankton - Science Publishing Group
sciencepublishinggroup.com/book/download?chapterId=2171&stateId=8000...4
2. Zooplankton Methodology, Collection & Identification – - a field ... - NIO
3. www.nio.org/userfiles/file/biology/Zooplankton_Manual_new.pdf

********

Page 18 of 18
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI
Ph.D. course work study papers in Microbiology
Ph.D.Microbiology
(With effect from the academic year 2017-2018 onwards)

Sub. Subject Subject Title Hrs/ L T P C

Semester

No. Status week Hrs/ Hrs/ Hrs/ Credits

week week week
1 Advanced Research 4 4 - - 4
Methodology
2 Advanced 4 4 - - 4
Bioinstrumentation

3 Microbial Probiotics and 4 4 - - 4

Prebiotics
4 Synthetic Biology and its 4 4 - - 4
Applications

5 Nanobiotechnology and 4 4 - - 4
Application

6 Microbial Drug Discovery 4 4 - - 4

and Management of Drug
I Resistance

7 Microbes and Clean 4 4 - - 4

Environment

8 Microbiome, 4 4 - - 4
Metagenomics and
Molecular Techniques
9 Advanced Marine 4 4 - - 4
Microbiology and
Extremophiles

10 Emerging and Re-emerging 4 4 - 4

Microbial Infectious
Diseases in India
11 Microbial Product 4 4 - 4
Development and Patenting

12 Bioentrepreneurship and 4 4 - 4
STARTUPS

1
 Ph.D. course works Study papers in Microbiology

1. Advanced Research Methodology

Objectives
To inculcate knowledge on research methodology and to familiarize the usage of various
instruments, techniques and analysis applied in Microbiology research.
LTPC
40 04
Unit 1: Research Methodology – Introduction - Meaning - Objectives – Motivation. Types of
Research - Research Approaches, Criteria of Good Research.Research and Scientific Method.
Research Problem – identification- Selection – Techniques and necessity of defining the
Problem. Research ethics- Importance of doing genuine Research.
(10 h)
Unit 2: Survey of Literature: Meaning- Mode of literature survey using scientific documents –
research paper, review paper, book reviews, theses, conference and project reports. Research
Design: Meaning – Need - Basic Principles – Types- Important concepts relating to research
design, Developing a research plan. Sampling: Steps in sampling design, characteristics of a
good sample design, Different types of sample designs. Research methods versus methodology,
Problems encountered by researchers in India.
(10 h)
Unit 3: Biostatistics and Computer Application: Introduction, significance of statistical
methods. Normal distribution.Probability.Degrees of freedom.Measures of variation - standard
deviation, Non linear regression, iteration methods.Analysis of variance.Standard error. Test for
statistical two ways ANOVA and multiple comparison procedures. Significance - students Test,
chi - square test. Fisher’s exact test. Wilcoxon rank test. Two - tailed student’s t - test.Mann -
Whitney test.Dunnet’s two - tailed test, Kruskell - Wallis non-parametric test.Computer
applications in Biology - Using formulas and functions, Data storing, Features for Statistical data
analysis, Generating charts / graph and other features, Tools – Microsoft Word, Excel, Power
Point and WWW, Use of search engines, Biological data bases.
(14 h)
Unit 4: Scientific Writing: Definition and kinds of scientific documents – research paper,
review paper, book reviews, thesis, conference and project reports (for the scientific community
and for funding agencies). Thesis writing – follow the format prescribed by the
ManonmaniamSundaranar University - Components of a research paper – the IMRAD system,
submission of manuscript, ordering reprints. Oral and poster presentation of research papers in
conferences/symposia. Preparation and submission of research project proposals to funding
agencies.
(12 h)

2
 Unit 5: Biomolecular separation Techniques: Identification and characterization of
biomolecules – optimization of AGE – Blotting techniques, RAPD, RFLP, DGGE, TGGE, PCR,
ELISA. Enzyme assay, enzyme activity and specific activity determination.Cell disintegration
and extraction techniques, separation of proteins (ammonium sulphate, organic solvents). Ion
exchange chromatography, molecular sieve chromatography, affinity chromatography, column
chromatography, thin layer chromatography, ultra filtration, Ultracentrifugation. Gel
electrophoresis - PAGE – Gel Documentation – immunoelectrophoresis, advanced Microscopy,
HPLC, HPTLC, GC-MS, FTIR, NMR, AAS.
(14 h)
Total (60 h)

References:
1.Kothari, C.R. (2004). Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, New Age International
Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Arya., P.P. and Pal, Y. (2001), Research Methodology in Management: Theory and Case
Studies, Deep and Deep Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
3. Robert A. Day (1998), How To Write & Publish a Scientific Paper. Oryx Press; 5thedition.
4. Frank D. Bell (1995), Basic Biostatistics: Concepts for the Health Sciences. William C.Brown
5.Suresh C. Sinha and Anil K. Dhiman, (2002), Research Methodology (2 Vols– Set)Vedams
Books (P) Ltd.
6. Bajpai, S. 2014. Revised Edition, Biological Instrumentation and Methodology:(Tools and
Techniques of Biology), Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.
7. Gurumani, N. 2016. First Edition, Research Methodology for Biological Sciences,
MJPPublishers, A unit of Tamilnadu Book House, Chennai.
8.Lederberg, J. 2000. Second Edition, Encyclopedia of Microbiology, Volume 4, AcademicPress.
4. Palanivelu, P. 2009. Fourth Edition,
9. Analytical biochemistryand separation techniques – A Laboratory Manual, Twenty first
Century Publications, Madurai, Tamilnadu.
10.Pelczar, M.J., Schan, E.C. and Kreig, N.R. 2010. Microbiology – An application based
approach, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi.

3
 2. Advanced Bioinstrumentation
Objectives
 To understand the principle, applications and limitations of basic and advanced
instruments used in biological research.
 Preparing the researchers for interdisciplinary research.
 To improve the quality and reliability of the research.
LTPC
40 04
Unit 1: Buffers, standard, percentage, molars and normal solutions, pH meter, pH electrodes –
calomel and glass electrodes. Colorimeter –UV-Spectrophotometer.Calibration of Laminar air
flow-Different meters available for the measurement of biological research and their applications
and calibration.
(14 h)
Unit 2: Centrifugation: Principle – types of centrifuges – low speed, high speed, ultra
centrifuge, and Differential centrifugation – density gradient centrifugation. Applications of
centrifuge.
(12 h)
Unit 3: Electrophoresis – SDS – PAGE and Agarose gel electrophoresis. Southern blotting –
Northern blotting – Western blotting – DOT blotting.
(10 h)
Unit 4: Chromatography – paper, thin layer, column, ion exchange, gas chromatography and GC
– GCMS -HPLC-MS - FACS - Biosensors.
(10h)
Unit 5: Biological Techniques - ELISA - Principles and types. Immunodiffusion techniques -
ODD, RIA.Agglutination and its applications - IFT, CFT. Principle and Applications of XRD -
FTIR - ICPOES- ICP-MS- TGDTA –Proton NMR – C13 NMR – Polarimeter – Mass Spectrum
–TEM AND SEM
(14 h)
Total (60 h)
References:
1. Bajpai PK (2010). Biological Instrumentation and Methodology.Revised edition, S.Chand&
Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Palanivelu P (2004). Analytical Biochemistry and Separation techniques.Third edition, MKU
Co-op, Press Ltd., Palkalai Nagar, Madurai.
3. Gurumani N (2006). Research Methodology for Biological Sciences.First edition, MJP
Publishers, A Unit of Tamil Nadu Book House, Chennai.
4. Subramanian MA (2005). Biophysics – Principles and Techniques. First edition, MJP
Publishers, A Unit of Tamil Nadu Book House, Chennai.
5. John G Webster (2004). Bioinstrumentation.Student edition.John Wiley and Sons, Ltd.
6. Ravishankar S (2001). A Text Book of Pharmaceutical Analysis.Third edition.Rx
Publications, Tirunelveli.
7. Upadhyay&Upadhyay. Biophysical Chemistry, (2010). Himalaya Publishing house

4
 3. Microbial Probiotics and Prebiotics
Objectives:
 To study the use of live bacterial supplements on disease resistance and growth
promotion in aquatic organisms.
 To understand the history, growth and development of probiotics.
 To study the prebiotic effect on gut bacterial community.
 To explore knowledge on isolation, screening, characterization and production of
probiotic microbes.

LTPC
4004
Unit 1:Probiotic History : Definition, History and development of probiotics, Indian and Global
Scenario of Probiotics, General features of probiotics, Mechanism of action of probiotics.
(12 h)

Unit 2:Probiotic characterization: Isolation of probiotic bacterial strains from various sources,
Screening of probiotic bacteria: antimicrobial potentials, enzyme producing ability, colonization
potentials, Identification of probionts using molecular tools – Mass cultivation of probiotic
bacterial strains. (12 h)

Unit 3: Probiotics in Food: Dairy and Non dairy based probiotic products. Interactions between
probiotics and components of fermented foods - Probiotic food Product Specifications, Quality
Assurance and Regulatory Issues - (12 h)

Unit 4: Application of Probiotics – Humans: Bowel diseases, Oral and Dental health, Diabetes
and obesity, Cancer prevention. Plants: Role of plant probiotics in production of highly
functional fruits and disease resistance. Animals: Probiotics in poultry, pig and ruminant
nutrition. Aquatic organisms- Probiotics for finfish and shellfish.
(14 h)

Unit 5:Prebiotics and Synbiotics: Definition – Types of prebiotics - Characteristics of probiotics

– Synbiotics – List of synbiotics and their applications (10 h)
Total (60 h)

Reference
1.Daniel Merrifield and EinarRingo, 2014, Aquaculture nutrition: Gut Health, Probiotics and
Prebiotics, Wiley Blackwell.
2.Soundarapandian, P. and Ramanan, V. 2010. Role of probiotics on the farming of shrimp
Penaeusmondon, India, VDM Verlag Publishers.
3.Ganguly, S. And Mukhopadhayay, S.K. 2011. Immunostimulants, Probiotics and Prebiotics,
LAP Lambert Academic Publishing, Germany
4.Anthony von Fraunhofer, J. 2012. Prebiotics and Probiotics, CreateSpace Independent
Publishing Platform, USA.
5.Watson, R.R. and V.R. Preedy, 2016. Probiotics, Prebiotics and Synbiotics: Bioactive foods in
health promotion, Academic Press, USA.

5
 4. Synthetic Biology and itsApplications

Objectives

 To understand the gene regulation in naturally occurring organisms and to learn the mode of
alteration of gens and their products. Also to explore the possibility of alteration of properties of
cells / organisms.
 To apply a scientific approach to the planning, execution, reporting and interpretation of
advanced projects with the aim at creating replicating systems with new properties that can be
regulated, and to critically analyse the results and generate testable hypotheses from these
experiments
 To critically analyse, present and defend scientific literature in synthetic biology, including
practical applications such as biofuel and metabolic engineering and to develop ethical
perspectives in synthetic biology
LTPC
4 004
Unit 1: Introduction to Synthetic Biology: Basic concepts in biology – Definition – History -
Perspectives- Engineering- Re-writing- Enabling technologies-Standardized parts - Synthesis -
Sequencing - Microfluidics - Modular protein assembly - Modeling – Chemical Synthetic
biology
(12h)

Unit 2: Concepts and Components in Synthetic genomics: Metabolic engineering -Biological

computers -Biosensors - Cell transformation (10 h)

Unit 3: Synthetic genomics – Synthetic Genomes – basic concepts of genomics -Elements of

genetic circuits. Natural and synthetic promoters; attenuation and termination. Codon usage,
Operons, RBSs and their relevance to biotechnology sRNA and ribolocks - Hybrid systems -
RNA Replicon-cell factories-algae befouls (14 h)

Unit 4: Applications of Synthetic Biology: - Designed proteins - Industrial enzymes -

Information storage - Materials production - Reduced amino-acid libraries - Space exploration -
Synthetic genetic pathways - Synthetic life - Synthetic amino acids - Synthetic nucleotides.
Therapeutics: Gene circuits- Delivery platform- Engineered bacteria-based platform- Cell-based
platform- Cancer detection/diagnostic (14 h)

Unit 5:Bioethics and Security: European initiatives – US initiatives – opposition – ethical

concern – status of research in Synthetic biology in India. (10 h)

References:
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Synthetic_biology
www.synbioproject.org/topics/synbio101/definition/
https://www.syntheticgenomics.com/cell-factories
https://www.syntheticgenomics.com/exxonmobil-and-synthetic-genomics-algae-biofu

6
 5. Nanobiotechnology and Application

Objectives
 To familiarize students with new concepts and understand the fundamentals of
Nanotechnology.
 To give basic knowledge on classes of nanomaterials and various synthesis and
characterisation techniques involved in Nanotechnology.
 To employ bio-nanomaterials for analysis and sensing techniques.
 To explain the bio-medical applications of Nanobiotechnology.
LPTC
4 0 04
Unit 1:Basics of Nanotechnology: Time and Length scale in structures - Definition of
nanosystem -Properties of nanoscale (optical, mechanical electronic and magnetic) - Classes of
Nanomaterials: Classification based on dimensionality - Quantum dots - Wells and wires -
Carbon based nanomaterials (nanogold, nanosilver and metal oxides) - Nanocomposites,
Synthesis of nanomaterials: Physical methods - Electrodeposition, Ball Milling, Magnetron
Sputtering, Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE) - Chemical Methods - Metal nanocrystals by
reduction, Solvothermal synthesis, Photochemical synthesis, Sonochemical routes, Chemical
vapour Deposition.
(12 h)

Unit 2: Bio-Analytics of Nanoparticles: Nanofabrication: Photolithography - Electron-beam

lithography (EBL) - Nanoimprint - Soft Lithography patterning, Characterisation: Scanning
Electron Microscope (SEM) - Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM), Atomic Force
Microscope (AFM) - Analysis of Biomolecular Structure by Atomic Force Microscopy and
Molecular Pulling - X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (XPS) - Rutherford Backscattering
Spectroscopy (RBS) - Surface Enhanced Raman Spectroscopy (SERS) - Force Spectroscopy -
Biofunctionalized Nanoparticles for Surface - Enhanced Raman Scattering and Surface Plasmon
Resonance - Luminescent Quantum Dots for Biological Labeling - Nanoparticle Molecular
Labels -Bioconjugated Silica Nanoparticles for Bioanalytical Applications.

(13h)

Unit 3: Principles of Nanobiotechnology: Structural and Functional Principles: Lipid Bilayers -

Liposomes - Neosomes - Polysacharides - Peptides -Nucleic acids - DNA scaffolds - Enzymes -
Biomolecular motors: Linear, Rotary mortors - Immunotoxins - Membrane transporters and
pumps - Antibodies - Monoclonal Antibodies - Immunoconjugates - Limitations of natural
biomolecules.

(10 h)

7
Unit 4: Nanobiomaterials: Surface and Bulk Properties of Biomaterials –Nano ceramics -
Nanopolymers - Nano Silica - Hydroxy apatite - Surface modification - Textured and Porous
Materials - Surface immobilized biomolecules - Cell-biomaterial interactions - Immune response
- in vitro and in vivo assessment of tissue compatibility,Protein and DNA Based Nanostructures:
Nanocircuitry - S-layer proteins: structure, chemistry and assembly - lipid chips – S-Layers as
Templates - Engineered nanopores - DNA–Protein Nanostructures - DNA-templated Electronics
- DNA-based Metallic Nanowires and Networks - DNA-Gold-Nanoparticle Conjugates - DNA -
templated Electronics - DNA Nanostructures for Mechanics and Computing.

(13 h)

Unit 5: Applications of Nanotechnology in Health Science: Nano particle based drug delivery
systems - Ultra sound triggered Nano/Microbubbles - Regenerative Medicine – Nanoimmuno
conjugates- Biosensors - Optical Biosensors Based on Nanoplasmonics - Nanobiosesors -
Nanobiosensors for Mimicking Gustatory and Olfactory Senses -Cyclodextrin in Nanomedicinal
Foods and Cosmetics - Bioavailability and delivery of nutraceuticals and functional foods using
Nanotechnology - Polymer based nanocomposites for food packaging - Nanocomposites for food
packaging - Toxicity and environmental risks of nanomaterials - Challenges of nanotoxicology.

(12 h)

(Total 60 h)

References

1. Pradeep T., “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
2. Niemeyer C. M., “Nanobiotechnology: Concepts, Applications and Perspectives”, Wiley –
VCH, 2006.
3. David S Goodsell, “Bionanotechnology”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
4. DebasisBagchi, ManashiBagchi, Hiroyoshi Moriyama, FereidoonShahidi, “Bio-
Nanotechnology: A Revolution in Food, Biomedical and Health Sciences” Wiley-Blackwell,
2013.
5. Buddy D. Ratner, Allan S. Hoffman, Frederick J. Schoen, Jack E. Lemons, “Biomaterials
Science: An Introduction to Materials in Medicine”,Academic Press, 2012.
6. BalajiSitharaman “Nanobiomaterials Handbook”, Taylor & Francis Group, 2011.
7. Nabok A., “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2005.

8
 6. Microbial Drug Discovery and Management of Drug Resistance

Objectives:
To provide an in-depth knowledge about the development of new antimicrobial agents using
standard guidelines of NCCLS and CLSI.
To make a clear understanding of Pharmacogenomics.
To give a brief knowledge about the databases and tools used for drug designing.
To furnish the ideas regarding clinical trials and guidelines of FDA.
To provide knowledge on the discovery of drugs from microbial resources and management of
the drug resistant microorganisms.
LTPC
4004
Unit 1 :Screening and development strategies for new antimicrobial agents acting on bacterial
cell wall, cell membrane, nucleic acid and protein metabolism, Bioassay of antibacterial agents
in liquid media and in agar media using standard guidelines (e.g. National Committee for
Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS)/Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI)).
(12 h)

Unit 2: Drug discovery-Historical perspectives, Current approaches to drug discovery-Rational

Drug design, receptor/target concept in drug designing, Introduction to pharmacogenomics,
Phases of drug discovery: Bioprospecting, Principles of extraction, purification and
characterization of bioactive molecules from natural resources. (12 h)

Unit 3: Search of database/data mining for Drug designing, Preclinical and Clinical trials,
Estimation of toxicity-LD50, Acute, subacuteand chronic toxicity, Rational drug design-principle
(Structure activity relationship‐ SAR) and Tools (applications of High through Put Screening,
Combinatorial synthesis). (12 h)

Unit 4: Regulatory authorities for introduction of medicines in market-Role of Food and Drug
Administration, FDA guidelines for drugs/biologicals, Validation (GMP,GLP, GCP, etc.),
Clinical studies: Phase I, phase II, phase III and phase IV of clinical trials-Objectives, Conduct of
trials, Outcome of trials, Drug distribution in body, bio-availability and pharmacokinetic studies.

(12 h)
Unit 4: Mechanisms of bacterial resistance to host cellular (phagocytosis) and humoraldefences,
Antibiotic/Drug resistance-origin, cause and clinical implication with special references of
multidrug resistant tuberculosis and MRSA.
(12 h)
Total (60 h)

9
References

1. Hugo, WB and Russell, AD. Pharmaceutical Microbiology, (2003). Blackwell Science,

Oxford, UK.
2. Krogsgaard L, Lilijefors T. and Madsen, U. Textbook of Drug Design and Discovery, (2004).
Taylor and Francis, London.
3. Geoffrey Hanlon and Norman Hodges.Essential Microbiology for Pharmacy and
Pharmaceutical Science.(2013).Wiley Blackwell.
4. S. P. Vyas& V. K. Dixit.Pharmaceutical Biotechnology. (2003) CBS Publishers &
Distributors, New Delhi.
5. Bhatia R and Ichhpujani RL. Quality Assurance in Microbiology. (1995). CBS Publishers,
New Delhi.
6. Gregory Gregoriadis. Drug Carriers in Biology & Medicine. (2001). Academic Press New
York.
5. Davis, B. D., Dulbecco, R, Eisen, H. N., Ginsberg, R. S. Microbiology. (1990). Harper and
Row Publishers, Singapore.

10
 7. MicrobesandClean Environment
Objectives:
Strengthening the knowledge of students in the area of microbiological and its allied subjects
research by exposing them to basic and advanced concepts and applications of clean
Environment and make them fit for their effective operations.
LTPC
400 4
Unit1: A tribute to clean environment: The contamination clean up strategy- bioremediation-
bioaugmentation-Aerobic biodegradation pathway-Anaerobic biodegradation pathway-
physicochemical mechanism-Molecular mechanism- Biotechnological invention-
Bioremediation Research studies using designed and developed laboratory bioreactors-
Nanobioremediation.
(14 h)
Unit2: Biological control agents for sustainable agriculture, safe water and soil health:
Brief history of biopesticides- Biopesticides in India- Bio agents- Bioremediation of pesticides in
surface soil treatment unit using microbial consortia- scale up process- Designed and developed
partitioning bioreactor- Mycorhizosphere ecological remediation- Industrial effluent treatment-
GMO’S.(14 h)

Unit3: Food Industry Waste: Food processing industrial waste-solids and liquids-ultimate goal
of green productivity- Zerodischarge-Zero emission- Zero pollution-cost effective production
and application of clean production technology.Fruit and vegetable food processing
sector.Beverage and fermentation sector-Diary industry-Food packaging waste.

(12 h)
Unit 4: Carbon Foot Printing, Ecological Foot Printing, Global Dimming (GD)and Global
warming(GW): Green gases- suspended pollutants-causes of global dimming-burning fossil
fuels- Global warming-comparison of GD and GW- common factors-carbon positive, carbon
negative and neutral-future challenges.
(10 h)
Unit 5: Environmental toxicological studies: Global scenario- Indian scenario-Vehicles-Road
dust-Hotels and Restaurants-Hospitals-Shopping mall-municipal and corporation solid waste
burning-Aiming for eco-friendly, biodegradableproducts-Bioplastics.

(10 h)

Total (60 h)
References:
1. http://www.enviroliteracy.org/625php
2. http;//www.Epa.gov/superfund/site
3. http://www.yale.edu/epi/files/2008EPI-textpdf
4. http://www.yale.edu/esi/ESI 2005 Main-Report.pdf
5. http://www.bact.wise.edu/Microtextbook/index.php.
6. http://www.teachingtools.com/crude energy/Oil environment.htm.
7. http://www.Sfgate.com/cgi-bim/article.

11
 8. Microbiome,Metagenomicsand MolecularTechniques

Objectives
To make students familiar with and can use and apply modern technologies used in microbiome
research.

To use metagenomic data to describe the taxonomic make-up, functional potential and
ecological processes of microbial communities from a range of environments.

To make students familiar with new techniques in genetic engineering.

L TPC
4 0 0 4
UNIT 1:Microbiome : Introduction- History of the study of the microbiome; Describing the
organisms present in the microbiome: 16S rRNA sequencing; Analysis and interpretation of 16S
rRNA sequencing; Extracting Whole genomes from the microbiome – genome sequencing
through PacBio; Culturing organisms of interest from the microbiome: bacteria, fungal and
archaea. Learning the metabolic potential of the microbiome
:Metagenomics. Microbiome- transcriptomics; RNA influencing gene expression: sRNA
sequencing. Functions available in the microbiome- Metaproteomics
(14 h)

Unit 2:Metagenomics: Introduction; Pure culture and in consortium ; Cultivable and Non-
cultivable microbial analysis; Recombination DNA technology and DNA cloning; Types of
vectors, applications of recombination DNA technology; Molecular fingerprinting techniques
(RFLP, T-RFLP, ARISA, DGGE, rDNA library, and FISH); Stable isotope probing (SIP);
Suppressive subtractive hybridization (SSH); Differential expression analysis (DEA);
Microarrays &Metagenome sequencing; Next-generation sequencing approaches to
metagenomics
(12 h)

Unit 3:Cataloging microbes: phylogenetic tree and construction - Construction of a

metagenomic library; Analysis of metagenomiclibraries; Sequence-based metagenomics
Analysis; Functionbasedmetagenomicsanalysis; Phylogenetic analysis and comparative
genomicssoftwares& Tools
(10 h)

Unit 4:Metagenomic analysis of soil microbial communities; Metagenomic analysis of marine

microbial communities; Metagenome of the Microbial Community in acid mine drainage
;Metagenomicanalysis of Bacteriophage; metagenomics and its applications to the study of the
human microbiome; Archaealmetagenomics: Bioprospecting novel genes and exploring new
concepts.
(10 h)

Unit 5: Genetic Engineering – Introduction, Mendelian and non mendelian inheritance, Basics of
r-DNA technology: Enzymes used in r-DNA technology; DNA ligase, DNA polymerase,

12
Klenow fragment, reverse transcriptase, exonuclease, endonuclease, terminal
deoxynucleotidyltransferase, alkaline phosphatase, polynucleotide kinase, and dephosphatases;
restriction modification systems and their types; sticky and blunt end ligation, joining with
linkers, adapters &homopolymer tailing.Recent trends in Molecular Biology Research Targeted
Genome Editing: ZFNs, TALENs, CRISPRs -- Gene Targeting: Knock-ins& Knock-outs --
DNA Finger Printing
(14 h)
Total (60 h)

References
1. Diana Marco Universidad Nacional de Cordoba, Argentina, “Metagenomics: Theory, Methods
and Applications”, Caister Academic Press,2010.
2. Diana Marco Universidad Nacional de Cordoba,Argentina “Metagenomics: Current
Innovations and Future Trends”,Caister Academic Press,2011.
3. Joanna R. Freeland, Heather Kirk, Stephen Petersen, “Molecular Ecology”, McGraw Hill, 2nd
Edition “2012.
4. Beebee T.J.C., D G. Rowe,” An Introduction to Molecular Ecology”, McGraw Hill, 2004.
5.BrownT. A. Gene Cloning and DNA Analysis: An Introduction - 6th Edition - - John Wiley &
Sons
6. Desmond Nicholl S. T. An Introduction to Genetic Engineering - 3rd Edition - - Cambridge
University Press

13
 9. Advanced MarineMicrobiology and Extremophiles

Objectives

 Marine microbes are fundamental players of marine food webs. They mediate in all
fluxes of matter and energy in the oceans. Many important microbes are recorded from
extreme environments from marine habitat.
 The aim of this course is to provide the students with a basic theoretical and practical
understanding of the interactions between microorganisms and ocean processes and
discuss their future role in a rapidly changing planet.
 This advance course will also build up a strong scientific base from the oceanographic
properties and processes affecting microbial life through extensive review of microbial
ecology, role of these microorganisms in global biogeochemical cycles and physiological
adaptations to extreme ecological conditions.
LTPC
4004
Unit 1: Marine Microbial Ecology: Vertical structure and physico-chemical gradients in the
ocean - The physical nature of the ocean (stratification / mixing, light gradients) - Chemical and
biological vertical partitioning -overview on structure and function of microbial communities in
the oceans including discussions on novel methods, results and hypotheses - Current
understanding of microbial diversity - Microbial diversity and evolution - physiology and
interactions with the environment – Microbes in marine sediments - Role of microbes in
biogeochemical cycles. Invasive microbial species - ship ballast water -introduction of alien
species in new ecological areas and their effects.
(12h)
Unit 2: Microbial growth and marine food webs:Marine microbes – bacteria, fungi,
phytoplankton, zooplankton, viruses: Modes of microbial growth: viable but non-culturable
(VBNC) microorganisms, Marine Biofilm, microbial mats, epibiosis. - physiology and
contribution to ocean processes - Marine bacteria and the carbon cycle- UV radiation effects
on microbes and microbial processes- uptake and regeneration of inorganic nutrients by
marine heterotrophic bacteria. Bacterivory: interactions between bacteria and their grazers-
Mixotrophy among pelagic microorganisms.

(12 h)

Unit 3: Marine Symbiotic Microbes and their importance:Symbiosis in marine organisms

with special reference to microbes: Symbiotic marine bacteria with other marine organisms -
Endosymbionts (Ex: Sponge-microbial interaction; sea weedsmicrobes interaction) - Molecular
methods and conventional methods for studying symbiotic bacteria – Marine endophytic fungi
and their significance - Global Ocean Survey of Marine Metagenomics. Methods to study marine
microbial diversity: flow cytometry; molecular approaches such as metagenomics, community
fingerprinting and Fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH).

(12 h)

14
Unit 4: Physiology of marine microbes: Metabolic diversity and energy-yielding processes in
marine microbes: microbial loop - marine snow; phototrophy and primary productivity,
fermentation, aerobic respiration, anaerobic respiration (denitrification, sulphate reduction,
methanogenesis); nitrification, annamox, sulphur oxidation, methanotrophy; carbon dioxide
fixation in autotrophs; the role of microorganisms in biogeochemical cycling: carbon- nitrogen -
phosphorous- sulphur- iron- manganese.

(12 h)
Unit 5: Extremophils : Concept of extremophiles versus conventional microbial forms and
archaea – Genetic basics of adaptation - Anaerobes (Ex: Anaerobrancahorikoshi,
Methanobacteriumthermoautotrophicus) - Microbial communities in Deep sea (piezophilic/
barophilic microorganisms in the deep sea), Aphotic Zone and Hydrothermal vents - Microbial
diversity and factors influencing microorganisms in polar environments: Archaea –
Thaumarchaeota; Bacteria - Glaciecolapsychrophila, Pseudoalteromonashaloplanktis,
Marinomonaspolaris; cyanobacteria – Oscillatoria; fungi and yeast - Glaciozyma Antarctica -
Cellular, structural and physiological characteristics, community interactions and food webs -
Biotechnological importance of extremophilic microorganisms: psychroenzymes, anti-freeze
proteins, novel antibiotics and other bioactive compounds.
(12h)
Total (60)

Reference
1.A practical handbook of seawater analysis. Strickland, J.D.H and Parsons, T.R. Fisheries
Research Board of Canada, Ottawa. (1972).
2.Extremophiles in Deep Sea Enbironments. K. Horikoshi, K. Tsujii. Springer Science &
Business Media.316 pages (1999).

3.Marine Microbiology: Ecology and Applications (C. Munn, Garland Science, 2011)

4.Marine viruses and global climate change. FEMS Microbiology Reviews, 35: 993–1034.
(Danovaro, R., Corinaldesi, C., Dell’Anno, A., Fuhrman, J.A., Middelburg, J.J., Noble, R.T.,
Suttle, C.A. 2011) .

5.Microbial Ecology of the Oceans. (Third Edition).J.M. Gasol and D.L. Kirchman (Editors).
528 pages (2018).

6.Methods of Seawater Analysis (Third Edition). K. Grasshoff; K. Kremling and M. Ehrhardt

Print ISBN:9783527295890 (2007)

7.Polar Microbiology: The ecology, biodiversity and bioremediation potential of microorganisms

in extremely cold environments, Bej, A. K., Aislabie, J. and Atlas, R. M., CRC Press (2009).

8.Extremophiles: Microbial Life in Extreme Environments. Horikoshi, K and Grant, W.D (Eds).
322pp. (1998).

15
 10. Emerging and Re-emerging Microbial Infectious Diseases in India

Objectives:

i. To create an awareness about the re-emerging infectious diseases.

ii. To inculcate the significance of microbiology in the diagnosis and treatment of infectious
diseases.
iii. To learn the molecular diagnostic procedures.

LTPC
4 0 04
Unit 1:Emerging and re-emerging infectious diseases - Epidemiological triad of disease - Factors
contributing to emergence: Agent. Antimicrobial drug resistance, Host and Environmental
factors.Role of Microbiology in diagnosis - Role of public health professionals- Strategies to
reduce threats.

(12 h)

Unit 2:Emerging bacterial diseases - Zoonotic diseases: Leptospirosis, Brucellosis, Anthrax,

Rickettsial diseases - Food and water borne diseases: EnterohaemorrhagicEscherichia coli,
Vibrio cholerae, Listeria monocytogens, Campylobacter spp; Drug resistant bacteria - Drug
resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Drug resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA,
VISA,VRSA, VRE), AMR Neisseria gonnorhoeae; Mellidiosis - Chronic neoplastic diseases :
Helicobacter pylori, Chlamydiae, Pneumoniae.

(12 h)

Unit 3:Emergence of viral diseases: Indian scenario - Nipah virus, Hantavirus, Chikungunya
virus, Human entero virus 7i (EV-7i). Influenza virus, Avian influenza (H5N1), Chandipura
virus, Crimean Congo virus, Haemorrhagic fever, SARS, Coronavirus, Buffalopox, Dengue,
Japanese encepahlitis, Rotaviruses, Noroviruses, Bocaviruses, Parvoviruses B-19.

(12 h)

Unit 4: Emergence of fungal infections - Non albicans candida, Penicilliummarneffi,

Apophysomyces spp., Fusarium, Trichosporon, Curvularia, Alternaria, Zygomyces, Aspergillus,
Pencillosis, Histoplasmosis.

(10h)

Unit 5:Diagnostics: Traditional Microbial typing - Biotyping, Antibiograms, Resistograms and

Bacteriocin typing. Protein analysis, Phage analysis, Chromatographic analysis, Nucleic acid
based typing systems - plasmid analysis, restriction enzyme pattern, Ribotyping, RAPD, Nucleic
acid probes, Branched DNA signal amplification. PCR Methods - RT-PCR, nested PCR
,Mutiplex PCR, broad range PCR, Trancription based amplification system (TAS), Ligase chain

16
Reaction (LCR), Strand displacement amplification (SDA), qβ - replicase system. Current
applications of molecular diagnostics in clinical microbiology, clinical epidemiology and
infection control.

(14h)

Total (60h)

References:

1.Emerging and Re-emerging Infectious Diseases , Subhash Chandra Parija, JaminiKantaDutta,

Tarun Kumar Dutta, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers, Karnataka.

2. Emerging Infectious Diseases and Society, Washer, Palgrave Scholarly, UK

3.Pandemics and Emerging Infectious Diseases, Staniland Hoffman Dingwall, Wiley-Blackwell

Publishers, USA.

4. Emerging infections 6 6th Revised edition Edition, Barbara E. Murray,W. Michael

Scheld,James M. Hughes, American Society For Microbiology, USA.

5.Human Emerging and Re-emerging Infections, 2 Volume Set 1st Edition, Sunit Kumar Singh,
Wiley-Blackwell Publishers, USA

17
 11. Microbial Product Development and Patenting
Objectives:

i. To teach the recent development of products using the microorganisms in industries.

ii. To provide a brief knowledge about the industrial production of organic solvents,
organic acids, antibiotics, enzymes etc. and their applications in industries.
iii. To insist the awareness of patenting.
L TPC
4 004
Unit 1: History and development of microbial products, Isolation, preservation and screening of
microbes used in industries, Strain improvement by mutation, selection and enrichment, Types of
bioreactor-Air lift, acetator, fluid bed reactors. (12 h)

Unit 2: Production of beverages and industrial alcohols, wine and beer, Production of organic
acids-lactic acid, acetone, butanol, citric acid and acetic acid, Production of microbial biomass-
SCP.(12 h)

Unit 3: Industrial production of antibiotics-Penicillin, erythromycin and streptomycin, Bacterial

production of enzymes-protease, cellulose, amylase, Immobilization of enzymes, Development
of biosensors, Biopolymers and EPS, Bioplastics, Biosurfactants, Biopreservatives and its uses.
(12 h)
Unit 4: Role of microorganisms in cheese production-cheddar cheese, blue cheese, camembert
cheese, yogurt, sour cream, Leather processing and development. (10 h)

Unit 5: Basic requirement of patentability, process of patenting, patenting biological materials,

National and International patent laws, Biosafety regulations and assessment of biotechnology
products- drugs/vaccines and GMO, Biosafety protocols-Biological weapons, Principles of
bioethics- ethical conflicts in biotechnology. (14 h)
Total (60 h)
References
1. Glick BR and Pasternak JJ. Molecular Biotechnology-Principles and applications of
recombinant DNA, ASM Press, 2006.
2. Staneberryet al., Fermentation Technology, 1998.
3. Glazer AN, Nikaido H. (1994) Microbial Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Applied
Microbiology WH Freeman and Company, New York.
4. Raledge C. and Kristiansen B Eds. (2001) Basic Biotechnology, 2nd edition, Cambridge
University Press.
5. NdukaOkafor (2007). Modern Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology. 1st Edition:
Science Publishers.
6. Waites, M.J., Morgan, N.L., Rockey, J.S. and Higton, G. (2002). Industrial Microbiology: An
Introduction. Blackwell Science Publishers.

18
 12. Bioentrepreneurship and STARTUPS

Objectives

This course gives the students an oversight as how an idea can lead to a business. The
contents give knowledge into making a business plan, market growth, managingcompetitions,
human resource planning and financing the company.
LTPC
4004

Unit 1:From an idea to a company – developmental stages of a business, innovative business

ideas, benefit to the customer, unique selling proposition (usp), market and competitors,
profitability scenario, protecting your idea, formal presentation of the business idea (12 h)

Unit 2: The business plan-product idea-management team, building a strong team, the founders
and their shares, introducing the team, market and competition, defining your market, choosing
your target market, positioning vis-à-vis competitors, market growth and market life cycle,
competitors analysis (12 h)

Unit 3: Barriers to market entry and patent strategy, designing a strategy to keep the competition
out, patents – essential market entry barriers in the life sciences Marketing and distribution, use
of marketing tools, business organization and processes (12 h)

Unit 4: Human resources planning-make or buy – outsourcing and cooperation agreements,

legal forms, partnerships and joint ventures, location planning - implementation plan,
fundamentals of planning, effective planning, potential consequences of poor planning,
presenting your plans
(12 h)
Unit 5: Finance and financial planning- opportunities and risks, Financing options , financing
planning, using ratios to assess a business Risks , risk assessment and sensitivity analysis,
typical crisis situations of companies, presenting opportunities and risks (12 h)

Total (60 h)
References

1.Bob businessplan handbook 2017

2. www.bestofbiotech.at/content.node/media/bob_businessplan_handbook_2017.pdf

3. The entrepreneur's guide to a biotech startup, 4th edition - uclactsi.

4.Https://www.ctsi.ucla.edu/researcher-resources/files/view/docs/egbs4_kolchinsky.pdf

********

19
 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND SPORTS
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI - 12

REGULATION AND SYLLABI FOR DOCTOR OF

PHILOSOPHY IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION (Ph.D)
(2018-19 Onwards)
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

COURSE NAME OF THE COURSE

1 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICS IN PHYSICAL

EDUCATION
2 SPORTS TECHNOLOGY

3 GENERAL THEORY AND METHODS OF TRAINING

4 HUMAN PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION

5 SPORTS PHYSIOLOGY AND KINESIOLOGY

6 SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIOLOGY

7 SPORTS MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING

8 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY IN SPORTS

9 SPORTS BIOMECHANICS AND ERGONOMICS

10 SPORTS MEDICINE AND REHABILITATION

11 ADAPTED PHYSICAL EDUCATION

12 PRINCIPLES OF MOTOR DEVELOPMENT

13 PRINCIPLES OF YOGIC SCIENCES

14 GAME OF SPECIALIZATION

15 MINI PROJECT

Page 2 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICS IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION

Objectives:
1. To study an overview of research processes
2. To realize the research methodology
3. To understand the concept of statistical tools in research
4. To be appropriate statistical tools in research
5. To understand thesis preparation and to know the SPSS methods.
UNIT–I: Research in Physical Activity
Nature of Research, Unscientific Vs Scientific Methods of Problem Solving, Types of Research,
Overview of Research Process and choosing the title. Literature – Purpose, Sources and Search
techniques.
UNIT–II: Formulating the Method
Principles of planning experiments, Describing Participants, Instruments, Procedures, Design and
Analysis, Sampling Techniques, Research Design, Ethical issues in Research
UNIT–III: Methods of Data collection
Concepts of Statistical Techniques - Types of Data, Assumption Tests, Methods of Establishing
Reliability - Relationship among variables, Multiple Correlation and Chi-square - Using correlation
for prediction (Regression equation)
UNIT–IV: Measurement and Scaling Techniques
Types of Error, Degrees of freedom, Level of Significance - Non-Parametric tests; Man Whitny U
test, Sign Test - Kruskal-Wallis analysis of ranks, Difference among Groups – T-tests, ANOVA,
ANCOVA & Follow-up test, Use of Computers in Statistical Analysis
UNIT–V: Interpretation and Report Writing
SPSS Package – Introduction and application - Organisation of Research Report, Format for
Bibliography - Writing and publishing research articles - Application of computer in research and
statistics
REFERENCES
Clarke, David H. Clarke, Harrison H. Research Process in Physical Education, New Jersey: Prentice
Hall Inc. 1984.
Jerry R. Thomas, Jack K. Nelson and Stephen J. Silverman., Research Methods in Physical Activity
(5th Ed), New York: Human Kinetics. 2005.
Chris Gratton and Ian Jones., Research Methods for Sports Studies, London: Routledge Taylor &
Francis Group, 2004.
Kothari C.R., Research Methodology (2nd Ed), New Delhi: New Age International Pvt., 2004.
K.D. Broota., Experimental Design in Behavioural Research, New Delhi: New Age International
Publishers, 2006.

Page 3 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

SPORTS TECHNOLOGY
Objectives:
1. Introduction and Application of Technology in sports
2. To evaluate the impact of Sports Materials
3. To explore surfaces and its impact on sports
4. To examine the impact of Technology on sports
5. To analyse sports performance using technology
UNIT-I: Sports Technology
Meaning, definition, purpose, advantages and applications, General Principles and purpose of
instrumentation in sports, Workflow of instrumentation and business aspects, Technological impacts
on sports. Use of computer and software in Analysis of competition and Coaching.
UNIT–II: Science of Sports Materials
Adhesives- Nano glue, Nano moulding technology, Nano turf. Foot wear production, Factors and
application in sports, Constraints. Foams- Polyurethane, Polystyrene, Styrofoam, closed cell and
open-cell foams, Neoprene, Foam. Smart Materials – Shape Memory Alloy (SMA), Thermo chromic
film, High-density modelling foam.
UNIT–III: Surfaces of Playfields
Modern surfaces for playfields, Construction and installation of sports surfaces. Types of materials –
synthetic, wood, polyurethane. Artificial turf. Modern technology in the construction of indoor and
outdoor facilities. Technology in manufacture of modern play equipments.
Unit – IV: Modern Equipment
Playing Equipments: Balls: Types, Materials and Advantages, Bat/Stick/ Racquets: Types, Materials
and Advantages. Clothing and shoes: Types, Materials and Advantages. Measuring equipments:
Throwing and Jumping Events. Protective equipments: Types, Materials and Advantages. Sports
equipment with nanotechnology, Advantages and Disadvantages.
UNIT–V: Training Gadgets
Basketball: Ball Feeder, Mechanism and Advantages. Cricket: Bowling Machine, Mechanism and
Advantages, Tennis: Serving Machine, Mechanism and Advantages, Volleyball: Serving Machine
Mechanism and Advantages. Lighting Facilities: Method of erecting Flood Light and measuring
luminous. Video Coverage: Types, Size, Capacity, Place and Position of Camera in Live coverage of
sporting events.
REFERENCE:
Dhinu., M.R. (2017) Sports Technology, Friends Pubication, New Delhi. ISBN -978-81-7216-527-7
John Mongilo, (2001), “Nano Technology 101” New York: Green wood publishing group.
UK: Butterworth Heiremann. Finn, R.A. and Trojan P.K. (1999) “Engineering Materials and their
Applications” UK: Jaico Publisher.
Walia, J.S. Principles and Methods of Education (Paul Publishers, Jullandhar), 1999.
Kochar, S.K. Methods and Techniques of Teaching (New Delhi, Jullandhar, Sterling
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.), 1982
Charles J.A. Crane, F.A.A. and Furness, J.A.G. (1987) “Selection of Engineering Materials”

Page 4 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

GENERAL THEORY AND METHODS OF TRAINING

Objectives
1. To provide knowledge and concept of sports training
2. To develop an understanding of the technical and tactical training
3. To provide the role of sport sciences to achieve the research excellence
4. To apply various training methods and principles for improve performance for various sport
5. To understand and prepare training schedule for research activities
UNIT–I: Introduction of Sports Training
Introduction, Definition and aims of sports training: Characteristics of sports training, training means,
Physical exercises, classification of physical exercises, Physical – technical – tactical – psychological
preparations
UNIT–II: Sports Performance and Skill Teaching-Learning Process
Sports performance: Definition of Sports performance, Performance capacity and training structure,
model of sports performance. Skill teaching and learning process: definition of techniques, skill and
style, types of skills, Teaching of motor skills, skill learning stages, methods of teaching skills,
Methods of corrections, feedback, importance and types of feedback.
UNIT–III: Planning, Training load and Recovery
Planning: Definition, importance, types of plan, principles of planning, planning of competitions,
training sessions, one day plan, micro cycle and meso cycle. Training load: definition and types of
training load, factors of load, classification of training load, load and adaptation, adaptation models,
judgement of load, over training, causes and remedy of over training, Recovery: Definition factors
affecting recovery, means of recovery, and selection of recovery means
UNIT–IV: Periodisation and Principle of Sports Training
Periodisation: Definition, importance, macro cycles and annual plan, Periods, types, aim and contents
of different periods, steps in formulation of annual plan. Principle of sports training: Principle of over
load, progression, specificity, reversibility, individualization, variation, diminishing return, regulation
and its application in training
UNIT–V: Motor Abilities, Control and Regulation of Training Process
Motor Abilities: Strength, Speed, Endurance, Flexibility - Definition, types and factors determining
Motor abilities, Programme designing and methods for the development of Motor abilities. Effect of
climate changes and high altitude on performance – Control and regulation of training process.
Importance, types of control and different motor test for monitoring of training process
References:
Bill Foren, (2001). High Performance Sports Conditioning. USA: Human Kinetics Publishers.
Jensen, C.R. & Fisher A.G. (2000). Scientific Basic of Athletic Conditioning. Philadelphia.
Thomas R. Baechle, & Roger W. Earle, (2000). Essentials of Strength Training and Conditioning
(2nd Ed.). USA: Human Kinetics Publishers.
Cart, E. Klafs & Daniel, D. Arnheim, (1999). Modern Principles of Athletic Training, St. Louis: C.
V. Mosby Company
Tudor O. Bompa, (1999). Periodisation. USA: Human Kinetics Publishers.
Ronald, P. Pfeiffer., (1998). Concepts of Athletics Training (2nd Ed.). London: Jones and Bartlett
Publications
Bunn, J.N., (1998). Scientific Principles of Coaching, New Jersey Engle Wood Cliffs, Prentice Hall
Inc.
Gary, T. Moran, (1997). Cross Training for Sports. Canada: Human Kinetics
Page 5 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

HUMAN PERFORMANCE ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION

Objectives:
1. To study an overview of measurement and evaluation
2. To understand and conduct grading and fitness tests
3. To conduct performance fitness Tests
4. To conduct skill Tests
5. To measure the dependent and independent variables in research.
UNIT–I: Construction of Tests
Nature of Measurement and Evaluation-Domains of Human Performance. Purpose of Measurement,
Testing and Evaluation. Classification of Tests. Criteria for selection and construction of tests-
Reliability, Validity and Objectivity. Qualitative versus Quantitative Measurement.
UNIT–II: Grading and Fitness Test
Grading– Norm-referenced and Criterion-referenced grading systems. Process of Grading,
Consistence in Grading, Grading Mechanics - Fitness test for Senior Citizen. Fitness test for Adapted
Children. Fitness test for Children
UNIT–III: Performance Fitness Tests
Body Composition Assessment. Health Related Physical fitness Assessment Performance Related
Physical fitness Assessment. Postural and Body Alignment Tests Anthropometrical Measures
UNIT-IV: Skill Test in various Games
Basketball, Volleyball, Hockey, Football, and Kho-Kho. Racket Games – Tennis, Table Tennis,
Badminton.
UNIT–V: Measures of Variables
Psychological variables - Physiological Variables Haematological and Bio-chemical Variables.
Psychomotor Variables - Psychosomatic and Socio-economic Variables
REFERENCES
Barrow, Harold M & McGee, Rosemary. A Practical Approach to Measurement in Physical
Education, Philadelphia: Lea and Febiger. 1979.
Safrit, Margaret J. Introduction to Measurement in Physical Education and Exercise Science, St.
Louis: Mosby. 1995.
Edmund O. Acevedo and Michael A. Starks., Exercise Testing and Prescription lab Manual, USA:
Human Kinetics Publishers, 2003.
Roberta E.Rikli&C.Jessie Jones. (2001). Senior Fitness Test Manual, USA: Human Kinetics
Publishers, 2001.
Michael Horvat, Martin E.Block& Luke E.Kelly. (2007). Development and Adapted Physical
Activity Assessment, USA: Human Kinetics Publishers, 2007.
Gregory J.Welk. Physical Activity Assessments for Health Related Research, USA: Human Kinetics
Publishers, 2002.
Vivian H.Heyward& Dale R.Wagner. Applied Body Composition Assessment, USA: Human Kinetics
Publishers, 2004.

Page 6 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

SPORTS PHYSIOLOGY AND KINESIOLOGY

Objectives:
1. To guide training and enhance sport performance.
2. Produce pioneering research applied to coaching.
3. To discover their underlying principles, Safety, effectiveness, and efficiency.
4. Understand the importance of thermoregulation during exercise.
5. Rehabilitation of musculoskeletal, cardiac and neurological conditions.
UNIT–I: Skeletal Muscles and Exercise
Macro &Micro Structure of the Skeletal Muscle, Chemical Composition, Types of Muscle fiber,
Muscle Tone. Nerve supply to muscle, concept of neuromuscular transmission. Sliding Filament
theory of Muscle Contraction, Chemistry of Muscular Contraction –Heat Production in the
Muscle. Effect of exercises and training on the muscular system.
UNIT–II: Cardiovascular System and Exercise
Conduction System of the Heart- Blood Supply to the Heart- Stroke Volume- Cardiac Output.
Blood Flow at rest and during exercise – hemodynamic principle. Heart Rate-Factors Affecting
Heart Rate- Regulation of Heart rate, Cardiac Hypertrophy. Effect of exercises and training on
the Cardio vascular system. Cardiac diseases and therapeutic exercises.
UNIT–III: Respiratory System and Exercise
Mechanism of Breathing –Respiratory Muscles, Pulmonary- Ventilation at Rest and During
Exercise. Exchange of Gases in the Lungs –Exchange of Gases in the Tissues- Control of
Ventilation- Oxygen Debt/ EPOC. Vo2 max: concept, determination and its implication in sports
performance. Effect of exercises and training on the respiratory system.
UNIT–IV: Metabolism and Energy Transfer
Metabolism- ATP-PC or Phosphagen System-Lactic Acid System –Anaerobic Metabolism-
Aerobic Metabolism. Aerobic and Anaerobic Systems during Rest and Exercise. Energy supply
at Short Duration High Intensity Exercises –High Intensity Exercise Lasting Several Minutes-
Long Duration Exercises. Measurement of energy cost of an activity.
UNIT–V: Climatic conditions and sports performance Ergogenic Aid
Variation in Temperature and Humidity- Thermoregulation. Sports performance in hot climate, Cool
Climate, high altitude. Ergogenic Aid - Androstenedione, Beta Blocker, Choline, Creatine, Human
growth hormone on sports performance. Doping agents: Narcotics, Stimulants, Amphetamines,
Caffeine, Ephedrine, Sympathomimetic amines. Stimulants and sports performance.
REFERENCES:
Amrit Kumar, R, Moses. (1995). Introduction to Exercise Physiology. Madras:
Poompugar Pathipagam.
David, L Costill. (2004). Physiology of Sports and Exercise. Human Kinetics.
Fox, E.L., and Mathews, D.K. (1981). The Physiological Basis of Physical Education and Athletics.
Philadelphia: Sanders College Publishing.
Richard, W. Bowers. (1992). Sports Physiology. WMC: Brown Publishers.
William, D. McAradle. (2015). Exercise Physiology, Energy, Nutrition and Human
Performance. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins Company.

Page 7 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)
SPORTS PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIOLOGY

Objectives:
1. To realize impact of perception and personality on sports performance
2. To value of arousal regulation and motivation
3. To apply psychological skill training for sports performance
4. To study of children behaviour and adherence in sports
5. To understand the social issues in sports
UNIT-I: PERCEPTION AND PERSONALITY
Sports psychology: Definition – Importance. Perception: Theories of Perception – Perception and
Motor Learning – Wrong Perception - Personality: Meaning of personality, Measures of personality,
Personality and Sports Performance. Need of Sports Psychology in Physical Education and Sports
UNIT-II: AROUSAL AND MOTIVATION
Arousal: Definition and Regulation- Types and Theories of Aggression – Anxiety – Stress.
Motivation: Types of motivation – Achievement motivation and Sports performance. Counselling in
sports: Importance, Methods & Techniques of Effective sports counselling.
UNIT-III: PSYCHOLOGICAL SKILL TRAINING AND CONCENTRATION
Psychological Skill Training: Hypnosis - Autogenic training - Progressive Relaxation. Sports
Imagery- Self confidence: Building self-confidence. Concentration: connecting concentration to
optimal performance – improving concentration.
UNIT-IV: EXERCISE BEHAVIOUR AND ADHERENCE
Exercise Behaviour and Adherence: reason to exercise and for not exercising, Problem of exercise
adherence. Children and Sports Psychology: children’s reasons for participation and nonparticipation,
Parent, Coach and friends role in sports participation.
UNIT-V: SPORTS SOCIOLOGY
Sports Sociology: Group interaction -Competition and Cooperation in sports, Leadership: Types and
Style, Audience: Types and effects of audience in sports competitions, National and International
integration through sports
REFERENCES:
Robert S. Weinberg. Daniel Gould. Foundation of Sport and Exercise Psychology (6th Ed,). Human
Kinetics, 2015.
Daniel Smith, Michael Bar-Eli. Essential Readings in Sport and Exercise Psychology. Human
Kinetics, 2007 .
Janet Buckworth, Rod K. Dishman. Exercise Psychology, Human Kinetics, 2002.
Nick Ford and David Brown, Surfing and Social Theory, Routledge Taylor and Francis Group, 2006.
Diane L. Gill. Psychological Dynamics of Sport. New York: Human Kinetics Publishers Inc. 1986.
Kamlesh, M. L. Psychology of Physical Education and Sports. Metropolitan Book Co. Pvt. Ltd.
1983.

Page 8 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

SPORTS MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING

Objectives:
1. To management function and marketing techniques
2. To identify issues relevant to modern physical education and sport management
3. To construct and laying the play field facilities
4. To Identify and analyze ethical, legal, and socio-cultural issues, and formulate responses for
use in managerial decision making and policy determinations in sport
5. To understand principles of planning, and financial and human resource management
Unit-I: Management and Functions
Meaning of Management - Definition and importance of Sports management - Concept and principles
of Management - Functions of Management - Personal Management, objectives and personal policies
- Skills of Management, Roles of Manager
Unit–II: Sports Organisation
Attributers of Organization - Classifying Organizations - Organisation and functions of sports bodies
Supervision: Qualities of Supervisor - Supervisory Techniques

Unit–III: Physical Education Administration

Maintenance of Records and Registers - Preparation of Budgeting, Generate and utilization of Games
Fund - Qualification and Quality of Administrator - Management guidelines for School, College
sports programmes - Programme management and factors influencing programme
development.Community based physical education and sports programmes
Unit–IV: Facility and Equipment Management
Indoor-Outdoor Sports Facilities - Equipment Management, purchase, care of supplies equipment.
Guidelines for selection of equipment and supplies - Guidelines for checking, storing, issuing, caring
and maintenance of supplies and equipment - Laying of Play Fields - Tournament Types
Unit–V: Sports Administration and Marketing
Organization of Sports Events - Management of infrastructure, equipment, finance and personnel -
Writing of Circulars, Notifications and Invitations - Publicity and Fund Raising - Report preparation
of sports event - Selecting and Fixing of Officials - Writing Reports, Monitoring and Writing Up –
Press - Sponsoring Teams and public relationship in sports - Principles of public relation and the
media- Audit management of sports events - Factors in Sports Marketing - Sports Sponsorship -
SWOT Analysis
References
Chelladurai .P. Managing organizations for Sports and Physical Activity, Holcomb Hathaway
Publishers: Arizona, 2001.
David C. Watt, Sports Management and Administration, Routledge Taylor & Francis Group, 2004.
Lisa Pike Masteralexis, Carol A. Barr and Mary A. Hums, Principles and Practice of Sports
Management, Jone and Bartlett Publishers, 2005.
Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Pearson Education. Inc, 2003.
Hoye, R. (2012). Sport management, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon: Routledge. ISBN-13:
9781856178198, ISBN-10: 1856178196
Bowers, M. (2015). Sport management, Champaign: Sagamore Publishing.ISBN10: 1571677267.
ISBN-13: 978-1571677266
Krotee, M., & Bucher, C. (2007). Management of physical education and sport, Boston: McGraw-
Hill.ISBN-10: 0072972920. ISBN-13: 978-0072972924

Page 9 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)
INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY IN SPORTS
Objectives:
1. To understand all the fundamental of computers and its uses.
2. To develop communication knowledge using Multimedia.
3. To Apply MS Office application in the field of physical Education.
4. To provide an opportunity in approach to Integrating ICT in Teaching Learning Process.
5. To acquire multimedia Technology and its application in sport.
UNIT–I: Fundamentals of Computers
Characteristics, Types, Functions, Advantages & Applications of Computers. Hardware of Computer:
Input, Output & Storage Devices. Software of Computer: Concept & Types application in Physical
Education and Sport. Concepts, Types & Functions of Computer Networks, Internet and its
applications, Web Browsers & Search Engines, Legal & Ethical Issues.
UNIT–II: Communication & Classroom Interaction
Concept, Elements, Process & Types of Communication, Communication Barriers & Facilitators of
Communication and cloud computing. Communicative Skills in English - Listening, Speaking,
Reading & Writing.
UNIT–III: MS Office Applications
Word: Main Features & their uses in Physical Education. Excel: Main Features & their applications in
Physical Education. Access: Creating a Database, Creating a Table, Queries, Forms & Reports on
Tables and its Uses in Physical Education. Power Point: Preparation of Slides with Multimedia
Effects, MS Publisher: Newsletter & Brochure.
UNIT–IV: ICT Integration in Teaching Learning Process
Concept & Importance of ICT, Need of ICT in Education, Scope of ICT: Teaching - Learning
Process, Publication, Evaluation, Research and Administration. Challenges in Integrating ICT in
Physical Education. Approaches to Integrating ICT in Teaching Learning Process.
UNIT–V: Multimedia Technology Application
Project Based Learning (PBL), Co- Operative Learning, Collaborative Learning. ICT and
Constructivism: A Pedagogical Dimension. E-Learning, Web Based Learning, Visual Classroom.
REFERENCES:
B. Ram, New Age International Publication, Computer Fundamental, Third Edition-2000
Brain under IDG Book. India (p) Ltd Teach Yourself Office 2000, Fourth Edition- 2001
Douglas E. Comer, The Internet Book, Purdue University, West Lafayette in 2005
Heidi Steel Low price Edition, Microsoft Office Word 2003- 2004
ITL Education Solution Ltd. Introduction to information Technology, Research and Development
Wing-2006
Pradeep K. Sinha & Priti. Sinha. Foundations computing , BPB Publications -2004.
Rebecca Bridges Altman Peach pit Press, Power point for window, 2002
Sanjay Saxena, Vikas Publication House, Pvt. Ltd. Microsoft Office for everyone, Second Edition.

Page 10 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

SPORTS BIOMECHANICS AND ERGONOMICS

Objectives:
 To gain a better understanding of the cause-effect mechanisms of sports motions
 Understanding of knowledge of Ergonomics is to improve working conditions, work tools and
work structuring in order for the optimum result to be achieved from the work and the person
at work to suffer as few setbacks as possible.
 To explain the concept of mechanical laws involved in human motion.
 Apply and analyze the factors of mechanical laws involved in human movement
 Analyze the mechanical principles of motor skills and sports related skills along with their
proper techniques and corrective measures

UNIT–I: Introduction of Sports Biomechanics and Ergonomics

History, meaning and definitions of Sports Biomechanics – brief history, meaning and definition of
ergonomics and sports ergonomics – need and importance of biomechanics in physical education and
sports – need and importance of sports ergonomics – organisation of ergonomics – Principles of
ergonomics

UNIT–II: Kinematics and Kinetics

Definition of Kinematics and Kinetics – Static and dynamic – vector and scalar measurements – Law
of kinetics – types of kinetics – types of kinematics – Types of motion - Newton’s law of motion –
Distance and Displacement – impulse and momentum – Torque, mass and weight – impact and
elasticity - Application of kinetics and Kinematics in sports

UNIT–III: Forces and Lever

Force: Meaning, units of force, effects of force/Sources of Force, Components and Resultant, Friction,
Pressure. Movement of Force, magnitude of forces, centrifugal and centripetal forces – Friction force
– classes of Levers – center of gravity – center of mass – line of gravity – kinetic and potential energy
- Work, Power and Energy

UNIT–IV: Fluid Mechanism and Projectile Motion

Freely failing bodies, Projectiles, Equilibrium principles, factors affecting Stability – fluid mechanism
– Characteristics and nature of fluids - Buoyancy – dynamic fluid force – relative motion – specific
weight – drag and lift forces - initiating rotation in the air, water resistance and air resistance –
Laminar and turbulent blow – aerodynamics - principles and types of spin and Magnus effect

UNIT–V: Movement analysis and Ergonomics

Analysis of fundamental skills: Walking, Running, Jumping, Throwing, Lifting, Pulling, Pushing,
Catching, and Climbing - Analysis of Sports Skills: Athletics, Gymnastics, Swimming, Football,
Hockey, Basketball, Volleyball and Cricket – analysis of external forces and their effects on the body
and its movements - Ergonomics in health and safety – Ergonomics in physical activity and its effect
on health – Video analysis of biomechanics principles in sports
REFERENCES:
Bartlett, R. (2007). Introduction to sports biomechanics. London: Routledge, Taylor & Francis
Group. ISBN 9780415339933
Blazevich, A. (2007). Sports biomechanics. London: A. & C. Black. ISBN 9780713678710
Carr, Gerry, sports mechanics for coaches new York human kinetics, 2004.
Hall, S. (2014) Basic biomechanics. Mcgraw Hill Higher Educat. ISBN 9780073522760
McGinnis, P. (2013). Biomechanics of sport and exercise. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics. ISBN
9780736079662
Peter m. McGinnis, Biomechanics Of Sports And Exercises, USA, Human Kinatics, 1999.
Williams M (1982) Biomechanics of Human Motion, Philadelphia, Saunders Co.

Page 11 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

SPORTS MEDICINE AND REHABILITATION

Objectives:
1. To understand the sports injuries
2. To understand and application of therapeutic modalities
3. To develop rehabilitation programme for sports injuries.
4. To develop rehabilitation programme for lower body sports injuries.
5. To apply massage and First aid techniques in sports arena.
UNIT-I: ATHLETIC INJURIES AND PREVENTION
Sports Medicine: Definition and Importance. Common types of Athletic injuries: Skin Injuries - Soft
Tissue injuries – Thermal injuries – Bone Injuries - General Principles of Injury Prevention. RICE –
PRICE procedure for minor injuries.
UNIT-II: THERAPEUTIC MODALITIES
Therapeutic Exercise - Therapeutic Modalities: Cold Modalities: Ice Packs, Ice Immersion, Ice
massage, Cryostretch - Heat Modalities: Moist Hot Packs, Paraffin Baths - Electrical Modalities:
Ultrasound, Shortwave Diathermy, Microwave Diathermy:
UNIT-III: ATHLETIC REHABLITATION
Sports Rehabilitation - Shoulder girdle injuries and Rehabilitation: Clavicle Fracture -
Acromioclavicular joint sprain - Shoulder joint Dislocations - Tennis elbow- Head and Spine Injuries.
UNIT-IV: LOWER BODY INJURIES AND REHABILITATION
Leg-ankle injuries causes and Rehabilitation: shin pain, Achilles tendonitis, Ankle sprains. Knee
injuries: Knee dislocation, Thigh injuries: Quadriceps contusion, Hamstring strain
UNIT-V: FIRST AID AND MASSAGE
Massage - Types of Manipulation Techniques - First Aid: Definition – Importance. Primary Survey
(Airway, Breathing, circulation) Rescue breathing – CPR. First aid for Strain – Sprain – Drowning –
Haemorrhage – Electrical shock - Food poison.
References:
Larry J. Durstine and Geoffrey E. Moore, Exercise Management for Person with Chronic Diseases
and Disabilities (2nd Ed,), USA: Human Kinetics, 2003.
David R. Mottran, Drugs in Sport (5th Ed.,), Routledge Taylor and Francis Group, 2011.
C.S. Jeyaprakash, Sports Medicine, J.P. Brothers, New Delhi, 2003.
Melinda J. Flegel, Sports First Aid (5 th Ed,), USA: Human Kinetics, 2014.
William C. Whiting and Ronald F. Zernicke, Biomechanics of Musculoskeletal Injury, USA: Human
Kinetics, 1998.
Bengt O. Eriksson et al., Sports Medicine, Guinness Publications, 1990.

Page 12 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

ADAPTED PHYSICAL EDUCATION

Objectives:
1. To understand the sports injuries
2. To understand and application of therapeutic modalities
3. To develop rehabilitation programme for sports injuries.
4. To develop rehabilitation programme for lower body sports injuries.
5. To apply massage and First aid techniques in sports arena.
UNIT–I: Introduction to Adapted Physical Education
Adapted Physical Education: Definition – History –Need and Importance. Adopted sports: Purpose –
aims – Goals . Principles, Practices and Creativity physical activities/programmes in special children.
UNIT–II: Identification and causes of specific diseases
Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder : Meaning, Symptoms, Causes and Treatment. Meaning of
Autism and its Signs Symptoms & Causes. Emotional disturbance: Characteristics, Causes and
Treatment. Specific learning disabilities: Common types of learning disabilities their causes,
treatment and intervention. Amputations & its types and dwarfism: types, causes, diagnosis and
treatment
UNIT-III: Class organization
Class organization strategies: identifying the cause, embrace special needs, setting high expectations
and goals. Managing individual programmes: specially designed instructions, programme
modifications, classroom accommodations, supplementary aids and services, transportation.
Monitoring students performances: Purpose and Implementation Organizing the instructional
environment.
UNIT–IV: Paralympics Sports
History of Paralympics. Paralympics events: list of IPC summer and winter sports. Rules and
regulations. Eligibility criteria: medical classification & functional classification.
UNIT–V: Organization & Administration
Types and Needs. Kinds of Programme, Importance of Physical education. Talent identification
programme for special needs children. Factors of Communication with Parents and Public.
REFERENCES
Alexander, M. & Schwager, S. (2012) Meeting the physical education needs of children with
autism
spectrum disorder. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics
Bielenberg, K. (2008) All active 35 inclusive physical activities. Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics,
Block, M. 2007) A teacher’s guide to including students with disabilities in general physical
education. 3rded. Baltimore, MD: Brookes Publishing Co.
Canales, L & Lytle, R. (2011) Physical activities for young people with severe disabilities.
Champaign, IL:Human Kinetics.
Davis, R. (2002) Inclusion through sports: A Guide to enhancing sport experiences. Champaign,
IL: HumanKinetics.
Davis, E. A. (2012) Physical activities in the wheelchair and out: An illustrated guide to
personalizing
participation. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics

Page 13 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

PRINCIPLES OF MOTOR DEVELOPMENT

Objectives:
1. To understand the motor components.
2. To understand the growth and development.
3. To analyse and apply the knowledge of motor skills to identify the movements.
4. To study the neurophysiological basis of movement.
5. To study the genetics and motor skills along with motor skill assessment.
UNIT–I: Introduction to Motor Development
Definition-Motor Development, Motor Learning, Moto Control, Physical growth, Maturation and
Aging- Newell’s Model of Motor Development-Theoretical perspectives in Motor Development -
Principles of Motion and Stability - Classification of Motor Activities.

UNIT-II: Growth and Development

Prenatal and Postnatal Development-Development of the cardio respiratory system, Skeletal System,
Muscular System, Adipose System, Endocrine System and Nervous System-Growth in Stature and
Body Weight- Chronological age and age groups.

UNIT-III: Motor Skills

Movements of Infant - Motor Milestones-Development of human Locomotion: Creeping, Crawling,
Walking and Running-Development of Ballistic Skills: Throwing, Kicking, Punting and Striking-
Development of Manipulative Skills: Grasping, Reaching, catching and anticipation.

UNIT-IV: Neurological Basis of Movement

Motor Units and Electromyography – Motor Synergies – Motor Disorders - Sensory-Perceptual
Development: Visual, Kinesthetic, Auditory and Intermodal perception- Development of Postural
control and Balance.

UNIT-V: Genetics and Growth

Genetic Regulation of Growth: The Human Genome and Gene, Types of hormone and their actions-
Physical Activity as a factor in Growth, maturation and Performance - Motor Skill Assessment (BOT-
2 & Bayley Motor Skill Test).

REFERENCES
Allen W. Burton., & Daryl E. Miller. (1998).Movement Skill Assessment.USA: Human Kinetics.
Kathleen M.Haywood., & Nancy Getchell. (2014). Life Span motor Development(6thEd.,).USA:
Human Kinetics,
Robert M. Malina., Claude Bouchard.,&Oded Bar-Or. (2004). Growth, Maturity and Physical
Activity(2ndEd.,).USA: Human Kinetics.
Claude, Bouchard., Steven N. Blair., & William L. Haskell. (2007). Physical Activity and
Health.USA: Human Kinetics.
Cratty Bryant, J. (1975). Movement Behaviour and Motor Learning. Philadelphia Lea &Febiger.
Mark L. Latash. (2008). Neurophysiological Basis of Movement (2nd Ed.,).USA: Human Kinetics.

Page 14 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

PRINCIPLE OF YOGIC SCIENCE

Objectives:
1. To well known about Yoga foundation and its principles
2. To understand the principles and concept of yoga sutra
3. To understand and apply yogic practices for research activities
4. To integrate yoga for enhancement of sports performance
5. To apply yogic sciences to human systems for conducting research activities
UNIT I: Foundation of Yoga
Origin of Yoga – History (epic and modern) and Development of Yoga - Meaning and Definition of Yoga
- Aim and Objectives of Yoga - Nature and Principles of Yoga – Concept of Yoga - International Day of
Yoga – Yogic principles of healthy living – Yoga for health and wellbeing – Elements of yoga
UNIT II: Principles and Concept of Yoga Sutra
Ashtanga Yoga: Concept of Yama, Niyama, Asana, Pranayama, Pratyahara, Dharana, Dhyana and
Samadhi and their usefulness - Yogic concept of diet and its relevance in the management of lifestyle -
Types and nature of Samadhi - Four types of Karmas – Patanjali’s eight limbs of yoga sutra principles
UNIT III: Yogic Practices and its Applications
Benefits and Practicing Asana: Asnas Standing Postures - Prone postures - Supine postures - Balancing
postures - Yoga asana and its values; Pranayama: Types, benefits and methods - Nadis: Meaning,
methods and benefits; - Breath awareness - Sectional breathing - Nadishuddhi, Bhastrika, Ujjai, Cooling
pranayama (Sitali, Sitkari and Sadanta), Bhramari, Pranayama (with Antar & Bahya Kumbhaka);
Meditation: Pranav and Soham Japa - Yoga Nidra (1,2,3), Antarmauna, Ajapa Dharana (Stage 1,2,3) -
Breath Meditation and Om Meditation; Kriya: Concept of Kriya Yoga of Patanjali - Dhauti (Kunjal),
Vastra dhauti, Danda dhauti, Laghoo and Poorna sankhaprakshalana - Neti (Sutra and Jala) – Kapalbhati -
Agnisara - Nauli Bandhas and Mudras: Jivha Bandha, Jalandhara Bandha, Uddiyana Bandha, Mula
Bandha, Maha Bandha, Yoga Mudra, Maha Mudra, Shanmukhi Mudra, Tadagi Mudra, Vipareet Karni
Mudra Chakras: Major Chakaras - Benefits of clearing and balancing Chakras; Surya namaskar
UNIT IV: Applications of Yoga
Yoga in education – Yoga for stress management – Yoga for personality development - Integrated
approach of Yoga Therapy in the treatment of diseases - Yoga Supplemental Exercises - Yoga
Compensation Exercises - Yoga Regeneration Exercises - Power Yoga - Role of Yoga in Psychological
Preparation of athletes: Mental Wellbeing, Anxiety, Depression, Concentration and Self-Actualization –
management of diseases through yogic practices
Unit V: Yoga Science and Human Systems
Effect of Yoga on Physiological System: circulatory, musculo-skeletal, digestive, nervous, excretory;
effect of yoga on cardiovascular and respiratory systems; Yoga impact on immune and reproductive
systems – yoga and its impact on allied sciences: Behavioral psychology, personality, cognitive
psychology and mental wellbeing - Effects of Kundalini Shakti and Shatchakra Sadhana
REFERENCES:
Authors Guide (2015), International Day of Yoga, Common Yoga Protocol, New Delhi: Ministry of
AYUSH, Government of India.
George Feuerstein. (1975).Text Book of Yoga. London: MotilalBansaridass Publishers (P) Ltd.,
Gore.(1990). Anatomy and Physiology of Yogac Practices.Lonavala: KanchanPrkashan.
Helen Purperhart (2004) The Yoga Adventure for Children. Netherlands: AHunter House Book.

Page 15 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

Iyengar, B. K. S. (2000). Light on Yoga. New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers.

Kuvalyananda Swami & S.L. Vinekar.(1963). Yogic Therapy – Basic Principles and Methods. New
Delhi: Govt of India, Central Health Education and Bureau.
Kenghe.C.T. (1976). Yoga as Depth-Psychology and para-Psychology (Vol-I): Historical Background,
Varanasi: BharataManishai.
Moorthy .A.M &Alagesan.S. (2004).Yoga Therapy. Coimbatore: Teachers Publication House.
Swami SatyanandaSaraswathi. (1984). Kundalini and Tantra. Bihar: Yoga Publications Trust.
Swami Kuvalayananda. (1998). Asanas.Lonavla: Kaivalyadhama.
Swami Satyananda Sarasvati. (1989). Asana Pranayama Mudra Bandha.Munger: Bihar School of Yoga,
Swami Sivananda. (1971). The Science of Pranayama. Chennai: A Divine Life Society Publication,
Tiwari. O .P. (1998). Asanas-Why and How. Lonavla: Kaivalyadhama.
Thirumalai Kumar. S and Indira .S(2011) Yoga in Your Life, Chennai: The Parkar Publication.
Khalsa, M., & Bhajan,. (2008). Meditations for addictive behavior. Minneapolis, MN: I Was There
Press.ISBN-10: 0979919215. ISBN-13: 978-0979919213
Lysebeth, A. (1979). Pranayama, the yoga of breathing. London: Unwin Paperbacks.ISBN10:
0041490509. ISBN-13: 978-0041490503
PanVdVaW, N. (2003). Meditation. New Delhi: D.K. Printworld.ISBN-10: 8124602115 ISBN13: 978-
8124602119
Ramacharaka,. (2009). The science of breath. Waiheke Island: Floating Press.ISBN10: 1508983704.
ISBN-13: 978-1508983705
Desikachar, T. (1999). The heart of yoga. Rochester, Vt.: Inner Traditions International.ISBN13: 978-
0892817641. ISBN-10: 089281764X
Iyengar, B. (1979). Light on yoga. New York: Schocken Books.ISBN-10: 0805210318. ISBN13: 978-
0805210316
Kaminoff, L., & Matthews, A. (2012). Yoga anatomy. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.ISBN10:
1450400248. ISBN-13: 978-1450400244

Page 16 of 17
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI I - 627 012
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Ph.D. Physical Education – Course work Syllabus
(with effect from the academic year 2018-19 onwards)

GAME OF SPECIALIZATION
Objectives:
1. To define and acquaint training preparation of Game/Sport
2. To employ the rules and regulation of Game/Sport
3. To emphasis on preparation for the Game/Sport.
4. To acquaint the student with progressive teaching stages of fundamentals skills of Game/Sport.
5. To orient & employ the rules and regulation in organization of competition in Game/Sport.

Unit – I: Introduction (Growth and Development)

Origin and development, Layout and marking of play filed/ground/courts and measurement of
equipments used in Game/Sport.
UNIT–II: Techniques/Skills Development
Classification of techniques/skills. Training for mastery in technique/skill. Tactics and
Strategy of Offensive and defence. Various playing position- System of play. Offensive and
defensive system of play. Fitness – General – Specific training programme, Drills,
Recreational and lead up games.
UNIT–III: Training (Means and Methods)
Training methods and means for the development of motor abilities, Basic Concept of
preparation of training schedules, Tactical training in game/sport. Psychological preparation
required during competition in game/sport. Periodization in training of players in game/sport.
General/specific fitness tests and performance/skill test in game/sport.
UNIT–IV: Test Measurement and Evaluation
Importance of test, Measurement and Evaluation of game Performance. Fitness and Skill tests,
Subjective and Objective Knowledge tests, Periodical assessment of performance. Analysis of
team performance.
UNIT–V: Awards and Tournaments
Organization set up – Federation – International, National, State, District Sports federations &
its affiliated units – Tournaments – World Championship, Olympics games, Commonwealth
games, Asian Games and other International and Domestic tournaments. Awards and
Honours.

REFERENCES:
Thomas Hanlon., (2010) The Sports Rules book (5th Edition) Human Kinetics, Champaign,
IL, United States
R.G. Goel., Gaurav Goel., (2003) Encyclopedia of Sports and games. (Twelfth edt.,) Vikas
Publishers., New Delhi.
Sunil.kumar., Sharma.O.P., (2013) Encyclopedia of Sports and games. Khel Sahitya Kender., ISBN:
9788175247246, 817524724X
The Diagram Group., (1994) Rules of the game: The complete illustrated encyclopedia of all
the sports of the world, Turtleback Books

Page 17 of 17
 Manonmaniam Sundaranar University
Ph.D Social Work Programme
Course Work Syllabus

Hours /
S.No Course Title Credits
Week
Core- I : Advanced Social Work
1 4 4
Research and Teaching Methodology

2 Core- II : Contemporary Social Work 4 4

Project Oriented Electives:

1. Human Resources Management
2. Family & Child Welfare
3
3. Community Development
4 4
4. Medical and psychiatric Social
Work

1
Course Title: ADVANCED SOCIAL WORK RESEARCH AND TEACHING
METHODOLOGY
Core : 1 LTPC
4 0 0 4
Objectives:
 To strengthen the understanding of research methods.
 To help them conceptualize research projects.
Unit I
Basics of social Research: Natural and social science, Scientific Method: concept of
research, components, concept, scope and ethics, approaches, characteristic and purposes,
logic and techniques of research: ontology, epistemology, grounded theory. Theory,
facts, concept constructs Variables and Hypothesizes, Research Problem, Identification
and Formulation. (10 L)
Unit II
Social work Research: meaning, objectives, scope, process, integrating research and
social work practice. Research Design: meaning, component and importance of typology
of research design, cross sectional and longitudinal studies, case studies, participatory and
rapid assessment procedure; single subject research process, types. Qualitative research
meaning, scope, characteristics, strategies, criteria: methods of qualitative research:
ethnography, focus group discussion, life history (oral and narrative) and content analysis
– use and limitations. (14 L)
Unit III
Sources of data – Primary and secondary, online journals and resources, Research tools –
interview schedule, guide, questionnaire & case study- Scaling techniques – L.L.
Thurstone and Likert Scale - reliability and validity - Methods of data collection –
observation, interview. Sampling – need, Types and procedures. Determination of sample
size. Sampling error. Preparation of research proposal, Report writing, communicability
of research, Quantitative research: Meaning, types, quantitative vs quantitative research
triangulation and are protocols. Action Research, Mixed methods Evidence based
research. Evaluation Research in social work: Multiple study design, impact study, cost
benefit analysis, social impact analysis, use of evaluation research (14 L)

Unit IV
Data Analysis: Analysis of quantitative data: meaning, scope, and limitations of
statistics. Data types, summation, organization and presentation of data, frequency
distribution, tabulation and diagrammatical and graphical presentation. Correlation:
Simple, Partial and Multiple. Regression: Linear, stepwise and multiple methods of
hypothesis Testing parametric and non- parametric tests. Chi – square; time series
analysis (students may be given a brief orientation /introduction on ANOVA, ANCOVA,
MANOVA, index number, cluster analysis, factor analysis, path analysis and logistic
regression ) Packages for Data Analysis. Analysis of qualitative data: data reduction,
2
data display and conclusion, interpretation, explanation and theorization. Research
proposal and Reporting Research: structure of research report – audience - writing
quantitative and quantitative report, referencing. (14 L)
Unit – V Methodology of Teaching (8 L)
Teaching – Objectives of Teaching, phases of Teaching – Teaching methods: lecture
method, discussion method, discovery learning, Inquiry, Problem solving method, project
method. Seminar – Integrating ICT in teaching: Individualised instruction, ways for
effective presentation with power points, documentation – Evaluation; formative,
summative & continuous and comprehensive Evaluation. Later Adolescent Psychology;
meaning, physical, cognitive, emotional, social and moral development – Teaching later
adolescents.
(Total 60 L)
References
1. Anderson, J. Durtson H.S & Pooram (1992) Thesis and Assignment writing; Wiley
Eastern Ltd, New Delhi.
2. Antony Giddens & Jonathan H Turner (1987) Social Theory today, (eds) Polity press
in assn with basil Blac, Cambridge.
3. Baper, L.T (1998) Doing Social Research, McGraw Hill, Singapore, Beverly Hills
4. Brymen, Alan & Duncan Cramer (1990) Qualitative Data Analysis for Social
Scientists, Rutledge London
5. Champion,D.J. (2000) Basic Statistics for Social Research(Section, Chandler)
6. Denzin K Norman & Lincolin S Yuonna (2000), Hand Book of Qualitative research,
sage publications, New Delhi
7. DEnzin Norman & Lincoln S Yuonna, Collecting and interpreting qualitative
materials, sage publications, New Delhi
8. Denzin Norman (1978) The research Act, MCGraw Hill
9. Goode & Hatt (1952) Methods in social research, MCGraw Hill
10. Gupta S.P (1992) Elementary Statistical methods, sultan chand & sons, New Delhi
11. Klaus Klippendorff (1996) content analysis, An introduction to its methodology sage
12. Kothari .C.R(2013) Research methodology, methods and technique, New Age Pub.

13. Laldas D.K (2000) Practice of Social Research Rawat, Jajpur

14. Morgan David. L (1996) Focus Group, Annual Review of Sociology.
15. Ramachandran, P. (1993) Survey research for social work: A Primewr, TISS,
Bombay
16. Richard. G…, et al, (2004) Scaling Procedure – issues and applications, sage
publications New Delhi

3
17. Singleton, Royee JR., et al, (1986) Approaches to Social Research, Oxford University
Press, New Delhi
18. Singh. K (2007)Qualitative Social research method, Sage publishers

19. Wilkinson & Bandarker (1984) Methodology and Techniques of Social Research,
Himalaya , Bombay
20. Young Pauline V (1960) Scientific social surveys and research, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey
21. Sampathkumar, K,Panneerselvam, A.&Santhanam,S.1984.Introduction to educational
technology 2nd revised ed. Sterling Publishers, New Delhi.
22. Sharma, S.R.2003. Effective classroom teaching modern methods, tools and
techniques. Mangal Deep publishers, Jaipur.
23. Vedanayagam, E.G.1989. Teaching technology for college Teachers, Sterling
publishers, New York.

4
 Course Title: CONTEMPORARY SOCIALWORK

Core No: 2 LTPC

4 0 0 4
Objectives:
 To enable students to learn about the profession of social work and its importance.
 To develop the knowledge of students about fields of social work, its practice and
application.
 To develop an insight in students about various theories of social work.
Unit I
Social Work – A profession in changing contexts – Macro-level contexts – Meso-level
contexts – Micro-level contexts – values, ethics & empowerment. Social realities and
responsibilities of professional social workers. Theories related to social group work and
community development (10 L)
Unit II
New directions for social work: Interdependence – Reciprocity, Citizenship and social
justice. Radical social work – roots – radical social work diaspora – feminist social work
practice – issues. Intervention paradigms – the four forces of social work: Psycho
dynamic paradigms, cognitive/behavioral/communication paradigms,
experiential/Humanistic/Existential/paradigm, transpersonal paradigms. (10 L)
Unit III
The strengths approach to social work practice: Guidelines for strength assessment -
assessment process: Defining the problem situation, framework for assessment, the
strength model - Approach with individual, group and community –. Social problems
relating to Ageing, Transgender, human rights, unemployment, gender issues, communal
riots, drug abuse, de-addiction, alcoholism, child labour, poverty, illiteracy, crime and
violence, juvenile delinquency, victims of trauma, substance abuse. (14 L)
Unit IV
Crisis Intervention - crisis and stress - techniques of crisis intervention - Crisis
Intervention Model - Bereavement of loss – A frame work for understanding, coping with
catastrophe. Task centered functions – Phases – Issues - psycho-social approach -
Behavioral social work – Benefits and techniques - A frame work for social work
practices - constructive social work approach - Application & limitations. (12 L)
Unit V
Models and Theories in social work: The problem solving model - The Psycho-social
therapy model - Functional model – Behavior Modification Model –– Task centered case
work model – Holistic model - Therapeutic model - Psycho analytic theory - Marxist
Theory -Feministic theory - Cognitive – behavioral theory – Psycho-dynamic theory –
Ecosystem - system theory - Role theory - Gestalt theory, CBT to social work –
Attachment theory & social relationship. (14 L)
(Total 60 L)

5
REFERENCES:
1. Adams Robert, Dominelli, Lena & Payne Malcolm (1998): Social work themes,
issues and critical Debates – Palgrave, New York.
2. Alexander, Leslie B.(1972) Social work's Freudian deluge: myth or reality?, Social
Service review.
3. Balgopal, Pallasana R. and Thomas Vassil (1983) Groups in social work: An
Ecological Perspectives, Macmillan, New York.
4. Bandura, Albert (1977) Social learning theory (Englewood cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall)
5. Barker L. Robert (1987) Social Work Dictionary, National Association of social
Workers, Mary Land.
6. Bino W.R.(1961) Symbolic interactionism: perspective and method (Englewood
cliff, new Jersy, prentice-Hall)
7. Brake, Mike and Roy Bailey (eds) (1980) Radical social work and practice
(Edward Arnold, London)
8. Charles A. Glisson et.al, 2012, Social Work Practice with Groups, Communities,
and Organizations: Evidence-Based Assessments and Interventions, John Wiley &
Sons publication
9. Carr, wilfred (1986) Theories of theory and practice’. Journal of the Philosophy of
Education
10. Chhaya Patel (1999), social work practice – religion - philosophical foundations.
Rewat publications, Jaipur
11. Chris Becket, Essential theory for social work practice (2006) sage publishing Ltd,
London
12. Chris Clack (1999), social work ethics, politics, principles and practice 9th Ed. Jo
campling palgrave, Hampshire.
13. Devi Rameswari and Prakash Ravi (2004): social work methods, practices &
perspectives – vol II, Mangal Deep Publication, Jaipur.
14. Dominelli, Lena- social work theory and practice for changing profession : polity
press (2004) Cambridge, UK
15. Gautham .P.R (2012) Social work: Methods practices and perspectives,
centrumpress publishers –New Delhi
16. Gibery and specht, Dimensions of social welfare policy: Pretice Hall, New Jercdy,
1988
17. Gupta, Sumithra, Social Welfare in India, chugh publications, Allahabad, 1989.
18. Hans, Nagpaul (1996) Social work practice in Urban India, Rewat Publications,
Jaipur
19. Johnson.C.L (2012) Social work practice, PHI-New Delhi

6
20. Leonard Gibbs & Eileen Gambrill (1999) critical thinking for social workers (ed.
Jo campling), Pagrave, Hamsphire.
21. Marion Bogo 2013, Social Work Practice: Concepts, Processes, and Interviewing,
Columbia university press.
22. Mel Gray, Stephen Webb 2012, Social Work Theories and Methods, sage
publication
23. Payne, Malcom., Modern social work theory : A critical introduction, Mac millan
24. Roberta R. Greene 2011, Human Behavior Theory and Social Work Practice
of Social Work Applications, Transaction Publishers. Volume 1
25. Taylor. S. H (2013) Theory and practice of community social work- Rawat
publishers New Delhi.

26. Vyas M.D (1993), Personality Development- Counseling therapy, Anmol

Publications, New Delhi.
27. William Borden 2013, Reshaping Theory in Contemporary Social Work: Toward a
Critical Pluralism in Clinical Practice, Columbia University Press

7
 HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

Project Oriented Elective No: 1 LTPC

4 0 0 4

Objectives:
 To develop the knowledge of students about fields of Human Resource Management, its
importance, practice and application.
 To develop an insight in students about various theories & challenges of Human
Resource Management
Unit I
HRM – concept, meaning and evolution of HRM and HRD. HR - challenges and
opportunities, HR – polices, procedures and programmes - HR policies, procedures and
programmes - HR planning, recruitment, selection, placement, psychometric tests,
employee attrition and retention, career planning and development and strategic HRM.
(12 L)
Unit II
Compensation Management – wage and salary Administration, current trends in
compensation Management. Training and Development – policy, training need
analysis, designing, conduction and evaluation of training. Competency mapping,
knowledge Management. (12 L)
Unit III
Performance Appraisal and potential appraisal, performance, counseling, performance
management, grievance handling, health and safety management – TQM (Total Quality
Management), Quality at work life (QWL). Employee separation, HR Audit and HR
Outsourcing. (12 L)
Unit IV
Management of change: Process of managing organizational change, managing
resistance to change, strategies and guidelines for imparting change approaches to
planned change - process of organizational development, designing intervention and
evaluation intervention. Team building – conflict management. (12 L)
Unit V
Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) – concept - need, importance, CSR in Indian
context and in Global scenario, corporate community participation, role and skills of
social policies and activities, CSR standards and norms, case of successful CSR
initiatives. (12 L)
(Total 60 L)

8
References:
1. Bhatia S.K, “Human Resource Management” – A competitive advantage, Deep
and Deep publications Pvt. Ltd . New Delhi 2006.(658. 3B).
2. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharya, Human Resources Management. Excel Books, New
Delhi 2002 (658.3D)
3. Jyothi P. and Venkatesh D.N, Human Resource Management. Oxford University
Press New Delhi 2006 (658.3j)
**********************

9
 FAMILY AND CHILD WELFARE

Project Oriented Elective No: 2 LTPC

4 0 0 4

Objectives:
 To help the students understand the Theoretical and conceptual framework of family and
welfare issues.
 To understand and promote Child, women and youth welfare.
Unit I
Theoretical and conceptual framework to study family: origin and evolution of family
and marriage. Ideology of family rights and responsibilities, normative family and
marriage function and structure, ethnicity and socio-economic background, Social
changes and changes in family and marriage function and structure, implications for the
family and its members. Alternative family and marriage patterns and structure: dual
earner/carrier family single parent families, female headed household childless family,
methods for family assessment and its implications, modes of awareness building. (12L)
Unit II
Family Welfare: concept, family planning and family welfare planning, methods of
family planning, critical review of International, National and state policies and
programmes for family planning, life education population, education and sex education:
concept, scope, need, techniques. History and definition of family violence, studying
family violence. Theories of family violence. (12L)
Unit III
Child welfare: Concept, constitutional safeguard, International, National and state level
policies, child rights - UN charter legislations related to child, Factors influencing child
development, girl child socio-economic practices and their impact on girl child. Child in
special circumstances - destitute child, delinquents child: child welfare board. Child
abuse, and neglect, societies' role in abuse and neglect, child exposed to domestic
violence. Critical review of child welfare programmes of UNICEF, WHO, ILO,
Government of India and state government. (12L)
Unit IV
Challenges and Intervention in Youth welfare: Concept of youth, youth profile,
socialization of youth, youth problems - behaviour, functional and emotional problems.
Role of youth in freedom movement, social change, politics, youth movement and
ideologist, youth unrest and youth development. Youth welfare: concept definition,
philosophy and evolution of youth welfare programmes in India. Policies and
Programmes for youth, and training for youth leadership, problems of rural, urban and

10
tribal youth and application of social work methods in working with youth groups.
(12L)
Unit – V
Women welfare &Gender Issues: Status of women, concept of reproductive health and
rights, gender and women development, problems of rural, urban and tribal women,
critical analysis of third gender and their rights, women trafficking, women in
commercial sex, women in non formal/informal sector, women in slums, women and
education, critical review of policies, programmes and legislation to women.
(12L)
(Total 60 L)
Reference:
1. Besharov, D.J. (1990), Recognizing child abuse: A guide for the concerned, The
free press, New York.
2. Chalk , R. & King P.A. (eds) (1998), Violence in families: Assessing prevention
and treatment programs,
3. Crosson-Tower, C. (2002), Understanding child abuse and neglect (5th Ed). Boston:
Allyn & Bacon.
4. Crowell, N.A & Burgess A.W (eds) 1996), Understanding violence against women
5. D.C. National Academy press Washington
6. Duttion, D.(1995), The domestic assault of women; Psychological and criminal
justice perspective, CA: UBC press, British.
7. Jayanthi, I and Thomas William A, (2017) Disaster and Tsunami: Psychosocial
Impact, Kapaz Publication, New Delhi.
8. Migonon, S.I, Larson C.J., & Holmes, W.M. (2002) Family abuse: consequences,
theories and responses, MA: Allyn & Bacon , Boston.
********************

11
 Community Development
Project Oriented Elective No: 3 LTPC
4 0 0 4

Objectives:
 To help the students understand various communities living in India.
 To understand the various programmes related to community development.
Unit - I Rural development-concept problem and issues
Rural community – rural urban differences and continuum – types of Indian village
community concept and need of rural community development - approaches of rural
development. Spatial planning approach - multipurpose approach, integrated
development approach, area development approach - multilevel district planning, target
sector approach – illiteracy – poverty - unemployment, underemployment, seasonal
employment, untouchability, communal conflicts – political issues – impact of
globalization. (14L)
UNIT – II Rural community Development Administration
Organizational set up and administration from national to block level – central rural
development ministry and community development agencies and district level rural
development agencies and district planning authorities – functions of block development
officer and extension officer – role of voluntary agencies in rural community
development. (12L)
UNIT - III Concept and problems of urban community
Definition, classification, characteristics and theories of urbanization, SLUM: definition,
theories, causes and characteristics, housing Deviant behaviour, corruption, prostitution,
beggary, sanitation, health congestion , pollution. (10L)
UNIT IV
History of urban local self-government in India, form of urban local self-government,
organizational structure and functions. Problems of municipal administration in India.
Process of organizing the communities. New trends in popular participation in
Development. Relevance of Social work practice (10L)
UNIT - V Rural and urban community development programmes
Rural Development Programme: A very brief idea on IRDP, ITDP, TRYSEM,
DWACRA - In-depth study on Centre and State current programmes.Urban
Development Programmes: Urban development policies; Town planning and Related
Legislations; Town planning Acts; Land Acquisition Act, programmers: A very Brief
idea on IUDP, UBS; In-depth study on recent programmes: Swarna Jayanthi Shahari
Rozgar Yozna: Development of women and children in urban areas; Urban self –
Employment Scheme; National Slum Development Programmes; Urban Wage
employment Programmes. (14L)
(Total 60 L)

12
REFERENCES:
1. Cerdic Pagh (1990) Housing and urbanization: A study of India, New Delhi. Sage.
2. Christopher and Thomas William, (2011) Community Organisation and Social
Action, 2ed. Himalaya Publications, Mumbai.
3. Dahama O.P (1982). Extension and Rural welfare, Agra, Ram Prasad and sons.
4. Desai A.R. Rural sociology in India , Bombay Popular Prakashan.
5. Dube S.C (1958) India's changing villages, London Rutledge and Kegan Paul.
6. Dube M.K (2000) Rural and urban development New Delhi, common health
7. Gopala Krishna & Ansari V. (1985), Technological change for Rural Development in
India.
8. Dana Chekki (1979). Community development: theory and method of planned
change, New Delhi Vikas.
9. Mahajan V.S. (Ed).(1993). Employment through rural development onwards
sustainability, New Delhi Deep and Deep.
10. Madras school of social proceedings of the national seminar on people’s participation
in community development, Madras.
11. Mihal S.P and Rafio Khan M. History of Rural Development in Modern India New
Delhi Gandharan Institute of studies.
12. Mishra G.P. Dynamics of Rural Development in village India. New Delhi. Ashiash.
13. Rajeswar Dayar (1962) Community development programmes in India. Allahabad,
Kitals Mahal.
14. Ram K. Verma (1996) Development Infrastructure for Rural Economy, Jaipur Print
Hell.
15. Thakur B.N (1988) Sociology of rural development, New Delhi Classical.
16. Thoha, M. and Om Prakash (1989) integrated rural development (Vo I and Vo I)
Bangalore sterling.
17. Thomas William A. and Christopher A.J. (2011) Rural Development: Concept and
Recent Approaches, Rawat Publications, Jaipur.
18. Vasudeva Rao, D (1985) Fact and rural development, New Delhi Ashiash.
19. Vijay C.M (1984) Rural Community Administration in India, Jaipur prateek

13
 Medical and Psychiatric Social work

Project Oriented Elective No: 4 LTPC

4 0 0 4

Objectives:
 To develop and understand issues relating to Mental Health, Illness, Psychatric and
Medical Social Work and to promote interventional strategies

Unit I
Mental health and illness: Concept of positive mental Health, Psychological well
being, mental health and illness, attitude towards mental illness, epidemiological studies
and socio demographic correlates of mental illness in India. View points of illness:
biological, psycho-social and socio-cultural: causal factors in abnormal behavior,
perspective on causation: biological and psycho-social causal factor.Anxiety disorders,
disassociative (conversion) disorders, obsessive compulsive disorders, adjustment
disorders and behavioral syndromes associated with psycho physiological
disorders.Psychopathology of personality and behavior disorders, specific personality
disorders, behavior disorders due to psychoactive substance use and alcoholism, sexual
dysfunctions and disorders, psycho active substance use disorders. (16L)
Unit 2
Psychiatric social work: History, objectives, scope, nature and principles of psychiatric
social work, role of psychiatric social worker in hospitals, day care centre, foster homes,
community projects and educational institutions, half way home. Psychological based
therapies: psycho dynamic therapy, behaviour therapy, cognitive behaviour thereby,
humanistic experiential therapies and therapy for inter personal relationship.
Applications of tools/scales to measure the psychiatric disorders and use of statistical
package (practical exposure study). (14L)
Unit 3
Medical Social work: Concept, historical development, principles, need and scope.
Dimensions of health; positive health and well being; determinants of health, right to
health; indicators of health, parameters of community health, philosophy of health
services. (10L)
Unit 4
Pathology of Disease: Causation, modes of transmission, disease control, concept of
prevention and level of prevention, mode of intervention and changing patterns of
disease. (10L)

14
Unit 5
Hospital planning and Administration: Management process and principles, hospital
organization structure, hospital planning and challenges of the administration of hospital
services, administration of outpatient and inpatient services, emergency services in
hospitals, planning and management of ophthalmic services, radiotherapy and oncology
centre, management of neonatal intensive care, administration of rural hospitals, role of
hospitals in primary health. (10L)
(Total 60 L)
References:
1. Robert C. Carson James N. Butcher & James C. Coleman: Abnormal psychology
and modern life (8th edition ), Marfatia j.c: Psychiatric of Children Popular
Prakhasan , Bombay, 1971.
2. Roberts N. Mental health and mental illness, Rutledge & Kegan Paul, London
1967.
3. Eden D.J. Mental handicap – an introduction George Allen and unnin , London,
1976.
4. Gaind R.N. Hudson B.L.: Current themes in psychiatry Mc millan, 1979
5. Bartlell,Harriet M.: Social work practice in Health field, New York National
Association of social workers., 1961
6. Banergee G.R.: Social service Departments in Hospitals – Is organizations and
functions , TISS , Bombay, 1950
7. J.E Park, social and preventive Medicine
8. John Howells G. Modern perspective in international child
9. Psychiatry, Williams & wilkins , Vol. 2 & 3 1980
10. Verma, Ratna , Psychiatric social work in India, sage Pub., New Delhi, 1991
11. Skinner, sue Walrond: Developments in family therapy, Rutledge & Kegan Paul,
London, 1981

***************************

15
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI – 12

LIST OF PAPERS FOR THE PH.D. COURSE WORK IN PHYSICS

S. No. Courses
1 Materials Science
2 Nanomaterials
3 Space Physics
4 Crystal Growth
5 Thin film
6 Electronic structure calculation
7 Non linear dynamics
8 Medical Physics
9 Radiation Physics
10 Alternative energy conversion devices
11 Lasers and applications

S. No. Online courses - NPTL

12 Advanced materials and processes

13 Introduction to nonlinear optics and its

applications

14 Non-conventional energy resources

15 Design of photo-voltaic systems

Page 1 of 17
 Paper - 1: MATERIALS SCIENCE

Preamble: To expose the students with theoretical aspects of materials science. To provide the
knowledge about phase diagrams, mechanical properties, ceramics, polymers, plastics and
crystals.

Unit – I:Phase Diagrams (12 hrs)

Solid solutions and intermediate phases – Equilibrium phase diagrams, Cu-Ni, Pb-Sn, Al-Cu
system phase diagrams – Free energy and equilibrium phase diagrams – Nucleation and growth –
Martenstic transformation – Strengthening mehanisms – Iron-Carbon system – Alloy steels –
Aluminium-Copper system – Copper-Zinc system – Corrosion
Unit - II:Mechanical Properties (12 hrs)
Stress- Strain curve – Elastic deformation: Characteristics, Atomic mechanism, Sheer stress,
Bulk modulus, Strain energy, Strain deformation – Viscous deformation: Spring-Dashpot models –
Anelastic and Viscoelastic deformation: Viscoelastic models – Plastic deformation: Dislocations and
Stress-strain curves, Plasticity theory – Fracture: Ideal fracture, Brittle fracture, Fracture mechanics,
Cohesive models, Ductile fracture – Mechanical testing
Unit - III:Ceramics (12 hrs)
Structure of ceramics – Production of ceramics: Raw materials, Forming and Post-forming
processes – Production of glass: Melting of glass, Glass forming and annealing – Mechanical
properties of ceramics – Wear and erosion resistance – Thermal shock – Silica-Alumina system –
Commercial systems: Zirconia, Sialones, Cement and Concrete
Unit - IV:Polymers and Plastics (12 hrs)
Molecular structure: Monomers & Polymers, Synthesis, Molecular weight measurement,
Branching & Tacticity, Copolymets and blend – Mechnaics of polymer chain: Freely jointed chains,
Entanglements, Rubber elasticity – Thermoplastic melts: Viscosity, Shear thinning, Processing,
Extrusion – Amorphous polymers: Solidification, glass transition, Various models – Crystalline
polymers – Crosslinked polymers: Elastomers, Thermosets – Liquid crystal polymers – Mechanical
properties: Stress-Strain behaviour – Chemical properties
Unit - V:Crystals (12 hrs)
Crystal growth from solution – Melt growth techniques: Bridgman method, Czochralski crystal
pulling technique, Crystal growth from Vapour phase – Crystal Imperfections – Point defects:
Vacancies, interstitals, Impurities, electronic defects – Lline defects: Edge dislocation, Screw
dislocation – Surface defects: Grain boundaries, Tilt boundaries, Twin boundaries, Stacking faults,
Ferromagnetic domain walls – Volume defects: Cracks, Voids

Books for Study and References

1. J.C.Anderson, K.D.Leaver, P. Leevers and R.D.Rowlings, Materials Science for Engineers,

Nelson Thomas Ltd, First Indian reprint, 2010
2. M.Arumugam, Materials Science, Anuradha Agencies, Publishers, Sechond Edition, Fifth
Reprint, 2005
3. R,Balasubramaniam, Materials Science and Engineering, Wiley India (P) Ltd, 2010
4. V.Raghavan, Materials Science for Engineering, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2006

Page 2 of 17
 Paper - 2: NANOMATERIALS

Preamble: To felicitates the knowledge on nanomaterials. To make the students understanding the
fundamental aspects of nanomaterials, synthesis, nanostructures, properties and characterization
techniques
Unit-I: Synthesis (12 hrs)
Sol-Gel and Precipitation technologies - Ball milling - RF plasma - Combustion Flame -
Chemical Vapor Condensation process – Electrodeposition - Laser synthesis - Gas phase condensation
- Sonochemical.
Unit-II: Nanostructures (12 hrs)
Preparation of quantum nanostructures: Preparation - Size and Dimensionality Effects –
Excitations - Single-Electron Tunneling - Applications. Nanomachines and Nano
devices:Micoelectrochemical systems – Nano electrochemical systems - Molecular and Super
molecular switches.
Unit-III: Properties (12 hrs)
Properties of Individual Nanoparticles: Metal Nanoclusters – Semiconducting Nanoparticles -
Rare Gas and Molecular clusters. Bulk Nanostructured Materials:Solid disordered Nanostructure -
Nanostructured crystals.
Unit - IV: Characterization Techniques (12 hrs)
Structural: Powder XRD & particle size determination, Neutron diffraction; Spectroscopic:
X-ray Photoelectron ( XPS ), Photoluminescence, Impedance and Energy Dispersive X-ray ( EDAX )
spectroscopy.
Unit - V: Characterization Techniques (12 hrs)
Thermal: Differential Thermal Analysis ( DTA ), Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC);
Microscopic: Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM); Electrical and Magnetic: Four - probe method,
Vibrating sample Magnetometer.

Books for Study and Reference

1. Evgenij Barsoukov and J. Ross Macdonald : Impedance Spectroscopy : Theory, Experiment

and Applications, ( John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey, second edition), 2005.
2. G. Cao: Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications, (
ImperialCollege Press ), 2004.
3. Koch CC, Nanostructured Materials processing, properties and potential applications,
WilliamsAndrew Publishing, Noyes, 2002
4. Pavia, Lampman, Kriz and Vyvyan, Spectroscopy, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd., 2011.
5. Willard, Merritt, Dean and Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis. CBS Publishers
&Distributors, Delhi, 1986.
6. J.Ross Mcdonald, Impedance Spectroscopy Emphasizing solid materials and systems,
JohnWiley & sons, New York, 1996.
7. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.
8. Charles P. Poole Jr & Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley &
Sons(Asia) Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.
9. Jackie Y.Ying, Nanostructured Materials, Academic Press, USA, 2001.

Page 3 of 17
 Paper – 3: SPACE PHYSICS

Preamble: To enlighten the students with the concepts of space physics. To make the students
understanding the concepts of remote sensing of earth’s climate system, space and plasma physics,
space weather, introduction to magneto hydrodynamics, x-ray astronomy
Unit – I: Remote Sensing of Earth’s Climate System (12 hrs)
Remote sensing of earth’s climate system- requirements for remote sensing of climate system-
methodology- constrains- basic concept of remote sensing- surface factors- atmospheric factors-
instrumental factors- using reflected sunlight- global vegetation remote sensing- using thermal
emission- global sea surface temperature measurement- radar altimetry- surface effects- atmospheric
effects- ocean and ice monitoring by radar altimetry.
Unit - II: Space and Plasma Physics (12 hrs)
Basic plasma physics- principle- application- space plasma- the frozen in-flux-MHD plasma
waves- solar wind and IMF- collision less shocks- bow shocks- shock jumps- shock structure- shock
acceleration- magnetic reconnection- terrestrial magnetosphere- closed, open and flux transfer events-
storms , sub storms- solar wind interaction with ionosphere- planets- insulator bodies(moon)- comets.
Unit – III: Space Weather (12 hrs)
Space weather- structure of sun- solar cycle- solar activity- coronal heating. The solar wind-
wind- Aurora- Auroral sub storms- co-rotating interaction region(CIR)- solar flares- the ionosphere-
solar energetic particle events(SEP)- coronal mass ejections(CME) and geomagnetic storms- Halo
CME’s- interplanetary CME’s- magnetic clouds.
Unit - IV:Introduction to Magneto Hydrodynamics (12 Hrs)
Maxwell’s equations in MHD- magnetic Reynold’s number- Alfven speed- plasma beta
parameter- force free magnetic field- magnetic buoyancy- magneto ststic equilibrium- magnetic
reconnection- current sheet- acoustic waves- Alfven waves compressional Alfven waves- magneto
acoustic waves- inertial waves.
Unit – V: X-Ray Astronomy (12 hrs)
Origin of X-rays astronomy- X-ray binaries- black hole- neutron stars- pulsars- white dwarfs-
clusters of galaxies.

Books for Study and References

1. Thomas E Cravens, Physics of Solar System Plasma, ( Cambridge University Press ), 1997.
2. Thomas I Gombosi, Physics for Space Environment, ( Cambridge University Press ), 2004.
3. Louise K Hara and Keith O Mason, Space Science, ( University of London, World Scientific
Publishing Co.), 2004.
4. Margaret G Kivelson and Christopher T Russell, Introduction to Space Physics, ( Cambridge
University Press ), 1995.

Page 4 of 17
 Paper –4 : CRYSTAL GROWTH

Preamble: To introduce the knowledge on crystal growth and characterization. To expose the
students with theories of nucleation & crystal growth, crystal growth from various techniques
such as, solution, melt and vapour phase and their characterization.

Unit – I: Fundamentals of Crystal Growth (12 hrs)

Importance of crystal growth – Classification of crystal growth methods – Basic steps:
Generation, transport and adsorption of growth reactants – Nucleation: Kinds of nucleation –Classical
theory of nucleation: Gibbs Thomson equations for vapour and solution – Kinetic theory of nucleation
– Becker and Doring concept on nucleation rate – Energy of formation of a spherical nucleus –
Statistical theory on nucleation: Equilibrium concentration of critical nuclei, Free energy of formation.
Unit – II: Theories of Crystal Growth (12 hrs)
An introductory note to Surface energy theory, Diffusion theory and Adsorption layer theory –
Concepts of Volmer theory, Bravais theory, Kossel theory and Stranski’s treatment – Two-
dimensional nucleation theory: Free energy of formation, Possible shapes and Rate of nucleation –
Mononuclear, Polynuclear and Birth and Spread models – Modified Birth and Spread model – Crystal
growth by mass transfer processes: Burton, Cabrera and Frank (BCF) bulk diffusion model, Surface
diffusion growth theory.
Unit – III: Experimental Crystal Growth-Part-I: Melt Growth Techniques (12 hrs)
Basics of melt growth – Heat and mass transfer – Conservative growth processes: Bridgman-
Stockbarger method – Czochralski pulling method – Kyropolous method – Non-conservative
processes: Zone-refining – Vertical and horizontal float zone methods – Skull melting method –
Vernueil flame fusion method.
Unit – IV: Experimental Crystal Growth-Part-Ii: Solution Growth Techniques (12 hrs)
Growth from low temperature solutions: Selection of solvents and solubility – Meir’s solubility
diagram – Saturation and supersaturation – Metastable zone width – Growth by restricted evaporation
of solvent, slow cooling of solution and temperature gradient methods– Crystal growth in Gel media:
Chemical reaction and solubility reduction methods – Growth from high temperature solutions: Flux
growth Principles of flux method – Choice of flux – Growth by slow evaporation and slow cooling
methods – Hydrothermal growth method.
Unit –V: Experimental Crystal Growth-Part-Iii: Vapour Growth Techniques (12 hrs)
Basic principles – Physical VapourDoposition (PVD): Vapour phase crystallization in a closed
system – Gas flow crystallization – Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD): Advantageous and
disadvantageous – Growth by chemical vapour transport reaction: Transporting agents, Sealed capsule
method, Open flow systems – Temperature variation method: Stationary temperature profile, Linearly
time varying temperature profile and Oscillatory temperature profile.
Books for Study and Reference
1. ‘Crystal Growth Processes’ by J.C. Brice, 1986, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
2. ‘Crystallization’ by J.W. Mullin, 2004, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, London.
3. ‘Crystal Growth: Principles and Progress’ by A.W. Vere, 1987, Plenum Press, New York.
4. ‘Crystals: Growth, Morphology and Perfection’ by Ichiro Sunagawa, 2005, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
5. ‘Crystal Growth’ by B.R. Pamplin, 1975, Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Page 5 of 17
 PAPER –5: Thin film

Preamble: To expose the students with knowledge of understanding the basic preparation and to
get knowledge about the various properties of thin films. To make the understand the preparation
and various necessary techniques used for analyzing the thin films

Unit- I: Preparation of Thin Films (12 hrs)

Spray pyrolytic process – characteristic feature of the spray pyrolytic process – ion plating –
Vacuum evaporation – Evaporation theory – The construction and use of vapour sources – sputtering
Methods of sputtering – Reactive sputtering – RF sputtering - DC planar m magnetron sputtering .

Unit - II: (Thickness Measurement and Nucleation and Growth in Thin Film (12 hrs)

Thickness measurement: electrical methods – optical interference methods – multiple beam

interferometry – Fizeau – FECO methods – Quartz crystal thickness monitor. Theories of thin film
nucleation – Four stages of film growth incorporation of defects during growth.

Unit - III: Electrical Properties of Metallic Thin Films (12 hrs)

Sources of resistivity in metallic conductors – sheet resistance - Temperature coefficient of

resistance (TCR) – influence of thickness on resistivity – Hall effect and magneto resistance –
Annealing – Agglomeration and oxidation.

Unit - IV: Transport Properties of Semiconducting and Insulating Films (12 hrs)

Semiconducting films ; Theoretical considerations - Experimental results – Photoconduction –

Field effect thin films – transistors, Insulation films Dielectric properties – dielectric losses – Ohmic
contracts – Metal – Insulator and Metal – metal contacts – DC and AC conduction mechanism

Unit - V: Optical Properties of Thin Films and Thin Films Solar Cells (12 hrs)

Thin films optics –Theory – Optical constants of thin films – Experimental techniques –
Multilayer optical system – interference filers – Antireflection coating ,Thin films solar cells : Role,
Progress , and production of thin solar cells – Photovoltaic parameter, Thin film silicon (Poly
crystalline) solar cells : current status of bulk silicon solar cells – Fabrication technology – Photo
voltaic performance : Emerging solar cells : GaAs and CulnSe.

Books for study and reference

1. Hand book of Thin films Technology: L I Maissel and R Clang .
2. Thin film Phenomena : K L Chopra .
3. Physics of thin films, vol. 12 , Ed George Hass and others .
4. Thin films solar cells – K L Chopra and S R Das .
5. Thin films processes – J L vilsan
6. vacuum deposition of thin films – L Holland .
7. The use of thin films in physical investigation – J C Anderson.
8. Thin films technology – Berry, Koil and Harri

Page 6 of 17
 PAPER –6: ELECTRONIC STRUCTURE CALCULATION

Preamble: To introduce knowledge on electronic structure calculation. To make the students to

understand basic concepts, various analysis on natural bond Orbitals, normal coordinates and different
experimental methods

Unit – I: FTIR Raman Spectra (12 hrs)

Normal modes of vibration – Group frequencies – Origin of Infrared and Raman spectra –
Infrared and Raman activity – IR and Raman spectral characteristics – FTIR and Raman spectra and
their interpretation – Factors affecting Vibrational spectra - Hydrogen bonding – Structure elucidation
using IR and Raman spectra – Resonance Raman scattering – Vibrational spectra of aromatic
molecules
Unit – II: Quantum Chemical Computation (12 hrs)
Molecular Orbital Theory - Basis set – Electronic structure methods – Semi empirical methods –
Ab initio methods - density functional theory methods - Z-matrix – geometry optimization –
Harmonic Vibrational analysis – Atoms in molecules charges and Bond order – Potential energy
surface – Mullican population analysis – Vibrational circular dichroism intensities – Software:
MOPAC, Gaussian
Unit – III: Natural Bond Orbital Analysis (12 hrs)
Natural bond orbitals and one-particle density matrix – Atomic eigenvectors – Natural atomic
orbitals and natural population analysis – Bond eigenvectors – natural hybrids and natural bond
orbitals – Natural localized molecular orbitals – Hyperconjugative interaction in NBO analysis.
Unit – IV: Normal Coordinate Analysis (12 hrs)
Classical theory of molecular vibrations – Construction of force constant matrix F – Internal
coordinates in force field calculations – Theory of lattice vibrations – Scale factor calculation –
Intensity calculation – Natural internal coordinates – MOLVIB software: General structure input data
– Control parameters
Unit – V: Experimental Techniques (12 hrs)
IR spectrometer instrumentation – IR sources – Sample handling techniques – IR detectors –
FTIR spectrometer – FTIR Raman spectrometer – Sample handling techniques – Laser exciting
sources – Raman detectors – SERS techniques.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Brain Smith, Infrared Spectral Interpretation – A Systematic Approach , CRC Press, New
York, (1999)
2. G.Aruldhas, Molecular structure and spectroscopy, prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd., New
Delhi-1110001, (2001).
3. G.Socrates, Infrared characteristic group frequencies, John Wiley & Sons, New York,
(1980)
4. Ira N.Levine, Quantum chemistry V Ed., Prentice Hall International, Inc., London (2003).
5. Alan E. Reed et al., Chem. Rev. 88 (1988) 899-906.
6. Tom Sundius, MOLVIB User’s guide Ver. 2, Helsinki (June 2002)
7. Robert M. Silverstein et al., Spectrometric identification of organic compounds, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., New York, (2003).

Page 7 of 17
 PAPER – 7: NONLINEAR DYNAMICS

Preamble: To understand the basic concepts of nonlinear dynamics. This course provides
knowledge about the effects of nonlinearity on dynamical systems

Unit – I: Nonlinearity, linear and nonlinear oscillators (12 hrs)

Dynamical systems - linear and nonlinear forces - Mathematical implications of nonlinearlty -

Working definition of nonlinearity - Effects of nonlinearity-Linear oscillators and predictability -
Damped and driven nonlinear oscillators.

Unit – II: Equilibrium points, bifurcations and chaos (12 hrs)

Equilibrium points - General criteria for stability – Classification - Some simple bifurcations -
Saddle node, pitch fork, transcritical and Hopf bifurcations - Discrete dynamical systems - Logistic
map - Equilibrium points and their stability - period doubling phenomenon - chaos.

Unit – III: Chaos in nonlinear electronic circuits (12 hrs)

Linear and nonlinear circuit elements - nonlinear circuits - Chua’s diode - Autonomous case -
Bifurcations and chaos - Chaotic dynamics of MLC circuit-Analogue circuit simulation - Some other
useful nonlinear circuit - Colpitt’s oscillator.

Unit – IV: Fractals (12 hrs)

Self similarity - Properties and examples of fractals - Fractal dimension - Construction and
properties of some fractals-Middle one third cantor set-Koch curve - Sierpinski triangle-Julia set -
Mandelbrot set - Applications of fractals.

Unit – V: Solitons (12 hrs)

Linear waves - Linear non dispersive wave propagation - Linear dispersive wave propagation -
Nonlinear dispersive systems - Korteweg de vries equation - solitary and cnoidal waves - Numerical
experiments of Zabusky and Kruskal - birth of solitons - Properties of solitons - applications of
solitons.

Book For Study:

Nonlinear dynamics, Integr ability, Chaos, Patterns, M. Lakshmanan and S.Rajasekar, Springer,
Berlin, 2003.

Books for Reference:

1. Chaos in nonlinear oscillator, controlling and synchronization, M.Lakshmanan and K.Murali

(World Scientific, Singapor,1997.)
2. Deterministic chaos, H.G.Schuster, (Verlag,Weinheim,1998.)

Page 8 of 17
 PAPER – 8: MEDICAL PHYSICS

Preamble: To study the basic concepts of medical physics. To make the students to
understanding the concepts of Physics in lungs and breathing, sound in medicine, light in
medicine, physics of diagnostic X-rays and cardio vascular systems.

Unit - I: The Physics of the Lungs and Breathing (12 hrs)

The Airways– How the blood interact – Measurement of Lung Volumes – Pressure,
Airflow, Volume Relationships of the Lungs – Physics of the Alveoli – The Breathing
Mechanism – Airway Resistance – work of Breathing – Physics of some common Lung
Diseases. Electricity within the Body: Electric signals – from the Heart (Electro Cardiogram) –
From the Brain (Electro encephalogram) – From the Eye (Electro retinogram and
electrooculogram) – Magnetic signals from Heart and Brain (Magnetocardiogram and
Magnetoencephalogram) – Current Research involving electricity in the body.
Unit – II: Sound in Medicine (12 hrs)
General properties of sound, the body as a drum (percussion in medicine) – The
stethoscope – ultrasound pictures of the body – ultrasound to measure motion – physiological
effects of ultrasound in therapy – the production of speech – Physics of the ear and hearing : The
outer ear – the middle ear – the inner ear – sensitivity of the ears – testing your hearing –
deafness and hearing aids
Unit – III: Light in Medicine (12 hrs)
Measurement of light and its units – applications of visible light in medicine – applications of
ultraviolet and infrared light in medicine – Lasers in Medicine applications of microscopes in
medicine – Physics of eye and vision: Focusing elements of the eye – some other elements of the eye –
the retina – the light detector of the eye – how sharp are your eye? Optical illusions and related
phenomena – defective vision and its correction – colour vision and chromatic aberration –
instruments used in ophthalmology.
Unit – IV: Physics of Diagnostic X-Rays (12 hrs)
Production of X-ray beam – how X-ray are absorbed – making an X-ray image – radiation to
patients from X-rays – producting live X-ray images – fluoroscopy – X-ray slices of the body –
radiographs taken without film Physics of Radiation Therapy: The dose units used in radiotherapy –
the red and the gray – principles of radiation therapy – a short course in radiotherapy planning –
megavoltage therapy – short distance radiotherapy or brachytherapy other radiation sources – closing
thought of radiotherapy.
Unit – V: Physics of the Cardiovascular System (12 hrs)
Major Components of the Cardiovascular system – O2 and CO2 Exchange in the
Capillary system – Work done by the Heart – Blood pressure and its measurement Transmural
Pressure– Bernoulli’s Principle – Blood flow – Heart Sounds – Cardiovascular Diseases –
Functions of Blood Cardiovascular Instrumentation: Biopotentials of the Heart – Electrodes –
Amplifiers – Patient Monitoring – Defibrillators – Pacemakers
BOOK FOR STUDY

Medical Physics–John R.Cameron & James G.Skofronick (John Wiley&Sons, New York1978)

Page 9 of 17
 PAPER – 9: RADIATION PHYSICS

Preamble: To teach the students about the basic concepts of radiation physics. To impart knowledge
on radiation and interaction, principles of radiation detection and measurement, radiation therapy
techniques, diagnostic radiology and radiation protection.

Unit-I: Radiation and Interactions (12 hrs)

Interaction of Electromagnetic radiation with matter – Photoelectric and Compton process –

pair production – interaction of particles with matter – neutrons – heavy ions – nuclear reactions and
production of radioisotopes – radiation sources – natural and artificial radio active for medical
applications – Bethe- Bloch formula.

Unit – II: Principles of Radiation Detection and Measurement (12 hrs)

Radiation units and definitions – G.M. Counter – Scintillation detectors – Solid state
detectors – Photofilm method - Pocket dosimeter – TLD - FBX dosimeters.

Unit – III: Radio Therapy Techniques (12 hrs)

Telegamma unit – accelerators for therapy – Iridium and cobalt needles – preparation of
tracers and labeled compound – uses of radioisotopes (Gamma and beta) in brachytherapy. Dosimetry
in medical applications – beta particles dose computation for biological models – dosimetry of
internally administered isotopes Principles and overview of conformal radiotherapy, SRS, SRT and
IMRT.

Unit – IV: Diagnostic Radiology (12 hrs)

The physical basis of diagnostic radiology – the diagnostic X-ray tube – electrical circuits –
rating of the x-ray unit – factors on which quality and quantity of x-ray production depends –
geometric factor which influences the radiographic image – fluoroscopy – tomography – radio
isotopes in clinical medicine – rectilinear scanner – gamma camera.

Unit – V: Radiation Protection (12 hrs)

Philosophy behind radiation protection – basic concepts of MPD – recent ICRP

recommendations – tissues at risk – risk factor – evaluation of internal and external radiation hazards
– transport and waste disposal of radioactive materials.

REFERENCES

1. Meredith and Massay. "Fundamental Physics of Radiology", John Wright & Sons Jones
M.E. and Cunningham J, "Physics of Radiology", Charles C. Thomas, USA, 1984.
2. Knoll, "Radiation Detection and Measurement", John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982.
3. Mould R.F, "Radiation Protection", Adam Hilger's Boston, 1985.
4. Govindarajan K.N, "Advanced Medical Radiation Dosimetry", Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 1992

Page 10 of 17
 PAPER- 10: ALTERNATIVE ENERGY CONVERSION DEVICES

Preamble: To introduce knowledge on alternative energy sources. To introduce the importance and
overview of alternate energy sources. To make the students learn the basics of various energy
conversion devices

Unit – I: Introduction and Overview of Alternative Energy Sources and Utilization (12 hrs)
Global energy budget – origins of fossil fuels – Principles of energy conversion:
thermodynamic first and second laws – the Carnot cycle – Solar energy: Solar intensity and spectrum
– global solar energy potential and current level of utilization – Photovoltaic: history – principles
and theoretical limits – Solar cells and modules – semiconductor materials – single and multiple
layer p-n junction diodes – Solar cells and modules – maximum power output – energy efficiency –
quantum efficiency – Solar cells: characterization and modeling – Photovoltaic utilization.
Unit – II: Fundamentals of Electrochemistry and Electrode Kinetics (12 hrs)
Charge transfer reaction and reaction kinetics – Third-generation solar cells: dye-sensitized
photocell – organic/polymer solar cell-Fuel cells: overview of types – basic operation and
performance – Fuel cells: catalysis – Fuel cells: charge and mass transport – PEM fuel cells’ Molten
carbonate fuel cells – Solid oxide fuel cells – Overview of fuel cell systems: fuel-cell stack and
thermal management.
Unit – III: Hydrogen as a Renewable Energy Source (12 hrs)
Sources of Hydrogen, Fuel cell – Principle of working – construction and applications – Fuel
for Vehicles – Hydrogen Production: Direct electrolysis of water, thermal decomposition of water,
biological and biochemical methods of hydrogen production – Storage of Hydrogen: Gaseous,
Cryogenic and Metal hydride – Environmental impact.
Unit – IV: Batteries (12 hrs)
Primary and Secondary batteries - principles and application – Lithium batteries, Lithium ion
and polymer batteries. Super-capacitors: principles and working, electrode materials synthesis process,
fabrication of the devices and their applications.
Unit – V: Biomass Utilization (12 hrs)
Biodiesel and ethanol, Biomass utilization, Nuclear Energy: Potential of Nuclear Energy,
International Nuclear Energy Policies and Regulations. Nuclear Energy Technologies – Fuel
enrichment, Different Types of Nuclear Reactors, Nuclear Waste Disposal, and Nuclear Fusion.

REFERENCES:
1. Renewable Sources of Energy and Conversion Systems: N.K.Bansal and M.K.Kleeman.
2. Principles of Thermal Process : Duffie -Beckman
3. Solar Energy Handbook: Kreith and Kreider (McGrawHill)
4. Solar Cell : Marteen A. Green
5. Solar Hydrogen Energy Systems -T. Ohta (Ed.) (Pergamon Press)
6. Hydrogen Technology for Energy – D.A.Maths (Noyes Data Corp.)
7. Handbook : Batteries and Fuel cell – Linden (Mc.Graw Hill)
8. Batteries Volume (I) and (II) – Collins
9. Fuel Cell Fundamentals :O'Hayre, Suk-Won Cha, Whitney Colella, and Fritz B. Prinz, 2nd
ed, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
10. Energy Storage Materials: S.Selladurai Proceedings, 2010
11. Practical Photovoltaics: Electricity from Solar Cells, 3rd Ed.Richard J. Komp, Aatec
Publications, Ann Arbor, MI, 2002

Page 11 of 17
 PAPER – 11 : LASERS AND APPLICATIONS

Preamble: To facilitates the students with theoretical aspects of laser theory and its applications.
To provide the knowledge on laser theory, resonators and switching theory, gas & liquid lasers,
solid state & semiconductor lasers and their applications.

Unit – I: Laser Theory (12 hrs)

Absorption - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein's coefficients - threshold conditions

for laser action - Line broadening, Mechanism - Lorentzian and Doppler line shapes - Small
signal gain - Gain coefficient - gain saturation - Rate equations for 3 and 4 level systems.

Unit – II: Resonators and Switching Theory (12 hrs)

Resonant cavity - Fox and Li - Boyd and Gorden's theory on resonators - modes - Spot
size - Types of resonators - Mode selection - Q switching theory and technique - Mode locking
theory and technique.

Unit – III: Gas and Liquid Lasers (12 hrs)

He-Ne, Argon Ion, Carbon dioxide, Nitrogen - Metal vapour - Gas dynamics - Excimer -
Free electron lasers - Dye lasers organic dyes - Pulsed and CW dye lasers - Threshold conditions
- Puming configurations.

Unit – IV: Solid State And Semiconductor Lasers (12 hrs)

Ruby, Nd : YAG, Nd : Glass, Ti-sapphire, Alexandrite, lasers - Semiconductor lasers -

Homo function - Hetro function - Quantum well laser.

Unit – V: Applications (12 hrs)

Speckle, speckle interferometry - Holography - Holographic interferometry - Material

processing - Surface treatment - welding, drilling - Laser ranging - Laser Doppler Velocimetry -
Pollution monitoring - Medical applications.

REFERENCES

1. Laser Fundamentals, William T. Silfvast, Cambridge University Press, 1999.

2. Oshea, Callen and Rhcdes, "An Introduction to Lasers and their Applications", Addison
Wesley, 1985.
3. A.Yariv, "Quantum Electronics", Third Edn., Addison-Wesley 1990.
4. Hariharan, "Optical Holography", Academic Press, New York, 1983.
5. Erf.R.K."Speckle Metrology", Academic Press, New York, 1978.

Page 12 of 17
 PAPER – 12: Advanced Materials and Processes

Preamble: This course provides a fundamental understanding of materials’ properties, their

processing and classification, which are essential for product commercialization from the concept
phase. It also includes the development of new materials and the improvement and application of
current materials in new and novel structures.

Unit-I: Introduction and classification of structural and functional materials (12 hrs)

Introduction to metastable and functional alloys - Bulk Metallic glasses Part I: Fundamental
concepts - Bulk Metallic glasses Part II: Mechanical and Functional properties

Unit – II: High Temperature Materials (12 hrs)

Introduction to high temperature materials - Superalloys: Alloy design, Microstructure and

Properties -Shape memory alloys and Pseduelasticity - Shape memory alloys: Applications and case
studies

Unit – III: Nano-materials (12 hrs)

Nano-materials: Classification, size effect on structural and functional properties, Processing

and properties of nanocrystalline materials, thin films and multilayered coatings, single walled and
multiwalled carbon nanotubes

Unit – IV: Soft and hard magnetic materials (12 hrs)

Soft and hard magnetic materials for storage devices: Design and Processing; Piezoelectric
Materials: Processing and Properties

Unit – V: Advanced Processes applied for Advanced Materials (12 hrs)

Non-equilibrium Processes, Single Crystal Growth, Rapid Solidification, Inert Gas

Condensation - Advanced Functional Alloys -, Physical and Chemical Vapour Deposition of Thin
Films

Reference

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_mm12/preview

Page 13 of 17
 PAPER – 13: Introduction to Non-linear Optics and its Applications

Preamble:To introduce the basic concepts and theory of Nonlinear Optics. To study the basic
nonlinear optical effects (like higher harmonic generation, optical Kerr effect, self-phase modulation
etc). The course offers the subject matter by giving a rigorous theoretical background and framework
for a nonlinear effect, followed by details of how such an effect is implemented in real applications.

Unit – I (12 hrs)

Introduction & Linear Optics: Maxwell’s Equation (in free space and medium), Wave equation
(Homogeneous and Isotropic medium), Plane wave solution, Poynting Theorem, Intensity and
Amplitude relation, Linear Polarization, Classical 1D anharmonic oscillator , Refractive Index,
Dispersion (Damped Harmonic Oscillator Model, Sellmeier Equation) - Polarization Tensor,
Susceptibility Tensor , Wave motion in Crystal, E-Ray & O-Ray, Walk Off.

Unit – II (12 hrs)

Nonlinear Optics: Nonlinear Susceptibility, 2 nd order nonlinear effect (χ (2) ≠ 0)- Optical
Rectification, 2 nd harmonic generation, , Nonlinear Maxwell’s equation, Concept of phase matching -
Birefringence Phase Matching (BPM) , Kleinman’s symmetry, Index contraction, d-matrix ,Quasi
Phase Matching (QPM)

Unit – III (12 hrs)

Parametric Processes, Three wave interaction, Difference frequency generation, Manley-Rowe

Relation - Phase sensitive and insensitive amplification, Sum frequency Generation - Optical
Parametric Oscillator (OPO)- (i) Singly Resonant Oscillator (SRO), (ii) Doubly Resonant Oscillator.

Unit – IV (12 hrs)

Third order nonlinear effect (χ (3) ≠ 0), Optical Kerr effect, Self Phase Modulation (SPM) - 3
rd harmonic generation, Two wave interaction, Cross Phase Modulation (XPM) - Nonlinear absorption
/ Two Photon Absorption (TPA), Four Wave mixing, Cross Talk, Optical Phase Conjugation

Unit – V (12 hrs)

Stimulated Raman Scattering, Classical Picture of SRS, Raman Gain, Applications -Nonlinear
Schrödinger Equation, Optical soliton, Applications

Reference

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ph10/preview

Page 14 of 17
 PAPER – 14: Non-Conventional Energy Resources

Preamble:To study the operating principle of a range of non-conventional energy resources, materials
used, characterization, and key performance characteristics. The technologies looked at will include,
Solar energy, Wind, Batteries, Fuel cells, and Geothermal conversion. The advantages and limitations
of these technologies in comparison to conventional sources of energy will also be examined.

Unit – I: Conventional and non-conventional sources (12 hrs)

Scale of quantities - Impact of current energy usage - Conventional sources of energy -

Overview of non-conventional energy resources - Consumption by sector

Unit – II: Solar energy (12 hrs)

Solar energy incident on earth - solar spectrum - Overview of solar energy technologies - Solar
Thermal devices - Solar Photovoltaic devices - Performance and durability of solar devices

Unit – III: wind, Geothermal and biomass energies (12 hrs)

Wind energy - technology and geographical aspects - Geothermal - Biomass

Unit – IV: Battery (12 hrs)

Battery basics – types – Testing - performance of batteries

Unit – V: Fuel cells (12 hrs)

Fuel cell types - Fuel processing - concept to product - Characterization and durability of fuel
cells - Flywheels and super capacitors

Reference

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ge14/preview

Page 15 of 17
 PAPER – 15: Design of Photovoltaic Systems

Preamble:To discus about the PV cell electrical characteristics and interconnections. Estimation of
insolation and PV sizing is addressed in some detail. Maximum power point tracking and circuits
related to it are discussed. Later, applications related to peltier refrigeration, water pumping, grid
connection and micro grids are discussed in detail. Lastly a brief discussion on life cycle costing is
also discussed in order to bring in a measure of completeness to the course.
Unit – I: The PV cell (12 hrs)
A historical perspective, PV cell characteristics and equivalent circuit, Model of PV cell, Short
Circuit, Open Circuit and peak power parameters, Datasheet study, Cell efficiency, Effect of
temperature, Temperature effect calculation example, Fill factor, PV cell simulation - Identical cells in
series, Load line, Non-identical cells in series, Protecting cells in series, Interconnecting modules in
series, Simulation of cells in series, Identical cells in parallel, Non-identical cells in parallel, Protecting
cells in parallel, Interconnecting modules in parallel, Simulation of cells in parallel, Measuring I-V
characteristics, PV source emulation
Unit – II: Energy from sun (12 hrs)
Insolation and irradiance, Insolation variation with time of day, Earth centric viewpoint and
declination, Solar geometry, Insolation on a horizontal flat plate, Energy on a horizontal flat plate,
Sunrise and sunset hour angles - Energy on a tilted flat plate, Energy plots in octave, Atmospheric
effects, Air Mass, Energy with atmospheric effects, Clearness index, Clearness index and energy
scripts in Octave
Unit – III: Maximum power point tracking (12 hrs)
MPPT concept, Input impedance of DC-DC converters -Boost converter, Buck converter,
Buck-Boost converter, PV module in SPICE , Simulation - PV and DC-DC interface - Impedance
control methods, Reference cell, Sampling method, Power slope methods, Hill climbing method,
Practical points - Housekeeping power supply, Gate driver, MPPT for non-resistive loads, Simulation
Unit – IV: PV-battery interfaces (12 hrs)
Direct PV-battery connection, Charge controller, Battery charger - Understanding current
control, slope compensation, simulation of current control, Batteries in series - charge equalisation,
Batteries in parallel - Peltier device - principle, Peltier element - datasheet, Peltier cooling, Thermal
aspects - Conduction, Convection , A peltier refrigeration example, Radiation and mass transport,
Demo of Peltier cooling
Unit – V: PV and water pumping, grid interface (12 hrs)
Water pumping principle, Hydraulic energy and power, Total dynamic head, Numerical
solution - Colebrook formula, Octave script for head calculation, Octave script for hydraulic power,
Centrifugal pump, Reciprocating pump, PV power, Pumped hydro application - Grid connection
principle, PV to grid topologies, 3ph d-q controlled grid connection, dq-axis theory, AC to DC
transformations, DC to AC transformations, Complete 3ph grid connection, 1ph d-q controlled grid
connection - SVPWM, Application of integrated magnetics, Life cycle costing, Growth models,
Annual payment and present worth factor, LCC with examples

Page 16 of 17
Reference
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ee35/preview

Page 17 of 17
 Ph.D. Course Work
Syllabi for Sociology (2018-19) - Onwards

ADVANCED SOCIOLOGICAL RESEARCH

Objectives:
To help the researcher to understand the various research methods
To know the ethical and legal issues involved in research

Unit I
Concept of Research Meaning
Motivation, objectives and importance of Research –Types of Research Descriptive vs.
Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental, Quantitative vs. Qualitative, Conceptual vs. Empirical –
Selection and formulation of Research Problem – Research Design

Unit II
Research Formulation
Defining and formulating the research problem - Selecting the problem - Necessity of defining
the problem - Importance of literature review in defining a problem – Literature review –
Primary and secondary sources – reviews, treatise, monographs-patents – web as a source –
searching the web - Critical literature review – Identifying gap areas from literature review -
Development of working hypothesis

Unit III
Research Methods
(a) Traditional Methods – Historical, Institutional, Legal, Philosophical, Comparative, Ethical
methods etc. (b) Modern Methods – Sampling method, Questionnaire, Schedule etc, Interview
method and Focus Group discussion, Observation Method, Case Study method, Content analysis,
Delphi method, Statistical Method, Experimental method, Brainstorming Techniques etc.

Unit IV
Research design
Basic Principles- Need of research design –– Features of good design – Important concepts
relating to research design – Observation and Facts, Laws and Theories, Prediction and
explanation, Induction, Deduction, Development of Models. Developing a research plan -
Exploration, Description, Diagnosis, Experimentation. Determining experimental and sample
designs.

Unit-V
Data Collection and analysis
Execution of the research - Observation and Collection of data - Methods of data collection –
Types of data (a) Primary, Secondary and Tertiary Data. (b) Construction and adaptation of
instruments, Administration of questions and tests, Sampling Methods- Data Processing and
Analysis strategies - Data Analysis with Statistical Packages - Hypothesis-testing -
Generalization and Interpretation. Tabulation of data - (c) Data organization in SPSS and Excel

Page 1 of 9
(d) Graphical representation of data II. Analysis of Data (a) Discussion and Intrepretation of
results. (b) Testing of Hypothesis: Logical and Statistical Techniques.

Unit VI
Report Writing Structure and components of scientific reports - Types of report – Technical
reports and thesis – Significance – Different steps in the preparation – Layout, structure and
Language of typical reports – Illustrations and tables - Bibliography, referencing and footnotes -
Oral presentation – Planning – Preparation – Practice – Making presentation – Use of visual aids
- Importance of effective communication - Organization of the Research Report Preliminaries, -
Contents of Report, Bibliography, Appendices Style Manuals - Criteria for the evaluation of the
Research Report.

Unit VII
Ethical issues - ethical committees - Commercialisation – Copy right – royalty - Intellectual
property rights and patent law – Trade Related aspects of Intellectual Property Rights –
Reproduction of published material – Plagiarism - Citation and acknowledgement -
Reproducibility and accountability.

References

Bagchi, Kanak Kanti (2007) Research Methodology in Social Sciences: A Practical Guide,
Delhi, Abijeet Publications. Sharma, B.A.V., etal., (2000) Research Methods in Social Sciences,
New Delhi, Sterling Publishers. B.A.V. Busha, C. H and Harter, S. D (1980 Research Methods in
Librarianship, New York,Academic Press. Cooper, R. Donald and Pamela S. Schindler (2003)
Business Research Methods, Delhi, Tata McGraw-Hill. Flyvbjerg, Bent (2001)

Making Social Science Matter: Why Social Inquiry Fails and How it can Succeed Again, United
Kingdom, Cambridge University Press.
Ghosh, B.N. (1999) Scientific Method and Social Research, New Delhi. Gilbert, Nigel (1993)
Researching Social life, New Delhi, Sage Publication.
Goode and Hatt (1952) Methods in Social Research, New York, McGraw – Hill.
Gopal, M.H (1970) An Introduction to Research Procedures in Social Sciences, Bombay, Asia
Publishing House. Henn, Matt; Mark Weinstein and Nick Foard (2006) A Short Introduction to
Social Research, New Delhi, Vistaar Publications.
Hunt, Morton (1989) Profiles of Social Research: The Scientific Study of Human Interactlions,
Bombay, Popular Prakashan.
Kothari, C.R (2004) Research Methodology: An Introduction, Delhi, New Age.
Krishnaswami, O.R (2000) Research Methodology in Social Sciences, Delhi, Himalaya
Publications.
Kumar, Anthony, M., Graziano, A.M. and Raulin, M.L., 2009. Research Methods: A Process of
Inquiry, Allyn and Bacon.

Page 2 of 9
Day, R.A., 1992.How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper, Cambridge University Press.
Fink, A., 2009. Conducting Research Literature Reviews: From the Internet to Paper. Sage
Publications
Barnes, John A. 1979. Who Should Know What? Social Science, Privacy and Ethics.
Harmondsworth, Penguin.
Beteille A., and T.N. Madan. 1975. Encounter and Experience: Personal Accounts of Fieldwork .
New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Bose, Pradip Kumar, 1995. Research Methodology. New Delhi, ICSSR.
Bryman, Alan. 1988. Quality and Quantity in Social Research. London, Unwin Hyman
Denzin Norman, Lincoln Yvonna (ed). 2000. Handbook of Qualitative Research. London, Sage.
Giddens Anthony. 1976. New Rules of Sociological Research. Hutchinson.
Hughes, John. 1987. The Philosophy of Social Research. London, Orient Longman.
Kuhn, T. S. 1970. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. London, The University of Chicago
Press.
Madge, John. 1970. The Origins of Scientific Sociology. London, Tavistock.
Punch, Keith. 1986. Introduction to Social Research. London, Sage.
Mukherjee, P.N. (eds.) 2000. Methodology in Social Research: Dilemmas and Perspectives.New
Delhi, Sage.
Mulkay Michel. 1979. Science and the Sociology of Knowledge. London, George Allen and
Unwin Ltd.
Popper K. 1999. The Logic of Scientific Discovery. London, Routledge.
Sayer, Andrew.1992. Method in Social Science (revised 2nd edition). Routledge.
Shipman, Martin. 1988. The Limitations of Social Research. London, Longman.
Silverman David. 1985. Qualitative Methodology and Sociology.Gower. Vermont.
Srinivas, M.N. and A.M. Shah 1979. Field Worker and the Field. New Delhi, Oxford.
Anthony Capon, J.1988. Elementary Statistics for the Social Sciences. Wadsworth Publishers.
De Vaus, David. 2002. Analysing Social Science Data: 50 Key Problems in Data Analysis, New
Delhi, Sage Publications.
Judith Handel. 1978. Introductory Statistics for Sociology. Prentice-Hall Inc.
Loether, Herman J., and Donald G. McTavish. 1993. Descriptive and Inferential Statistics: An
Introduction.(Fourth Edition), Singapore, Allyn and Bacon

Page 3 of 9
 ADVANCED SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY

 be able to demonstrate a thorough understanding and knowledge of a range of sociological

theorists and their contributions to the field;
 have developed a complex appreciation for the central issues and problems of sociological
theory;
 to be able to demonstrate an appreciation of the intellectual and social contexts in which
sociological theories have been developed;
 be able to assemble ideas about sociological theory into a coherent argument of high
standards, applying the tools of critical analysis; and
 be able to demonstrate in depth an understanding of the relationship between theory and the
research agendas and processes of contemporary sociology.

Unit I
Positivistic Construction of the Social Order.
This module would critically assess the development of Positivism and Positivistic Sociology
with a focus on functionalism in sociology and anthropology and
culminating with a consideration of Parsonian systems sociology.

Essential Readings:

1. Durkheim, E. (2013). Durkheim: The Rules of Sociological Method: And Selected

Texts on Sociology and Its Method. Palgrave Macmillan. (Read Chapter One on Social
Facts)
2. Merton R. K., (1967) On Theoretical Sociology, the Free Press, New York
(Read Two Chapters On the History and Systematic of Sociological Theory and
On Sociological Theories of Middle Range)
3. Kingsley D, (1959). The myth of functional analysis as a special method in sociology and
anthropology, American Sociological Review Vol. 24, No. 6.
4. Turner J. H.,(2006) A Handbook of Sociological Theory,Springer Science and Business
Media, (Read Chapter One titled Sociological Theory Today and Two titled What Makes
Sciences Scientific by Stephen Fusch)
5. Bourdieu, P. (1991). The peculiar history of scientific reason. In Sociological forum, Vol. 6,
No. 1, pp. 326.
6. Taylor C., (1985). Philosophy and the Human Sciences, Philosophical Papers 2,
Cambridge University Press. (Read Social Theory as Practice).
7. Mills, C. W. (2000). The sociological imagination. Oxford University Press.
Read Chapters Two and Three titled ‘The Grand Theory’ and ‘Abstracted Empiricism’).
8. Wallerstein, I (1996) Open the Social Sciences: Report of the Gulbenkian Commission on the
Restructuring of the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press. NA
(Read it in hard copy Chapter One: The Historical Construction of the Social
Sciences, from the Eighteenth century to 1945).
9. Nicholas D. (1994) ‘Ritual and Resistance: Subversion as a Social Fact’, in A Reader in
Contemporary Social Theory Princeton University Press, and Princeton, New Jersey, NA

Page 4 of 9
 (Read it in hard copy)

Unit II
Marxist orientations to Class society
This module will assess the importance of class analysis in the study of modern capitalist
societies both in the advanced countries as well as the global south. Similarly it also assesses
the
role of critical theory in its attempt to explain modern capitalism.

Essential Readings:

1. Marx M & Friedrich E. (1970) The German Ideology. Vol. 1. International Publishers Co,
(Read Part One)
2. Polyani, K (1947) On Belief in Economic Determinism, Sociological Review Vol. 39, No. 1
3. Callinicos, A. (2004) Making History: Agency Structure, and Change in Social Theory, Brill
Leiden (Read Chapter 1 and Chapter 2)
4. Althusser, L.(2006). "Ideology and ideological state apparatuses (notes towards an
investigation)." The anthropology of the state: A reader,
5. Jürgen Habermas (1991) The structural transformation of the public sphere: An inquiry into a
category of bourgeois society. MIT Press. (Read Section I)
6. Bernstein, B. & Henderson, D.(1969) Social Class Differences in the Relevance of
Language to Socialization, Sage Social Sciences Collections
7. Gramsci, A. (1971) "The intellectuals and the Notes on Italian History and Passive
Revolution in ‘Selections from Prison Notebook, International Publications New York
8. Marcuse, H. (2013) Onedimensional Man: Studies in the ideology of advanced industrial
society. Routledge, London (Read Chapter 2 and 4 in part I)
9. Guha R. (1997) Dominance without hegemony: History and power in colonial India. Harvard
University Press, 1997. NA (Read chapter one and two)

Unit III
Interpretative Orientations in Human Interaction
This module begins with assessing Weberian emphasis on rational social action and moves on
to consider the relevance of the cultural turn in modern social theory.

Essential Readings:

1. Weber, M. (1978). Economy and society: An outline of interpretive sociology, University of

California Press (volume 1: PART 2: THE ECONOMY AND THE ARENA OF
NORMATIVEAND DE FACTO POWERS.
2. Gerth, H & Mills, C.W(1946) From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology,‘Science as Vocation,’
Oxford University Press, New York (Available Online)
3. Giddens, A (1993) New Rules of Sociological Method: A Positive Critique of Interpretative
Sociologies, Stanford University Press. (Read it in hard copy Chapter two: Agency, Act-
identifications and Communicative Intent)
4. Smith, D (1991) The Rise of Historical Sociology, Temple University Press. (Read it in hard
copy chapter one: Like a Phoenix Rising )

Page 5 of 9
5. Rock, P. (1976). Some Problems of Interpretative Historiography. The British Journal of
Sociology, 27(3), 353369. Retrieved from http://www.jstor.org/stable/589621
6. Oliver, I. (1983). The 'Old' and the 'New' Hermeneutic in Sociological Theory. The
British Journal of Sociology, 34(4), 519553. ( Retrieved from http://www.jstor.org/stable
/590937 )
7. Geertz, C (1973) The Interpretation of Cultures, Basic Books, Inc., Publishers, New York.
(Read Chapter one: Thick Description: Toward an Interpretive Theory of Culture).
8. Bourdieu, P & Wacquant, L (1992). An Invitation to Reflexive Sociology, University of
Chicago Press Books (Read Part Three: The Practice of Reflexive Sociology (The Paris
Workshop) (Available Online)
9. Hall, S.(1994) Cultural Studies: Two paradigm in A Reader in Contemporary Social Theory
Ed. Nicholas Dirks and others, Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey
(Read it in hard copy)

Unit IV
Interactionist and Phenomenological Orientation of Individual and Society.

In this module we examine how social theory has focused on the individual and the sphere of
interaction as a way of understanding the individual and group in the diverse practices that go
into the making of everyday life in this connection the module focuses on Interactionism,
phenomenology, ethnomethodology and dramaturgy.

Essential Readings:

1. George Herbert Mead (Edited by Charles W. Morris) (1934) Mind Self and Society from the
Standpoint of a Social Behaviorist, University of Chicago Press. (Read Part two on Mind).
2. Cooley, C.H. (1909) Social Organization: A Study of the Larger Mind. NewYork:
Charles Scribner's Sons, pp. 2531. (The part on Primary Groups from pg 2531)
Another essay by Charles Horton Cooley. "A Primary Culture for Democracy,"
Publications of the American Sociological Society 13, (1918): 110.
Link: https://brocku.ca/MeadProject/Cooley/Cooley_1918b.html (Both these essays will
have to be presented together)
3. Blumer, H. (1980). Mead and Blumer: The Convergent Methodological Perspectives of Social
Behaviorism and Symbolic Interactionism. American Sociological Review, 45(3), 409
419. (Retrieved from http://www.jstor.org/stable/2095174)
4. Garfinkel, H (1967) Studies in Ethnomethodology, Polity Press. ( Read chapter Four: Some Rules
of Correct Decisions that Jurors Respect)
5. Willis, P (1977) Learning to Labour: How Working Class Kids Get Working Class Jobs, Columbia
University Press. (Read selected portions as given in module)
6. Atkinsonm, P(1988) Ethnomethodology: A Critical Review Annual Review of Sociology, Vol. 14.
7. Goffman, E.(1956) The presentation of self in everyday life, University of Edinburgh Social
Science Research Centre. (Read Chapter VI titled The Arts of Impression Management)
8. Gorman, R. (1975). Alfred SchutzAn Exposition and Critique. The British Journal of Sociology,
26(1), 119. (Retrieved from http://www.jstor.org/stable/589239)

Page 6 of 9
9. Costelloe, T. (1996). Between the Subject and Sociology: Alfred Schutz's Phenomenology of the
LifeWorld. Human Studies, 19(3), 247266. (Retrieved from http://www.jstor.org/stable/2001111)

Unit V
Post Structuralist Orientations of Modernity and Post Modernity

In this module we examine the role of structuralism and post structuralism in dealing with issues of
social structure, subjectivity, power, agency as well as the critical interventions on themes of
modernity and post modernity.

Essential Readings:
1. LéviStrauss, C. (2008). Structural Anthropology. Basic Books. (Read chapter Structural analysis in
Linguistics and in Anthropology)
2. LéviStrauss, C. (2008). Structural Anthropology. Basic Books. (Read chapter The Structural
study of myth).
3. Hugo G. N. (1971) Ideological Bases of LeviStruass’ Structuralism, American Anthropologist Vol.
73, No. 3,
4. Bourdieu, P (1977) Outline of theory of Practice, Cambridge University Press. ( Read Section 1:
Analyses in Part One)
5. Bourdieu, P (1977) Outline of theory of Practice, Cambridge University Press.
(Read Part two: Structure and The Habitus)
5. Bourdieu, P. (1986) The forms of capital. In J. Richardson (Ed.) Handbook of Theory and Research
for the Sociology of Education (New York, Greenwood), 241258.
(Read the essay titled: The Forms of Capital by Pierre Bourdieu)
6. Foucault, M (1989) The Order of Things: An archaeology of the human sciences, Routledge.
(Read section 2: The Prose of the World in Part One).
7. Foucault, M (1991) The Foucault Effect: Studies in governmentality, ed. By Graham Burchell et
al., University of Chicago Press. (Read chapter four: Governmentality)
8. Foucault, M (1991) The Foucault Effect: Studies in governmentality, ed. By Graham Burchell et
al., University of Chicago Press. ( Read chapter three: Questions of Method)
9. Giddens, A (1990) The Consequences of Modernity, Stanford University Press. ( Read Part One)
10. Beck, U (1992) Risk Society: Towards a New Modernity, Sage Publications, United Kingdom.
(Read Part One Living on the Volcano of CivilizationThe Contours of the Risk Society
11. Harvey, David (1989) The conditions of Postmodernity: An enquiry into the origins of cultural
change, Blackwell Publishers. (Read Part I)

Unit VI
Feminist and Gender Orientations.
This orientation will deal with the critical ways in which feminist thought has reshaped the
theory and practice of sociological analysis in the past half century. In taking up a critique of
modern capitalism and patriarchy, it also looks at issues of gender discrimination and human
rights.

Essential Readings:

Page 7 of 9
1. Pamela Abbot, P. & Wallace, C. (2005)An Introduction to Sociology: Feminist
Perspectives, Routledge London (Read Chapter 1 and 2)
2. Nancy F. (2009) Feminism, Capitalism and the Cunning of History. New Left
Review No. 56, March April.
3. Scott, J W (1986)Gender: A Useful Category of Historical Analysis. The American
Historical Review. Vol. 91, No. 5, pp. 1053 1075.
4. Sinha M.(2000) Refashioning Mother India: Feminism and Nationalism in Late Colonial
India," Feminist Studies Vol. 26, NO. 3, October 1
5. Sarkar, T.(1987) "Nationalist Iconography: Image of Women in 19th Century Bengali
literature", EPW, 22, 47, Nov 21
6. Sangari, K., & Vaid, S. (1989) Recasting Women: An Introduction in Recasting Women:
Essays in Colonial History ed. Sangari K. and Vaid S., Rutgers University Press, New
Brunswick, New Jersey.
7. Uma Chakravarti (1995) Gender, Caste and LabourIdeological and Material Structure of
Widow hood, EPW, Vol. XXX, No. 36, Sep. 09.
8. Ambedkar, B. R., & In Rege, S. (2013). Against the madness of Manu: B.R. Ambedkar's
writings on Brahmanical patriarchy. (Read introductory chapters)
9. Velaskar, P. (2002) Theorizing Dalit Women’s Oppression, Paper Presented at the
workshop Dalit Feminism organized by IWAS and Women’s Studies Unit TISS Mumbai.

Unit VII
Theorizing Indian Society
This orientation deals with the sociological analysis of Indian society. It critically examines
the main themes of identity, social structure, power, ideology in shaping the contemporary
sociologi cal discourse of modern Indian society.

Essential Readings:

1. Dumont, L.&Pocock D.F.(1957) For a sociology of India” Contributions to Indian Sociology,

2. F.G. Bailey 1963; Politics and Social Change: Orissa in 1959
3. T.N. Madan 1966; Family and Kinship: a Study of the Pandits of Rural Kashmir
4. Patel, S (2006) Beyond Binaries: A Case for Self Reflexive Sociologies, Current Sociology, May
2006, vol. 54 no. 3, pp: 381395
5. Sarkar, B. K. (1985) The Positive Background of Hindu Sociology, Motilal Banarasidas, Varanasi.
(Read chapter I and II)
6. Srinivas, M.N. (1987) Development of Sociology in India: An Overview, Economic and Political
Weekly, Vol. 22, No. 4 (Jan. 24, 1987), pp. 135138.
7. Dhanagare, D.N. (1998) Themes and Perspectives In Indian Sociology. Rawat Publications,
New Delhi. (Read chapters 3 and 8)
8. Mani, B. R. (2005). Debrahmanising history: Dominance and resistance in Indian
society. Manohar Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi. ( Read Part Introduction and part I)
9. Ambedkar, B. R. (1990). Annihilation of Caste: An Undelivered Speech. Arnold Publishers.

Page 8 of 9
10. Omvedt, G. (1990)Dalits and the Democratic Revolution: Dr Ambedkar and the Dalit Movement
in Colonial India, OUP, New Delhi. (Read Introduction and * Towards a Historical Materialist
Analysis of the Origins and Development of Caste)
11. Guru, G (ed.) Humiliation: Claims and Context, OUP, New Delhi. (Read Introduction )

Page 9 of 9
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI – 627 012

Syllabus for Ph.D., Course Work in Statistics

(With effect from the academic year 2018-2019 onwards)

Following is the list of 14 courses carrying 4 credits each available to the

Ph.D., candidates of statistics for selection according to their requirements:

Sl. No. Course

1 Research Methodology
2 Advanced Sampling Techniques
3 Advanced Design of Experiments
4 Advanced Statistical Quality Control
5 Bayesian Inference
6 Statistical Inference in Econometrics
7 Stochastic Modeling and Its Applications
8 Markov Chains and Their Applications
9 Time Series Analysis and Its Applications
10 Advanced Operations Research
11 Reliability Theory and Its Applications
12 Data Mining Methods and Their Applications
13 Categorical Data Analysis
14 Mini Project

Page 1 of 15
 SYLLABUS

PAPER I: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Preamble: This course aims to guide the scholars towards achieving competence and
proficiency in the theory of statistics and practice to research. This fundamental
objective can be realized through helping the scholars to develop the subject of their
research, encourage the formation of trained intellectual ability in higher level, critical
analysis, rigor, and independence of thought, foster individual judgement, and skill in
the application of research theory and methods, and develop skills required in writing
research proposals, reports, and dissertation.
(12L)
Unit -I
Concept of Research – Importance of Research - Ethics in Research -
Selection of Research Topics and Problems – Research in Statistics - Literature
Survey and its Importance
(12L)
Unit- II
Preparation of Assignments, Thesis and Reports – Significance of Publications
in Research – Journals in Statistics.
(12L)
Unit III
Measurable function and its properties - Measure and Integration - Monotone
convergence theorem and Dominated convergence theorem - Fatou’s lemma.
Absolute continuity – Radon-Nikodym theorem – Singularity – Lebesgue
Decomposition theorem – Fubini’s theorem – Convergence types for measureable
functions: almost everywhere, in mean and in measure and their relationships.
(12L)
Unit IV
Basic Concepts of probability-Conditional Probability and Expectation-
Inversion theorem for characteristic functions-Helly’s theorem- Prokhorov’s theorem-
Levy’s continuity theorem and its variations.
(12L)
Unit V
Introduction to R – Using the help facility. R data types and objects, reading
and writing data- import and expert. Data structures: vectors, matrices, lists and data
frames – Built –in data – Reading data from others sources – Merging data across data
sources. Control structures: function, scoping rules, R dates and times- Grouping,
loop and conditional execution – Ordered and unordered factors – Arrays and
matrices – Classes and methods – graphical procedures – packages.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Kingman J.F.C and Taylor. J (1973): Introduction to Measure & Probability,
Cambridge University Press.
2. Loeve M. (1963): Probability Theory, Van Nostrand, Princeton, Newyork.
3. Halmos P.R (1974): Measure theory, East-West Press, New Delhi.
4. Kothari, C.K. (2006): Research Methodology, Prentice-Hall of India (P) Limited,
New Delhi.
5. MLA Handbook for writers of research papers, Modern Language Association,
New York (2009).
6. Rowena Murry (2010): How to Write a Thesis, Tata McGraw, New Delhi.

2
 PAPER II: ADVANCED SAMPLING TECHNIQUES

Preamble: Various methods of sampling widely used in practice are introduced in

this course, which include PPS, SRS, Cluster, two-stage and two-phase sampling. The
contents will enable the scholars to learn about the field survey, and the computational
aspects of various estimators and their sampling errors.

Unit – I (12L)
Single stage cluster sampling: Clusters of equal sizes – Reasons for Cluster
Sampling – A simple rule – Comparison of Precision Made from Survey Data –
Variance in terms of Intracluster correlation – Variance and Cost Functions – Cluster
Sampling for Proportions.
Cluster Units of unequal sizes – Selection with unequal probabilities with
replacement – Optimum measure of size – The Horvitz-Thompson estimator –
Brewer’s Method – Murthy’s Method – The Rao, Hartley, Cochran Method.
(12L)
Unit – II
Multi stage sampling-Two-Stage and three Stage Sampling – Finding means
and variance in two-stage sampling – variance of the estimated mean in two-stage
sampling. Sample estimation of the variance – estimation of proportions. Optimum
Sampling and Subsampling Fractions.
(12L)
Unit – III
Double Sampling – Description – Double sampling for Startification –
Optimum allocation – Estimation of variance in Double Sampling for Starttification.
Regression and Ratio Estimators.
(12L)
Unit – IV
Successive Sampling – Repetitive Surveys – Sampling on two occasions –
Sampling on more than two occasions – Sampling for Time series.
(12L)
Unit – V
Sequential Sampling – definition – estimation of population size –
comparative study – estimation of population mean – acceptable sequential estimators
– Markov Sampling
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Ardilly P and Yves T. (2006): Sampling Methods: Exercise and Solutions.
Springer.
2. Cochran, W.G. (1977): Sampling Techniques, Third Edition, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,
New Delhi.
3. Daroga Singh and F.S. Choudry (1977): Theory and Analysis of Sample Survey
Designs. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.
4. Mukhopadyay, P. (1998): Theory and Methods of Survey Sampling. Narosa
Publisher, New Delhi.
5. Murthy, M.N. (1977): Sampling Theory and Methods. Statistical Publishing
Society, Kolkatta, India.
6. Raj, D. (1976): Sampling Theory, Tata McGraw Hill, New York.
7. Raj, D. and Chandhok, P. (1998). Sample Survey Theory. Narosa Publishing
House, London.
8. Mukhopadyay, P. (2007). Survey Sampling. Narosa Publisher, New Delhi.
9. Mukhopadyay, P. (1998). Small area estimation in Survey Sampling. Narosa
Publisher, New Delhi.

3
 PAPER – III: ADVANCED DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS

Preamble: This course introduces scholars to concepts and techniques of Classical

and Bayesian design - experimental units, randomization, treatments, blocking and
restrictions to randomization, and utility of designs. To be able to determine
appropriate fixed, random , mixed models, general block designs, missing plot
techniques, analysis of covariance, factorial experiments and split plot experimental
designs and statistical analyses for the optimization of processes.

Unit – I (12L)
Construction of Orthogonal Latin Square of order s, s is a prime or prime
power. Construction of Orthogonal arrays.
(12L)
Unit – II
Construction and analysis of confounded Symmetrical and Asymmetrical
Factorial Experiments. Fractional Factorials and Main Effects plans – Method of
construction of plans with factors at 2 levels, a series of orthogonal arrays of strength
3 (Resolution 4 Plans) with factors at 2 levels. Orthogonal main effects plans with
factors at 3 and other levels. Construction and Analysis of Fractionally replicated
Factorial Experiments Blocking in fractionally replicated designs.
(12L)
Unit – III
Construction and analysis of Quasi-Factorial Experiments Lattice designs –
Simple Lattice – Kple Lattice, ‘n’ dimensional Lattice; Square Lattice – Rectangular
Lattice. Construction and Analysis of Balanced Incomplete Block Designs.
BIBD,Partially balanced incomplete block designs, Revision and construction.
Balanced / partially balanced ‘n’ array designs - Augmented designs.
(12L)
Unit – IV
Second and third order Rotatable designs – Central composite rotatable
designs. Blocking in response surface designs.
Analysis of groups of Experiments – Sequential experiments analysis of long
term experiments – Problems faced in the design and analysis of experiments for
perennial crops. Construction and analysis of cross-over designs
(12L)
Unit – V
Diallel Crosses – Complete Diallel crosses, its analysis and efficiency factor,
Optimal Diallel crosses plane. Robustness of Designs. Robustness of Diallel crosses
plan.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Cochran, W.G and Cox, G.M. (1987): Experimental Designs, John Wiley, New
York.
2. Das, M.N. and Giri, N.C. (1986): Design and analysis of experiments, Wiley
Eastern Ltd. New Delhi.
3. Fisher, R.A. (1947): The Design of experiments, 4th edition, Oliver and Boyd,
London.
4. Graybill, F.A. (1976): Theory and Application of the Linear Model, Wadsworth.
5. John, P.W.M.(1971): Statistical Design and analysis of experiments, Macmillon.
6. Joshi, D.D. (1987): Linear estimation and design of experiments. Wiley Eastern,
New Delhi.
7. Rao, C.R.(1974): Linear Statistical inference and its applications, Wiley Eastern,
2nd edition.
8. Searle, S.R. (1971): Linear models, John Wiley, New York.
4
 PAPER – IV: ADVANCED STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL

Preamble: This course facilitates an understanding of the principles of statistical

quality control and reliability. Various types of control charts and techniques,
acceptance sampling procedures, concepts of system reliability and maintenance
policies are introduced, which will enable the scholars to understand the application
of the concepts in industries.
(12L)
Unit – I:
Process Control: Control Charts by Variables and Attributes – Rational
Subgroups - Basic Charts - Operating Characteristic and Average Run Length
Functions – Designing Control Charts – Control Charts for Variable Sample Sizes and
Varying Sampling Intervals – Control Charts for Short Production Runs. Cumulative
Sum (CUSUM) Control Charts –V-mask Procedure – Tabular CUSUM Procedure.
Moving Range, Moving Average, and Exponentially Weighted Moving Average
Control Charts – Design and Robustness of Charts.
(12L)
Unit – II:
Tolerance Limits and Specification Limits – Setting Specification Limits –
Estimation of Tolerance Limits. Acceptance Control Charts, Modified Control Charts.
Capability Analysis: Process Capability Ratios - Process Capability Analysis using
Histogram, Probability Plotting, Control Chart, Designed Experiments. Multivariate
Control Chart: Hotelling’s T2 and Chi-square Control Charts, Multivariate
Exponentially Weighted Moving Average Control Chart.
(12L)
Unit – III:
Product Control: Sampling Inspection by Attributes – Single, Double,
Multiple, Repetitive Group, Sequential Sampling Plans – Operating Procedure, Plan
Selection, Measures of Performance. Sampling Inspection by Variables – Assumption
of Normality – Single, Double and Sampling Plans – Operating Procedures, Plan
Selection Procedures, OC Functions.
(12L)
Unit – IV:
Attributes Sampling schemes – MIL-STD-105D - Normal, Reduced and
Tightened Inspections - Plan selection. Variables Sampling Schemes – MIL-STD-414
– Procedures for Operation and Selection of Plans. Rectifying Sampling Schemes –
Concept of ATI and AOQL - Dodge – Romig LTPD and AOQL Single and Double
Sampling Plans Schemes – Selection of Parameters.
(12L)
Unit – V:
Sampling Plans for Continuous Production – Continuous Sampling Plans -
CSP-1, CSP-2 and CSP-3 – Operation, Stopping Rules and Plan Selection – Measures
of Performance. MIL-STD-1235 (ORD):
Special Purpose Plans: Skip-lot and Chain Sampling Plans - Operation and
Selection - Measures of Performance. Switching Systems and TNT Sampling
Schemes.
Reliability Sampling Plans – Type I and Type II Censoring – Reliability
Criteria – Operation and Plan Selection – Measures of Performance.
(Total:60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Bowker, A.N., and N.P.Goode (1952): Sampling Inspection by Variables.
McGraw Hill, New York.

5
2. Costa, A.F.B.(1996): Joint and R Charts with Variable Sample Size and
Sampling Intervals. Report No.142, Centre for Quality and Productivity
Improvement, University of Wisconsin, Wisconsin.
3. Costa, A.F.B.(1997): X-bar Chart with Variable Sample Size and Sampling
Intervals. Journal of Quality Technology, 29(2), 197-204.
4. Duncan, A.J.(1986): Quality Control and Industrial Statistics (Fifth Edition):
Irwin, Homewood, Illinois.
5. Juran, J.M., and J.A.De Feo (2010): Juran’s Quality Handbook – The Complete
Guide to Performance Excellence. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
6. Montgomery, D.C.(2002): Statistical Quality Control – An Introduction (Sixth
Edition): Wiley India, New Delhi. (Reprint, 2008).
7. Schneider, H.(1989): Failure Censored Variables Sampling Plans for Lognormal
and Weibull Distributions. Technometrics, 31(2), 199-206.
8. Squeglia, N.L. (2009): Zero Acceptance Number Sampling Plans (Fifth Edition):
ASQ Quality Press, Wisconsin.
9. Stephens, K.S.(2001): The Handbook of Applied Acceptance Sampling – Plans,
Principles and Procedures. ASQ Quality Press, Wisconsin.
10. Stephens, K.S.(1995): How to Perform Skip-Lot and Chain Sampling (Second
Edition): ASQ Quality Press, Wisconsin.

PAPER V: BAYESIAN INFERENCE

Preamble: This course explains the theory of Bayesian methods and their
applications. From the contents of this course, the scholars will understand the
difference between classical (frequentist) methods and Bayesian methods. The course
will emphasize Bayesian data analysis through modern computer simulation methods.
(12L)
Unit – I
Subjective probability – its interpretation and evaluation. Subjective
determination of prior distributions. Improper prior, noninformative prior, invariant
prior, Jeffreys noninformative prior and natural conjugate prior – family of
distributions admitting natural conjugate prior. Models with hyperparameters and
hierarchical priors.
(12L)
Unit – II
Point estimation – Bayes estimators under various loss functions –
generalization to convex loss functions. Evaluation of the estimate in terms of
posterior risk – comparison with frequentist methods.
(12L)
Unit – III
Interval estimation – credible interval, highest posterior density region.
Comparison of interpretation of the confidence co-efficient of an interval by Bayesian
and frequentist methods – simple problems.
(12L)
Unit – IV
Bayesian testing of statistical hypotheses and model selection – specification
of the appropriate form of the prior distribution for Bayesian hypothesis testing
problem – prior odds, posterior odds, Bayes factor and their computations to various
hypotheses testing problems – specification of Bayes tests.
(12L)
Unit – V
Bayesian computation – Monte Carlo sampling and integration – Markov
Chain Monte Carlo methods – Metropolis-Hastings algorithm, Gibbs sampling –
theory and applications of these methods to high dimensional problems. Large
6
sample methods – limit of posterior distribution, asymptotic expansion of posterior
distribution, Laplace approximation.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Berger, J.O. (1985): Statistical Decision Theory and Bayesian Analysis (Second
Edition): Springer Verlag, New York.
2. Bernardo, J.M., and A.F.M. Smith(2000): Bayesian Theory. John Wiley & Sons,
New York.
3. Gelman, A., J.B. Carlin, H.B. Stern and D.B. Rubin (2004): Bayesian Data
Analysis (Second Edition): Chapman & Hall, London.
4. Ghosh, J.K., Mohan Delampady and T. Samanta (2006): An Introduction to
Bayesian Analysis – Theory and Methods. Springer Verlag, New York. (Reprint,
2011).
5. Lee, P.M. (2012): Bayesian Statistics – An Introduction (Fourth Edition): John
Wiley & Sons, London.
6. Leonard, T., and J.S.J. Hsu (1999): Bayesian Methods: An Analysis for
Statisticians and Interdisciplinary Researchers. Cambridge University Press,
London.
7. Robert, C.P. (1994): The Bayesian Choice: A Decision-Theoretic Motivation
(Second Edition): Springer Verlag, New York.
8. Robert, C.P., and G. Casella (2004): Monte Carlo Statistical Methods (Second
Edition): Springer Verlag, New York.

PAPER-VI: STATISTICAL INFERENCE IN ECONOMETRICS

Preamble: The objective of this course is to provide the basic principles of

econometric models. This course will enable the scholars to use the models in the
fields like engineering sciences, biological sciences, medical sciences, geo-sciences,
agriculture sciences etc. It focuses on general linear models, generalized least square
method and estimation of the parameters of the models.
(12L)
Unit-I
Inference on OLS Model, Estimation Subject to linear Constraints test for
Structural change, use of dummy variable, serial correlation, nature of multi-
collinearity, Estimation in the presence of perfect Multi-collinearity, specification
error, lagged variables, qualitative dependent variables.
(12L)
Unit-II
Estimation of parameters in single equation model and classical least square
model, Generalized least estimator, Autocorrelation and its consequences,
Hetrosedacity of disturbances and its testing, test for independence of disturbances,
Stochastic regressors, use of instrumental variables.
(12L)
Unit-III
Concept of structure and model for simultaneous, Simultaneous Equation
method of Estimation, Identification problem, limited information model, Indirect
Least Square, Two Stage Least Square, LVRP method, Full Information method:
Three Stage Least Square, and FIML Method.
(12L)
Unit-IV
Autoregressive model of first and second order, periodogram analysis,
explosive models, Regression model for Time Series, concept relating to spectral
density estimation.
7
 (12L)
Unit-V
Multivariate Regression, classification analysis, Data Reduction Techniques:
Discriminant function, principle components, Cluster analysis and canonical
correlations.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY

1. Alvin C. Rencher (2002): Methods of Multivariate Analysis, John Wiley & Sons,
New York.
2. Baltagi, B.H (2009): Econometrics, 5th Edition, Springer publisher, New York.
3. Goldberger (1964): Econometrics theory, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.
4. Gujarati. D (2003): Basic Econometrics (4rd Ed.), McGraw Hill, New York.
5. Johnson, J (1984): Econometric methods (3rd Ed.), McGraw Hill, New York.
6. Anderson, T.W (1971): The Statistical Analysis of Series, John Wiley, New York.
7. Maddala, G.S and Kajal Lagari (2009): Introduction to Econometrics, John Wiley
& Sons

PAPER - VII: STOCHASTIC MODELING AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Preamble: The contents of the course will explain various concepts of stochastic
processes which have wider scope in many areas of scientific experiments and
research. The course will focus on the theoretical concepts pertaining to classification
of stochastic processes and their properties.
(12L)
Unit-I
Introduction of stochastic processes - Specifications of a stochastic processes -
Markov chains -Classification of states and chains - Higher transition probabilities
and its limiting behavior -Chapman Kolmogorov’s equations - Stationary distribution
- Ergodic theorem - Continuous time Markov processes - Poisson processes.
(12L)
Unit-II
Birth and death processes - Kolmogorov Feller differential equations of birth
and death processes - Renewal theory - Renewal equation - Stopping time - Wald’s
equation - Elementary renewal theorem and its applications - Renewal reward
processes - Residual and Excess life times - Markov renewal and Semi Markov
processes.
(12L)
Unit-III
Introduction to Queueing Theory - Basic characteristics of a Queueing system
and Problems in Queueing system-Probability Distributions as Models - Basic
Concepts in Stochastic Queueing models - Kendall’s notation for Queueing models-
Little’s Formulas - Stochastic process representation of Queueing theory-Steady state
solutions for the queueing models.
(12L)
Unit-IV
Birth and Death Queueing models-State dependent service pattern-transient
behavior of queues-Inventory models as a queueing models - Detailed study of single
and multiple server queueing models - Advanced Markovian Queueing Models -
Erlangian Bulk Queues - Retrial Queues - Queue with Priority Disciplines -
Preemptive priority and Non - Preemptive priority queue - Queueing Networks-
Vacation Queueing Models- Bernoulli Vacation Queueing Models.
(12L)

8
Unit-V
Higher transition probabilities – higher order Markov chains - Multivariate
Markov chain models - Applications to queues and storage problems - Decision
Problems in Queueing Theory - Simulation techniques in Queueing Models - Case
Studies and Applications in Queueing theory.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Ching, W.K and Michael, K (2006): Markov Chains: Models, Algorithms and
Applications, Springer Science Business Media, Inc.
2. Cox, D.R. and A.D. Miller (1977): The Theory of Stochastic Processes, Chapman
& Hall.
3. Feller, W. (1968): An Introduction to Probability Theory and its applications, Vol
I and II. John Wiley.
4. Gross, D. and Harris, C. M. (2008): Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, Fourth
Edition, John Wiley & Sons.
5. Hiller, F.S and Lieberman, G.J. (2004): Introduction to Operations Research,
Chapters 10 and 11- Holden-Day.
6. Hiller, F.S and Taylor, H.M. (1980): Second Course in Stochastic Processes,
Academic Press.
7. Karlin, S. and Taylor, H.M (1968): A First Course in Stochastic Processes – Vol.
I. Academic Press, New York.
8. Medhi, J. (2009): Stochastic Processes, 3rd Edition, New Age International
Publishing Limited, New Delhi.
9. Medhi, J. (2003): Stochastic Processes in Queueing Theory, second edition,
Academic Press.
10. Narayan Bhat, U. (2008): An Introduction to Queueing Theory-Modeling and
Analysis in Applications, Birkhauser.

PAPER- VIII: MARKOV CHAINS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

Preamble: This course deals with Markov processes in various areas of applications.
Markov chains in discrete and continuous time with respect to state diagram,
recurrence and transience, classification of states, periodicity, irreducibility, etc., and
be able to calculate transition probabilities and intensities for pursuing higher studies
leading to post-graduate or doctorate degrees
(12L)
Unit-I
Introduction of stochastic processes-Classification of stochastic processes -
Markov chains -Classification of states and chains - Higher transition probabilities
and its limiting behavior - Chapman Kolmogorov’s equations - Stationary distribution
- Ergodic theorem - One dimensional random walk and Gambler’s ruin problems.
(12L)
Unit-II
Continuous time Markov processes - Poisson processes and related
distributions - Birth and death processes - Kolmogorov Feller differential equations of
birth and death processes - Applications to queues and storage problems and Wiener
process as a limit of random walks.
(12L)
Unit-III
Introduction to molecular biology – Bioinformatics and sequence analysis –
Sequence alignment – BLAST – Multiple sequence alignment – Clustering
algorithms.
(12L)
9
Unit-IV
Protein and DNA sequence analysis: Pattern discovery and sequence
classification in proteins and nucleic acids - Proteins & proteomics prediction of
molecular function and structures –DNA and RNA structure prediction.
(12L)
Unit-V
Introduction of Hidden Markov model: Evaluation problem of HMM –Viterbi
algorithm - Baum Welch algorithm - HMM applications in DNA &RNA –
Advantages and limitations of HMM - Profile HMMs for Biological sequence
Analysis.

BOOKS FOR STUDY

1. Cinlar, E (1974): Introduction to Stochastic Processes, Prentice Hall Publisher.
2. Cox, D.R. and A.D. Miller (1977): The Theory of Stochastic Processes, Chapman
& Hall.
3. Gauham. N., (2009). Bioinformatics Databases and Algorithms, Narosa Publishing
House, New Delhi.
4. Igacimuthu, S., (2009). Basic Bioinformatics Publishing House PVT. LTD, New
Delhi.
5. Karlin, S. and Taylor, H.M (1968): A First Course in Stochastic Processes – Vol. I.
Academic Press, New York.
6. Medhi, J. (2009): Stochastic Processes, 3rd Edition, New Age International
Publishing Limited, New Delhi.
7. Ross, S.M (1996): Stochastic Processes, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New
Delhi.
8. Shui Qing Ye., (2008). Bio informatics A Practical Approach, Chapman &
Hall/CRC, Taylor & Francis Group LLC.

PAPER-IX: TIME SERIES ANALYSIS AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Preamble: The objective of this course is to provide time series models which are
applicable in various fields such as signal processing, pattern recognition,
econometrics, mathematical finance, weather forecasting, intelligent transport and
trajectory forecasting, earthquake prediction, control engineering, astronomy,
communications engineering. The scholars will be able to apply the time series
models focusing on MA, AR, ARMA, ARIMA models, estimation of ARIMA model
parameters and forecasting.
(12L)
Unit- I
Stationary time Series, Auto correlation and Partial auto correlation function,
Correlogram analysis, Spectral properties of stationary models, periodogram analysis,
and spectral density function.
(12L)
Unit- II
Detail study of stationary process: moving average, autoregressive,
autoregressive moving average and autoregressive integrated moving average process,
Box – Jenkins models.
(12L)
Unit- III
Estimation of mean, auto covariance and auto correlation function under large
sample theory, choice of AR and MA periods, Estimation of ARIMA model
parameters, forecasting with Box – Jenkins model, Residual analysis and diagnostic
checking.
(12L)
10
Unit- IV
Conditional Heteroscedasticity Model-Characteristic of Volatility- Auto
regressive conditional Heteroscedasticity (ARCH)- Testing of ARCH effect-
Generalized Auto regressive conditional Heteroscedasticity (GARCH) and GARCH-
M model.
(12L)
Unit- V
Multivariate time series – cross correlation function and their properties-
Vector Auto regressive model- Vector moving average model - VARIMA model – co
integrated VAR model and Vector error control model (VECM).
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY

1. Box, G.E.P., Jenkins, G.M. and Reinsel, G.C (2004). Time Series Analysis-
Forecasting and Control, Pearson Education, Singapore.
2. Brockwel, P.J and Davis. R.A (1987). Time Series: Theory and Methods, Springer
– Verlag, New York.
3. Granger, C.W.J. and Newbold (1984). Forecasting Econometric Time Series,
Academic Press, New York.
4. Montgomery, D.C. and Johnson, L.A. (1977) Forecasting and Time Series
Analysis, McGraw Hill, New York.
5. Shum way, R. H. and Stoffer, David S. (2006) Time Series Analysis and Its
Applications: With R Examples. Springer-Verlag.
6. Tsay, R (2009). Analysis of Financial Time series, Willey Interscience Publisher.

PAPER-X: ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Preamble: Operations research is the professional discipline that deals with the
application of scientific methods in decision making. The objective of this course is
to provide adequate coverage of mathematical techniques and models and to equip the
scholars to apply them in industries such as airline industry (routing and flight planes,
crew scheduling), manufacturing industry (inventory control, production scheduling,
capacity planning), transportation (traffic control, network flow, location planning)
etc.
(12L)
Unit – I
Non-Linear integer programming-Beale’s algorithm. Zero-one programming
problem. Integer polynomial programming – Geometric programming and its
applications. Stochastic programming.
(12L)
Unit – II
Continuous State Dynamic Programming. Bellman’s principle of dynamic
programming. Forward and backward process of solving a dynamic programming
problem. Stage coach problem. Advanced multi-period stochastic models. Use of
dynamic programming in inventory problems.
(12L)
Unit – III
Stochastic inventory models-multiperiod models - solution through dynamic
programming (s, S) inventory policies. Replacement problems – replacement of item
failing according to probability law-block and age replacement policies.
(12L)

11
Unit – IV
Queuing models: Transient and busy period analysis in M/M/1 system –
M/G/1 and G1/M/1 Queues – imbedded Markov chain approach to queueing
problems.
(12L)
Unit – V
Job sequencing problem – Principle assumptions of sequencing problem –
Solution of sequencing problem – Processing n jobs through two machines problem
and Processing n jobs through three machines problem.
Priority Queueing models-Preemptive and Non-preemptive priroty queueing
models.
(Total: 60L)
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Gross.D and Harris.C.M. (1976): Fundamental of queueing throry, Jhon Wiley.
2. Hadley,G. (1974): Non-linear and Dynamic programming, Addition-Wesley.
3. Hadley,G and Whitin, (1963): Analysis of Inventory system, Prentice Hall.
4. Hiller.F.S and Lieberman,G.J. (1974): Operations Research, holden-Day.
5. Philips, D. T. Ravindran, A. and Solberg, J.T.(2007): Operations Research
Principles and Practice.
6. Prabhu,N.U (2012): Queues and Inventories, John Wiley.
7. Rao,S.S. (1978): Operations Theory and application, Wiley Eastern.
8. Shamblin and Stevens,Jr. (1974): Operations Research, McGraw Hill.

PAPER - XI: RELIABILITY THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Preamble: Basic principles of reliability theory will be emphasized. Scholars will get
the exposure on practical utility of reliability models.
(12L)
UNIT I
Reliability concepts and measures – components and systems – coherent
systems and their reliability – cuts and paths – modular decomposition – bounds on
system reliability – structural reliability importance of components.
(12L)
UNIT II
Life time distributions – reliability function – hazard rate - common life time
distributions – exponential, gamma, normal, Weibull, Rayleigh etc. – estimation of
parameters and testing of hypotheses in these distributions.
(12L)
UNIT III
Notions of ageing – IFR, IFRA, NBU, DMRL and NBUE classes and their
duals – implications – closures of these classes under formation of coherent systems.
(12L)
UNIT IV
Reliability estimation based on failure times under various censored life tests
and tests with replacement of failed items – stress-strength reliability and its
estimation.
(12L)
UNIT V
Reliability growth models – probability plotting techniques – Hollander-
Proschan and Deshpande tests for exponentiality – tests for HPP vs NHPP with
repairable systems. Basic ideas of accelerated life testing.
(Total: 60L)

12
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Bain L.J., and Engelhardt (1991): Statistical Analysis of Reliability and Life
Testing Models. Marcel Dekker, New York.
2. Barlow, R.E., and Proschan,F. (1981): Statistical Theory of Reliability and Life
Testing (Second Edition). Holt, Rinehart and Winston, New York.
3. Blischke,W.R., and Murthy,D.N.P. (2000): Reliability – Modeling, Prediction
and Optimization. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
4. Lawless,J.F. (2003): Statistical Models and Methods for Lifetime Data (Second
Edition). Wiley Interscience, Singapore.
5. Mann,N.R., Schafer,R.E. and Singpurwalla,N.D. (1974): Methods of Statistical
Analysis of Reliability and Life Data. John Wiley & Sons, New York.
6. Nelson,W.B. (2004): Applied Life Data Analysis. John Wiley & Sons, New
York.
7. Singpurwalla,N.D. (2006): Reliability and Risk – A Bayesian Perspective. John
Wiley & Sons, New York.
8. Zacks,S. (1991): Introduction to Reliability Analysis. Springer Verlag, New
York.

PAPER-XII: DATA MINING METHODS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

Preamble: This course aims at facilitating the scholars to understand the basic
concepts of data warehousing and data mining. Techniques involved in mining the
data from the databases will be emphasized.
(12L)
Unit-I
Data mining- History-Definitions-Data Mining Functionalities- Classification
of Data mining System- Major Issues in Data mining-Data warehouse and OLAP
Technology-Multidimensional Data Model-Data warehouse Architecture- Data
Warehouse Implementation.
(12L)
Unit-II
Data Preprocessing-Data Cleaning- Data Integration and Transformation- Data
Reduction-Discretization and concept of Hierarchy Generation- Concept Description-
characterization and comparison. Association Rule Mining- Mining Single
Dimensional – Multilevel Association Rules-mining to correlation analysis-
classification and prediction
(12L)
Unit-III
Overview on outliers – nature of Outliers - Outliers in Univariate Data -
Outliers in Multivariate Data - Cluster Analysis, Cluster Vs Classification - impact of
Outliers on clustering - clustering problems - Clustering Approaches.
(12L)
Unit-IV
Data-outliers in regression analysis and Time series - Regression and
collinearity: Tools for handling multi- collinearity, methods based on singular value
decomposition – Robust Regression- ridge regression. Properties of ridge estimator.
Addtive outlier – Multiplicative outlier and innovational outlier.
(12L)
Unit-V
Stationary time Series, Auto correlation and Partial auto correlation function,
Correlogram analysis, Estimation of ARIMA model parameters, forecasting with Box
– Jenkins model, Residual analysis and diagnostic checking.
(Total: 60L)
13
BOOKS FOR STUDY
1. Box, G.E.P., Jenkins, G.M. and Reinsel, G.C (2004). Time Series Analysis-
Forecasting and Control, Pearson Education, Singapore.
2. Daniel T. Larose, (2006): Data Mining: Methods and Models, Wiley-Interscience,
New Jersey.
3. Draper, N.R, and H. Smith,(1998): Applied regression analysis,(2nd Ed) John
Wiley and sons, New York.
4. Hawkins, D.M, (1980): Identification of Outliers, Chapman and Hall, London.
5. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, (2006): Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques,
Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, second edition, San Francisco.
6. Krzysztof J.Cios, Wiltold Pedrycz, Roman W.Swiniarski, Lukasz A.Kurgan,
(2007): Data Mining: A Knowledge Discovery Approach, Springer Science
+Business Media, New York.
7. Montgomery, D.C. and Johnson, L.A. (1977) Forecasting and Time Series
Analysis, McGraw Hill, New York.
8. Paolo Giudici, (2005): Applied Data Mining: Statistical Methods for Business and
Industry, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, England.
9. Peter J. Rousseeuw and Annick M. Lorey, (1987): Robust Regression and Outlier
Detection, John Wiley & Sons, United States.
10. Vic Barnett and Toby Lewis, (1978): Outliers in Statistical Data, John Wiley &
sons.

PAPER - XIII: CATEGORICAL DATA ANALYSIS

Preamble: The objective of this course is to acquaint students with the basic ideas,
applicability and methods of data analysis. This course enables the students to apply
the various statistical techniques easily in practice.

Unit- I (12L)
Models for Binary Response Variables, Log Linear Models, Fitting Log linear
and Logic Models-Building and applying Log Linear Models, Log- Linear- Logit
Models for Ordinal Variables.
(12L)
Unit-II
Multinomial Reponse Models - Models for Matched Pairs- Analyzing
Repeated Categorical Response Data - Asymptotic Theory for Parametric Models -
Estimation Theory for Parametric Models.

Unit-III (12L)
Classical treatments of 2 and 3-way contingency tables, measures of
association and nonparametric methods - Generalized linear models - Logistic
regression for binary – multinomial and ordinal data - Log-linear models - Poisson
regression- Modelling repeated measurements - generalized estimating equations.

Unit-IV (12L)
Introduction to contingency tables: 2 × 2 and r × c tables - tests for
independence and homogeneity of proportions - Fishers exact test - Odds ratio and
Logit, other measures of association - Introduction to 3-way tables – full
independence and conditional independence - collapsing and Simpsons paradox.
(12L)

14
Unit-V
Polytomous logit models for ordinal and nominal response - Log-linear
models (and graphical models) for multi-way tables - Causality, repeated measures,
generalized least squares - mixed models, latent-class models, missing data, and
algebraic statistics approach.
(Total: 60L)

BOOKS FOR STUDY

1. Agresti, Alan (1996). An Introduction to Categorical Data Analysis, Wiley.

2. Bergsma, W., Croon, M.A. and Hagenaars, J.A. (2009). Marginal Models: For
Dependent, Clustered, and Longitudinal Categorical Data. Springer.
3. Bishop, Y.M., Fienberg, S.E. and Holland, P.W. (1975). Discrete Multivariate
Analysis: Theory and Practice, MIT Press.
4. Edwards, D. (2000). Introduction to Graphical Modeling (Second Edition).
Springer.
5. Fienberg, S.E. (1980). The Analysis of Cross-Classified Categorical Data.
MIT Press.
6. Wasserman, L. (2004). All of Statistics: A Concise Course in Statistical
Inference. Springer.
7. Whittaker, J. (1990). Graphical Models in Applied Multivariate Statistics.
Wiley.

*** *** ***

15
 Kd;Kidtu;g; gl;lg; ghlj;jpl;lk;
(COURSEWORK FOR DOCTORAL DEGREE)

jkpopay; Gyk;
TAMIL STUDIES
2018

kNdhd;kzpak; Re;judhH gy;fiyf;fofk;

jpUney;Ntyp -12
 KidtH gl;lj;jpw;fhd ghlj;jpl;lr; nray;epiy tbtikg;G

(Coursework for Doctoral degree)

jkpopay; Ma;tpay; Gyk;
kNdhd;kzpak; Re;judhH gy;fiyf;fofk;
jpUney;Ntyp -12

1. ,g;ghlj;jpl;lk; mbg;gilj;jhs;fs;> rpwg;Gj;jhs;fs; Mfpa ,Utifapdk; nfhz;lJ.

Ma;thsHfs; jq;fsJ gbg;Gf;F Kidtu;g; gl;l topfhl;bf;FO gupe;Jiuf;Fk;
jhs;fisj; njupT nra;Jnfhs;s Ntz;Lk;. Ma;tpay; epiwQH gl;lk; ngwhjtHfs;
mbg;gilj;jhs; gl;baypUe;J xU jhisf; fl;lhak; njupT nra;a Ntz;Lk;.
Ma;tpay; epiwQH gbg;G Kbj;jtHfSf;Fj; jhs; njuptpy; tiuaiw ,y;iy.

2 .Xt;nthUjhSk; ehd;F kjpg;gyFfSld; 5 $Wfisf; nfhz;likAk;. nkhj;jk;

100 kjpg;ngz;fs; nfhz;lJ.
3. tpdhj;jhs; mikg;G: nkhj;jk; 75 kjpg;ngz; nfhz;l Gwkjpg;gPl;Lg; gUtj; NjHT.
tpdhj;jhs; gFjp m> gFjp M vd ,uz;L gFjpfisf; nfhz;likAk;.
gFjp m - Ie;J kjpg;ngz; nfhz;l 5 tpdhf;fs; cs;khw;W tpdh mikg;Gld; xU
gf;ftstpy; tpilaspf;Fk; tifapy;.
gFjp M - 10 kjpg;ngz; nfhz;l 5 tpdhf;fs; cs;khw;W tpdh mikg;Gld;
mikAk;. vy;yhf; $WfSf;Fk; rk tha;g;gspf;f Ntz;Lk;.
4. kjpg;ngz;Kiw: mfkjpg;gPL. Gwkjpg;gPL vdj; njhlH kjpg;gPl;L Kiw gpd;gw;wg;gLk;.
mfkjpg;gPL 25 kjpg;ngz;fs;. 15 kjpg;ngz; nfhz;l xU gUtf; fl;Liu
Ma;thsHfs; muq;fpy; thrpj;jspf;f Ntz;Lk;. 10 kjpg;ngz;fs; fUj;juq;Ffs;>
gapyuq;Ffs; gq;Nfw;G Mfpatw;wpw;F toq;f Ntz;Lk;. xt;nthU jhSf;Fk;
jdpj;jdpf; fUj;juq;Ffs;> gapyuq;Ffs; gq;Nfw;G Njit. xU ehs; fUj;juq;fpw;F/
gapyuq;fpw;F 2 kjpg;ngz; vd;w mbg;gilapy; toq;fyhk;. fUj;juq;fpy; fl;Liu
toq;fpdhy; xU fl;Liuf;F 5 kjpg;ngz; toq;fyhk;. may; ehl;by; epfOk;
fUj;juq;fpy; gq;Nfw;why; 10 kjpg;ngz;fs; toq;fyhk;. gy;fiyf;fofq;fs; my;yJ
gy;fiyf;fof epjpey;iff; FOthy; xg;Gf;nfhs;sg;gl;l epWtdq;fshy; elj;jg;ngWk;
[e;Jehl;fSf;F Nkw;gl;l njhlu; gapyuq;fpy; gq;Nfw;why; Kd;KidtH;g;
gl;lj;jpw;fhfj; njupT nra;ag;ngw;Ws;s midj;Jj; jhs;fSf;Fk; 10 kjpg;ngz;
toq;fyhk;. fUj;juq;Ffs; / gapyuq;Ffs; gq;Nfw;G Ma;Tg; gjpTf;Fg; gpd;Dk; Nju;T
vOJk; Kd;Dk; epfo;e;jhfTk; Gyj; njhlHilajhfTk; ,Uf;f Ntz;Lk;.
midj;jpw;Fk; rhd;wpjo;fs; ,izf;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;.
Gwkjpg;gPl;Lj; NjHT 75 kjpg;ngz; nfhz;lJ. mfkjpg;gPL kw;Wk; Gwkjpg;gPL NrHj;J
nkhj;jk; 100 kjpg;ngz;fs; xt;nthUjhSf;Fk; cupaJ.
NjHr;rpf;F cs;kjpg;gPL kw;Wk; Gwkjpg;gPL Mfpa ,uz;Lk; NrHj;J nkhj;jk; 50
kjpg;ngz;fs; ngw Ntz;Lk;. cs;kjpg;gPL kw;Wk; Gwkjpg;gPLf;Fj; jdpj;jdpahd
NjHr;rp kjpg;ngz; tiuaiw ,y;iy.
5. NjHTKiw: mfj;NjHTfis newpahsu; elj;jp kjpg;ngz; toq;f Ntz;Lk;.
Gwj;NjHitg; gy;fiyf;fofj; NjHthizak; Mz;Lf;F ,UKiw Ma;tpay; epiwQH
gl;lg; gbg;Gj; NjHtpd; NghJ elj;Jk;. gy;fiyf;fofj;jhy; Ma;thsHfSf;Fg;
gupe;Jiuf;fg;gl;Ls;s KidtH;g;gl;l topfhl;bf;FOtpd; Gwepiyty;YeH (newpahsupd;
epWtdj;ijr; rhuhjtH) Gwj;NjH;tpd; kjpg;gPl;lhsuhfr; nray;gLthH. Gwj;NjH;tpw;fhd
tpdhj;jhs; gy;fiyf;fofj; NjH;thizaj;jhy; ngwg;gLk;.
6. gapw;WKiw: Ma;thsH;fs; topfhl;bf;FOtpd; gupe;Jiuapd; mbg;gilapy; NjH;T
nra;Ak; jhs;fis newpahsH; gapw;Wtpf;f Ntz;Lk;. gy;fiyf;fof tpjpfspd;gb
gapw;Wtpf;Fk; fhyk;> tUifg;gjpT Mfpatw;wpw;F newpahsH; nghWg;ghthH;.
,t;Ntiyg;gS fhyKiw Ntiyg;gStpy; fzf;fpy; nfhs;sg;glkhl;lhJ.
7. jpl;lVL: topfhl;bf;FOthy; jpl;l VL gupe;Jiuf;fg;gLk; Ma;thsUf;Fj; jpl;l
Vl;Lg;gzp nghUe;Jk;. ,J xU jhSf;Fr; rkkhdJ. jpl;l Vl;ilg; gUtj; NjHT
njhlq;Fk; Kd; Ma;Tf; FoTf;Fr; rkHg;gpf;f Ntz;Lk;. newpahsupd;
newpg;gLj;Jjypd; fPo; jpl;l Vl;Lg;gzpia Nkw;nfhs;s Ntz;Lk;. jpl;lVL fzpdpj;
jl;lr;rpy; 50 gf;fq;fSf;Ff; Fiwahky; mikaNtz;Lk;. Ma;Ntl;Lld; ,j;jpl;l
Vl;il Muha;rr ; pg; gpuptpy; rkHg;gpf;f Ntz;Lk;.
kjpg;gPl;LKiw: jpl;lVL 100 kjpg;ngz;fisf; nfhz;lJ. mfkjpg;gPL 50 Gwkjpg;gPL 50
vd mikAk;. mfkjpg;gPl;L kjpg;ngz; newpahsuhy; toq;fg;gLk;. Gwkjpg;gPL
gy;fiyf;fofj;jhy; Ma;thsH;fSf;Fg; gupe;Jiuf;fg;gl;Ls;s KidtH;g; gl;l
topfhl;bf; FOtpd; Gwepiy ty;Yeuhy; (newpahsupd; epWtdj;ijr; rhuhjtH)
kjpg;gPL nra;ag;gl;L kjpg;ngz;iz Muha;r;rpg; gpupT top NjHthizaUf;Fr;
rkHg;gpf;f Ntz;Lk;. ,g;gzpia KidtHg; gl;lf; fye;jha;Tf; $l;lj;jpd; NghJ
nra;ayhk;.
8.gbg;Gf;fhyk;: Kd;KidtHg;gl;lg; gbg;gpw;Fupaj; jhs;fis KidtHg; gl;lg;
gbg;gpw;Fg; gjpT nra;j ,uz;lhz;LfSf;Fs; epiwT nra;a Ntz;Lk;. Ma;thsHfs;
jq;fSf;Fg; gupe;Jiuf;fg;gLk; jhs;fis xNu gUtj;jpYk; gapyyhk;. NjHr;rpj;
jtwpatHfs; kW gUtj; NjHtpy; NjHT vOjyhk;.
9 KidtHg; gl;lg; ghlj;jpl;lf; FOthy; Vw;fg; ngw;W fy;tprhH epiyf; FOtpd;
xg;Gjy; ngwg;ngw;w jhs;fs; kl;LNk Kd;KidtHg;gl;lj; NjHTf;F mDkjpf;fg;gLk;.
Ie;J gpupTfisf; nfhz;ljhf mikfpwJ. xt;nthU gpuptpYk; ehd;F jhs;fs;
cz;L. nkhj;jk; 20 jhs;fs;.
Kjy; gpuptpy; xU jhs; fl;lhakhf vLf;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;. xU gpuptpypUe;J ,uz;L
jhs;fSf;F Nky; vLf;ff;$lhJ.
Ma;thsH vLf;Fk; jhs;fis mtUf;fhd KidtHgl;l topfhl;bf; FO xg;Gjy;
mspf;f Ntz;Lk;.

·gpupT:m. ,g;gpuptpy; xd;W fl;lhak;

1. Muha;r;rpnewpKiwfs;
2. jpwdha;T: mbg;gilfs;> Kiwfs;> mZFKiwfs;
3. ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk; Nfhl;ghLfSk;
4. jkpopy; ,yf;fpa tuyhWfs;
·

gpupT: M. ,yf;fztpay;jhs;fs;
( ,yf;fztpaypy; Ma;T nra;gtHfs; NjHT nra;a Ntz;ba jhs;fs;)
5. jkpo; ,yf;fztuyhW
6. vOj;jpyf;fzf; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk;
7. nrhy;,yf;fzf; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk;
8. nra;Aspay; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk;

gpupT:,.,yf;fpatpay;jhs;fs;
(,yf;fpa Ma;Tfs; nra;NthH fw;f Ntz;ba mbg;gilj; jhs;fs;)
9. jkpopy; ftpijapay; ghHitfs;
10. jkpopy; fijapay; ghHitfs;
11. jkpopy; muq;fpay; ghHitfs;
12. ,yf;fpa tbtq;fSk; tiffSk;

gpupT: <.gz;ghl;bay; jhs;fs;

(,yf;fpaj;ijAk; gz;ghl;ilAk; ,izj;Jg; NgRk; Ma;TfisAk; ehl;lhH
gz;ghl;lha;Tfisj; NjHT nra;Ak; Ma;thsHfs; fw;f Ntz;ba mbg;gilj; jhs;fs;
13. ,yf;fpaKk; gz;ghl;L khdpltpaYk;
14. jkpo; tuyhW: murpay;> rkak;> jj;Jtk;> nghUspay;
15. gz;ghl;L ,af;fq;fSk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaq;fSk;
16. ClftpaYk; gz;ghLk;

gpupT: c. ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay;; jhs;fs;

17. gDtyhf;ff; Nfhl;ghL

18. epfo;j;Jjy; kuGfSk; Nfhl;ghLk;

19. ,dtiutpay; fsMa;T

20. jpl;lVL
FwpaPl;L jhspd; ngau; kjpg;gyF
vz;
gpupT m ,g;gpuptpy; xd;W fl;lhak;
ACWTA01 Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; 4
ACWTA02 jpwdha;T: mbg;gil> Kiwfs;> mZFKiwfs; 4
ACWTA03 ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk; Nfhl;ghLfSk; 4
ACWTA04 jkpopy; ,yf;fpa tuyhWfs; 4
gpupT M ,yf;fztpay; jhs;fs; (,yf;fztpaypy; Ma;T nra;gtu;fs;
Nju;T nra;a Ntz;ba jhs;fs;)
ACWTA05 jkpo; ,yf;fz tuyhW 4
ACWTA06 vOj;jpyf;fzf; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk; 4
ACWTA07 nrhy;ypyf;fzf; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk; 4
ACWTA08 nra;Aspay; Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk; 4
gpupT , ,yf;fpatpay; jhs;fs; (,yf;fpa Ma;Tfs; nra;Nthu; fw;f
Ntz;ba mbg;gilj; jhs;fs;)
ACWTA09 jkpopy; ftpijapay; ghu;itfs; 4
ACWTA10 jkpopy; fijapay; ghu;itfs; 4
ACWTA11 jkpopy; muq;fpay; ghu;itfs; 4
ACWTA12 ,yf;fpa tbtq;fSk; tiffSk; 4
gpupT < gz;ghl;bay; jhs;fs; ( ,yf;fpak; / gz;ghL / Clfk;
Mfpatw;iw ,izj;Jg; NgRk; Ma;Tfisj; Nju;T nra;Ak;
Ma;thsu;fs; fw;f Ntz;ba mbg;gilj;jhs;fs;
ACWTA13 ,yf;fpaKk; gz;ghl;L khdpltpaYk; 4
ACWTA14 jkpo; tuyhW : murpay;> rkak;> jj;Jtk;> nghUspay; 4
ACWTA15 gz;ghl;L ,af;fq;fSk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaq;fSk; 4
ACWTA16 ClftpaYk; gz;ghLk; 4
gpupT c ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;Wf;fisj; Nju;T nra;Ak; Ma;thsu;fs; fw;f
Ntz;ba mbg;gilj;jhs;fs;
ACWTA17 gDtyhf;ff; Nfhl;ghL 4
ACWTA18 epfo;j;Jjy; kuGfSk; Nfhl;ghLk; 4
ACWTA19 ,dtiutpay; fsMa;T 4
ACWTA P jpl;lVL 4
1. Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; - kjpg;gyF - 4
Nehf;fk;

1. Ma;tpd; mbg;gilfisg; Gupe;Jnfhz;L Ma;Tr; rpe;jidfis newpg;gLj;jg;

goFjy;

2. Ma;Ntl;bid vOJk; gapw;rpapy; jd;jpwid ntspg;gLj;jg; goFjy;

myF: 1 Ma;tpay; mwpKfk; - Ma;tpd; ,yf;fzk; - Ma;Tg; nghUs; - topfhl;b -

Ma;thsH gz;Gfs; - jiyg;Gj; NjHTfs; - jiyg;Gg; gz;Gfs; - tiffs;. Ma;Tj;
jpl;lkply; - mbg;gilf; fUj;Jfs; - fUJNfhs;fs; - tiffs; - ,ay;Gfs; -
Ma;tpayhsupd; gz;Gfs; - Ma;tpd; tifg;ghLfs; Nfhl;ghl;lha;T - tifg;gLj;Jjy;
Ma;T - nghUj;jpf;fhl;ly; Ma;T.

myF: 2 Ma;tpd; Kjy; epiy - fUtpfisj; njhFj;jy; - juT jpul;LjYk; juT

jpul;Ltjw;Fupa juT %yq;fisf; fz;lwpjYk; - Kjd;ik Mjhuq;fSk; Jizik
Mjhuq;fSk; vit vd mwpjy; - Ma;tpd; ,uz;lhk; epiy - juTfs; njhFj;jy; -
njhFf;Fk; Kiw - Fwpg;ngLf;Fk; Kiw - tifg;gLj;Jk; Kiw - JizE}w;gl;bay;
- Nehf;fPl;L E}w;gl;bay; - E}yilT

myF: 3 Ma;tpd; %d;whk; epiy - Ma;tpy; cj;jpfisf; filg;gpbf;Fk; Kiw -

NeHfhzy; - tpdhepuy; - tpdhepuy; tiffs; - tpdhepuy; cUthf;Fk; Kiw -
fsMa;T -fsMa;T nra;Kiw – Kd; mDgtk; vr;rhpf;iffs; - topfhl;bfs;
Kjypad Ma;tpd; ehd;fhk; epiy – juTfis xUq;fpizj;jy; - Ma;Tr; rpf;fiy
tpLtpf;f Kd;nkhopjy; - cWjp nra;jy;

myF: 4 Ma;Ntl;bd; cUthf;fk; - Gwepiyf;fl;likg;G> mfepiyf;fl;likg;G-Ma;Tg;

nghUz;ikf;Nfw;g ,ay; tFj;jikj;jy; - ,ay;fspd; cl;gpupTfs; - ,aypd; ikag;
nghUz;ik - ,ay; tupir Kd;DiuAk; KbTiuAk; Ma;Ntl;bd; eil-gj;jpg; gpupg;G
Nkw;Nfhs; fhl;ly;> epWj;jf; Fwp> tpdhf; Fwp> czHr;rpf Fwp> miug;Gs;sp> Kf;fhw;
Gs;sp> Kw;Wg;Gs;sp> Nkw;Nfhs; Fwp> xw;iw> ,ul;il Nkw;Nfhs; Fwpfs; -
mbf;Nfhbly;-milg;Gf; Fwpaply; Mfpad gw;wpa tpsf;fk; - Ma;tpy; gpwHfUj;ij
Vw;wYk; kWj;jYk; - Kd; Ma;Tfis kiwf;fhik - vOj;Jj; jpUl;bd;ik - NeHik
- gpd;dpizg;Gfs; - glq;fs; tiuTfs; - Mtzq;fs; - E}w;gl;bay;fs; -
tpdhepuy;fs; - mwpf;iffs; - Ma;tpy; ePf;f Ntz;ba Fw;wq;fs; - ed;D}y; $Wk;
gj;Jf; Fw;wq;fSk; moFfSk;

myF: 5. Ez;thrpg;Gf;fhd E}y;fs;:

1. Ma;Tj;jsq;fSk; jlq;fSk;:njhFg;ghrpupaHfs;-Nguh. Qh.];Bgd;>

Nguh.m.uhkrhkp> gjpg;Gj;Jiw: kNdhd;kzpak; Re;judhH gy;fiyf;fofk;>2018

2. jkpoz;zy;> ,yf;Fkzd;> Ma;tpay; mwpKfk;> kPdhl;rpepiyak;> kJiu

3. F.nt.ghyRg;gpukzpad;> Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs;> ckhE}y; ntspaPl;lfk;>

fhkhl;rp mk;kd; Nfhtpy; njU> jQ;rht+H> 2004
4. Kj;Jr;rz;Kfk;> R.Ntq;fluhkd;>2015: ,yf;fpa Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs;> Kj;Jg;
gjpg;gfk;> kJiu

5. <.rh. tpRtehjd;> Ma;T newpKiwfs;> jkpo;g; Gj;jfhyak;> nrd;id> 1986

2. jpwdha;TKiwfSk;mZFKiwfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jpwdha;tpd; tiffs; kw;Wk; jpwdha;T mZFKiwfis mwpjYk; Ma;tpy;

gad;gLj;Jk; Kiwia czHjYk;

myF: 1 jpwdha;T tpsf;fk; - rhy; tpsf;fk;> mbg;gilfs;> mZFKiw> Nehf;fKk;

gzpAk;> eilKiwfs;> jpwdha;thsd; jFjpfs;> jpwdha;tpd; %d;W ikaq;fs;:
gDty;> vOj;jhsH> thrfH - ,yf;fpa tbtq;fs; - - jpwdha;thsupd; jFjpfs;-
,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;tpd; gad;fs;- Nehf;fKk; gzpAk; - eilKiwfs;- tpUg;GntWg;G -
gd;Kftpak; - gy;Jiwr;rhHG – jtwhd gad;ghL – ePSk; vy;iyfs;.

myF: 2 jpwdha;T Kiwfs; - tpsf;fKiw> xg;gPL> kjpg;gPL> urid> ghuhl;L>

,yf;fpatifepiyapay; - NtWghLfs;.

myF:3. jpwdha;TmZFKiwfs; - mwnewp> rKjhatpay;> tuyhw;wpay;> cstpay;>

njhy;gbktpay;> nkhopapay;> cUttpay;> jypj;jpak;> ngz;zpak;>

myF:4. jkpo;j; jpwdha;TtuyhW - rpWgj;jpupif rhHe;j tpkuprd tuyhW fy;tpg;Gy

Ma;T tuyhW - Ma;T> kjpg;Giu> Ma;NtL> Nehf;f NtWghLfs;

myF:5 Ez; thrpg;Gf;fhd E}y;fs;:

1. jp.R. eluhrd;> 2016> jpwdha;Tf; fiy: nfhs;iffSk; mZFKiwfSk;>

epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];> nrd;id.

2. m.m. khzthsd; - 20 Mk;E}w;whz;L ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T

3. f. gQ;rhq;fk;> 1982 > jkpo; ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T tuyhW> md;dk; gjpg;gfk;>

4. fhkuhR.,uh. jkpo;r; rpw;wpjo;fspd; top cUthd etPdj; jpwdha;Tg; Nghf;Ffs;>

jkpo;g; gy;fiyf;fofk;> jQ;rht+H

5. Barry, Peter 1995: BEGINNING THEORY: An Introduction to Literary and Cultural

theory, Manchester University Press, Manchester and New York
3. ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk; Nfhl;ghLfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: ,yf;fpaj; Njhw;wk;> cUthf;fk;> tsHr;rp gw;wpa nfhs;iffSk;

Nfhl;ghLfSk; gw;wpa Gupjiy cz;lhf;Fjy;.

myF:1. ,yf;fpaj; Njhw;wk; - mup];lhbypd; ftpijapy;> gujKdptupd; ehl;arh];jpuk;.

myF: 2. njhy;fhg;gpak; nra;Aspay;> ctkapay;> kugpay;

myF:3. ,khDNty; fhz;lb ; d; mofpay; nfhs;if> rpf;kz;l; g;uha;bd; cstpay;

nfhs;if> fhHy; khHf;rpd; cw;gj;jpf; nfhs;if

myF:4. nkhopapay;> mikg;gpay;> cUttpay;> rpijthf;fk; - fpof;F - Nkw;F gw;wpa

ghHitfs; - kuGf;Nfhl;ghL> etPdj;Jtf; Nfhl;ghL> gpd;etPdj;Jtf; Nfhl;ghL>
fhydpa- gpd;fhydpag; ghHitfs;

myF: 5. Ez; thrpg;Gf;fhd E}y;fs;:

1. jp.R. eluhrd;> 2016> jpwdha;Tf; fiy: nfhs;iffSk; mZFKiwfSk; >

epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];> nrd;id.

2. m.m. khzthsd;- 20 Mk;E}w;whz;L ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T

3. Nfhgpre;j; Nehuq;> 2005> mikg;G ikathjk;> gpd; mikg;gpay; thjk; kw;Wk;

fPiof; fhtpa ,ay;> rhfpj;a mfhnlkp ntspaPL.

4. f.gQ;rhq;fk;> 2011> ,yf;fpaKk; jpwdha;Tf; Nfhl;ghLfSk;> md;dk;: jQ;rht+H.

5. Lodge, David. 1987:Modern Criticism and Theory: A Reader, Longman: London

4. jkpopy; ,yf;fpa tuyhWfs; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jkpo; nkhopapy; vOjg;ngw;Ws;s ,yf;fpa tuyhWfisAk; mtw;wpd;
Nehf;fq;fisAk; mwpjy;

myF: 1. ,yf;fpa tuyhW vd;Dk; fUj;JU. gug;Gk; efHTk;. jkpopy; ,yf;fpa

tuyhw;wpd; tsHr;rp

myF: 2 ,yf;fpa tuyhW vOJjypd; rpf;fy;fSk; mjd;tpupTfSk;

myF:3. fhyg; gFg;G Kiwfs;- ,yf;fpa tifikfSk; tsHr;rpAk;

myF:4. ,yf;fpa tuyhw;whrpupaHfs; - nt.fdfrigg;gps;is> Nf.v];.rPdpthrgps;is>

vk;.v];. g+uzypq;fk;gps;is> fh.R.gps;is> v.v];. itahGupg;gps;is> M.
NtYg;gps;is> kapiy rPdpNtq;flrhkp> K. mUzhryk;> nj.ngh.kPdhl;rpRe;jud;>
K.tujuhrd;> r.Nt.Rg;gpukzpad;> rpl;b> rptghjRe;juk;> fh.rptj;jk;gp> ty;ypf;fz;zd;>
eh.thdkhkiy> MfpNahH vOjpa ,yf;fpa tuyhw;W E}y;fs;.

myF:5. Ez;thrpg;Gf;Fupad
1. fhHj;jpNfR rptj;jk;gp – jkpopy; ,yf;fpa tuyhW> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];>
nrd;id.

2. rpw;gp ghyRg;gpukzpad;> ePy. gj;kehgd;> jkpo; ,yf;fpa tuyhW ,uz;L

njhFjpfs; - rhfpj;jpa mfhnlkp ntspaPL.

3. Nguh. ,uh.kjpthzd;> c.Nrud;> jkpopdp 2000 khehl;Lf; fl;Liufs;> fhyr;RtL>

2007 mwf;fl;lis> ehfHNfhtpy;

4. fh.rptj;jk;gp> 2005> cyfj;jkpopyf;fpa tuyhW> ( fp.gp.1851- 2000) cyfj;jkpo;

Muha;r;rp epiyak;> milahW> nrd;id.

5. M.NtYg;gps;is> jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpy; fhyKk; fUj;Jk;>

5. jkpo; ,yf;fz tuyhW - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;

1. jkpo; ,yf;fz tuyhw;iw mwpe;J nfhs;Sjy;

2. jkpo; ,yf;fz E}y;fs; Fwpj;j ghHitia cUthf;Fjy;

myF:1. jkpo; ,yf;fz tuyhW - mwpKfk; - kiwe;JNghd ,yf;fz E}y;fs; -

vOjg;gl;Ls;s epiy – rupahd tuyhW ,y;yhj epiyik - ntspte;Js;s ,yf;fz
tuyhW Fwpj;j E}y;fs;

myF.2 .xOq;Fg;gLj;jg;gl;l Kiwahd tuyhw;wpd; Njit - jw;fhy mWtifahd

,yf;fz tsHr;rp - mfuhjpfs; - epfz;Lfs; - ciufs; Nghd;wtdtw;wpd; tsHr;rp.;
,yf;fzE}y;fs; - njhy;fhg;gpak; - tPuNrhopak; - ,yf;fztpsf;fk; - njhd;D}y;
tpsf;fk; - Kj;JtPupak; - Rthkpehjk; - ed;D}y; - mWtif ,yf;fzk;

myF:3. vOj;J> nrhy; ,yf;fzk; czHj;Jk; E}y;fs; - Nekpehjk; - ed;D}y; -

gpuNahf tpNtfk; - ,yf;fzf; nfhj;J - jkpo;E}y; - jkpo;f;fhg;G ,ak;

myF: 4. nghUs; ,yf;fz E}y;fs; - ,iwadhH fstpay; - gd;dpUglyk; -

Gwg;nghUs; ntz;ghkhiy - ek;gpafg;nghUs; - jkpo; newp tpsf;fk; -
fstpaw;fhhpif - khwdfg;nghUs;- ahg;G> mzp ,yf;fz E}y;fs; - mtpeak;>
ahg;gUq;fyk; - ahg;gUq;fyf;fhupif - ahg;gpyf;fzk; - rpjk;gur; nra;Al; Nfhit -
khwd;ghg;ghtpdk; - tpUj;jg;ghtpay; - jz;bayq;fhuk; - khwdyq;fhuk; -
mzpapyf;fzk; - ghl;bay;

myF: 5. Ez;thrpg;Gf;Fupad.

1. Nrhk.,stuR: 2003: ,yf;fz tuyhW> nka;ag;gd; gjpg;gfk;> > rpjk;guk;.

2. M.NtYgps;is: 1979: jkpo; tuyhw;wpyf;fzk;. Ghup Gj;jfg; gz;iz> nrd;id

3. rptj;jk;gp.fh> 1982: ,yf;fzKk; r%f cwTfSk;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];>
nrd;id.

4. ,uh. ,sq;Fkud;> 1998: ,yf;fztuyhW> kzpthrfH gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id

5. m.rz;Kfjh];> 1982: jkpo; nkhop ,yf;fz ,ay;Gfs;> Kj;jkpo; ntspaPl;Lf;

fofk;> aho;g;gzk;.

6. nr.it.rz;Kfk;> 1994: ,yf;fz cUthf;fk;> kzpthrfH E}yfk;> rpjk;guk;

6. vOj;jpyf;fzf;Nfhl;ghLfSk;Kd;NdhbfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;:

jkpo; ,yf;fzpfSk; nkhopapayhsHfSk; $Wk; vOj;jpyf;fzf; $Wfis mwpjYk;

Nkyha;T Nehf;fp efHjYk;

myF: 1. jkpo; ,yf;fzk; - ,yf;fz mikg;G tpsf;fk;> vOj;jpyf;fz mikg;G

jkpo; vOj;jpyf;fzj;ijg; gw;wpa njspthd – nrwpthd mikg;G tpsf;fj;ijj;
jUjy;. Xyp - vOj;J – mir - nka;k;kaf;fk; Mfpatw;iwj; njhlHGgLj;jp> jkpo;
vOj;jikg;gpid tpsf;Fjy;. nrhy;jpupG - nrhy;yhf;fk; - nrhy; njhlH mikg;Gfspy;
,lk;ngWk; GzHr;rp khw;wq;fis czHjy;

myF: 2. jkpo; xypfs; - vOj;Jfs;: njhlHG> tifg;ghL (gpwg;gpay; - vOj;jpay;:

xypapay; - xypadpay;) - xyp - vOj;J - mir - nka;k;kaf;fk;: vOj;jikg;G
tpsf;fj;jpy; ,tw;wpd; gq;F (Kjd;ik vOj;J> rhHngOj;J> xw;nwOj;J> capHnka;
vOj;J) Nkw;$w;W xypfs; - tiffs; - gq;F.

myF 3 nrhy; - gjk;: gFgjk; - gfhg;gjk; nrhy; jpupG nrhy;yhf;fj;jpy; GzHr;rp:

NjitAk; tifg;ghLk; mf> Gwg;GzHr;rp (capH<w;W> nka;<w;W> cUGg;GzHr;rp>
Fw;wpaYfug; GzHr;rp

myF 4 vOj;jpyf;fzj;jpd; gz;Gk; gad;ghLk; - cr;rupg;G> thrpg;G>

myF.5. Ez; thrpg;Gf;Fupad:

1. nr.it. rz;Kfk;> 1980 vOj;jpyf;fzf; Nfhl;ghL> midj;jpe;jpa jkpo; nkhopapaw;

fofk;> mz;zhkiy efH.

2.K.ghyFkhH> nkhopapd; nghJikf; $Wfs; fUj;jpay; tpsf;fk;> 2014: ,e;jpaj;

Njrpaj; NjHTg; gzp> ik#H.

3.njhy;fhg;gpa nkhopapay; (njhF)> r.mfj;jpaypq;fk;> 1979> mz;zhkiyg;

gy;fiyf;fofk;: mz;zhkiyefH.

4.xypadpay; - kyhag; gy;fiyf;fofk;> Nfhyhyk;g+H (fp.fUzhfud;&,uh. fpU\;zd;)

5.F.gukrptk;> ,f;fhyj; jkpo; kuG> 2011> milahsk;: jpUr;rpkhtl;lk;.

7. nrhy; ,yf;fzf;Nfhl;ghLfSk; Kd;NdhbfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: nrhy;> nrhy;yikg;G> nrhy;tiffisj; njspTgLj;jp> mit nkhopaikg;gpy;

ngw;W tpsq;Fk; gq;fpid tpsf;Fjy;. jkpo; ,yf;fzpfSk; nkhopapayhsHfSk;
$Wk; nrhy; ,yf;fzf; $Wfis mwpjYk; Nkyha;T Nehf;fp efHjYk;

myF: 1 nrhy; - nrhy;Yk; nghUSk; - nrhy;yikg;G tpsf;fk; - nrhy;tiffs;:

ngaHr;nrhy; - tpidr;nrhy; - ,ilr;nrhy; > cupr;nrhy; (ngauil> tpidail>
,ilr;nrhw;fs;)

myF: 2. nghUz;ik: nrhw; nghUz;ik> ,yf;fzg; nghUz;ik> #ow; nghUz;ik

(rKjhag;nghUz;ik) tpsf;fKk; NjitAk; nrhw; jpupG - nrhy;yhf;f Kiwfs;:
tpsf;fk; mikg;G mbg;gilapy;.

myF 3 ,yf;fzg; gpupTfs; - ,yf;fzf; $Wfs; (ngaupay;> tpidapay;......

tpidKw;W> Ntw;Wik> ghy; - vz;- ,lk; gd;ik> vr;rk;.......)

myF 4 nrhy;yikg;G - njhluikg;G tpsf;fk;> njhlupay; - njhlH> njhlH tiffs;>

njhlH ,iaG> thf;fpa mikg;Gk; tiffSk; - ciuf;Nfhit - nra;As; (ftpijf;)
Nfhit mikg;Gfs; mikg;gpzf;fk; - fUj;jpzf;fk;: ,iaG Njit. khzhf;fUf;Fg;
ngaHj; njhFjpfs;> ngaHr;nrhy; njhFjp> tpidj;njhFjp> ,ilr;nrhy; njhFjp>
cupr;nrhy; njhFjp Nghd;wd cUthf;Fk; gapw;rpj; NjHT fl;lhak;. fsg;gzpj;
njhFg;G my;yJ E}y;topj; njhFg;Gfs; toq;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;.

myF 5. Ez; thrpg;Gf;Fupad.

1. nr.it.rz;Kfk;> 1984: nrhy;ypyf;fzf; Nfhl;ghL> midj;jpe;jpaj; jkpo;

nkhopapaw; fofk;> mz;zhkiyefH.

2. M.NtYgps;is> rhrdKk;jkpOk;. 2011: Fkud; Gj;jf ,y;yk;> nfhOk;G- nrd;id3.

3. Mz;bag;gd;.Nj.> 1977> “fhg;gpa newp nrhy;ypay;" Kj;Jg;gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id.

4. mfj;jpaypq;fk;> r. (1999) ngaupay; - tpidapay;> kzpthrfH gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id.

5. E/khd;> 2007> mbg;gilj; jkpo; ,yf;fzk;> milahsk;> Gj;jhej;jk;> jpUr;rp.

8. nra;Aspay; Nfhl;ghLfSk;Kd;NdhbfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jkpopd; nra;As; mikg;G cUthd Kiwikia mwpjYk; Nkyha;T Nehf;fp

efHjYk;

myF:1. Ie;jpyf;fzk; mwpKfk; - ahg;G nrhw; nghUs;> tpsf;fk;- kuG ,yf;fpaKk;

ahg;Gk; - ahg;gpyf;fz E}y;fs; - njhy;fhg;gpar; nra;Aspay;.

myF:2. ahg;gpay; jdpahf tsHe;j tpjk; - ahg;gUq;fyk;> ahg;gUq;fyf;fhupif -

ghf;fs; - Mrpupag;gh> ntz;gh> fypg;gh> tQ;rpg;gh- nghJtpyf;fzk; - tiffs; -
rhd;Wfs;

myF:3.ghtpdq;fs; - Jiw> jhopir> tpUj;jk; - Fwpg;ghf MrpupatpUj;jk;>

fyptpUj;jk;> fypj;Jiw> fl;lisf; fypj;Jiw - rhd;Wfs;> mzpfs;: ghl;bay;fspd;
tsHr;rpapy; ahg;G Fwpj;j rpe;jidfs;

myF:4. ctikapaYk; mzpapyf;fz tsHr;rpAk; - etPdf;ftpijfspy; ahg;gpay;

$Wfs; - ,oe;jd> ,Ug;gd.

myF 5: Ez; thrpg;Gf;Fupad

1. fhHj;jpNfR.rptjk;gp.> 2012> “njhy;fhg;gpaKk; ftpijAk;> epAnrQ;Rup `T];>

nrd;id.

2. [Pd;yhud;];.nr.> gftjp.F.> 1988> “njhy;fhg;gpa ,yf;fpaf; Nfhl;ghLfs;"

cyfj;jkpo; Muha;rr ; p epWtdk;> nrd;id.

3. mfj;jpaypq;fk;.r.> 1999> “njhy;fhg;gpa ftpijapay;"> kzpthrfH gjpg;gfk;>

nrd;id.

4. Nrh.e. fe;jrhkp - jkpo; ahg;gpaypd; Njhw;wKk; tsHr;rpAk;> jQ;rht+u;: jkpo;g;

gy;fiyf;fofk;.

5. r.Nt.Rg;gpukzpad; - 1972 ,yf;fzj;njhifahg;G - ghl;bay;

9. jkpopy; ftpijapay; ghHitfs; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: ePz;l jkpo;f; ftpijg; Nghf;if mjd; ftpijapay; rhHe;J Gupe;J

nfhs;Sjy;.

myF: 1 jkpopd; ftpijapay; njhy;fhg;gpag; nghUsjpfhuj;jpy; ,Ue;J

cUthf;fg;gLk; .cupg; nghUs;fspd; tifg;ghL mtw;iw ntspg;gLj;j cjTk;
epytpay; $Wfshd fUg; nghUl;fs;> mjd; gug;ngy;iyfshd Kjy; gw;wpa
GupjNyhL ftpijfisg; gbj;jy;. njhy;fhg;gpak; tifg;ghL nra;Ak; mfk;> Gwk;>
vd;gjd; mbg;gilapy; rq;f ,yf;fpaj;ij thrpf;Fk; Ma;Tfs;

myF: 2 mwf; ftpijfspd; ,ay;G - ftpQdpd; ,lk;. Nfl;Nghupd; ,lk;> ek;gpf;if>

rkak;> muR Mfpatw;wpd; tpjpfs; mwq;fshf khWjy;- gf;jpf; ftpijfspd;
Nehf;fKk; ftpapd; ,lKk;.

myF:3 gpd;dpilf;fhyf; ftpijfs; - guzp> gps;isj; jkpo;> cyh> fyk;gfk;>

me;jhjp> kly;> Nfhit> gs;S> nehz;b ehlfk; Mfpad gw;wpa ,yf;fpa
tifiknadg; gpupj;Jf; fw;fr; nra;a Ntz;Lk;. jdpg;ghly; jpul;bd; ftpijr;
Ritfisg; nghJ epiyf; ftpijapayhff; fw;gpf;Fk; Kiwik..

myF 4 rkfhyj;jd;ik - Njhw;wk; - etPdj;JttuT murpay; gpd;Gyk; Njrpak;>

,dk;> rHtNjrpak;> fhydpak;> gpd;fhydpak; Nghd;wtw;iw tpsf;fpf; fhl;Ljy;.
,tw;NwhL ,ize;J ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fspd; tuTk; jhf;fKk; Vw;gl;l epiyiaAk;
tpsf;Fjy;. GJf;ftpijapd; Njhw;wk; - mftaf; ftpijfs;> Gwtaf; ftpijfs;>
jypj;jpa ngz;zpaf; ftpijfSf;fpilNaahd xw;Wik> Ntw;Wikfs;. gpd;etPd
ftpijg; Nghf;if mwpKfk;nra;Jnfhs;Sjy;.

myF 5 Ez; thrpg;G:

1. t.Rg.khzpf;fk;> jkpo;f;fhjy;> nka;ag;gd; gjpg;gfk;> rpjk;guk;

2. ng.khijad;> 2011: jkpo; nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpaq;fs;: fhyKk; fUj;Jk;>

vd;.rp.gp.vr;> nrd;id.

3. m.kzthsd;> 2004: gf;jp ,yf;fpak;: rhfpj;a mfhnlkp ntspaPL> GJnly;yp.

4. fh.rptj;jk;gp>2007: jkpo;f; ftpijapay;> Fkud;gjpg;gfk;.

5. Jiu.rPdpr;rhkp> 2010: ,Ugjhk; E}w;whz;Lj; jkpo;f; ftpij: Gjpa

Nghf;Ffs;>Njhw;wk;> tsHr;rp> Ie;jpiz gjpg;gfk;: nrd;d;id>

6. ,uh[khHj;jhz;ld;> 2003: etPd jkpo;f; ftpij tuyhW> jkpopdp gjpg;gfk;>

nrd;id.
10. jkpopy; fijapay; ghHitfs; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jkpopy; fijnrhy;Yk; ,yf;fpaq;fspd; cUthf;fKk; tsHr;rpAk; gw;wpa

Gupjiy cUthf;Fjy;

myF.1 njhy;fhg;gpar; nra;Aspaypy; fij gw;wpa Fwpg;Gfs; - gprp> ciuapl;l

ghl;Lilr;nra;As;. rpyg;gjpfhuk;> kzpNkfiy fij $w;W Kiwikfs;.

myF:2 jz;bayq;fhuk; - fhg;gpa ,yf;fzk;> mjidg; gpd;gw;wpa fhg;gpaq;fs;

myF: 3. nra;As; top nrhy;yg;gl;l fijfspd; fl;likg;G> cl;$Wfs;>

%yg;gbtq;fs;. ehl;lhH fijg;ghly; kuGfs;- nja;tf;fijfs;> tuyhw;Wf;fijfs;>
tl;lhuf;fijg;ghly;fs;>

myF: 4 etPdfij$w;W Kiwfs; - ehty; tbtk;> rpWfij tbtq;fs;

myF:5. Ez; thrpg;G: v];.itahGupg;gps;is> jkpo; ,yf;fpa rupjj;jpy; fhtpafhyk;

2. ,uhkypq;fk;>kh.> 1972: ehty; ,yf;fpak;> jkpo;g; Gj;jfyhak;> nrd;id>

3. rp.R.nry;yg;gh> jkpo; rpWfij gpwf;fpwJ> fhyr;RtL

4. m.uhkrhkp> ehtnyd;Dk; ngUq;fsk;> ew;wpiz> 2016

5. ifyhrgjp>f.> jkpo; ehty; ,yf;fpak;> 1977: epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];

6. rptj;jk;gp> fh.> 1978: ehtYk; tho;f;ifAk;> jkpo;g; Gj;jfyhak;> nrd;id>

11. jkpopy; muq;fpay; ghHitfs; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jkpopy; muq;fpayhfTk; ehlfg; gDtyhfTk; Njhd;wpa epfo;j;Jf;

fiyapaiy mwpjYk; Ma;T nra;jYk;

myF 1: muq;fpay; - gpujpapay; vd;Dk; ,Uepiyfs; - mup];lhby;> ehl;ba

rh];jpuk; - etPd epfo;j;Jf; Nfhl;ghLfs;.

myF 2. nka;g;ghl;bay;> rpyg;gjpfhu muq;Nfw;Wf; fhij

myF 3 - gs;S> FwtQ;rp> fPHj;jid> nehz;b ehlfq;fs; gpujpahf;f Kiwikfs; -

,ir ehlfkuG> ghHrp ehlfkuG> rq;fujh]; Rthkpfs; ehlfg; gDty;fs; - ehl;lhH
muq;Ffspd; epfo;j;JKiwfSk; gDtyhf;fq;fSk;

myF 4. gk;ky; rk;ge;jH - jpuhtpl ,af;f> ,lJrhup ,af;f ehlfq;fs;> rgh

ehlfq;fs;>

etPd ehlfq;fspd; Njhw;wk;> fUj;jpay;fs; - ,e;jpa ehlfnkd;Dk; fUj;JU.

ehlfhrpupaHfs;
myF. 5.Ez; thrpg;Gf;fhd E}y;fs;

1.rp.nksdFU> muq;fpay;> g+ghyrpq;fk; Gj;jfrhiy> nfhOk;G

2. m.uhkrhkp - jkpopy; ehlftpay;: mbg;gilfs;> MSikfs;> Nghf;Ffs;>

epa+nrQ;Rup> Gf; `T];> 2018

3. MW mofg;gd;> 2011: jkpo; ehlfj;jpd; Njhw;wKk; tsHr;rpAk;> ghup epiyak;>

gpuhl;Nt> nrd;id>

4. ,f;fhyj; jkpo; ehlfg; Nghf;Ffs; - cyfj; jkpo; Muha;rr

; p epWtdk;.

5. Nr.,uhkhD[k;> 1994: Nkilg; gilg;ghf;fk;> mbj;jsq;fs;> jkpo;g; gy;fiyf;fofk;>

jQ;rht+H

12. ,yf;fpa tbtq;fSk; tifikfSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: ,e;jj; jhs; jkpopy; Njhd;wpa ,yf;fpa tbtq;fs;> tiffs; gw;wpa

Ma;Tf;Fupa mbg;gilfis toq;Fk;.

myF.1: tbtk;> tif - NtWghLfs;> mbg;gilfs;> tiuaiwfs;> gpd;gw;wYk; kPwYk;

-tifikg; ghHitfs;- cyfjOtpa ghHitfshd nrt;tpak;> Gidtpak;>
,aw;gz;gpak;> elg;gpak;> elg;gpay; my;yhjd. czHT ntspg;ghld ghHitfs;.

myF.2. nra;Aspay; jUk; tbtq;fs; - njhlH epiyr; nra;As;fs;> ngUq;fhg;gpak;>

fhg;gpak;> njhiff; fijfs;. Guhzk;> ,jpfhrk;. njhd;kq;fs;-mfKk; ePl;rpAk; >
GwKk; ePl;rpAk; -fhye;NjhWk;.

myF.3. gpuge;jq;fs;> rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fs;> tiuaiwfs;> gpd;gw;wYk; kPwYk;

myF.4. fhy mbg;gil> muRfs; mbg;gil> jdpj;j MSikfs; mbg;gil

INuhg;gpaj; jhf;fKk; ,yf;fpa tifik tsHr;rpAk;.

myF.5. Ez;thrpg;Gf;Fupad:

1 ,uh.,sq;Fkud;> ,yf;fpa tif mfuhjp> kzpthrfH gjpg;gfk;> rpjk;guk;> 1985

2.r.Nt.Rg;gpukzpad;- ,yf;fpa tifAk; tbtKk;> kzpthrfH> 1984

3.r.Nt.Rg;gpukzpad;> jpuhtpl nkhop ,yf;fpaq;fs;> kzpthrfH> 1984

4.fh.rptj;jk;gp> jkpopy; ,yf;fpa tuyhW> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];> nrd;id

5. jz;lhAjk;> ,uh ,Ugjhk; E}w;whz;Lj; jkpo; ,yf;fpak;>1973.jkpo;g;

Gj;jfyhak;> nrd;id>
13. ,yf;fpaKk; gz;ghl;L khdpltpaYk; - kjpg;gyF - 4
Nehf;fk;:

1. ,yf;fpa khdpltpay; Gyj;ij mwpKfk; nra;jy;

2. ,yf;fpa thrpg;gpw;F khdpltpaypd; Njitia czHj;Jjy;

3. khdpltpay; mbg;gilapy; ,yf;fpaq;fis mHj;jg;gLj;j fw;gpj;jy;

myF: 1. khdpltpay; mwpKfk; - KOjhstpa mZKiw - khdpltpaypd; ehd;F

gupzhkq;fs; gz;ghL - tpsf;fk; - tiuaiwfs; - cz;ikapay; tif - fUj;jpay;
tif - gz;ghl;Lr; rhHGilikf;nfhs;if - gz;ghl;bd; cl;$Wfs; - gz;ghl;Lf; $W
- gz;ghl;Lf; fyit - gz;ghl;L epWtdk; - cl;$Wfspd; jd;ikfs; - nghUs; rhH
$Wfs; - mwpjy; rhH $Wfs; - newpapay; rhH $Wfs;. gz;ghl;bay; mikg;G -
nghUs; rhH gz;ghLk;> nghUs; rhuhg; gz;ghLk; - cfe;j epiyg; gz;ghLk; cz;ikg;
gz;ghLk; - cs;she;j gz;ghLk; ntspg;gilg; gz;ghLk; - cl;gz;ghLk; vjpH
gz;ghLk; - gz;ghl;Lg; nghUz;ik - nghJikfs;.

myF: 2. ,yf;fpa khdpltpay; mwpKfk; - ,dtiutpaypd; mbg;gilfs; -

,dtiutpayhsUk; gilg;ghspAk; gilg;Gk; ,dtiutpaYk; - ehtYk;
,dtiutpaYk;. - ,yf;fpa ,dtiutpay; - ,dtiuaypd; tiffs; -
,dtiutpaypd; ,ay;G - ,yf;fpaj;jpy; ,dtiutpaiy milahsk; fhZjy; -
,yf;fpaj; juit khdpltpay; juthff; nfhs;Sjy; - tpsf;fkspj;jy; (,yf;fpa
,dtiutpay; fl;Liu)

myF: 3. gz;ghl;L khw;wk; - gz;ghl;L khw;wj;jpd; Kiwfs; - fz;Lgpbg;Gfs; -

gz;ghl;Lg; NgW - etPdkakhjy;> njhopy;kakhjy; - efukakhjy; - caHFb Mf;fk;-
,e;JkakhjYk; gpwrkak; jOtYk; - gz;ghl;Lg; guty; - gz;ghl;Lg; guty;
nfhs;iffs;. - gbkyHr;rpf; Nfhl;ghLk; ,yf;fpaKk; - gbkyHr;rpf; Nfhl;ghl;bd;
mbg;gilfs; - nfhs;iffs; - nkhopapd; gbkyHr;rp - ,yf;fpag; gbkyHr;rp.

myF: 4. khdpltpay; mbg;gilapy; jpizf; Nfhl;ghL - jpizf; Nfhl;ghl;bd; r%f

mbg;gilfs; - jpiz mikg;Gk; gbepiy tsHr;rpAk; - jpiz mikg;Gk;
,dtiutpaYk; - njhy;fhg;gpaKk; ,dtiutpay; ftpijapaYk; - khdpltpay;
mbg;gilapy; rq;f ,yf;fpak; - czT cw;gj;jpAk; ghpkhw;w cwTfSk; -
gJf;iffSk; ngUq;fw;gilr; rpd;dq;fSk; - ,Uk;Gg; gz;ghL - rq;f ,yf;fpaj;jpy;
Nga;fs; - jhypAk; Fyf;Fwpr; rpd;dKk;.

myF: 5.EZf;f thrpg;G: gf;jtj;ry ghujpapd@ ,yf;fpa khdpltpay;>

M.jdQ;nradpd@ jkpo; ,yf;fpa khdpltpay;> M.rpt Rg;gpukzpadpfd;@
,dtiutpaYk; ehtYk;> fh.rptj;jk;gpapd; jpizf; Nfhl;ghl;bd; r%f mbg;gilfs;>
fh.Rg;gpukzpadpd@ rq;ffhyr; rKjha tho;f;ifapy; ke;jpuk;> rkak; Mfpatw;wpd;
gq;F.

ghHit E}y;fs;

1. ];Bgd;. Qh. -2017: ,yf;fpa ,dtiutpay;> vd;.rp.gp.vr;.> nrd;id.

2. ];Bgd; Qh.2010: -njhy;fhg;gpaKk; ,dtiutpay; ftpijapaYk;>
vd;.rp.gp.vr;.> nrd;id.

3. rpt Rg;gpukzpad;.M.2014: ,dtiutpaYk; ehtYk;> vd;.rp.gp.vr;.> nrd;id.

4. fh.rptj;jk;gp 2010: gz;ilj; jkpo;rr

; %fk; tuyhw;Wg; Gupjiy Nehf;fp>
epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];>> nrd;id>

5. fh.Rg;gpukzpad; 2011: rq;ffhyr; rKjhak;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];>> nrd;id>

6. jdQ;nrad;.M. 2014: jkpo; ,yf;fpa khdpltpay;> cyfj; jkpohuha;r;rp

epWtdk;> nrd;id.

7. gf;jtj;ry ghujp> 1999: gz;ghl;L khdpltpay;> nka;ag;gd; gjpg;gfk;> rpjk;uk;.

8. gf;jtj;ry ghujp>2014: ,yf;fpa khdpltpay;> jkpo; r%fj;jpd; nry; newpfspd;

epjhdpa gz;ghl;bay; ghHit> Gj;jhej;jk;: milahsk;.

14. jkpo;tuyhW: murpay;> rkak;> jj;Jtk;>nghUspay; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: gz;ghl;bay; Nehf;fpy; jkpopd; tuyhw;iwAk; fhuzpfisAk; Ma;T

nra;tjw;fhd J}z;LNfhy;fis mspj;jy;

myF : 1@ ,yf;fpak; tuyhw;W Mtzkhjy; - tuyhW vd;why; vd;d - tuyhw;W

vOjpay; Kiwfs; : murpay; tuyhW> gz;ghl;L tuyhW> r%f tuyhW> fPopypUe;J
tuyhW vOJjy;> mbj;js kf;fs; tuyhW> tha;nkhop tuyhW – tuyhW> Gjpa
tuyhW - jkpof tuyhw;W vOjpaypy; ,yf;fpaj;jpd; gq;F.

myF : 2 rq;f ,yf;fpak; - tuyhWk; gz;ghLk; -rq;ffhyk; - ,df;FO

rKjhaj;jpd; mopT - muR cUthf;fk; - Nte;ju@> Ntspu@> FWepy kd;du@>
rPW}Hkd;du@ - r%ftpay; : jpizapd; Kf;fpaj;Jtk; - cil> gof;ftof;fq;fs;>
czT cw;gj;jp Kiw> tzpfk;> tpohf;fs; - FbapUg;Gfs; : efuk;> CH> ehL> Nrup>
Fb> ,Uf;if> - gz;ghl;L epWtdq;fs; - cwTKiw - FLk;gmikg;G - jpUkzk; -
rkak; : itjpfk;> rpuhtfk;.

myF : 3 ,ilf;fhy ,yf;fpaKk; tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;.ehad;khHfs;> Mo;thHfs; -

gf;jp ,yf;fpaq;fs; - ghly; ngw;w jyq;fs;-NrhoHfhyf; Nfhapw;fiyfs; -
ngupaGuhzk;> fk;guhkhazk; - cyh> guzp ,yf;fpaq;fspy; tuyhW - ehaf;fHfhyj;
jkpofk; - ghz;bf;Nfhit> jpUtpisahlw;Guhzk; - r%fg; gz;ghl;L Kuz;fs; -
itjPfk;> mitjPfk; - irtk;> itztk; - tyq;if> ,lq;if - rpj;jHfspd; khw;Wg;
gz;ghl;L kuG - jpUke;jpuk;> gjpndz; rpj;ju@ ghly;fs;.

myF : 4 ehl;Lg;Gw ,yf;fpak; - tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;. ehl;Lg;Gw ,yf;fpaq;fs;

tuyhw;W Mtzkhjy; - tha;nkhop tuyhW - mbj;js kf;fs; tuyhW - ehl;Lg;Gwf;
fijg;ghly;fs; - fl;lnghk;K fij> Njrpq;Fuhrh fij> Itu@ uhrhf;fs; fij -
fhd;rhfpG rz;il - ,uhkg;ga;ad; mk;khid - Mq;fpNyau@ fhyk; - gQ;rhgP];
gupksr;rpe;J - jhJ tU\j;J fupg;Gf;Fk;kp> gQ;r yl;rz jpUKftpyhrk;> eh$u@
Gifapuj rpq;fhu uapy; rpe;J> fz;b Njapiyj; Njhl;lg;ghl;L.

myF : 5 EZf@f thrpg@G: kapiy rPdp Ntq;flrhkpapd; fsg;gpuHMl;rpapy; jkpofk;>

f.ifyhrgjpapd; gz;ilj; jkpoH tho;Tk; topghLk;> fh.,uh[dpd@ njhy;ypay;
Nehf;fpy; rq;ffhyk;> m. uhkrhkpapd@ ehaf;fHfhyk;> nehnghU fuh\pkhtpd; njd;dfr;
r%fk;: tuyhw;Wg; Gupjiy Nehf;fp.

ghHitE}y;fs;

1. fh.,uh[d; > njhy;ypay; Nehf;fpy; rq;ffhyk;> cyfj; jkpohuha;r;rp epWtdk;>

nrd;id> 2004

2. f.ifyhrgjp> gz;ilj; jkpoHtho;Tk; topghLk;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];> 1966

3.Nf.V.ePyfz;l rh];jpup> NrhoHfs;> vd;rpgpvr;> nrd;id> 2013

4.nehnghU fuh\pkh > njd;df r%fk;> tuyhw;Wg; Gupjiy Nehf;fp>Mtzk; ntspaPL>

jQ;rht+H 2006.

5. m. uhkrhkp> ehaf;fHfhyk;> ,yf;fpaKk; tuyhWk;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];>>

nrd;id> 2015

6. e.Rg;gpukzpad;> rq;ffhy tho;tpay;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];> nrd;id> 2010

7. tp.fdfrig gps;is> 1800 Mz;LfSf;F Kw;gl;l jkpofk;> g+k;Gfhu;: gjpg;gfk;> 2008

8. fh.Rg;gpukzpad;> rq;ffhyr; rKjhak;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];>nrd;id> 2011

9. jp.R.eluhrd;> jkpofj;jpy; itjPf rkak; - tuyhWk; tf;fizfSk;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;

`T];> nrd;id>2008

10. kapiy rPdp Ntq;flrhkp> fsg;gpuHMl;rpapy; jkpofk;> g+k;GfhHgjpg;gfk;> 2010

11. kapiy rPdp Ntq;flrhkp> rkzKk; jkpOk;> ehk; jkpoHgjpg;gfk;> 2006

12. fh.rptj;jk;gp> gz;ilj; jkpo;rr

; %fk; tuyhw;Wg; GupjiyNehf;fp> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;
`T];>> nrd;id> 2010

10. njh.gukrptd;> mofHNfhtpy;> gjpg;Gj;Jiw>kJiu fhkuhru; gy;fiyf;fofk;>

kJiu>1981

11. ts;spGuk; kNf];tud;> NrhoHfhy NfhapYk; r%fKk;> Fkud; Gj;jf ,y;yk;> 2008

12. rjhrptk;> jkpof tuyhw;wpy; Njtjhrpfs;> mfjp ntspaPll

; fk;> te;jthrp> 2013

13. eh.thdkhkiy> jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk;> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];>> nrd;id> 2007

14. M.rptRg;gpukzpad;> mbj;js kf;fs; tuyhW> epa+nrQ;Rup Gf;`T];>> nrd;id>

2007
15. gz;ghl;L ,af;fq;fSk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaq;fSk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;:

1. jkpo; ,yf;fpaq;fis ,af;fq;fspd; mbg;gilapy; Gupjy; Ma;T nra;aj;

J}z;Ljy;

2. ,af;fq;fs; vt;thW ,yf;fpaq;fisg; ghjpj;Js;sd vd;gij czHjy;

3. ,af;fq;fspd; tsHr;rpf;F ,yf;fpaq;fs; vt;thW cjtpd vd;gij mwpjy;

myF:1. rkz> ngsj;jr; rpe;jidfs; ,yf;fpaq;fis cUthf;fpa epiy. jpUf;Fws;

Kjyhd ePjpE}y;fspd; fUj;jpay;fs;- rpyg;gjpfhuk;> kzpNkfiy Mfpatw;wpYs;s
thjq;fs;

myF.2. irt> itzt rkaq;fs; elj;jpa gf;jp ,af;fq;fs;. mjd; njhlHr;rpahf

cUthd ,yf;fpaq;fs;. ngupaGuhzk;> jpUtpisahlw; Guhzk;> ghujk; Nghd;w
ngUq;fijfs;.

myF: 3 Njrpa ,af;fk;: Njhw;wKk; tsHr;rpAk; - r%fr; #oYk; NjitAk; -

jhf;fk;. ghujp> ftpkzp> ehkf;fy;yhH> k.ngh.rp.

myF.4 jkpo; ,af;fKk; gFj;jwpT ,af;fKk; Njhw;wKk; tsHr;rpAk; - r%fr;

#oYk; NjitAk; - jhf;fk;. jpuhtpl ,af;fk; : Njhw;wKk; tsHr;rpAk; - #oYk;
NjitAk; - jhf;fk;. kiwkiymbfs;> ghthzH> ngupahH> ghujpjhrd;> mz;zhJiu>
fiyQH> jpuhtpl ,af;fg; GidfijahsHfs;- nghJTilik ,af;fk; Njhw;wKk;
tsHr;rpAk; - #oYk; NjitAk; - mbj;js kf;fs; ,af;fq;fs; #oYk; NjitAk;-
jypj;jpaKk; ngz;zpaKk;.

myF:5 EZf;f thrpg;G: Nfh.Nfrtdpd@ jpuhtpl ,af;fKk; nkhopf; nfhs;ifAk;

njh.K.rp.uFehjd; kw;Wk; nghd;dPydpd;> Kw;Nghf@F ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fs;>
utpf;Fkhupd; jypj; fiy> ,yf;fpak;> murpay;> Qh.];Bgdpd; gz;ghl;L Ntu;fisj;
Njb. jp.R.eluhrdpd; jkpopd; gz;ghl;L ntspfs;.

ghHit E}y;fs;

1. f.g. mwthzd;. rkzHfspd; jkpo;f; nfhil> ,af;fq;fs; tsHj;j jkpo;

2. jputpak;.fh>1974: Njrpak; tsHj;j jkpo; > g+k;GfhH gpuRuk;>nrd;id

3. Nfrtd;.Nfh.> 1991: jpuhtpl ,af;fKk; nkhopf; nfhs;ifAk;> nry;kh gjpg;gfk;>

rptfq;if

4. nghd;dPyd;> 1994: Kw;Nghf;F ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fs;>nrd;id vd;.rp.gp.vr;.

5. utpf;FkhH (g.M)> 1995: jypj; fiy> ,yf;fpak;> murpay;> nea;Ntyp.

6. [hH[;b.vr;@.1992: Fkup khtl;l ngz;Zupikg; Nghuhl;lk; kzpgjpg;gfk;> nrd;id.

7. Qh];Bgd;@ (njh.M)> 1999: gz;ghl;L Ntu;fisj; Njb> ghisaq;Nfhl;il> ehl;lhu;
tof;fhw;wpay; ikak;

8. eluhrd>; jp.R. jkpod; gz;ghl;L ntspfs; nrd;id epA+ nrQ;Rup Gf; `T];.

16. Clfq;fSk;gz;ghl;LUthf;fk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

Nehf;fk;: jfty; njhlHG nghUz;ikfis mwpKfk;nra;jy; - Clfq;fspd;

tiffisAk; tsHr;rpapidAk; Muha;jy; - r%fg; gad;ghl;bw;F etPd Clfq;fspd;
gq;fspg;gpidf; fw;gpj;@jy;.

myF: 1 jfty; njhlHG nghUz;ikfs; - nkhopapd; fz;Lgpbg;Gg; gw;wpa ehd;F

Nfhl;ghLfs; - jfty; njhlHgpd; gz;Gf; $Wfs; - Clfk; - jfty; njhlHGj;
jilfs; - jfty; njhlHGk; kdpjcwTfSk; - jfty; njhlHgpd; tiffs; - jfty;
njhlHG Clfq;fspd; tiffs; - jftypay; khjphpfs; - jfty; njhlHgpd; jhf;fk; -
Clfq;fspd; gzpfs;.

myF: 2 ,jopay; - mr;R Clf tuyhW - jha;nkhopg; gj;jphpifr; rl;lk; - ,e;jpa

tpLjiy ,af;fKk; ,jo;fSk; - Kd;Ndhbg; gj;jphpiffSk; gj;jphpifahsHfSk; -
gj;jphpif epWtdj;jpd; gzpfs; - nka;g;Gj;jpUj;jk;- ,jo;fspd; gFg;Gk; mikg;Gk;.

myF: 3 thndhyp – thndhypapd; tuyhW – mfpy ,e;jpa thndhyp – thndhypf;

Nfhl;ghLfs; - thndhyp xypgug;Gfs; - gpurhHghujp kNrhjh - ,iza thndhypAk;
nraw;ghLk;.

myF: 4 njhiyf;fhl;rp - njhiyf;fhl;rpapd; tuyhW - ,e;jpaj; njhiyf;fhl;rpapd;

;tsHr;rp - Nehf;fq;fs; - epfo;r;rpj; jahhpg;G- njhiyf;fhl;rp epfo;rr
; pfs; -
tpsk;guq;fs; - njhiyf;fhl;rpapd; gpwjfty; njhlHGr; rhjdq;fs; - gd;dhl;Lj;
jlq;fs; - ,iza njhiyf;fhl;rpAk; nraw;ghLk;. mwptpay; njhopy;El;gj;jpd;
,d;iwa tsHr;rp epiyfs;. fzpdp ,izak;> tPbNah> nry;Ngrp> kpd;@dQ;ry;>
nraw;ifNfhs;> nraw;ifNfhspd; nraw;ghLfs; - njhlHgpaYk; ,jopaYk; -
gad;fSk; jdpj;jd;ikfSk; - njhlHgpay; rhjdq;fSk; kf;fs;fUj;Jk; -
kf;fs;njhlHG mYtyhpd; gzpfs; - njhlHGj; Jiwapd; mikg;Gk; gpwgzpfSk;.

அலகு: 5 EZf;f thrpg;G: kh.R.rk;ge;jdpd; mr;Rk; gjpg;Gk;> ,uh.ghNte;jdpd; jkpopy;

mwptpay; ,jo;fs;> rhU epNtjpjhtpd; rpdpkh: miye;J jpupgtdpd; mofpay;>
rkj;Jtdpd; njhiyf;fhl;rp cyfk;> g+uzr;re;jpudpd; njhlu;gpay;> r%fk;> tho;f;if.

ghHitE}y;:

1. <];tud;>r. 2014: jfty; njhlHgpay;> nrd;id: ghit gg;spNf\d;];.

2. ,uhrh.fp.>2012: kf;fs; jfty; njhlHgpay; mwpKfk;> nrd;id: ghit

gg;spNf\d;];>

3. rk;ge;jd;>k.R.:1980 mr;Rk; gjpg;Gk;> nrd;id: kzpthrfH gjpg;gfk;>

4. jkpo; mr;Rg; gz;ghL rpwg;gpjo;: khw;Wntsp Ma;tpjo; -15 brk;gH 2014.

5. godpmuq;frhkp> 1986: nra;jp cyfk;> kJiu: Kj;jkpo; epiyak;.

6. nt. fpUl;bzrhkp - jfty; njhlh;gpay; - kzpthrfh; gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id

7. FUrhkpkh.gh. 1998: ,jopay; fiyFU> Njd;nkhop gjpg;gfk;> jpUr;nre;J}u;

8. mUs;jsgjpkh – jfty; njhopy;El;gKk; kpd;ntsp cyfKk; - fhk;nlf; gjpg;gfk;>

Nf.Nf. efh;> nrd;id.

9. kUjehafk;. ,uh>2015: 21Mk;E}w;whz;by; kf;fs; jfty; njhlu;gpay;> vd;.rp.gp.vr;>

nrd;id.

10. rk;ge;jd;> k.R. 1980: mr;Rk; gjpg;Gk;> nrd;id: kzpthrfu; gjpg;gfk;.

11. ghNte;jd;. ,uh.>1998: jkpopy; mwptpay; ,jo;fs;> Nfhit: rhKNty; /gp\;fpwpd;

gjpg;gfk;.

12. rhU epNtjpjh> 2007: rpdpkh: miye;J jpupgtdpd; mofpay;> nrd;id: cz;ikg;
gjpg;gfk;.

13. rkj;Jtd; ghth> 2007: njhiyf;fhl;rp cyfk;: GJAfk; nra;Kiw> nrd;id:

nrk;ikahf;fk;.

14. g+uzr;re;jpud; fh. 2011: njhlu;gpay; r%fk; tho;f;if> jpUr;rp: milahsk;.

17. gDtyhf;ff; Nfhl;ghL - kjpg;gyF - 4

myF:1 gDty;> kuG> epfo;;j;Jjy;> tha;nkhop kuGk; vOj;J kuGk;> tha;nkhop

,yf;fpak;> epfo;j;Jf;fiyfs;> rlq;F epfo;j;Jjy; ek;gpf;iffs;> Goq;FnghUs;
gz;ghL.

myF 2: tha;nkhop tha;g;ghl;L Nfhl;ghL: kpy;kd; ghup> Vgp yhu;L> [hd; iky;];
/Nghyp – fNythyh: vypah]; Nyhd;uhl;> [Pypa]; FNuhd;> fhu;Ny FNuhd; -
mz;zd;khu; epfo;j;Jjy; - yhup `hq;Nfh rpup fhg;gpak;.

myF 3: tha;nkhop ghly; fl;likg;gpidg; Gupe;Jnfhs;Sjy; - fhg;gpa

,bNahnyf;lL
; k; fhg;gpag; gjpNtLk; - jpupG tbtq;fspd; tifg;ghLfs; -
,ilg;gDty;fs; - kugpd; njhFjp – epfo;j;Jjy; KiwikfSk; epfo;j;Jjy;
jdpj;jd;ikfSk; - Mtzg;gLj;Jjy; Kiwikfs; (nrhy;tij vOJjy;> ghLjy;>
#oypy; ghLjy;) – fUtp tof;fhWfSk; tha;nkhop ,yf;fpa tpku;rdKk; -
kdg;gDtYk; kdg;gbkq;fSk; - gDtypd; epiyj;jd;ikAk; NtWghLk;
(gy;tbtq;fs;> $w;Wfs;> tha;ghLfs;) – ghly; fl;likg;gpd; Gwtaf;$Wfs;
(tptuiz> fijahlypd; Fwpj;j gFjp) mftaf;$Wfs;> epfo;j;Jjy; cj;jpfSk;
fl;likg;G topKiwfSk; - gDty; jd;ikAk; ghlfupd; FuYk;.

myF 4: gDtyhf;fk; : gpujp> epfo;j;Jjy; gpujp> kw;nwhd;W tpupj;jy;> epfo;j;jg;gl;l

gpujp – r%fg; gz;ghl;L #oy;fs;> epfo;Tfs;> njhd;kKk; gbKiwfSk; (rlq;Ffs;>
nja;tkhLjy;)> nghUl;fs; (czT> gilay;) gDty; Fwpj;j ek;gpf;iffs;>
gDtyhf;fk; Xu; Ma;TKiwapay;> gDtyhf;f Kiwapay; - ciuahlypy;
Kiwapay; - fhg;gpag; gDty;fisf; fw;Wf;nfhs;SjYk; fl;likj;jYk; - md;whlr;
#oy;fspy; ghLjy; - fsMa;T fhg;gpa njhy;ypay;> thick corpus, organic variation,
nghUs; nfhs;Sjy;.

myF 5: EZf;f thrpg;G: ifyhrgjpapd; jkpo; tPuepiyf; ftpij> Nt.khzpf;fj;jpd;

fijg;ghly;fspy; fl;lnghk;kd;> Nj.Y}u;Jtpd; #oypay; mbg;gilapy; gonkhopfs;>
Nj.Y}u;Jtpd; ehl;lhu;tof;fhwpway; Nfhl;ghLfs;> Qh.];Bgdpd; mikg;gpay; Nfhl;ghLk;
Ma;TfSk;.

References
1. Beck, Brenda E. F.1982. The Three Twins : The Telling of a South Indian Folk Epic.
Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
2. Foley, John Miles. 1995. The Singer of Tales in Performance. Bloomington and
Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
3. Foley, John Miles. 1988. The Theory of Oral Composition: History and Methodology
Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana University Press.
4. Honko, Lauri. 1998. Textualising the siri Epic. FF Communications No.264, Helsinki:
Academia Scientiarum Fennica.
5. Krohn, Karrle. 1971. Folkare Methodology. Austin & London : University of Texas
Press.
6. Lord, Albert B. 1960. The Singer of Tales, Cambridge Mass. : Harvard University
Press.
7. ifyhrgjp f.> F.nt.ghyRg;gpukzpad;(nkh.M.) 2006: jkpo; tPuepiyf; ftpij>
nfhOk;G: Fkud; gjpg;gfk;.
8. khzpf;fk; Nt. 2014: fijg;ghly;fspy; fl;lnghk;kd;> ehfu;Nfhtpy;: fhyr;RtL.
9. Y}u;J Nj. 2010: #oypay; mbg;gilapy; gonkhopfs;> ghisaq;Nfhl;il:
ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; Ma;T ikak;.
10. Y}u;J Nj. 2003: ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; Nfhl;ghLfs;> ghisaq;Nfhl;il:
ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; Ma;T ikak;.
11. ];Bgd; Qh. 2010: mikg;gpay; Nfhl;ghLk; Ma;TfSk;> nrd;id: epAnrQ;Rtup
gg;spNf~d;].;

18. epfo;j;Jjy; kuGfSk; Nfhl;ghLk; - kjpg;gyF - 4

myF 1: epfo;j;Jjy;: fUj;jhf;fk;> tiuaiw> tifg;ghL. epfo;j;Jjy; gz;Gfs;>

epfo;j;Jeu; ghu;itahsu; Clhl;lk;. epfo;j;Jjy; fl;likg;G: #oy;> gDty;>
epfo;j;Jjy; epfo;j;Jjy; $Wfs;: tha;nkhopf; $Wfs; (Ngr;R> ciuahly;> ghLjy;>
fijnrhy;Yjy;> czu;T ntspg;ghL – mOif> rpupg;G) cly; nkhopf;$Wfs;:
(ghtid> czu;T ntspg;ghL – nksdk;> fz;> Kfghtid> cly;nkhop) epfo;j;Jjy;
fUj;jhf;fk; : njhy;fhg;gpak; (nka;g;ghl;bay;), upr;ru;L ngskdpd; tha;n
; khopf;fiy>
upr;ru;L nrf;du;> tpf;lu; lu;du;. epfo;j;Jjy; mZFKiwAk; ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpaYk;

myF 2: tha;nkhop epfo;j;Jjy; : upr;ru;L ngskd;> gpnuz;lh ngf; (mz;zd;khu;

fij). ypd;lh Nl (fijnrhy;Yjy;) [hd; iky;]; /Nghyp (tha;nkhop kuG)

myF 3: rlq;F epfo;j;Jjy; : mZFKiwfs;: upr;ru;L /g;uh];fh (njUf;$j;J)> Re;ju;

fhsp (,uzpad; ehlfk;)> ];^tu;l; gpshf;gu;d; (tpy;Yg;ghl;L> Njhy;ghitf;$j;J)> yhup
`hq;Nfh (rpup fhg;gpak;): rhKNty; Rjhde;jh (xapyhl;lk;) fiyfs; : kuG> gDty;>
epfo;j;Jkplk;> #oy;> njhopy;Kiwf;FOf;fs;> epfo;j;JKiw> ghq;F> r%fg;gz;ghl;L
#oy;.

myF 4: ehlf kuGfSk; epfo;j;Jjy;fSk; : $j;JkuG> ,ir ehlf kuG>

nghOJNghf;F epfo;j;Jjy; kuGfs; (Mly; - ghly;)

myF 5: EZf;f thrpg;G: Re;ju;fhspapd; jpUKfKk; RaKfKk;> njh.gukrptdpd;

mofu; Nfhapy;> eh.,uhkr;re;jpudpd; Jbahd rhkpfs;> M.jdQ;nradpd;
Fyf;FwpapaYk; kPdtu; tof;fhWfSk;> Nr.,uhkhD[j;jpd; ehlfg; gilg;ghf;fk;.

ghu;it E}y;fs;:
1. gukrptd;.njh.1989: mofu; Nfhapy;> kJiu: kJiu fhkuhru; gy;fiyf;fofk;.
2. Re;ju;fhsp> 2005: jpUKfKk; RaKfKk;: gz;ghl;L Ma;Tf; fl;Liufs;> kJiu:
fhNuhd; kPNuhd; gjpg;gfk;.
3. jdQ;nrad; M. 1996: Fyf;FwpapaYk; kPdtu; tof;fhWfSk;>
ghisaq;Nfhl;il: mgpjh gg;spNf~d;].;
4. ,uhkr;re;jpud;. eh>2013: Jbahd rhkpfs;> nrd;id: epAnrQ;Rtup
gg;spNf~d;].;
5. ,uhkhD[k; Nr.1994: ehlfg; gilg;ghf;fk; mbj;jsq;fs;> jQ;rht+u;: jkpo;g;
gy;fiyf;fofk;.
6. ,uhftd;>Nt. 1974: ehl;baf; fiy> nrd;id: fiykfs; ntspaPL.
7. Gj;kh Rg;gpukzpd;. 1985: gujf; fiyf; Nfhl;ghL> nrd;id: thdjp gjpg;gfk;.
8. ntq;fl; Rthkpehjd;>1985: md;iwa twl;rpapypUe;J ,d;iwa Kaw;rp tiu>
rptfq;if: md;dk;
9. Rg;gpukzpad;> 1977: ghl;Lk; $j;Jk;> kJiu: kJiu fhkuhru; gy;fiyf;fofk;.
10. tPuuhfitad; (nkh.M)> 1957: mgpea ju;g;gzk;> nrd;id: c.Nt.r. E}yfk;.

19. ,dtiutpay; fs Ma;T - kjpg;gyF - 4

myF 1: fs Ma;T : Kd; - fsMa;tj; jahupg;Gk; jftyhsu;fSld; cwtpid

Vw;gLj;JjYk;. fsMa;T vd;why; vd;d? khdpltpay;> ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; Gyk;
rhu;e;J vOk; fs Ma;Tg; gpur;ridfs; - Ke;ija Ma;TfSk; gjpTfSk; - vOj;J>
xyp> xsp tbt Mtzq;fs; jftyhsu;fisj; Nju;e;njLj;jy; - jftyhsu;fSld;
cwtpid Vw;gLj;Jjy;. fstpOkpaq;fs; mfj;jhu; - Gwj;jhu; ghu;it rhu;e;j
mZFKiwfs;

myF 2: Nrfupg;Gj; jpl;lk;: fs Ma;T mZFKiwfs; - cw;WNehf;fy;> gq;Nfw;G

cw;WNehf;fy;> Neu;fhzy;. #oy; tiffs; - ,aw;if> nraw;if> J}z;lg;gl;l
,aw;if vJ jfty;? jfty;fisg; gjpT nra;Ak; Kiwikfs; ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;W
jfty; tiffs; - Kjd;ik epiy - ,uz;lhk; epiy fs Ma;tpy; vOk; rpf;fy;fs;
fs Ma;T Nrfupg;Gj; jpl;ltiuT khjpupia vOJjy; - Nrfupg;Gj; jpl;lq;fspd;
tiffs;

myF 3: ,dtiutpay;: ,dtiutpay; vd;why; vd;d? Neh;fhl;rpthjk;> vjhu;j;jthjk;

,dtiutpay; - Xu; Ma;tpay; mZFKiw- Xu; Ma;tpay; tifik ,dtiutpay;
vOJjy; - ,dtiutpay; gDty; - gDty;fis xOq;FgLj;Jjy;
,dtiutpaYf;fhd ghu;itahsu;fSk; gDty;fSk;
myF 4: tpku;rd ,dtiutpay;: Gjpa ,dtiutpay; - Ngr;rpd; ,dtiutpay; -
,dtiutpay; Gjpa mZFKiwfs; - jkpof gz;ghl;Lr; #oypy; ,dtiutpay; -
fhydpar; #oy;> ,e;jpatpay; Gjpa ,dtiutpayhsu;fs;> njw;F Mrpag;ghu;it.

myF 5: EZf;f thrpg;G : Nj.Y}u;Jtpd; ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; fsMa;T>

MW.,uhkehjdpd; ehl;Lg;Gwtpay; fsMa;T newpKiwfs;> m.f.ngUkhspd;
ehl;lhupay; topfhl;b> rp.N[.Gy;yupd; Njtpapd; jpUg;gzpahsu;fs;> ,uh.re;jpuNrfupd;
ehl;Lg;Gwtpay; fs Ma;T.

ghu;it E}y;fs;

1. Nj.Y}u;J> ehl;lhu; tof;fhw;wpay; fsMa;T> ghisaq;Nfhl;il: ghupNts;

gjpg;gfk;>
2. vl;fu; ju;]l
; d;> njd;dpe;jpaf; Fyq;fSk; FbfSk;> jQ;rhT+u;: jkpo;g;
gy;fiyf;fofk;>
3. gf;jtj;ry ghujp> jkpofj;jpy; ehNlhbfs;> GJr;Nrup: ty;ypdk;>
4. ngUkhs;>m.f. 1985: ehl;lhupay; topfhl;b> ehfu;Nfhtpy;: gpupz;lu;]; gpiuNtl;
ypkpnll;.
5. Gy;yu;> rp.N[.> 1999: Njtpapd; jpUg;gzpahsu;fs;> ghisaq;Nfhl;il: ehl;lhu;
tof;fhw;wpay; Ma;T ikak;.
6. re;jpuNrfu;.,uh. Kw;Wk; gyu; (g.M.)> 2003: Nfhak;Gj;J}u;: ghujpahu;
gy;fiyf;fofk;.
7. ];Bgd;>Qh. 1998: nfhf;fiu: fhzpf;fhuu; tho;Tk; gz;ghLk;> ehfu;Nfhtpy;:
jpiz ntspaPL.
8. ,uhkehjd;>MW.2003: ehl;Lg;Gwtpay; fsMa;T newpKiwfs;> jpUtde;jGuk;:
njd;dpe;jpa nkhopfspd; ehl;Lg;Gwtpay; fofk;.

20. jpl;l VL - kjpg;gyF - 4

Ma;Tf;FOthy; jpl;l VL gupe;Jiuf;fg;gLk; Ma;thsUf;Fj; jpl;lVl;Lg; gzp

nghUe;Jk;. ,J xU jhSf;Fr; rkkhdJ. jpl;lVl;ilg; gUtj; Nju;T njhlq;Fk; Kd;
Ma;Tf; FoTf;Fr; rku;g;gpf;f Ntz;Lk;. newpahsupd; newpg;gLj;Jjypd;fPo; jpl;l
Vl;Lg;gzpia Nkw;nfhs;s Ntz;Lk;. jpl;lVL fzpdp jl;lr;rpy; 50 gf;fq;fSf;Ff;
Fiwahky; mika Ntz;Lk;. Ma;Ntl;Lld; ,j;jpl;l Vl;il Muha;r;rpg; gpuptpy;
rku;g;gpf;f Ntz;Lk;.
MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY, TIRUNELVELI

Ph. D Course Work Papers

ZOOLOGY

(with effect from the academic year 2017-18 onwards)

Exam
Course Name of the course Credit hrs/
week

Advanced Research Methodology

CORE I 4 4

CORE II Fisheries and Aquaculture 4 4

CORE III Advances in Entomology 4 4

4 4
CORE IV Pollution and Toxicology
Pharmaceuticals and 4 4
CORE-V
Neutraceuticals
CORE-VI Freshwater habitat and Ecology 4 4

Microbiology and Microbial 4 4

CORE-VII
Techniques
Immuno and Biochemical 4 4
CORE-VIII
techniques
4 4
CORE-IX Marine Biodiversity and Wildlife
Marine Bio-resources, Utilization, 4 4
CORE-X
threats and Management
CORE-XI Integrated Ocean Management 4 4

Animal Biotechnology and 4 4

CORE-XII
Molecular Biology

Page 1 of 24
 1: ADVANCED RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
L P T C
4 0 0 4
Course objective:
To provide in-depth Knowledge on methods involved in preparation of working
solutions, quantitative and also on the working principles of equipments involved in research.

Unit: I Preparation of solutions :Types of Solutions- Standard Solutions, Stock Solution,

Saturated Solution, Solution of Acids; Expression of Concentration - Molarity (M),
Molality (m), Preparation of One Molar (1 M) Solutions, Normality (N), Mass Percent
% (w/w), Percentage by Volume or % (v/v), Volume/Weight (V/W), Parts per Million
(ppm), Parts per Billion (ppb); pH; Buffers and their preparation. -12h

Unit: II. Microscopy and Microtechnique: Microscopy – Principle, working mechanism and
applications of Light, Phase contrast, Fluorescent, Darkfield, SEM, TEM and STEM.
Microtechnique – Preparation of Whole mountand sections, staining, mounting and
preparation of permanent slides; Cyto and Histochemical techniques. - 8h

Unit: III. Quantitative and Molecular Techniques: Quantification of carbohydrate, protein, lipid,
fatty acids and aminoacids (Proximate composition); Estimation of Hydrolytic and
Detoxication enzymes. Molecular Techniques – Principle, mechanism and application
of SDS PAGE, AGE, PCR, RT-PCR; Basic principle and application of
Chromatography; Basic principle and application of Spectrophotometer and UV
Spectrophotometer. -12h
Unit IV: Biostatistics: Parametric – Student T test, F Test, Z – Test, Correlation, Regression and
Co-efficient, ANOVA (One-way, Two-way), MANOVA, ANCOVA; Non-parametric –
Chi-square, Wilcoxon signed rank test, Mann-Whitney test, Kolmogorov-Snirnow tests;
SPSS, Sigma Plot, MAT LAB, and MiniTab for Biological data analysis. -14h
Unit V: Manuscript, Thesis and Project Writing:Research Processing, writing of report, research
paper and review articles, Writing Thesis and Project proposal; Proof correction –
symbols, MS word review option and other tools; Plagiarism checking, Impact factor, h
index, i10 index, citation index; Funding agencies in India –DST, DBT, CSIR, ICMR,
DRDO, ICAR, MoEF &CC, MoEs, UGC, TNSCST, IFS and EU. -14h
----
60
------
Reference Books:

1. Rodney F. Boyer 2012. Biochemistry Laboratory: Modern Theory and techniques,

second edition, Prentice Hall
2. Rajan Katoch. 2011. Analytical Techniques in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology,
Springer, New York.
3. Chander,D.E. and Rtoberson, R.W.2009. Bioimaging: Current concepts in light and
electron microscopy. Jones & Bartlet Publishers Jandberry M.A., USA.
4. Gurumani.2008. Text book of Research methodology.

Page 2 of 24
5. Hoppert M.2003. Microscopic Techniques in Biotechnology. Wile and VCH,G Book
& Co, Germany.

Page 3 of 24
 2: FISHERIES AND AQUACULTURE

L P T C
4 0 0 4
Course Objective:
To impart knowledge on kinds of fishery resources and aquaculture management.
UNIT I : Fisheries resources: Inland Fisheries resources-Marine Fishery Resources:-
Important finfish and shellfish resources in Demersal and pelagic systems;.-
Brackish water Fishery Resources- Reverine fisheries resources:- Fishery
Resource management and conservation strategies. Fishing Gears and Grafts-
Fishing equipment: Fish finder, GPS navigator, sonar, net sonde, gear monitoring
equipment. – Harvesting and Post harvest Techniques. -12h

.UNIT II: Aquaculture Scenario: Indian and Global Scenario of aquaculture – Ecological and
social aspects of aquaculture development – Sustainable and Eco-friendly
aquaculture. Cultivable fin and shell fishes – Taxonomy and Characteristics of
cultivable fish species – Criteria for the selection of cultivable species –
Nutritional value of cultivable fishes. -10h

Unit III : Culture Techniques, Design & Construction of Fish ponds: Culture technologies –
Extensive, semi intensive, intensive and super intensive culture practices-water
quality management in fish ponds. Selection of suitable site for aquaculture –
Design and construction of culture ponds. Preparation and management of culture
ponds. -12h

UNIT IV : Feed and feed Management : Live feed culture (Microalgal culture, culture of
Artemia, Rotifer and copepods – significance of live feed culture –Artificial feed:
Types of Artificial feed – Feed Formulation–Feed additives (binder,
Preservatives, Immunostimulants-Feeding stimulant-Antioxidants and colorants)-
Feeding Management. Probiotics and pre-biotics as feed additives and functional
food-Feed storage. -14h

Unit V : Fish diseases: Bacterial, viral, fungal and parasitic diseases in fin and shell fishes
–Disease Diagnostics: (Conventional & Molecular methods) – Treatment

Page 4 of 24
 measures – Predators. Probiotics and Prebiotics in fish diseases management-
Gnotobiotics. -12h

----
60
------
Reference Books:

1. Balugut, E.A.1989. Aquaculture system and practices. A selected review publishing

House, New Delhi.

2. Michael, B.N. and Singholka, B. 1985. Freshwater Prawn Farming. A manual of culture
of Macrobrachium rosenbergii. Daya Publishing House, New Delhi.

3. Pillai, TVR. and M. N. Kutty., 2005. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices, Wiley-
Blackwell.

4. Bose, AN., Yang, C.T., and Misra, A. 1991. Coastal Aquaculture Engineering. Oxford and
IBH Publishing Co., PVt. Ltd., New Delhi.

5. Sinha, V.R.P. 1993. A Compendium of Aquaculture Technologies for Developing

Countries. Center for Science and Technology and Oxford and IBH Publishing
Co., Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi.

6. Robert R. Stickney., 2009. Aquaculture: An Introductory Text, CAB International

Publishers.

Page 5 of 24
 L P T C
3: ADVANCES OF ENTOMOLOGY 4 0 0 4

Course Objective:

To learn the advances in taxonomy, distribution, special organs in insect, offensive and
defensive behaviour, entomological industries, biological values, and also Insect as human Pests
and vector.

Unit I: Taxonomy, distribution, and special organs:Introduction to numerical and molecular

taxonomy; phenetics, cladistics; Insect sampling, collection and preservation
techniques; rearing devices; insects as indicators of levels of pollution, GIS in relation
to insects; Special organs in Insects-scent, sound and light producing apparatus; tricho-
bothria in adult and immature insects; thermoregulatory, visual, auditory and glandular
organs, exocrine and endocrine organs. -12 h

Unit II: Offensive and defensive Behaviour:Camouflaging, death feigning, mimesis, mimicry,
host finding, feeding and reproductive behaviour, escape, defence, offence and
predation; dispersal and migration; dormancy; adaptive features against CO2 and UV
rays. -10h

Unit III: Entomological industries:Moricultrue - mulberry varieties for irrigated, rain-fed,

alkaline conditions; mulberry propagation and cultivation practice; Sericulture – rearing
practice of silkworm, coloured silk, recycling of sericulture waste, value addition to
sericulture. Apiculture- Modern bee keeping equipments, advanced technology for
collection, and processing of honey, Tribulations of Pesticide in Apiculture, Lac-
culture-Host plant (winger and summer crop) cultivation and management, and pest
management, strains of lack insect, insect culture, methods of artificial inoculation,
processing of natural lac, and commercialization. -12h

Unit IV: Biological values of insects:Feed (Hermetia illucens, Musca domestica)), Bacillus and
NPV production using insects, commercialized insects (Acheta domesticus), Edible
insect (Galleria mellonella, Tenebrio molitor, Acheta domesticus, Bombyx mori,
Ruspolia differens, Locusta migratoria) and their health benefits; Venom producing
insects (bugs, beetles, flies, neuropterans, and especially parasitoid and solitary aculeate
wasps), peptides (Melittin, Apamin, Mast Cell Degranulating Peptide, Bombolitins,
Mastoparans) and their health value; chemical nature (Sericin, Fibroin) Fibrous and
therapeutic value of silkworm silk; chemistry, nutraceutical, medicinal value of honey.

-14h

Unit V: Insect as human Pests and vector: Insect types-phytophagous, zoophagous,

oligophagous, saprophagous, vectors; Ants, termites, cockroaches, silver-fish, cricket,

Page 6 of 24
 powder-post beetle, carpet beetle, cloth-moths, psocids, lice, bed-bugs, fleas,
mosquitoes, house flies, wasps, sand flies, stable flies, flesh flies, blow flies, tsetse flies,
black flies and midges. -12h

----
60
------
Reference Books:

1. Journal of Insects as Food and Feed, 2017; 3(4): 225-229

2. Bharat B. Bindroo Director, and Satish Verma. 2014. Sericulture technologies developed
by CSRTI MYSORE, Central Silk Board – Ministry of Textiles – Govt. of India, Mysore,
pp. 66.
3. D. Sharma, 1995. Honeybees and their management in India, Indian Council of
Agricultural Research, Printed in India at Everest Press, New Delhi, pp. 175
4. Alok Kumar, AK Jaiswal, AK Singh, and RK Yogi (eds.)(2015). Advances in Lac
Production, Processing, Product Development and Value Addition, ICAR-IINRG,
Ranchi. 1-206 pp.

Page 7 of 24
 4: POLLUTION AND TOXICOLOGY L P T C
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to provide students with an understanding of the sources, links and
biological effects of major classes of pollutants in the marine environment. The course will help
prepare students for careers in academic programs, research centers and consulting firms by providing
them with an in-depth understanding of causes, consequences and methods of assessment of marine
pollution.

UNIT I :Basics in Marine Pollution: Marine Pollution – Definition of GESAMP - Major

pollutants – sources, transport path, dynamics. Monitoring methods, bioindicators,
bioaccumulators and hot spots. Toxicology : Lethal and Sub-lethal effects of
pollutants to marine organisms bioconcentration, bioaccumulation and
biomagnifications, methods of toxicity testing, factors influencing toxicity,
synergistic and antagonistic effects, role of microcosms & mesocosms. -14h

UNIT II: Major Pollutants – Sewage and Detergent: Sewage; industrial, agricultural and
domestic discharges. Composition of Sewage - impact on marine environment,
treatment methods (primary, secondary and tertiary).Detergents – composition –
eutrophication and ecological significance, interference in the sewage treatment
system. -12h

UNIT III: Major pollutants – Heavy metals & pesticide: Heavy metal pollution – sources,
distribution, fate, toxicity and diseases (Minamata, itai-itai etc.).Pesticide pollution,
classification and composition – sources, transport, distribution, fate and ecological
impacts in the marine environment – endocrine disrupters. -12h

UNIT IV: Major Pollutants – Oil: Oil pollution – composition, sources and fate of spilled oil,
biodegradation, biological impact of oil on marine organisms.- 10h

Unit V: Minor Pollutants: Thermal pollution – sources – waste heat disposal, uses of waste
heat, role of biocides (Chlorine), ecological impacts. Radioactive pollution, sources
(natural and artificial), distribution, biological effects of radiation. Plastics and litter –
impact of mining and dredging operations in the marine environment. -12h
----
60
------

Reference Books

1. Johnston, R. (Ed.), 1976. Marine Pollution. Academic Press, London, 729 pp.
2. Pantin, S.A., 1982. Pollution and the Biological Resources of the Oceans. Butterworth
Scientific Co., London.

Page 8 of 24
3. Clark, R.B., 1992. Marine Pollution. 3rd Edition. Clavendon Press, Oxford,UK 172 pp.
4. Carl J.Sindermann, 1995. Ocean Pollution: Effects on Living Resources and Humans
7/176 – CRC Press, Baca Raten Tokyo275pp.
5. Michael J. Kennish., 1996. Estuarine and Marine Pollution. (524 pp.) 07/002 CRC Press,
New York.
6. Michael J.Kennish, 1997. Pollution Impacts on Marine Biotic Communities (310pp) 7/77,
CRC press, New York.
7. David J.Hoffman, Barnett A. Rattner, G.Allen Burton, Jr.JohanCaims, Jr., 1997. Hand
Book of Ecotoxicology (755pp) – 7/018. Lewis publishers, Tokyo.
8. Trivedi, R.K.2001. Aquatic Toxicology and Toxicology (239 pp) 7/157 – ABD
publishers, Jaipur
9. Michael C. Newman, Morris H. Roberts, Jr. Robert C. Hale, 2001. Coastal and Estuarine
Risk assessment (347pp) 07/125 Lewis publishers, New York
10. Yasunori Murakami, Kei Nakayama, shin – Kitamura., 2008. Biological Response to
Chemical pollutants. Terra pub, Tokyo, 372 pp.

Page 9 of 24
 5: PHARMACEUTICALS AND NUTRACEUTICALS

L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course Objective: To provide knowledge on concept production and manufacturing of

Neutraceuticals and also an pharmacology, pharmacogenetics and drug design.

UNIT I: Introduction &Concepts of nutraceuticals: definitions, synonymous terms, basis of

claims for a compound as a nutraceutical, regulatory issues for nutraceuticals
including CODEX- Concept of angiogenesis and the role of nutraceuticals/functional
foods; Nutraceuticals for cardiovascular diseases, cancer, diabetes, cholesterol
management, obesity, joint pain, immune enhancement, age-related macular
degeneration, endurance performance and mood disorders – compounds and their
mechanisms of action, dosage levels, contraindications if any etc. -14h

UNIT II: Production and Manufacturing aspects of nutraceuticals: Production and

Manufactureing of lycopene, isoflavonoids, prebiotics and probiotics, glucosamine,
phytosterols etc.; formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals –
stability and analytical issues, labelling issues. -12h

UNIT III: Pharmacology: Introduction to Pharmacology, Sources of drugs, Dosage forms and
routes of administration, mechanism of action, Combined effect of drugs, Factors
modifying drug action, tolerance and dependence. -10h

UNIT IV: Pharmacogenetics. Absorption, Distribution, Metabolism and Excretion of drugs,

Principles of Basic and Clinical pharmacokinetics, Adverse Drug Reactions and
treatment of poisoning, ADME drug interactions, Bioassay of Drugs and Biological
Standardization, Discovery and development of new drugs. -12h

UNIT V: Principles of Drug Design (Theoretical Aspects): Traditional analog (QSAR) and
mechanism based approaches (Introduction to graph theory, applications of quantum
mechanics, Computer Aided Drug Designing (CADD) and molecular modeling.-12h

----
60
------

Reference Books:

1. Israel Goldberg (Ed.) (1999) Functional foods, designer foods, pharma foods,
Nutraceuticals, Aspen publishers Inc., USA
2. L. Rapport and B. Lockwood (2002). Nutraceuticals, 2ndEdition, Pharmaceutical Press.

Page 10 of 24
3. M. Maffei (Ed.) (2003) Dietary Supplements of Plant Origin, Taylor & Francis
4. Shahidi and Weerasinghe (Ed.) (2004) Nutraceutical beverages Chemistry, Nutrition and
health Effects, , American Chemical Society.
5. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods Edited by Robert E.C. Wildman,
Routledge Publishers.
6. Nutraceuticals by L. Rapport and B. Lockwood, Pharmaceutical Press.
7. Methods of Analysis for Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals Edited by W. Jeffrey,
Hursts, Routledge Publishers.
8. Food is Medicine by P.J Cousion; Duncan Baired Publishers, London.
9. Haward.C. Ansel; Pharmaceutical calculations, 13th Ed, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
Publication, 2010
10. Cooper and Gunn ;Dispensing for Pharmaceutical Students, 12th Ed, CBS Publication
11. Leon Lachman and Lieberman; The theory and practice of pharmacy, 3rd Ed, CBS
Publication, 1986
12. Lockheart; Packaging of Pharmaceuticals of Healthcare products, Marcel Decker, 1998.
13. Herburn Kenneth; Quality control of Packaging Materials, in Pharmaceutical Industry
Marcel Dekker, 1990.
14. Michael Levin; Pharmaceutical Process Scale-Up, 2nd Ed, vol-157, CRS Press,2006.
15. Mitra; Ophthalmic Drug Delivery System, 1st Ed, Vol-58, Marcel Dekker, 1993.
16. Ray & May; Freeze Drying / Lyophilization of pharmaceutical & Biological
Products,Marcel Dekker,

Page 11 of 24
 6: FRESH WATER HABITAT & ECOLOGY L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course objectives:
1. To learn the principles, applications and management of environmental science.
2. To study the interactions between energy, water and food and the how their sustainability
will safeguard the future of humans and the ecosystem on the planet
3. To learn the variety of technologies currently employed and under development for
production of bioenergy and bioproducts.

Unit I: Ecosystem: Ecological factors – structure and function of an ecosystem. Biogeochemical

cycles: Basic types of biogeochemical cycles - gaseous cycle - carbon and nitrogen
cycles, sedimentary cycles (P and S), recycling pathways and recycle index. Limiting
Factors- basic concepts- Leibig’s law of minimum, Shelford’s law of tolerance. Fauna
and their adaptations of aquatic, and terrestrial habitats. Properties of population-
density, natality, mortality, age distribution, biotic-potential, environmental resistance
and carrying capacity, population growth curves, emigration, immigration and
migration, population fluctuation. -14h

Unit II: Bio-resources:Natural resources - Biorenewable resources - Plankton - fresh water

ecosystem - Occurrence and distribution of planktons, Phytoplankton – cyanobacteria,
algae, Zooplankton. Toxic and non – toxic algae (Cyanobacteria / blue green algae) -
types of cyanobacteria, nature and diversity, isolation and identification. Biomass and
algae for energy and bioproducts. Socio-economic aspects of bioresources. -12h

Unit III: Water Quality:Aquatic Ecosystem - Biological aspects and chemical aspects of various
aquatic ecosystems, Physicochemical parameters – pH, temperature, nutrients
(phosphates, nitrates contents), light, BOD, COD. Environmental pollution Sources –
effect on animals – control methods, water pollution – eutrophication and algal blooms
(HABs), surface scum, effects on animals and control methods. -10h

Unit IV: Biodiversity Conservation Tools: Global climate change factors – Human impact on
earth and biodiversity; Invasive species, exotic species – Threat to animal biodiversity;
Ecology of transgenic crops and animal interaction. GIS and satellite imaging in
biodiversity assessment. Biotechnological methods of pollution detection,
bioremediation, biotechnology and biodegradation, genetically engineered microbes in
bio-treatment of waste, ecofriendly bioproducts for environmental health, bio-piracy,
bio-pesticides and bio-fertilizers, organic farming and its merits. -12h

Page 12 of 24
Unit V: Environmental Management: Wild life conservation and management: Significance,
causes of extinction, concepts of threatened species, red data book, IUCN, WWF,
CITES, Green Environment and Green peace; protected areas, biosphere reserves,
national parks and sanctuaries in India, forests in India, desertification, deforestation,
carbon trading; importance of mangroves in coastal ecosystems- conservation and
management. -12h

----
60
------

Reference books:
1. Ahluwalia, V. K. and Malhotra, S. (2006). Environmental science. Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.
2. Aravind Kumar. (2004). Text Book of Environmental Science. APH Associates, Inc.
Publishers. Massachusetts.
3. Eugene P Odum. (2002). Fundamentals of Ecology. Natraj Publishers,
4. Odum, E.P., 2005. Fundamental of Ecology, Holt- Saunders International Edition, Japan.
5. Robert C. Brown and Tristan R. Brown. Biorenewable resources: engineering new
products from agriculture, 2nd edition, Wiley Blackwell, 2014.
6. Sharma P.D. (2000). Environmental Biology. Rastogi Publications.
7. Velma I. Grover (ed.), Global Warming and Climate Change, Science Publishers (USA),
2008.

Page 13 of 24
 7: MICROBIOLOGY AND MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course Objective: To learn the basic and applied aspects of bacteriology, virology, fungi,
biological Importance and Utilization of microbes, and related technology

Unit I Bacteriology: General account of morphology & ultra structure; Archaea -Diversity,
Occurrence, Major groups, characteristics and potential application; Plasmids & mobile
genetic elements; Cultivation of bacteria-aerobic and anaerobic cultures, synchronous and
asynchronous culture, batch, fed batch and continuous culture; Measurement of growth,
factors affecting growth; Antibiotic/Drug resistance. -14h
Unit II Virology:Distinctive, properties of virus, morphology, architecture, capsid arrangement,
types of envelope and their composition; Life cycles and replication of Ebola virus, Mimi
virus, Oncogenic virus; Variations in structure of bacteriophages; Viral vaccines and
antiviral agents. -12h
Unit III Fungi:Diversity, salient structural features, modes of reproduction, ecological
significances, sex hormones, mycotoxins, fungal associations with plants (endophytes,
mycorrhizal fungi), animals and humans; Secondary metabolites from fungi-Terpenes,
Nonribosomal peptides, hydrophobins, peptaibols, indole, alkaloids, detailed emphasis on
polyketides; Economic importance. -10h
Unit IV Biological Importance and Utilization:Important diseases in agricultural crops by
bacteria (crown gall), viruses (CaMV) and fungi (rust of wheat) and their control
(chemical & biological); Microbial diseases of aquacultural animals- finfish and shell fish.
Microbial remediation - xenobiotics, municipal water, Solid and liquid based treatments,
Industrial effluents, environmental pollutants (Petroleum hydrocarbons and
pesticides).Microbial biofertilizer; plant growth promotion (PGPR); Food and beverages;
Microbial insecticides, Biosurfactants, Biofuel, Bio-plastic, recombinant products
(insulin, somatostatin, thaumatin), steroids (cortisone). -12h
Unit V Techniques:Preparation of Competent cells & Transformation of Plasmid DNA in E. coli;
Gene Cloning using E. coli based plasmids, Isolation of RNA & its analysis, Isolation of
exopolysaccharide producing microbes and purification of the polysaccharide, hydrolytic
enzyme production by SSF (solid state fermentation) method, Isolation of of
Azospirillum/Rhizobium and detection of IAA produced by them. -12h

----
60
------

Page 14 of 24
Reference Books
1. Pelzar, MJJ., Chan, ECS and Kerig, NR. 1993. Microbiology – Concepts and
Applications.
2. Prescott, LM., Harley, JD and Klein, DA. 1999. Microbiology, WEB Mc Graw – Hill.
3. Dubey, HC., 2004. A text book of fungi, bacteria and viruses, Vikas Publishing House.
4. Atlas, R.M. 1995. Principles of Microbiology. Mosby - Year Book Inc.
5. Ananthanaryanan, T. and Paniker, J.C.K. 2000. Text Book of Microbiology
Oriental Longman Ltd., Madras
6. Rheinhemer, G. 1980. Aquatic Microbiology, John Wiley and Sons.
7. Davis, D., Dulbecco, R., Eisen, HN and Ginsberg, HS. 1980. Microbiology, Third Ed.,
Harper and Row Publishers, Hagertown.
8. George, W. Burns. 1980. The Science of Genetics: An introduction to Heredity, Fourth
Edition, Mc Milan Publishing Co., Inc., New York.
9. Tewari et al., 2000. Advances in Microbial Technology, APH, New Delhi.
10. Rajni Gupta and Mukherji, 2001. Microbial Technology, APH, New Delhi.

Page 15 of 24
 8: IMMUNO AND BIOCHEMICAL TECHNIQUES L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course Objective: To Impart knowledge on the basic and applied aspects of immunology,
immune-techniques and biochemical techniques.

Unit I: Antigen and antibody-1:Antigen and antibodies structure and functions, antigen receptors,
accessory molecules of T lymphocytes; Development to lymphocytes – activation of
lymphocytes, immune memory response, Immunofluorescence, Antibody isolation and
purification methods, antisera production (Monoclonal and polyclonal), Vaccine
production- Inactivated, Attenuated, Acellular, Toxoid, Conjugated, Subunit, and DNA.
-14h

Unit II: Antigen and antibody-2:Antigen and antibody qualification and quantification-Single
immunodiffusion, Double immunodiffusion; Radio-immuno assay; Agglutination-
direct and indirect, Hemagglutination inhibition; Immunoprecipitation, Complement
assays; Hemolytic assay, Functional assays, ELISPOT,
Memory Lymphocyte Immunostimulation Assay (MELISA ); Western plotting,
Affinity purification. -12h

Unit III: Immuno chemistry and cytology;Immunohistochemistry- radioimmunoassay (RIA),

Immunoaffinity Chromatography, Immunoelectrophoresis; Basic principles, working
methods and applications of ELISA, Sandwich ELISA; Immuno-cytology- Immune cell
isolation, Flow cytometry, Immunohistochemistry. -10h

Unit IV: Biochemical Techniques:Homogenization and centrifugation (Ultracentrifuge),

Working principle, basic and applied methodology and applications of
chromatography (paper, TLC, column, GC-MS, HPLC); Protein staining
(Amidoblack, Commassie, Ponceau-red, Silver, Gold, Gelcode), Protein Imaging
(Coomassie Blue Dyes, Silver stain, Fluorescent Stains and Dyes). -12h

Unit V: Biochemical Techniques:Isotopic tracer technique - Radioactive Isotopes, Geiger-

Müller counter or G-M tube; Spectrophotometry- Lambert's law, Beer's law,
Spectrophotometer, UV- Spectrophotometer; Working principle, basic and applied
methodology and applications of Atomic Emission and Absorption; Oxygen and
Carbon Dioxide Electrodes, Coulometry, Osmometry and Refractometry. -12h
----
60
------

Page 16 of 24
Reference Books:
1. Springer T.A. 1985. Hybridoma technology in Biosciences and Medicine, Plenum Press,
New York.
2. Paul, W.E.M. 1989. Fundamentals of Immunobiology. Current Biology Ltd., London.
3. Janeway, C., Travers, P., Walport, M., Shlomchik, M. and M.J. Shlomchik. 2004.
Immunobiology: The Immune System in Health and Disease. Garland Publication.
4. Kuby, J. 2006. Immunology (4th Edn.), Goldsby, R.A., Kindt, T.J., Osborne, B.A., W.H.
Freeman and Company.
5. Roitt, I.M, 2006. Essential of Immunology (12th Edn.), ELBS, Blackwell Scientific
Publication
6. Abbas, A. K., Lichtman, A. H. and S. Pillai. 2006. Cellular and molecular Immunology (6th
Edn). W.B.Saunders Company.
7. Chakraborthy, A.L. 2006. Immunology and Immunotechnology. Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.

Page 17 of 24
 9: MARINE BIODIVERSITY AND WILDLIFE L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course Objective : This paper provides basic knowledge on the diversity of coastal and marine
fauna and flora including wildlife.

Unit i: What is Marine Biodiversity - Types of Biodiversity – Species, ecosystem and Genetic
biodiversity. Importance of Marine Biological Diversity – Products from marine life :
Food, Medicine and Raw materials – seaweeds, seagrass, significance of three
dimensional structure of mangrove plantation – primary productivity – Ecosystem
services from sea. Conservation of biodiversity: areas of diversity, areas to be protected,
larval and nursery grounds. Risk factors for populations: demography – sex ratio,
anthropogenic uncertainty, low recruitment, mortality. - 14 h

Unit II: Threats to Marine biological diversity : Proximate threats – over exploitation of marine
invertebrates (crustaceans and molluscks), vertebrate (fish), reptile (sea turtle), marine
mammals (whale, dolphin, Physical alterations – mining, dredging, navigation,
simplification, fragmentation, marinas, jetties, pollution – oil spilage, chemicals,
radionucleocides, alien species – transfer through ballast water, global atmospheric
change – global warming, rise in sea level. - 12 H

Unit III:Impediments to Marine conservation : Insufficient scientific information – available

with traditional users of sea, scientists but not complete, inadequate transfer of
information – improve vertical transfer to horizontal transfer, decision makers, cultural
and biological diversity – fundamental ecological shift, tragedy of the commons,
economic valuation – value of species and ecosystem that do not enter markets,
internalization of externalities. - 10 h

Unit IV:Tools for conservation of marine biodiversity: political advocacy – Expanding

knowledge base – science, research, planning, regulating threats, economic tools,
protecting areas, active manipulation. - 10 h

Unit V:Biodiversity indices – univariate method – Shannon-Weiner index, Simpson index,

similarity and dissimilarity index – Graphical/distributional techniques. Multivariate
method-cluster analysis, non-metric multi dimensional scaling. Mathematical modeling
– types – building a model-planning, implementation, evaluation, sensitivity analysis.
Population and sampling, types of biological data, presentation, measures of central
tendency and dispersion. Analysis of variance, correlation and regression - Computer
applications in biostatistics. - 14 h

--------
60 h
--------

Page 18 of 24
Reference books

1. Chapman, V. J., 1976. Mangrove vegetation. J. Gramer, Berlin.

2. Peter Mc Roy, C. and G. Helferich, 1977. Seagrass Ecosystems. A Scientific respective.
Marcel Dekker Inc., Ney York.
3. Yale Eawson, E., 1966. Marine Botany : An introduction. Hole Reinhart and Winston
Inc., New York.
4. Kaestner, A., 1967. Invertebrate Zoology. Vol. I to III. Wiley Interscience Publishers.
5. Carl E. Bond, 1979. Biology of Fisheries. W. B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia.
6. King, M., 1995. Fisheries Biology, Assessment and management, Fishing News Books.
7. Nikolshi, G. V., 1969. Theory of fish population dynamics as the biological background
for rational exploitation and management of fishery resources. Otto Koeltz Science
Publishers, Berlin.
8. Naskar K. and R. Mandal, 1999. Ecology and Biodiversity of Indian mangroves. Daya
Publishers, 361.
9. Agarwal et al., 1996. Biodiversity and Environment, APH pp. 351.
10. Heywood, V. H,m 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment, UNEP, pp. 1140.
11. Miller, R. I., 1994. Mapping the Diversity of Nature, Chapman & Hall, 218.
12. Zar,J.H. 1974, Biostatistical analysis, Prentice Hall, New Jercy, 620 p.

Page 19 of 24
 10: MARINE BIORESOURCES: UTILIZATION, THREATS AND
MANAGEMENT L P T C
4 0 0 4

Course Objective : This paper provides knowledge on bioresource utilization, threats to

biodiversity and its management for sustainable utilization.

Unit I: Marine bio-resources – diversity, distribution, importance and values of exploitation;

Methods of exploitation - Marine bio-resources and community including institutional
mechanism; Bioactive substances and toxins from the sea – sources, utilization and
management. - 12 h

Unit II:Threats to ecosystem and resources – anthropogenic and natural – pollution – industrial
& domestic, destructive & over fishing practices, coral mining, mangrove deforestation,
seagrass beds denudation, trawling. - 10 h

Unit III:Climate change - SST - loss of habitat and fishery, sea level rise and resources,
migration of fishes, adaptation and management; Diseases – causes, monitoring and
management - 10 h

Unit IV:Conservation and management of marine resources – concepts, mechanisms and action
plan; coastal ecosystem restoration - Artificial reefs, coral restoration, seagrass restoration
and mangrove restoration; Bio-resources culture & sea ranching. - 14 h

Unit V:Government initiatives in bio-resource conservation and management – laws, regulation,

outreach and enforcement; Role of NGOs, research institutions; Local community
participation in bio-resource conservation and management; Mangement – species and
ecosystem level; Importance of acts and regulations in bio-resource conservation. - 14 h

--------
60 h
--------

Text and reference books

1. Duxbury, A.C., A.B. Duxbury and K.A. Sverdrup. 2000. An introduction to the World’s
Oceans. 6th Edition. McGraw Hill Companies Inc.
2. Stowe, K., 1996. Exploring Ocean Science, John Wiley & Sons Inc.
3. Iversen, E.S., 1996. Living Marine Resources. Chapman & Hall, New York.
4. Firth, F.E., 1971. The Encyclopaedia of Marine Resources, Von Nostrand Reinholt, New
York.
5. FAO Publication, 1999/45. Sri Lankan women and men as bioresource managers.

Page 20 of 24
 L P T C
11: INTEGRATED OCEAN MANAGEMENT
4 0 0 4

Course Objective: To provide knowledge on the marine environment resources and the
principle of integrated ocean management.

Unit I :The three major oceans – Historical evolution of ideas: Oceans as a common heritage of
mankind. Scientific expeditions for ascertaining the wealth of the sea - The Exclusive
Economic Zone - its significance – Importance of strategic straits. - 12 h.

Unit II: Ocean management – comparison between developing and developed countries and
temperate and tropical countries - A critique of ocean management policies and
programmes – Ocean Policy, research and Management with special reference to the
Indian Ocean Region. The ‘Regional Seas’ programmes of the UN – its global
significance – The Antarctic Treaty and its importance - 10 h.

Unit III: Endangered marine animals – CITES convention – Marine Biosphere Reserves –
Marine Parks – Sanctuaries – Concept, implementation and management. Management
action plan – ecosystem and species. MAB – UNESCO’s role in the establishment and
functioning of Marine biospheres - Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority – concept
and functional mechanism – Marine Biospheres, National Marine Parks and Sanctuaries
in India – role and function. - 14 h.

Unit IV: Role of National and International networks / organizations such as GCRMN, ICRAN,
CORDIO, ICRMN - agencies and organizations in ocean management – NESCO,
UNEP, UNDP, FAO, UNU, IMO, IMLI (International Maritime Law Institute, Malta)
WHO, WORLD BANK, IOI (Malta), ICS-UNIDO, IUCN, WWF, SACEP, ICES,
SCOR, SCOPE, LOICZ, Law of the Sea Institute (Rhode Island), International Maritime
Satellite Organization (INMARSAT), ICLARM, MoES, MoEF, Indian Coast Guard,
Navy etc. - 14 h.

Unit V:Integrated Ocean Management - Change of resource utilization pattern – Capacity

building – trans boundary issues – Climate change issues - International treaties –
community based ocean management – livelihood associated conservation and
management mechanism. - 10 h
--------
60 h
--------

Page 21 of 24
Reference books:

1. Biliana Cicin-Sain, , Robert W. Knecht, , Dosoo Jang, Gregory, W. Fisk, University of

Delaware Center for the Study of Marine Policy, Intergovermental, Oceanographic
Commission, Unesco, University of Delaware College of Marine Studies Integrated Coastal
and Ocean Management: Concepts and Practices, Published 1998, Island Press, 543 pages
2. Yvan Breton, Integrated Coastal Zone Management of Coral Reefs: Decision Support ,
Published 2006, IDRC, 300 pages
3. Robert Kay, Jacqueline Alder, Coastal Planning and Management, Published 2005, Taylor &
Francis, 380 pages
4. Bhaskar Nath, Environmental Management in Practice: Managing the Ecosystem, Published
1999, Routledge, 297 pages
Peter Jacques, Zachary A. Smith, Ocean politics and policy: a reference handbook, Published
2003, ABC-CLIO, 267 pages
5. Lawrence Juda, International Law and Ocean Use Management, 1996, Routledge, 345 pages

Page 22 of 24
 12: ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY L P T C
4 0 0 4
Course Objectives:
1. To enable scholars to understand the principles and mechanisms of Molecular Biology
and Biotechnology.
2. To learn about key technologies, such as recombinant DNA technologies, genomics and
proteomics. Additionally, emphasis is on entrepreneurial aspects using Biotechnology
and Synthetic Biology.

Unit I: Transgenic animals: Concepts of transgenic animal technology; strategies for the
production of transgenic animals and their importance in biotechnology; stem cell cultures
in the production of transgenic animals. In vitro fertilization and transgenic animals and
applications of Transgenic animals in Biotechnology and future scope. -12h

Unit II: Embryology & Embryogenesis: Experimental embryology: Spemann’s constriction

experiments, organizers and embryonic induction – kinds of embryonic induction and
organizers; transplantation experiments in amphibian. Teratology: Definition, causative
agents and effects. In vitro fertilization and embryo transfer experiments in farm animals;
cloning experiments in mammals (Sheep); Embryonic and adult stem cell, significance
and applications, stem cell therapy. -14h

Unit III: Genetic engineering and genome projects:History, Procedure of genetic engineering,
Restriction endonucleases, ligases, major steps in cutting and joining of DNA , Vectors -
plasmids, cosmid, bacteriophage; probes, linkers, host cells, method of recombinant DNA
formation, transformation, transfection and non bacterial transformation. Human genome
project, goals and its implications on research and society. -12h

Unit IV: IPR, Bio-safety and Animal Ethics:Basic concepts of Intellectual property rights(IPR),
Patents, Trademarks, Copyright & Related Rights, Industrial Design, Traditional
Knowledge, Geographical Indications, Protection of GMOs IP as a factor in R&D; IPs of
relevance to Biotechnology. Introduction - Historical background - Primary containment
for biohazards; Bio-safety levels – Bio-safety levels of specific microorganisms, infectious
agents and infected animals. Bio-safety guidelines related to genetically modified
organisms (GMOs) & living modified organisms (LMOs). Bio-ethics problems and
solutions; Institutional ethical committee. -14h

Unit V: Synthetic Biology:Synthetic biology - definition – designing, synthesis, sequencing and

building engineered biological systems - Techniques – synthetic DNA – synthetic
transcription factors – Therapeutics products and their applications – synthetic biology vs
genetic engineering – bioethics and security - scope of synthetic biology.- -10h

----
60
Reference books:

Page 23 of 24
1. Alberts et al, Molecular Biology of The Cell, 2nd Edition, Garland 2007.
2. Bareact, Indian Patent Act 1970 Acts & Rules, Universal Law Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.,
2007
3. Benjamin Lewin. (2004). Genes VIII. Oxford University press, N.Y.
4. Bhatia S.C. Text book of Biotechnology, Atlantic publishing company, Florida. 2006.
5. Darren N. Nesbeth. Synthetic Biology Handbook, CRC press New York, 2016.
6. Gilbert, S. P. Developmental Biology, 8th Edition, Sinauer Associates Inc., 2006.
7. Lanza, R. Essentials of Stem Cell Biology, Academic Press, 2005.
8. Liljeruhm et al Synthetic biology: A lab manual. World Scientific Publishing co.
Singapore, 2014.
9. Seragelglin. (1999). Biotechnology and Bio-safety. World Bank,Washington.

Page 24 of 24
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI – 12.
DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING
Ph.D., (Computer Science / Computer Application /
Information Technology & Engineering / Computer Science & Engineering

From the Academic Year – (2017-2018)

Admission Norms, Scheme of Examination and Syllabus

S.No Subject
Credits

Research and Teaching

1
Methodology 4
Recent Research Topics in
2 Computing 4
Elective – I 4
&
Elective – II 4
3 (Or)
Elective – I 4
&
Elective –II/Dissertation 4

Total No. of. Credits : 16

List of Electives Offered:

1. Network and Information Security

2. Advanced Wireless Network Architecture
3. Software Defined Networks
4. Internet of Things(IoT)
5. Digital Video Acquisition and Analysis
6. Pattern Recognition
7. Video Data Management and Information Retrieval
8. Advanced Digital Image Processing
9. Data Mining and Data Warehousing
10. Big Data Analytics

Page 1 of 38
11. Deep Learning
12. Machine Learning Techniques
13. Cloud Computing
14. Bio-Inspired Computing
15. Multi-core Architectures

Page 2 of 38
 MANDATORY COURSE WORKS

Computer Science / Computer Application /

Information Technology & Engineering / Computer Science & Engineering

2017-2018

CORE I - RESEARCH AND TEACHING METHODOLOGY

LTPC
4 0 04

OBJECTIVES :

 To understand the importance of Research Methodology

 To ensure the reliability and validity of experiments
 To perform exploratory data analysis
 To apply the statistical testing to prove the hypothesis
 To provide the inference using quantitative data analysis
 To make use of computer aids to analyse the data, prepare reports and
presentations
 Able to evaluate methodology of teaching

UNIT - I 12(10L+2S)

INTRODUCTION OF RESEARCH AND FORMULATION

Motivation and Objectives – Research methods vs Methodology. Types of

research – Descriptive vs. Analytical, Applied vs. Fundamental, Quantitative vs.
Qualitative, Conceptual vs. Empirical. Defining and formulating the research problem -
Selecting the problem - Necessity of Primary and secondary sources – Reviews, treatise,
monographs, patents –Critical literature review defining the problem - Importance of
literature review in defining a problem – Literature review –Primary and secondary
sources-Reviews,treatise,monographs,patents-Critical Literature review

RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS

Research design – Basic Principles- Need of research design –– Features of good

design – Important concepts relating to research design.

UNIT- II 12(10L+2S)

Observation and Facts, Laws and Theories, Prediction and explanation,

Induction, Deduction, Development of Models - Developing a research plan -
Exploration, Description, Diagnosis, Experimentation - Determining experimental and
sample designs.

DATA COLLECTION

Page 3 of 38
 Execution of the research - Observation and Collection of data - Methods of data
collection.

UNIT- III 12(10L+2S)

DATA ANALYSIS

Quantitative Methods: Online Quantitative Design and Survey – Descriptive

Measures – Probability – Random Variables and Distribution Functions – Discrete
Probability Distributions – Continuous Probability Distribution – Sampling
Distributions – Theory of Estimation – Hypothesis Testing – Correlation – Regression –
Principles of Sample Survey – Types of Sampling – Design of Experiments – CRD-RBD-
LSD-Factor Analysis – Cluster Analysis –Discriminant Analysis – Multiple Regression
and Correlation – Canonical Correlation – Application of Statistical Software Packages.

REPORTING AND THESIS WRITING

Reporting and thesis writing – Structure and components of scientific reports -

Types of report – Technical reports and thesis – Significance – Different steps in the
preparation – Layout, structure and Language of typical reports – Illustrations and
tables - Bibliography, referencing and footnotes – Use of Oral presentation – Software
Packages for thesis Preparation– Planning – Preparation – Practice – Making
presentation – Use of visual aids - Importance of effective communication.

UNIT-IV APPLICATION OF RESULTS AND ETHICS 12(10L+2S)

Application of results and ethics - Environmental impacts - Ethical issues -

ethical committees - Commercialization – Copy right – royalty - Intellectual property
rights and patent law – Trade Related aspects of Intellectual Property Rights –
Reproduction of published material – Plagiarism – Application of Plagiarism detection
tools - Citation and acknowledgement - Reproducibility and accountability.

UNIT V 12(10L+2S)

METHODOLOGY OF TEACHING

Teaching – Objectives of Teaching, Phases of Teaching – Teaching Methods:

Lecture Method, Discussion Method, Discovery Learning, Inquiry, Problem Solving
Method, Project method, Seminar – Integrating ICT in Teaching: Individualized
Instruction, Ways for Effective Presentation with PowerPoint – Documentation –
Evaluation: Formative, Summative & Continuous and Comprehensive Evaluation –
Later Adolescent Psychology: Meaning, Physical, Cognitive, Emotional, Social and
Moral Development – Teaching Later Adolescents.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
(L- Lecture : S – Seminar)

Page 4 of 38
OUTCOMES:

 Explain the importance of the research methodology

 To validate the reliability
 Select and apply different research approaches and methodologies
 Develop data collection instrument according to the underlying theoretical
framework.
 Analyse quantitative data and qualitative data using software packages
 Provide valid inference
 Construct and document an appropriate research design
 Discuss limitations and potential contribution to theory and practice of research
 Effectively apply the appropriate computer tools in each stage of research
 Ability to implement effective ICT based Teaching Methods

REFERENCES

1. C R Kothari, Paperback “Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques”, 2014

2. Modern Language Association Handbook, Eight Edition, 2016

3. R. Paneerselvam, “Research Methodology” 2nd Edition, PHI, 2014
4. John W Creswel, Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods
Approaches, 3rd Edition, 2014
5. S.C. Gupta & V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, Sultan
Chand & Sons, New Delhi, 2014 Edition.
6. S.C. Gupta & V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, Sultan Chand &
Sons. 2014 Edition.
7. Sampath.K, Panneerselvam.A & Santhanam.S (1984), Introduction to Educational
Technology ( 2nd Revised Ed.) New Delhi: Sterling Publishers.
8. Sharma.S.R(2003).Effective Classroom teaching modern methods, tools &
techniques, Jaipur: Mangal Deep.
9. Vedanayagam.E.G (1989). Teaching Technology for College Teachers, Newyark:
SterlingPublishers.

Page 5 of 38
 CORE II- RECENT RESEARCH TOPICS IN COMPUTING
LTPC
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:

 To apply AI techniques primarily for machine learning, vision, and robotics.

 To understand the fundamentals of Internet of Things
 To study about virtualization and cloud resource management
 To model and visualize the social network
 To introduce visual perception and core skills for visual analysis
 Learn developmental and artificial immune systems
 To get exposed to the domain of bioinformatics
 To know about various applications of natural language processing
 Understand behavioural systems especially in the context of Robotics

UNIT I SOFT COMPUTING 12(10 L +2 S)

Introduction of soft computing - soft computing vs. hard computing- various

types of soft computing techniques- applications of soft computing-Neuron- Nerve
structure and synapse Artificial Neuron and its model- activation functions- Neural
network architecture- single layer and multilayer feed forward networks-
McCullochPitts neuron model- Perceptron model- Adeline and Madeline- multilayer
perception model- back propagation learning methods- effect of learning rule
coefficient -back propagation algorithm- factors affecting back propagation training
applications.Introduction to Deep Learning.

UNIT II CLOUD ARCHITECTURE AND INTERNET OF THINGS 12(10 L + 2 S)

Introduction: Cloud delivery model, Cloud Storage Architectures, Software as a

Service (SaaS): SaaS service providers – Google App Engine, Salesforce.com and
googleplatfrom – Benefits – Operational benefits - Economic benefits – Evaluating SaaS
– Platform as a Service (PaaS): PaaS service providers – Right Scale – Salesforce.com –
Rackspace – Force.com – Services and Benefits – Infrastructure-as-a -Service (IaaS): IaaS
Service Providers – Amazon EC2 – GoGrid.

Introduction to Distributed Computing: architectural models - fundamental

models - P2P systems - Introduction to inter process communications - external data
representation and marshalling- client server communication - group communication-
multicast/pubsub - Energy Efficient Computing - Cloud computing.

Definitions and Functional Requirements –Motivation – Architecture - Web 3.0

View of IoT– Ubiquitous IoT Applications – Four Pillars of IoT – DNA of IoT - The
Toolkit Approach for End-user Participation in the Internet of Things. Middleware for
IoT: Overview – Communication middleware for IoT –IoT Information Security.

Page 6 of 38
UNIT III BIG DATA AND VIRTUALIZATION 12(10 L + 2 S)

Big Data - Map Reduce – Hadoop, Hive, MapR – Sharding – NoSQL Databases –
Cloud databases - S3 - Hadoop Distributed File Systems – Visualizations - Visual Data
Analysis Techniques - Interaction Techniques – Social Network Analysis – Collective
Inferencing – Egonets - Systems and Applications

Linux System- Basic Concepts ;System Administration-Requirements for Linux System

Administrator, Setting up a LINUX Multifunction Server, Domain Name System,
Setting Up Local Network Services; Virtualization- Basic Concepts, Setting Up
Xen,VMware on Linux Host and Adding Guest OS.

UNIT IV BIO INSPIRED COMPUTING AND BIO INFORMATICS 12(10 L + 2 S)

Introduction of Foundations of evolutionary theory – Genotype – artificial

evolution – genetic representations – initial population – fitness functions – selection
and reproduction – genetic operators – evolutionary measures – evolutionary
algorithms – evolutionary electronics – evolutionary algorithm case study Cellular
systems – cellular automata – modeling with cellular systems – other cellular systems –
computation with cellular systems – artificial life – analysis and synthesis of cellular
systems
Need for Bioinformatics technologies – Overview of Bioinformatics technologies
– Structural bioinformatics – Data format and processing – secondary resources-
Applications – Role of Structural bioinformatics - Biological Data Integration System.

UNIT V NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING AND ROBOTICS 12(10 L + 2 S)

Natural Language Processing – Mathematical Foundations – Elementary

Probability Theory – Essential information Theory - Linguistics Essentials - Parts of
Speech and Morphology – Phrase Structure – Semantics – Corpus Based Work
Specifications of Robots- Classifications of robots – Work envelope - Flexible
automation versus Robotic technology – Applications of Robots
Tool Maker's microscope - Co-ordinate measuring machines - Universal
measuring machine - Laser viewers for production profile checks - Image shearing
microscope - Use of computers - Machine vision technology - Microprocessors in
metrology.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
 Provides a basic exposition to the goals and methods of Artificial Intelligence.
 Design a portable IoT using Arduino/ equivalent boards and relevant protocols
 To implement virtualization and cloud resource management
 Predict the possible next outcome of the social network
 Explain principles of visual perception

Page 7 of 38
REFERENCES

1. 1.Arshdeep Bahga,vijay Madisetti,”Internet Of Things –A hands-on

approach”,Universities Press-2015.
2. 2.kevin P.Murphy,”Machine learning:A probabilistic perspective “.MIT
press,2012.
3. 3.Charu C.Aggarwal,”Social Network Data Analytics”Springer,2011
4. 4.Evan Stubbs,”The value of business analtics:Identifying the path to
profitability”,Wiley,2011.
5. 5.A.E Elben and J.E Smith,”Introduction to Evolutionary computing
“,Springer,2010

Page 8 of 38
 ELECTIVE PAPERS

PAPER 1 - NETWORK AND INFORMATION SECURITY

LTPC
4 004
OBJECTIVES:

 To understand the fundamentals of Cryptography

 To acquire knowledge on standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality,
integrity and authenticity.
 To understand the various key distribution and management schemes
 To understand how to deploy encryption techniques to secure data in transit
across data networks
 To design security applications in the field of Information technology

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12(10L+2S)

An Overview of Computer Security-Security Services-Security Mechanisms-

Security Attacks Access Control Matrix, Policy-Security policies, Confidentiality
policies, Integrity policies and Hybrid policies.

UNIT II CRYPTOSYSTEMS & AUTHENTICATION 12(10L+2S)

Classical Cryptography-Substitution Ciphers-permutation Ciphers-Block

Ciphers-DES- Modes of Operation- AES-Linear Cryptanalysis, Differential
Cryptanalysis- Hash Function - SHA 512- Message Authentication Codes-HMAC -
Authentication Protocols –

UNIT III PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOSYSTEMS 12(10L+2S)

Introduction to Public key Cryptography- Number theory- The RSA

Cryptosystem and Factoring Integer- Attacks on RSA-The ELGamal Cryptosystem-
Digital Signature Algorithm-Finite Fields Elliptic Curves Cryptography- Key
management – Session and Interchange keys, Key exchange and generation-PKI

UNIT IV SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 12(10L+2S)

Design Principles, Representing Identity, Access Control Mechanisms,

Information Flow and Confinement Problem Secure Software Development: Secured
Coding - OWASP/SANS Top Vulnerabilities - Buffer Overflows - Incomplete mediation
- XSS - Anti Cross Site Scripting Libraries - Canonical Data Format - Command Injection
- Redirection - Inference – Application Controls

UNIT V NETWORK SECURITY 12(10L+2S)

Secret Sharing Schemes-Kerberos- Pretty Good Privacy (PGP)-Secure Socket

Layer (SSL)- Intruders – HIDS- NIDS - Firewalls - Viruses

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Page 9 of 38
OUTCOMES:

 Upon Completion of the course, the students will be able to

 Implement basic security algorithms required by any computing system.
 Analyze the vulnerabilities in any computing system and hence be able to design
a security solution.
 Analyze the possible security attacks in complex real time systems and their
effective countermeasures Identify the security issues in the network and resolve
it.
 Evaluate security mechanisms using rigorous approaches, including theoretical
derivation, modeling, and simulations
 Formulate research problems in the computer security field

REFERENCES:

1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and

Practices”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Matt Bishop ,“Computer Security art and science ”, Second Edition,
Pearson Education, 2002
3. Wade Trappe and Lawrence C. Washington, “Introduction to
Cryptography with Coding Theory” Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2007
4. Jonathan Katz, and Yehuda Lindell, Introduction to Modern
Cryptography, CRC Press, 2007
5. Douglas R. Stinson, “Cryptography Theory and Practice”, Third Edition,
Chapman & Hall/CRC, 2006 6.
6. Wenbo Mao, “Modern Cryptography – Theory and Practice”, Pearson
Education, First Edition, 2006.
7. Network Security and Cryptography, Menezes Bernard, Cengage
Learning, New Delhi, 2011
8. Man Young Rhee, Internet Security, Wiley, 2003 9. OWASP top ten
security vulnerabilities: http://xml.coverpages.org/OWASP-TopTen.pdf

Page 10 of 38
 PAPER 2 - ADVANCED WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE

LTPC
4 00 4
OBJECTIVES:

 To understand the fundamentals of Wireless and Sensor Networks.

 To acquire knowledge on standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality,
integrity and authenticity.
 To understand VLC and LI-FI Networks.
 To understand the Modulation Schemes.

UNIT I INTRODUCION –WIRELESS NETWORKS 12(10L+2S)

Migration to 3G Networks – IMT 2000 and UMTS – UMTS Architecture – User

Equipment – Radio Network Subsystem – UTRAN – Node B – RNC functions – USIM –
Protocol Stack – CS and PS Domains – IMS Architecture – Handover – 3.5G and 3.9G a
brief discussion – 4G LAN and Cellular Networks – LTE – Control Plane – NAS and
RRC – User Plane – PDCP, RLC and MAC – WiMax IEEE 802.16d/e – WiMax
Internetworking with 3GPP

UNIT II WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS (WSN) 12(10L+2S)

Unique constraints and challenges – advantages of WSNs – Sensor network

applications – Collaborative processing – Key definitions of sensor networks Canonical
Problem: Localization and tracing – tracking scenario – Problem formulation –
distributed representation and inference of states – tracking multiple objects – sensor
models – performance comparison and metrics. Networking sensors: Key assumptions
– Medium access control – General issues – Geographic energy aware routing –
attribute based routing. Infrastructure Establishment: Topology control – clustering

UNIT III ADHOC AND HETEROGENOUS NETWORKS 12(10L+2S)

Introduction to Adhoc networks, characteristics features and applications. of

Wireless channel Characteristics, Adhoc Mobility Models:- Indoor and outdoor mobility
models, Entity Vs Group mobility models. Handover – basic definition, Handover
Characteristics –Hard and Soft handover-Handover mechanisms. Routing Protocols:
Design issues, goals and classification. Proactive Vs reactive routing, Unicast routing
algorithms, Multicast routing algorithms, hybrid routing algorithms, Energy aware
routing algorithms, Hierarchical Routing, QOS aware routing.

UNIT-IV VLC and LI-FI networks 12(10L+2S)

Introduction History of OWC-Advantages-Application areas. Introduction of Li-

Fi-Terminologies .Challenges of OWC. OWC Communication scenarios, optical Front-
ends, optical wireless channel. Cellular network :Case study in an aircraft cabin. Front-
end non-Linearity

UNIT-V VLC MODULATION SCHEMES 12(10L+2S)

Page 11 of 38
 Digital Modulation Schemes-optical signals, Single carrier, Multicarrier. Spectral
efficiency and information rate- Constraints –Modulation schemes with AWGN.
Information rate of OFDM-based with non-linear distortion. Modulation Schemes in the
dispersive channel with AWGN.MIMO Transmission-System model-Techniques-BER
performance. Throughput of Cellular OWC networks-Introduction-System throughput-
Interference coordination in optical cells-System throughput with busy burst and fair
reservation mechanism.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

 Student will be able to know working of modern wireless and cellular

Networks.
 Student will utilize the different models of wireless network to overcome path
loss in large and small propagations.
 Student will be able to differentiate between the development of fixed and
wireless networks.

REFERENCES:

1. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, Adhoc Wireless Networks Architectures

and
protocols, 2ndedition, Pearson Education.
2. Pei Zheng and Lionel M Li, „Smart Phone & Next Generation Mobile
Computing‟, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006.
3. Charles E. Perkins, Ad hoc Networking, Addison – Wesley
4. Wireless Sensor networks : Feng Zhao,Leonidas Guibas –Morgan Kaufmann
Publications – 2012.
5. Fundamentals of Wireless sensor networks Theory and Practice – Waltenegus
Dargie, Christian Poellabauer – Wiley – 2010
6. Principles of LED Light Communications: Towards Networked Li-Fi, Svilen
Dimitrov, Harald Haas

Page 12 of 38
 PAPER 3 – SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKS
LTPC
4 00 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about what software defined networks are
 To understand the separation of the data plane and the control plane
 To learn about the use of SDN in data centers
 To learn about different applications of SDN

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12(10L+2S)

History of Software Defined Networking (SDN) – Modern Data Center –
Traditional Switch Architecture – Why SDN – Evolution of SDN – How SDN Works –
Centralized and Distributed Control and Date Planes

UNIT II OPEN FLOW & SDN CONTROLLER 12(10L+2S)

Open Flow Specification – Drawbacks of Open SDN, SDN via APIs, SDN via
Hypervisor-Based Overlays – SDN via Opening up the Device – SDN Controllers –
General Concepts

UNIT III DATA CENTERS 12(10L+2S)

Multitenant and Virtualized Multitenant Data Center – SDN Solutions for the
Data Center Network – VLANs – EVPN – VxLAN – NVGRE

UNIT IV SDN PROGRAMMING 12(10L+2S)

Programming SDNs: Northbound Application Programming Interface, Current

Languages and Tools, Composition of SDNs – Network Functions Virtualization
(NFV) and Software Defined Networks: Concepts, Implementation and Applications.

UNIT V SDN 12(10L+2S)

Juniper SDN Framework – IETF SDN Framework – Open Daylight Controller –

Floodlight Controller – Bandwidth Calendaring – Data Center Orchestration

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Critically analyze and appreciate the evolution of software defined networks
 Point out the various components of SDN and their uses
 Explain the use of SDN in the current networking scenario

Page 13 of 38
  Design and develop various applications of SDN

TEXT BOOKS:

1.Thomas D. Nadeau, Ken Gray, ―SDN: Software Defined Networks‖, O'Reilly

Media,2013.
2. Paul Goransson and Chuck Black, ―Software Defined Networks: A
Comprehensive Approach‖, First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2014.
REFERENCES:

1.Siamak Azodolmolky, ―Software Defined Networking with Open Flow‖,

PacketPublishing, 2013.
2.Vivek Tiwari, ―SDN and Open Flow for Beginners‖, Amazon Digital Services, Inc.,
2013.
3.Fei Hu, Editor, ―Network Innovation through Open Flow and SDN: Principles
and Design‖, CRC Press, 2014.

Page 14 of 38
 PAPER 4 - INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT)
LTPC
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:

 To understand the fundamentals of Internet of Things

 To learn about the basics of IOT protocols
 To build a small low cost embedded system using Raspberry Pi.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in the real world scenario

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO IoT 12(10L+2S)

Internet of Things - Physical Design- Logical Design- IoT Enabling Technologies -
IoT Levels & Deployment Templates - Domain Specific IoTs - IoT and M2M - IoT
System Management with NETCONF-YANG- IoT Platforms Design Methodology

UNIT II IoT ARCHITECTURE 12(10L+2S)

M2M high-level ETSI architecture - IETF architecture for IoT - OGC architecture -
IoT reference model - Domain model - information model - functional model -
communication model - IoT reference architecture

UNIT III IoT PROTOCOL 12(10L+2S)

Protocol Standardization for IoT – Efforts – M2M and WSN Protocols – SCADA
and RFID Protocols – Unified Data Standards – Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4 – BACNet
Protocol – Modbus– Zigbee Architecture – Network layer – 6LowPAN - CoAP –
Security

UNIT IV BUILDING IoT WITH RASPBERRY PI & ARDUINO

12(10L+2S)

Building IOT with RASPERRY PI- IoT Systems - Logical Design using Python –
IoT Physical Devices & Endpoints - IoT Device -Building blocks -Raspberry Pi -Board -
Linux on Raspberry Pi - Raspberry Pi Interfaces -Programming Raspberry Pi with
Python - Other IoT Platforms - Arduino.

UNIT V CASE STUDIES AND REAL-WORLD APPLICATIONS

12(10L+2S)

Real world design constraints - Applications - Asset management, Industrial

automation, smart grid, Commercial building automation, Smart cities - participatory
sensing - Data Analytics for IoT– Software & Management Tools for IoT Cloud Storage
Models & Communication APIs - Cloud for IoT - Amazon Web Services for IoT.

TOTAL PERIODS: 60

Page 15 of 38
OUTCOMES:
 Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
 Analyze various protocols for IoT
 Develop web services to access/control IoT devices.
 Design a portable IoT using Rasperry Pi
 Deploy an IoT application and connect to the cloud.
 Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario

REFERENCES:

1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, ―Internet of Things – A hands-on approach‖,

Universities Press, 2015

2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), ―Architecting the

Internet of Things‖, Springer, 2011.

3. Honbo Zhou, ―The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective‖,

CRCPress, 2012.

4. Jan Ho¨ ller, Vlasios Tsiatsis , Catherine Mulligan, Stamatis , Karnouskos, Stefan
Avesand. David Boyle, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things –
Introduction to a New Age of Intelligence", Elsevier, 2014.

5. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , ―The Internet of Things –

Key applications and Protocols‖, Wiley, 2012

Page 16 of 38
 PAPER 5 - DIGITAL VIDEO ACQUISITION AND ANALYSIS
LTPC
4 004
OBJECTIVES:
 This course serves as a baseline course to provide students with a basic
understanding of digital video processing
 It emphasize on video segmentation, video standards, compression and content based
retrieval

UNIT I VIDEO ACQUISITION AND REPRESENTATION & MOTION ANALYSIS

12(10L+2 S)
Spatio Temporal Sampling – Sampling Structure Conversion – Interpolation –
Color spaces – Video formats. 2D and 3D Motion Estimation and Compensation –
Optical Flow methods – Block based – point correspondences – Gradient based –
Intensity matching – Feature matching – Frequency domain motion estimation – Depth
from motion - Structure from stereo – 3D Reconstruction –Motion analysis Applications:
Video Summarization, Video Surveillance, Video Watermarking, Video Mosaicing

UNIT II VIDEO OBJECT TRACKING AND SEGMENTATION 12(10 L +2 S)

2D and 3D motion tracking – blob tracking – kernel based – Contour tracking –

Feature matching – Filtering – mosaicing – Video Segmentation – Mean Shift based –
Active shape model – Video shot boundary detection.

UNIT III VIDEO FILTERING 12(10 L +2 S)

Motion Compensation – Noise Filtering – Enhancement and Restoration – Video

Stabilization and Super Resolution.

UNIT IV VIDEO CODING, REPRESENTATION 12(10 L +2 S)

Video Standards: MPEG 1,2, MPEG-4, MPEG-7, H.261, H.263, H.264. Video
compression – Inter frame Compression – 3D Waveform based – Motion
Compensation.

UNIT V CONTENT BASED VIDEO RETRIEVAL AND VIDEO BASED RENDERING

12(10 L +2 S)
Object based coding – Content based representation – Feature extraction – MPEG
7 Visual descriptors – Low to high level representation (CSS, Poly, B-Splines etc.) –
Video Indexing and retrieval – search engines. Generation of mosaics from video;
Detection of Video object alpha-matte and Video cut & paste for Virtual Reality
applications.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Page 17 of 38
OUTCOME:
 After the course, students could have sufficient understanding of digital video
processing and its relevant processing tasks

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Digital Image Sequence Processing, Compression and Analysis – Todd R. Reed, CRC Press,
2004.

2. H.264 and MPEG-4 Video Compression: Video Coding for Next Generation
Multimedia – Iain E.G. Richardson, Wiley, 2003

3. Digital Video Processing – A. Murat Tekalp, Prentice Hall, 1995.

REFERENCES:

1. Video Processing and Communications by Yao wang, Joern Ostermann and YaQin
Zhang, Prentice Hall, 2002, ISBN 0-13-017547-1.

2. Handbook of Image and Video processing – AI Bovik (Alan C Bovik), Academic

Page 18 of 38
 PAPER 6 - PATTERN RECOGNITION
LTPC
4004

OBJECTIVES :

 This course provides students with understanding of pattern classification

techniques, feature extraction and discuss recent techniques in classification.
 Provide knowledge of learning an unsupervised modes of classification
techniques

UNIT I PATTERN CLASSIFIER 12 (10 L+2S)

Overview of pattern recognition – Discriminant functions – Supervised learning

– Parametric estimation – Maximum likelihood estimation – Bayesian parameter
estimation – Perceptron algorithm – LMSE algorithm – Problems with Bayes approach –
Pattern classification by distance functions – Minimum distance pattern classifier.

UNIT II UNSUPERVISED CLASSIFICATION 12 (10 L+2S)

Clustering for unsupervised learning and classification – Clustering concept – C-

means algorithm – Hierarchical clustering procedures – Graph theoretic approach to
pattern clustering – Validity of clustering solutions.

UNIT III STRUCTURAL PATTERN RECOGNITION 12 (10 L+2S)

Elements of formal grammars – String generation as pattern description –

Recognition of syntactic description – Parsing – Stochastic grammars and applications –
Graph based structural representation.

UNIT IV FEATURE EXTRACTION AND SELECTION 12 (10 L+2S)

Entropy minimization – Karhunen – Loeve transformation – Feature selection

through functions approximation – Binary feature selection.

UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES 12 (10 L+2S)

Structural PR, SVMs, FCM, Soft-computing and Neuro-fuzzy – Pattern

classification using Genetic Algorithms.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Page 19 of 38
OUTCOMES:

 After the course, students could earn sufficient knowledge on pattern

classification and feature extraction.
 With these backgrounds, students would be able to learn more advanced
classification techniques

REFERENCES:

1. Robert J.Schalkoff, Pattern Recognition Statistical, Structural and Neural Approaches,

John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1992.

2. Tou and Gonzales, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication Company, London,
1974.
3. Duda R.O., and Har P.E., Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis, Wiley, New York, 1973.
4. Morton Nadier and Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, 1993.
5. Statistical pattern Recognition; K. Fukunaga; Academic Press, 2000.
6. S.Theodoridis and K.Koutroumbas, Pattern Recognition, 4th Ed., Academic Press,
2009

Page 20 of 38
 PAPER 7 - VIDEO DATA MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION RETRIEVAL
LTPC
40 04
OBJECTIVES:

 To understand the fundamentals of video processing

 To learn and understand the video abstraction
 To understand video data management and retrieval
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF VIDEO PROCESSING 12 (10 L+2S)

Video Capture and Display - Principles of Color Video, Video Cameras, Video
Display.Composite versus Component Models. Gamma Connection, Video Formation,
Perception and Representation, Video Modeling- Camera Model, Object Model, Scene
Model, Digital Video Notation. ITU-R.BT.601 Digital Video Format. Other Digital Video
Formats and Applications. Digital Video Quality Measure.

UNIT II FEATAURES OF VIDEO SIGNALS 12 (10 L+2S)

Color -Color Space Transformations, Representation of Color Features; Texture -

statistical Texture Analysis, Spectral Features of Texture; Edge Analysis - Edge
Detection by Gradient Operators, Edge Characterization by second Derivative, Edge
Finding and Consistency Analysis, Edge Model Fitting, Description and Analysis of
Edge Properties, Contour and Shape Analysis, Moment Analysis, Motion Analysis -
Mapping of motion into the image plane, Motion Estimation by the Optical Flow
Principle, Motion Estimation by Matching, Multi resolution Motion Estimation.

UNIT III HIGH LEVEL FEATURES OF VIDEO 12 (10 L+2S)

Mosaics Face Detection and Description, Audio Signal Features- Basic Features,
Speech Signal Analysis, Musical Signals, Instruments and Sounds.

UNIT IV VIDEO ABSTRACTION 12 (10 L+2S)

Video Abstraction, Types of video abstraction, Applications, Video

Summarization and techniques, Dynamic Summary – Highlight Detection and
Summary sequence Generation, Types of visualization.

UNIT V VIDEO DATA MANAGEMENT AND RETRIEVAL 12 (10 L+2S)

An Overview of Video Information Retrieval Techniques, Shot Boundary

Detection, Innovative Shot Boundary Detection for Video Indexing, Scene Changed
Detection, Content based video retrieval
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Page 21 of 38
OUTCOME

 Demonstrate a broad range of fundamental of video processing

 Demonstrate and apply the knowledge by analysing the video signals
 Understand various features of video and video data management

REFERENCES:

1. Yao Wang, JörnOstermann, and Ya-Qin Zhang, „Video Processing and

Communications‟, Prentice Hall, 2002 (Published September 2001) ISBN 0-13-017547-
1

2. J.R.Ohm , „Multimedia Communication Technology‟, Springer Publication, 2004.

3. Sagarmay Deb, 'Video Data Management and Information Retrieval‟, Idea Group Inc (IGI),
2005.

4. "Handbook on Image and Video Processing", A.I.Bovik, Academic Press. 5. "Digital

Video", Tekalp, Prentice Hall.

Page 22 of 38
 PAPER 8 - ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
LTPC
4004
OBJECTIVES:

 To understand the image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary

for image. processing and to study the image enhancement techniques.
 To understand the image segmentation and representation techniques.
 To understand how image are analyzed to extract features of interest.
 To introduce the concepts of image registration and image fusion.
 To analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D datasets.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 12 (10 L+2S)

Elements of visual perception, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band

effect, 2D image transforms-DFT, DCT, KLT, and SVD. Image enhancement in spatial
and frequency domain, Review of morphological image processing

UNIT II SEGMENTATION 12 (10 L+2S)

Edge detection, Thresholding, Region growing, Fuzzy clustering, Watershed

algorithm, Active contour methods-Level set method, Texture feature based
segmentation, Model based segmentation, Atlas based segmentation, Wavelet based
Segmentation methods

UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION 12(10 L+2S)

First and second order edge detection operators, Phase congruency, Localized
feature extraction-detecting image curvature, shape features Hough transform, shape
skeletonization, Boundary descriptors, Moments, Texture descriptors- Autocorrelation,
Co-occurrence features, Runlength features, Fractal model based features, Gabor filter,
wavelet features

UNIT IV REGISTRATION AND IMAGE FUSION 12 (10 L+2S)

Registration- Preprocessing, Feature selection-points, lines, regions and

templates Feature correspondence-Point pattern matching, Line matching, region
matching Template matching .Transformation functions-Similarity transformationand
Affine Transformation. Resampling- Nearest Neighbour and Cubic Splines Image
Fusion-Overview of image fusion, pixel fusion, Multiresolution based fusiondiscrete
wavelet transform, Curvelet transform. Region based fusion.

Page 23 of 38
UNIT V 3D IMAGE VISUALIZATION 12(10 L+2S)

Sources of 3D Data sets, Slicing the Data set, Arbitrary section planes, The use of
color, Volumetric display, Stereo Viewing, Ray tracing, Reflection, Surfaces, Multiply
connected surfaces, Image processing in 3D, Measurements on 3D images.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

 To apply image processing techniques in both the spatial and frequency

domains.
 To design image analysis techniques in the form of image segmentation and to
evaluate the methodologies for segmentation.
 To conduct independent study and analysis of feature extraction techniques.

TEXT BOOK:

1. John C.Russ, “The Image Processing Handbook”, CRC Press,2007.

2. Mark Nixon, Alberto Aguado, “Feature Extraction and Image Processing”,

Academic Press, 2008.

3. Ardeshir Goshtasby, “ 2D and 3D Image registration for Medical, Remote Sensing

and Industrial Applications”,John Wiley and Sons,2005.

4. H.B.Mitchell, “Image Fusion Theories, Techniques and Applications”, Springer,2010.

REFERENCES:

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, , Digital Image Processing', Pearson,

Education, Inc., Second Edition, 2004.

2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing', Pearson Education, Inc.,

2002.

3. Rick S.Blum, Zheng Liu,“ Multisensor image fusion and its Applications“,Taylor&
Francis,2006. Faulty of I and C Engg (Approved in 16th AC(Ad hoc) 02.12.2010)
ITEM NO. FI 16.01(10)

Page 24 of 38
 PAPER 9 - DATA MINING AND DATA WAREHOUSING
LTPC
400 4
Objectives:

 This course will introduce the concepts, techniques, design and applications of
data warehousing and data mining.
 Learning Outcome and End use:
 Appreciate the strengths and limitations of various data mining and data
warehousing models.
 Describe and utilize a range of techniques for designing data warehousing and
data mining systems for real-world applications.

Unit I : 12(10L+2S)
DATA MINING: Motivation -Steps in Data Mining – Architecture - Data Mining and
Databases – Data Warehouses – Data Mining functionalities – Classification – Data
Mining Primitives – Major issues. DATA PREPROCESSING: Descriptive data
summarization -Data Cleaning – Data integration and transformation – Data
Reduction– Data discretization and concept hierarchy generation.

Unit II: 12(10L+2S)

DATA WAREHOUSE and OLAP TECHNOLOGY: Need for Data Warehouse-
multidimensional data model- Data Warehouse architecture - Data Warehousing to
Data mining. MINING FREQUENT PATTERNS, ASSOCIATIONS AND
CORRELATIONS: Frequent itemsets, Association rules – Efficient and Scalable frequent
itemset mining methods – mining various kinds of Association rules.

Unit III: 12(10L+2S)

CLASSIFICATION AND PREDICTION: Issues regarding classification and prediction
– Classification by Decision Tree induction –Bayesian Classification – Rule based
classification – Classification using Neural Networks Prediction – Accuracy and error
measures – Evaluating the accuracy of classifiers and predictors.

Unit IV: 12(10L+2S)

CLUSTER ANALYSIS: Types of data – Partitioning Methods: k means and k Medoids –
Hierarchical Methods: Agglomerative and Divisive hierarchical clustering- Outlier
analysis.

Unit V: 12(10L+2S)
MINING TIME SERIES, SEQUENCE DATA: Trend analysis – similarity search –
sequence patterns in transactional databases sequential pattern mining: concepts and
primitives. MINING TEXT, MULTIMEDIA AND THE WORLD WIDE WEB: Text data
analysis and information retrieval- Dimensionality reduction for text – text mining

Page 25 of 38
approaches – similarity search in multimedia data – classification and prediction
analysis -mining the web page layout structure – mining multimedia data on the web-
web usage minin
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Interpret the contribution of data warehousing and data mining to the decision-
support level of organizations
 Evaluate different models used for OLAP and data pre-processing
 Categorize and carefully differentiate between situations for applying different
data-mining techniques: frequent pattern mining, association, correlation,
classification, prediction, and cluster and outlier analysis

REFERENCES:

1. HanJiawei, Micheline Kamber and Jian Pei “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”,
Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
2. Soman K P, ShyamDiwakar and Ajay V, “Insight into Data Mining Theory and
Practice”, PHI Learning, 2009.
3. Arun K Pujari, “Data Mining Techniques”, University Press, 2013.

Page 26 of 38
 PAPER 10 - BIG DATA ANALYTICS
LTPC
4 00 4
OBJECTIVES:
 Be exposed to big data
 Learn the different ways of Data Analysis
 Be familiar with data streams
 Learn the mining and clustering
 Be familiar with the visualization

UNIT I (12=10L+2S)

INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE Introduction: Introduction of Data

Science-Getting started with R- Exploratory Data Analysis- Review of probability and
probability distributions- Bayes Rule Supervised Learning- Regression- polynomial
regression- local regression- knearest neighbors.

UNIT II (12=10L+2S)

UNSUPERVISED LEARNING Unsupervised Learning- Kernel density

estimation- k-means- Naive Bayes- Data and Data Scraping Classification-ranking-
logistic regression. Ethics- time seriesadvanced regression- Decision trees- Best
practices- feature selection.

UNIT III (12=10L+2S)

BIG DATA FROM DIFFERENT PERSPECTIVES Big data from business

Perspective: Introduction of big data-Characteristics of big data-Data in the warehouse
and data in Hadoop- Importance of Big data- Big data Use cases: Patterns for Big data
deployment. Big data from Technology Perspective: History of Hadoop-Components of
Hadoop-Application Development in Hadoop-Getting your data in Hadoop-other
Hadoop Component.

UNIT IV (12=10L+2S)

INFOSPHERE BIGINSIGHTS Infosphere Big Insights: Analytics for Big data at

rest-A Hadoop -Ready Enterprise-Quality file system-Compression –Administrative

Page 27 of 38
tooling-SecurityEnterprise Integration –Improved workload scheduling-Adaptive map
reduce-Data discovery and visualization-Machine Analytics

UNIT V (12=10L+2S)

INFOSPHERE STREAMS Infosphere Streams: Analytics for Big data in motion-

Infosphere Streams Basicsworking of Infosphere Streams-Stream processing language-
Operators-Stream toolkits-Enterprise class

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

 Apply the statistical analysis methods.

 Design distributed file systems.
 Apply Stream data model.
 Use Visualization techniques


REFERENCES
1. Noreen Burlingame and Lars Nielsen, “A Simple Introduction To Data Science”,
2012.
2. “Understanding Big Data: Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and streaming
Data”, The McGraw-Hill Companies, 2012.

Page 28 of 38
 PAPER 11 - DEEP LEARNING
LT PC
40 0 4
Objectives

The objective of this course is to cover the fundamentals of neural networks as

well as some advanced topics such as recurrent neural networks, long short term
memory cells and convolution neural networks. The course also requires
students to implement programming assignments related to these topics.
UNIT I 12(10L +2S)

Basics: Biological Neuron, Idea of computational units, McCulloch–Pitts unit and

Thresholding logic, Linear Perceptron, Perceptron Learning Algorithm, Linear
separability. Convergence theorem for Perceptron Learning Algorithm. Feedforward
Networks: Multilayer Perceptron, Gradient Descent, Backpropagation, Empirical Risk
Minimization, regularization, autoencoders.

UNIT II 12(10L +2S)

Deep Neural Networks: Difficulty of training deep neural networks, Greedy

layerwise training.

UNIT III 12(10L +2S)

Better Training of Neural Networks: Newer optimization methods for neural

networks (Adagrad, adadelta, rmsprop, adam, NAG), second order methods for
training, Saddle point problem in neural networks, Regularization methods (dropout,
drop connect, batch normalization).

UNIT IV 12(10L +2S)

Recurrent Neural Networks: Back propagation through time, Long Short Term
Memory, Gated Recurrent Units, Bidirectional LSTMs, Bidirectional
RNNsConvolutional Neural Networks: LeNet, AlexNet. Generative
models: Restrictive Boltzmann Machines (RBMs), Introduction to MCMC and Gibbs
Sampling, gradient computations in RBMs, Deep Boltzmann Machines.

Unit V 12(10L +2S)

Recent trends: VariationalAutoencoders, Generative Adversarial Networks,

Multi-task Deep Learning, Multi-view Deep Learning Applications: Vision, NLP,
Speech (just an overview of different applications in 2-3 lectures)

TOTAL PERIODS: 60

Page 29 of 38
OUTCOMES:

 Deep learning is a set of student educational outcomes.

 Including acquisition of robust core academic content, higher-order thinking
skills, and learning dispositions.

Textbooks

1.Deep Learning, Ian Goodfellow and YoshuaBengio and Aaron Courville, MIT
Press, 2016.

References:

1. Neural Networks: A Systematic Introduction, Raúl Rojas, 1996

2. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, Christopher Bishop, 2007

Page 30 of 38
 PAPER 12 - MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES
LTPC
4 004
Objectives:

 To prepare the students to understand and learn the machine learning

techniques and to apply them for the practical problems.

UNIT I 12(10L+2S)

FOUNDATIONS OF LEARNING Components of learning – learning models –

geometric models – probabilistic models – logic models – grouping and grading –
learning versus design – types of learning – supervised – unsupervised – reinforcement
– theory of learning – feasibility of learning – error and noise – training versus testing –
theory of generalization – generalization bound – approximation generalization tradeoff
– bias and variance – learning curve 3

UNIT II 12(10L+2S)

LINEAR MODELS Linear classification – univariate linear regression –

multivariate linear regression – regularized regression – Logistic regression –
perceptrons – multilayer neural networks – learning neural networks structures –
support vector machines – soft margin SVM – going beyond linearity – generalization
and overfitting – regularization – validation

UNIT III 12(10L+2S)

DISTANCE-BASED MODELS Nearest neighbor models – K-means – clustering

around medoids – silhouettes – hierarchical clustering – k-d trees – locality sensitive
hashing – non-parametric regression – ensemble learning – bagging and random forests
– boosting – meta learning
UNIT IV 12(10L+2S)

TREE AND RULE MODELS Decision trees – learning decision trees – ranking
and probability estimation trees – regression trees – clustering trees – learning ordered
rule lists – learning unordered rule lists – descriptive rule learning – association rule
mining – first-order rule learning

UNIT V 12(10L+2S)

REINFORCEMENT LEARNING Passive reinforcement learning – direct utility

estimation – adaptive dynamic programming – temporal-difference learning – active
reinforcement learning – exploration – learning an actionutility function –

Page 31 of 38
Generalization in reinforcement learning – policy search – applications in game playing
– applications in robot control

TOTAL PERIODS: 60

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course the students will be able to:

 Describe the various machine learning concepts and models.

 Apply the concepts for the practical problems.

 Compare and analyse the performance of various machine learning algorithms

REFERENCES :

1. Y. S. Abu-Mostafa, M. Magdon-Ismail, and H.-T. Lin, “Learning from Data”,

AMLBook Publishers, 2012.
2. P. Flach, “Machine Learning: The art and science of algorithms that make sense
of data”, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
3. K. P. Murphy, “Machine Learning: A probabilistic perspective”, MIT Press, 2012.
4. C. M. Bishop, “Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”, Springer, 2007.
5. D. Barber, “Bayesian Reasoning and Machine Learning”, Cambridge University
Press, 2012.
6. M. Mohri, A. Rostamizadeh, and A. Talwalkar, “Foundations of Machine
Learning”, MIT Press, 2012.
7. T. M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill, 1997.
8. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Third
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009
9. Peter Flach,”Machine Learning”,Cambridge University Press,2015.
10. Shai Shalar-Schwartz & Shai Ben-David,”Understand Machine
Learning,Cambridge University,2015.

Page 32 of 38
 PAPER 13 - CLOUD COMPUTING
LTPC
4 0 04
Objectives:

 To prepare the students to understand and learn the machine learning

techniques and to apply them for the practical problems.

Unit I 12(10L+2S)

Distributed System Models and Enabling Technologies: Scalable Computing over

the Internet, Technologies for Network-Based Systems, System Models for Distributed
and Cloud Computing, Software Environments for Distributed Systems and Clouds,
Performance, Security and Energy Efficiency
Computer Clusters for Scalable Parallel Computing: Clustering for Massive
Parallelism, Computer Clusters and MPP Architectures, Design Principles of Computer
Clusters, Cluster Job ad Resource Management

UnitII 12(10L+2S)

Cloud Platform Architecture over Virtualized Data Centers: Cloud Computing

and Service Models, Data-Center Design and Interconnection Networks, Architectural
Design of Compute and Storage Clouds, Public Cloud Platforms GAE, AWS, and
Azure, Inter-cloud Resource Management, Cloud Security and Trust Management

Unit III 12(10L+2S)

Service-Oriented Architectures for Distributed Computing: Services and Service-

Oriented Architecture, Message-Oriented Middle-ware, Portals and Science Gateways,
Discovery, Registries, Metadata and Databases, Work-flow in Service-Oriented
Architectures.

Unit IV 12(10L+2S)

Cloud Programming and Software Environments: Features of Cloud and Grid

Platforms, Parallel and Distributed Programming Paradigms, Programming Support of
Google App Engine, Programming on Amazon AWS and Microsoft Azure, Emerging
Cloud Software Environments.

Unit V 12(10L+2S)

Ubiquitous Clouds and the Internet of Things: Cloud Trends in Supporting

Ubiquitous Computing, Performance of Distributed Systems and the Cloud, Enabling

Page 33 of 38
Technologies for the Internet of Things, Innovative Applications of the Internet of
Things, On-line Social and Professional Networking

TOTAL PERIODS: 60
OUTCOMES:

 Completing this course should provide you with a good understanding of cloud
computing.
 A systematic knowledge of the fundamental technologies, architecture, and
security. ... Identify problems.
 Explain, analyze, and evaluate various cloud computing solutions.

REFERENCES:

1. Distributed and Cloud Computing- Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack J.

Dongarra –Elsevier-2012
2. Cloud Computing – A Hands-on Approach – Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti –
University Press2014
3. Enterprise Cloud Computing – Gautam Shroff – Cambridge University Press –
2014.

Page 34 of 38
 PAPER 14 - BIO-INSPIRED COMPUTING

LTPC
4004
OBJECTIVES:

 To Understand Cellular Automata and artificial evolution

 To Learn artificial neural systems and related learning algorithms
 To learn developmental and artificial immune systems
 To understand behavioral systems especially in the context of Robotics
 To understand collective systems such as ACO, PSO, and swarm robotics

UNIT I EVOLUTIONARY AND CELLULAR SYSTEMS

12 (10L+2S)
Foundations of evolutionary theory – Genotype – artificial evolution – genetic
representations – initial population – fitness functions – selection and reproduction –
genetic operators – evolutionary measures – evolutionary algorithms – evolutionary
electronics – evolutionary algorithm case study Cellular systems – cellular automata –
modeling with cellular systems – other cellular systems – computation with cellular
systems – artificial life – analysis and synthesis of cellular systems

UNIT II NEURAL SYSTEMS

12 (10L+2S)
Biological nervous systems – artificial neural networks – neuron models –
architecture – signal encoding – synaptic plasticity – unsupervised learning –
supervised learning – reinforcement learning – evolution of neural networks – hybrid
neural systems – case study

UNIT III DEVELOPMENTAL AND IMMUNE SYSTEMS

12 (10L+2S)
Rewriting systems – synthesis of developmental systems – evolutionary
rewriting systems – evolutionary developmental programs Biological immune systems
– lessons for artificial immune systems – algorithms and applications – shape space –
negative selection algorithm – clonal selection algorithm - examples

UNIT IV BEHAVIORAL SYSTEMS

12 (10L+2S)
Behavior is cognitive science – behavior in AI – behavior based robotics –
biological inspiration for robots – robots as biological models – robot learning –
evolution of behavioral systems – learning in behavioral systems – co-evolution of body
and control – towards self reproduction – simulation and reality .

Page 35 of 38
UNIT V COLLECTIVE SYSTEMS
12 (10 L+2S)
Biological self-organization – Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) – ant colony
optimization (ACO) – swarm robotics – co-evolutionary dynamics – artificial evolution
of competing systems – artificial evolution of cooperation – case study

TOTAL PERIODS: 60

OUTCOMES:

 Implement and apply evolutionary algorithms

 Explain cellular automata and artificial life
 Implement and apply neural systems
 Explain developmental and artificial immune systems
 Explain behavioral systems
 Implemennt and apply collective intelligence systems

REFERENCES:

1. A.E. Elben and J. E. Smith, “Introduction to Evolutionary Computing”, Springer,

2010.
2. F. Neumann and C. Witt, “Bioinspired Computation in combinatorial
optimization: Algorithms and their computational complexity”, Springer, 2010.
3. D. Floreano and C. Mattiussi, "Bio-Inspired Artificial Intelligence", MIT Press,
2008.
4. Simon O. Haykin, “Neural Networks and Learning Machines”, Third Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
5. M. Dorigo and T. Stutzle, “Ant Colony Optimization”, A Bradford Book, 2004.
6. R. C. Ebelhart et al., “Swarm Intelligence”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001.

Page 36 of 38
 PAPER 15 - MULTI CORE ARCHITECTURES
LTPC
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:

 To introduce the students to the recent trends in the field of Computer

Architecture and identify performance related parameters
 To understand the different multiprocessor and their issues
 To expose the different types of multi-core architectures to the scholars
 To understand the design of the memory hierarchy in various architectures

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN AND ILP 12 (10L+2S)

Fundamentals of Computer Design – Measuring and Reporting Performance –

Instruction Level Parallelism and its Exploitation – Concepts and Challenges –
Limitations of ILP – Multithreading – SMT and CMP Architectures – The Multicore era.

UNIT II MEMORY HIERARCHY DESIGN 12 (10L+2S)

Introduction–Optimizations of Cache Performance–Memory Technology and

Optimizations– Protection: Virtual Memory and Virtual Machines–Design of Memory
Hierarchies–Case Studies.

UNIT III MULTIPROCESSOR ISSUES 12 (10L+2S)

Symmetric and Distributed Shared Memory Architectures – Cache Coherence

Issues – Performance Issues – Synchronization Issues – Models of Memory Consistency
– Interconnection Networks – Buses, Crossbar and Multi-stage Interconnection
Networks.

UNIT IV MULTICORE ARCHITECTURES 12 (10L+2S)

Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Multi-core Architectures – Intel Multicore

Architectures – SUNCMP architecture – IBM Cell Architecture. Introduction to
Warehouse-scale computers, CloudComputing – Architectures and Issues – Case
Studies.

UNIT V VECTOR, SIMD AND GPU ARCHITECTURES 12 (10L+2S)

Vector Architecture – SIMD Extensions for Multimedia – Graphics Processing

Units – Case Studies – GPGPU Computing – Detecting and Enhancing Loop Level
Parallelism.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

Page 37 of 38
OUTCOMES:

 Identify the limitations of ILP and the need for multicore architectures
 Discuss the issues related to multiprocessing and suggest solutions
 Point out the salient features of different multicore architectures and how they exploit
parallelism
 Critically analyze the different types of inter connection networks
 Design a memory hierarchy and optimize it

REFERENCES:

1. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, “Computer Architecture – A

Quantitative Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 5th edition, 2012.

2. Darryl Gove, “Multicore Application Programming: For Windows, Linux, and

Oracle Solaris”, Pearson, 2011.

3. David B. Kirk, Wen-mei W. Hwu, “Programming Massively Parallel Processors”,

Morgan Kauffman, 2010.

4. Wen– mei W. Hwu, “GPU Computing Gems”, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier,

2011

Page 38 of 38
 MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY
TIRUNELVELI-627012, TAMILNADU, INDIA
CENTRE FOR INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ENGINEERING

Board of Studies Meeting

Ph.D. Information Technology

(CBCS-University Department)

Regulations, Scheme and Syllabus

For those who joined from the academic year 2017-2018 onwards

Submitted by
Chairman, BOS and Head,
Centre for Information Technology and Engineering,

to

The Registrar
Manonmaniam Sundaranar University
Tirunelveli - 12

MANONMANIAM SUNDARANAR UNIVERSITY

TIRUNELVELI-627012, TAMILNADU, INDIA
Centre for Information Technology and Engineering
Ph.D Course Work
(CBCS-University Department)

Page 1 of 25
B. SCHEME FORPH.D COURSE WORK

Credits
Title of the Subject

week
Hrs/
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 4 4
DATA SCIENCES AND BIG DATA ANALYTICS 4 4
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL AND IMAGE PROCESSNG 4 4
MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 4 4
PERVASIVE, GRID AND CLOUD COMPUTING 4 4
ENGINEERING RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 4 4
PATTERN RECOGNITION AND IMAGE ANALYSIS 4 4
CLOUD COMPUTING 3 3
COMPUTING FOR DATA ANALYTICS 3 3
BIG DATA ANALYTICS 3 3
FOUNDATIONS OF INFORMATION SECURITY 4 4
INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL FORENSICS 4 4
ADVANCED INFORMATION SECURITY 4 4
COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR CANCER ANALYTICS 3 3
REMOTE SENSING AND IMAGE INTERPRETATION 3 3
INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE ANTENNA AND RADAR
3 3
SIGNAL PROCESSING
MINI PROJECT

Page 2 of 25
 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY L T P C
4 4

Unit I - Introduction – Meaning of research - Objective – Motivation – research approaches -

significance of research - Types of Research – Research Methods versus Methodology –
Research and Scientific Method – importance of knowing how research is done - Research
Process – Finding a Research Advisor/Guide - The Advisor-Advisee Relationship - Finding a
Topic and Beginning Research, Getting Research Ideas (12L)

Unit-II – Research Formulation – Defining and formulating the research problem – Selecting
the problem – Necessity of defining the problem – Importance of literature review in defining a
problem – Literature review – Primary and secondary sources – reviews, treatise, monographs,
patents – web as a source – searching the web- Critical literature review – Identifying gap areas
from literature review – Development of working hypothesis. (12L)

Unit-III – Research design and methods – Research design Basic Principles-Need of research
design – Features of good design – important concepts relating to research design – Observation
and Facts, Laws and Theories, Prediction and explanation, Induction, Deduction, Development
of Models. Developing a research plan – Exploration, Description, Diagnosis, and
Experimentation, Determining experimental and sample designs. (12L)

Unit-IV – Data Collection and analysis- Execution of the research – Observation and
Collection of data – Methods of data collection – Primary data – Secondary Data – Data
Presentation - Mathematical Tool for Analysis – Ethics in Research – Importance – Integrity in
Research Sampling Methods-Data Processing and Analysis strategies – Data Analysis with
Statistical Packages – Ethics in Research - Hypothesis-testing – Scientific Misconduct and
Consequences . (12L)

Unit-V – Reporting and thesis writing – Structure and components of scientific reports- Types
of report – Technical reports and thesis – Significance – Different steps in the preparation –
Layout, Structure and Language of typical reports – illustrations and tables – Bibliography,
referencing and footnotes – Oral presentation – Planning – Preparation – Practice – Making
presentation – Use of visual aids – Importance of effective communication-Research ethics –
Ethical issues – Copy right - royalty – Intellectual property rights and patent law – Reproduction
of published material – Plagiarism – Citation and acknowledgement. (12L)

TOTAL (60L)
References:

1. "Engineering Research Methodology: A Computer Science and Engineering and

Information and Communication Technologies Perspective", Krishnan
Nallaperumal, https://www.researchgate.net/publication/259183120_Engineering_Resear
ch_Methodology_A_Computer_Science_and_Engineering_and_Information_and_Comm
unication_Technologies_Perspective
2. Kothari, C.R, 2014. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, New age
International, 3rdEdition.
Page 3 of 25
3. Kavadia Gerg, Agarwal & Agarwal, 2002, Introduction to Research Methodology, RBSA
Publishers.
4. Agarwal, B.L., 2015, Comprehensive Research Methodology, New age International,
1st edition.
5. Mukul Gupta, Deepa Gupta, 2011, Research Methodology, PHI publisher

Page 4 of 25
 DATA SCIENCES AND BIG DATA L T P C
ANALYTICS 4 4

Unit I Introduction to Data Science : Data science process – roles, stages in data science
project – working with data from files – working with relational databases – exploring data –
managing data – cleaning and sampling for modeling and validation – introduction to NoSQL.
(12L)

Unit II – Modeling Methods and Introduction to R : Choosing and evaluating models –

mapping problems to machine learning, evaluating clustering models, validating models – cluster
analysis – K-means algorithm, Naïve Bayes – Memorization Methods – Linear and logistic
regression – unsupervised methods - Reading and getting data into R – ordered and unordered
factors – arrays and matrices – lists and data frames – reading data from files – probability
distributions – statistical models in R - manipulating objects – data distribution. (14L)

Unit III – Introduction to Big Data: Introduction – distributed file system – Big Data and its
importance, Four Vs, Drivers for Big data, Big data analytics, Big data applications. Algorithms
using map reduce, Matrix-Vector Multiplication by Map Reduce.
(12L)
Unit IV – Introduction Hadoop : Big Data – Apache Hadoop & Hadoop EcoSystem – Moving
Data in and out of Hadoop – Understanding inputs and outputs of MapReduce - Data
Serialization.
(10L)
Unit- V Hadoop Architecture : Hadoop Architecture, Hadoop Storage: HDFS, Common
Hadoop Shell commands , Anatomy of File Write and Read., NameNode, Secondary
NameNode, and DataNode, Hadoop MapReduce paradigm, Map and Reduce tasks, Job, Task
trackers - Cluster Setup – SSH & Hadoop Configuration – HDFS Administering –Monitoring &
Maintenance.
(12L)

TOTAL (60L)

REFERENCES

1. Nina Zumel, John Mount, ―Practical Data Science with R‖, Manning Publications, 2014.
2. Jure Leskovec, Anand Rajaraman, Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Mining of Massive Datasets‖,
Cambridge University Press, 2014.
3. Mark Gardener, ―Beginning R - The Statistical Pr ogramming Language‖, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2012. 4. W. N. Venables, D. M. Smith and the R Core Team, ―An Introduction to
R‖, 2013.
4. Tony Ojeda, Sean Patrick Murphy, Benjamin Bengfort, Abhijit Dasgupta, ―Practical Data
Science Cookbook‖, Packt Publishing Ltd., 2014.
5. Nathan Yau, ―Visualize This: The FlowingData Guide to Design, Visualization, and
Statistics‖, Wiley, 2011.
6. Boris lublinsky, Kevin t. Smith, Alexey Yakubovich, ―Professional Hadoop Solutions‖,
Wiley, ISBN: 9788126551071, 2015.
Page 5 of 25
7. http://www.johndcook.com/R_language_for_programmers.html
8. http://bigdatauniversity.com/
9. http://home.ubalt.edu/ntsbarsh/stat-data/topics.htm#rintroduction.
10. Boris lublinsky, Kevin t. Smith, Alexey Yakubovich, ―Professional Hadoop Solutions‖,
Wiley, ISBN: 9788126551071, 2015.
11. Chris Eaton, Dirk deroos et al. , ―Understanding Big data ‖, McGraw Hill, 2012.
12. Tom White, ―HADOOP: The definitive Guide‖, O Reilly 2012.
13. Vignesh Prajapati, ―Big Data Analytics with R and Haoop‖, Packet Publishing 2013.
14. Tom Plunkett, Brian Macdonald et al, ―Oracle Big Data Handbook‖, Oracle Press, 2014.
15. http://www.bigdatauniversity.com/
16. Jy Liebowitz, ―Big Data and Business analytics‖,CRC press, 2013.

Page 6 of 25
 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL AND IMAGE L T P C
PROCESSNG 4 4

UNITI
Signals and signal Processing, characterization & classification of signals, typical Signal
Processing operations, example of typical Signals, typical Signals Processing applications. Time
Domain Representation of Signals & Systems- Discrete Time Signals, Operations on Sequences,
Linear shift-invariant systems, Stability and Causality, Linear constant coefficient difference
equations, Frequency domain representation of discrete-time systems, symmetry properties of the
Fourier transform, Sampling of continuous-time systems. Z-transforms, Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT) & its properties, computation of the DFT of real sequences (13L)

UNIT II
Digital Image Fundamentals: Fundamental steps in Image Processing –Components of Image
Processing System-Image Sampling and Quantization-Basic Relationships between Pixels.
Image Enhancement in Spatial Domain: Basic Gray level Transformations-Histogram
Processing- Enhancements using Arithmetic/logic Operations-Basics of Special Filtering-
Smoothening Filters-Sharpening Filters. (12L)

UNIT III
Image Enhancements in the Frequency domain : Smoothening Filters-Sharpening Filters-
Homomorhic Filters - Image Restoration: Degradation model –Noise Models-Restoration in the
presence of Noise- Wiener Filter. Color Image Processing : Color Fundamentals-Color Models-
Basics of full Color image Processing-Color Transformations. (12L)

UNIT IV
Wavelets and Multi-resolution Processing: Image Pyramids and Sub band Coding – Wavelet
Transform in one dimension- FWT. Image Compressions: Fundamentals – Image Compression
models – Elements of Information Theory – Error – Free Compression – Lossy compression –
Image Compression standards. (11L)

UNIT V
Image segmentation: Detection of discontinuities – Edge linking and Boundary detection –
Thresholding – Region Orientation Segmentation – use of motion in segmentation.
Morphological Image Processing: Basic Binary morphological Operations. Basic grayscale
morphological Operations. Representation and Description: Representation-Boundary
Descriptors. (12L)
TOTAL (60L)

References:
1. Refael C. Gonzalez & Richard E. Woods - Digital Image Processing, Addison Wesley
publication corporation, 2008
2. Image Processing Analysis, and Machine Vision, Milan Sonka,
3. Alan V. Oppenheim & Ronald W. Schafer, ― Digital Signal Processing‖ PHI, 2002

Page 7 of 25
4. Sanjit K. Mitra, ― Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach‖ TMH, Second
Edition, 2003.

MODERN
MODERN
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS L
SYSTEMS T P C
3 3

UNIT-I: Network Evolution – The ISDN – The Basic Rat ISDN customer’s Interface: The
customer’s Installation layer 1, 2, 3. Primary rate ISDN access: background – signaling –
evaluation of PABX signaling – International standards for inter –PABX signaling. (7L)

UNIT-II: Frame mode services: Store and Forward Switching – Data grams and Virtual Circuits
- Flow and Congestion Control – New ISDN Frame mode Services – Frame Format. ISDN
Customer premises Equipment and Applications: High quality speech – Music coding
FACSIMILE – Photographs Video tex – Video – Audio Visual services and Embedded –
Customer premises Equipment. (10L)

UNIT-III: ATM Network concepts and Architecture: ATM’s position in the OSI Reference
Model – B-ISDN protocol reference model – ATM functions and layers – ATM signaling
principles – The ATM layer – ATM switching principles. (8L)

UNIT-IV: Modern Communication: Fundamentals of Information Handling – Information

media as viewed from the Human Interface – Various facets of modern Communication systems
– Composition of Modern Communication systems. (9L)

UNIT-V: Components of modern Communication systems: Home systems – Home system

image – Home systems and their service Trends – Access systems for Home systems. Business
Communications: Basic structure of the Office system in a single office / Plant – Basic Structure
of the Office system connected to WAN’s. The general structure of the office system – Actual
Composition of CAN and WAN. Mobile Communication in the information society- Technical
Background of Mobile Communication various Mobile Communications services – Positioning
of VAN – Classification by service operation mode – Classification of VAN purpose –
Classification of specific Industry service type VAN’s from the added value viewpoint – New
Electronic Media. Construction of Global Infrastructure: Satellite Communications systems – TV
Broadcasting – Approaches to meeting new goals – Possibilities of new Broadcasting forms –
Information service center systems – Automatic Interpretation telephone systems –
Teleconferencing systems. (11L)

TOTAL (45L)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. ―ISDN Explained‖ John M.Griffiths 2nd Edition March 1995
John Willey & sons.
2. ―Introduction to ATM Networking‖ Walter J. Goralski J. McGraw Hill Inc
3. ―Computers and communications‖ Koji Kobayashi the MID Press 1986. (A version of
Page 8 of 25
 c and C).

PERVASIVE, GRID AND CLOUD L T P C

COMPUTING 3 3

UNIT-I:
Pervasive Computing Infrastructure-Applications-Device Technology- Hardware, Human-
Machine Interfaces, Biometrics, And Operating Systems- Device Connectivity-Protocols,
Security , And Device Management-Pervasive Web Application Architecture-Access From PCs
And PDAs- Access Via WAP (7L)

UNIT-II:
Grids and Grid Technologies, Programming models - A Look at a Grid Enabled Server and
Parallelization Techniques – Grid applications- Grid architecture – Grid architecture and
relationship to other Distributed Technologies – computational and data Grids,
semantic grids (8L)

UNIT – III:
Grid Management systems, security, Grid Grid-Enabling software and Grid enabling
network services, Data Grid - Virtualization Services for Data Grids,
Peer-to-Peer Grids - Peer-to-Peer Grid Databases for Web Service
Discovery and application execution. (9L)

UNIT-IV:
Introduction to Cloud Computing- Definition, Characteristics, Components- Cloud provider-
Administering & Monitoring cloud services-benefits and limitations- Deploy application over
cloud- Introduction to Cloud Technologies: SOAP,Webservices, AJAX and mashups,
Virtualization Technology, Multitenant software. (10L)

UNIT-V:
Cloud Relational databases- Cloud file systems- Cloud computing security architecture- Cloud
computing security challenges- Issues in cloud computing- Cloud Middleware- Mobile Cloud
Computing- Inter Cloud issues. (11L)

TOTAL (45L)

TEXT BOOK:
1. Cloud Computing for Dummies by Judith Hurwitz, R.Bloor, M.Kanfman, F.Halper (Wiley
India Edition),2010
2. Enterprise Cloud Computing by GautamShroff, Cambridge,2010.
3. Cloud Security by Ronald Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Wiley-India,2010
4. Jochen Burkhardt, pervasive computing: Technology and Architecture of Mobile Internet
Applications, Addison-Wesley Professional; 3rd edition, 2007

REFERENCES:

Page 9 of 25
1. Fran Bermn, Geoffrey Fox, Anthony Hey J.G., "Grid Computing: Making the Global
Infrastructure a Reality", Wiley, USA, 2003.
2. Joshy Joseph, Craig Fallenstein, "Grid Computing", Pearson Education,
New Delhi, 2004.
3. Ian Foster, Carl Kesselman, "The Grid2: Blueprint for a New Computing
Infrastructure". Morgan Kaufman, New Delhi, 2004.

4. Ahmar Abbas, "Grid Computing: Practical Guide to Technology andApplications", Delmar

Thomson Learning, USA, 2004.

Page 10 of 25
 ENGINEERING RESEARCH METHODOLOGY L T P C
4 4

UNIT I:
Basic research methodology: Objectives and Motivation in Research - Types of Research -
Approaches and Significance of Research - Research Methodology versus Research Methods-
Research Process-Finding a Research Advisor/Guide, What to Look for in a PotentialResearch
Advisor/Guide, How to Find an Advisor/Guide, The Advisor-Advisee Relationship; Finding a
Topic and Beginning Research, Getting Research Ideas, How to be an Active Reader and
Listener, Getting Exposed to Research, Directed Study; Formulating the Research Problem:
Develop the Nucleus of an Idea, Extensive Literature Survey: A Trap to Avoid, Choosing an
Idea, Stay Active - Measure of Good Research - Common Problems for Researchers
(10L)

UNIT II:
Overview of the Theory of Science and history of scientific research - Overview of Research
Methodology for Engineering Research - Science versus Engineering - Distinct perspectives of
goals Research methodology for circuit branches: Formulating the Research Problem -Research
Design - Evolution of Computing Research. (11L)

UNIT III:
Research Methods for Engineering Research - History of ideas in computing – Measurements
based research methods in computer engineering - Measurements based research methods in
Signal and Image Processing, Graphics, Vision and Pattern Recognition - Deductive Methods in
Computing Science. (12L)

UNIT IV:
Deductive Methods in Signal and Image Processing, Graphics, Vision and Pattern Recognition -
Inductive Methods in Computing Science - Inductive Methods in Signal and Image Processing,
Graphics, Vision and Pattern Recognition - Building Models – Simulation. (13L)

UNIT V:
Searching for scientific papers - Writing and presentation of a research paper for a conference or
journal - Review and opposition of engineering/scientific research papers - Writing a good
thesis: Research report writing - Converting your research thesis into a monograph – Research
education, the research society and research policy (14L)
TOTAL (60L)

TEXT AND REFERENCE:

1. Lecture Notes by Prof. Dr. Krishnan Nallaperumal on ―Engineering Research
Methodology - A Computer Science and Engineering and Information Technology
Perspective.

Page 11 of 25
 PATTERN RECOGNITION AND IMAGE ANALYSIS
L T P C
3 3

UNITI Introduction (7L)

Introduction: Machine perception, pattern recognition example, pattern Recognition
systems, the design cycle, learning and adaptation.
Bayesian Decision Theory: Introduction, continuous features – two categories classifications,
minimum error-rate classification-zero–one loss function, classifiers, discriminant functions, and
decision surfaces.

UNIT II 4K Normal density (8 L)

Normal density: Univariate and multivariate density, discriminant functions for the
normal density-different cases, Bayes decision theory – discrete features, compound Bayesian
decision theory and context Maximum likelihood and Bayesian parameter estimation:
Introduction, maximum likelihood estimation, Bayesian estimation, Bayesian parameter
estimation–Gaussian case.

UNIT III UN- supervised (9L)Un-

supervised learning and clustering: Introduction, mixture densities and identifiability, maximum
likelihood estimates, application to normal mixtures, K-means clustering. Date description and
clustering – similarity measures, criteria function for clustering Pattern recognition using discrete
hidden Markov models: Discrete-time Markov process, Extensions to hidden Markov models,
three basic problems of HMMs, types of HMMs.

UNIT IV Continuous hidden Markov models (11L)

Continuous hidden Markov models: Continuous observation densities, multiple mixtures per
state, speech recognition applications. Digital image models, sampling and quantization, basic
relationships between pixels, image geometry. Image enhancement: Back ground, enhancement
by point processing histogram processing, spatial filtering, introduction to image transforms,
image enhancement in frequency domain.

UNIT V Image Segmentation (11L)

Image Segmentation and Edge Detection: Region Operations, Crack Edge Detection, Edge
Following, Gradient operators, Compass and Laplace operators. Threshold detection methods,
optimal thresholding, multispectral thresholding, thresholding in hierarchical data structures;
edge based image segmentation- edge image thresholding, edge relaxation, border tracing, border
detection, image morphology, image security. Total (45 L)

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Richard O. Duda, Peter E. Hart, David G. Stroke, Pattern Classifications, Wiley, 2012

Page 12 of 25
2. Lawrence Rabiner, Biing – Hwang Juang Fundamentals of Speech Recognition, Pearson,
1993.
3. Gonzalez R.C & Woods R.E., Digital Image Processing, Addison Wesley, 2009.

REFERENCES:

1. Jain A.K., Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Prentice Hall of India,2001.

2. Reddy M.Anji, Digital Image Processing, BS Publications.

Page 13 of 25
 CLOUD COMPUTING L T P C
3 3

UNIT I-CLOUD COMPUTING BASICS Cloud computing components- Infrastructure-

services- storage applications-database services – Deployment models of Cloud- Services offered
by Cloud- Benefits and Limitations of Cloud Computing – Issues in Cloud security- Cloud
security services and design principles. (10L)

UNIT II-VIRTUALIZATION FUNDAMENTALS Virtualization – Enabling technology for

cloud computing- Types of Virtualization- Server Virtualization- Desktop Virtualization –
Memory Virtualization – Application and Storage Virtualization- Tools and Products available
for Virtualization. (8L)

UNIT III-SaaS and PaaS Getting started with SaaS- Understanding the multitenant nature of
SaaS solutions- Understanding OpenSaaS Solutions- Understanding Service Oriented
Architecture- PaaS- Benefits and Limitations of PaaS. (7L)

UNIT IV-IaaS AND CLOUD DATA STORAGE Understanding IaaS- Improving performance
through Load balancing- Server Types within IaaS solutions- Utilizing cloud based NAS devices
– Understanding Cloud based data storage- Cloud based backup devices- Cloud based database
solutions- Cloud based block storage. (9L)

UNIT V-CLOUD APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT Client Server Distributed Architecture for

cloud – Traditional apps vs. Cloud apps – Client side programming model: Web clients. Mobile
clients- Server Side Programming Technologies: AJAX, JSON, Web Services (RPC, REST)-
MVC Design Patterns for Cloud Application Development.
(11L)
(Total: 45L)
REFERENCES BOOK:
1. Anthony T .Velte, Toby J.Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, ―Cloud Computing: A Practical
Approach‖, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, Fourth Reprint, 2010.
2. Kris Jamsa, ―Cloud Computing: SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, Virtualization, Business Models,
Mobile, Security and more‖, Jones & Bartlett Learning Company LLC, 2013.
3. Ronald L.Krutz, Russell vines, ―Cloud Security: A Comprehensive Guide to Secure
Cloud Computing‖, Wiley Publishing Inc., 2010.

Page 14 of 25
 COMPUTING FOR DATA ANALYTICS L T P C
3 3

UNIT – I DATA ANALYTICS LIFE CYCLE Introduction to Big data Business Analytics -
State of the practice in analytics role of data scientists - Key roles for successful analytic project
- Main phases of life cycle - Developing core deliverables for stakeholders.
(8L)

UNIT – II STATISTICS Sampling Techniques - Data classification, Tabulation, Frequency and

Graphic representation - Measures of central value - Arithmetic mean, Geometric mean,
Harmonic mean, Mode, Median, Quartiles, Deciles, Percentile - Measures of variation – Range,
IQR, Quartile deviation, Mean deviation, standard deviation, coefficient variance, skewness,
Moments & Kurtosis. (10L)

UNIT – III PROBABILITY AND HYPOTHESIS TESTING Random variable, distributions,

two dimensional R.V, joint probability function, marginal density function. Random vectors -
Some special probability distribution - Binomial, Poison, Geometric, uniform, exponential,
normal, gamma and Erlang. Multivariate normal distribution - Sampling distribution –
Estimation - point, confidence - Test of significance, 1& 2 tailed test, uses of distribution, F-
distribution, χ 2 distribution. (11L)

UNIT – IV PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS Predictive modeling and Analysis - Regression

Analysis, Multicollinearity, Correlation analysis, Rank correlation coefficient, Multiple
correlation, Least square, Curve fitting and good ness of fit. (7L)

UNIT – V TIME SERIES FORECASTING AND DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS Forecasting

Models for Time series : MA, SES, TS with trend, season - Design of Experiments, one way
classification, two way classification, ANOVA, Latin square, Factorial Design.
(9L)
(Total: 45L)
REFERENCES:
1. Chris Eaton, Dirk Deroos, Tom Deutsch et al., ―Understanding Big Data‖, McGrawHIll, 2012.
2. Alberto Cordoba, ―Understanding the Predictive Analytics Lifecycle‖, Wiley, 2014.
3. Eric Siegel, Thomas H. Davenport, ―Predictive Analytics: The Power to Predict Who
Will Click, Buy, Lie, or Die‖, Wiley, 2013.
4. James R Evans, ―Business Analytics – Methods, Models and Decisions‖, Pearson
2013.
5. R. N. Prasad, Seema Acharya, ―Fundamentals of Business Analytics‖, Wiley, 2015.
6. S M Ross, ―Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists‖,
Academic Foundation, 2011.
7. David Hand, Heiki Mannila, Padhria Smyth, ―Principles of Data Mining‖, PHI 2013.
8. Spyros Makridakis, Steven C Wheelwright, Rob J Hyndman, ―Forecasting methods
and applications‖, Wiley 2013(Reprint).
9. David Hand, Heikki Mannila, Padhraic Smyth, ―Principles of Data mining‖, PHI 2013.
10. http://cran.r-project.org/doc/manuals/R-intro.html
11. W.N. Venables, D.M Smith,―An introduction to R‖,

Page 15 of 25
12. R in Nutshell, O Reilly, 2012

BIG DATA ANALYTICS L T P C

3 3

UNIT I – INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA: Introduction – distributed file system – Big Data
and its importance, Four Vs, Drivers for Big data, Big data analytics, Big data applications.
Algorithms using map reduce, Matrix-Vector Multiplication by Map Reduce.
(8L)

UNIT II – INTRODUCTION HADOOP: Big Data – Apache Hadoop & Hadoop EcoSystem –
Moving Data in and out of Hadoop – Understanding inputs and outputs of MapReduce - Data
Serialization. (7L)

UNIT- IIIHADOOP ARCHITECTURE: Hadoop Architecture, Hadoop Storage: HDFS,

Common Hadoop Shell commands , Anatomy of File Write and Read., NameNode, Secondary
NameNode, and DataNode, Hadoop MapReduce paradigm, Map and Reduce tasks, Job, Task
trackers - Cluster Setup – SSH & Hadoop Configuration – HDFS Administering –Monitoring &
Maintenance. (10L)

UNIT-IV HADOOP ECOSYSTEM AND YARN : Hadoop ecosystem components - Schedulers

- Fair and Capacity, Hadoop 2.0 New FeaturesNameNode High Availability, HDFS Federation,
MRv2, YARN, Running MRv1 in YARN. (9L)

UNIT-V HIVE AND HIVEQL, HBASE : Hive Architecture and Installation, Comparison with
Traditional Database, HiveQL - Querying Data - Sorting And Aggregating, Map Reduce Scripts,
Joins & Subqueries, HBase conceptsAdvanced Usage, Schema Design, Advance Indexing - PIG,
Zookeeper - how it helps in monitoring a cluster, HBase uses Zookeeper and how to Build
Applications with Zookeeper. (11L)
(Total: 45L)
REFERENCES:
1. Boris lublinsky, Kevin t. Smith, Alexey Yakubovich, ―Professional Hadoop Solutions‖, Wiley,
ISBN: 9788126551071, 2015.
2. Chris Eaton, Dirk deroos et al., ―Understanding Big data‖, McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Tom White, ―HADOOP: The definitive Guide‖, O Reilly 2012. 6 IT2015 SRM (E&T)
4. Vignesh Prajapati, ―Big Data Analytics with R and Haoop‖, Packet Publishing 2013.
5. Tom Plunkett, Brian Macdonald et al, ―Oracle Big Data Handbook‖, Oracle Press, 2014.
6. http://www.bigdatauniversity.com/
7. Jy Liebowitz, ―Big Data and Business analytics‖,CRC press, 2013.

Page 16 of 25
 FOUNDATIONS OF INFORMATION SECURITY L T P C
4 4
Unit 1: Conceptual foundation of information security
Information as an asset to be protected – the CIA triad – threats to information assets: loss,
copying, altering, denial of service, malware injection, natural threats like fire, flood, etc. –
intangibility of information as an asset – Policies and procedures to protect information assets –
the AAA paradigm (11L)

Unit – 2: Risk management

Introduction to information risk management – threat horizon – vulnerabilities – CVE databases -
attack path – probability of occurrence of risky events – impact of risky events – risk appetite –
risk treatment plans – quantitative and quantitative risk assessment (12L)

Unit – 3: Information classification and valuation

Rationale for asset classification – approaches to classification – Benefits of classification –
Determining the value of information – Data retention – Disposal of information assets – owners
and custodians of information – roles, responsibilities and liabilities of owners and custodians of
information – De-classification of information – reclassification of information
(13L)

Unit-4: Access Controls

Concept of restricted and regulate access to information assets – physical vs. logical access
controls – user identity and access management – provision and escalation of privileges of access
– single sign on – access to networks, databases, applications and operating systems – Access
monitoring and review process – event logging – providing access to data at rest and in transit
(14L)
Unit-5: Perimeter security
Defining physical and logical perimeters of information assets - Integrating physical and logical
security - Physical assets as repositories of information assets – choke points on perimeter –
physical security standards as applied to data centers (10L)

Total (60L)
References:

1. CISSP All-in-One Exam Guide by Shon Harris and Fernando Maymi, 7th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Education, 1 June 2016
2. The CISSP Prep Guide: Gold Edition by Ronald L. Krutz, Russel Dean Vines, Gold
Edition, Wiley Publication, 31 Oct 2002
3. ISO/ IEC 27002: 2005, First Edition

Page 17 of 25
 INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL L T P C
FORENSICS 4 4

Unit-1: Digital Forensic Investigation

Evolution of investigative process of compute crimes – Terminologies and definitions used in
digital forensic investigations – the investigation life cycle – digital evidence under common law
systems – chain of custody – presentation in court (10L)

Unit-2: Understanding Digital Data

Systems of storage of data in digital format – character codes, record structure, file formats and
file signatures – storage of graphic files – recognition of file formats and intern storage
architecture – extraction from forensic artifacts – retrieval of deleted data (11L)

Unit-3: Forensic Principles Applied to Digital Space

Applying common principles of forensic science to digital space – various core principles of
forensic sciences eg., principles propounded by Frye, Coppolino, Marx and Daubert – best
practices in evidence gathering – best operational practices in forensic sciences ported to digital
forensics (12L)

Unit-4: Collecting digital evidence

Identifying evidence of probative value – obstacles in collection of digital evidence – volatility of
digital evidence – live vs dead forensic process – collection, storage, backup and archiving of
evidence – controlling contamination – copying vs. bit mapping of data – analysis of evidence on
site or at remote location – challenges due to commingled data on evidence computers
(14L)

Unit-5: Standards and best Practice Guidelines

Handling the Digital Crime Scene - Digital Evidence Examination Guidelines – ACPO – IOCE –
SWGDE – DFRWS - ISO 27037 (13L)
Total (60L)
References:
1. Computer Forensics, Computer Crime Investigation by John.R.Vacca, 2002, Firewall
Media
2. Computer Intrusion Forensics by George Mohay et al, 2003, Artech House
3. Handbook of Digital Forensics by Eoghan Casey, 2010, Elsevier
4. NIST guidelines on digital forensic processes

Page 18 of 25
 ADVANCED INFORMATION SECURITY L T P C
4 4

Unit-1: Cryptology
Cryptography and cryptanalysis – Asymmetric and Symmetric crypto systems – evolution of
crypto systems – uses and limitations of symmetric and asymmetric crypto systems –
confidentiality using crypto systems – DES, 3-DES, AES and Rijndeal crypto systems – FIPS tests
for crypto strength – work factor – RSA, ECC and Quantum crypto systems – TTP services in
PKI, X.509 protocols for PKI infrastructure – Digital signature and digital envelopes – PKCS
implementation – Digital signature applications - Key management life cycle
(14L)

Unit-2: Application Security

SDLC concepts – Testing for security: types, methods and issues - Program coding and security to
be built into it - Software maintenance and change control processes - Configuration management
- Software Capability Maturity model (CMM) - DBMS concepts & terms: types, with focus on
Relational model - Data dictionary – Interfaces to databases (ODBC, ADOJDBC, XML) -
Database security features - User access rights – Database auditing features and logs.
(13L)

Unit-3: IPSec Communication Protocols

IPSec, - Introduction to IPSec - IPSec building blocks - Security Associations (SAs) - Security
Parameter Index (SPI) - IPSec Architecture - IPSec Protocols - Authentication Header (AH) -
Encapsulation Security Payload (ESP) - Tunneling and Transport Mode - Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) – ISAKMP (12L)

Unit-4: Common authentication protocols

Various authentication protocols - Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) - Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) - Extensible Authentication Protocols - Remote
Access with RADIUS and DIAMETER - TACACS and TACACS Plus - Single Sign on –
Kerberos, SEASAME – Authentication in Wireless networks (11L)

Unit-5: Digital Rights Management

Meaning of Digital Rights Management (DRM) - Need for DRM and preventing illegal file
sharing on the Internet - DRM schemes - Microsoft DRM 2.0, and Content Scrambling System -
Reasons why DRM schemes have been unsuccessful so far - Requirements for a good DRM
scheme - secure hardware, secure software, and an efficient legal system (10L)
Tot
al (60L)

References:

1. CISSP All-in-One Exam Guide by Shon Harris and Fernando Maymi, 7th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Education, 1 June 2016
2. Information Security Management handbook, 6th Edition, Harold F Tipton, Micki Krause,
Auerbach Publications, 5 April 2012

Page 19 of 25
3. The World Beyond Digital Rights Management by Jude Umeh, 1st edition, BCS - The
Chartered Institute for IT, 2009
4. Cryptography and Network Security by Dr. William Stallings, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education Publication, 01 Jan 2013
5. The CISSP Prep Guide: Gold Edition by Ronald L. Krutz, Russel Dean Vines, Gold
Edition, Wiley Publication, 31 Oct 2002
6. Certified Information Systems Security Professional, Study Guide by Ed Tittel, Mike
Chapple, James Michael Stewart, 6th Edition, Sybex Publication, 06 July 2012

Page 20 of 25
 COMPUTING TECHNIQUES FOR CANCER L T P C
ANALYTICS 3 3

Unit - I Introduction to Genetics

Basic genetics – Cell growth and division – Structure and composition of Genes Chromosomes
– DNA – Mutations – Types of mutation. (7L)
Unit – II Introduction to Breast Cancer Biology
Breast Cancer – Oncogenes – Tumor Suppressor Genes – Apoptosis – Angiogenesis – Metastasis
– Inherited Gene Mutation – BRCA1, BRCA2 genes – Risk factors and causes of Breast Cancer
– Prevention and Detection –Diagnosis and staging – Treatment. (8L)
Unit – III Data Mining
Data Mining – History – Definitions – Data Mining Functionalities – Classifications of Data
Mining Systems – Major Issues in Data Mining – Data warehouse and OLAP Technology –
Multidimensional Data Model – Data warehouse Architecture – Data Warehouse
Implementation. (9L)
Unit – IV Data MiningTechniques
Data Processing – Data Cleaning – Data Integration and Transformation – Data Reduction –
Discretization and concept of Hierarchy Generation – Concept Description – characterization
and comparison. Association Rule Mining – Mining Single Dimension – Multilevel Association
Rules – Mining for correlation Analysis – Classification and Prediction (10L)
Unit – V Machine Learning and Analytical Techniques
Models based on Summarization: Bayes Theorem - Chi squared Statistics Regression - Decision
Tree - Neural Networks - Multilayer perceptron (MLP) - Radial basis functions -Genetic
Algorithms - Cluster Analysis – Outlier - Cluster Vs Classification - Clustering Issues - Impact
of Outliers on clustering- Classification and regression trees (CART) Clustering problems -
Clustering Approaches. (11L)
TOTAL (45L)
References:
1.QuickFACTS: Breast CANCER What You Need to Know—NOW From the Experts at
the American Cancer Society
2. Hejmadi.M.,Introduction to Cancer Biology, Momna Hejmadi & Ventus Publishing,2009.
3.http://learn.genetics.utah.edu/content/basics/
Page 21 of 25
4.https://www.cancer.org/cancer/cancer-basics.html
5. Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, Data Mining, Addison Wesley 1996.
6. Daniel T. Larose (2006): Data Mining Methods and Models, John Wiley & Sons.
7. Molecular Biology of Cancer Jesse D. Martinez, Michele Taylor Parker, Kimberly E. Fultz
Natalia A. Ignatenko, Eugene W. Gerner,John Wiley & Sons, Inc,2003.

Page 22 of 25
 REMOTE SENSING AND IMAGE L T P C
INTERPRETATION 3 3

UNIT I
Introduction – Origin – Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual
Perception – Image Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Relationships
between pixels - color models. (8L)

UNIT II
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of Spatial
Filtering–Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering – Frequency Domain: Introduction to
Fourier Transform – Smoothing and Sharpening frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth
and Gaussian filters (10L)

Unit III
Electromagnetic energy resources, electromagnetic radiation (EMR) spectrum, EMR energy –
frequency – wavelength relationship, Boltzman law, Wien Law, (7L)

UnitIV :Characteristics of aerial photographs and satellite imagery – false colour composites,
photo-elemental characters, reflectance and emittance- Geosynchronous and sunsynchronous
orbits, location of a satellite in space, world referencing system.
(10L)
Unit V Remote sensing plate forms - Characteristics of different remote sensing satellites and
sensors, resolution, analysis and interpretations of aerial photographs and satellites imagery.
Satellite remote sensing digital data products, data format and storage, preprocessing –
atmospheric, geometric and radiometric correction, image rectification and registration.
(10L)

TOTAL (45L)
Text Book :
1. P.K.Guha,Remote sensing for Beginner – EWP, New Delhi,2003.

Reference Book:

1. Sabino.F.F. Remote sensing principles and interpretation, Freeman,San Francisco, 1978

Page 23 of 25
 INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE L T P C
ANTENNA AND RADAR SIGNAL 3 3
PROCESSING

UNIT I Fundamentals Of Radiation Systems (9L)

Definition of Antenna Parameters: Gain, Directivity, Effective aperture, Radiation Resistance,
Radiation Pattern, Band width, Beam width, Input impedance, Efficiency, Antenna noise
temperature, Polarization.
LF Antenna: Monopole – Half wave – Folded dipole - Reciprocity theorem.

UNIT II Advanced Radiation System (9L)

Antenna Array: Broad side – End fire – Binomial – Pattern Multiplication.
Radiating Elements: Horn – Reflector – Slot – Yagi Uda – Log Periodic – Microstrip –
Radiation pattern of HF antennas.

UNIT III Mic And Microwave Network Theory (9L)

Review of Low Frequency Parameters: Impedance – Admittance – Hybrid – ABCD.
Microwave Network Theory: Different types of interconnection of two port networks – High
frequency parameters – formulation of S parameters – Properties of S parameters – Reciprocal –
lossless networks – Mismatched load – Transmission Matrix – Introduction to MIC.

UNIT IV Microwave Devices And Measurements (9L)

Microwave Devices: Waveguide – Bend – Twist – Corners – Terminations – Attenuators –
Phase shifters – Tee junction – Isolator – Circulator – Coupler – formulation with S matrix.
Measurements: VSWR, Power, Impedance, Frequency, Attenuation, Q factor.

UNIT V Radar Signal Processing (9L)

Introduction – Basic Radar – Function of Radar – Radar Frequencies – Noise – Noise figure –
Noise factor – Detection of signals in noise – Signal to Noise ratio – Probabilities of Detection
and False Alarm – Radar Cross section – System losses – Doppler Radar – Pulse Doppler Radar
– MTI Radar – Digital MTI Processing – AMTI – Limitations to MTI Performance – ADT –
Applications of Radar.
TOTAL: (45 L)
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D Kraus, ―Antennas for all Applications‖, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2005.
2. Constantine A Balanis, ―Antenna Theory Analysis and Design‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd.,
1982.
3. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, ―Microwave Engineering‖, TMH, 2005.
4. Merrill I Skolnik, ―Introduction to Radar Systems‖, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. J C Toomay, ―Principles of Radar‖, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2004.
2. Robert E Collin, ―Foundations for Microwave Engineering‖, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2005.
3. Robert E Collin, ―Antennas and Radio wave Propagation‖, TMH, 1985

Page 24 of 25
MINI PROJECT L T P C

Page 25 of 25